SIEMENS M60 SEPAC Manual

SEPAC
Local Controller Software

Reference Manual
PIM-177 - V3.35
© Siemens 2009
1
User Manual
SEPAC
PIM177 – SEPAC User Manual v3.35

Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
A Siemens Industry Business, Mobility Division
Traffic Solutions
© Siemens 2009
Revised June 2009
SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

Copyright
This manual has been prepared for use by Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc. personnel, its Licensees, and its Customers.
The information contained herein is the property of Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc., (“SE&A”), and may not be copied or
reproduced in whole or in part, without prior written approval of SE&A.
SE&A reserves the right to make changes, without notice, in the specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be
responsible for any damages, direct or consequential, caused by reliance on the material presented.
Any information and/or application example, including circuitry and/or wiring diagrams, programming, operation and/or use
shown and/or described in this manual is intended solely to illustrate the operation principles of the product. The presentation
of an example of use and/or described herein does not guarantee nor imply such example will perform in a particular
environment when converted to practice. SE&A does not assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples
illustrated and/or described herein. No patent liability is assumed by SE&A with respect to use of any applications, information,
circuitry, diagram, equipment, or programs shown and/or described herein.
©Copyright 2005 -2009 by Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Copyright 2009 by Siemens

SIEMENS Energy & Automation, Inc.
A Siemens Industry Business, Mobility Division
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Disclaimer
This equipment contains hazardous voltages. Death, serious personal injury, or property damage can result if safety
instructions are not followed. Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment after becoming thoroughly
familiar with all warnings, safety notices, and maintenance procedures contained herein. The successful and safe operation of
this equipment is dependent upon proper handling, installation, operation and maintenance.
Qualified Person
For the purpose of this manual and product labels, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction
and operation of the equipment, and the hazards involved. In addition, he or she has the following qualifications:
 Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with
established safety practices.
 Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as rubber gloves, hard hat, safety glasses and face
shields, flash clothing, etc., in accordance with established safety practices.
 Is trained in rendering first aid.
Danger
For the purpose of this manual and product labels, danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
Warning
For the purpose of this manual and product labels, warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
FOR THE PURPOSE OF THIS MANUAL AND PRODUCT LABELS, CAUTION INDICATES A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION
WHICH, IF NOT AVOIDED, MAY RESULT IN MINOR OR MODERATE INJURY.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Modes Of Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.2 Phase Timings & Functions................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.3 Unit Timings & Functions ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.4 Coordination Timings & Functions ..................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.5 Time Base Timings & Functions.......................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.6 Preemption Timings & Functions ....................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.7 Other Timings & Functions................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.8 Front Panel Indications ....................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 STANDARD FEATURES ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Unit To Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 Unit To Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 3
1.2.4 Unit To Personal Computer................................................................................................................................. 3
1.3 PROGRAMMING............................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 Entry ................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2 Display ................................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.3.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.4 Backup ................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2 FRONT PANEL..................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.1 Front Panel Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.2 Front Panel Entry ................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.1.3 Front Panel Timeout ........................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.4 Main Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 ACTIVE STATUS............................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.1 Ring Timers......................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2.2 Coordination Timers ........................................................................................................................................... 9
2.2.2.1 Coord Adaptive Split Status ........................................................................................................................... 10
2.2.2.2 Coord Permissive Status ................................................................................................................................. 10
2.2.3 Preempt Timers .................................................................................................................................................. 10
2.2.4 Time Base - Current ............................................................................................................................................ 11
2.2.5 Communication Status ....................................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.6 Detectors ............................................................................................................................................................. 12
2.2.7 Intersection......................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.2.8 Port 1 / ITS Frames .............................................................................................................................................. 12
2.2.8.1 Port 1 Frames.................................................................................................................................................. 12
2.2.8.2 ITS Frames ...................................................................................................................................................... 13
2.2.8.2.1 Input Assy Detectors................................................................................................................................. 13
2.2.8.2.2 CMU Load Sw Drivers Msg 61/67 Out........................................................................................................ 14

Page ii TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.2.8.2.3 CMU Long Status Msg 189 In.................................................................................................................... 15

2.2.8.2.4 CMU Config: Datakey Msg 193 In ............................................................................................................. 15
2.2.8.2.5 CMU Short Status Msg 195 In ................................................................................................................... 15
2.2.9 Input / Output ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
2.2.9.1 FIO & TS2 (NEMA) ........................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.9.1.1 ABC Input Status....................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.9.1.2 D Input Status........................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.9.1.3 ABC Output Status .................................................................................................................................... 16
2.2.9.1.4 D Output Status ........................................................................................................................................ 17
2.2.9.2 ITS & CBD Options .......................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.9.1.1 ABC Input Status....................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.9.1.2 D Input Status........................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.9.1.3 ABC Output Status .................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.9.1.4 D Output Status ........................................................................................................................................ 17
2.2.10 MMU Monitoring............................................................................................................................................... 18
2.3 UTILITIES ........................................................................................................................................................................ 18
2.3.1 Utilities Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 18
2.3.2 Enable Access ...................................................................................................................................................... 18
2.3.3 Disable Access ..................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.4 Change Access..................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.5 Print Out Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.6 Unit Transfer Menu............................................................................................................................................. 19
2.3.7 Load Default........................................................................................................................................................ 21
2.3.7.1 Load Default - Software Option ....................................................................................................................... 21
2.3.7.2 Datakey Load/Store ......................................................................................................................................... 21
2.3.8 Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................................................... 22
2.3.9 Configure Ports................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.3.9.1 Port 2 Print...................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.3.9.2 Port 2 Comm ................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.3.9.3 Port 3 Comm ................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.3.9.4 IP Addressing.................................................................................................................................................. 25
2.3.9.5 Network Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 25
2.3.9.6 Scoot Communications ................................................................................................................................... 26
2.3.9.7 Port 1 Comm ................................................................................................................................................... 26
2.3.9.8 GPS Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 26
2.3.9.9 Setting Time via GPS....................................................................................................................................... 26
2.3.9.10 Display GPS Data Stream:.............................................................................................................................. 27
2.3.10 Boot Manager .................................................................................................................................................... 27
2.3.10.1 Concurrent MARC & EPAC............................................................................................................................. 28
2.4 PHASE DATA.................................................................................................................................................................... 28
2.4.1 Phase Menu......................................................................................................................................................... 28

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iii
2.4.2 Vehicle Times...................................................................................................................................................... 28

2.4.3 Density Times ..................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.4.4 Pedestrian Times ................................................................................................................................................ 29
2.4.5 Initialization & Non-Actuated Response ............................................................................................................. 31
2.4.6 Vehicle & Pedestrian Recalls ............................................................................................................................... 31
2.4.7 Miscellaneous Controls ....................................................................................................................................... 32
2.4.8 Special Sequence................................................................................................................................................. 33
2.4.9 Special Detector .................................................................................................................................................. 33
2.4.9.1 Red Protect – Detector Mode ........................................................................................................................... 35
2.4.9.1.1 Red Protect Programming ........................................................................................................................ 35
2.4.9.2 Advance Warning Signals ............................................................................................................................... 36
2.4.9.2.1 Advance Warning Programming .............................................................................................................. 36
2.4.9.3 International Sequence................................................................................................................................... 37
2.4.9.3.1 Internation Sequence Programming ........................................................................................................ 37
2.4.9.4 Pedestrian Detectors ....................................................................................................................................... 37
2.4.10 Phase + Bank Copy ............................................................................................................................................ 37
2.4.11 Misc Ped+Veh Options ...................................................................................................................................... 38
2.5 UNIT DATA ...................................................................................................................................................................... 38
2.5.1 Unit Menu ........................................................................................................................................................... 38
2.5.2 Startup & Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................................................... 39
2.5.3 Remote Flash....................................................................................................................................................... 39
2.5.4 Overlap Standard ................................................................................................................................................ 40
2.5.5 Overlap Special ................................................................................................................................................... 41
2.5.6 Ring Structures ................................................................................................................................................... 42
2.5.7 Alternate Sequences............................................................................................................................................ 43
2.5.8 Port 1 / ITS Data ................................................................................................................................................... 43
2.5.8.1 TS 2 Port 1 Configuration Data ....................................................................................................................... 43
2.5.8.2 ITS Configuration Data ................................................................................................................................... 44
2.5.9 I/O Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................................................ 44
2.5.10 Signal Driver Output ......................................................................................................................................... 47
2.5.11 224E Status Display........................................................................................................................................... 47
2.5.12 International Sequence ..................................................................................................................................... 48
2.5.12.1 International Sequence Programming ......................................................................................................... 48
2.5.13 Advance Warning Signals ................................................................................................................................. 48
2.5.13.1 Advance Warning Programming................................................................................................................... 49
2.6 COORDINATION DATA..................................................................................................................................................... 49
2.6 Coordination Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 49
2.6.2 Coordination Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 51
2.6.3 Coordination Manual Control ............................................................................................................................. 51
2.6.4 Coordination Dial/Split Data................................................................................................................................ 52
2.6.4.1 Offset + Sequence Data ................................................................................................................................... 52

Page iv TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.6.4.2 Phase Time + Mode Data ................................................................................................................................. 53

2.6.5 Coordination Copy .............................................................................................................................................. 53
2.6.6 Coordination Clear Memory................................................................................................................................ 54
2.7 TIME BASE DATA ............................................................................................................................................................. 54
2.7.1 Time Base Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 54
2.7.2 Time Base - Current ............................................................................................................................................ 54
2.7.3 Time Base Set Time/Date ..................................................................................................................................... 54
2.7.4 Traffic Events ...................................................................................................................................................... 55
2.7.5 Auxiliary Events .................................................................................................................................................. 55
2.7.6 Time Of Year Events ............................................................................................................................................ 56
2.7.7 Equate/Transfer................................................................................................................................................... 56
2.7.8 Clear TBC Memory .............................................................................................................................................. 57
2.7.9 TBC Dimming...................................................................................................................................................... 57
2.7.10 TBC Phase Function Mapping ........................................................................................................................... 57
2.7.11 TBC Special Function Mapping ......................................................................................................................... 59
2.8 PREEMPT DATA ............................................................................................................................................................... 60
2.8.1 Preempt Menu .................................................................................................................................................... 60
2.8.2 All Preempt Data ................................................................................................................................................. 61
2.8.3 Preempt 1 Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 61
2.8.3.1 Preempt 1 Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................................ 61
2.8.3.2 Preempt 1 Interval Times................................................................................................................................ 62
2.8.3.3 Preempt 1 Vehicle Status ................................................................................................................................ 62
2.8.3.4 Preempt 1 Pedestrian Status ........................................................................................................................... 63
2.8.3.5 Preempt 1 Overlap Status ............................................................................................................................... 63
2.8.3.6 Low Priority 1.................................................................................................................................................. 63
2.8.4 Load Preempt Default ......................................................................................................................................... 64
2.8.5 Important Considerations................................................................................................................................... 64
2.9 SYSTEM DATA.................................................................................................................................................................. 64
2.9.1 System Menu....................................................................................................................................................... 65
2.9.2 Communications Menu....................................................................................................................................... 65
2.9.2.1 Communications Address ............................................................................................................................... 65
2.9.2.2 Communications Backup ................................................................................................................................ 65
2.9.2.3 Communications Status.................................................................................................................................. 65
2.9.2.4 Communications Report ................................................................................................................................. 66
2.9.3 Traffic Responsive Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 66
2.9.3.1 System Detector Assignment .......................................................................................................................... 66
2.9.3.2 Volume + Occupancy Data .............................................................................................................................. 66
2.9.3.3 Report Parameters .......................................................................................................................................... 67
2.9.3.4 System Detector Report................................................................................................................................... 67
2.9.3.5 Queue Assignment.......................................................................................................................................... 67
2.9.3.6 Queue Select ................................................................................................................................................... 67

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page v
2.9.4 Detector Diagnostics Menu ................................................................................................................................. 68

2.9.4.1 Diagnostics Values .......................................................................................................................................... 68
2.9.4.2 Detector Status................................................................................................................................................ 68
2.9.4.3 Detector Report ............................................................................................................................................... 68
2.9.5 Local Alarms Report ............................................................................................................................................ 69
2.9.6 Local MOE Report ................................................................................................................................................ 71
2.9.7 Speed Data Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 71
2.9.7.1 Speed Trap Data .............................................................................................................................................. 72
2.9.7.2 Dial 1 Speed Trap Ranges................................................................................................................................ 72
2.9.7.3 Speed Trap Report........................................................................................................................................... 72
2.10 REPORTS ....................................................................................................................................................................... 72
2.10.1 Report Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 72
2.10.2 Communication Fault Report............................................................................................................................ 73
2.10.3 System Detector Report..................................................................................................................................... 73
2.10.4 Detector Fail Report .......................................................................................................................................... 73
2.10.5 Local Alarm Report............................................................................................................................................ 73
2.10.6 Local MOE Report .............................................................................................................................................. 73
2.10.7 Speed Trap Report............................................................................................................................................. 73
2.10.8 Cycle MOE Report.............................................................................................................................................. 73
2.10.9 MMU Faults Report............................................................................................................................................ 74
2.10.10 System Message .............................................................................................................................................. 74
2.11 COPYRIGHT ................................................................................................................................................................... 74
3 FUNCTION.......................................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.1.1 Pin Connections .................................................................................................................................................. 77
3.2 PER PHASE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.2.1 Time Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.2.2 Phase Intervals.................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.2.3 Phase Selection Points ........................................................................................................................................ 80
3.2.4 Provision For Storing A Demand......................................................................................................................... 80
3.2.5 Placement Of Vehicle Recall ................................................................................................................................ 80
3.2.6 Placement Of Pedest Recall ................................................................................................................................. 80
3.2.7 Placement Of Call At Phase Termination ............................................................................................................ 81
3.2.8 Conditional Service ............................................................................................................................................. 81
3.2.9 Automatic Pedest Clearance................................................................................................................................ 81
3.2.10 Flashing Walk.................................................................................................................................................... 81
3.2.11 Actuated Rest-In-Walk....................................................................................................................................... 81
3.2.12 Walk Offset (Advance or Delay)......................................................................................................................... 81
3.2.13 Inputs Per Phase ............................................................................................................................................... 81
3.2.14 Outputs Per Phase............................................................................................................................................. 82
3.3 PER RING ......................................................................................................................................................................... 82

Page vi TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3.1 Inputs Per Ring ................................................................................................................................................... 82

3.3.2 Outputs Per Ring................................................................................................................................................. 83
3.4 PER UNIT ......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
3.4.1 Initialization ....................................................................................................................................................... 84
3.4.2 Simultaneous Gap Out ........................................................................................................................................ 84
3.4.3 Dual Entry ........................................................................................................................................................... 84
3.4.4 Overlaps .............................................................................................................................................................. 84
3.4.4.1 Pedestrian Overlaps ........................................................................................................................................ 84
3.4.4.2 Pedestrian Concurrent / Exclusive .................................................................................................................. 85
3.4.6 Inputs Per Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 85
3.4.7 Outputs Per Unit ................................................................................................................................................. 87
3.4.8 Red Revert ........................................................................................................................................................... 88
3.5 PRIORITY OF INPUT FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................................... 88
3.6 INDICATIONS .................................................................................................................................................................. 88
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS ............................................................................................................................................................ 89
3.7.1 Flash ................................................................................................................................................................... 89
3.7.1.1 Start-Up Flash ................................................................................................................................................. 89
3.7.1.2 Automatic Flash .............................................................................................................................................. 90
3.7.2 Dimming ............................................................................................................................................................. 90
3.8 COORDINATION .............................................................................................................................................................. 91
3.8.1 Programs ............................................................................................................................................................ 91
3.8.2 Offsets ................................................................................................................................................................. 91
3.8.3 Absolute Sync...................................................................................................................................................... 92
3.8.4 Ring Lag .............................................................................................................................................................. 93
3.8.5 Transition Cycles................................................................................................................................................. 93
3.8.6 Phase Times ........................................................................................................................................................ 93
3.8.6.1 Adaptive Split.................................................................................................................................................. 95
3.8.7 Phase Modes ....................................................................................................................................................... 95
3.8.7.1 Coord Phase(S)................................................................................................................................................ 95
3.8.7.2 Dual Coord Phase(S) ....................................................................................................................................... 95
3.8.7.3 Non-Coordinated Phase(S).............................................................................................................................. 95
3.8.9 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 96
3.8.10 Control Strategies ............................................................................................................................................. 96
3.8.10.1 Yield Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 96
3.8.10.2 Permissive Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 97
3.8.10.3 Permissive Yield Mode .................................................................................................................................. 98
3.8.10.4 Permissive Omit Mode .................................................................................................................................. 99
3.8.10.5 Sequential Omit Mode .................................................................................................................................. 99
3.8.10.6 Full Actuated Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 100

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page vii
3.8.11 Maximum Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 100

3.8.12 Force Mode........................................................................................................................................................ 100
3.8.13 Sync Monitor ..................................................................................................................................................... 100
3.8.14 Manual Control ................................................................................................................................................. 100
3.8.15 Free ................................................................................................................................................................... 100
3.8.16 Command Priority ............................................................................................................................................ 101
3.8.17 External Coordination Interface........................................................................................................................ 101
3.8.18 Coordination Indications .................................................................................................................................. 102
3.9 TIME BASE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 102
3.9.1 Operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 102
3.9.2 Clock Calendar .................................................................................................................................................... 102
3.9.3 Memory & Clock Backup ..................................................................................................................................... 102
3.9.4 Daylight Savings Time ........................................................................................................................................ 102
3.9.5 Program Day ....................................................................................................................................................... 103
3.9.6 Event Capacity..................................................................................................................................................... 103
3.9.7 Traffic Programs ................................................................................................................................................. 103
3.9.8 Data Entry, Display, And Removal ....................................................................................................................... 103
3.9.9 Auxiliary Outputs................................................................................................................................................ 103
3.9.10 TBC Alternate Week........................................................................................................................................... 103
3.9.11 TBC Dimming.................................................................................................................................................... 104
3.9.12 TBC Special Function Mapping ......................................................................................................................... 104
3.9.13 External TBC Interface ...................................................................................................................................... 104
3.9.14 TBC Indications ................................................................................................................................................. 104
3.10 PREEMPTION ................................................................................................................................................................. 104
3.10.1 Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
3.10.2 Preempt Routines.............................................................................................................................................. 105
3.10.2.1 Input Priority ................................................................................................................................................ 105
3.10.2.2 Output Modification...................................................................................................................................... 106
3.10.2.3 Timing .......................................................................................................................................................... 106
3.10.2.4 Delay, Extend, & Duration............................................................................................................................. 107
3.10.2.5 Greens & Return............................................................................................................................................ 107
3.10.2.6 Transition ..................................................................................................................................................... 107
3.10.2.7 Cycle ............................................................................................................................................................. 109
3.10.3 Low Priority Routines........................................................................................................................................ 109
3.10.3.1 Input Priorities.............................................................................................................................................. 109
3.10.3.2 Timing .......................................................................................................................................................... 109
3.10.3.3 Delay, Extend, & Duration............................................................................................................................. 110
3.10.3.4 Transition ..................................................................................................................................................... 110
3.10.3.5 Dwell & Return .............................................................................................................................................. 110
3.10.4 Memory............................................................................................................................................................. 110
3.10.5 External Preempt Interface ............................................................................................................................... 110

Page viii TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.10.6 Preempt Indications.......................................................................................................................................... 111

3.11 SYSTEM INTERFACE ...................................................................................................................................................... 111
3.11.1 System Control.................................................................................................................................................. 111
3.11.2 Backup (Communications)................................................................................................................................ 111
3.11.3 Local Alarms Report .......................................................................................................................................... 111
3.11.3.1 Eagle M50 & 2070 ATC Alarms...................................................................................................................... 114
3.11.4 MOE Report ....................................................................................................................................................... 116
3.11.5 Cycle MOE Report.............................................................................................................................................. 116
3.11.6 Communications............................................................................................................................................... 116
3.11.6.1 Modem (Internal).......................................................................................................................................... 116
3.11.6.2 SOLO Modem (External) ............................................................................................................................... 117
3.11.6.3 Messages....................................................................................................................................................... 117
3.11.6.4 Auxiliary Devices........................................................................................................................................... 119
3.11.7 System Detectors............................................................................................................................................... 119
3.11.7.1 Queue Selection ............................................................................................................................................ 120
3.11.8 Volume Count Report........................................................................................................................................ 120
3.11.9 Speed Traps....................................................................................................................................................... 120
3.11.10 External System Interface ............................................................................................................................... 120
3.11.11 System Indications.......................................................................................................................................... 121
4 DIAGNOSTICS..................................................................................................................................................................... 123
4.1 AUTOMATIC DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................................................................. 123
4.1.1 On Power Up ....................................................................................................................................................... 123
4.1.1.1 Real Time Clock IC .......................................................................................................................................... 123
4.1.1.2 Memory........................................................................................................................................................... 123
4.1.1.3 Invalid Configuration Data ............................................................................................................................. 124
4.1.2 During Normal Operation ................................................................................................................................... 124
4.1.2.1 Memory........................................................................................................................................................... 124
4.1.2.2 Main Processor................................................................................................................................................ 125
4.1.2.3 SDLC Processor ............................................................................................................................................... 125
4.1.2.4 Processor Monitor........................................................................................................................................... 125
4.1.2.5 Port 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 125
4.1.2.6 Cycling Diagnostics......................................................................................................................................... 127
4.1.2.7 Detector Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................................... 127
4.2 OPERATOR INITIATED DIAGNOSTICS.............................................................................................................................. 129
4.2.1 Memory............................................................................................................................................................... 129
4.2.2 Inputs.................................................................................................................................................................. 129
4.2.3 Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 129
4.2.4 Integral Display................................................................................................................................................... 129
4.2.5 Integral Keypad................................................................................................................................................... 129
4.2.6 User Initiated Diagnostics Procedure.................................................................................................................. 129
4.3 OTHER DIAGNOSTICS...................................................................................................................................................... 130

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ix
4.3.1 Power Failure ...................................................................................................................................................... 130

4.4 DATA ENTRY ERROR MESSAGES ...................................................................................................................................... 130
5 NCHRP 3-54 PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE.............................................................................................................................. 131
5.1 NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive Overview................................................................................................................... 131
5.2 NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive Sequence: ................................................................................................................. 132
5.3 Enable NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive Sequence....................................................................................................... 132
5.4 Define Protected & Permissive Phases ............................................................................................................................ 132
5.5 Preemption ..................................................................................................................................................................... 133
5.6 Track Intervals ................................................................................................................................................................ 133
6 IN CYCLE FLASHING SIGNALS............................................................................................................................................ 135
6.1 FLASHING RED ................................................................................................................................................................ 135
6.2 FAST FLASHING GREEN................................................................................................................................................... 135
7 ALTERNATE PASSAGE & MAXIMUM ................................................................................................................................... 137
7.1 OPERATION ..................................................................................................................................................................... 137
7.2 IMPLEMENTATION: ......................................................................................................................................................... 137
8 ADAPTIVE MAXIMUM ......................................................................................................................................................... 139
8.1 OPERATION: .................................................................................................................................................................... 139
8.2 IMPLEMENTATION: ......................................................................................................................................................... 139
8.3 APPLICATION REFERENCE............................................................................................................................................... 140
9 ADAPTIVE PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE ................................................................................................................................. 141
9.1 OPERATION ..................................................................................................................................................................... 141
9.2 PROGRAMMING............................................................................................................................................................... 141
10 LANE USAGE SIGN CONTROL ........................................................................................................................................... 143
10.1 IMPLEMENTATION: ....................................................................................................................................................... 145
11 TEXAS DIAMOND INTERSECTION CONTROL .................................................................................................................... 147
11.1 FOUR PHASE DIAMOND MODE...................................................................................................................................... 147
11.1.1 Sequence Change:............................................................................................................................................. 147
11.1.2 Detector Logic: .................................................................................................................................................. 148
11.1.3 Ring Structure:.................................................................................................................................................. 149
11.1.4 Sequence Control Logic: ................................................................................................................................... 149
11.2 THREE PHASE DIAMOND MODE .................................................................................................................................... 151
11.2.1 Sequence Change:............................................................................................................................................. 151
11.2.2 Detector Logic: .................................................................................................................................................. 151
11.2.3 Ring Structure:.................................................................................................................................................. 152
11.3 SEPARATE INTERSECTIONS MODE ................................................................................................................................ 154
11.3.1 Sequence Change:............................................................................................................................................. 154
11.3.2 Detector Logic: .................................................................................................................................................. 154
11.3.3 Ring Structure:.................................................................................................................................................. 155
11.4 NEMA MODE.................................................................................................................................................................. 155

Page x TABLE OF CONTENTS
11.4.1 Sequence Change:............................................................................................................................................. 156

11.4.2 Detector Logic: .................................................................................................................................................. 156
11.4.3 Ring Structure:.................................................................................................................................................. 156
11.5 SPECIAL OUTPUT OPERATION ...................................................................................................................................... 157
11.6 SPECIAL INPUT OPERATION.......................................................................................................................................... 157
11.7 PROGRAMMING............................................................................................................................................................. 158
11.7.1 Diamond Operation Rules ................................................................................................................................. 158
11.7.1.1 Basic Traffic................................................................................................................................................... 158
11.7.1.2 Coordination................................................................................................................................................. 158
11.7.1.2.1 Four Phase Diamond Mode..................................................................................................................... 159
11.7.1.2.2 Three Phase Diamond Mode ................................................................................................................... 159
11.8 TIME BASE ..................................................................................................................................................................... 160
11.9 DEFAULT PROGRAM DATA ............................................................................................................................................ 161
12 SCOOT INTERFACE ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
12.1 GENERAL: ...................................................................................................................................................................... 179
12.2 DEFINITIONS: ................................................................................................................................................................ 179
12.3 SCOOT over IP ............................................................................................................................................................... 179
12.4 PROTOCOL: ................................................................................................................................................................... 179
12.4.1 SCOOT STD (Standard) Message Types ............................................................................................................. 179
12.4.1.1 SCOOT STD Command Message.................................................................................................................... 179
12.4.1.2.1 STD Control Byte 1.................................................................................................................................. 180
12.4.1.1.2 STD Control Byte 2.................................................................................................................................. 181
12.4.1.1.3 STD Control Byte 3.................................................................................................................................. 181
12.4.1.2 SCOOT STD Reply Message: .......................................................................................................................... 181
12.4.1.2.1 STD Status Byte 1 Stage Green Bits ......................................................................................................... 182
12.4.1.2.2 STD Status Byte 2.................................................................................................................................... 182
12.4.1.2.3 STD Status Byte 3.................................................................................................................................... 182
12.4.1.2.4 STD Status Byte 4.................................................................................................................................... 182
STD Scoot Detector 01-02 ........................................................................................................................................ 183
12.4.1.2.6 STD Scoot Detector 03-n ......................................................................................................................... 183
12.4.2 SCOOT ACA (Extended) Message Type .............................................................................................................. 183
12.4.2.1 SCOOT ACA Command Message ................................................................................................................... 183
12.4.2.1.1 ACA Control Byte 1 ................................................................................................................................. 183
12.3.2.1.2 ACA Control Byte 2 ................................................................................................................................. 183
12.4.2.1.3 ACA Control Byte 3 ................................................................................................................................. 183
12.4.2.2 SCOOT ACA Reply Message ........................................................................................................................... 184
12.4.2.2.1 ACA Status Byte 1 ................................................................................................................................... 184
12.4.2.2.2 ACA Status Byte 2 ................................................................................................................................... 184
12.4.2.2.3 ACA Status Byte 3 ................................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.4 ACA Status Byte 4 ................................................................................................................................... 185

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page xi
12.4.2.2.5 ACA Status Byte 5 ................................................................................................................................... 185

12.4.2.2.6 ACA Status Byte 6 ................................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.7 ACA Status Byte 7 ................................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.8 ACA Status Byte 8 ................................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.9 ACA Status Byte 9 ................................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.10 ACA Status Byte 10 ............................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.11 ACA Status Byte 11 ............................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.12 ACA Status Byte 12 ............................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.13 ACA Scoot Detector 01-02 ..................................................................................................................... 185
12.4.2.2.14 ACA Scoot Detector 03-n ....................................................................................................................... 185
12.5 SCOOT STATUS SCREEN ................................................................................................................................................ 186
12.6 SCOOT CONFIGURATION MESSAGE: ............................................................................................................................. 187
13 EagleVision Camera Setup for SEPAC .............................................................................................................................. 189
13.1 Reporting Configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 189
13.1.1 Reporting Method ............................................................................................................................................. 189
13.1.2 Reporting Type.................................................................................................................................................. 189
13.1.3 Reporting Interval............................................................................................................................................. 189
13.1.4 Total Output Channels ...................................................................................................................................... 190
13.1.5 IP Address ......................................................................................................................................................... 190
13.1.6 Camera ID ......................................................................................................................................................... 190
13.1.7 Output Channel Offset ...................................................................................................................................... 190
13.2 Coordinating Multiple Cameras .................................................................................................................................... 190
13.2.1 Stop Bar Cameras .............................................................................................................................................. 190
13.2.2 Advance Cameras.............................................................................................................................................. 191
13.3 Recommendations Based On Cabinet Type ................................................................................................................... 191
13.3.1 NEMA TS-1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 191
13.3.2 NEMA TS-2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 191
13.3.3 Caltrans 2070 .................................................................................................................................................... 192
13.3.4 Nassau County 2070 ......................................................................................................................................... 192
13.3.5 ITS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 192
13.3.6 ITS/CBD (v1) ...................................................................................................................................................... 192
13.3.7 ITS/CBD v2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 192
13.4 The Cameras Utility....................................................................................................................................................... 192
13.4.1 Testing the System............................................................................................................................................ 193
14 PROGRAM LOG ................................................................................................................................................................. 195
15 NEMA HARDWARE ............................................................................................................................................................ 240
15.1 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................................... 240
15.1.1 Power Input....................................................................................................................................................... 240
15.1.1.1 Power Interruption ....................................................................................................................................... 240
15.1.2 Environment ..................................................................................................................................................... 240
15.1.3 Physical ............................................................................................................................................................. 240

Page xii TABLE OF CONTENTS
15.1.3.1 Dimensions ................................................................................................................................................... 240

15.1.3.2 Design ........................................................................................................................................................... 240
15.1.3.3 Rigid Printed Circuit Assemblies .................................................................................................................. 241
15.1.3.3.1 Materials................................................................................................................................................. 241
15.1.3.3.2 Mating Surfaces ...................................................................................................................................... 241
15.1.3.3.3 Component Identification ...................................................................................................................... 241
15.1.4 Timing .............................................................................................................................................................. 241
15.1.5 Programming.................................................................................................................................................... 241
15.1.6 Memory............................................................................................................................................................. 241
15.1.7 Display .............................................................................................................................................................. 241
15.2 INTERFACE STANDARDS................................................................................................................................................ 241
15.2.1 Port 1 Physical and Protocol.............................................................................................................................. 241
15.2.1.1 Port 1 Protocol .............................................................................................................................................. 242
15.2.2 Port 2 RS-232 Interface ..................................................................................................................................... 242
15.2.3 Port 3 System Interface ..................................................................................................................................... 243
15.2.3.1 FSK System Interface .................................................................................................................................... 243
15.2.2 Port 3 "RS-232" ................................................................................................................................................. 244
15.2.3.3 Port 3 Fiber Optic .......................................................................................................................................... 245
15.2.4 Type 1 - Interface Standards ............................................................................................................................. 245
15.2.5 Type 2 - Interface Standards ............................................................................................................................. 246
15.2.5.1 Electrical Limits Of Input / Output Terminations.......................................................................................... 246
15.2.5.1.1 Logic Levels ............................................................................................................................................ 246
15.2.5.1.2 Transient Immunity ............................................................................................................................... 246
15.2.5.1.3 Inputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 246
15.2.5.1.4 Outputs................................................................................................................................................... 246
15.2.5.2 NEMA ABC Connectors.................................................................................................................................. 247
15.2.5.2.1 Connector Pin Functions ........................................................................................................................ 247
15.2.5.3 ABC I/O Modes............................................................................................................................................... 249
15.2.5.3.1 ABC Input Mode 0-7 Functions ............................................................................................................... 249
15.2.5.3.2 ABC Input Mode 10-19 Functions ........................................................................................................... 250
15.2.5.3.3 ABC Output Mode 0-7 Functions ............................................................................................................ 251
15.2.5.3.4 ABC Output Mode 10-14 Functions ........................................................................................................ 252
15.2.5.3.5 ABC Output Mode 15-19 Functions ........................................................................................................ 253
15.2.5.4 D Connector Pin / Functions.......................................................................................................................... 254
15.2.5.4.1 D Input Mode Functions ......................................................................................................................... 254
D Output Mode Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 256
16 2070 ATC HARDWARE ...................................................................................................................................................... 258
16.1 2070 ATC SERIAL PORTS ............................................................................................................................................... 258
16.2 2070 ATC FRONT PANEL ............................................................................................................................................... 258
16.2.1 Four Line Display .............................................................................................................................................. 258
16.2.2 Extended Keypad............................................................................................................................................... 258

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page xiii
16.3 2070-8 FIELD I/O............................................................................................................................................................ 259

16.3.1 ABC Connector Pin / Functions.......................................................................................................................... 259
16.3.1.1 ABC Input Mode Functions ........................................................................................................................... 259
16.3.1.2 ABC Output Mode Functions......................................................................................................................... 259
16.3.2 D Connector Pin / Functions .............................................................................................................................. 259
16.3.2.1 D Input Mode Functions................................................................................................................................ 260
D Output Mode Functions........................................................................................................................................... 262
16.4.3 Loop Back Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................ 263
16.4.4 2070-2 FIELD I/O ............................................................................................................................................... 263
16.4.5 A Connector Pin / Functions .............................................................................................................................. 265
16.4.5.1 ABC Input Mode Functions ........................................................................................................................... 267
16.4.5.2 ABC Output Mode Functions......................................................................................................................... 267
16.4.6 D Connector Pin / Functions .............................................................................................................................. 267
16.4.6.1 D Input Mode Functions................................................................................................................................ 268
16.4.6.2 D Output Mode Functions ............................................................................................................................. 270
16.4.7 Loop Back Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................................ 271
16.4.8 EPAC300 Displays / Screens............................................................................................................................... 271
16.4.8.1 Active Status Screens .................................................................................................................................... 271
16.4.8.1.1 Input / Output Status .............................................................................................................................. 271
16.4.8.2 Diagnostic Screens ........................................................................................................................................ 273
16.4.8.2.1 Input Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................... 273
17 EAGLE EPAC300 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................... 275
18 CUSTOM I/O MAPPING ..................................................................................................................................................... 279
18.1 I/O Mapping Flow .......................................................................................................................................................... 279
18.2 Software EPAC Logic Builder......................................................................................................................................... 280
18.2.1 Instructions....................................................................................................................................................... 281
18.2.2 Registers ........................................................................................................................................................... 282
19 NEMA TS 2 PORT 1 PROTOCOL......................................................................................................................................... 287
19.1 COMMAND FRAMES ...................................................................................................................................................... 287
19.1.1 Command Frame Timing .................................................................................................................................. 287
19.1.2 Command Frame Scheduling............................................................................................................................ 288
19.2 RESPONSE FRAMES ....................................................................................................................................................... 288
19.3 FRAME FORMATS .......................................................................................................................................................... 289
19.3.1 Type 0 - Load Switch Drivers ............................................................................................................................. 289
19.3.2 Type 1 - MMU Status Input................................................................................................................................ 291
19.3.3 Type 3 - MMU Programming Input ................................................................................................................... 291
19.3.4 Type 9 - Date And Time Broadcast..................................................................................................................... 291
19.3.5 Type 10 - TF BIU #1 Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 292
19.3.6 Type 11 - TF BIU #2 Outputs.............................................................................................................................. 293
19.3.7 Type 12 - TF BIU #3 Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 295
19.3.8 Type 13 - TF BIU #4 Outputs.............................................................................................................................. 295

Page xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS
19.3.9 Type 18 - TF BIUs Output Transfer .................................................................................................................... 296

19.3.10 Type 20 - DET BIU #1 Inputs............................................................................................................................ 296
19.3.11 Types 21 - DET BIU #2 Inputs .......................................................................................................................... 298
19.3.14 Type 24 - DET BIU #1 Detector Resets.............................................................................................................. 298
19.3.18 Type 30 - Diagnostic Information Input .......................................................................................................... 299
19.3.19 Type 40 - Poll For Service ................................................................................................................................ 300
19.3.20 Type 42 - Secondary Destination Message. ..................................................................................................... 300
19.3.21 Type 43 - Secondary Exchange Status. ............................................................................................................ 301
19.3.22 Type 128 - ACK 0 ............................................................................................................................................. 301
19.2.23 Type 129 - ACK 1 + Data .................................................................................................................................. 301
19.2.24 Type 131 - ACK 3 + Data .................................................................................................................................. 303
19.2.25 Type 138 - ACK 10 + TF BIU 1 Input................................................................................................................. 305
19.2.26 Types 139 - ACK 11 + TF BIU 2 Input ............................................................................................................... 306
19.2.29 Type 148 - ACK 20 + DET BIU 1 Input .............................................................................................................. 308
19.2.33 Type 152 - ACK 24 + DET BIU 1 Diagnostic ...................................................................................................... 313
19.3.34 Types 153 - ACK 25 + DET BIU 2 Diagnostic .................................................................................................... 315
19.3.37 Type 158 - ACK 30 + Data ................................................................................................................................ 316
19.3.38 Type 168 - No Service Required....................................................................................................................... 317
19.3.39 Type 169 - Sec Source Message ....................................................................................................................... 317
19.3.40 Type 170 - Secondary NAK .............................................................................................................................. 317
19.3.41 Type 171 - Secondary ACK............................................................................................................................... 318
20 ITS v1 CABINET ................................................................................................................................................................ 319
20.1 ITS v1 CABINET COMPONENTS ..................................................................................................................................... 319
20.1.1 Monitoring System............................................................................................................................................ 319
20.1.2 Output Assemblies............................................................................................................................................ 319
20.1.2.1 Output Form 1 (14-0-0-0) ............................................................................................................................. 319
20.1.2.2 Output Form 2 (14-0-14-0) ........................................................................................................................... 320
20.1.2.3 Output Form 3 (14-0-6-0) ............................................................................................................................. 320
20.1.2.4 Output Form 4 (14-0-6-6) ............................................................................................................................. 320

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page xv
20.1.2.5 Output Form 5 (6-0-0-0) ............................................................................................................................... 320

20.1.2.6 Output Form 6 (6-6-0-0) ............................................................................................................................... 320
20.1.2.7 Output Form 7 (6-6-6-0) ............................................................................................................................... 321
20.1.2.8 Output Form 8 (6-6-6-6)................................................................................................................................ 321
20.1.2.9 Output Form 9 (6-0-14-0) ............................................................................................................................. 321
20.1.2.10 Output Form 10 (6-6-14-0) ......................................................................................................................... 321
20.1.3 Input Assemblies .............................................................................................................................................. 322
20.1.3.1 Input Assembly 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 322
20.1.3.2 Input Assembly 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 322
20.1.3.3 Input Assembly 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 323
20.1.3.4 Input Assembly 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 324
20.1.3.5 Input Assembly 5 .......................................................................................................................................... 325
20.2 ITS v1 CABINET PROTOCOL........................................................................................................................................... 325
20.2.1 COMMAND FRAMES .......................................................................................................................................... 326
20.2.1.1 Command Frame Timing.............................................................................................................................. 326
20.2.1.2 Command Frame Scheduling ....................................................................................................................... 327
20.2.2 RESPONSE FRAMES ........................................................................................................................................... 327
20.2.3 Serial Bus #1 Frames......................................................................................................................................... 327
20.2.3.1 Type 49 – Module Status ............................................................................................................................... 328
20.2.3.2 Type 177 – Module Status ............................................................................................................................. 328
20.2.3.3 Type 50 – MC Management........................................................................................................................... 328
20.2.3.4 Type 178 – MC Management......................................................................................................................... 328
20.2.3.5 Type 51 – Configure Inputs .......................................................................................................................... 328
20.2.3.6 Type 179 – Configure Inputs ........................................................................................................................ 329
20.2.3.7 Type 52 –Raw Input Data .............................................................................................................................. 329
20.2.3.8 Type 180 –Raw Input Data ............................................................................................................................ 329
20.2.3.9 Type 53 –Filtered Input Data......................................................................................................................... 329
20.2.3.10 Type 181 –Filtered Input Data..................................................................................................................... 329
20.2.3.11 Type 54 –Input Transition Buffer................................................................................................................ 329
20.2.3.12 Type 182 –Input Transition Buffer.............................................................................................................. 330
20.2.3.13 Type 55 – Set Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 330
20.2.3.14 Type 183 – Set Outputs ............................................................................................................................... 330
20.2.3.15 Type 56 – Configure Input Tracking ........................................................................................................... 331
20.2.3.16 Type 184 - Configure Input Tracking .......................................................................................................... 331
20.2.3.17 Type 57 – Configure Complex Output ........................................................................................................ 331
20.2.3.18 Type 185 - Configure Complex Output ....................................................................................................... 332
20.2.3.19 Type 60 – Module ID ................................................................................................................................... 332
20.2.3.20 Type 188 – Module ID ................................................................................................................................. 332
20.2.3.21 Type 61 – Switch Pack Drivers..................................................................................................................... 332
20.2.3.22 Type 189 – CMU Status ............................................................................................................................... 333
20.2.3.23 Type 62 – Set FSA ........................................................................................................................................ 336

Page xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS
20.2.3.24 Type 190 - Set FSA....................................................................................................................................... 337

20.2.3.25 Type 63 – Poll Vari Length Raw Inputs........................................................................................................ 337
20.2.3.26Type 191 –.................................................................................................................................................... 337
20.2.3.27 Type 64 – Command Vari Length Outputs.................................................................................................. 337
20.2.3.28 Type 192 - ................................................................................................................................................... 337
20.2.3.29 Type 65 – Get CMU Configuration .............................................................................................................. 337
20.2.3.30 Type 193 - CMU Configuration.................................................................................................................... 337
Type 66 – Time And Date ............................................................................................................................................ 341
20.2.3.32 Type 67 - Switch Pack Drivers ..................................................................................................................... 341
20.2.3.33 Type 195 – CMU Short Status...................................................................................................................... 342
21 CBD v1 CABINET............................................................................................................................................................... 345
21.1 CBD v1 CABINET COMPONENTS.................................................................................................................................... 345
21.1.1 Monitoring ........................................................................................................................................................ 345
21.1.2 Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................. 345
21.1.3 Inputs................................................................................................................................................................ 345
21.2 CBD v1 CABINET PROTOCOL ......................................................................................................................................... 345
21.2.1 COMMAND FRAMES .......................................................................................................................................... 346
21.2.1.1 Command Frame Timing.............................................................................................................................. 346
21.2.1.2 Command Frame Scheduling ....................................................................................................................... 346
21.2.2 RESPONSE FRAMES ........................................................................................................................................... 347
22 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................................. 349
22.1 UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 349
22.2 HANDLING .................................................................................................................................................................... 349
22.3 PHYSICAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................................................................. 349
22.4 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................................................. 350
22.4.1 Battery............................................................................................................................................................... 350
22.5 RESHIPMENT ................................................................................................................................................................. 350
23 WARRANTY....................................................................................................................................................................... 351
23.1 WARRANTIES: ................................................................................................................................................................ 351
23.2 LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES: .......................................................................................................... 351
23.3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY............................................................................................................................................. 351
23.4 WARRANTY QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ....................................................................................................................... 351

INTRODUCTION Page 1
1 INTRODUCTION
 Red Clear
 Walk
 Pedestrian Clear
 Added Initial
 Maximum Initial
 Time Before Reduction
1.1 GENERAL  Cars Before Reduction
 Time To Reduce
 Minimum Gap
 Non-Act Response
 Vehicle Non-Locking Memory
The Eagle EPAC300 Actuated Signal Control
 Vehicle Recalls
Firmware/Software is an advanced, powerful, easy-to-use
 Pedestrian Recalls
Intersection Control package that runs on standard hardware
 Recall Delay Timing
platforms including:
 Dual Entry
1. 2070 ATC Units from all vendors on the CALTRANS  Last Car Passage
Qualified Products List  Conditional Service
 Disable Simultaneous Gap
2. Eagle EPACM3X, EPACM4X and EPACM5X NEMA
 Programmable Detector Control
Controller Units
a) Phase Assignment
3. Type 170 Controllers listed on the CALTRANS Qualified b) Operational Modes
Products List (requires Eagle Magnum ™ adaptor o Normal Vehicle
module). o Normal Pedestrian
o Vehicle 1 Call
Installed in the above hardware, the Eagle EPAC300
o Vehicle Stop Bar A
Firmware/Software controls all of the following cabinet styles:
o Vehicle Stop Bar B
NEMA TS-1 Cabinets o AND Call
c) Detector Switching
NEMA TS-2, Type 1 Cabinets d) Extend & Delay Timing
NEMA TS-2, Type 2 Cabinets  Selective Phase Omit
 Selective Yellow Omit
CALTRANS 332 Cabinets  Flashing Walk
ITS Cabinets, per Joint NEMA/AASHTO/ITE/CALTRANS National  Extended Pedestrian Clear
Standard  Actuated Rest In Walk
 Phase Copy
Because the Eagle EPAC300 Firmware/Software is designed to
operate in all of the popular controller hardware and cabinet
styles, the same familiar intersection programming screens 1.1.3 Unit Timings & Functions
are used for all cabinet and controller combinations. This  User Access Code
greatly reduces training of personnel confronted with  Programmed Flash
maintaining different cabinet and controller configurations. e) Flash Entry Phase(s)
A Control Unit with Eagle EPAC300 Firmware/Software (CU) f) Flash Exit Phase(s)
provides operational capabilities in accordance with and g) Load Switch or CVM Control
exceeding the requirements of NEMA Standards Publication  Ring Configurations (To 4 Rings)
No. TS 1-1989 and TS 2-2003.  (16) Alternate Sequences
 Start-Up (Pre-Initialization)
h) Time
1.1.1 Modes Of Operation i) Flash (Volt Monitor Inactive), or
 One to Four Rings; Full-, Semi-, & Non-Actuated Phases j) All Red (Volt Monitor Active)
 Red Revert
 Stop Time Reset
1.1.2 Phase Timings & Functions  (16) Overlap With Programming for:
 Initialization k) Included Phases
 Minimum Green l) Timed Trailing Green, Yellow, & Red
 Passage Time m) Overlap Green/Yellow Omit
 Maximum 1  Auto Timing Of Pedestrian Clear
 Maximum 2  Diagnostics
 Yellow Change  Print Out Of:

Page 2 INTRODUCTION
n) Basic Traffic nn) Lock / Non-Lock Memory

o) Coordination oo) Delay, Extend & Duration (Multiple
p) Time Base Runs)
q) Preemption pp) Programmable Track & Dwell
r) System Sequence
s) Reports o Vehicle R-G-FY-FR-DARK
 Unit-To-Unit Transfer Of: o Pedestrian D-W-FW-DARK
t) Basic Traffic o Link To Another Preempt
u) Coordination o Cycling Dwell
v) Time Base qq) Programmable Max Call
w) Preemption rr) Programmable Exit Phases
x) System ss) Programmable Exit Calls
tt) Programmable Flash Override
uu) Programmable Priority (PE/PE)
1.1.4 Coordination Timings & vv) Programmable Lockout
Functions  Six (6) Low Priority Routines With:
ww) Lock / Non-Lock Memory
 Commands: 16 Timing Plans (4 Dial/4 Split) / 3 Offset xx) Programmable Skip
 16 Timing Plans (48 patterns) EACH WITH NEW: yy) Delay, Extend & Duration
y) Phase Times (Splits) zz) Programmable Dwell Phases
z) Coordinated Phases aaa) Programmable Max Call
aa) Non-Coordinated Phase Modifiers bbb)Programmable Lockout
bb) Dual Coordination ccc) Programmable Exit Calls
cc) Cycle Length (Possible)
dd) Three Offsets
ee) Operational Mode 1.1.7 Other Timings & Functions
ff) Sequence Modifiers  Eight Special Detectors Inputs (Coordinator Inputs w/o System
 6 Coordination Modes Address)
 5 Offset Correction Modes  Detector Diagnosis For Each Detector Input
 Transition Cycles ddd)No Activity Time
 Auto Permissive (Vehicle & Pedestrian) eee) Max Presence Time
 Sync Monitoring fff) Erratic Output Count
 Manual Control  Assign Detectors To System Sampling Function
 Input Monitor (WRM, MCE, ST, & RF)  Assign Detectors To Speed Trap Function
 Dial/Split Copy  Measurements Of Effectiveness
 Master Line Driver Outputs ggg)Utilization (Sec of Green used)
hhh)Delays (Time Waiting Sum)
iii) Stops (Cars Waiting Sum)
1.1.5 Time Base Timings & jjj) Volume (Actuation Sum)
Functions  Monitor & Log
kkk)Cycle Faults
 (10) Program Weeks lll) Cycle Failure
 (99) Program Days mmm)Coordination Failures
 (250) Event Capacity For: nnn)Voltage Monitor
gg) Traffic Events ooo)Conflict Flash
hh) Auxiliary Events ppp)Local Flash
ii) Exception Dates qqq)Automatic Flash
jj) Alternate Weeks rrr) Preempt
kk) Day Equates sss) Local Free
 Three Auxiliary Outputs ttt) Power On/Off
 Eight Special Function Outputs  Six Special Inputs
 Signal Dimming  Eight Special Outputs
 Alternate Detector Diagnostic Values  Respond To Remote "Manual" Overrides
 System Detector Reporting  Revert To Local TBC On Loss Of Comm.
 Function Mapping  Upload To Remote Locations
uuu)Parameters
vvv) Logs
1.1.6 Preemption Timings & www)Real Time Status
Functions  Download From Remote Locations
xxx) Parameters
 Six (6) Preempt Sequences With:
ll) Min Green/Walk Before Preempt
mm)Delay & Duration (Multiple Runs)

INTRODUCTION Page 3
printout is in a format easily understood by a trained traffic

1.1.8 Front Panel Indications oriented person. The unit to printer transmissions shall not
interrupt normal CU operation.
An alpha-numeric display provides easy visibility into
program entries, timers, and the instantaneous status of The CU provides for asynchronous serial data
current intersection operation. communications with RS-232 signal levels, X-On/X-Off
 Phase On handshaking protocols, variable word structure, transmit and
 Phase Next receive ASCII coded 1200-19200 Bits Per Second serial data.
 Phase Vehicle Call
 Phase Vehicle Min, Max, & Soft Recall
 Phase Pedestrian Call 1.2.3 Unit To Unit
 Phase Pedestrian Normal & Non-Act Recall
The CU timing and operational data, preemption data,
 Phase Hold
coordination program data, time base data, and system data
 Phase Omit
are individually transmitted to/from another CU. The unit to
 Phase Pedestrian Omit
unit transmissions will not interrupt normal CU operation
 Ring Walk Timer except when Ring Structure data is changed. When the
 Ring Pedestrian Clear Timer received Ring Structure data is different from that running,
 Ring Walk Hold State the receiving unit automatically reverts to the Start Flash
 Ring Walk Rest State interval. The receiving unit times the Start Flash time and
 Ring Min Green Timer resumes normal operation in the programmed Initialization
 Ring Add Initial Timer interval.
 Ring TBR Timer
 Ring TTR Timer The CU provides for asynchronous serial data
 Ring Max 1 Timer communications with RS-232 signal levels to transmit and
 Ring Max 2 Timer receive 1200-19200 Bits Per Second serial data.
 Ring Passage Timer


Ring Effective Gap Time
Ring Last Car Passage
1.2.4 Unit To Personal Computer
 Ring Gap Out State The CU timing and operational data, preemption data,
 Ring Max Out State coordination program data, time base data, and system data
 Ring Force Off State are individually transmitted to/from a personal computer
 Ring Green Rest State running the appropriate software. The transmissions will not
 Ring Yellow Timer interrupt normal CU operation except when Ring Structure
 Ring Red Clear Timer data is changed. When the received Ring Structure data is
 Ring Red Revert Timer different from that running, the receiving unit automatically
 Ring Red Rest State reverts to the Start Flash interval. The receiving unit times
 Ring Stop Time State the Start Flash time and resumes normal operation in the
programmed Initialization interval.
The CU active status (Ring Timers, Coordination Timers,
1.2 STANDARD FEATURES Preempt Timers, and Time Base Current) are individually
transmitted to a personal computer running the appropriate
software.
The CU report logs (Local Alarms, Communications Faults,
 Diagnostics
Detector Faults, System Detector Log, MOE Report, and Speed
 Data Print Out
Report) are individually transmitted to a personal computer
 Data Transfer running the appropriate software.
The CU provides for asynchronous serial data
1.2.1 Diagnostics communications with RS-232 signal levels to transmit and
receive serial data.
A resident diagnostic program is standard. In addition to unit
status, unit timing, and active timer countdown to aid in
intersection setup, monitoring, and troubleshooting, the CU
monitors its own operation automatically and continually 1.3 PROGRAMMING
verifying memory and processor operation with additional
capability to verify inputs, outputs, keypad, and display.
1.2.2 Unit To Printer The CU provides means to enter and view variable data, view
current status, and view the event report.
The CU timing and operational data, preemption data,
coordination program data, time base data, system data, and
reports are individually transmitted to the printer. The

Page 4 INTRODUCTION
The CU prevents the alteration of keypad set unit variables

prior to the user having entered a specific code. This "Access"
code is also user programmable via the keypad.
There is provision (user entered code) to disable the
requirement of entering an access code before alteration of
keypad set unit variables.
1.3.1 Entry
The method of entering CU variables is by:
1. An integral keypad on the face of the unit, and/or
2. Via a RS-232 Interface and a Personal Computer
1.3.2 Display
The method provided to view CU variables, current status,
and the event report shall be by:
1. Integral Indication on the face of the unit, and/or
2. Via a RS-232 Interface and a Personal Computer
The method provided includes a simultaneous display of up
to eight lines, 40 characters per line of ASCII text (HEX 20
through HEX 7A).
1.3.3 Security
The CU maintains user programmable variables in non-
volatile memory to assure continued proper CU operation
with return of power after power loss.
The CU continuously monitors memory contents for errors. If
an error is found, the CU immediately ceases outputting
signals to the processor monitor and thereby reverts to
flashing operation.
1.3.4 Backup
The CU contains a reserve data base of all CU keypad set
variables stored in Read Only Memory. It is possible for an
operator to activate the reserve data base by loading it into
memory through a simple procedure involving front panel
controls.

FRONT PANEL Page 5
2 FRONT PANEL
A Control Unit with Eagle EPAC300 Firmware/Software (CU) may utilize an alpha-numeric Display and multi-position Keypad to
provide an interface between the user and the CU.
The CU Display becomes active on power-up and remains active as long as power is applied to the unit.
2.1.1 Front Panel Summary

The CU Display provides true visibility into program entries, timers, and the instantaneous status of intersection operation.
Related parameters are visible simultaneously making verification straight forward and eliminating the need to write the data
down and/or scan back and forth in order to remember what the parameters are.
A. PROGRAMMING via the front panel keypad and display is easy and error free due to the English Language Menus with
easy 1 digit selection and automatic forward and backward progressions. Within a menu, each parameter may be
viewed and a cursor movement to that parameter makes changes easy and error free. If an error is made during
programming, the operator will see messages such as "ENTRY OUT OF RANGE" on the bottom line and the cursor
remains at the entry parameter waiting for proper activity.
• Attempts to enter parameters outside acceptable ranges are rejected on occurrence without destroying the existing values.
• As a reminder, the upper left corner identifies the display and the lower line identifies cursor control and forward/backward
menu selection.
A. HELP is available in each screen! The "+" key has been designated as the 'HELP' key. Pressing the "HELP' key will open
and close a HELP screen.
• A HELP screen provides information based on the field where the cursor is located when the HELP is called. Closing the HELP
screen will return the user to the same field.
• HELP screens are available in all screens except ACCESS, ACTIVE STATUS and REPORT screens.
2.1.2 Front Panel Entry

Data is entered or displayed by selection from menus. The menus are arranged in a hierarchy consisting of a top level menu
made up of sub-menus which may or may not consist of more sub-menus. The following parts of this section are devoted to
describing the key combination (input), the window display (output), and the purpose of each menu and sub-menu.
This section discusses the highest level menus first and then discusses each sub-menu. The "Main" Menu represents the highest
level menu from which the user can choose. Pressing the "F" key a number of times will always return the user back to the top
level menu. Each menu and sub-menu's purpose is discussed along with the correct keypad selection.
Front panel entered data is cross checked on a priority basis. To enable the check to have maximum value and to minimize error
messages during entry, it is suggested data be entered in a Unit, Phase, Coordination, Time Base, Preempt, and System
sequence.
2.1.3 Front Panel Timeout

There are two different types of time-out associated with the front panel:
Except when perpetual access is programmed, access is automatically turned off approximately ten (10) minutes after either:
1) Access was gained.
2) The last change was entered.
The front panel back light is automatically urned off approximately ten (10) minutes after the last front panel activity.
2.1.4 Main Menu

The following menu becomes active on application of power to the CU (except as noted below) and is the basic starting point for
all data/status review and/or entry.

Page 6 FRONT PANEL
MENU AT POWER UP
SIEMENS ITS
EAGLE EPAC300 – OS # 3.35 (APR 09)
* 25 MHz CPU * TS2
1-ACTIVE STATUS 5-COORD DATA
2-UTILITIES 6-TIME BASE DATA
3-PHASE DATA 7-PREEMPT DATA
4-UNIT DATA 8-SYSTEM DATA
A-COPYRIGHT Help(+) 9-REPORTS
The Main Menu gives the date and revision number of the resident software / firmware along with providing menu options to:
1) ACTIVE STATUS - for real time displays.
2) UTILITIES - for miscellaneous parameters and features.
3) PHASE DATA - for Phase parameters.
4) UNIT DATA - for Unit parameters.
5) COORD DATA - for Coordination parameters.
6) TIME BASE DATA - for TBC parameters and status.
7) PREEMPT DATA - for Preempt parameters.
8) SYSTEM DATA - for System parameters, status, and reports.
9) REPORTS - for viewing reports.
A) COPYRIGHT - for copyright and additional information on Eagle EPAC M50 & 2070 ATC hardware only.
On Power Up or Restart in Eagle EPAC M50 hardware or 2070 ATC hardware, the Eagle Boot Manager may appear (see 0).

FRONT PANEL Page 7
Figure 1 EPAC300 MENU STRUCTURE
┌────────────┐
│ MAIN │
│ MENU │
└─────┬──────┘
┌───────────┬─────────────────┼─────────────────┬─────────────────┐
│ ┌─────┴──────┐ ┌─────┴──────┐ ┌─────┴──────┐ ┌─────┴──────┐
│ │ STATUS │ │ UTILITIES │ │ PHASE │ │ UNIT │
│ ┌─┤ MENU │ ┌─┤ MENU │ ┌─┤ MENU │ ┌─┤ MENU │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤ RING TIMERS│ ├─┤ GAIN ACCESS│ ├─┤ VEH TIMES │ ├─┤ START/MISC │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤COORD TIMERS│ ├─┤ LOSE ACCESS│ ├─┤ DEN TIMES │ ├─┤ REM FLASH │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤PREMPT TIMRS│ ├─┤ CHNG ACCESS│ ├─┤ PED TIMES │ ├─┤ OVRLAP STD │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤ TIME BASE │ ├─┤ PRINT OUT │ ├─┤ INIT & NA │ ├─┤ OVRLAP SPC │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤ COMM │ ├─┤ UNIT XFER │ ├─┤ V&P RECALL │ ├─┤ RING STRUC │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤ DETECTORS │ ├─┤LOAD DEFAULT│ ├─┤ NL & MISC │ ├─┤ ALT SEQ #1 │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤INTERSECTION│ ├─┤ DIAGNOSTICS│ ├─┤ SP SEQUENCE│ ├─┤ ALT SEQ #2 │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤ PORT 1 │ └─┤ CONF PORTS │ ├─┤ SP DETECTOR│ ├─┤ PORT 1 DATA│
│ │ └────────────┘ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ ├─┤ I/O │ ├─┤ PHASE COPY │ ├─┤ I/O MISC │
│ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
│ └─┤ MMU │ └─┤ PED OPTIONS│ └─┤ SIG DRV OUT│
│ └────────────┘ └────────────┘ └────────────┘
│
│
│ Front Panel Enhanced Options Available on EPAC310 & EPAC360
└───────────┬─────────────────┬─────────────────┬─────────────────┬─────────────────┐
┌─────┴──────┐ ┌─────┴──────┐ ┌─────┴──────┐ ┌─────┴──────┐ ┌─────┴──────┐
│ COORD │ │ TIME BASE │ │ PREEMPT │ │ SYSTEM │ │ REPORTS │
┌─┤ MENU │ ┌─┤ MENU │ ┌─┤ MENU │ ┌─┤ MENU │ ┌─┤ MENU │
│ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
├─┤ SETUP │ ├─┤ VIEW CURNT │ ├─┤ ALL PREEMPT│ ├─┤ COMM │ ├─┤ COMM │
│ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
├─┤ MAN PATRN │ ├─┤ SET TIME │ ├─┤ PREEMPT #1 │ ├─┤ TRAF RESP │ ├─┤ SYS DET │
│ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
├─┤ DIAL/SPLIT │ ├─┤ TRAF EVENT │ ├─┤ PREEMPT #2 │ ├─┤ DET DIAG │ ├─┤ DET FAULTS │
│ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
├─┤ D/S COPY │ ├─┤ AUX EVENT │ ├─┤ PREEMPT #3 │ ├─┤ ALARMS │ ├─┤ ALARMS │
│ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
└─┤ CLEAR MEM │ ├─┤ TOY EVENT │ ├─┤ PREEMPT #4 │ ├─┤ MOE │ ├─┤ MOE │
└────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
├─┤ EQ / XFER │ ├─┤ PREEMPT #5 │ └─┤ SPEED │ ├─┤ SPEED │
│ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
├─┤ CLEAR MEM │ ├─┤ PREEMPT #6 │ ├─┤ MMU FAULTS │
│ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘ │ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐ │ ┌────────────┐
├─┤ DIMMING │ └─┤ LD DEFAULT │ └─┤ MESSAGE │
│ └────────────┘ └────────────┘ └────────────┘
│ ┌────────────┐
└─┤ FUNC MAP │
└────────────┘

Page 8 FRONT PANEL
PRESS "1" FROM RING TIMERS MENU
2.2 ACTIVE STATUS EPAC

RING
RING TIMERS
1 RING 2
AS:00 B:1 F-PRIOR MENU
PHS..12345678 90123456
MGRN 10 MGRN 10 O/N .O. .O. ........
WALK 05 WALK 05 VEH CRCCCRCC ........
TBR 15 TBR 15 PED .R.C.R.C ........
CBR 02 CBR 03 H/O .HO..HO. ........
PASS 4 PASS 4 TIME BASE - 2/2/3 060
The Active Status Menu allows the user to select which real MAX1 25 MAX1 25 STOPTIME - 1/2
time function will be displayed.
PRESS "1" FROM MAIN MENU While this display is active, the user may place calls by
pressing:
EPAC ACTIVE STATUS PRESS # DESIRED
‘A’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ for phase vehicle 1 to 8.
1-RING TIMERS 6-DETECTORS
2-COORD TIMERS 7-INTERSECTION ‘B’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ for phase vehicle 9 to 16.
3-PREEMPT TIMERS 8-PORT1/ITS FRAMES
4-TIME BASE 9-INPUT / OUTPUT ‘C’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ for phase pedestrian 1 to 8.
5-COMMUNICATIONS 0-MMU MONITORING
F-PRIOR MENU ‘D’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ for phase pedestrian 9 to 16.
1) RING TIMERS provides viewing of real time status of These calls will remain active until the key is pressed again,
two rings (timers and/or states) and phase data. you leave the screen and the Access timer times out (10 min
2) COORD TIMERS provides viewing of real time status after the last key press), or power is interrupted. Calls so
of coordination timers. implemented will be denoted by a small “c” in the appropriate
3) PREEMPT TIMERS provides viewing of real time status column.
of preemption timers. Multiple calls may be placed or removed without pressing “A”,
4) TIME BASE provides viewing of the Time Base time, “B”, “C”, or “D” each time. To place vehicle calls on phases 1, 2,
date, and event status. 3, and 4, press “A1234”. Until the user presses “B”, “C”, or “D”,
5) COMMUNICATIONS provides viewing of the the “A” level remains active, so pressing “1234” again would
communications status of Port 2 and Port 3. remove the calls placed in the prior example.
6) DETECTORS provides viewing of current detector
status as determined by the detector diagnostics RING STATUS (ACTIVE PHASE) INDICATIONS
7) INTERSECTION provides viewing of real time status of B:1 **Displays which phase bank is currently running.
signal driver outputs and phase vehicle & pedestrian MGRN **: Minimum Green
calls. AINI **: Added Initial
8) PORT1/ITS FRAMES provides viewing of the message WALK **: Walk
content on TS 2 Port 1 or ITS frames. PCLR **: Pedestrian Clear
9) INPUT / OUTPUT provides viewing of Connector A, B, TBR **: Time Before Reduction
C, or D Input or Output status. CBR ##: Cars Before Reduction (## count up)
0) MMU MONITORING provides viewing of MMU TTR **: Time To Reduce
Channel, Fault and Status information. EGAP **: Effective Gap (Gap In Effect)
PASS **: Passage
MAX1 **: Maximum 1
2.2.1 Ring Timers MAX2 **: Maximum 2
The Ring Timers Menu allows the user to select which pair of MX3 **: Maximum 3 |
rings will be displayed. MX4 **: Maximum 4 |
MX5 **: Maximum 5 |
PRESS "1" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU
DMX3 **: Dynamic Maximum 3 |
EPAC RING TIMERS MENU PRESS # DESIRED DMX4 **: Dynamic Maximum 4 > Based Of TBC
1-R1 + R2 TIMERS DMX5 **: Dynamic Maximum 5 | Function
2-R1 + R3 TIMERS Mapping
3-R1 + R4 TIMERS
4-R2 + R3 TIMERS PAS3 **: Passage 3 |
F-PRIOR MENU
OA G **: Overlap A Trailing Green |

A choice of a ring pair in which only one ring is active will OA Y **: Overlap A Trailing Yellow > Overlap A - P
provide a display in which the inactive ring is blank. OA R **: Overlap A Trailing Red |
GAP OUT: Gapped Out Termination

MAX OUT: Maxed Out Termination
FORCE : Forced Off Termination
LST CAR: Last Car Passage

FRONT PANEL Page 9
WLK HLD: Walk Hold state TS2 DIAG FLSH; TS2 Diagnostic Fault Flash (Port 1 Card,
WLK RST: Walk Rest state MMU compatibility, MMU response, or TF BIU
GRN RST: Green Rest state response)
YEL **: Yellow Change DIAG FLSH - NO XIT; Diagnostic Fault Flash has occurred
RED **: Red Clear three times in a day
RED RST: Red Rest state TS2 DIAG FLSH - NO XIT; TS2 Diagnostic Fault Flash has
RRVT **: Red Revert occurred three times in a day
AWLK: Advance Walk
DWLK: Delay Walk
2.2.2 Coordination Timers
** Interval Timing with Countdown
The Coordination Timers Display allows the user to view real
PHASE STATUS INDICATIONS time status of coordination timer(s) and parameters for the
O/N (Phase On/Phase Next): active pattern.
O = On; Phase is active
N = Next; Phase will follow PRESS "2" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU
VEH (Vehicle Call/Recall):
EPAC COORD TIMERS F-PRIOR MENU
C = Call; a vehicle actuation TIME BASE - 2/2/3 > PRM/INH/BEG/PAT
Small ‘c’ = Call; keypad initiated CYC OFF RING.....1....2....3....4
N = Recall; non-act vehicle recall 090 011 SETING 25 25 . .
060 001 ACTIVE 20 20 . .
R = Recall; min vehicle recall -010 -010 ADJUST - 05 - 05 . .
X = Recall; max vehicle recall SYNC: 090 PHSE 2-1 6-1 . .
S = Recall; soft vehicle recall CORR: SW+ PERM 3-P 7-P
PED (Pedestrian Call/Recall):
C = Call; a pedestrian Call STATUS INDICATIONS
Small ‘c’ = Call; keypad initiated TIME BASE: Time Base is in control and the Mode (Pattern
N = Recall; non-act pedestrian recall D/S/O, FREE, or FLASH).
R = Recall; a pedestrian Recall INTERCONN: Interconnect is in control and the Mode
H/O (Hold/Omit): (Pattern D/S/O, FREE, or FLASH).
H = Hold Input active SYSTEM: System is in control and the Mode (Pattern D/S/O,
O = Phase Omit active FREE, or FLASH).
P = Pedestrian Omit active BACKUP: Time Base is in control because of System or
OPERATIONAL MODE INDICATION Interconnect failure and the Mode (Pattern D/S/O, FREE,
or FLASH).
One of the following or combination, depending on the MANUAL: Manual Mode is in control and the Pattern D/S/O.
operational mode, may appear. The first item on line is the STANDBY: System is in control and "STANDBY FREE is the
control source. The second item on line is the control plan. Mode.
The third item, if available, on line is the pattern timing. >: Denotes there is a command to change patterns.
TIME BASE - 2/2/3 060 PRM/INH/BEG/CYC: Denotes the Coordination, Max, Offset,
INTERCONN - 2/2/3 060 and Force Off Modes currently running.
SYSTEM - 2/2/3 060
BACKUP - 2/2/3 060 COORD MODES
MANUAL - 2/2/3 060 PRM - Permissive
TIME BASE - FREE YLD - Yield
INTERCONN - FLASH PYL - Permissive Yield
SYSTEM - FLASH POM - Permissive Omit
STANDBY - FREE SOM -Sequential Omit
FAC - Full Actuated Control
OTHER OPERATIONAL MODE INDICATION
STRT FLASH - Start Up Flash Timing MAX MODES
STRT FLASH w/PREEMPT - Start Up Flash and active INH - Max Inhibited
Preempt Routine MX1 - Max 1
STOPTIME - 1/2; active Stop Time input(s) MX2 - Max 2
PREEMPT - 1; active Preempt routine. OFFSET MODES
PRIORITY - 1; active Low Priority routine. BEG - Beginning Of Green
LOCK OUT; Coordination/Low Priority Omitted. END - End Of Green
QUE1 LVL1 - 2/2/3 060; Local TR QUE1 LVL1 override
QUE1 LVL2 - 2/2/3 060; Local TR QUE1 LVL2 override FORCE OFF MODES
QUE2 LVL1 - 2/2/3 060; Local TR QUE2 LVL1 override PAT - Time In Pattern
QUE2 LVL2 - 2/2/3 060; Local TR QUE2 LVL2 override CYC - Time In Cycle
DIAG FLSH; Diagnostic Fault Flash (Watchdog) OTHER
DIAG FLSH W/PREEMPT; Diagnostic Fault Flash and active AS - Adaptive Split
Preempt Routine
PATTERN INDICATIONS

Page 10 FRONT PANEL
CYC (Cycle Length): LINE 6 - CURRENT / LAST CYCLE STATUS

SETING Line - Current pattern cycle length value C/L - Current & Last cycle termination status
ACTIVE Line - Local cycle countdown F - Forced / G - Gapped / N - Neutral (no adjust)
ADJUST Line - Adjustment this cycle
OFF (Offset):
SETING Line - Current pattern offset value 2.2.2.2 Coord Permissive Status
ACTIVE Line - Offset at beginning of cycle The Coordination Timers Display also allows the user to view
ADJUST Line - Adjustment this cycle real time status of Coord Permissive Status for the active
RING #: pattern.
SETING Line - Current pattern phase value
ACTIVE Line - Phase countdown PRESS "B" FROM COORD TIMERS STATUS
ADJUST Line - Adjustment this cycle
PHSE Line - Pattern Phase & Mode EPAC PERM RING 1-4 STATUS
RING.....1....2....3....4
 Mode 0 = Actuated Phase PHSE 2-1 6-1 . .
 Mode 1 = Coordination Phase CYC: 060 ACTIVE 20 20 . .
 Mode 2 = Min Recall Phase PERM 3-P 7-P . .
P-TM 0 0 . .
 Mode 3 = Max Recall Phase
 Mode 4 = Pedestrian Recall Phase B- PRIOR SCR F-PRIOR MENU
 Mode 5 = Max + Pedestrian Recall Phase
 Mode 6 = Phase Omitted
 Mode 7 = Dual Coordination Phase
PERM Line - Permitted Phase & Control PHSE - Pattern Phase & Mode (same as Coord Timers)
 Control > = Force ACTIVE - Phase Split Countdown (same as Coord Timers)
 Control H = Hold PERM - Permitted Phase & State
 Control P = Pedestrian Permissive  Control > = Force
 Control V = Vehicle Permissive  State 0 = Coord Phase is Held
 Control Y = Perm Yield  State 1 = Coord Phase is Timing but not Held
CORR (Correction): Correction mode in effect; "DW" for  State 2 = Timing Ped Permissive
Dwell, "DI" for Dwell Interrupted, "SW" for Shortway, and  State 3 = Timing Veh Permissive
"SW+" for Shortway Add Only.  State 4 = Timing a No Permissive Period
SYN (Sync): System cycle count up.  State 5 = Period there is no phase
 State 6 = Leaving State 5
Note: When running multiple clusters, the CYC, SYN, OFF, and  State 7 = Back To Coord Phase
COR are those for the Ring 1 cluster.  State 8 = Period a phase can not be selected
 State 9 = Perm Yield waiting for Gap Out
 State A = Perm Yield period waiting to start
2.2.2.1 Coord Adaptive Split Status  State B = Perm Delay for yield operation
The Coordination Timers Display also allows the user to view P-TM - Permissive Timing (Tenths);
real time status of Coord Adaptive Spit (CAS) Status for the
active pattern. 2.2.3 Preempt Timers
PRESS "A" FROM COORD TIMERS STATUS
The Preempt Timers Display allows the user to view real time
EPAC COORD ADAPTIVE SPLIT STATUS status of preemption timer(s) and input status for any active
PLAN: 2/2/3 CYC: 92 STAT: INACTIVE preempt.
PHASE: ..1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8.
ADJ: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS "3" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU
WAIT: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C/L: G/G G/G G/G G/G G/G G/G G/G G/G
(C=CURRENT/L=LAST) EPAC PREEMPTION TIMERS F-PRIOR MENU
A-PRIOR SCR C-NEXT PHS F-PRIOR MENU PREEMPT 1 TRK GRN 005
PREEMPT......1....2....3....4....5....6.
STATUS... DUR CAL
TIMING... 100
LINE 2 - STATUS & TIMING INDICATIONS PRIORITY.....1....2....3....4....5....6.
PLAN - Running Pattern (D/S/O) STATUS... DEL DEL
CYC - Time In cycle TIMING... 000 25
STAT - Adaptive Split Status
INACTIVE - CAS is not running LINE 2 STATUS & TIMING INDICATIONS
ACTIVE - CAS is running; no adjusts (i.e., correction PREEMPT #; Preempt 1 to 6 is in control.
active) MIN GRN; Minimum Green/Walk is timing.
APPPLIED - CAS is running; adjust is possible SEL PCL; Selective Pedestrian Clear is timing.
LINE 4 - PHASE ADJUSTMENTS SEL YEL; Selective Yellow Change is timing.
ADJ - Phase adjustment this cycle (plus / minus) SEL RED; Selective Red Clear is timing.
TRK GRN; Track Green is timing.
LINE 5 - PHASE WAITING TRK PCL; Track Pedestrian Clear is timing.
WAIT - adjust priority # (largest is highest)

FRONT PANEL Page 11
TRK YEL; Track Yellow Change is timing.  DIM: N - Dimming Enabled N-Off & Y-
TRK RED; Track Red Clear is timing. On
DWL GRN; Dwell Green is timing.
While this display is active with Access enabled, the user may
RET PCL; Return Pedestrian Clear is timing.
activate these options by pressing:
RET YEL; Return Yellow Change is timing.
‘A’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘3’ turn on Auxiliary 1-3
RET RED; Return Red Clear is timing.
‘B’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ turn on Special Function 1-8
"###"; Interval timing countdown.
“C” followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ turn on Phase Function 1-8
LINE 4 & 6 STATUS INDICATIONS “D” followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ turn on Phase Function 9-16
"LOC" - Priority Lockout
The function will remain on until the key is pressed again, you
"DEL" - Delay Timing
leave the screen and the Access timer times out (10 min after
"DUR" - Duration Timing
the last key press), or power is interrupted. Action so
"EXT" - Extend Timing
implemented will be denoted by a “+”.
"CAL" - Call Active (Not Timing)
"MAX" - Max Call Time Out Occurred Multiple outputs may be turned on or off without pressing
“A”, “B”, “C”, or “D” each time. To turn on Auxiliary 1, 2, and 3,
LINE 5 & 7 TIMING INDICATIONS
press “A123”. Until the user presses “B”, “C”, or “D”, the “A”
"###" - Status Timing Countdown
level remains active, so pressing “123” again would turn off
the outputs turned on in the prior example.
2.2.4 Time Base - Current
The Time Base Current Display allows the user to view the 2.2.5 Communication Status
current time base status and control modes.
The Communication Status display allows the user to view the
PRESS "4" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU current status of communications on Port 2 (RS232
Connector) and Port 3 (System Interface Connector).
EPAC TIME BASE - CURRENT F-PRIOR MENU
SAT 03/15/04 12:10:30 STD TIME PRESS "5" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU
DAY PROGRAM: 07 WEEK PROGRAM: 0
------TRAFFIC------ ----AUXILIARY---- EPAC COMM STATUS
DL/SP/OF: 2/2/2 A: 12* DIM:N ..PORT 2.. ..PORT 3..
GPS D: .2. SETTINGS....: 1200,8N1 1200,8N1
P: ......... ....... S: .******* STATUS......: OFF LINE OFF LINE
CODES: (#)-ON (.)-OFF (*)-NOT DEFINED CARRIER.....: ACTIVE INACTIVE
TRANSMITTING: DATA - ACK
RECEIVING...: DATA-VALID
Line 2 Status F-PRIOR MENU
1. Day of Week - The current day of the week is displayed in

an abbreviated English format (i.e., SUN, MON, etc.). SETTINGS: denotes the speed, data bits, parity, and stop bits
programmed for communicating via that port.
2. Date - The current Date (Month/Day/Year) is displayed.
STATUS: denotes the current communications status of both
3. Time - The current Time (Hour/Minute/Second) is
Port 2 and Port 3 communications link.
displayed.
Port 2 -
4. Daylight Savings Time - The current programming and
ON LINE - Data Carrier Detect input is TRUE.
status for Daylight Savings Time is displayed.
OFF LINE - Data Carrier Detect input is FALSE.
Line 3 Status
Port 3 -
1. Program Day - The current Program Day is displayed. ON LINE - Data Carrier Detect input is TRUE.
ONLN-NOSYS - Data Carrier Detect input is TRUE but a
2. Program Week - The current Program Week is displayed. System Address is not programmed.
Traffic Event - The current Coordination Pattern, Flash, Free, FAILED - Data Carrier Detect input is TRUE, a System
Phase Function are displayed. Address is programmed, but the unit has not been polled
 DL/SP/OF - Pattern (Dial/Split/Offset) since power was applied or within the Backup time.
 P: 123456789 0123456 - Phase Function (#)-On (.)- OFF LINE - Data Carrier Detect input is FALSE.
Off CARRIER: denotes the current carrier status for that port
Auxiliary Event - The current status of each Auxiliary, System (ACTIVE or INACTIVE).
Special Function, Detector Diagnostic parameters, System TRANSMITTING: denotes when the CU is transmitting data
Detector Report, and Dimming event structure is (DATA ) via that port plus the response returned (ACK or
displayed. NAK).
 A: 12* - Auxiliary Output | (#)-On
 D: .2. - Det Diag & Report > (.)-Off RECEIVING: denotes when the CU is receiving data (DATA) via
 S: ******** - Sys Spec Function | (*)-Not that port plus the validity of that reception (VALID or
Defined ERROR).

Page 12 FRONT PANEL

2.2.6 Detectors
EPAC INTERSECTION F-PRIOR MENU
The Detector Status display allows the user to view the current PHASE.....1234.5678.9012.3456
detector status as determined by the detector diagnostics. V SIG..: RGRR YRRR .... .... ...
P SIG..: DWDD DDDD .... ....
PRESS "6" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU V CALL.: C..C .C.C .... ....
P CALL.: ...C .C.C .... ....
OVERLAP...ABCD.EFGH.IJKL.MNOP
EPAC SYSTEM - DETECTOR STATUS V SIG..: GRRR .... .... ....
VEH DET....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
STATUS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
VEH DET....9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
STATUS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 While this display is active, the user may place calls by
CODES: 0-ON LINE..FAIL:.1-MP.2-NA.3-EC.. pressing:
4-NS.5-BIU.6-LWD.7-LO.8-LS.9-LC ‘A’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ for phase vehicle 1 to 8 calls
A-PRV B-NXT DISPLAY F-PRIOR MENU
‘B’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ for phase vehicle 9 to 16 calls
‘C’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ for phase Pedestrian 1 to 8 calls
PRESS “B” (NXT DISPLAY) with the above display present will ‘D’ followed by ‘1’ to ‘8’ for phase Pedestrian 9 to 16 calls
show status for Vehicle Detector 17-64 (3 screens)
The call shall remain until the key is pressed again, you leave
PRESS “A” with the above display present will show status for the screen and the Access timer times out (10 min after the
Special & Pedestrian Detector 1-8 (1 Screen) last key press), or power is interrupted. Calls so implemented
will be denoted by a small “C”.
EPAC SYSTEM - DETECTOR STATUS
SPC DET....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8 Multiple calls may be placed or removed without pressing “A”,
STATUS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 “B”, “C”, or “D” each time. To place vehicle calls on phases 1, 2,
PED DET....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
STATUS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3, and 4, press “A1234”. Until the user presses “B”, “C”, or “D”,
CODES: 0-ON LINE..FAIL:.1-MP.2-NA.3-EC.. the “A” level remains active, so pressing “1234” again would
4-NS.5-BIU.6-LWD.7-LO.8-LS.9-LC remove the calls placed in the prior example.
A-PRV B-NXT DISPLAY F-PRIOR MENU
PER PHASE INTERSECTION INDICATIONS
VEH SIG: Vehicle Signal Driver Status:
THE STATUS CODES DISPLAYED ABOVE ARE: [G]-Green [Y]-Yellow [R]-Red
Code 0 (ON LINE): denotes that the detector is operating OVLP: A-D Overlap Signal Driver Status:
within the parameters established for diagnostic faults. [G]-Green [Y]-Yellow [R]-Red
Code 1 (MP): denotes that the detector failed the CU PED SIG: Pedestrian Signal Driver Status:
MAXIMUM PRESENCE diagnostic. [W]-Walk [w]-Flashing Walk
Code 2 (NA): denotes that the detector failed the CU NO [d]-Flashing Don’t Walk [D]-Don’t Walk
ACTIVITY diagnostic. VEH DET: Phase Vehicle Call Status
Code 3 (EC): denotes that the detector failed the CU [C]-Phase Vehicle has a call
ERRATIC COUNTS diagnostic. PED DET: Phase Pedestrian Call Status
Code 4 (NS): denotes that the detector is assigned but: {C}-Phase Pedestrian has a call
a) BIU is enabled & Port 1 Hardware is not installed
b) BIU is enabled, Port 1 Hardware is installed, & Port 1 is
Disabled 2.2.8 Port 1 / ITS Frames
c) BIU is not enabled & a Hardware Input is not available
Code 5 (BIU): denotes that a Response Frame Fault The status screens provided is dependent on which type of
occurred for the Detector Bus Interface Unit (BIU). cabinet is being utilized; NEMA TS 2 or ITS/CBD.
Code 6 (LWD): denotes that the Detector BIU Channel
Status input for the detector is “OFF”. This may indicate
1) the detector is NOT as TS 2 detector, 2) the detector 2.2.8.1 Port 1 Frames
failure occurred, or 3) a detector watchdog time-out The Port 1 Frame View display allows the user to view the data
occurred. content of NEMA TS 2 command and response frames that
Code 7 (LO): denotes that the Detector reported an Open occur on Port 1.
Loop Fault to the Detector BIU.
Code 8 (LS): denotes that the Detector reported an Shorted PRESS "8" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU
Loop Fault to the Detector BIU.
Code 9 (LC): denotes that the Detector reported an EPAC PORT 1 FRAME VIEW
Excessive Inductance Change Fault to the Detector BIU. COMMAND FRAME: 0 9 10 11 12 13
24 25 26 27 42 43
RESPONSE FRAME: 129 131 138 139 140 141
2.2.7 Intersection 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 158 169
- ENTER FRAME ### TO VIEW DATA: 0
F-PRIOR MENU
The Intersection Display allows the user to view active status
of all signal driver outputs and vehicle plus pedestrian calls.
See Section 0 for a complete list of all command and response
frames along with a definition of their content bit by bit.

FRONT PANEL Page 13
Assuming 131 was entered in the above display, a display ‘.’ (period) – in the relative position means the address is
similar to the following would be displayed: not active.
‘#’ (number 0-9 & A-E) – in the relative position means the
EPAC FRAME 131 DATA F-PRIOR MENU address is active and operating properly.
BIT 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 ‘P’ (upper case) – in the relative position means the
009 01000010 00000000 00000000 00000000
041 10111101 00000000 00000000 00000000 address is active and experienced a problem during
073 00000000 00000000 ........ ........ initialization.
105 ........ ........ ........ ........
137 ........ ........ ........ ........ ‘x’ (lower case) – in the relative position means the
A-UP B-DN C-NewData D-REVERSE E-FRME ### address is active & experienced 1 error (error = 2
consecutive response faults).
‘X’ (upper case) - in the relative position means the
When more than one page is required to display the data, address has experienced 2 more consecutive response
pressing ‘A’ and ‘B’ will page forward and backwards through faults during the attempt to recover from a lower case
the data. ‘x’ condition.
Pressing ‘C’ will cause the next new occurrence of that CMU: the CMU status based on Unit Data programming (see
message to be displayed. para 0).
Pressing ‘D’ will reverse the order of the bits in each byte of - The status shown is and has the same meaning as noted
data displayed. above for SIUs. The only difference is the number shown
Pressing “E’ then three digits will display the next occurrence when the address is active and operating properly (first
of the message for ### entered. position will show an ‘F’).
OUT FORM: the Form of the Output Assemblies based on Unit
Data programming (see para 0 and 0).
2.2.8.2 ITS Frames
‘1’ – ITS Cabinet Output Assemblies 14-0-0-0
The ITS Frames screens allow the user to view the data content ‘2’ – ITS Cabinet Output Assemblies 14-0-14-0
of ITS command and response frames. ‘3’ – ITS Cabinet Output Assemblies 14-0-6-0
PRESS "8" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU ‘5’ – ITS Cabinet Output Assemblies 6-0-0-0
EPAC ITS DISPLAY & OPS F-PRIOR MENU
1-INPUT ASSY DETECTORS ‘7’ – ITS Cabinet Output Assemblies 6-6-6-0
2-CMU LOAD SW DRIVERS MSG 61/67 OUT ‘8’ – ITS Cabinet Output Assemblies 6-6-6-6
3-CMU LONG STATUS MSG 189 IN ‘9’ – ITS Cabinet Output Assemblies 6-0-14-0
4-CMU CONFIG: DATAKEY MSG 193 IN
5-CMU SHORT STATUS MSG 195 IN ‘10’ – ITS Cabinet Output Assemblies 6-6-14-0
C-REFRESH 0-RUN ONCE ITS/CBD SEEK ‘11’ – CBD Cabinet Output Assembly
SIU:.....56..9A.... CMU:F... OUT FORM: 6 ‘U’ – UNKNOWN (not programmed)
‘S’ – SEEK – during initialization of ITS SDLC, while trying
o INPUT ASSY DETECTORS: provides viewing to validate the output format.
of the status of the inputs (mostly
detectors).
o CMU LOAD SW DRIVERS MSG 61/67 OUT:
2.2.8.2.1 Input Assy Detectors
provides viewing of the load switch driver
outputs.
o CMU LONG STATUS MSG 189 IN: provides
viewing of message 189 responses (CMU The status screen provided is dependent on whether an ITS or
Long Status). CBD cabinet is being utilized.
o CMU CONFIG STATUS MSG 193 IN:
provides viewing of message 193
responses (CMU Config Data Key). ITS Cabinet
o CMU SHORT STATUS MSG 195 IN: provides
viewing of message 195 responses (CMU
Short Status). The ITS Cabinet Input Assemblies (normally detectors) status
Line 7 options: screen is as follows:
C-REFRESH: Pressing the ‘C’ key while this menu is active will PRESS "1" FROM ABOVE MENU
refresh the line 8 status.
EPAC ITS INPUT ASSY DETS & 1stOPTOS ----
0-RUN ONCE ITS/CBD SEEK: Pressing the ‘O’ key while this SLOT#: 123456789012 123456789012
IN1 F: -----------1 IN1 W: -----------1
menu is active will cause the program to reinitialize the IN2 F: ------------ IN2 W: ------------
ITS SDLC processing. IN3 F: .......OFF.. IN3 W: .......OFF..
IN4 F: .......OFF.. IN4 W: .......OFF..
Line 8 status: IN5 F: .......OFF.. IN5 W: .......OFF..
ITS Pass Delay-> Peak:0 Now:0
SIU: the SIU status based on Unit Data programming (see para
0).  Help Screen is available.

Page 14 FRONT PANEL
1stOPTOS: First Opto Isolator Inputs Note: the CBD vehicle detectors order is as follows:
‘-’ (dash) – the SIU is enabled & the input is NOT active.
‘1’ (one) – the SIU is enabled & the input IS active. Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6
The Eagle EPAC follows the ATC ITS 2002 location for the Pin F 3 1 7 5 11 9
1stOPTOs to be in the First Output Assembly unless there
are no Output Assemblies, wherein the location of the Pin W 4 2 8 6 12 10
1stOPTOs becomes the First Input Assembly. PED DET (01-08): pedestrian detectors 01 to 08
IN1 F: Input Assembly #1 Pin F - Channel 1 status ‘.’ (dot) – the input is NOT active.
‘1’ (one) – the input IS active.
IN1 W: Input Assembly #1 Pin W - Channel 2 status ‘X’ – the input is NOT available.
IN2 F: Input Assembly #2 Pin F - Channel 1 status STOP TIME:
IN2 W: Input Assembly #2 Pin W - Channel 2 status LOCAL FLASH:
IN3 F: Input Assembly #3 Pin F - Channel 1 status INTERVAL ADVANCE:
IN3 W: Input Assembly #3 Pin W - Channel 2 status MANUAL CONTROL ENABLE:
IN4 F: Input Assembly #4 Pin F - Channel 1 status WALK REST MODIFIER:
IN4 W: Input Assembly #4 Pin W - Channel 2 status ‘.’ (dot) – the input is NOT active.
‘1’ (one) – the input IS active. For Local Flash, this
IN5 F: Input Assembly #5 Pin F - Channel 1 status represents the logical input as the physical input is
IN5 W: Input Assembly #5 Pin W - Channel 2 status False when in flash.
‘-’ (dash) – the SIU is enabled (Unit Data - F47) and the ‘ITS Pass Delay->’ - the delay in SB#1 (ITS SDLC Serial Bus 1)
slot Pin ‘F’ is NOT active. relative to the Tenth Second Task.
‘1’ – the SIU is enabled and the slot Pin ‘F’ IS active. ‘Peak’ - the largest delay since reset
‘..Off Line..’ – the SIU IS enabled but has not responded. ‘Now’ – the current delay (expected delay is zero)
‘…….OFF..’ – the SIU is NOT enabled (Unit Data - F47). This is a SB#1 performance indicator (pressing key ‘E’ will
‘ITS Pass Delay->’ - the delay in SB#1 (ITS SDLC Serial Bus 1) reset the peak value).
relative to the Tenth Second Task.
‘Peak’ - the largest delay since reset
‘Now’ – the current delay (expected delay is zero) 2.2.8.2.2 CMU Load Sw Drivers Msg 61/67 Out
This is a SB#1 performance indicator (pressing key ‘E’ will
reset the peak value).
The CMU Message 61/67 status screen is as follows:
PRESS "2" FROM ABOVE MENU
CBD Cabinet
EPAC CMU MSG 61/67 OUT DATA -> F ONLINE
LOAD SWITCHES & DARK MAP
CHNL=12345678 90123456 78901234 5678
The CBD Cabinet Input Assembly status screen is as follows: RED: 1--1111- -111---- -------- ----
YEL: -------- -------- -------- ----
PRESS "1" FROM ABOVE MENU GRN: -11----1 1------- -------- ----
DARK MAP: 00=M#1 F-PRIOR MENU
EPAC CBD INPUTS SIU -> 1 ONLINE ITS Pass Delay-> Peak:0 Now:0
VEH DET (01-12) ------------
PED DET (01-08) X.X.X.X.  Help Screen is available.
STOP TIME . LOCAL FLASH .
INTERVAL ADVANCE . OUT DATA ->:
MANUAL CONTROL ENABLE .
WALK REST MODIFIER . F ONLINE – the CMU address is online.
ITS Pass Delay-> Peak:0 Now:0 F OFFLINE – the CMU address is offline.
 Help Screen is available. CHNL RED: Channel Red Status
SIU -> 1: Status CHNL YEL: Channel Yellow Status

SIU -> 1 ONLINE – the SIU is enabled and responding CHNL GRN: Channel Green Status
correctly. ‘-’ (dash) – the output is NOT active.
SIU -> 1 OFFLINE – the SIU is enabled and NOT ‘1’ (one) – the output IS active.
responding.
SIU -> ? OFFLINE – when the Unit Data programming DARK MAP: see CMU programming of the expected dark
contains NO Output Format selection (see para 0). signals (i.e., pedestrians during flashing).
00 – Map 1 (EPAC - normal operation)
VEH DET (01-12): vehicle detectors 01 to 12 01 – Map 2 (EPAC - internally generated preemption)
‘-’ (dash) – the input is NOT active. 02 – Map 3 (not assigned)
‘1’ (one) – the input IS active. 03 – Map 4 (EPAC - internally generated flashing)

FRONT PANEL Page 15
‘ITS Pass Delay->’ - the delay in SB#1 (ITS SDLC Serial Bus 1) through same). The screens display a byte by byte
relative to the Tenth Second Task. presentation of the SB#1 frame content.
Each line begins with a ##> that notes the data frame byte
‘Now’ – the current delay (expected delay is zero)
number of the first data in the line. Each line ends with a <##
This is a SB#1 performance indicator (pressing key ‘E’ will
that notes the data frame byte number of the last data in the
line.
‘ITS Pass Delay->’ - the delay in SB#1 (ITS SDLC Serial Bus 1)
2.2.8.2.3 CMU Long Status Msg 189 In relative to the Tenth Second Task.
The CMU Long Status Message 189 In status screen is as This is a SB#1 performance indicator (pressing key ‘E’ will
follows: reset the peak value).

2.2.8.2.5 CMU Short Status Msg 195 In
EPAC CMU MSG 189 RSP F-PRIOR MENU
CMU STATUS - LONG FORMAT View 1 of 5
1> 189 000 00 00 00 00 ff 0f < 8
9> 00 00 ff 0e 00 00 ff 0f < 16
17> 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 < 24 The CMU Short Status Message 195 screen is as follows:
25> 00 00 00 00 00 00 7e 00 < 32
33> 117 121 120 000 000 120 119 119< 40 PRESS "5" FROM ABOVE MENU
EPAC CMU MSG 195 RSP F-PRIOR MENU
CMU STATUS - SHORT FORMAT View 1 of 1
 Help Screen is available. Help is restricted to the 1> 195 003 ff 0f 00 00 ff 0f < 8
current view (1-5). 9> 00 00 db 06 00 00 ff 0f < 16
17> 00 00 71 00 ff 00 000 000< 24
Five screens are required to present a complete Message 189
Response (use the A, B, Up, or Down arrow keys to cycle
through same). The screens display a byte by byte
presentation of the SB#1 frame content.
 Help Screen is available.
This screen presents a complete Message 195 Response. The
screen display a byte by byte presentation of the SB#1 frame
content.
line.
‘ITS Pass Delay->’ - the delay in SB#1 (ITS SDLC Serial Bus 1)
relative to the Tenth Second Task.
line.
Now’ – the current delay (expected delay is zero)
This is a SB#1 performance indicator (pressing key ‘E’ will ‘ITS Pass Delay->’ - the delay in SB#1 (ITS SDLC Serial Bus 1)
reset the peak value). relative to the Tenth Second Task.
2.2.8.2.4 CMU Config: Datakey Msg 193 In This is a SB#1 performance indicator (pressing key ‘E’ will
The CMU Config: Datakey Message 193 screen is as follows: 2.2.9 Input / Output
The Input / Output display allows the user to view the state of
EPAC CMU MSG 193 RSP F-PRIOR MENU each input and output pin present on the connectors. These
CMU CONFIGURATION View 1 of 13 displays show the status of the input and output pin
1> 01 e0 00 00 80 38 00 00 < 8
9> 00 07 00 00 80 03 00 40 < 16 regardless of the function caused by alternate I/O modes.
17> 1c 00 00 70 00 00 00 00 < 24
25> 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 < 32 PRESS "9" FROM ACTIVE STATUS MENU
33> 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 < 40
ITS Pass Delay-> Peak:0 Now:0 EPAC I/O MENU PRESS # DESIRED
1-ABC INPUT STATUS
 Help Screen is available. Help is restricted to the 2- D INPUT STATUS
current view (1-13). 3-ABC OUTPUT STATUS
4- D OUTPUT STATUS
Thirteen screens are required to present a complete Message
193 Response (use the A, B, Up, or Down arrow keys to cycle F-PRIOR MENU

Page 16 FRONT PANEL
The status screens provided is dependent on the software 2.2.9.1.2 D Input Status
option (FIO, TS2, ITS, & CBD see 0).
PRESS "2 FROM I/O MENU

2.2.9.1 FIO & TS2 (NEMA)
These status displays will appear when the software option is EPAC D INPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU
DB/SD8-. 01/SD2-. SC/SS5-.
either FIO or TS2. PE1-. DA/SD7-. OL/SD1-. DM/SS6-.
PE2-. SB/SD6-. AA/SS1-. CF ST -.
PE3-. SA/SD5-. AB/SS2-. MF ST -.
PE4-. O3/SD4-. AC/SS3-. RM ST -.
2.2.9.1.1 ABC Input Status 02/SD3-. AD/SS4-.
PRESS "1" FROM I/O MENU This display will show the status of all Connector D inputs.
Inputs will display a "1" next to the name when active.
EPAC ABC INPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU PE1 : Preempt One
ES -. TIB-. ST -.. VDET-........
MCE-. ILC-. ORC-.. PDET-........ PE2 : Preempt Two
EMR-. WRM-. RR -.. OMIT-........ PE3 : Preempt Three
NA2-. IA -. MX2-.. POMT-........ PE4 : Preempt Four
NA1-. TIA-. FO -.. HOLD-........
IOM-. FM -. PR -.. PMPT-X.X... DB/SD8: Dial B - System Detector 8
IMT-.. DA/SD7: Dial A - System Detector 7
SB/SD6: Split B - System Detector 6
 An 'X' in a field indicates the status is not provided. SA/SD5: Split A - System Detector 5
O3/SD4: Offset 3 - System Detector 4
ABC INPUT STATUS WILL BE AS FOLLOWS: O2/SD3: Offset 2 - System Detector 3
 Unit inputs will display a "1" next to the name when O1/SD2: Offset 1 - System Detector 2
active. OL/SD1: On Line - System Detector 1
 Ring inputs will display the ring number "1" and/or AA/SS1: Alt Sequence A - Special Status 1
"2" next to the name when active. AB/SS2: Alt Sequence B - Special Status 2
 Phase inputs will display the phase number "1 to 8" AC/SS3: Alt Sequence C - Special Status 3
next to the name when active, such as the VDET AD/SS4: Alt Sequence D - Special Status 4
above. SC/SS5: Set Clock - Special Status 5
UNIT INPUTS DM/SS6: Dimming - Special Status 6
ES: External Start Active CF/ST: Conflict Monitor Status
MCE: Manual Control Enable MF/ST: Manual Flash Status
EMR: External Minimum Recall RM/ST: Remote Flash Status
NA2: Non-Actuated Two
NA1: Non-Actuated One
IOM: Input / Output Mode Bits value 2.2.9.1.3 ABC Output Status
TIB: Test Input B
ILC: Indicator Lamp Control
WRM: Walk Rest Modifier PRESS "3 FROM I/O MENU
IA: Interval Advance
TIA: Test Input A EPAC ABC OUTPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU
FM: Free Mode PHSE 12345678 PHSE 12345678 OVLP ABCD
GRN-........ ON -........ GRN-....
RING INPUTS YEL-........ NXT-........ YEL-....
RED-........ CHK-........ RED-....
ST: Stop Time DWK-........ FM -. CS1-...
ORC: Omit Red Clear PCL-........ VM -. CS2-...
RR: Red Rest Mode WLK-........ FL -.
MX2: Maximum Two
FO: Force Off This display will show the status of all Connector A, B, & C
PR: Pedestrian Recycle outputs. Outputs will display a "*" next to the name when
IMT: Inhibit Max Termination active.
PHASE INPUTS Under PHSE 12345678
VDET: Vehicle Detector GRN: Phase Green
PDET: Pedestrian Detector YEL: Phase Yellow
OMIT: Omit RED: Phase Red
POMT: Pedestrian Omit DWK: Phase Don’t Walk
HOLD: Hold PCL: Phase Pedestrian Clear
PMPT: Preempt WLK: Phase Walk
ON: Phase On

FRONT PANEL Page 17
NXT: Phase Next  VEH DET (Vehicle Detector) inputs will display a "1"
CHK: Phase Check next to the name when active.
FM: Fault Monitor  PED DET (Pedestrian Detector)
VM: Voltage Monitor  PREEMPT (Preemption)
FL: Flash Logic
UNIT INPUTS
Under OVLP ABCD ST : Stop Time
GRN: Overlap Green IA : Interval Advance
YEL: Overlap Yellow LF :
RED: Overlap Red MCE: Manual Control Enable
CS1: Coded Status Ring 1 RR :
CS2: Coded Status Ring 2 WRM: Walk Rest Modifier
2.2.9.1.4 D Output Status 2.2.9.1.2 D Input Status
PRESS "4 FROM I/O MENU PRESS "2 FROM I/O MENU
EPAC D OUTPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU EPAC D INPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU
DB/SD8-X 01/SD2-X SC/SS5-X
A1-. DA/SF7-. SA/SF5-. O1/SF2-. PE1-X DA/SD7-X OL/SD1-X DM/SS6-X
A2-. DB/SF8-. SB/SF6-. 02/SF3-. PE2-X SB/SD6-X AA/SS1-X CF ST –X
A3-. FL/SF1-. 03/SF4-. PE3-X SA/SD5-X AB/SS2-X MF ST –X
PE4-X O3/SD4-X AC/SS3-X RM ST –X
02/SD3-X AD/SS4-X
 An 'X' in a field indicates the status is not provided.

This display will show the status of all Connector D outputs.
Same as shown in 0.
Outputs will display a "1" next to the name when active.
A1: Auxiliary 1
A2: Auxiliary 2
A3: Auxiliary 3 2.2.9.1.3 ABC Output Status
DA/SF7: Dial A / Special Function 7
DB/SF8: Dial B / Special Function 8
FL/SF1: Flash / Special Function 1 PRESS "3 FROM I/O MENU
SA/SF5: Split A / Special Function 5
SB/SF6: Split A / Special Function 6 EPAC ABC OUTPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU
PHSE 12345678 OVLP ABCD
01/SF2: Offset 1 / Special Function 2 GRN-........ GRN-....
02/SF3: Offset 2 / Special Function 3 YEL-........ YEL-....
03/SF4: Offset 3 / Special Function 4 RED-........ RED-....
DWK-........
PCL-........ WD -.
WLK-........ DR -.
2.2.9.2 ITS & CBD Options
These status display will appear when the software option is This display will show the status of all outputs. Outputs will
either ITS or CBD. display a "*" next to the name when active.
Under PHSE 12345678
GRN: Phase Green
2.2.9.1.1 ABC Input Status
YEL: Phase Yellow
RED: Phase Red
DWK: Phase Don’t Walk
PRESS "1" FROM I/O MENU PCL: Phase Pedestrian Clear
WLK: Phase Walk
EPAC ABC INPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU
INPUT NUMBER ... 1234567890 Under OVLP ABCD
VEH DET (01-10) .......... ST - .
VEH DET (11-20) .......... IA - . GRN: Overlap Green
VEH DET (21-30) .......... LF - . YEL: Overlap Yellow
VEH DET (31-40) .......... MCE- . RED: Overlap Red
PED DET (01-08) X.X.X.X. RR - .
PREEMPT (01-06) ...... WRM- . WD:
DR:
 An 'X' in a field indicates the status is not provided.
ABC INPUT STATUS WILL BE AS FOLLOWS: 2.2.9.1.4 D Output Status

Page 18 FRONT PANEL
PRESS "4 FROM I/O MENU

2.3 UTILITIES
EPAC D OUTPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU
A1-. DA/SF7-. SA/SF5-. O1/SF2-.

A2-. DB/SF8-. SB/SF6-. 02/SF3-.
A3-. FL/SF1-. 03/SF4-.
Utilities allow the user to display and/or enter controller
parameters to:
1) Gain Access
2) Lose Access
 An 'X' in a field indicates the status is not provided. 3) Enter a new personal access code
Same as shown in 0. 4) Print Unit Parameters
5) Transfer Unit Parameters
2.2.10 MMU Monitoring 6) Load Default parameters
7) Run Diagnostics
The MMU Monitoring display allows the user to view the state To enter data for these intervals requires user gain access.
of each MMU Channel input and current Fault and Status
information.
2.3.1 Utilities Menu
The Utilities Menu allows the user to select which utility
EPAC MMU MONITOR F-PRIOR MENU
CHANNEL.....123456789 0123456 feature to be addressed.
RED...: 101110111 1111111
YELLOW: 000000000 0000000 PRESS "2" FROM MAIN MENU
GREEN.: 010001000 0000000
EPAC UTILITIES PRESS # DESIRED
FAULTS: ...
STATUS: .REN. F-PRIOR MENU 1-ENABLE ACCESS 5-UNIT TRANSFER
2-DISABLE ACCESS 6-LOAD DEFAULT
3-CHANGE ACCESS 7-DIAGNOSTICS
The status displayed is reported to the CU via TS 2 Port 1. 4-PRINT OUT 8-CONFIGURE PORTS
B-RUN EBM ON RESTART
When Port 1 communications is not possible, one of the F-PRIOR MENU
following messages will be displayed:
 PORT 1 DISABLED 1) ENABLE ACCESS provides for gaining access.
 MMU ADDRESS NOT ENABLED 2) DISABLE ACCESS provides for losing access.
 MMU IN RESPONSE FRAME FAULT 3) CHANGE ACCESS provides for changing the access
When Port 1 communications is possible, the following status code.
will be displayed: 4) PRINT OUT provides for printing CU data and reports.
5) UNIT TRANSFER provides for transferring CU data to a
CHANNEL STATUS WILL BE AS FOLLOWS: like unit.
 Unit will display a "1" when the respective input is 6) LOAD DEFAULT provides for loading the resident
active or a “0” when the input is not active. default parameter set as the active database.
MMU FAULTS WILL BE AS FOLLOWS: 7) DIAGNOSTICS provides for running the resident
 CON - Conflict Fault diagnostic routines.
 RED - Red Fault 8) CONFIGURE PORTS provides for viewing and
 FLD - Field Check Fault changing Port 2 and Port 3 configuration data for
 DIN - Dual Indication Fault communications or printer.
 BND - Blinking Noise Fault B) RUN EBM ON RESTART provides for running the Eagle
 WDG - Watchdog Fault Boot Manager on Eagle EPAC M50 & 2070 ATC
 DIA - MMU Diagnostic Fault hardware only.
 MCL - Minimum Clearance Fault


P1T - Port 1 Time Out Fault
CVM - Controller Voltage Monitor Fault
2.3.2 Enable Access
 VM1 - 24 Volt Monitor 1 Fault This function allows the user to gain access.
 VM2 - 24 Volt Monitor 2 Fault
PRESS "1" FROM UTILITIES MENU
MMU STATUS WILL BE AS FOLLOWS:
 VMI - Volt Monitor Inhibit EPAC ENABLE ACCESS
 RST - Reset
 REN - Red Enable ..........................
.........VARIABLE.........
 ORT - Output Relay Transferred ..........MESSAGE.........
 IRF - Immediate Response To Fail ..........................
 LFS - Local Flash F-PRIOR MENU
 SFC - Startup Flash Call

FRONT PANEL Page 19
* VARIABLE MESSAGE will be: The default access code "0000" will work until a specific
ACCESS IS ENABLED personal access code has been entered.
NO CHANGE IS NECESSARY
Any number between 0 and 9998 may be chosen as the access
or:
ACCESS IS DISABLED code. A new access code replaces any previous access code.
Note that the access code can only be changed after access has
ENTER THE FOUR DIGIT CODE been gained.
AND PRESS "E" : ....
Entry of "9999" as an access code will set the operation
or:
IMPROPER ACCESS CODE whereby access is continually enabled (disables all access
PRESS "E" TO CONTINUE requirements until a number between "0000" and "9998"
inclusive is entered as a personal access code).
Code "0000" is the default access code. This requires any
number of zeros be entered before access is provided. CAUTION: Be sure to write your personal access code down
and store it in a safe place. If you should forget your specific
code, the units memory device which stores it will have to be
2.3.3 Disable Access re-initialized and all data will be lost!
This function allows the user to lose access. If units are returned for repair, the personal access code
should be denoted on the unit.
PRESS "2" FROM UTIL.MENU
EPAC DISABLE ACCESS 2.3.5 Print Out Menu

.........VARIABLE......... It is possible to print CU parameters and reports to an 80
..........MESSAGE......... column or larger serial printer. The printer must be RS232
.
compatible, be able to receive ASCII coded serial data at 1200
F-PRIOR MENU baud, 8 bit, Odd parity, and provide X-On/Off signals.
The Print Out Sub-Menu allows the user to select which CU
* VARIABLE MESSAGE will be: data area is to be printed.
ACCESS IS DISABLED
NO CHANGE IS NECESSARY PRESS "4" FROM UTIL.MENU
or: EPAC PRINT OUT - Pending - 1200,8O1
ACCESS IS ENABLED 1-TRAFFIC * MAKE SURE THE
PRESS "E" TO DISABLE 2-COORDINATION PRINTER PORT IS
3-TIME BASE SET PROPERLY AND
or: 4-PREEMPTION THE PRINTER IS
ACCESS IS PERPETUAL 5-SYSTEM DATA ON, READY, &
NO CHANGE IS POSSIBLE 6-SYSTEM REPORTS HOOKED UP.
PRESS # DESIRED F-PRIOR MENU
Once access is gained, it is automatically turned off
approximately ten (10) minutes after either 1) access was
1) TRAFFIC will print Basic Traffic parameters.
gained or 2) the last keystroke. When "9999" has been entered
2) COORDINATION will print Coordination parameters.
as the code, access can not be turned off.
3) TIME BASE will print Time Base parameters.
4) PREEMPTION will print Preemption parameters.
2.3.4 Change Access 5) SYSTEM DATA will print System parameters.
6) SYSTEM REPORTS will print System reports.
This function allows the user to enter a new personal access
Complete the setup for the printout by pressing the key for
code.
the database to print and wait for completion.
PRESS "3" FROM UTIL. MENU
The printout will be in a form similar to the display in which
EPAC CHANGE ACCESS CODE the data is entered and/or viewed. Supporting code definition
will be printed along with the parameter it represents.
.........VARIABLE......... Should an error occur during print, an error message will be
..........MESSAGE......... displayed. Retry the function after checking all connections.
‘PENDING’ means the Port is not currently in print mode. The
F-PRIOR MENU
CU enters print mode when key 1-6 is pressed. When this
display is active and ‘PENDING’ is not shown, the EPAC will not
* VARIABLE MESSAGE will be: respond to messages sent to the RS232 port.
ACCESS IS DISABLED
NO CHANGE IS POSSIBLE
or: 2.3.6 Unit Transfer Menu

ENTER THE FOUR DIGIT CODE
AND PRESS "E" : .... It is possible to transfer parameters between like model CUs
via the RS232 connector. The Unit Transfer Sub-Menu allows

Page 20 FRONT PANEL
the user to select which controller parameter area is to be A CPU speed comparisons check is performed to determine
transferred to another unit. fast to slow transfer requests. When this occurs, the following
data is checked as an indication of content that is not
The transmitting or receiving unit may initiate this function.
supported in 8 Mhz units:
PRESS "5"FROM UTIL.MENU  Determine if Phases 10 - 16 are assigned to a Ring.
 Determine if Phases 10 - 16 have a Next Phase assigned.
EPAC UNIT TRANSFER 19200,8N1  Determine if Phases 1 - 9 have a Next Phase of 10-16 assigned.
1-TRAFFIC
2-COORDINATION * MAKE SURE THE OTHER  Determine if Default Alternate Sequence is other than 0-15.
3-TIME BASE UNIT IS SET TO THE  Determine if Phases 10 - 16 are assigned as Flash Entry or Flash
4-PREEMPTION SAME BAUD RATE, & IS Exit phase(s).
5-SYSTEM ON, READY, AND
A-DO THEM ALL HOOKED UP.  Determine if any Port 1 Address is set as Present.
PRESS # DESIRED F-PRIOR MENU  Determine if Vehicle Detector 33 - 64 is assigned as a Phase
Vehicle, Phase Pedestrian, Speed Trap, or System detector.
1) TRAFFIC will transfer Basic Traffic parameters.
Transmit (Source =16 MHZ / Destination = 8 MHZ):
2) COORDINATION will transfer Coordination
parameters. If the data check does not identify data that will be
3) TIME BASE will transfer Time Base parameters. unsupported in the 8 MHZ machine, the transfer proceeds
4) PREEMPTION will transfer Preemption parameters. without user intervention or warning screens.
5) SYSTEM DATA will transfer System parameters.
A) DO THEM ALL will transfer ALL parameters. If the data check identifies data that will be unsupported in
the 8 MHZ machine, the transfer aborts to an information
AFTER A SELECTION FROM TRANSFER MENU screen from which the user has only Key ‘F’ to return to the
Prior Menu.
EPAC UNIT TRANSFER 19200,8N1
TRAFFIC All data check processing occurs before any data transfer takes
WARNING....THIS OPTION WILL REPLACE place.
ALL CURRENT OPERATING DATA IN THE
RECEIVING CONTROLLER UNIT..........
- PRESS "A" TO TRANSMIT EPAC UNIT TRANSFER: SENDING
- PRESS "B" TO RECEIVE
F-PRIOR MENU TRANSFER HAS BEEN ABORTED!!!
THIS UNIT: 16 MHz, OTHER UNIT: 8 MHz
PARAMETERS EXIST WHICH ARE NOT
SUPPORTED IN AN 8 MHz UNIT.
Only one of the two units may have a unit transfer display
active to transfer data. PRESS "F" FOR PRIOR MENU
The approximate time to transfer at 1200 baud is as follows:

Receive (Source =16 Mhz / Destination = 8 Mhz):
FUNCTION RECEIVE TRANSMIT
The data content is unknown until individual blocks arrive.
Traffic 25 sec 15 sec
Therefore, a warning screen is provided which allows the user
Coordination 25 sec 15 sec to stop or proceed with the original request.
Time Base 30 sec 20 sec EPAC UNIT TRANSFER: RECEIVING
Preempt 5 sec 3 sec WARNING..DIFFERENT CPU SPEEDS!!!
THIS UNIT: 8 MHz CPU
System 5 sec 3 sec OTHER UNIT: 16 MHz CPU
Complete the setup for the transfer by pressing the key for PRESS "E" TO CONTINUE TRANSFER
transmit or receive and wait for completion. PRESS "F" FOR PRIOR MENU
Should an error occur during transfer, an error message will

be displayed. Retry the function after checking all As the data blocks arrive and are checked, if the data check
connections. does not identify data that will be unsupported in the 8 MHZ
machine, the transfer proceeds without user intervention or
A 'firmware version compatibility check' is performed and a warning screens.
transfer abort will occur when the two units have
incompatible data structures. If the data check identifies data that will be unsupported in
the 8 MHZ machine, the transfer aborts to an information
EPAC UNIT TRANSFER screen from which the user has only Key ‘F’ to return to the
Prior Menu.
WARNING..INCOMPATIBLE DATA STRUCTURES!!!
UNIT TRANSFER OPERATION
IS NOT ALLOWED.
PRESS "F" FOR PRIOR MENU

FRONT PANEL Page 21
PRESS "C" FROM LOAD DEFAULT. MENU

EPAC UNIT TRANSFER: RECEIVING
EPAC LOAD DEFAULT PARAMETERS
TRANSFER HAS BEEN ABORTED!!! ACTIVE CURRENT SOFTWARE OPTION: ITS v1
THIS UNIT: 8 MHz, OTHER UNIT: 16 MHz SELECT THE NEXT CURRENT SOFTWARE OPTION:
PARAMETERS EXIST WHICH ARE NOT 1-FIO (STD -2A OR -8) 4-ITS v1
SUPPORTED IN AN 8 MHz UNIT. 2-TS2 (TYPE 1 OR 2) 5-RESERVED
3-NYS (w/ -2A FIO) 6-CBD
PRESS "F" FOR PRIOR MENU PRESS # DESIRED
=== EXIT WITHOUT CHANGE ==> F-PRIOR MENU
Since data is analyzed as received, some data may be placed 1) FIO (STD -2A OR -8) - this option establishes defaults
into the unit prior to receipt of a data block that generates an values specific to 2070 ATC units with -2A or -8 Field IO.
abort command. 2) TS2 (TYPE 1 OR 2) - this option establishes defaults
values specific to NEMA TS 2 cabinet applications.
2.3.7 Load Default 3) NYS (w/ -2A FIO) - this option establishes defaults
values specific to New York State 2070 ATC units with -
This function allows the user to load the PROM resident 2A Filed IO.
default parameter set into memory to become the active 4) ITS v1 - this option establishes defaults values
database. specific to ITS v1 cabinet applications.
5) RESERVED - this option is not used at this time.
PRESS "6" FROM UTIL. MENU 6) CBD - this option establishes defaults values specific
to CBD cabinet applications.
EPAC LOAD DEFAULT PARAMETERS
WARNING....THIS OPTION WILL REPLACE When any valid key is pressed (1-6) with this screen active, the
ALL CURRENT OPERATING PARAMETERS
..CURRENT MODE: FULL FUNCTION EPAC.. response is to revert to the Load Default screen. If the active
A-LOAD: TX DIAMOND CONTROL Software Option was changes, ‘DEFAULT PARAMETERS
E-LOAD: CURRENT MODE LOADED’ will appear on line 8.
C-CHG CURRENT SOFTWARE OPTION: ITS v1
D-DATAKEY LOAD/STORE F-PRIOR MENU However, if the key F is pressed, on reverting to the Load
Default screen will include ‘LOAD DEFAULT NOT REQUIRED’
OR: will appear on line 8. When the user selects the Software
Option that is currently operating, this same text will appear
EPAC LOAD DEFAULT PARAMETERS on reverting to the Load Default screen.
WARNING....THIS OPTION WILL REPLACE
ALL CURRENT OPERATING PARAMETERS
..CURRENT MODE: TX DIAMOND CONTROL.. 2.3.7.2 Datakey Load/Store
A-LOAD: FULL FUNCTION EPAC
E-LOAD: CURRENT MODE
C-CHG CURRENT SOFTWARE OPTION: ITS v1 This screen allows the user to manage the unit’s cfgdata via
D-DATAKEY LOAD/STORE F-PRIOR MENU the datakey.
PRESS "D" FROM LOAD DEFAULT. MENU
CURRENT MODE : FULL FUNCTION EPAC - provides user
configuration of phase and ring configuration. UNLESS YOU EPAC DATAKEY LOAD/STORE PARAMETERS
DESIRE ONE OF THE SEQUENCES DEFINED IN SECTION 0, THIS 1-LOAD CFG DATA FROM DATAKEY
IS WHAT YOUR CURRENT MODE SHOULD READ. 2-SAVE CFG DATA TO DATAKEY
3-ERASE A DATAKEY
Throughout this manual, parameters will be simulated for 4-VERIFY A DATAKEY
display purposes. Each such display will include the default
F-PRIOR MENU
data where default data is provided. In cases where there is no
default data, it shall be so noted.
1) LOAD CFG DATA FROM DATAKEY – copies the
CURRENT MODE: TX DIAMOND CONTROL - provides for the contents of the datakey into temporary storage,
specialized phase and ring configurations required to perform validates the compatibility of the key data against the
the Diamond Intersection control sequences for Texas DOT. cfgdata structure of the running unit and if the key
See Section 0 for details on sequence, control, and default data is:
parameters.
- Compatible - data change will occur, and
The normal line 8 text after key A or E is ‘DEFAULT ‘DATAKEY VALUES LOADED’ will appear.
PARAMETERS LOADED.’
- Not Compatible - data change will NOT occur, and
‘DATAKEY VALUES NOT LOADED’ will appear.
2.3.7.1 Load Default - Software Option - When the data is ready to be transferred from the key to the
This function allows the user to change the current Software unit, line 7 will read: PRESS F-TO FINISH XFER or C-TO
Option of the device. The Software Option establishes default CANCEL.
values specific to a type of application. 2) SAVE CFG DATA TO DATAKEY – copies the contents of
the unit’s cfgdata to the datakey and … more text here.

Page 22 FRONT PANEL
3) ERASE A DATAKEY – erases the contents of the A) EXIT DIAGNOSTICS will return to normal traffic
datakey and … more text here. control after doing a restart.
4) ) VERIFY A DATAKEY – compares the contents of the
PRESS "1" FROM DIAGNOSTICS SUB-MENU
datakey to the unit’s cfgdata and … more text here.
The unit response to a selection will overwrite the normal EPAC DIAGNOSTICS
screen text. Pressing a number key will restore the normal CHARACTER SET:0123456789abcdefghijklmnop
screen text. qrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!@#$
%^&*()_+ `[]<>,./³
2.3.8 Diagnostics KEYPAD TEST: _

F-PRIOR MENU
This function allows the user to run the PROM resident

diagnostic routines to check the CU hardware. See Section 0 The keypad/display diagnostic will begin with the above
for more details on diagnostics. display. It will automatically display all characters the display
is capable of generating as shown in the top part of the
PRESS "7" FROM UTIL. MENU
display. The lower part will display each keys identity as it is
EPAC DIAGNOSTICS
pressed. The "F" key will abort the routine and return to the
prior menu.
WARNING....THE CONTROLLER UNIT SHOULD
NOT BE IN CONTROL OF AN INTERSECTION PRESS "2" FROM DIAGNOSTICS SUB-MENU
WHILE RUNNING DIAGNOSTICS.
- PRESS "E" TO CONTINUE INPUT DIAGNOSTIC STANDARD
ES -. TIB-. ST -.. VDET-........
F-PRIOR MENU MCE-. ILC-. ORC-.. PDET-........
EMR-. WRM-. RR -.. OMIT-........
NA2-. IA -. MX2-.. POMT-........
NA1-. TIA-. FO -.. HOLD-........
IOM-0 FM - . PR -.. PMPT-X.X...
ANY SPECIAL-. IMT-.. F-PRIOR MENU
EPAC INTERNAL DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
SOFTWARE CLK: MON 3/30/92 13:57:37
RTC IC CLK: MON 3/30/92 13:57:37 The standard input diagnostic will begin with the above
ROM TEST....: PASSED display assuming no inputs to the CU are active.
EEPROM TEST : PASSED
RAM TEST....: PASSED DYNAMIC INPUT STATUS WILL BE AS FOLLOWS:
PRESS "E" TO CONTINUE
 Unit inputs will display a "1" next to the name when
active.
SOFTWARE CLK and RTC IC CLK refer to the Software Clock  Ring inputs will display the ring number "1" and/or
and Real Time IC Clock. The Real Time IC Clock is read and "2" next to the name when active.
used to initialize the Software Clock on power up. Thereafter,  Phase inputs will display the phase number "1 to 8"
the Software Clock will maintain the date/time data updating next to the name when active, such as the VDET
the Real Time IC Clock as necessary. A difference should not above.
exist between the data presented by these two devices.
UNIT INPUTS
If an error is found, the display will provide a message that ES : External Start Active
will define the element which caused the error. The following MCE: Manual Control Enable
are worst case messages: EMR: External Minimum Recall
ROM TEST - FAILED NA2: Non-Actuated Two
EEPROM TEST - FAILED NA1: Non-Actuated One
RAM TEST - FAILED IOM: Input / Output Mode value
TIB: Test Input B
The Diagnostics Sub-Menu allows the user to select which ILC: Indicator Lamp Control
Diagnostics routine to be initiated. WRM: Walk Rest Modifier
IA : Interval Advance
EPAC DIAGNOSTICS PRESS # DESIRED
TIA: Test Input A
1-KEYPAD TEST FM: Free Mode
2-STANDARD INPUT
3-SPECIAL INPUT RING INPUTS
4-OUTPUT TEST ST : Stop Time
5-LOOP BACK I/O TEST
F-EXIT DIAGNOSTICS TO RESTART ORC: Omit Red Clear
RR : Red Rest Mode
1) KEYPAD TEST will start that diagnostic. MX2: Maximum Two
2) STANDARD INPUT will start that diagnostic . FO : Force Off
3) SPECIAL INPUT will start that diagnostic. PR : Pedestrian Recycle
4) OUTPUT TEST will start that diagnostic . IMT: Inhibit Max Termination
5) LOOP BACK I/O TEST will start that diagnostic. PHASE INPUTS

FRONT PANEL Page 23
VDET: Vehicle Detector is active and which will become active next. The routine will
PDET: Pedestrian Detector automatically sequence through all outputs one at a time,
OMIT: Omit each being active for approximately one second to allow time
POMT: Pedestrian Omit for visual verification. The routine will repeat until
HOLD: Hold interrupted by pressing the "F" key.
OTHER PRESS "5" FROM DIAGNOSTICS SUB-MENU
PMPT: Preempt 1-6
ANY SPECIAL: This will display a "1" when any special input EPAC LOOP BACK I/O DIAGNOSTIC
(REQUIRES SPECIAL CABLE)
is active while displaying this window.
PRESS "3" FROM DIAGNOSTICS SUB-MENU FAILED
INPUT DIAGNOSTIC SPECIAL

DB/SD8-. 01/SD2-. ../SS5-. F-PRIOR MENU
PE1-. DA/SD7-. OL/SD1-. DM/SS6-.
PE2-. SB/SD6-. AA/SS1-. CF/ST -.
PE3-. SA/SD5-. AB/SS2-. MF/ST -. The Loop Back I/O diagnostic will begin with the above display
PE4-. O3/SD4-. AC/SS3-. RM/ST -.
02/SD3-. AD/SS4-. active. After a few seconds, the message "PASSED" or "FAILED"
ANY STANDARD -. F-PRIOR MENU will denote the results of the test.
The special input diagnostic will begin with the above display 2.3.9 Configure Ports
assuming no inputs to the CU are active (Inputs will display a
"1" next to the name when active). The Configure Ports Menu allows the user to select the port
and functional parameters to view or edit.
Dynamic Status inputs will be as follows:
PRESS "8" FROM UTILITIES MENU
SPECIAL INPUTS
PE1 : Preempt One EPAC CONFIGURE PORTS
PE2 : Preempt Two
PE3 : Preempt Three 1-PORT 2 PRINT 5-NETWORK CONFIG
2-PORT 2 COMM 6-SCOOT COMM
PE4 : Preempt Four 3-PORT 3 COMM 7-PORT 1 COMM
DB/SD8: Dial B - System Detector 8 4-IP ADDRESSING 8-GPS CONFIG
DA/SD7: Dial A - System Detector 7
SA/SD5: Split A - System Detector 5
O3/SD4: Offset 3 - System Detector 4 1. PORT 2 PRINT: provides view/edit of Port 2 printer
O2/SD3: Offset 2 - System Detector 3 parameters.
OL/SD1: On Line - System Detector 1 2. PORT 2 COMM: provides view/edit of Port 2 comm
AA/SS1: Alt Sequence A - Special Status 1 parameters.
AB/SS2: Alt Sequence B - Special Status 2 3. PORT 3 COMM: provides view/edit of Port 3 comm
AC/SS3: Alt Sequence C - Special Status 3 parameters.
AD/SS4: Alt Sequence D - Special Status 4
SC/SS5: Set Clock - Special Status 5 EPAC M30/M40 units do NOT support the following menu
DM/SS6: Dimming - Special Status 6 options:
CF/ST : Conflict Monitor Status 1. IP ADDRESSING: provides view/edit of IP Addressing
MF/ST : Manual Flash Status parameters.
RM/ST : Remote Flash Status
2. NETWORK CONFIG: provides view/edit of Network
OTHER parameters.
ANY STANDARD: This will display a "1" when any standard
input is active while displaying this window. 3. SCOOT COMM: provides view/edit of Scoot parameters.
PRESS "4" FROM DIAGNOSTICS SUB-MENU 4. PORT 1 COMM: provides view/edit of Port 1 disable/enable
parameter.
EPAC DIAGNOSTIC: OUTPUT TEST
5. GPS CONFIG: provides view/edit of the GPS parameters.
ACTIVE OUTPUT: RED, PHASE 1
NEXT OUTPUT: YEL, PHASE 1

2.3.9.1 Port 2 Print
A-ADVANCE B-PAUSE F-PRIOR MENU The Port 2 Print screen allows the user to view/edit the
parameters for printing via Port 2.
The output diagnostic will begin with the above display with
Phase 1 Red output active. The display denotes which output

Page 24 FRONT PANEL
PRESS "1" FROM CONFIGURE PORTS MENU

Primary EPAC Port 2
EPAC - PORT 2 PRINT 1200,8O1 Secondary EPAC Port 2
BAUD RATE: 0 (0-1200 2-4800 4- 9600)
(1-2400 3-N.S. 5-19200) 1
DATA BITS: 0 (0-EIGHT 1-SEVEN) Primary Terminal Port (*)
PARITY...: 0 (0-ODD 1-NONE 2-EVEN) The Eagle EPAC M50 Port 2 (25 pin) connector is equipped
STOP BITS: 1 (DISPLAY OF BITS USED) with two serial channels as allowed by the RS 232
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU standard. The normal (primary) channel is the default
Port 2 Comm channel while the secondary channel is the
 Default Data is as shown. default Terminal Port. These may be reversed by entering
‘1’ for Port 2 IO.
This configuration (1200,8O1) is compatible with existing
Eagle MARC300 & Eagle EPAC300 printers. Port 2 IO – 2070 ATC Units:
1. BAUD RATE: defines the communications speed. Often PORT 2 IO Conn # Function
referred to as bits per second (technically inaccurate but C50S Terminal Port
widely accepted). 0
- EPAC M30/M40 units support options 0-5 (3=7200). C20S / C22S EPAC Port 2
- EPAC M50 & 2070 ATC units support asnoted above.
C50S EPAC Port 2
2. DATA BITS: number of data bits in each character frame. 1
C20S / C22S Terminal Port (*)
3. PARITY: parity of the character frame. When PORT 2 IO is ‘0’, the Eagle EPAC300 Comm Port 2
will appear on 2070 ATC Slot A2 / H1 Connectors and
4. STOP BITS: number of stop bits in the character frame.
require Flow Control as follows:
- A display only field (no entry is allowed).
Slot H1 Module Conn # DCD CTS
2.3.9.2 Port 2 Comm 2070-6 C20S 0 1
The Port 2 Comm screen allows the user to view/edit the 2070-7 C22S 0 0
parameters for communications via Port 2. When PORT 2 IO is ‘1’, the EPAC300 Comm Port 2 will
appear on the front panel connector C50S.
PRESS "2" FROM CONFIGURE MENU
Communications via C50S supports a maximum speed of
38400 bps and does not support any Flow Control (DCD &
EPAC - PORT 2 COMM 1200,8N1
BAUD RATE: 0 (0-1200 2-4800 5-19200) CTS = 0).
(1-2400 4-9600 6-38400) NOTE: To enable communications on C50S, the mating
DCD FCONT: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
connector must have Pin 1 & 5 connected.
CTS FCONT: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
PORT 2 IO: 0 (0-STD 1-ALT) The value of Port 2 IO and relative functionality is ONLY
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU determined at unit restart (power up or reboot).
(*) When the software supports Scoot or UTCS operation,
 Default Data is as shown. the receipt of a Scoot or UTCS definition will cause the
Terminal Port to cease. Any currently operating programs
1. BAUD RATE: defines the communications speed. It is often started from the now deceased Terminal Port will contend
referred to as bits per second (bps), which is technically for SP2 resources causing Scoot or the program to appear
inaccurate but widely accepted. non-functional. The Eagle EPAC300 Software (v3.32b to
- EPAC M30/M40 units support options 0-4 (3=7200). v3.32g) utilized the Aux On/Off Switch for this function.
- EPAC M50 & 2070 ATC units support is noted above.
EPAC M30/M40 units do NOT support the following menu
2.3.9.3 Port 3 Comm
options:
1. DCD FCONT (Data Carrier Detect Flow Control) - When set The Port 3 Comm screen allows the user to view/edit the
for NO, the status of the DCD input will be considered parameters for communications via Port 3.
active always. PRESS "3" FROM CONFIGURE MENU
2. CTS FCONT (Clear To Send Flow Control) - When set for
EPAC - PORT 3 COMM 1200,8N1
NO, the status of the CTS input will be considered active BAUD RATE: 0 (0-1200 2-4800 5-19200)
always. (1-2400 4-9600 6-38400)
3. PORT 2 IO: defines connector (hardware input /output) on DCD FCONT: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
which Port 2 communications appears. CTS FCONT: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
PORT 3 IO: 0 (0-STD 1-IP)
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
Port 2 IO – Eagle EPAC M50 Units:
PORT 2 IO Channel Function  Default Data is as shown.
0 Secondary Terminal Port

FRONT PANEL Page 25
The definition for parameters is the same as Port 2 Comm messages based on the IP address of the destination. The
above except as follows: format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address
written as four numbers separated by periods. Each
1. PORT 3 IO: defines whether Port 3 communications
number can be zero to 255. For example, 1.160.10.240
appears on the normal connectors or is routed via an IP
could be an IP address.
network (Ethernet).
Within an isolated network, you can assign IP addresses at
- EPAC M30/M40 units do NOT support this parameter.
random as long as each one is unique. However,
When Port 3 IO is ‘1’, the BAUD RATE, DCD FCONT, & CTS connecting a private network to the Internet requires
FCONT have no impact. using registered IP addresses (called Internet addresses)
to avoid duplicates.
WARNING: An entry other than 1200 baud for most FSK
Modems will result in the port not functioning. 1. CIDR: This entry allows the user an alternate method for
entering the subnet mask. Instead of entering
Port 3 IO – 2070 ATC Units: 255.255.0.0 for a CLASS B subnet one can enter the
The Eagle EPAC300 Comm Port 3 will appear on 2070 ATC number 16 in the CIDR field to achieve the same effect.
Slot A2 / H1 Connectors and requires Flow Control as That alone does not justify having the data entry.
follows: However; when one wishes to use a Classless Inter-
Slot H1 Module Conn # DCD CTS Domain Route (CIDR) the subnet mask such as
255.255.128.0 can be set up by entering a 17 for the CIDR
field.
2070-6 C2S 0 1
2. SUBNET MSK: A subnet is a portion of a network that
2070-7 C21S 0 0 shares a common address component. On TCP/IP
networks, subnets are defined as all devices whose IP
The value of Port 3 IO and relative functionality is ONLY addresses have the same prefix. For example, all devices
determined at unit restart (power up or reboot). with IP addresses that start with 100.100.100. would be
part of the same subnet. Dividing a network into subnets
is useful for both security and performance reasons. IP
2.3.9.4 IP Addressing networks are divided using a subnet mask.
A mask is used to determine what subnet an IP address
The IP Addressing screen allows the user to view/edit the
belongs to. An IP address has two components, the
parameters for IP communications for this Host Unit.
network address and the host address. For example,
PRESS "4" FROM CONFIGURE MENU consider the IP address 150.215.17.9. Assuming this is
part of a Class B network, the first two numbers (150.215)
EPAC – IP ADDRESSING: UNIT represent the Class B network address, and the second
DHCP: 0 (0-NO 1-YES) NET 1 (0-DN 1-UP) two numbers (17.9) identify a particular host on this
HOST NAME: ATC2070-EAGLE
--- Use IP ADDRESS below if DHCP = 0 --- network.
IP ADDRESS: 0. 0. 0. 0 / 0 CIDR
SUBNET MSK: 0. 0. 0. 0 1. BROADCAST: this is a view only field that is automatically
BROADCAST : 255.255.255.255 generated based on IP ADDRESS and SUBNET MSK entries.
 Default Data is as shown. 2.3.9.5 Network Configuration

1. DHCP: Instructs the Host to seek a dynamic IP Address The Network Configuration screen allows the user to view/edit
from the network interface (remote computers). When the parameters for network configuration.
DHCP is in use, the fixed IP Address entries are not used.
The network interface must support this feature. PRESS "5" FROM CONFIGURE MENU
2. NET: Mark Network Interface as DOWN or UP. When EPAC – NETWORK CONFIG: DESTINATION
DOWN, this Host Unit provides no communication using
TYPE: 0 (0-NONE 1-NETWORK 2-HOST 3-DFL)
the IP Address assigned to it. DESTINATION: 0. 0. 0. 0
GATEWAY : 0. 0. 0. 0
3. HOST NAME: The DHCP access requires an ASCII text NETMASK : 0. 0. 0. 0
identification (name) by which the Host will be known to HOP COUNT [ 0] (0-16)
the network interface. The name for each Host Unit on the A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
network interface must be different to avoid duplicates.
The Host Name must begin with an alpha character (A-Z).  Default Data is as shown.
Within the Host Name numbers (0-9) and hyphen (-) are  If DHCP has been selected, the entries on this
allowed. The Host Name is limited at 25 entries, but fewer screen are not used. Values may be entered, if
may be used. The Host Name is not used with fixed IP desired. The second line on the screen will state:
Addressing but may be entered for reference. The default  -- DHCP SET YES: VALUES HERE NOT USED --
Host name is shown. 1. TYPE (Destination Type):
4. IP ADDRESS: An identifier for a computer or device on a 0-NONE: This host does not require access to a network
TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol route destination address outside of the local network to
which this host is connected.

Page 26 FRONT PANEL
1-NETWORK: The Destination IP address specified is a 0-AUTO: The message type either is defined by the
network end point. Software build [Standard, or Extended (ACA)] or by the
2-HOST: The Destination IP Address is a Host Computer message type contained in the Download of Scoot
end point. configuration data from Central.
3-DFL: The Gateway IP Address is DEFAULT (when a 1-STD: The original format Scoot message handling
DESTINATION IP Address is not required. [limited to addresses 1-7]
2-ACA: Extended format Scoot message handling [limited
1. DESTINATION: Used when TYPE is 1 or 2 to specify the IP
to addresses 1-15. Contains additional data transport.]
Address to seek outside of the local network.
3-NO: Shorthand notation for NONE, which provides an
2. GATEWAY: The Gateway IP Address specifies an easy way to suspend processing and communications.
intermediate host address through which the Destination
may be reached. Only used for TYPE 1 or 2.
2.3.9.7 Port 1 Comm
3. NETMASK: This entry has the same concept as the local
Host Subnet Mask but applies to the Gateway IP Address. The Port 1 Comm screen allows the user to view/edit the
parameter that enables/disables Port 1 communications.
4. HOP COUNT: This entry specifies the maximum number
of different computer IP Address accesses that are allowed PRESS "7" FROM CONFIGURE MENU
when trying to reach the Destination IP Address.
EPAC – PORT 1 COMM SDLC 153600
DISABLE: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
YES: AS IF PIN 10 IS JUMPERED TO PIN 8
2.3.9.6 Scoot Communications BUT VALID ONLY UNTIL ACCESS TIMEOUT
The Scoot Communications screen allows the user to view/edit

the parameters for Scoot communications. A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
 Default Data is as shown.
EPAC – SCOOT COMM DISABLED
BAUD RATE: 0 (0-DSABL 2-4800 5-19200)
(1-2400 4-9600 6-38400 7-ENET) 2.3.9.8 GPS Configuration
DCD FCONT: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
CTS FCONT: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
SCOOT IO: 0 (0-AUTO 1-SCOOT ONLY) The GPS Configuration screen allows the user to view/edit the
TYPE MSG: 0 (0-AUTO 1-STD 2-ACA 3-NO) parameter that for communications to a GPS device.
EPAC – GPS CONFIGURATION
1. BAUD RATE: defines the communications speed. It is often GPS : 0 (0-NO 1-YES) PORT 4 (SP4/SP8?)
referred to as bits per second (bps) NOTE: TIME BASE PARAMETER 'STZ DIFF'
0-DSABL: Disables Scoot Communication processing. DEFINES THE OFFSET BETWEEN THE
1, 2, 4-6: Selects the bps rate for Scoot communications. GPS PROVIDED AND LOCAL TIME.
7: Selects the configuration for SCOOT over IP. A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
1. DCD FCONT (Data Carrier Detect Flow Control) - When set
for NO, the status of the DCD input will be considered  Default Data is as shown.
active always. GPS (Global Positioning):
2. CTS FCONT (Clear To Send Flow Control) - When set for Code 0 (No): GPS is disabled.
NO, the status of the CTS input will be considered active Code 1 (Yes): GPS is enabled.
always. PORT: This entry defines which port to which the GPS device is
3. SCOOT IO: For Scoot operation, Port 2 IO must be set [in connected. The valid selections are:
Main Screen + 2 + 8 + 2] to 1-ALT which places Port 2 Eagle EPAC M40 – 2 (Port 2) or 3 (Port 3)
communications on the C50S IO Pins. The standard Port 2
IO Pins are then assigned either to Scoot Communications Eagle EPAC M50 & 2070 ATC - 4 (SP4) or 8 (SP8).
or an OS Shell. SP4 – C50S (2070 ATC Front Panel / M50 Port 2 Secondary
0-AUTO: Allows the use of Port 2 IO Pins as Scoot or Shell Data locations, pins 14 & 16)
based on whether Scoot is DISABLED by Baud Rate SP8 - _____________________
setting (0-DSABL, 1,2,4-6 Active). Note: Baud rate of port must be set to match the GPS device.
1-SCOOT ONLY: Prohibits Shell on Port 2 IO Pins when (See section 2.3.9)
Scoot is DSABL. Operation in a Scoot system requires
this setting to prevent Shell character echo from
disrupting the system communications if this local is 2.3.9.9 Setting Time via GPS
set to DSABL.
PRESS “2” FROM MAIN SEPAC MENU: UTILITIES
1. TYPE MSG (Message Type):
PRESS “8” CONFIGURE PORTS

FRONT PANEL Page 27
PRESS "8" GPS CONFIG PRESS "B" FROM UTILITIES MENU

PRESS “1” TO ENABLE GPS EAGLE BOOT MANAGER
ENTER PORT CONFIGURED FOR THE GPS UNIT. E.g. port 2 or port 3, per WARNING....THIS OPTION WILL ENABLE
port configuration. THE BOOT MANAGER AFTER RECYCLING
POWER. NO APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL
CONNECT GPS UNIT TO CONTROLLER. Refer to the instructions from the BE RUNNING....PRESS “E” TO CONTINUE
GPS user manual.
F-PRIOR MENU
The user sets the DATE to current. The system WILL NOT set
the date: only the time. Do not set the time at the top of the
Press "E" in this screen and ‘BOOT MANAGER STARTUP ENABLED’ will
hour or at 2 or 3 am since this causes DST and date skewing.
appear on line 7.
Time is synced on the top of the minute. Then:
The Standard Time Zone Differential (STZ DIFF) MUST be ON THE NEXT RESTART;
programmed for the proper time zone for GPS operation to be
successful (see Error! Reference source not found.). SIEMENS ITS – EAGLE BOOT MANAGER MENU
1-ECOM EPAC 6-NTCIP EPAC
Note: When GPS is enabled, the user can NOT set the time 2-ECOM MARC 7-NTCIP MARC
3-ECOM EPIC 8-NTCIP EPIC
from the front panel. 4-ECOM 1 + 2 9-NTCIP 6 + 7
5-ECOM 2 + 3 0-NTCIP 7 + 8
The GPS time is utilized to update the sEPAC time when: A-ENABLE ENET B-DISABLE ENET
NOTE: CHOICE INVOKED IMMEDIATELY
1. the two times differ by more than 2 seconds, and
2. the SEPAC time is not within 5 seconds of the top of the For options that are NOT available in a specific configuration,
minute, and the text "(NA)" will follow the option text.
3. the PS has a satellite lock. 1. ECOM EPAC will enable the ECOM version of Eagle
This feature has been tested with a Garmin GPS 17-HVS EPAC300 software to run following the next unit restart.
marine device. Any GPS that puts out the standard NMEA 2. ECOM MARC will enable the ECOM version of Eagle
$GPRMC sentence at 4800 baud should work. MARC300 software to run following the next unit restart.
After being enabled, this operation may require cycling power 3. ECOM EPIC will enable the ECOM version of Eagle
after configuring since it potentially takes over SP4 (shell). EPIC140 software to run following the next unit restart.
4. ECOM 1 + 2 will enable the ECOM versions of Eagle
2.3.9.10 Display GPS Data Stream: EPAC300 software and Eagle MARC300 software to run
concurrently following the next unit restart.
PRESS “1” FROM MAIN MENU: ACTIVE STATUS
PRESS “4” TIME BASE 5. ECOM 2 + 3 will enable the ECOM versions of Eagle
EPIC140 software and Eagle MARC300 software to run
EPAC TIME BASE - CURRENT F-PRIOR MENU concurrently following the next unit restart.
SAT 03/15/04 12:10:30 STD TIME
DAY PROGRAM: 07 WEEK PROGRAM: 0 6. NTCIP EPAC will enable the NTCIP version of Eagle
------TRAFFIC------ ----AUXILIARY---- EPAC300 software to run following the next unit restart.
DL/SP/OF: 2/2/2 A: 12* DIM:N
GPS: ACTIVE D: .2. 7. NTCIP MARC will enable the NTCIP version of Eagle
P: ......... ....... S: .*******
CODES: (#)-ON (.)-OFF (*)-NOT DEFINED MARC300 software to run following the next unit restart.
8. NTCIP EPIC will enable the NTCIP version of Eagle
EPIC140 software to run following the next unit restart.
2.3.10 Boot Manager 9. NTCIP 6 + 7 will enable the NTCIP versions of Eagle
EPAC300 software and Eagle MARC300 software to run
Eagle EPAC M50 and 2070 ATC units provide the ability to concurrently following the next unit restart.
have multiple applications resident simultaneously in the
same unit. 10. NTCIP 7 + 8 will enable the NTCIP versions of Eagle
EPIC140 software and Eagle MARC300 software to run
The Boot Manager feature enables an Eagle EPAC M50 or 2070 concurrently following the next unit restart.
ATC user to define the application(s) that will run following
the next unit restart (power up or reboot). 11. ENABLE ENET will enable front end OS9 features of:
12. Ethernet and TCPIP support.
13. Pressing this key will force a restart followed by a return
to the above menu.
14. DISABLE ENET will disable front end OS9 features of:
15. Ethernet and TCPIP support.

Page 28 FRONT PANEL
Pressing this key will force a restart followed by a return to 1) Vehicle Times
the above menu. 2) Density Times
3) Pedestrian Times & Controls
PRESS "1" FROM THE ABOVE MENU
4) Initialization & NA Response
5) Vehicle & Pedestrian Recalls
----------------------------------------
| SOFTWARE LICENSE KEY PANEL | 6) Non-Lock & Miscellaneous Vehicle Controls
---------------------------------------- 7) Special Sequence Controls
CU TYPE: SIEMENS ITS 8) Special Detector Controls
MAC ADR: 000597001DA0
KEY : 9) Miscellaneous Pedestrian and Vehicle Options
ESC-back |  BS | ENT-done | NO-clear Phase configuration data (all the above except Special Detector
Controls) is provided in a table that provides four instances
(banks) of each parameter used to configure all 16 phases in
The user must enter the software license key to continue. the controller unit. All the parameters of a phase bank shall be
1. The (1 to 0) and (A to F) keys will provide data entry. used concurrently.
2. The Escape (ESC) key will return the user to the prior To enter data for these intervals requires user access. See
menu. Utilities for more information on gaining access.
3. The Left Arrow (<) key provides a backspace (BS) function

deleting the character to the cursors left. 2.4.1 Phase Menu
4. The Enter (ENT) key will complete the entry. The Phase Menu allows the user to select which phase
5. The (NO) key will clear the field. parameter database area will be addressed.
PRESS "3" FROM MAIN MENU
SIEMENS ITS – EAGLE BOOT MANAGER
EPAC PHASE DATA PRESS # DESIRED
INITIALIZING sEPAC....PLEASE WAIT 1-VEHICLE TIMES 7-SPEC. SEQUENCE

2-DENSITY TIMES 8-SPEC. DETECTOR
3-PEDEST. TIMES 9-PHSE+BANK COPY
4-INIT & N.A. RESP 0-MISC PED+VEH OPT
5-V & P RECALLS A-SEL PHSE BANK
6-N.LOCK & MISC F-PRIOR [1]
Additional information about the process may be displayed. 1) VEHICLE TIMES provides viewing and/or editing of
Then the unit will restart into the application(s) selected (in basic vehicle parameters on all phases.
this example – Eagle EPAC300 software a.k.a., sEPAC). 2) DENSITY TIMES provides viewing and/or editing of
vehicle density parameters on all phases.
3) PEDESTRIAN TIMES provides viewing and/or editing
2.3.10.1 Concurrent MARC & EPAC of pedestrian parameters on all phases.
When the Eagle MARC300 Software runs simultaneously with 4) INITIALIZE & NA. RESPONSE provides viewing and/or
the Eagle EPAC300 Software, the Eagle EPAC300 Software will editing of Initialization states and Non-Actuated Input
default as address 1. responses on all phases.
5) V & P RECALLS provides viewing and/or editing of
The Eagle MARC300 Software will have control of: vehicle and pedestrian recall modes on all phases.
1. Front Panel 6) N.LOCK & MISC provides viewing and/or editing of
miscellaneous vehicle operational modes on all phases.
2. Port 2 Comm 7) SPEC. SEQUENCE provides viewing and/or editing of
sequence modification parameters of all phases.
3. Port 3 Comm
8) SPEC. DETECTOR provides viewing and/or editing of
The Eagle EPAC300 Software will have control of the Field I/O vehicle, pedestrian and special detector assignment
Inputs & Outputs. and operational parameters.
9) PHSE+BANK COPY provides an editing shortcut to
All access to the Eagle EPAC300 Software front panel will be
equate phase data (i.e., copy data phase to phase and
via the Eagle MARC300 Software Intersection Data / Status
bank to bank).
(choice 3) from the Main Menu.
0) MISC PED+VEH OPT provides viewing and/or editing
of other Phase Pedestrian and Vehicle Options
(Advance / Delay Walk, Green & Yellow Delay along Bike
2.4 PHASE DATA Green).
2.4.2 Vehicle Times

Phase Data allows the user to display and/or enter controller The Vehicle Times Display allows the user to view and/or
parameters for: modify the basic vehicle timings of all 16 phases.

FRONT PANEL Page 29
PRESS "1" FROM PHASE MENU PRESS "2" FROM PHASE MENU
PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8 PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
MIN GRN 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 AINI/10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
PASS/10 40 50 40 50 40 50 40 50 MAX INI 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
MAX # 1 25 35 25 35 25 35 25 35 TIM BEF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
MAX # 2 30 50 30 50 30 50 30 50 CAR BEF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
YEL/10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 TIME TO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
RED/10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 MGAP/10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1] A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1]
 Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.  Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.
PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16 PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
MIN GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AINI/10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
PASS/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MAX INI 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
MAX # 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIM BEF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
MAX # 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CAR BEF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
YEL/10 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 TIME TO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
RED/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MGAP/10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1] A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1]
 Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.  Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.
The above displays are scrolling screens. The first and last The above displays are scrolling screens. The first and last
field are where scrolling will occur. field are where scrolling will occur (see Vehicle Times).
From the first field, pressing: DATA NAMES & RANGES
A (UP) will cause the screen to scroll left 8 columns.
C (LT) will cause the screen to scroll left 1 column. AINI/10 Added Initial 00-999 Tenth Sec
From the last field, pressing: MAX INI Maximum Initial 00-999 Sec
B (DN) will cause the screen to scroll right 4 columns. TB RED Time B4 Reduction 00-999 Sec
D (RT) will cause the screen to scroll right 1 column.
CB RED Cars B4 Reduction 00-999 Cars
DATA NAMES & RANGES
TT RED Time To Reduce 00-999 Sec
MIN GRN Minimum Green 00-999 Sec
MGAP/10 Minimum Gap 00-999 Tenth Sec
PASS/10 Passage 00-999 Tenth Sec
Changes to Seconds/Actuation and Maximum Initial
MAX # 1 Maximum 1 00-999 Sec parameters will cause the unit to drop coordination for 15
seconds.
MAX # 2 Maximum 2 00-999 Sec
YEL/10 Yellow Change 30-999 Tenth Sec
2.4.4 Pedestrian Times
RED/10 Red Clearance 00-999 Tenth Sec
The Pedestrian Times Display allows the user to view and/or
The bottom line of the display provides a reminder of the
modify the pedestrian timings and control modes of all 16
cursor control keys. A-UP, B-DN (Down), C-LT (Left), and D-RT
phases.
(Right)
PRESS "3" FROM PHASE MENU
Changes to Minimum Green, Yellow, and Red Clear
parameters will cause the unit to drop coordination for 15 PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
seconds. This provides for a positive release from one set of WALK 0 7 0 7 0 7 0 7
parameters, further entries, and an evaluation of the complete PED CLR 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8
*FL WK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
new parameter set prior to running coordination again. **EXT PCL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
*ACT RIW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CODES: * 0-NO 1-YES ** 0-NO 1-Y+R 2-Y
2.4.3 Density Times A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1]
The Density Times Display allows the user to view and/or  Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.
modify the vehicle density timings of all 16 phases.
PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PED CLR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
*FL WK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
**EXT PCL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
*ACT RIW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CODES: * 0-NO 1-YES ** 0-NO 1-Y+R 2-Y
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1]
 Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.

Page 30 FRONT PANEL
The above displays are scrolling screens. The first and last
field are where scrolling will occur (see Vehicle Times).
DATA NAMES & RANGES
WALK Walk 00-999 Sec

PED CLR Pedestrian clear 00-999 Sec
FL WK Flashing Walk 0-No & 1-Yes
EXT PCL Extended Pedestrian Clear 0-No & 1 or 2-
Yes
ACT RIW Act Rest In Walk 0-No & 1-Yes
Flashing Walk:
Code "0" (Steady Walk): The Walk output will be steady
during Walk Timing.
Code "1" (Flashing Walk): The Walk output will be flashing
during Walk Timing.
Extended Pedestrian Clearance:
Code "0" (Normal): This is the standard NEMA TS 1 & TS 2
defined pedestrian operation.
Code "1" (Extended Pedestrian Clear): The Pedestrian
Clearance interval (Flashing Don’t Walk), for a phase so
programmed, may time concurrently with the Vehicle
Change (Yellow Change + Red Clear) intervals.
The end of the Pedestrian Clear (flashing period) shall
occur earlier than the end of the vehicle clearance
intervals when 1) Min Green + Yellow + Red is greater
than Walk + Pedestrian Clear, 2) the phase is extended,
and/or 3) Pedestrian Clear is less than Yellow + Red.
When the Extended Pedestrian Clear (flashing period)
occurs concurrent with the vehicle Yellow Change and
Red Clearance display, the red timing shall not be
omitted if the Omit Red Clearance input becomes
active.
Code "2" (Extended Pedestrian Clear): Similar to Code '1'
except the flashing period (Pedestrian Clearance) may
appear concurrently only with the vehicle Yellow
clearance interval.
Actuated Rest-In-Walk:
Code "0" (Actuated Rest-In-Don’t): This is the standard
NEMA defined actuated pedestrian operation.
Code "1" (Actuated Rest-In-Walk): The CU design provides
an alternate mode pedestrian dwell for actuated
phases. The actuated phase shall rest in Walk when so
programmed and there is no serviceable conflicting call
at the end of the Walk timing.
Changes to Walk, Pedestrian Clear, and Extended Pedestrian
clear parameters will cause the unit to drop coordination for
15 seconds.

FRONT PANEL Page 31
Dark Phase (Initialization Code = 5) can cycle during

2.4.5 Initialization & Non- preempt.
Actuated Response All mutually exclusive active phases must be in the first
ring. Changes to Initialization parameters will cause the unit
The Initialization & NA Response Display allows the user to to drop coordination for 15 seconds.
view and/or modify the Initialization states and Non-Actuated
Input responses of all 16 phases. Any entry which changes the phase state from not having
outputs (Codes 0 & 5) to having outputs (1, 2, 3, & 4) will
PRESS "4" FROM PHASE MENU cause an automatic restart of the CU. Also, any entry which
changes the phase state from having outputs to not having
PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
INITIAL 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 outputs will cause an automatic restart of the CU. This will
NA RESP 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 2 prevent residual phase status for phases that are no longer
active from affecting the running configuration.
CODES.......0....1....2....3....4....5.
INITIAL NONE INACT RED YEL GRN DRK NA RESP (Non-Actuated Response):
NA RESP NONE NA1 NA2 BOTH --- ---
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR *** Code 0 (None): The phase will not respond to the activation
of either of the CALL TO NON- ACTUATED MODE inputs.
 Default Data for all phase banks is as shown. Code 1 (Responds to NA1 input): The phase will respond to
 the activation of the CALL TO NON-ACTUATED MODE I
Different values for INITIAL do NOT exist in each input but not to the activation of the CALL TO NON-
phase bank therefore the window shows ‘***’ in the ACTUATED II input.
lower right of the window rather than the selected Code 2 (Responds to NA2 input): The phase will respond to
phase bank. the activation of the CALL TO NON-ACTUATED MODE II
 input but not to the activation of the CALL TO NON-
When the cursor is moved into a NA RESP field, the ACTUATED I input.
lower right of the window will indicate the Code 3 (Responds to NA1 & NA2 inputs): The phase will
currently selected phase bank ‘[#]’ as in other respond to the activation of either of the CALL TO NON-
Phase windows. ACTUATED MODE inputs.
PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
INITIAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.4.6 Vehicle & Pedestrian
NA RESP 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
CODES.......0....1....2....3....4....5.
Recalls
INITIAL NONE INACT RED YEL GRN DRK
NA RESP NONE NA1 NA2 BOTH --- --- The Vehicle & Pedestrian Recalls Display allows the user to
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR *** view and/or modify the vehicle and pedestrian recall modes of
all 16 phases.
The above displays are scrolling screens. The first and last
field are where scrolling will occur (see Vehicle Times). PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
V.RECALL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
INITIAL (Initialization): P.RECALL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DELAY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Code 0 (No Phase): The phase is not used and will not CODES........0.....1.....2.....3.....4..
appear in the sequence. VEHICLE NONE 1CALL MIN MAX SOFT
Code 1 (Phase Not ON): The phase will not be active. No PEDEST. NONE 1CALL PED N.A. NA+
intervals will be timing and the outputs will be Red and
Don’t Walk.
Code 2 (Phase ON in Red Clear): The phase starts timing at
the beginning of its Red Clearance interval and the
PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
outputs will be Red and Don’t Walk. V.RECALL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Code 3 (Phase ON in Yellow Change): The phase starts P.RECALL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
timing at the beginning of its Yellow Change interval DELAY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CODES........0.....1.....2.....3.....4..
and the outputs will be Yellow and Don’t Walk. VEHICLE NONE 1CALL MIN MAX SOFT
Code 4 (Phase ON in Green/Walk): The phase starts timing PEDEST. NONE 1CALL PED N.A. NA+
at the beginning of its Minimum Green & Walk
intervals and the outputs will be Green and Walk.
Code 5 (Phase Dark & Omitted): The phase will not be  Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.
active and will not normally appear in the sequence. No The above displays are scrolling screens. The first and last
intervals will be timing and the outputs will be Dark. field are where scrolling will occur (see 0).
This state is similar to Code 0 "None" but enables a Vehicle Recalls
distinction and currently is the only way a user can get Code 0 (None); the phase will operate as an actuated
a dummy (dark) phase time to run in Coordination. A phase. It must, therefore, be connected to at least one
detector.

Page 32 FRONT PANEL
Code 1 (Vehicle Call): Places one momentary vehicle Changes to Pedestrian Recall parameters will cause the
actuation. unit to drop coordination for 15 seconds.
Code 2 (Min Vehicle Recall): Places a demand for vehicle
service in memory each time the phase leaves its Green
interval. As a result this phase will continually demand 2.4.7 Miscellaneous Controls
at least a Minimum Green service even in the absence
of actual vehicle or pedestrian calls. The Green interval The Miscellaneous Controls Display allows the user to view
may then be extended by vehicle actuations during the and/or modify the miscellaneous vehicle operational modes of
Green interval in the usual manner. Pedestrian service, all 16 phases.
however, will not be provided in the absence of PRESS "6" FROM PHASE MENU
pedestrian actuations.
Code 3 (Max Vehicle Recall): Places a demand for vehicle PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
service in memory each time the phase leaves its Green NL MEM. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 ENTRY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
interval. In this case, however, the minimum Green LC PASS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
interval will be determined by the Maximum time CON SER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
setting. The Green interval will not terminate on the NO SGAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CODES........0-NO....1-YES..............
basis of the Max setting, but will continue until there is A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1]
an actual serviceable conflicting call. Pedestrian service
is not provided in the absence of pedestrian actuations.  Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.
Code 4 (Soft Vehicle Recall): Places a demand for vehicle
service in memory when: PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
 A conflicting phase is in green or red dwell and NL MEM. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 There are no serviceable conflicting calls. 2 ENTRY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LC PASS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CON SER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This provides the capability to recall a phase in the NO SGAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
absence of serviceable calls (light traffic conditions). CODES........0-NO....1-YES..............
Pedestrian Recalls
Code 0 (None): The phase (pedestrian movement) will  Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.
operate as an actuated phase. It must, therefore, be
connected to at least one detector. The above displays are scrolling screens. The first and last
Code 1 (Pedestrian Call): Places one momentary pedestrian field are where scrolling will occur (see 0).
actuation. Non-Locking Memory
Code 2 (Pedestrian Recall): Places a demand for pedestrian Code "0" (Locking VEH Memory): The locking detector
service in memory each time the phase leaves its Green setting enables the memory storage of vehicle calls
interval. The phase will continually demand pedestrian until the phase is serviced.
service even in the absence of actual pedestrian calls, Code "1" (Non-Locking VEH Memory): The non-locking
but an actual pedestrian call is required to recycle detector setting prevents the memory storage of
pedestrian service during the pedestrian service vehicle calls. In this mode of operation, the detector
interval. must be continuously occupied in order to maintain a
Code 3 (Non-Actuated): The phase will operate as a non- vehicle call for service.
actuated phase.
Code 4 (Non-Actuated Plus): The phase will operate as a Dual Entry
non-actuated phase. On initial entry to a phase, so Code "0" (No): Single Entry is a mode of operation (in
programmed, the WALK time will be set equal to the multiple ring CUs) in which a phase in one ring can be
longer of the WALK time parameter or the called selected and timed alone if there is no demand for
MAXIMUM time parameter (Max 1 or Max 2). A recycle service in a non-conflicting phase in a parallel ring.
of the pedestrian within the phase will result in the Code "1" (Yes): Dual Entry is a mode of operation (in
WALK time being set equal to the WALK time multiple ring CUs) in which one phase in each ring
parameter. must be in service, subject to compatibility where
possible, at all times. If a call does not exist in a ring
An active Call To Non-Actuated input, for which the when it is committed to cross a barrier, a phase is
phase is programmed to respond, will result in the selected in that ring to be activated by the CU based on
WALK time being set equal to the Walk time parameter. this entry.
Running Internal Coordination will result in WALK time Last Car Passage
being set equal to the Walk time parameter. Code "0" (No): This is the standard NEMA defined actuated
Recall Delay - 00-999 Seconds Green Termination operation.
Code "1" (Yes): Last Car Passage provides an alternate
Recall operation shall not occur until after the Recall Delay method of operation to control green termination with
time following the phase termination. The delay is Volume Density operation by an entry through the
applicable to Vehicle Min, Max, & Soft Recall and front panel.
Pedestrian Recall. The delay begins the instant operation
exits the phase. The timing continues regardless of When Last Car Passage is active, each phase operating
demands on other phases. in a Volume Density mode will retain the right of way

FRONT PANEL Page 33
for the unexpired portion of the Passage time following PRESS "7 FROM PHASE MENU
a decision to terminate the green due to a reduced gap.
PHASE .....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
This provides a full passage time for the last vehicle OMIT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(car) which crossed the detector prior to the decision to -YEL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OCAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
terminate the green. OMIT: ## PHS ON OMITS THIS PHASE
-YEL: ## PHS YEL OMITS THIS PHS YEL
Conditional Service OCAL: WHEN OMIT, DETS CALL ## PHS
Code "0" (No): This is the standard NEMA defined actuated A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1]
operation.
Code "1" (Yes): This phase may conditionally service prior  Default Data for all phase banks is as shown.
phases.
PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
Conditional service provides an optional method of OMIT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
phase selection. If two concurrent phases are timing -YEL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OCAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
and a call exists on the other side of the barrier and one OMIT: ## PHS ON OMITS THIS PHASE
of the phases is prepared to terminate due to gap out or -YEL: ## PHS YEL OMITS THIS PHS YEL
max time out, the ring containing the timed out phase OCAL: WHEN OMIT, DETS CALL ## PHS
shall revert to a preceding vehicle phase if:
 A call exists on a preceding vehicle phase.
 The gapped/maxed phase is programmed for
conditional service. The above displays are scrolling screens. The first and last
 There is sufficient time remaining before max time field are where scrolling will occur (see 0).
of the other phase has elapsed.
OMIT
The criterion for determining if sufficient time remains Code "0" (None): This is the standard NEMA defined
for conditional servicing is that the gapped phase actuated operation.
vehicle clearance times plus the minimum green time Code "#" (Omit) This feature provides a per phase entry
of the phase about to be conditionally serviced be less (phase number) that will omit the phase so
than the time remaining on the max timer of the non- programmed when the entered phase is On.
gapped/maxed phase.
MINUS YELLOW
Conditional Service applies to vehicle phases only. For Code "0" (None): This is the standard NEMA defined
phases with concurrent pedestrian service, the actuated operation.
pedestrian display will remain Don’t Walk. Any Code "#" (-Yellow) This feature provides a per phase entry
pedestrian calls placed prior to re-service or during the (phase number) that will omit the phase so
re-service will be stored until the phase is serviced programmed from outputting a Yellow when the
normally. entered phase is outputting a Yellow.
If a conditionally serviced phase has been re-serviced, This operation will apply during all levels of operation
the ring containing that phase will remain in the (i.e., Normal, Preemption, etc.).
conditionally serviced phase until the complementary
ring's phase has gapped out or reached its max time OCAL (Omitted Call)
and the conditionally serviced phase's minimum green Code "0" (None): An Omitted Call shall not be placed.
time has been completed. The timed phases then cross Code "#" (Omitted Call) This feature provides a per phase
the barrier together. If all calls on the opposite side of entry (phase number) that will define the phase to call
the barrier are removed during the conditional service when this phase is Omitted based Omit programming
operation, the controller shall revert to its normal above.
phase sequence operation. If a phase is currently omitted by Phase On Omit logic
The Gap Timer of the conditional serviced phase does AND the phase is NOT Green AND one of the phase
not extend the green time of that phase when it is detectors has a call AND no conflicting call exists for the
being conditionally serviced. ON phase then operate as though a call exists on a user
entered phase.
A Non-Actuated Phase may never be conditionally re-
serviced.
No Simultaneous Gap Out
2.4.9 Special Detector
Code "0" (No): This provides Simultaneous Gap operation. The Special Detector Display allows the user to view and/or
Code "1" (Yes): This disables Simultaneous Gap operation modify the detector operational parameters of all detector
on this phase. inputs.
2.4.8 Special Sequence

The Special Sequence Display allows the user to view and/or
modify the sequence modification parameters of all 16 phases.

Page 34 FRONT PANEL
PRESS "8" FROM PHASE MENU Green. If a call is received before the Extend Timer
times out, it is reset. Timer reset will continue to occur
EPAC DETECTOR CONTROL DATA until a gap is large enough to allow the Extend Timer to
1-VEH 1- 8 5-VEH 33-40 9-PED 1-8 time out. Once a time out occurs, the detector is
2-VEH 9-16 6-VEH 41-48 0-SPC 1-8 disconnected until the Green terminates. When the
3-PED 17-24 7-VEH 49-56 Extend Time setting is Zero, a call is held into the Green
4-PED 25-32 8-VEH 57-64 A-TIMINGS
until a gap occurs. Delay Time functions normally.
PRESS # DESIRED F-PRIOR MENU Code “5” (PPL): The detector input operates as a turn
vehicle detector Adaptive Protected / Permissive
routine. See Section 0 for additional details.
PICK PARMS (Establishes The Initial Parameters Shown): Code “6” (PPT): The detector input operates as a through
Key "A" (Timing): DET TIMING vehicle detector Adaptive Protected / Permissive
PRESS "1" FROM DETECTOR CONTROL DATA MENU routine. See Section 0 for additional details.
Code “7” (AND): All mode 7 detector inputs (assigned to
VEH DET CONTROL ..1..2..3..4..5..6..7..8 the same phase) must be active to call the assigned
ASSIGNED PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 phase when it is not green. Only the lowest numbered
OPERATION MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SWITCHED PHASE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 mode 7 detector will extend the assigned phase or
MODE: 0-VEH 1-PED 2-ONE 3-SBA 4-SBB switch phase.
5-PPL 6-PPT 7-AND 8-RDPR 0-BIKE Code “8” (RDPR): Red Protect See Section 2.4.9.1.
SWITCHED: TO PH # (AP=Y/R & SP=GRN)
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU Code “9” (BIKE) Bike Detector See Section 2.4.11
Switch
 Default Data is as shown. Code "0" (None): This is the standard NEMA defined
PRESS "2-8 or 0" FROM DETECTOR CONTRL DATA MENU actuated vehicle detector operation.
 Default Data for ALL fields is ALL "0"s. Code "#": This programming feature allows phase detector
actuations to be switched to another phase when the
PRESS "9" FROM DETECTOR CONTRL DATA MENU assigned phase cannot be serviced normally or is
 Default Data is as above except OPERATION MODE Yellow or Red and the entered phase is Green.
is ALL "1"s.
Detector Switching provides a per phase entry (phase
Assigned Phase number) identifying the phase that will receive the
Code "0" (None): The detector input is not assigned to a switched actuations.
phase.
Code "#" (Phase) The detector input is assigned to the Serviced Normally: The following conditions are true:
phase (#) entered.  The Phase Is Active
 The Phase Is Not Omitted
An active phase without a means of being actuated (no
detector assigned or no recalls programmed) will The special detector programming may be used in any
operate as though it had a continuous call. combination. That is to say, a vehicle detector may be
programmed to extend, delay, and switch.
Operation Mode
Code "0" (VEH): The detector input operates as a standard Only Normal Vehicle detectors (Mode 0) will
vehicle detector. accumulate MOE.
Code "1" (PED): The detector input operates as a standard PRESS "A" FROM DETECTOR CONTROL DATA MENU
pedestrian detector (see Section 2.4.4)
Code "2" (ONE): The detector input operates as a vehicle EPAC DETECTOR TIMING DATA
detector that is operational while the phase is not
Green until a call is received on the assigned phase. 1-VEH 1- 8 5-VEH 33-40 9-PED 1-8
2-VEH 9-16 6-VEH 41-48 0-SPC 1-8
Code "3" (SBA): The detector input operates as a vehicle 3-PED 17-24 7-VEH 49-56
detector that operates normally (accepts calls) when 4-PED 25-32 8-VEH 57-64 A-CONTROLS
the assigned phase is not Green. When a call is PRESS # DESIRED F-PRIOR MENU
detected, it may be held into the Green until a gap
occurs (detection area is empty) or the Green has been
active longer than the Extend Time setting. The Extend PRESS "1" FROM DETECTOR TIMING DATA MENU
Timer begins with the Green. Once the Extend Timer
times out OR a gap occurs, the detector is disconnected VEH DET TIMING
DETECTOR...1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
until the Green terminates. When the Extend Time *EXTEND 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
setting is Zero, a call is held into the Green until a gap DELAY 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
occurs. Delay Time functions normally.
* VALUE IS TENTHS OF SECONDS
Code "4" (SBB): The detector input operates as a vehicle
detector that operates normally (accepts calls) when A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
the assigned phase is not Green. When a call is
detected, it may be held into the Green until a gap  Default Data is as shown.
(detection area is empty) greater than the Extend Time
setting occurs. The Extend Timer begins with the

FRONT PANEL Page 35
PRESS "2-9 or 0" FROM DETECTOR TIMING DATA MENU • The timing for Max Presence is in seconds where for
 Default Data is as shown above. other modes it is minutes.
• Without a Max Presence value greater than zero, a Red
Extend
Protect detector shall not be recognized or cause a Stop
Code "0" (None): This is the standard NEMA defined
Time.
actuated vehicle detector operation.
Code "#.#" : During the time the assigned phase is green
each detector actuation (input duration) shall be Note: EPAC stores all diagnostic values in
extended from the point of termination by this time (0- seconds and depending on the operation
999 Tenth Seconds). mode converts that value for
uploads/downloads or display. To insure
Delay the value is appropriate for the desired
Code "0" (None): This is the standard NEMA defined operation mode, the mode should be set
actuated vehicle detector operation. before the diagnostic value.
Code "##" : During the time the assigned phase is not green
a detector actuation shall be delayed by this time (00-
999 Seconds). Once the actuation has been present for
As in other vehicle detector modes, any
the delay time it shall be continued for as long as it is
Detector input assigned to a phase
present.
programmed as Non-Actuated
TBC Function Mapping provides for Alternate Passage & (Pedestrian Recall Code = 3) will not be
Maximum times by mapping the Vehicle, Pedestrian, or tested for conformance to the specified
Special Detector timing parameters (Extend & Delay) to parameters therefore, a Red Protect
perform the Passage & Maximum functions. detector shall not be recognized or cause
a Stop Time.
When the detector timings have been mapped as alternate
Passage & Maximum times, the above screens will denote
PAS# or MAX# alongside the entry fields instead of EXTEND or
DELAY.
2.4.9.1.1 Red Protect Programming
When the detector timings have been mapped as Adaptive
Maximum times, the above screens will denote DM#STEP or
MDX# alongside the entry fields instead of EXTEND or DELAY.
The following is an example of Red Protect programming:
PRESS "1" FROM DETECTOR CONTROL DATA MENU
2.4.9.1 Red Protect – Detector Mode
VEH DET CONTROL ..9.10.11.12.13.14.15.16
EPAC provides a detector mode (Red Protect – Operation Mode ASSIGNED PHASE 2 4 6 8 0 0 0 0
8) to utilize smart sensors that have the ability to determine OPERATION MODE 8 8 8 8 0 0 0 0
when an approaching vehicle will not clear the intersection by SWITCHED PHASE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODE: 0-VEH 1-PED 2-ONE 3-SBA
the end of the Red Clearance time and provides an output 4-SSB 5-PPL 6-PPT 7-AND 8-RDPR
until the intersection will be clear. SWITCHED: TO PH # (AP=Y/R & SP=GRN)
EPAC recognizes Red Protect calls during the Red Clearance
only. A Red Protect call during the Red Clearance will cause a
Stop Time on the respective ring for as long as the input is The above example programming utilizes Vehicle Detector 9-
active within the constraint of MX PRES diagnostic for that 12 as Red Protect detectors for phases 2-4-6-8 respectively.
detector.
PRESS "1" FROM VALUE 0 DIAGNOSTICS MENU
EPAC SYSTEM - VALUE 0 DATA
Note: The use of Stop Time as the VEH DET....9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
MX PRES 005 005 005 005 000 000 000 000
means of extending the red display NO ACTY 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
precludes the use of these detectors MAX CNT 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
and detector mode in a coordinated - DATA = MINUTES OR COUNTS/MINUTES -
- TBC AUX "D1" ENABLES VALUE 1 DATA -
system. A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
• MX PRES (Max Presence) diagnostic value establishes the

The Detector Timing operation (Delay & Extend) is valid for
limit (maximum time) a Red Protect detector may hold
this type of detector. A Red Protect call will be delayed and/or
the red (0-999 seconds). When the MX PRES time has
extended based on the value entered for the detector.
expired, EPAC will operate as thought the detector was
The Detector Diagnostic operation (Max Presence, No Activity no longer activated.
and Erratic Count) is valid for this type of detector with some • NO ACTY (No Activity) diagnostic value (0-999 minutes).
changes. When the NO ACTY time has expired, EPAC will NOT
• A Red Protect detector classified as “Failed” by the place a Red Protect call. For this application, this value
diagnostic shall operate as though NO call is present. should probably be zero to disable the diagnostic.
This is opposite that for other vehicle detector modes.

Page 36 FRONT PANEL
• MAX CNT (Max Counts) diagnostic value (0-999 maintains this ON condition for the
counts/minute). When the MAX CNT is exceeded, EPAC duration of preempt.
will NOT place a Red Protect call.
The above example programming establishes a limit of five EPAC turns on AWS outputs during Startup Flash, Fault Flash
seconds for extension of the Red Clearance for phases 2-4-6-8 and Preempt even though standard cabinet wiring precludes
respectively. A MX PRES value is required for all Red Protect the outputs from being visible to the driver in Startup and
Detectors. A Red Protect call shall NOT be placed on a phase Fault Flash.
when MX PRES is zero.
2.4.9.2 Advance Warning Signals 2.4.9.2.1 Advance Warning Programming
Advance Warning Signals (AWS) can be used to provide

drivers with information on the change in signal indication at The following is an example of Advance Warning
approaching intersection. programming:
EPAC provides the ability to drive AWS for each phase through PRESS "1" FROM UNIT MENU
the Pedestrian Clear (Load Switch Yellow) output.
The AWS Sequence for a phase is as follows: EPAC STARTUP & MISC
STARTUP TIME.: 05 (SEC) STATE: 0 (0-FL
RED REV/10...: 40 (TSEC)
Phase Vehicle AUTO PED CLR.: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
Signal # Clear STOP T RESET.: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
ALT SEQUENCE.: 0 (0-18)
1 2 3 4 5 6 I’NAT’L SEQ : 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
Phs # Red - - - - - R
Phs # Yellow - - - - Y -
Phs # Green G G G G - - I’NAT’L SEQ (International Sequence) must be zero (0) for
EPAC to provide the Advance warning operation.
Phs # Don’t Walk - - FD D D D D
Phs # PC (Yel) ON - - ON ON ON PRESS "2" FROM UNIT MENU
Phs # Walk W W- - - - -
EPAC FLASH TST-A=FLSH: 0 (0-NO/1-YES)
1. The GDLY (0-255 tenth Seconds) values determine this FLSH 2=Y,3=S: 111111113 3330000000 00000
interval length (amount of time the Advance Warning ALT FLASH : 000000000 0000000000 00000
CHN/PHS: 123456789 0123456789 01234
output remains ON after the beginning of the Phase ENTRY PHASE: 000000000 0000000
Green). This value may be set to zero. EXIT PHASE : 000000000 0000000
FIELD NAME : CHN 1/LSW 1/PHS 1 V DRVR
2. The Phase Walk / Ped Clear values determine this interval A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT F-MENU
length.
3. The Phase Green values determine this interval length. FLSH (Flash) value must be zero (0) when the Advance
Warning Signals are to be Dark during Remote Flash or three
4. The YDLY (0-255 tenth Seconds) values determine this (3) when the Advance Warning Signals are to be ON during
interval length (amount of time the Advance Warning Remote Flash.
output turns On before the end of the Phase Green). This
value MUST be greater than zero (1-255 tSec) for AWS PRESS "0"FROM PHASE MENU (F-3-0)
operation to be enabled.
PHASE .....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
5. The Phase Yellow values determine this interval length. WOFF/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6. The Phase Red Clearance values determine this interval WOFF MODE: 0-ADVANCE WALK 1-DELAY WALK
length. GDLY/10 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60
YDLY/10 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40
Note: EPAC turns on AWS outputs ON A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
during Startup & Fault Flash even
though standard cabinet wiring
precludes the outputs from being GDLY (Green Delay) value (0-255 tSec) establishes the amount
visible to the driver. With a of time the Advance Warning output remains ON after the
modification to standard cabinet beginning of the Phase Green. This value may be set to zero.
wiring, the AWS could be visible to the YDLY (Yellow Delay) value (0-255 tSec) establishes the amount
driver. of time the Advance Warning output turns On before the end
of the Phase Green. This value MUST be greater than zero (1-
EPAC turns on AWS outputs when a 255 tSec) for AWS operation to be enabled. When I’NAT’L SEQ
transition to preempt begins and is Zero and YDLY is Zero, The standard NEMA sequence is
provided.

FRONT PANEL Page 37
The above example programming establishes AWS control on PRESS "0"FROM PHASE MENU (F-3-0
Phases 2-4-6-8 and that the AWS output will appear four
seconds before the end of the respective phase Green and stay PHASE .....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
on until six seconds after the phase Green begins. WOFF/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WOFF MODE: 0-ADVANCE WALK 1-DELAY WALK
GDLY/10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
2.4.9.3 International Sequence YDLY/10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

EPAC includes the ability to provide the transition displays
used by the international user.
GDLY (Green Delay) value establishes the amount of time the
The International Sequence (IS) for a phase is as follows: Green/Walk outputs are delayed to provide the Red + Yellow
Phase Vehicle
transition display.
Signal # Clear
YDLY (Yellow Delay) value establishes the amount of time the
1 2 3 4 5 6
Yellow output is delayed to provide the Flashing Green
Phs # Red R - - - R R transition display.
Phs # Yellow Y - - - Y -
Phs # Green - G G FG - - The above example programming establishes IS control on All
Phs # Don’t Walk D - FD D D D Phases (1-8) and that the IS R->G transition (R+Y) will be two
Phs # PC (Yel) - - ON seconds and the IS G->Y transition (FG) will be four seconds.
Phs # Walk - W - - - -
Note: In current EPAC operation,
1. The GDLY (0-255 tenth Seconds) values determine this the International Sequence is not
interval length (amount of time the R->G transition lasts extended to Overlap Signal drivers
and the Green/Walk is delayed) or is operational in any transition to
2. The Phase Green values and actuations determine this and within Preempt.
interval length.
3. The Phase Ped Clear values determine this interval length.
4. The YDLY (0-255 tenth Seconds) values determine this 2.4.9.4 Pedestrian Detectors
interval length (amount of time the G->Y transition lasts A Pedestrian Detector is any detector input that has an
and the Yellow is delayed). Operation Mode equal to PED (1). Since they share the same
5. The Phase Yellow values determine this interval length. programming interface as Vehicle Detectors, exceptions to
that definition follows:
6. The Phase Red Clearance values determine this interval
length. CONTROL DATA:
1. ASSIGNED PHASE - Values have the same meaning as
defined above.
2.4.9.3.1 Internation Sequence Programming
2. OPERATION MODE - Code "1" (PED): The detector input is a
pedestrian detector.
The following is an example of International Sequence 3. SWITCH PHASE – Values other than zero establish
programming: pedestrian overlaps as follows:
Code "0" (None): No Pedestrian Overlap
PRESS "1" FROM UNIT MENU
## - Phase Number of the 2nd phase to also drive the
ASSIGNED phase pedestrian outputs (see paragraph 0).
EPAC STARTUP & MISC
STARTUP TIME.: 05 (SEC) STATE: 0 (0-FL TIMING DATA:
AUTO PED CLR.: 0 (0-NO 1-YES) 1. *EXTEND - no impact on the detector operation.
STOP T RESET.: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
ALT SEQUENCE.: 0 (0-18) 2. DELAY - no impact on the detector operation.
I’NAT’L SEQ : 1 (0-NO 1-YES)
2.4.10 Phase + Bank Copy
I’NAT’L SEQ (International Sequence) must be zero (1) for
EPAC to provide the International Sequence operation. The Phase Copy Display allows the user to equate the total
database for one or more phases by copying same from
another phase.

Page 38 FRONT PANEL

2.5 UNIT DATA
EPAC PHSE+BANK COPY
COPYING BANK FROM: 0 TO: 0
COPYING PHASE FROM:00 TO: 00
ENTER THE FROM & TO BANK/PHASE ##
THEN ENTER HERE INITIATES THE COPY>>>>0
[A 0 IN ANY TO FIELD OR IN FROM PHSE Unit Data allows the user to display and/or enter controller
COPIES TO ALL MATCHING GIVEN VALUES] parameters for:
1) Startup & Miscellaneous Controls
2) Remote Flash Parameters
The FROM phase/bank will be the source phase data and the 3) Standard Overlap Definition
TO phase/bank will become the destination phase data of the 4) Special Overlap Definition
copy operation. 5) Ring Structure Parameters
6) Alternate Sequences
Be sure to review the destination phase data after a copy as all 7) Port 1 Data
data in the copy may not be appropriate (i.e., INITIALIZE data). 8) Input / Output Miscellaneous
9) Signal Driver Output Mapping
2.4.11 Misc Ped+Veh Options 10) Advance Warning Signals
To enter data for these intervals requires user access. See 0 for
The Misc Ped+Veh Options Display allows the user to view more information on gaining access.
and/or modify additional pedestrian and vehicle parameters.
2.5.1 Unit Menu
PHASE .....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
WOFF/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The Unit Menu allows the user to select which unit parameter
MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 database area will be addressed.
GDLY/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS "4" FROM MAIN MENU
YDLY/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BGRN/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR [1] EPAC UNIT DATA PRESS # DESIRED
1-STARTUP & MISC 6-ALT SEQUENCES
 Default Data for all phase banks is as shown. 2-REMOTE FLASH 7-PORT 1/ITS DATA
3-OVERLAP STANDARD 8-I/O MISC
4-OVERLAP SPECIAL 9-SIG DRV OUT
PHASE .....9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16 5-RING STRUCTURE A-224E STATUS
WOFF/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F-PRIOR MENU
MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GDLY/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1. STARTUP & MISC provides viewing and editing of
YDLY/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Startup and Miscellaneous control parameters on the
BGRN/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR {1] CU.
2. REMOTE FLASH provides viewing and editing of
 Default Data for all phase banks is as shown. Remote Flash parameters for the CU.
3. OVERLAP STANDARD provides viewing and editing of
WOFF/10 (Walk Offset): 0-255 Tenth Seconds Standard Overlap definitions.
This parameter defines the offset between the start of the 4. OVERLAP SPECIAL provides viewing and editing of
Phase Walk and the start of the Phase Green outputs in Special Overlap Control parameters.
tenth seconds. Zero offset provides normal operation. 5. RING STRUCTURE provides viewing and editing of
MODE (Walk Offset Mode): basic Ring Structure of the CU.
This parameter defines the mode (direction of offset) for 6. ALT SEQUENCES provides viewing and editing of
the Phase Walk from the Phase Green: alternate sequences.
7. PORT 1/ITS DATA provides viewing and editing of Port
Code "0" (Advance/Leading Walk): Phase Walk appears before 1 or ITS parameters.
the Phase Green. 8. I/O MISC provides viewing and editing of Input /
Output mode and Ring Input / Output select
Code "1" (Delay/Trailing Walk): Phase Green appears before the
parameters.
Phase Walk.
9. SIG DRV OUT provides viewing and editing of channel
GDLY/10 (Green Delay): 0-255 Tenth Seconds to hardware output pin set parameters.
This parameter defines A. 224E STATUS provides viewing of Siemens LD4
Detector status.
YDLY/10 (Yellow Delay): 0-255 Tenth Seconds
This parameter defines
BGRN/10 (Bike Green): 0-255 Tenth Seconds
This parameter defines the ability to assign a bike lane
green time if a previous min green assignment is active.

FRONT PANEL Page 39
All other timings will be maintained status-quo.

2.5.2 Startup & Miscellaneous 
These timings include but are not limited to
Detector Stretch & Delay, Red Revert, all
The Startup & Miscellaneous Display allows the user to view
Coordination timings, all Time Base timings, and
and/or modify the Startup and miscellaneous control
all Preempt timings.
parameters for the CU.
Alternate Sequence:
Code "##": This entry (00 to 18) sets the alternate
EPAC STARTUP & MISC
sequences (phase pair reversal) as defined in the Ring
STARTUP TIME.: 05 (SEC) STATE: 0 (0-FL Structure database. The entered Alternate Sequence
RED REV/10...: 40 (TSEC) will be active when hardware Alternate Sequence
AUTO PED CLR.: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
STOP T RESET.: 0 (0-NO 1-YES) inputs are not active and active Coordination pattern
ALT SEQUENCE.: 0 (0-18) Alternate Sequence parameter is ‘00’.
International Sequence Programming: See Section 2.5.12
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR
Start-Up Time:
2.5.3 Remote Flash
Code "0" (None): An entry of "00" eliminates the Start-Up The Remote Flash Display allows the user to view and/or
state. modify the Remote Flash control parameters for the CU.
Code "##": This entry (0 to 999 seconds) provides an
adjustable timed period / state (Start-Up) prior to the PRESS "2" FROM UNIT MENU
Initialization routine when power is restored following
a defined power interruption or Watchdog restart. No EPAC FLASH TST-A=FLSH: 0 (0-NO/1-YES)
FLSH(2=YEL): 000000000 0000000000 00000
output, other than AC Power, shall prevent this state ALT FLASH : 000000000 0000000000 00000
from completion and/or exit to the Initialization CHN/PHS: 123456789 0123456789 01234
routine. ENTRY PHASE: 000000000 0000000
EXIT PHASE : 000000000 0000000
RED REV/10: A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT F-MENU
Red Revert Time - 20 to 999 Tenth Seconds (i.e., 20 tenth
seconds = 2.0 seconds).  Default Data is as shown.
Auto Ped Clear: Flash definition is on a channel basis. Later, the definition of
Code "0" (No): This is the standard NEMA defined what control is allocated to what channel is made (See 0
operation. When Manual Control Enable is active, the Overlap Standard and 0 Ring Structure).
pedestrian clearance interval is terminated by the
interval advance input. TEST A = REM FLASH:
Code "1" (Yes) This entry provides for CU timing of Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the CU WILL NOT
pedestrian clearance interval when Manual Control recognize the Test A input as a Remote Flash request.
Enable is active. Code "1" (Yes): This entry denotes that the CU will
recognize the Test A input as a Remote Flash request.
Stop Time Reset:
Code "0" (No): This is the standard NEMA defined FLSH:
operation. Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the Channel output
Code "1" (Yes) The CU operation, upon release of a STOP will NOT flash when Remote Flash is called.
TIME input, will be conditioned by the timing/state Code "1" (Yes): This entry denotes that the Channel output
active when the STOP TIME input was applied. Some will flash Red when Remote Flash is called.
timing will be reset to the full time while others will be Code "2" (Yes): This entry denotes that the Channel output
maintained status-quo. will flash Yellow when Remote Flash is called.
 Minimum Green will reset to the programmed
When all FLSH entries are "0", Remote Flash will be
value. Any calculated Variable Initial will be
implemented via the Controller Voltage Monitor output
maintained status-quo.
(CVM inactive).
 Passage will reset to the programmed value. Time
Before Reduction, Time To Reduce, Effective Gap, & ALT FLASH:
Last Car Passage will be maintained status-quo. Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the Channel output
 Maximum Green will reset to the programmed will flash (ON/OFF) when Remote Flash is called.
value. Code "1" (Yes): This entry denotes that the Channel output
 Walk and Pedestrian clear will reset to the will flash (OFF/ON) when Remote Flash is called.
programmed value.
 Yellow Change and Red Clear will reset to the ENTRY PHASE:
programmed value. Code "0" (No): This entry denotes the Phase IS NOT the
 Overlap Trailing Green, Trailing Yellow Change, Remote Flash entry phase. When there is no Entry
and Trailing Red Clear will reset to the Phase, the CU will initiate Free (Non-Coordinated)
programmed value. operation based on a Remote Flash request.

Page 40 FRONT PANEL
Code "#" (Yes) This entry denotes the Phase IS the Remote 1) performing a trailing operation when TRAIL GRN
Flash entry phase. A Flash Entry Phase must be value is greater than "00"
serviceable for Remote Flash to occur.  Code "0" (None): This entry denotes that a
modification of the overlap trailing operation is not
EXIT PHASE:
required.
Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the phase IS NOT the
 Code "#" (Phase #) This entry denotes the phase,
Remote Flash exit phase. When there is no Exit Phase,
when selected as next, omits the trailing operation
the CU will exit at the Entry point.
(i.e., not to trail on termination of same).
Code "1" (Yes): This entry denotes that the phase IS the
OR
Remote Flash exit phase.
2) outputting a Green until the entered phase is
FIELD NAME: outputting a Green when TRAIL GRN is equal to "00"
This display only field will define the field name in which (when overlap is red, overlap green is locked out until
the cursor is currently located. entered phase green).
When the Remote Flash inputs become inactive, the CU moves This operation will apply during all levels of operation
immediately to the beginning of the phase(s) programmed as (i.e., Normal, Preemption, etc.).
Exit Phase(s), with a Green/Walk display, calls on all the other  Code "0" (None): This entry denotes that a
phase vehicle and pedestrian, and ceases flashing operation. modification of the Green is not required.
 Code "#" (Phase #) This entry denotes the phase
Upon exiting Remote Flash wherein the Phase and/or Overlap when outputting a Green shall enable the start of
Vehicle Load Switch outputs flash, the CU will provide a timed Overlap Green.
exit transition period when any Flashing Yellow display will be OR
followed by a Red, Flashing Red, or Dark display. The Load 3) defines the Permissive Phase in the Protected /
Switch Driver outputs during this period will be Yellow for Permissive sequence defined in Section 0.
those which were Flashing Yellow and Red for those which
were Flashing Red or Dark. OVL CHN(S):
Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the overlap output
Exit Flash transition timing is 1) Yellow - longest phase Yellow will NOT be assigned to that channel.
Change of phases receiving a steady yellow and 2) Red - Code "1" (Yes) This entry denotes that the overlap output
longest phase Red Clearance of phases receiving a steady red. will be assigned to that channel.
When NO Exit Phases are programmed, the Red will equal the Besides defining overlaps based on included phases, the user
Start Up Time. This operation enables a longer All Red must define the Channel used (this is typically the MMU
transition period to be operational prior to stop-and-go Channel which will be wired in the cabinet to monitor the
operation after Remote Flash. Load Switch outputs. This data is used in the mapping of
Channel to Output Hardware (defined later) and by the SDLC
2.5.4 Overlap Standard driver to define messages for the MMU and TF BIUs. Any
Overlap may be programmed to none, one, or more channels.
The Overlap Standard Display allows the user to view and/or Use the ‘A’ or ‘B’ keys to display the next or prior Overlap
modify the standard overlap parameters. (Overlap A to P).
PRESS "3" FROM UNIT MENU Press "D" From The Overlap Display
EPAC OVERLAP - A (0-NO/1-YES) This display is provided for information purposes only. The
display shows channel function and compatibility.
OVL PHASES: 000000000 0000000
+GRN PHSES: 000000000 0000000
PHS/CHN: 123456789 0123456789 01234 OUTPUT CHANNEL COMPATIBILITIES
OVL CHN(S): 000000000 0000000000 00000 CHANNELS: 123456789 0123456789 01234
CH01-V01: X00011000 010------- -----
A-UP B-DN D-DspChn E-EDIT F-PRIOR MENU CH02-V02: .X0011001 010------- -----
CH03-V03: ..X000110 001------- -----
CH04-V04: ...X00110 101------- -----
 Default Data is as shown. CH05-V05: ....X0001 000------- -----
A-UP B-DN C-ABORT F-EDIT
OVL PHASES:
Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the phase is NOT
part of the overlap. Use the ‘A’ or ‘B’ keys to display the next or prior.
Code "1" (Yes) This entry denotes that the phase is part of Channel Function:
the overlap. ‘V##’ denotes the Phase Vehicle Identification
+GRN PHSES (Plus Green Phase(s)): ‘P##’ denotes the Phase Pedestrian Identification
Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the phase is NOT a ‘OV#’ denotes the Overlap Vehicle Identification
+GRN Phase for this overlap. Channel Compatibilities:
Code "1" (Yes) This entry denotes that the phase is a +GRN ‘.’ (period) denotes compatibility between these channels
Phase for this overlap. is displayed under the lower number channel.
This feature shall provide per overlap entries (phase (s)) ‘x’ denotes a channel cross reference to itself
that will omit the overlap so programmed from: ‘0’ denotes these channels are not compatible

FRONT PANEL Page 41
‘1’ denotes these channels are compatible

‘-‘ (dash) denotes channel compatible not considered EPAC OVLP.I...J...K...L...M...N...O...P.
because (1) one or both channels is unassigned or (2) TR GRN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
YEL/10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Signal Driver Group assigned to one or both channels is RED/10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
unused due to other programming in the device. -G/Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The MMU Card programming can be less restrictive (more (-) #-PH G/Y KILLS OVLP
compatibility jumpers) but not more restrictive (less jumpers)
than shown. This means the MMU must have the
compatibility jumpers EPAC shows. The MMU may have more
but those shown must be present. When this is NOT true, a From the first field, pressing:
"MMU UTILZATION CNFLCT" fault will cause Diag Flash (see 0 A (UP) will cause the screen to scroll left 8 columns.
and 0). C (LT) will cause the screen to scroll left 1 column.
CH06-V06: .....X001 010------- ----- From the last field, pressing:

CH07-V07: ......X00 100------- ----- B (DN) will cause the screen to scroll right 4 columns.
CH08-V08: .......X0 101------- ----- D (RT) will cause the screen to scroll right 1 column.
CH09-P02: ........X 010------- -----
CH10-P04: ......... X01------- -----
CH11-P06: ......... .X0------- ----- TR GRN (Trailing Green): 0-999 Seconds
CH12-P08: ......... ..X------- -----
CH13-OVA: ......... ...X------ ----- YEL/10 (Trailing Yellow): 30-999 Tenth Seconds
CH14-OVB: ......... ....X----- -----
CH15-OVC: ......... .....X---- ----- RED/10 (Trailing Red): 0-999 Tenth Seconds
CH16-OVD: ......... ......X--- -----
CH17-P01: ......... .......X-- ----- Timing control to trail overlap load switch driver outputs
CH18-P03: ......... ........X- ----- to delay their Green termination (0-999 seconds). Once the
CH19-P05: ......... .........X -----
CH20-P07: ......... .......... X---- overlap is no longer locked to a phase timing it must be
CH21-OVE: ......... .......... .X--- provided a separate Yellow Change (30-999 tenth seconds)
CH22-OVF: ......... .......... ..X-- and Red Clearance (0-999 tenth seconds).
CH23-OVG: ......... .......... ...X-
CH24-OVH: ......... .......... ....X Any phase that may operate concurrent to an overlap
Press "E" From The Overlap Display included phase is NOT considered to be in conflict with the
overlap. Such a phase is allowed to start while the overlap
This display is the Overlap EDIT screen. is trailing.
EPAC OVERLAP - A (0-NO/1-YES) This operation will not apply during Preemption.
OVL PHASES: 000000000 0000000 -G/Y (Minus Green/Yellow):
+GRN PHSES: 000000000 0000000
PHS/CHN: 123456789 0123456789 01234 This feature shall provide a per phase overlap entry (phase
OVL CHN(S): 000000000 0000000000 00000 number) that:
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-EXIT F-PRIOR MENU 1) will omit the overlap so programmed from
performing a trailing operation when TRAIL GRN value
is greater than "00"
When in the edit mode, the next to last line will define the  Code "0" (None): This entry denotes that a
field name in which the cursor is located. modification of the overlap trailing operation is not
required.
2.5.5 Overlap Special  Code "#" (Phase #) This entry denotes the phase,
when active, omits the trailing operation (i.e., not
The Overlap Special Display allows the user to view and/or to trail on termination of same).
modify the special overlap control parameters. OR
2) will omit the overlap so programmed from outputting
PRESS "4" FROM UNIT MENU a Green when the entered phase is outputting a Green
or outputting a Yellow when the entered phase is
EPAC OVLP.A...B...C...D...E...F...G...H. outputting a Yellow when TRAIL GRN is equal to "00".
TR GRN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
YEL/10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 This operation will apply during all levels of operation
RED/10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
-G/Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (i.e., Normal, Preemption, etc.).
 Code "0" (None): This entry denotes that a
(-) #-PH G/Y KILLS OVLP modification of the Green and Yellow is not
required.
 Code "#" (Phase #) This entry denotes the phase
when outputting a Green or Yellow, shall prevent
the display of Overlap Green or Yellow as noted
above.
OR
3) defines the Protected Phase in a Protected /
Permissive sequence defined in Section 0.

Page 42 FRONT PANEL
2.5.6 Ring Structures OUTPUT CHANNEL COMPATIBILITIES

CHANNELS: 123456789 0123456789 01234
The Ring Structures Display allows the user to view and/or CH01-V01: X00011000 010------- -----
CH02-V02: .X0011001 010------- -----
modify the basic ring structure of the CU. CH03-V03: ..X000110 001------- -----
CH04-V04: ...X00110 101------- -----
PRESS "5" FROM UNIT DATA MENU CH05-V05: ....X0001 000------- -----
A-UP B-DN C-ABORT F-EDIT
EPAC RING STRUCTURE (0-NO/1-YES)
PHASE: 1 RING: 1 NXT PHS: 2 .....
CONCUR PHS: 100011000 0000000 Use the ‘A’ or ‘B’ keys to display the next or prior.
PHS/CHN: 123456789 0123456789 01234
VEH CHN(S): 100000000 0000000000 00000 Channel Function:
PED CHN(S): 000000000 0000000100 00000
‘V##’ denotes the Phase Vehicle Identification
A-UP B-DN D-DspChn E-EDIT F-PRIOR MENU ‘P##’ denotes the Phase Pedestrian Identification
‘OV#’ denotes the Overlap Vehicle Identification
Channel Compatibilities:
RING: Each phase must be assigned to a ring to be serviced. ‘.’ (period) denotes compatibility between these channels
Code "#" (1-4): This entry denotes that the ring this phase is is displayed under the lower number channel.
to assigned to. ‘x’ denotes a channel cross reference to itself
‘0’ denotes these channels are not compatible
NXT PHS: Each phase must have a Next Phase. When the phase
‘1’ denotes these channels are compatible
is the only one in the ring, it will be entered as next to
‘-‘ (dash) denotes channel compatible not considered
itself.
because (1) one or both channels is unassigned or (2)
Code "#" (01-16): This entry denotes that the phase to be
Signal Driver Group assigned to one or both channels is
serviced following this phase.
unused due to other programming in the device.
CONCUR PHS: Each phase shall have the concurrent phase(s)
The MMU Card programming can be less restrictive (more
defined. The CU automatically enters the reverse data (i.e.,
compatibility jumpers) but not more restrictive (less jumpers)
if phase 8 is entered as a phase 1 concurrent phase, then
than shown. This means the MMU must have the
phase 1 is automatically entered as a phase 8 concurrent
compatibility jumpers EPAC shows. The MMU may have more
phase).
but those shown must be present. When this is NOT true, a
Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the phase is NOT
"MMU UTILZATION CNFLCT" fault will cause Diag Flash (see
allowed to run concurrently with the phase being
3.7.1 and 4.1.2.5).
defined.
Code "1" (Yes) This entry denotes that the phase is allowed CH06-V06: .....X001 010------- -----
to run concurrently with the phase being defined. CH07-V07: ......X00 100------- -----
Please note that a phase is always concurrent with CH08-V08: .......X0 101------- -----
CH09-P02: ........X 010------- -----
itself. CH10-P04: ......... X01------- -----
CH11-P06: ......... .X0------- -----
VEH CHN(S): CH12-P08: ......... ..X------- -----
Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the phase vehicle CH13-OVA: ......... ...X------ -----
output will NOT be assigned to that channel. CH14-OVB: ......... ....X----- -----
CH15-OVC: ......... .....X---- -----
Code "1" (Yes) This entry denotes that the phase vehicle CH16-OVD: ......... ......X--- -----
output will be assigned to that channel. CH17-P01: ......... .......X-- -----
CH18-P03: ......... ........X- -----
PED CHN(S): CH19-P05: ......... .........X -----
Code "0" (No): This entry denotes that the phase pedestrian CH20-P07: ......... .......... X----
CH21-OVE: ......... .......... .X---
output will NOT be assigned to that channel. CH22-OVF: ......... .......... ..X--
Code "1" (Yes) This entry denotes that the phase pedestrian CH23-OVG: ......... .......... ...X-
CH24-OVH: ......... .......... ....X
output will be assigned to that channel.
Press "E" From The EPAC Ring Structure Display
Besides defining Ring, Next Phase, and concurrent phases, the
user must define the Channel used (this is typically the MMU This display is the Ring Structure EDIT screen.
Channel which will be wired in the cabinet to monitor the
Load Switch outputs). This data is used in the mapping of EPAC RING STRUCTURE (0-NO/1-YES)
Channel to Output Hardware (defined later) and by the SDLC PHASE: 1 RING: 1 NXT PHS: 2 .....
CONCUR PHS: 100011000 0000000
driver to define messages for the MMU and TF BIUs. Any phase PHS/CHN: 123456789 0123456789 01234
vehicle and pedestrian driver may be programmed to none, VEH CHN(S) 100000000 0000000000 00000
one, or more channels. PED CHN(S): 000000000 0000000100 00000
FIELD NAME: RING OWNING PHASE
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-EXIT F-PRIOR MENU
Press "D" From The EPAC Ring Structure Display
This display is provided for information purposes only. The
display shows channel function and compatibility. When in the edit mode, the next to last line will define the
field name in which the cursor is located.

FRONT PANEL Page 43
The CU provides the capability to define 16 phases into a From the first field, pressing C (LT) will cause the screen to
structure of up to four rings. The definition of the structure is scroll left 1 column.
accomplished by the entry of Ring, Next Phase, and
From the last field, pressing D (RT) will cause the screen to
Concurrent Phases for each phase in the CU.
scroll right 1 column.
The structure requires that any phase which will not have
The CU provides the capability of fifteen alternates to the
concurrent phases must be in Ring 1.
standard sequence defined in the Ring Structure database.
The sequence in a ring should start with the lowest numbered These alternates are variations to the sequence based on
phase to be used. groups of two phases in a ring being serviced in reverse order.
Changes to the Ring Structure will delete Alternate Sequence In the alternate sequence definition, the phase pair to be
data and initialize the unit on exit from this display. This serviced in reverse order must be adjacent in the normal
provides for a positive implementation of the new structure sequence, may not be separated by barriers, and a single
(Initialization) and the unit to evaluate Alternate Sequence phase may appear in only one of the phase pair definitions for
data based on new entries. an alternate.
The sixteen total sequences offer every combination of lead-
2.5.7 Alternate Sequences lag on an eight phase quad-left application.
Changes to Alternate Sequence will cause the unit to drop
The Alternate Sequence Display allows the user to view and/or
coordination for 15 seconds. This provides for a positive
modify the alternate sequences (phase pair reversal) to the
release from one set of parameters, further entries, and an
basic ring structure sequence.
evaluation of the complete new parameter set prior to running
PRESS "6" FROM UNIT MENU coordination again.
2.5.8 Port 1 / ITS Data

EPAC ALT SEQ (PHASE PAIR TO REVERSE)
SEQ .PP1. .PP2. .PP3. .PP4. .PP5. .PP6.
01 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
02 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
03 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 The following screens provide data entry for NEMA TS 2 Port 1
04 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 as well as ITS and CBD cabinets. Address/Entry 101 – 128 are
05 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 currently utilized for ITS and CBD cabinets.
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-EDIT F-PRIOR MENU
 Default Data is as shown. 2.5.8.1 TS 2 Port 1 Configuration Data
EPAC ALT SEQ (PHASE PAIR TO REVERSE) The Port 1 Data Display allows the user to view and modify the
SEQ .PP1. .PP2. .PP3. .PP4. .PP5. .PP6. devices present (by address) and devices to receive Frame 40
06 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
07 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 (by address) parameters for the CU.
08 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
09 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 When Port 1 hardware does not exist, this programming
10 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 should be all zeros to prevent the CU diagnostics from trying
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-EDIT F-PRIOR MENU to take corrective action.
 Default Data is as shown. PRESS "7" FROM UNIT DATA MENU
EPAC ALT SEQ (PHASE PAIR TO REVERSE) PORT 1 DATA (0-NO/1-YES)

SEQ .PP1. .PP2. .PP3. .PP4. .PP5. .PP6. ADDR DESCRIPTION............. PRES M40
11 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 0 T&F BIU #1 TS2 0 0
12 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 1 T&F BIU #2 TS2 0 0
13 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 2 T&F BIU #3 TS2 0 0
14 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 3 T&F BIU #4 TS2 0 0
15 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 4 T&F BIU #5 RESERVED 0 0
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-EDIT F-PRIOR MENU A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
 Default Data is as shown.  Default Data is all data = 0.
The above displays are paging screens to enable viewing all 15 PRES (Present); is the data which controls whether the CU will
alternate sequence definitions. Pressing “A” or “B” while the allocate time for messages to / from that address.
word “E-EDIT” is displayed on the bottom line will page up or M40 (Message 40); is the data which controls whether the CU
down to the next screen. Pressing “E” in any screen will enable will allocate time for the Peer To Peer Message 40 series to
editing in that screen. While in the editing mode, the bottom /from that address.
line will note “E-EXIT” to note that pressing “E” will cause an
exit from edit mode to display mode. When the cursor is in the ADDR (address) field, entry of a
number will cause the display to place that address’ data on
The above displays are scrolling screens to enable viewing all the cursor line. This enables the user to jump to a specific data
8 Phase Pair groupings. The first and last field in each row are entry area.
where scrolling will occur.

Page 44 FRONT PANEL
ADDR DESCRIPTION............. PRES M40 102 OUT FORMAT 2 – for ITS Cabinets
5 T&F BIU #6 RESERVED 0 0
6 T&F BIU #7 MFG USE 0 0 that utilize: Output Assemblies 14-0-14-0
7 T&F BIU #8 MFG USE 0 0 103 OUT FORMAT 3 – for ITS Cabinets
8 DET BIU #1 TS2 0 0 that utilize: Output Assemblies 14-0-6-0
9 DET BIU #2 TS2 0 0
10 DET BIU #3 TS2 0 0 104 OUT FORMAT 4 – for ITS Cabinets
11 DET BIU #4 TS2 0 0 that utilize: Output Assemblies 14-0-6-6
12 DET BIU #5 RESERVED 0 0 105 OUT FORMAT 5 – for ITS Cabinets
13 DET BIU #6 RESERVED 0 0
14 DET BIU #7 MFG USE 0 0 that utilize: Output Assemblies 6-0-0-0
15 DET BIU #8 MFG USE 0 0 106 OUT FORMAT 6 – for ITS Cabinets
16 MALFUNCTION UNIT 0 0 that utilize: Output Assemblies 6-6-0-0
17 DIAGNOSTIC (MSG 30) 0 0
18 CONTROLLER UNIT 0 0 107 OUT FORMAT 7 – for ITS Cabinets
19 UNDEFINED 0 0 that utilize: Output Assemblies 6-6-6-0
20 UNDEFINED 0 0
| | | | 108 OUT FORMAT 8 – for ITS Cabinets
253 UNDEFINED 0 0 that utilize: Output Assemblies 6-6-6-6
254 UNDEFINED 0 0 109 OUT FORMAT 9 – for ITS Cabinets
When no addresses are enabled and Port 1 hardware exists, that utilize: Output Assemblies 6-0-14-0
Frame 9 (Date and Time Broadcast) will continue to be 110 OUT FORMAT 10 – for ITS Cabinets
transmitted once a second. that utilize: Output Assemblies 6-6-14-0
111 OUT FORMAT 11 – for CBD Cabinets only.
To disable all Port 1 Communications when Port 1 hardware ENTRY ..DESCRIPTION........... ACTIVE
exists, Jumper the Port 1 Connector Pins 8 & 10. 112 RESERVED 0
113 RESERVED 0
114 RESERVED 0
The CU is capable of Port 1 communications to Detector BIUs 115 RESERVED 0
or other devices in a NEMA TS 1 cabinet without having a 116 RESERVED 0
NEMA TS 2 MMU attached to Port 1 also. This requires the 117 RESERVED 0
118 RESERVED 0
proper terminating resistors on the Port 1 communications 119 INPUT ASSY 1: ADDR 9 0
link. 120 INPUT ASSY 2: ADDR A 0
121 INPUT ASSY 3: ADDR B 0
Terminal & Facilities BIU # 1 being programmed as present is 122 INPUT ASSY 4: ADDR C 0
the flag to inform the CU that it is being used in a Type 1 123 INPUT ASSY 5: ADDR D 0
Terminal & Facilities. The use of any other T&F BIU without ACTIVE; entries denote the following:
T&F BIU # 1 is considered a fault and “DIAG: INV. TS2-A1 CNF” ‘0’ defines the format is NOT active
is logged plus flashing as defined below is initiated. ‘1’ defines the format as active.
All Input Assemblies (Entry 119-123) may be utilized at the
2.5.8.2 ITS Configuration Data same time. Eagle EPAC does NOT provide the ability to utilize
inputs from Input Assembly # 5.
When the user presses “7” from the Unit Data Menu, the TS 2
Port 1 screen above will be displayed. To jump to the ITS When an Input Assembly is defined as ‘active’ but is not
Configuration Data screen below, enter “101” in the ‘0’ ADDR present in the ITS cabinet, the resultant operation will be
field. Diagnostic Flash.
ENTRY ..DESCRIPTION........... ACTIVE
PRESS "101" FROM PORT 1 DATA SCREEN ADDR “0” FIELD 124 RESERVED 0
125 CMU 1: ADDR F 0
126 CMU 2: ADDR 10 RESERVED 0
ITS CONFIGURATION DATA (0-NO/1-YES) 127 CMU 3: ADDR 11 RESERVED 0
ENTRY ..DESCRIPTION........... ACTIVE 128 CMU 4: ADDR 12 RESERVED 0
101 OUT FORMAT 1: 14,0, 0,0 0
102 OUT FORMAT 2: 14,0,14,0 0 ACTIVE; entries denote the following:
103 OUT FORMAT 3: 14,0, 6,0 0
104 OUT FORMAT 4: 14,0, 6,6 0 ‘0’ defines the format is NOT active
105 OUT FORMAT 5: 6,0, 0,0 0 ‘1’ defines the format as active.
All CMU Assy (Entry 125-128) may be utilized at the same
 Default Data is all data = 0. time. Eagle EPAC only CMU Assembly #1.
ACTIVE; entries denote the following: When the cursor is in the ENTRY field, entry of a number will
‘0’ defines the format is NOT active cause the display to place that ‘entry’ data on the cursor line.
‘1’ defines the format as active. This enables the user to jump to a specific data entry area.
106 OUT FORMAT 6: 6,6, 0,0 0
107 OUT FORMAT 7: 6,6, 6,0 0
108
109
OUT
OUT
FORMAT 8:
FORMAT 9:
6,6, 6,6
6,0,14,0
0
0
2.5.9 I/O Miscellaneous
110 OUT FORMAT 10: 6,6,14,0 0
111 OUT FORMAT 11: CBD 0 The I/O Miscellaneous Display allows the user to view and/or
modify the parameters for the CU.
All Out Formats (Entry 101-111) are mutually exclusive, only
one may be active at a time (also, see 0).
101 OUT FORMAT 1 – for ITS Cabinets
that utilize: Output Assemblies 14-0-0-0

FRONT PANEL Page 45
PRESS "8" FROM UNIT MENU Input Mode 7 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 7
EPAC I/O MISC may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
RING I/O RING....1...2...3...4
INPUT RESPONSE 1 2 0 0 Input Mode 10 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
OUTPUT SELECT 1 2 0 0 Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 10
I/O MODES....INPUT..OUTPUT..BIT may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
‘ABC’ CONN : 0 0 0
‘D’ CONN : 0 0 - Input Mode 11 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 11
may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
 Default Data is as shown. Input Mode 12 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 12
RING INPUT RESPONSE: may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
The CU provides the capability to define 16 phases into a Input Mode 12 is not used at this time.
structure of up to four rings while having only hardware Input Mode 13 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
inputs for two rings. This programming entry defines for Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 13
each functional ring which, if any, hardware input set it may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
responds to. From none to all rings may respond to one Input Mode 13 is not used at this time.
ring input set. Input Mode 14 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
Code "0" (None): This entry denotes that the programmed Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 14
ring DOES NOT respond to either hardware ring input may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
set. Input Mode 14 is not used at this time.
Code "1" (Ring 1) This entry denotes that the programmed Input Mode 19 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
ring responds to hardware Ring #1 input set. Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 19
Code "2" (Ring 2) This entry denotes that the programmed may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
ring responds to hardware Ring #2 input set. "ABC” CONNECTOR OUTPUT MODE:
RING OUTPUT SELECT: Output Mode 0 provides Phase On, Phase Next, and Phase
Check output functions. It provides output functions
The CU provides the capability to define 16 phases into a which are NEMA TS1-1983 compatible.
structure of up to four rings while having only hardware Output Mode 1 provides Coordination output
outputs for two rings. This programming entry defines for terminations. A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize
each hardware output set which, if any, functional ring will Output Mode 1 will not be compatible with a NEMA
control it. Only one ring may control an output set. TS1-1983 CU.
Code "0" (None): This entry denotes that the programmed Output Mode 2 provides system output terminations. A
ring DOES NOT control either hardware ring output set. Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode 2
Code "1" (Ring 1) This entry denotes that the programmed will not be compatible with a NEMA TS1-1983 CU.
ring controls Ring #1 output set. Output Mode 3 is reserved for future definition and use by
Code "2" (Ring 2) This entry denotes that the programmed NEMA.
ring controls Ring #2 output set. Output Mode 4 is reserved for future definition and use by
"ABC” CONNECTOR INPUT MODE: NEMA.
Input Mode 0 provides Phase Hold, Phase Omit, and Phase Output Mode 5 is reserved for future definition and use by
Pedestrian Omit input functions. It provides input NEMA.
functions which are NEMA TS1-1983 compatible. Output Mode 6 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
Input Mode 1 provides additional detector and Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode 6
Coordination input terminations. A Terminal and may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 1 will not be Output Mode 6 is not used at this time.
compatible with a NEMA TS1-1983 CU. Output Mode 7 is for manufacturer specific applications. A
Input Mode 2 provides additional detector system input Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode 7
terminations. A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
Input Mode 2 will not be compatible with a NEMA TS1- Output Mode 10 is for manufacturer specific applications.
1983 CU. A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode
Input Mode 3 is reserved for future definition and use by 10 may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s
NEMA. CUs.
Input Mode 4 is reserved for future definition and use by Output Mode 11 is for manufacturer specific applications.
NEMA. A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode
Input Mode 5 is reserved for future definition and use by 11 may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s
NEMA. CUs.
Input Mode 6 is for manufacturer specific applications. A Output Mode 12 is for manufacturer specific applications.
Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Input Mode 6 A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode
may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs. 12 may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s
Input Mode 6 is not used at this time. CUs. Output Mode 12 is the same as Output Mode 10
except provides Interrupted Sync Pulses on the active
Offset output. Interrupted Sync Pulses are provided at

Page 46 FRONT PANEL
intervals equal to 20% and 25% of the cycle on alternate On phases that have no phase time (0 Seconds)
cycles. allocated, the dwell points will not occur.
Output Mode 13 is for manufacturer specific applications.
The Interconnect Mode "Free" to "Coordinated"
A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode
transition shall not be dependent on an Offset Input
13 may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s
when the Dial request is for Dial 3. Coordination pickup
CUs. Output Mode 13 is the same as Output Mode 10
will begin after a Dial 3 request is active for 15 seconds.
except provides a flashing output on the inactive
preempt status outputs. When the coordinator Dial 3 is in control, all Offset
Output Mode 14 is for manufacturer specific applications. transition methods will be disabled.
A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode
14 may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s The Sync Monitoring functions shall not cause the unit
CUs. Output Mode 14 is the same as Output Mode 11 to revert to "Free" mode when all Offset inputs are
except provides a flashing output on the inactive inactive for 15 seconds. Once coordination has begun,
preempt status outputs. the lack of an Offset input will not cause the unit to
Output Mode 19 is for manufacturer specific applications. revert to Free (the Central System may not provide an
A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Output Mode Offset for up to three cycles on a transfer from
19 may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s Computer Control to Backup).
CUs. The Coordination Cycle Diagnostics shall be suspended
"ABC” CONNECTOR BIT MODE: when the coordinator is stopped at a dwell point.
This is a display only field that indicates the value of the See "D" Connector Output Mode 9 for Outputs that may
ABC I/O Mode inputs. This value will set both the ABC be utilized with this input mode. Output Mode 9 is
Connector Input and Output Modes when both established automatically when Input Mode 9 is
parameters discussed above are zero. programmed.
"D" CONNECTOR INPUT MODE: This operation was established for systems that were
Input Mode 0 provides Coordination & Alt Sequence inputs designed for controlling pre-timed cycle units and has
when no system address is programmed and Special several limitations when attempting to control Dual
Detectors & Special Status inputs when a system Ring actuated controllers. The Dual Ring controller
address is programmed. must look to the system like a Single Ring controller!
Input Mode 1 provides input functions just opposite of That is to say, Ring to Ring timings must be the same
Standard input mode (Coordination & Alt Sequence and Lead/Lag operation is not possible. Also, Yield
inputs when a system address is programmed and Mode and Dual Ring configurations which have a non-
Special Detectors & Special Status inputs when no coord phase split timing at Cycle Zero are not
system address is programmed). compatible. There are more limitations but it is best to
Input Mode 2 provides input functions similar to Mode "0" say for this operation to be applicable to Dual Ring
except Preempt 5 and Preempt 6 inputs replace operation, the Dual Ring configuration MUST be really
functions on pin 20 and pin 21. simple.
Input Mode 3 provides input functions similar to Mode "1"
except Preempt 5 and Preempt 6 inputs replace "D" CONNECTOR OUTPUT MODE:
functions on pin 20 and pin 21. Output Mode 0 provides Coordination outputs when no
Input Mode 8 provides input functions similar to Mode "2" system address is programmed and System Special
except: This input mode automatically modifies the Function outputs when a system address is
output functions as follows: The modifications to Pin 21 programmed.
& 32 functions as defined above eliminates the Preempt Output Mode 1 provides output functions just opposite of
6 and TBC Auxiliary 3 capability. Standard output mode.
Input Mode 9 provides input functions which may be Output Mode 2 provides output functions similar to Mode
utilized with a central computer system. "0" except when any Preempt routine has control then it
is like Mode 4 below.
The Computer Control input, when active, causes the
coordinator phase times to stop at dwell points when When Auxiliary #2 is not programmed for output as a
Dial 3 is in control, and the Dial 3 input is active. TBC Auxiliary function, it will become an Any Preempt
active function. The Any Preempt output will become
For Permissive modes, the dwell points will occur just active when any Low Priority routine or any Preempt
prior to the completion of the coordination phase routine is in control. This output may provide the
Pedestrian Hold and just prior to the completion of the control signal to correctly utilize these dual function
actuated phase Pedestrian Permissive. outputs.
For Yield mode, the dwell points will occur 3.1 seconds Whenever an Auxiliary 2 event has been programmed
into every phase except the phase following the and it is desired to again implement the Any Preempt
Coordination Phase and 0.1 second into the Yield output, the clear memory function within TBC must be
Period. used to eliminate all TBC or all Auxiliary events (Code
Force Points are based on points in the Phase Time "0" or Code "2").
countdown regardless of the Force Mode programmed.

FRONT PANEL Page 47
Output Mode 3 provides output functions similar to Mode The last part of the list presents each unassigned Hardware
"1" except when any Preempt routine has control then it Output Pin set:
is like Mode 4 below. .............. x Ph 8 On/Nxt/Chk... 28
Output Mode 4 provides preempt status outputs that are There are three (3) data entry areas in the above screen
active whenever a preempt routine (Preempt or Low display:
Priority) is in control. The presence of the Any Priority
output indicates a Low Priority routine is in control. The column under the CHN heading, entry of a number will
Each routine (Preempt or Low Priority) is mutually cause the display to place that channel’s data on the cursor
exclusive. line. This enables the user to jump to a specific data entry
Output Mode 5 provides output functions similar to Mode area.
"0" (Address = "000") except provides Interrupted Sync The column under the SET heading, in the first part of the list
Pulses on the active Offset output. Interrupted Sync (assigned), an entry of a number will cause that Hardware
Pulses are provided at intervals equal to 20% and 25% Output Pin set to be assigned to that channel.
of the cycle on alternate cycles.
Output Mode 6 provides output functions similar to Mode If the Hardware Output Pin set just entered was previously
"4" except when a Preempt is active provides a flashing assigned to another channel, that channel will no longer be
output on the inactive preempt status outputs. assigned to a Hardware Output Pin set.
Output Mode 9 provides output functions which are
The column under the SET heading, in the last part of the list
provided as status feedback for the central computer
(unassigned), an entry will cause the display to place that
system control established with Input Mode 9. It is
Hardware Output Pin set position in the list to be displayed on
established automatically when Input Mode 9 is
the cursor line.
programmed.
Cycle 0 - this output will be operational during all SIG DRV GRP CHN HDWE OUTPUT PIN SET
Ph06 Vehicle..06 Ph06 Red/Yel/Grn...06
coordination timing plans (Dial/Split combinations). Ph07 Vehicle..07 Ph07 Red/Yel/Grn...07
Each time the background cycle passes through a point Ph08 Vehicle..08 Ph08 Red/Yel/Grn...08
equal to local zero, the output will be inactive for a Ph02 Pedest...09 Ph02 DW/PC/WK......10
Ph04 Pedest...10 Ph04 DW/PC/WK......12
minimum of 3 seconds. Ph06 Pedest...11 Ph06 DW/PC/WK......14
R# Dwell - a per ring output will be operational when OL A Vehicle..13 OL A Red/Yel/Grn...17
Dial 3 is in control and a Dwell point is reached. See "D" OL B Vehicle..14 OL B Red/Yel/Grn...18
Connector Input Mode 9 for a definition of dwell points. OL C Vehicle..15 OL C Red/Yel/Grn...19
OL D Vehicle..16 OL D Red/Yel/Grn...20
2.5.10 Signal Driver Output Ph01

Ph03
Pedest...17
Pedest...18
Ph01
Ph03
DW/PC/WK......09
DW/PC/WK......11
The Signal Driver Output Display allows the user to view and Ph07 Pedest...20 Ph07 DW/PC/WK......15
modify the channel to signal driver output mapping OL E Vehicle..21 Ph01 On/Nxt/Chk....21
parameters for the CU. This programming has no impact on OL F Vehicle..22 Ph02 On/Nxt/Chk....22
OL G Vehicle..23 Ph03 On/Nxt/Chk....23
NEMA TS 2 Type 1 CUs. OL H Vehicle..24 Ph04 On/Nxt/Chk....24
Ph05 On/Nxt/Chk....25
PRESS "9" FROM UNIT DATA MENU Ph06 On/Nxt/Chk....26
Ph07 On/Nxt/Chk....27
EPAC SIGNAL DRIVER OUTPUTS Ph08 On/Nxt/Chk....28
SIG DRV GRP CHN HDWE OUTPUT PIN.. SET
Ph04 Vehicle..04
Ph05 Vehicle..05
Ph04 Red/Yel/Grn...04
Ph05 Red/Yel/Grn...05
2.5.11 224E Status Display
A-UP B-DN E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
The 224E Status Display allows the user to view status
information from the Siemens LD4 detector.
The purpose of the screen is to assign the Channel Outputs to
Hardware Pins for CUs with Connectors A, B, & C. The Signal PRESS "A" FROM UNIT DATA MENU
Driver Group (SIG DRV GRP) to Channel (CHN) assignments
EPAC 224E DETECTOR STATUS DISPLAY
have been programmed in the Overlap Standard and Ring DETECTOR ADDRESS : 01 NO RESPONSE
Structure screens. TEST MODE :
LOOP FAULT :
This screen presents a list of 24 Channel Outputs that may be OUTPUT DIRECTION :
assigned to the available 28 Hardware Output Pin sets. The list OCCUPANCY > 1 MIN:
HARDWARE FAULT :
varies in length and has two areas: 0-PREV DET 1-NEXT DET F-PRIOR MENU
The first part of the list presents each Channel Output with it’s
assigned Hardware Output Pin set: STATUS INDICATIONS:
DETECTOR ADDRESS: reports either ## NO RESP when no
detector responds or ## RESPONDING. In the event a

Page 48 FRONT PANEL
response came in but the checksum was in error the

text will say MESSAGE ERROR STOP T RESET.: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
TEST MODE: reports TRUE for the LD4 "test" switch being ALT SEQUENCE.: 0 (0-18)
on and FALSE for the test switch being off A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
LOOP FAULT: reports whether it is a (DOUBLE) or (SINGLE)
loop and TRUE when the loop detector has a fault and
FALSE when it does not e.g. (DOUBLE) TRUE, (DOUBLE) • I’NAT’L SEQ (International Sequence) must be zero (1) for
FALSE, (SINGLE) TRUE and (SINGLE) FALSE. EPAC to provide the International Sequence operation.
OUTPUT DIRECTION: will report MAIN ONLY or PRESS "0"FROM PHASE MENU (F-3-0)
MAIN+OPPOSITE depending on the loop configuration.
OCCUPANCY > 1 MIN: reports either TRUE or FALSE based PHASE .....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
on some configuration parameters in the detector. WOFF/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
HARDWARE FAULT: reports hardware fault. MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
GDLY/10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
YDLY/10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
2.5.12 International Sequence A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
EPAC includes the ability to provide the transition displays

used by the international user. • GDLY (Green Delay) value establishes the amount of
time the Green/Walk outputs are delayed to provide the Red +
The International Sequence (IS) for a phase is as follows: Yellow transition display.
Phase Vehicle • YDLY (Yellow Delay) value establishes the amount of

Signal # Clear time the Yellow output is delayed to provide the Flashing
Green transition display.
1 2 3 4 5 6
The above example programming establishes IS control on All
Phs # Red R - - - R R Phases (1-8) and that the IS R->G transition (R+Y) will be two
seconds and the IS G->Y transition (FG) will be four seconds.
Phs # Yellow Y - - - Y -
Note: In current EPAC operation, the International
Phs # Green - G G FG - - Sequence is not extended to Overlap Signal drivers or is
Phs # Don’t D - FD D D D operational in any transition to and within Preempt.
Walk
Phs # PC (Yel) - - ON 2.5.13 Advance Warning Signals
Phs # Walk - W - - - - Advance Warning Signals (AWS) can be used to provide
drivers with information on the change in signal indication at
1. The GDLY (0-255 tenth Seconds) values determine this approaching intersection.
interval length (amount of time the R->G transition lasts
and the Green/Walk is delayed) EPAC provides the ability to drive AWS for each phase through
the Pedestrian Clear (Load Switch Yellow) output.
2. The Phase Green values and actuations determine this
interval length. The AWS Sequence for a phase is as follows:
3. The Phase Ped Clear values determine this interval length. Phase Vehicle
4. The YDLY (0-255 tenth Seconds) values determine this Signal # Clear
interval length (amount of time the G->Y transition lasts 1 2 3 4 5 6
and the Yellow is delayed).
Phs # Red - - - - - R
5. The Phase Yellow values determine this interval length.
6. The Phase Red Clearance values determine this interval Phs # Yellow - - - - Y -
length. Phs # Green G G G G - -
Phs # Don’t - - FD D D D D
2.5.12.1 International Sequence Walk
Programming
Phs # PC (Yel) ON - - ON ON ON
The following is an example of International Sequence
Phs # Walk W W- - - - -
programming:
PRESS "1" FROM UNIT MENU 1. The GDLY (0-255 tenth Seconds) values determine this
interval length (amount of time the Advance Warning
EPAC STARTUP & MISC output remains ON after the beginning of the Phase
STARTUP TIME.: 05 (SEC) STATE: 0 (0-FL Green). This value may be set to zero.

FRONT PANEL Page 49
2. The Phase Walk / Ped Clear values determine this interval

length. EXITB-DN
A-UP PHASE : 000000000
C-LT D-RT 0000000 F-MENU
3. The Phase Green values determine this interval length.
4. The YDLY (0-255 tenth Seconds) values determine this • FLSH (Flash) value must be zero (0) when the Advance
interval length (amount of time the Advance Warning Warning Signals are to be Dark during Remote Flash or three
output turns On before the end of the Phase Green). This (3) when the Advance Warning Signals are to be ON during
value MUST be greater than zero (1-255 tSec) for AWS Remote Flash.
operation to be enabled. PRESS "0"FROM PHASE MENU (F-3-0)
5. The Phase Yellow values determine this interval length.
PHASE .....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
6. The Phase Red Clearance values determine this interval WOFF/10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
length. WOFF MODE: 0-ADVANCE WALK 1-DELAY WALK
GDLY/10 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60
YDLY/10 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40
Note: EPAC turns on AWS outputs ON A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
during Startup & Fault Flash even
though standard cabinet wiring
precludes the outputs from being • GDLY (Green Delay) value (0-255 tSec) establishes the
visible to the driver. With a amount of time the Advance Warning output remains ON after
modification to standard cabinet the beginning of the Phase Green. This value may be set to
wiring, the AWS could be visible to zero.
the driver.
• YDLY (Yellow Delay) value (0-255 tSec) establishes the
amount of time the Advance Warning output turns On before
the end of the Phase Green. This value MUST be greater than
EPAC turns on AWS outputs when a zero (1-255 tSec) for AWS operation to be enabled. When
transition to preempt begins and I’NAT’L SEQ is Zero and YDLY is Zero, The standard NEMA
maintains this ON condition for the sequence is provided.
duration of preempt. The above example programming establishes AWS control on
Phases 2-4-6-8 and that the AWS output will appear four
seconds before the end of the respective phase Green and stay
EPAC turns on AWS outputs during on until six seconds after the phase Green begins.
Startup Flash, Fault Flash and Preempt
even though standard cabinet wiring
precludes the outputs from being
visible to the driver in Startup and Fault 2.6 COORDINATION DATA
Flash.
Coordination Data allows the user to display and/or enter

2.5.13.1 Advance Warning Programming controller parameters for:
The following is an example of Advance Warning 1) Setup (Mode/Correction) Parameters
programming: 2) Manual Mode Parameters
3) Dial/Split Parameters
PRESS "1" FROM UNIT MENU 4) Dial/Split Copy
5) Coordination Data Clear
EPAC STARTUP & MISC
STARTUP TIME.: 05 (SEC) STATE: 0 (0-FL To enter data for these intervals requires user access. See 0 for
RED REV/10...: 40 (TSEC) more information on gaining access.
STOP T RESET.: 0 (0-NO 1-YES)
ALT SEQUENCE.: 0 (0-18)
I’NAT’L SEQ :
A-UP B-DN C-LT
0 (0-NO 1-YES)
D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
2.6 Coordination Menu
The Coordination Menu allows the user to select which
• I’NAT’L SEQ (International Sequence) must be zero (0) for coordination parameter database to be addressed.
EPAC to provide the Advance warning operation.
EPAC FLASH TST-A=FLSH: 0 (0-NO/1-YES)

FLSH 2=Y,3=S: 111111113 3330000000 00000
ALT FLASH : 000000000 0000000000 00000
CHN/PHS: 123456789 0123456789 01234
ENTRY PHASE: 000000000 0000000

Page 50 FRONT PANEL
EPAC COORD DATA PRESS # DESIRED
1-SETUP COORD
2-MANUAL CONTROL
3-DIAL/SPLIT DATA
4-COPY DIAL/SPLIT
5-CLEAR MEMORY
F-PRIOR MENU
1) SETUP COORD provides viewing and editing of the

overall coordination/unit parameters.
2) MANUAL CONTROL provides viewing and editing of
the pattern to control in manual mode.
3) DIAL/SPLIT DATA provides viewing and editing of the
pattern parameters for each of the sixteen dial/split
combinations.
4) COPY DIAL/SPLIT will copy one dial/split parameters
to another.
5) CLEAR MEMORY will clear (zero out) all coordination
parameters.

FRONT PANEL Page 51
CORR (Correction Mode)

2.6.2 Coordination Setup Code "0-DWL": This correction mode provides an offset
dwell until correction has been accomplished.
The Coordination Setup Display allows the user to view and/or
Code "1-MDW": This correction mode provides an offset
modify the overall coordination/unit parameters.
dwell until correction has been accomplished with Max
PRESS "1" FROM COORD DATA MENU Dwell Time establishing the dwell limit for a single
cycle.
EPAC COORD SETUP .0. .1. .2. .3. .4. .5. Code "2-SWY": This correction mode provides an offset
A-UP OPER:0 FRE AUT MAN --- --- --- correction by shortening or dwelling based on a
B-DN MODE:0 PRM YLD PYL POM SOM FAC
C-LT MAX :0 INH MX1 MX2 --- --- --- shortest way calculation. Correction will not exceed
D-RT CORR:0 DWL MDW SWY SW+ --- --- 20% in a cycle and will automatically take into
E-ENTER OFST:0 BEG END OF GREEN
F-PRIOR FRCE:0 PLN CYCLE TIME consideration minimum times.
MENU MX DWELL:000 YIELD PERIOD:000 Code "3-SW+": This correction mode provides an offset
dwell similar to MX DW except the max dwell time will
 Default Data is as shown. be the larger of ( 20% of the cycle ) or (Max Dwell time
).
OPER (Operation Mode) Code "4-SW2": This correction mode operates the same as
Code "0-FRE": This mode provides for Free operation SW Mode except when going long will add to all phases
without coordination from any source. proportional to their split time.
Code "1-AUT": This mode provides for coordination
operation, or free, to be automatically determined by OFST (Offset Mode)
the possible sources (i.e., interconnect, time base, or Code "0-BEG": This offset mode provides an offset based
system commands). upon the beginning of the first coordination phase
Code "2-MAN": This mode provides for Manual green.
Coordination operation running the pattern as defined Code "1-END": This offset mode provides an offset based
in the Manual Control entries. upon the end of the first coordination phase green.
MODE (Coordination Mode) FRCE (Force Mode)

Code "0-PRM": This coordination mode provides Permissive Code "0-PLN": This force mode provides a force based upon
Coordination operation, or Free, as determined by the the plan timing. Each phase will be forced a fixed time
possible sources (i.e., interconnect, time base, or after it has become active.
system commands). Code "1-CYCLE": This force mode provides a force based
Code "1-YLD": This coordination mode provides Yield upon the cycle timing. Each actuated phase will be
Coordination operation, or Free, as determined by the forced at a fixed position in the cycle.
possible sources (i.e., interconnect, time base, or MAX DWELL: This value establishes the maximum time (000-
system commands). 999 Seconds) the unit may dwell for offset correction in a
Code "2-PYL": This coordination mode provides Permissive single cycle.
Yield Coordination operation, or Free, as determined by
the possible sources (i.e., interconnect, time base, or YIELD PERIOD: This value establishes the time (000-999
system commands). Seconds) of the yield period for Yield and Permissive Yield
Code "3-POM": This coordination mode provides Permissive coordination modes.
Omit Coordination operation, or Free, as determined by
the possible sources (i.e., interconnect, time base, or
system commands). 2.6.3 Coordination Manual
Code "4-SOM": This coordination mode provides Sequential
Omit Coordination operation, or Free, as determined by
Control
the possible sources (i.e., interconnect, time base, or The Coordination Manual Control Display allows the user to
system commands). view and/or set the pattern to be in control under manual
Code "5-FAC": This coordination mode provides Full coordination mode.
Actuated Coordination operation, or Free, as
determined by the possible sources (i.e., interconnect, PRESS "2" FROM COORD DATA MENU
time base, or system commands).
EPAC COORD MANUAL CONTROL
MAX (Maximum Mode)
Code "0-INH": This Maximum mode provides for the DIAL: 1 SPLIT: 1 OFFSET: 1 SYNC: 0
internal Maximum Timing to be inhibited while TO SET CYCLE ZERO IN MANUAL CONTROL
coordination is running a pattern. ENTER "1" FOR SYNC THEN PRESS "E"
Code "1-MX1": This Maximum mode provides for the A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
Maximum 1 Timing to be effective while coordination is
running a pattern.
Code "2-MX2": This Maximum mode provides for the
Maximum 2 Timing to be effective while coordination is DIAL: This entry (1-4) establishes the DIAL part of the pattern
running a pattern. definition that will control during manual mode.

Page 52 FRONT PANEL
SPLIT: This entry (1-4) establishes the SPLIT part of the PRESS "3" FROM COORD DATA MENU
pattern definition that will control during manual mode.
EPAC DIAL/SPLIT
OFFSET: This entry (0-3) establishes the OFFSET part of the DIAL: 1 SPLIT: 1 LEVEL: 2
pattern definition that will control during manual mode. CYCLE LENGTH: 000 (SECONDS)
ENTER A DIAL, SPLIT, & LEVEL #
Set Offset equal to “0” for Absolute Sync operation. THEN PRESS "E" TO CONTINUE
LEVEL CODE:
SYNC: This entry (1) establishes the SYNC reference for the 1-OFFSET+SEQUENCE 2-PH TIME+MODE
pattern that will control during manual mode. Once A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
initiated this reference will be automatically regenerated
once a cycle for the duration of the manual pattern.
The "Level" code entry determines whether Offset + Sequence
Absolute Sync Reference is a reference method in which each Data (See 0) or Phase Time + Mode Data (See 0) will follow.
cycle shall be individually referenced to a single point in time
CYCLE LENGTH: This value establishes the Cycle Length of the
via a keypad initiated sync command or downloaded via the
Timing Plan (0-999 seconds) pointed to by the DIAL and
system interface or RS232C port. This operation will allow the
SPLIT fields above it. This value is automatically calculated
CU to keep step with a free running cycle counter. Typically
by the device but may be overriden by the user.
this operation is required when the CU is running under
manual control.
1) To establish the Absolute Sync Reference Point for a 2.6.4.1 Offset + Sequence Data
particular Dial/Split, enter the Dial #, Split #, and "1" in the The Offset + Sequence Display allows the user to view and/or
Sync field. modify the respective parameters for each of the sixteen
2) To Clear the Absolute Sync Reference Point for a particular dial/split combinations.
Dial/Split, enter the Dial #, Split #, then "0" in the Sync field. SELECT LEVEL 1 FROM DIAL/SPLIT DATA
3) To establish the Absolute Sync Reference Point for a All
Splits For a Single Dial, enter the Dial #, "0" in the Split DIAL 1 SPLIT 1 PARAMETERS
OFFSET TIME ALT PATN COR SPC R2 R3 R4
field, and then "1" in the Sync field. # SEC SEQ MODE MOD FUN LAG LAG LAG
1 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4) To clear the Absolute Sync Reference Point for a All Splits 2 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For a Single Dial, enter the Dial #, "0" in the Split field, and 3 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODE (0-6): NRM/PRM/YLD/PYL/POM/SOM/FAC
then "0" in the Sync field. A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
5) To establish the Absolute Sync Reference Point for a All
Dials For a Single Split, enter "0" in the Dial field, Split #,  Default Data is as shown
and then "1" in the Sync field. TIME (Offset Time): This value establishes the OFFSET TIME
6) To clear the Absolute Sync Reference Point for a All Dials (0-999 seconds) for the local cycle zero which will be
For a Single Split, enter "0" in the Dial field, Split #, and maintained during the pattern defined.
then "0" in the Sync field. ALT SEQ (Alternate Sequence): This entry establishes the
7) To establish the Absolute Sync Reference Point for a All SEQUENCE (00-18) which will be in effect for the duration
Dials and All Splits, enter "0" in the Dial field, "0" in the Split of the pattern defined. Alternate sequence definition is in
field, and then "1" in the Sync field. Unit Data.
8) To clear the Absolute Sync Reference Point for a All Dials PATN MODE (Pattern Mode): This entry establishes the
and All Splits, enter "0" in the Dial field, "0" in the Split Coordination MODE (0-6) which will be in effect for the
field, and then "0" in the Sync field. duration of the pattern defined. This entry overrides the
default mode entered in the SETUP display for the duration
When running coordination using Absolute Sync Reference of the pattern.
points, the Coordination Timers active status will denote
"ASYN REF" in place of the standard "SYNC REF". When the COR MOD (Coordination Mode): This entry establishes an
active pattern has a valid absolute sync reference, a "!" will override correction mode based on the pattern being
appear next to the sync timer value. For those periods when a edited.
valid absolute sync reference does not exist, the CU will utilize SPC FUN (Special Function): This entry enables a special
24:00 hours as the sync reference point. function to be turned on based on the pattern.
R2 LAG (Ring 2 Lag Time): When no barriers exist that lock
2.6.4 Coordination Dial/Split Ring 2 to Ring 1, this value establishes the TIME (0-999
Data seconds) which the beginning of the coordination phase in
Ring 2 will be offset from the beginning of the
coordination phase in Ring 1 during the pattern defined.
The Coordination Dial/Split Display allows the user to view
and/or modify the pattern parameters for each of the sixteen R3 LAG (Ring 3 Lag Time): When no barriers exist that lock
dial/split combinations. Ring 3 to Ring 2, this value establishes the TIME (0-999
seconds) which the beginning of the coordination phase in

FRONT PANEL Page 53
Ring 3 will be offset from the beginning of the Code "1-COORD PH" : This entry establishes that the phase
coordination phase in Ring 1 during the pattern defined. will operate as the COORD PHASE for the ring within
the pattern defined.
R4 LAG (Ring 4 Lag Time): When no barriers exist that lock
Code "2-MIN REC" : This entry establishes that the phase
Ring 4 to Ring 3, this value establishes the TIME (0-999
will operate as an actuated phase with a coordination
seconds) which the beginning of the coordination phase in
modifier of MINIMUM RECALL within the pattern
Ring 4 will be offset from the beginning of the
defined.
coordination phase in Ring 1 during the pattern defined.
Code "3-MAX REC" : This entry establishes that the phase
Changes to the active pattern (Dial/Split) will cause the unit to will operate as an actuated phase with a coordination
drop coordination for 15 seconds. This provides for a positive modifier of MAXIMUM RECALL within the pattern
release from one set of parameters, further entries to the defined.
same pattern, and an evaluation of the complete new Code "4-PED REC" : This entry establishes that the phase
parameter set prior to running same. will operate as an actuated phase with a coordination
modifier of PEDESTRIAN RECALL within the pattern
defined.
2.6.4.2 Phase Time + Mode Data Code "5-MX+P REC" : This entry establishes that the phase
will operate as an actuated phase with a coordination
The Coordination Phase Display allows the user to view and/or
modifier of MAXIMUM RECALL and PEDESTRIAN
modify the respective parameters for each of the sixteen
RECALL within the pattern defined.
dial/split combinations.
Code "6-PH OMIT" : This entry establishes that the phase
SELECT LEVEL 2 FROM DIAL/SPLIT DATA will operate as an actuated phase with a coordination
modifier of PHASE OMIT within the pattern defined.
DIAL 1 SPLIT 1 PHASE PARAMETERS Code "7-DUAL COORD PHASE" : This entry establishes that
PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8 the phase will operate as the DUAL COORD phase for
TIME 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 the ring within the pattern defined.
MODE: 0-ACTUATED 1-COORD PH 2-MIN REC
3-MAX REC 4-PED REC 5-MX+P REC Changes to the active pattern (Dial/Split) will cause the unit to
6-PH OMIT 7-DUAL COORD PHASE drop coordination for 15 seconds. This provides for a positive
release from one set of parameters, further entries to the
same pattern, and an evaluation of the complete new
 Default Data is as shown parameter set prior to running same.
DIAL 1 SPLIT 1 PHASE PARAMETERS
PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
TIME 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.6.5 Coordination Copy
MODE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODE: 0-ACTUATED 1-COORD PH 2-MIN REC The Coordination Copy Display allows the user to copy the
3-MAX REC 4-PED REC 5-MX+P REC
6-PH OMIT 7-DUAL COORD PHASE parameters from one dial/split to another within the CU.
PRESS "4" FROM COORD DATA MENU
 Default Data is as shown EPAC COORD COPY
The above displays are scrolling screens to enable viewing all COPY FROM ........ DIAL: 1 SPLIT: 1
16 phases of data. The first and last field are where scrolling COPY TO .......... DIAL: 1 SPLIT: 2
will occur. ENTER THE FROM & TO DIAL/SPLIT ## THEN
ANY ENTRY HERE INITIATES THE COPY >>> 0
From the first field, pressing: A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
A (UP) will cause the screen to scroll left 8 columns.
C (LT) will cause the screen to scroll left 1 column.
FROM DIAL: This entry (1-4) establishes the DIAL part of the
From the last field, pressing:
pattern definition that will become the source of the copy
B (DN) will cause the screen to scroll right 4 columns.
function.
D (RT) will cause the screen to scroll right 1 column.
FROM SPLIT: This entry (1-4) establishes the SPLIT part of the
TIME (Phase Time): This value establishes the TIME (0-400
pattern definition that will become the source of the copy
seconds) allocated to the phase within the pattern defined.
function.
A zero value may be entered for an inactive phase. Otherwise,
TO DIAL: This entry (1-4) establishes the DIAL part of the
this value must be adequate to service the minimum
pattern definition that will become the destination of the
vehicle requirements of the phase except for some non-
copy function.
primary phases when operating in Tx Diamond mode.
TO SPLIT: This entry (1-4) establishes the SPLIT part of the
MODE (Phase Mode)
pattern definition that will become the destination of the
Code "0-ACTUATED" : This entry establishes that the phase
copy function.
will operate WITHOUT ADDITIONAL MODIFIERS within
the pattern defined. Pattern Copy operation will cause the unit to drop
coordination for 15 seconds.

Page 54 FRONT PANEL
7) CLEAR MEMORY will clear (zero out) selective or all

2.6.6 Coordination Clear TBC event areas.
Memory 8) DIMMING provides viewing and editing of the
dimming parameters.
The Coordination Clear Display allows the user to clear (zero 9) PHS FUNC MAPPING provides viewing and editing of
out) all coordination parameters. the Phase Function Mapping parameters.
0) SPC FUNC MAPPING provides viewing and editing of
PRESS "5" FROM COORD DATA MENU the Special Function Mapping parameters.
EPAC COORD CLEAR MEMORY

WARNING....THIS OPTION WILL REMOVE ALL
2.7.2 Time Base - Current
CURRENT OPERATING DATA ...............
- PRESS "E" TO CONTINUE The Time Base Current Display allows the user to view the
current time base status and control modes.
F-PRIOR MENU PRESS "1" FROM TIME BASE MENU
EPAC TIME BASE - CURRENT F-PRIOR MENU

SAT 03/15/86 12:10:30 STD TIME
2.7 TIME BASE DATA

DAY PROGRAM: 07 WEEK PROGRAM: 0
------TRAFFIC------ ----AUXILIARY----
DL/SP/OF: 2/2/2 A: 12* DIM:N
D: .2.
P: ......... ....... S: .*******
CODES: (#)-ON (.)-OFF (*)-NOT DEFINED
Time Base Data allows the user to display and/or enter

controller parameters for: Duplicate display, See 0 for additional details.
1) View Current Activity
2) Set Time/Date
3) Traffic Events
2.7.3 Time Base Set Time/Date
4) Auxiliary Events The Time Base Set Time/Date Display allows the user to
5) Time-Of-Year Events modify/set the date/time within the CU.
6) Program Day Equate/Transfer
7) TBC Data Clear Feature PRESS "2" FROM TIME BASE MENU
8) Dimming Definition
EPAC TIME BASE - SET TIME/DATE
To enter data for these intervals requires user access. See 0 for --DATE-- --TIME-- WEEK BEG-DST--END
more information on gaining access. MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS DAY MM SW MM SW
09/21/85 10:00:00 7 04 1 10 5
CYC ZERO: 00:00 (00:00 HH:MM - EVENT)
STZ DIFF:-21600 (- IS 1; CST=-21600)
2.7.1 Time Base Menu ..
The Time Base Menu allows the user to select which Time Base
parameter database to be addressed. DATE "MM/DD/YY": This entry establishes the current DATE
PRESS "6" FROM MAIN MENU from which the Time Base implements all time of year
events.
EPAC TIME BASE DATA PRESS # DESIRED
TIME "HH:MM:SS": This entry establishes the current TIME
1-VIEW CURRENT 6-EQUATE/TRANSFER from which the Time Base implements all time of day
2-SET TIME/DATE 7-CLEAR MEMORY events.
3-TRAFFIC EVENTS 8-DIMMING
4-AUX EVENTS 9-PHS FUNC MAPPING
5-TOY EVENTS 0-SPC FUNC MAPPING WEEK DAY: This entry establishes the current DAY of the WEEK
F-PRIOR MENU from which the Time Base implements the proper program
day. (Ref. Sunday is Day 01)
1) VIEW CURRENT provides viewing of the Time Base DST (Daylight Savings Time)
time, date, and event status. BEG - MM & SW: An entry for "MM" establishes the month
2) SET TIME/DATE provides for setting the date, time, (01-12) along with an entry for "SW" establishes the
Daylight Savings, and Cycle Zero parameters. Sunday Week (1-5) that Daylight Savings Time will
3) TRAFFIC EVENTS provides viewing and editing of the begin.
Traffic Events. END - MM & SW: An entry for "MM" establishes the month
4) AUX EVENTS provides viewing and editing of the (01-12) along with an entry for "SW" establishes the
Auxiliary Events. Sunday Week (1-5) that Daylight Savings Time will end.
5) TOY EVENTS provides viewing and editing of the Time
Of Year Events. A Sunday Week entry of "5" will establish the last
6) EQUATE/TRANSFER will Transfer (copy) or Equate one Sunday in the Month as the BEGIN or END point for
program days events to another.

FRONT PANEL Page 55
Daylight Savings Time whether the last Sunday is the DL (Dial): This entry (0-5) establishes the DIAL part of the
fourth or fifth Sunday in that month. traffic event which is to occur.
Besides an entry "0" in all of the above fields, an When an event requests Dial 5, Remote Flash will occur.
incomplete or invalid entry will prevent Daylight
SP (Split): This entry (0-5) establishes the SPLIT part of the
Savings Time from being implemented. Daylight
traffic event which is to occur.
Savings must BEGIN in a Month number lower than the
Month number it will END to be considered valid. When an event requests Split 5, Remote Flash will occur.
CYC ZERO: This entry establishes the time of day from which OF (Offset): This entry (0-4) establishes the OFFSET part of the
all SYNC REFERENCES (CYCLE ZERO) for coordination will traffic event which is to occur.
be made, entry of "24:00" will establish a midnight
reference. When set at "00:00" the sync reference will be When an event requests Offset 4, Free (Non-Coordinated
the time the event was initiated. Operation will occur). When an event requests Offset 0, the
Coordination Pattern will be selected by interconnect
STZ DIFF (Standard Time Zone Differential): This entry inputs.
establishes the differential (in seconds) between the local
Standard Time and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) aka It is possible for the partial interconnect control only based
Universal Time (UTC). on an event similar to "0/4/0" wherein Split 4 is selected by
the Time Base but Dial and Offset are controlled by the
Interconnect inputs. An Event similar to '4/0/0' defines one
STANDARD TIME wherein Dial 4 is selected by TBC but Split and Offset are
GMT EST CST MST PST controlled by the Interconnect).
DIF-Hr -5 -6 -7 -8
DIF-Sec -18000 -21600 -25200 -28800 P (Phase Function)
Code "0": This entry (for each Phase Function) establishes
GPS devices requires time to be set by using GMT, therefore, that the output shall be OFF.
the device must know the difference between GMT and Code "1": This entry (for each Phase Function) establish
local Standard Time in all GPS applications. that the output shall be ON. See 0 for more detail on
Phase Function Mapping.
2.7.4 Traffic Events A traffic event may include pattern data (dial/split/offset) or
Phase Function controls but both cannot be programmed
The Traffic Events Display allows the user to view and/or on the same line at the same time.
modify the time base traffic events programmed in the unit's
time base database. The pointed event is that used or that to receive values
from the Add, Delete, or Edit functions.
PRESS "3" FROM TIME BASE MENU
Events may be entered in any order. The CU will place them in
EPAC TIME BASE - TRAFFIC EVENTS chronological order for display and implementation. The
cursor control keys "A" and "B" will move the Event Pointer Up
DISPLAY / SCAN BEGINNING AT:
DAY: 07 HH:MM: 10:00 or Down in that chronological list.
ENTER DAY + TIME AND PRESS "E"

(PRESS "E" W/O THE ABOVE FOR CURRENT)
2.7.5 Auxiliary Events
The Auxiliary Events Display allows the user to view and/or
The above display allows the user to establish a starting point modify the time base auxiliary events.
(Date & Time) from which to scroll the traffic events database. PRESS "4" FROM TIME BASE MENU
PRESS "E" FROM TRAFFIC EVENTS MENU
EPAC TIME BASE - AUXILIARY EVENTS
EPAC TIME BASE - TRAFFIC EVENTS DISPLAY / SCAN BEGINNING AT:
DD HH MM DL SP OF P123456789 0123456 DAY: 07 HH:MM: 10:00
01 06:00 1 1 1 ......... ......
> 01 08:00 1 2 1 ......... ...... ENTER DAY + TIME AND PRESS "E"
01 10:00 2 1 1 ......... ...... (PRESS "E" W/O THE ABOVE FOR CURRENT)
CODES........FL=DL/SP=5....FR=OF=4...... A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
OVERWRITE ">" W/ 1-ADD 2-DELETE 3-EDIT
The above display allows the user to establish a starting point
 Default Data is not provided. (Date & Time) from which to scroll the auxiliary events
DD (Program Day): This entry (01-99) establishes the database.
PROGRAM DAY for the event to occur.
HH:MM (Time): This entry establishes the TIME of day for the
event to occur.

Page 56 FRONT PANEL
PRESS "E" FROM AUXILIARY EVENTS MENU PRESS "5" FROM TIME BASE MENU
EPAC TIME BASE - AUXILIARY EVENTS EPAC TIME BASE TIME OF YEAR EVENTS
DD HH MM A123 D123 DIM S12345678 MM DD YY SP DAY SP WK WEEK = P DAY
01 06:00 100 000 0 00000000 11 28 85 1 0 = 01-07
> 01 08:00 010 000 0 00000000 > 12 25 85 52 1 = 11-17
01 10:00 001 000 0 00000000 01 01 86 0 : = ::-::
CODES........0-OFF....1-ON.............. 9 = 91-97
OVERWRITE ">" W/ 1-ADD 2-DELETE 3-EDIT OVERWRITE ">" W/ 1-ADD 2-DELETE 3-EDIT
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
 Default Data is not provided.  Default Data is not provided.

DD (Program Day): This entry (01-99) establishes the MM DD YY (Month Day Year): This entry establishes the DATE
PROGRAM DAY for the event to occur. for the event to occur.
HH:MM (Time): This entry establishes the TIME of day for the SP DAY (Special Day): This entry (01-99) establishes the
event to occur. SPECIAL (EXCEPTION) DAY of events to be run on that
date.
A1/--/A3 (Auxiliary Output)
Code "0": This entry (for each auxiliary) establish that the SP WK (Special Week): This entry (0-9) establishes the SPECIAL
output shall be OFF. (ALTERNATE) WEEK to start on the selected date.
Code "1": This entry (for each auxiliary) establish that the
The pointed event is that used or that to receive values from
Output shall be ON.
the Add, Delete, or Edit functions.
D1 (Detector Diagnostic)
Events may be entered in any order. The CU will place them in
Code "0": This entry establishes that the Value 0 set of
chronological order for display and implementation. The
parameters shall be used for Detector Diagnostics.
cursor control keys "A" and "B" will move the Event Pointer Up
Code "1": This entry establishes that the Value 1 set of
or Down in that chronological list.
parameters shall be used for Detector Diagnostics.
D2 (System Detector Report)
Code "0": This entry establishes that the System Detector 2.7.7 Equate/Transfer
Report stop (not start).
Code "1": This entry establishes that the System Detector The Equate/Transfer Display allows the user to equate and/or
Report shall start. After the "Start" command, the report transfer events from one program day to another within the
will begin at an even multiple of the interval time (see CU.
0) from 24:00 hours. The report will continue to log PRESS "6" FROM TIME BASE MENU
(repeat) until a "Stop" event is seen.
EPAC TIME BASE DAY EQUATE/TRANSFER
D3 (Not Used)
CODE - 0 ( 0-EQUATE 1-TRANSFER )
DIM (Dimming) FROM - 01 TO - 02 .. .. .. .. .. ..
Code "0": This entry establishes that dimming shall not PRESSING "E" BEFORE ANY "TO" DAY ENTRY
WILL LIST DAYS EQUATED WITH "FROM" DAY
occur.
Code "1": This entry establishes that dimming shall occur. A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
S1/--/S8 (System Special Function Output)
Code "0": This entry (for each System Special Function)  Default Data is not provided.
establishes that the output shall be OFF.
Code "1": This entry (for each System Special Function) Code "0" (EQUATE): This entry will establish two or more
establish that the output shall be ON. days with identical event structures. Any change to
The pointed event is that used or that to receive values from either will effect all. This entry provides a short cut to
the Add, Delete, or Edit functions. programming days with the exact same events and has
the added advantage of reducing memory
Events may be entered in any order. The CU will place them in requirements. An equated day consumes only one
chronological order for display and implementation. The event of the 180 available no matter how many events
cursor control keys "A" and "B" will move the Event Pointer Up are programmed within the equated day.
or Down in that chronological list. Code "1" (TRANSFER): This entry establishes two or more
days with identical event structures. Any change to one
will not affect the others. This entry provides a short
2.7.6 Time Of Year Events cut to programming similar days without entering all
the events (i.e., transfer then add and/or delete).
The Time Of Year Events Display allows the user to view and/or
 From (Source Day): This entry (01-99) establishes
modify the time base time of year events.
the SOURCE DAY of the equate/transfer function.
 To (Destination Day): This entry (01-99) establishes
the DESTINATION DAY of the equate/transfer

FRONT PANEL Page 57
function. Overwriting an existing "TO" day number CHN GRN:

with "00" will unequate that day. Code "0" (No): This entry establishes the channel green
output WILL NOT be dimmed.
(DISEQUATE): To remove one or more days from an equated
Code "1" (Yes): This entry establishes the channel green
list, follow the instructions in the display to view the list of
output WILL be dimmed.
equated days. When the list is displayed move the cursor to
the day to be unequated and enter "00" over the day number. DIM ALT:
Code "0" (No): This entry establishes the channel outputs
will dimmed by removing the positive half cycle.
2.7.8 Clear TBC Memory Code "1" (Yes): This entry establishes the channel output
will be dimmed by removing the negative half cycle.
The Clear TBC Memory Display allows the user to clear (zero
out) specific time base data. FIELD NAME:
This display only field will define the field name in which
PRESS "7" FROM TIME BASE MENU the cursor is currently located.
EPAC TIME BASE CLEAR PRESS # DESIRED
CODE - 0 (0-ALL 1-TRAFFIC EVENTS 2.7.10 TBC Phase Function

2-AUX EVENTS 3-TOY EVENTS)
WARNING....THIS OPTION WILL REMOVE ALL
CURRENT OPERATING DATA................
Mapping
F-PRIOR MENU The TIME BASE PHS FUNC MAPPING display allows the user to
view and/or modify the mapping of Function-To-Control.
Code "0" (All): This entry clears all Time Base parameters. PRESS "0" FROM TIME BASE MENU
Code "1" (Traffic Events): This entry clears Time Base
Traffic events. EPAC TIME BASE PHS FUNC MAPPING
Code "2" (Auxiliary Events): This entry clears Time Base PHS FUNC SEL(0-OFF/1-ON)
NUM..P-FUNCT NAME.....123456789 0123456
Auxiliary events. 1 PHS-01 MAX # 2 100000000 0000000
Code "3" (Time Of Year): This entry clears Time Base Time 2 PHS-02 MAX # 2 010000000 0000000
Of Year events. 3 PHS-03 MAX # 2 001000000 0000000
4 PHS-04 MAX # 2 000100000 0000000
Once Time Base starts running an event, it continues to run A-UP B-DN E-EDIT F-PRIOR MENU
that event until it encounters a new event to run. Therefore,
clearing the Time Base events will not stop Time Base from The above display is a paging screen to enable viewing all 96
continuing to run the event which was in effect. functions that may be mapped to one or more of the Phase
Functions. Pressing “A” or “B” while the word “E-EDIT” is
2.7.9 TBC Dimming displayed on the bottom line will page up or down to the next
screen. Pressing “E” in any screen will enable editing in that
The TBC Dimming Display allows the user to view and modify screen. While in the editing mode, the bottom line will note
the channel outputs that are affected by the dimming “E-EXIT” to note that pressing “E” will cause an exit from edit
function. mode to display mode.
PRESS "8" FROM TIME BASE MENU While in the Edit Mode, an entry in the “NUM” field will cause
the display to place that function on the cursor line.
EPAC TIME BASE DIMMING (0-NO/1-YES)
DIM OUTPUT: 123456789 0123456789 01234 The following list the available Phase Functions and the
CHN RED: 000000000 0000000000 00000 default programming for same:
CHN YEL: 000000000 0000000000 00000
CHN GRN: 000000000 0000000000 00000 PHS-## MAX # 2
DIM ALT: 000000000 0000000000 00000 1 PHS-01 MAX # 2 100000000 0000000
FIELD NAME: CHN 1/LSW 1/PHS 1 V DRVR 2 PHS-02 MAX # 2 010000000 0000000
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU 3 PHS-03 MAX # 2 001000000 0000000
4 PHS-04 MAX # 2 000100000 0000000
5 PHS-05 MAX # 2 000010000 0000000
 Default Data is as shown 6 PHS-06 MAX # 2 000001000 0000000
7 PHS-07 MAX # 2 000000100 0000000
CHN RED: 8 PHS-08 MAX # 2 000000010 0000000
Code "0" (No): This entry establishes the channel red 9 PHS-09 MAX # 2 000000000 0000000
10 PHS-10 MAX # 2 000000000 0000000
output WILL NOT be dimmed. 11 PHS-11 MAX # 2 000000000 0000000
Code "1" (Yes): This entry establishes the channel red 12 PHS-12 MAX # 2 000000000 0000000
output WILL be dimmed. 13 PHS-13 MAX # 2 000000000 0000000
14 PHS-14 MAX # 2 000000000 0000000
CHN YEL: 15 PHS-15 MAX # 2 000000000 0000000
16 PHS-16 MAX # 2 000000000 0000000
Code "0" (No): This entry establishes the channel yellow
output WILL NOT be dimmed. PHS MAX # 2 will cause Maximum # 2 to be operational on a
Code "1" (Yes): This entry establishes the channel yellow specific Phase (01-16) when a TBC Traffic Event calls a Phase
output WILL be dimmed. Function it is programmed to track.
PHS-## PHS OMT

Page 58 FRONT PANEL
17 PHS-01 PHS OMT 000000001 0000000 PHS MIN REC will initiate a Minimum Vehicle Recall on a
18 PHS-02 PHS OMT 000000000 1000000
19 PHS-03 PHS OMT 000000000 0100000 specific Phase (01-16) when a TBC Traffic Event calls a Phase
20 PHS-04 PHS OMT 000000000 0010000 Function it is programmed to track.
21 PHS-05 PHS OMT 000000000 0001000
22 PHS-06 PHS OMT 000000000 0000100 PHS-## PED REC
23 PHS-07 PHS OMT 000000000 0000010 81 PHS-01 PED REC 000000000 0000000
91 PHS-11 PED REC 000000000 0000000
PHS PHS OMIT will prevent Vehicle & Pedestrian service on a 92 PHS-12 PED REC 000000000 0000000
specific Phase (01-16) when a TBC Traffic Event calls a Phase 93 PHS-13 PED REC 000000000 0000000
94 PHS-14 PED REC 000000000 0000000
Function it is programmed to track. 95 PHS-15 PED REC 000000000 0000000
96 PHS-16 PED REC 000000000 0000000
PHS-## PED OMT
33 PHS-01 PED OMT 000000000 0000000 PHS PED REC will initiate a Pedestrian Recall on a specific
34 PHS-02 PED OMT 000000000 0000000
35 PHS-03 PED OMT 000000000 0000000 Phase (01-16) when a TBC Traffic Event calls a Phase Function
36 PHS-04 PED OMT 000000000 0000000 it is programmed to track.
37 PHS-05 PED OMT 000000000 0000000
38 PHS-06 PED OMT 000000000 0000000 DET-## SW OMIT
39 PHS-07 PED OMT 000000000 0000000 97 DET-01 SW OMIT 000000000 0000000
107 DET-11 SW OMIT 000000000 0000000
PHS PED OMIT will prevent Pedestrian service on a specific 108 DET-12 SW OMIT 000000000 0000000
Phase (01-16) when a TBC Traffic Event calls a Phase Function 109 DET-13 SW OMIT 000000000 0000000
110 DET-14 SW OMIT 000000000 0000000
it is programmed to track. 111 DET-15 SW OMIT 000000000 0000000
112 DET-16 SW OMIT 000000000 0000000
PHS-## MAX REC
49 PHS-01 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 DET SW OMIT (Detector Switch Omit) will prevent an
50 PHS-02 MAX REC 000000000 0000000
51 PHS-03 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 otherwise allowable Switch operation from occurring on a
52 PHS-04 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 specific Vehicle Detector (01-16) when a TBC Traffic Event calls
53 PHS-05 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 a Phase Function it is programmed to track.
54 PHS-06 MAX REC 000000000 0000000
55 PHS-07 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 During a DET SW OMIT period, the detector stays as an active
56 PHS-08 MAX REC 000000000 0000000
57 PHS-09 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 input to its valid (can be serviced normally) Assigned phase
58 PHS-10 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 and no Switch is done.
59 PHS-11 MAX REC 000000000 0000000
50 PHS-12 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 A DET SW OMIT period may not begin or end when the
61 PHS-13 MAX REC 000000000 0000000
62 PHS-14 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 Switched phase is Green.
63 PHS-15 MAX REC 000000000 0000000
64 PHS-16 MAX REC 000000000 0000000 DET-## SW NOW
113 DET-01 SW NOW 000000000 0000000
PHS MAX REC will initiate a Maximum Vehicle Recall on a 114 DET-02 SW NOW 000000000 0000000
specific Phase (01-16) when a TBC Traffic Event calls a Phase 115 DET-03 SW NOW 000000000 0000000
Function it is programmed to track. 116 DET-04 SW NOW 000000000 0000000
117 DET-05 SW NOW 000000000 0000000
PHS-## MIN REC 118 DET-06 SW NOW 000000000 0000000
65 PHS-01 MIN REC 000000000 0000000 119 DET-07 SW NOW 000000000 0000000
75 PHS-11 MIN REC 000000000 0000000
76 PHS-12 MIN REC 000000000 0000000 DET SW NOW (Detector Switch Now) will cause the Switch
77 PHS-13 MIN REC 000000000 0000000 operation to occur immediately on a specific Vehicle Detector
78 PHS-14 MIN REC 000000000 0000000 (01-16) when a TBC Traffic Event calls a Phase Function it is
79 PHS-15 MIN REC 000000000 0000000
80 PHS-16 MIN REC 000000000 0000000 programmed to track.

FRONT PANEL Page 59
During a DET SW NOW period, the detector stays as an active Following an Overlap Omit period, an Overlap Green will be
input to its valid (can be serviced normally) Switched phase. precluded until the start of an included phase Green.
During a DET SW NOW period, a Switch is precluded if the Overlap Omit precludes in-cycle Fast Flashing Green displays.
Assigned phase is currently Green. Following an Overlap Omit period, an Overlap Fast Flashing
Green or Steady Green will be precluded until the start of an
During a DET SW NOW period, DET Delay timing is done only
included phase Green.
if both the Assigned phase and the Switched phase are not
Green. Overlap Omit precludes in-cycle Flashing Red displays.
Following an Overlap Omit period, a Flashing Red will be
A DET SW NOW period may not begin or end when the
precluded until the start of a phase Green which would NOT
Switched phase is Green.
produce a Flashing Red display.
129 DET-01 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000
130 DET-02 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 During Preempt, Overlaps that are part of Cyclic operation
131 DET-03 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 process Overlap Omit as during normal operation.
132 DET-04 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000
133 DET-05 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 During Preempt, Overlaps that are not part of Cyclic
134 DET-06 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000
135 DET-07 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 operation, provide display s as required by programming.
136 DET-08 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 However, if the Overlap Omit would be active upon exit from
137 DET-09 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 PE, the Overlap will clear to Red and be in the Omitted state
138 DET-10 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000
139 DET-11 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 upon return to normal (even if the Exit phase is an overlap
140 DET-12 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 included phase).
141 DET-13 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000
142 DET-14 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 During the start sequence (Power On or External Start), if an
143 DET-15 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000
144 DET-16 SW ALSO 000000000 0000000 Overlap would be omitted in the phase(s) following start up,
the Overlap will remain Red during the start up period.
DET SW ALSO (Detector Switch Also) will cause the calls from a
Specific Vehicle Detector (01-16) to occur on both the Assigned It is possible to map more than one function to the same
& Switched phases simultaneously when a TBC Traffic Event logical control (i.e., PHS-01 MAX # 2 through PHS-16 MAX # 2
calls a Phase Function it is programmed to track. may be mapped to the logical control of PHS FUNC 1). Enter a
"1" to enable the respective function to become active when
During a DET SW ALSO period, the Assigned detector is the control is requested.
processed as though no Switch were programmed but the
Assigned phase call is placed on the Switched phase also.
A DET SW ALSO period may not begin or end when the
2.7.11 TBC Special Function
Switched phase is Green. Mapping
The hierarchy for the above Detector Options is:
The TIME BASE SPC FUNC MAPPING display allows the user to
a) Detector Switch Omit view and/or modify the mapping of Function-To-Control.
b) Detector Switch Also PRESS "0" FROM TIME BASE MENU
c) Detector Switch Now EPAC TIME BASE SPC FUNC MAPPING

SPC FUNC SELECTOR SRC .GLOBAL. .LOCAL.
OVERLAP # OMIT S-FUNCTION NAME .......12345678 90123456
SPEC FUNCTION 1 10000000 00000000
145 OVERLAP A OMIT 000000000 0000000 SPEC FUNCTION 2 01000000 00000000
146 OVERLAP B OMIT 000000000 0000000 SPEC FUNCTION 3 00100000 00000000
147 OVERLAP C OMIT 000000000 0000000 CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
148 OVERLAP D OMIT 000000000 0000000 A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
149 OVERLAP E OMIT 000000000 0000000
150 OVERLAP F OMIT 000000000 0000000
151 OVERLAP G OMIT 000000000 0000000
152 OVERLAP H OMIT 000000000 0000000
153 OVERLAP I OMIT 000000000 0000000 SPEC FUNCTION 4 00010000 00000000
154 OVERLAP J OMIT 000000000 0000000 SPEC FUNCTION 5 00001000 00000000
155 OVERLAP K OMIT 000000000 0000000 SPEC FUNCTION 6 00000100 00000000
156 OVERLAP L OMIT 000000000 0000000 SPEC FUNCTION 7 00000010 00000000
157 OVERLAP M OMIT 000000000 0000000 SPEC FUNCTION 8 00000001 00000000
158 OVERLAP N OMIT 000000000 0000000
159 OVERLAP O OMIT 000000000 0000000 PAS3+MX3=VEH 33-48 TME 00000000 00000000
160 OVERLAP P OMIT 000000000 0000000 PAS4+MX4=VEH 49-64 TME 00000000 00000000
PAS5+MX5=SPC + PED TME 00000000 00000000
OVERLAP OMIT will cause a specific Overlap (A-P) to remain DYNA MX3=VEH 33-48 TME 00000000 00000000
DYNA MX4=VEH 49-64 TME 00000000 00000000
Red once Red (omit Green &Yellow) when a TBC Traffic Event DYNA MX5=SPC + PED TME 00000000 00000000
calls a Phase Function it is programmed to track. DISABLE PROT/PERM OMIT 00000000 00000000
An Overlap Omit period will start when the Overlap is in an PHASE 2 SIGN CONTROL 00000000 00000000
PHASE 4 SIGN CONTROL 00000000 00000000
inactive Red state (not Green & all Yellow and Red timing PHASE 6 SIGN CONTROL 00000000 00000000
required by included phases is complete). For an Overlap PHASE 8 SIGN CONTROL 00000000 00000000
programmed for Minus Green operation, the Red during the TX DIAMOND - FOUR PH 00000000 00000000
TX DIAMOND - THREE PH 00000000 00000000
Minus Green period does not constitute an inactive Red state. TX DIAMOND - SEPARATE 00000000 00000000

Page 60 FRONT PANEL
QUE1/LVL1 CONTROLS 00000000 00000000 Caution: The default programming for Phase Functions 9 thru
QUE1/LVL2 CONTROLS 00000000 00000000
QUE2/LVL1 CONTROLS 00000000 00000000 16 is Phase Omit for Phase 1 thru 8.
QUE2/LVL2 CONTROLS 00000000 00000000
OTHER
AS8-15=OLI-P FL G 150f 00000000 00000000 QUE1/LVL1 CONTROLS |
AS8-15=OLI-P FL R PHS 00000000 00000000
RESERVED 00000000 00000000 QUE1/LVL2 CONTROLS > See 3.11.7.1
QUE2/LVL1 CONTROLS |
COORD ADAPTIVE SPLIT 00000000 00000000
SPC 1-16>PHS FUNC 1-16 00000000 00000000 QUE2/LVL2 CONTROLS |
SPC 1- 8>PHS FUNC 9-16 00000000 00000000 COORD ADAPTIVE SPLIT > See 3.8.6.1
PHASE BANK 2 00000000 00000000
PHASE BANK 3 00000000 00000000 It is possible to map more than one function to the same
PHASE BANK 4 00000000 00000000 logical control (i.e., Spec Function 1 through Spec Function 8
AS8-15=OLI-P FL G 100f 00000000 00000000
may be mapped to the logical control of SPC FUNC 1). Enter a
 Default Data is as shown "1" to enable the respective function to become active when
the control is requested.
ALTERNATE PASSAGE & MAXIMUM TIMES
PAS3+MAX3=VEH 33-48 TIME |
PAS4+MAX4=VEH 49-64 TIME > See Section 7
PAS5+MAX5=SPC + PED TIME | 2.8 PREEMPT DATA
ADAPTIVE MAXIMUM
DYNA MAX3=VEH 33-48 TIME |
DYNA MAX4=VEH 49-64 TIME > See Section 8
DYNA MAX5=SPC + PED TIME | A consistent set of Preempt programming entries must be
provided for the Protected Phase and Permissive Phase and
ADAPTIVE PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE
the NCHRP Associated Overlap. The Overlap Yellow and Red
DISABLE PROT/PERM OMITS > See Section 9
are an integral part of the NCHRP Protected and Permissive
IN CYCLE FLASHING SIGNALS display and its transitions. See 2.8.5 for Important
FLASHING GREENS | Considerations
FLASHING REDS > See Section 6
Preempt Data allows the user to display and/or enter controller
LANE USAGE SIGN CONTROL parameters for the four preempts as follows:
PHASE 2 SIGN CONTROL | 1) All Preempts (Min Green & Priority)
PHASE 4 SIGN CONTROL > See Section 10 2) Preempt 1 Parameters
PHASE 6 SIGN CONTROL | 3) Preempt 2 Parameters
PHASE 8 SIGN CONTROL | 4) Preempt 3 Parameters
5) Preempt 4 Parameters
TX DIAMOND INTERSECTION CONTROL 6) Preempt 5 Parameters
TX DIAMOND - FOUR PHASE | 7) Preempt 6 Parameters
TX DIAMOND - THREE PHASE > See Section 11 8) Load Preempt Default Data
TX DIAMOND - SEPARATE |
To enter data for these intervals requires user access. See 0 for
SPC 1-8 AS PHS FUNC #-# more information on gaining access.
This feature allows any Special Function control to also set a
Phase Function control. Therefore providing Phase Functions
controls independent of Pattern/Free modes.
2.8.1 Preempt Menu
SPC 1-8 AS PHS FUNC 1- 8 - provides the capability of Special The Preempt Menu allows the user to select which preempt
Function 1 thru 8 controls also setting Phase Function 1 thru 8 parameter database to be addressed.
controls. PRESS "7" FROM MAIN MENU
SPC 1-8 AS PHS FUNC 9- 16 - provides the capability of Special
Function 1 thru 8 controls also setting Phase Function 9 thru EPAC PREEMPT DATA PRESS # DESIRED
16 controls. 1-ALL PREEMPTS 5-PREEMPT 4
2-PREEMPT 1 6-PREEMPT 5
This programming causes Phase Function 1 (or Phase 3-PREEMPT 2 7-PREEMPT 6
Function 9) to be set every time Special Function 1 is set. Also, 4-PREEMPT 3 8-LOAD DEFAULT
Phase Function 2 (or Phase Function 10) is set every time F-PRIOR MENU
Special Function 2 is set.
TBC Traffic Events that set Phase Function controls are 1) ALL PREEMPTS provides viewing and editing of
assumed to occur at times other than when the event calls for Preemption parameters common to all preempts.
a Pattern (Free mode modifiers). 2) PREEMPT 1 provides viewing and editing of
Preemption 1 parameters.
TBC Auxiliary Events that set Special Function controls are 3) PREEMPT 2 provides viewing and editing of
independent of Pattern/Free modes. Preemption 2 parameters.

FRONT PANEL Page 61
4) PREEMPT 3 provides viewing and editing of (2) INTERVAL TIMES provides viewing and/or editing
Preemption 3 parameters. of Interval Times for Preempt 1.
5) PREEMPT 4 provides viewing and editing of
(3) VEHICLE STATUS provides viewing and/or editing
of Phase Vehicle Load Switch Driver status
parameters for the Track Green and Dwell
intervals.
Preemption 6 parameters. (4) PEDEST. STATUS provides viewing and/or editing
8) LOAD DEFAULT provides for loading the PROM of Phase Pedestrian Load Switch Driver status
resident default parameter set as the active database. parameters for the Track Green and Dwell
intervals.
2.8.2 All Preempt Data (5) OVERLAP STATUS provides viewing and/or
editing of Overlap Load Switch Driver status
The All Preempt Data Display allows the user to view and/or parameters for the Track Green and Dwell
modify the preempt parameters that are common to all four intervals.
preempts.
(6) LOW PRIORITY provides viewing and/or editing of
PRESS "1" FROM PREEMPT MENU parameters for Priority routine.
EPAC ALL PREEMPTS DATA

2.8.3.1 Preempt 1 Miscellaneous
RING TIMES.....1......2......3......4
MIN GRN/WLK 10 10 10 10 The Preempt 1 Miscellaneous Display allows the user to view
PRIORITY...FL...1/2..2/3..3/4..4/5..5/6.
STATUS 1 1 1 1 1 1 and/or modify the basic parameters for Preempt 1.
CODES........0-NO....1-YES..............
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU PRESS "1" FROM PREEMPT 1 MENU
 Default Data is as shown EPAC PREEMPT 1 MISC DATA (0-NO & 1-YES)
TEST.: 0 N-LOCK: 0 LINK PE#: 0
MIN GRN/WLK - RING TIMES: This value establishes the time DELAY: 000 EXTEND: 000 DURATION: 000
MXCALL: 000 LOCK OUT: 000
(000-999 Seconds) which any Green and/or Walk must have PHASE....1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.0.1.2.3.4.5.6
been displayed prior to it's termination for a transition to EXIT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Preempt. When Min Green/Walk is different ring to ring, CALLS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
the shorter will control the pedestrian on its ring but not
necessarily the green as the green may be required to
 Default Data is as shown
transition to yellow simultaneously with another ring.
TEST: This entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes) provides a
PRIORITY STATUS:
means to momentarily request a Preempt routine for
PE/FL - Preemption to Remote Flash
testing of programming & operation.
PE1/2 - Preempt 1 to Preempt 2
PE2/3 - Preempt 2 to Preempt 3 NON-LOCK: This entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes)
PE3/4 - Preempt 3 to Preempt 4 establishes whether the Preempt Memory is Non-Locking.
LINK PE#: This entry establishes the higher priority Preempt
routine which is to be linked to this Preempt routine.
The entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes) establishes
This link will provide an automatic call at the end of the
whether the first function has priority over the second.
Dwell time for the higher priority routine and shall
maintain that call for the demand of the original Preempt
2.8.3 Preempt 1 Menu routine.
When the link value equals the preempt programmed
The Preempt 1 Sub-Menu allows the user to select which
(Preempt 1 linked to Preempt 1), then a constant input
Preempt 1 parameter database to be addressed.
actuation will place a call for the Low Priority routine.
PRESS "2" FROM PREEMPT MENU
Any other entry that is not a higher priority Preempt
EPAC PREEMPT 1 PRESS # DESIRED
routine will be ignored.
1-MISCELLANEOUS 4-PEDEST. STATUS DELAY: This entry denotes the number of seconds (000-999)
2-INTERVAL TIMES 5-OVERLAP STATUS that the Preempt actuation must be active prior to normal
3-VEHICLE STATUS 6-PRIORITY CU operation being interrupted for the Preempt routine.
EXTEND: This entry denotes the number of seconds (000-999)
F-PRIOR MENU
that each Preempt actuation (call duration) shall be
extended from the point of termination of the actuation.
(1) MISCELLANEOUS provides viewing and/or editing
of basic parameters for Preempt 1.

Page 62 FRONT PANEL
DURATION: This entry denotes the number of seconds (0-999) SEL PED CLR (Selective Pedestrian Clear): This entry sets the
which a Preempt requires prior to a transition back to time (0-999 seconds) which will be provided to clear a
normal traffic operations can occur. terminating Walk during the transition to Track Green.
MXCALL: This entry establishes the time (000-999 seconds) SEL YEL/10 (Selective Yellow Change): This entry sets the time
which a preempt call may remain active and be considered (0-999 tenth seconds) which will be provided to clear a
valid. When the Preempt call has been active for this time terminating Green during the transition to Track Green.
period, the CU shall return to normal operation. This
SEL RED/10 (Selective Red Clear): This entry sets the time (0-
Preempt call shall be considered invalid until such time as
999 tenth seconds) which will be provided to clear a
a change in state occurs (no longer active).
terminating Yellow during the transition to Track Green.
When this value is "0", a Preempt call will be considered
TRACK GREEN (Track Green): This entry sets the time (0-999
valid without reference to time.
seconds) which will be provided Track Green interval.
LOCK OUT: This entry establishes the time (000-999 seconds) When Track Green is set to "0", it is skipped, regardless of
following the exit from the Preempt Routine that will occur any output programming resident.
prior to entering a Low Priority Routine and/or running
TRK PED CLR (Track Pedestrian Clear): This entry sets the time
coordination.
(0-999 seconds) which will be provided to clear a
Value equal 0: unit will exit preempt and cycle until all terminating Walk during the transition to Dwell Green.
calls are serviced or any phase is re-serviced.
TRK YEL/10 (Track Yellow Change): This entry sets the time (0-
Value equal 1 thru 3: No lock out will occur. 999 tenth seconds) which will be provided to clear a
terminating Green during the transition to Dwell Green.
Value > 3: Lock out will last for the time entered.
TRK RED/10 (Track Red Clear): This entry sets the time (0-999
EXIT: This entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes) establishes
tenth seconds) which will be provided to clear a
whether the Preempt routine will exit to this phase.
terminating Yellow during the transition to Dwell Green.
When Exit Phases are not programmed, the Exit (Return)
DWELL GRN (Dwell Green): This entry sets the time (0-999
sequence will be to All Red (No Phases Green) followed by
seconds) which will be provided Dwell Green interval.
phases with calls beginning with the Initialization
phase(s). RET PED CLR (Return Pedestrian Clear): This entry sets the
time (0-999 seconds) which will be provided to clear a
When phases are programmed in one ring as the Exit
terminating Walk during the transition to Normal
Phase and a possible concurrent phase is not programmed
Operation.
in another ring, the routine will allow any legal concurrent
phase to occur with the Exit phase(s) based on actual RET YEL/10 (Return Yellow Change): This entry sets the time
demand. (0-999 tenth seconds) which will be provided to clear a
terminating Green during the transition to Normal
When non-concurrent phases are programmed as the Exit
Operation.
Phases, the routine will Exit based on the lowest number
phase programmed. RET RED/10 (Return Red Clear): This entry sets the time (0-999
tenth seconds) which will be provided to clear a
CALLS: This entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes) establishes
terminating Yellow during the transition to Normal
whether a call (pedestrian) will be placed following the exit
Operation.
from the Preempt Routine.
The Preempt Yellow timing (Sel Yel, Trk Yel, or Ret Yel) will be
All calls present at the beginning of the Preempt routine
equal to the Preempt Yellow entry except when the Preempt
will be present (subject to phase memory programming
Yellow entry is less than 3 seconds then the Preempt Yellow
and detector status) and will be serviced with the entered
timing will be equal to the Traffic Yellow (Phase & Overlap)
Exit Calls.
timing.
The Preempt Red timing (Sel Red, Trk Red, or Ret Red) will be
2.8.3.2 Preempt 1 Interval Times equal to the Preempt Red entry except when the Preempt Red
The Preempt 1 Interval Times Display allows the user to view entry equals ZERO then the Preempt Red timing will be equal
and/or modify the interval times for Preempt 1. to the Traffic Red (Phase & Overlap) timing.
PRESS "2" FROM PREEMPT 1 MENU When Track Green time = 0, no "Track" intervals will appear
(i.e., Track Green, Track Pedestrian Clear, Track Yellow, or
EPAC PREEMPT 1 INTERVAL TIMES Track Red Clear).
SEL PED CLR: 08 TRK YEL/10 : 40
SEL YEL/10 : 40 TRK RED/10 : 20
SEL RED/10 : 20 DWELL GREEN: 10 2.8.3.3 Preempt 1 Vehicle Status
TRACK GREEN: 10 RET PED CLR: 08
TRK PED CLR: 08 RET YEL/10 : 40
RET RED/10 : 20 The Preempt 1 Vehicle Status Display allows the user to view
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU and/or modify the phase vehicle load switch driver status
parameters for the Track Green and Dwell intervals.

FRONT PANEL Page 63
PRESS "3" FROM PREEMPT 1 MENU PRESS "5" FROM PREEMPT 1 MENU
EPAC PREEMPT 1 VEHICLE STATUS EPAC PREEMPT 1 OVERLAP STATUS

PHASE....1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.0.1.2.3.4.5.6 OVERLAP..A.B.C.D.E.F.G.H.I.J.K.L.M.N.O.P
TRK GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TRK GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DWELL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DWELL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0-RED.1-GRN 2-FLR 3-FLY 4-DARK 5-FLG) (0-RED.1-GRN 2-FLR 3-FLY 4-DARK 5-FLG)
CYCLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CYCLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0-NO..1-ACT..2-MN REC..3-MX REC) (0-NO..1-ACT)
 Default Data is as shown  Default Data is as shown

TRACK GREEN AND DWELL STATUS TRACK GREEN AND DWELL STATUS
Code "0": Phase vehicle will be Red. Code "0": Overlap vehicle will be Red.
Code "1": Phase vehicle will be Green. Code "1": Overlap vehicle will be Green.
Code "2": Phase vehicle will be Flashing Red. Code "2": Overlap vehicle will be Flashing Red.
Code "3": Phase vehicle will be Flashing Yellow. Code "3": Overlap vehicle will be Flashing Yellow.
Code "4": Phase vehicle will be Dark. Code "4": Overlap vehicle will be Dark.
Code "5": Phase vehicle will be Flashing Green. Code "5": Overlap vehicle will be Flashing Green.
CYCLE STATUS CYCLE STATUS
Code "0": Phase vehicle will not cycle. Code "0": Overlap vehicle will not cycle.
Code "1": Phase vehicle will cycle based in demand. Code "1": Overlap vehicle will cycle based on service to
Code "2": Phase vehicle will cycle on Min Recall. included phases.
Code "3": Phase vehicle will cycle on Max Recall.
2.8.3.6 Low Priority 1

2.8.3.4 Preempt 1 Pedestrian Status
The Priority 1 Display allows the user to view and/or modify
The Preempt 1 Pedestrian Status Display allows the user to the parameters for Priority 1.
view and/or modify the phase pedestrian load switch driver
PRESS "6" FROM PREEMPT 1 MENU
status parameters for the Track Green and Dwell intervals.
PRESS "4" FROM PREEMPT 1 MENU EPAC LOW PRIORITY 1 DATA (0-NO & 1-YES)
TEST.: 0 N-LOCK: 0 SKIP....: 0
DELAY: 000 EXTEND: 000 DURATION: 000
EPAC PREEMPT 1 PEDESTRIAN STATUS DWELL: 000 MXCALL: 000 LOCK OUT: 000
PHASE....1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.0.1.2.3.4.5.6 PHASE....1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.0.1.2.3.4.5.6
TRK GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DWELL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DWELL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CALLS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0-DONT..1-WALK..2-FL WK..3-DARK) A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
CYCLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0-NO..1-ACT..2-RECALL)
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU  Default Data is as shown
TEST: The entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes) provides a
means to momentarily request a Low Priority routine for
TRACK GREEN AND DWELL STATUS testing of programming & operation.
Code "0": Phase pedestrian will be Don’t Walk.
NON-LOCK: This entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes)
Code "1": Phase pedestrian will be Walk.
establishes whether the Low Priority Memory is Non-
Code "2": Phase pedestrian will be Flashing Walk.
Locking.
Code "3": Phase pedestrian will be Dark.
SKIP: This entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes) establishes
CYCLE STATUS
whether a Low Priority Routine will skip any phases with
Code "0": Phase pedestrian will not cycle.
serviceable calls when cycling to service the LP phases.
Code "1": Phase pedestrian will cycle based in demand.
Code "0": When SKIP=0, the CU shall NOT skip any phases
Code "2": Phase pedestrian will cycle on Recall.
while cycling to service the LP phases.
Code "1": When SKIP=1, the CU shall skip ALL phases while
2.8.3.5 Preempt 1 Overlap Status cycling to service the LP phases.
Code "2": When SKIP=2, the CU shall skip ALL odd
The Preempt 1 Overlap Status Display allows the user to view numbered phases and provide minimum vehicle
and/or modify the overlap load switch driver status service (min recall & force off active) for all even
parameters for the Track Green and Dwell intervals. numbered phases in cycling to the LP Dwell.
When SKIP=2, ALL pedestrian(s) shall be omitted when
the LP routine is active. If a pedestrian is timing (Walk or
Ped Clearance) when the LP call is received, the Walk and
Pedestrian Clearance shall time out normally.

Page 64 FRONT PANEL
When LP SKIP=2, LP routines shall NOT be locked out CALLS: This entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes) establishes
from: whether a call (pedestrian) will be placed following the exit
from the Low Priority Routine.
External Start Exiting Auto Flash
Stop Time Exiting Preemption 2.8.4 Load Preempt Default
Startup Flash Exiting LP Routine The Load Preempt Default Display allows the user to replace
Code "3": When LP SKIP=3, all functions noted above for LP the current parameters with the PROM resident default
SKIP=2 apply except active Walks terminate parameters within the CU.
immediately when the LP call is received.
PRESS "8" FROM PREEMPT MENU
DELAY: This entry denotes the number of seconds (000-999)
that the Low Priority actuation must be active prior to EPAC PREEMPT LOAD DEFAULT
normal CU operation being interrupted for the Low
Priority routine. WARNING....THIS OPTION WILL REMOVE ALL
CURRENT OPERATING DATA ..............
EXTEND: This entry denotes the number of seconds (000-999) - PRESS "E" TO CONTINUE
that each Low Priority actuation (call duration) shall be
extended from the point of termination of the actuation. F-PRIOR MENU
DURATION: This entry denotes the number of seconds (000-

999) following the LP initial actuation before the LP
green(s) should terminate. 2.8.5 Important Considerations
DWELL: This entry denotes the minimum time (000-999
seconds) of LP dwell green. TRACK INTERVALS:
MXCALL: This entry denotes the number of seconds (000-999) If the Protected Phase Green is provided, the Associated
that a LP call may remain active and be considered valid. Overlap must be set to FLASHING GREEN (5) in order to have
When the LP call has been active for this time period, the proper clearances.
CU shall return to normal operation. This LP call shall be
considered invalid until such time as a change in state If the Permissive Phase is provided and the Associated Overlap
occurs (no longer active). is to display the Flashing Yellow Arrow at that time, set the
Associated Overlap to FLASHING GREEN (5). If the Associated
When this value is "0", a LP call will be considered valid Overlap is to display RED Arrow at that time, set the Associated
without reference to time. Overlap to RED (0).
LOCK OUT: This entry denotes the number of seconds (000- HOLD INTERVALS WITHOUT CYCLING OPERATION:
999) following the exit from the LP routine that will occur
prior to re-entering a Low Priority Routine and/or running Use the same rules as provided for TRACK INTERVALS.
coordination. HOLD INTERVALS WITH CYCLING OPERATION:
Value = 0: unit will exit LP and cycle until all calls are Set the Associated Overlap to RED (0).
serviced or a phase is re-serviced.
If the Protected Green Phase is available during Cycling, the
Value = 1 - 3: No lock out will occur. Associated Overlap must be set to 1-ACT in order to have
Value > 3: Lock out will last for the time entered. proper clearances. If the Permissive Phase is also available
during Cycling, the Flashing Yellow Arrow display will appear
DWELL: This entry (Code "0" = No & Code "1" = Yes) establishes and cannot be blocked out.
whether the Low Priority Routine will Dwell In this phase.
If the Permissive Phase is available during Cycling and the
When no phases are programmed as the Dwell Phases, the Protected Phase is not available during Cycling, to provide the
routine is considered disabled. NCHRP Flashing Yellow Arrow display at that time, set the
Associated Overlap to 1-ACT. If the NCHRP signal is to display
When non-concurrent phases are programmed as the
RED Arrow at that time, set the Associated Overlap to 0-NO.
Dwell Phases, the routine will Dwell in the first of same
based on the CU status at the time the Low Priority Routine
begins.
When phases are programmed in one ring as the Dwell
2.9 SYSTEM DATA
Phase and a possible concurrent phase is not programmed
in another ring, the routine will allow any legal concurrent
phase to occur with the Dwell phase(s) based on actual
demand (Cycling between possible concurrent phases may Although defined as "systems" data, all of these capabilities are
occur). available and may be of value in the stand alone controller
(i.e., Alarms, MOE, etc.).

FRONT PANEL Page 65
System Data allows the user to display and/or enter controller 2.9.2.1 Communications Address
parameters for:
1) Communications The Communications Address Display allows the user to view
2) Traffic Responsive Data and/or modify the CU system address (001-032).
3) Detector Diagnostic Data PRESS "1" FROM COMM MENU
4) Local Alarm Report
5) Local MOE Report EPAC SYSTEM - COMM ADDRESS
6) Speed Data
ENTER A 3 DIGIT ADDRESS & PRESS “E”
To enter data for these intervals requires user access. See 0 for ADDRESS: 000 - KEYPAD
ADDRESS: 000 - T&F INPUTS
more information on gaining access. WARNING....AN ADDRESS OTHER THAN “000”
TRANSFERS I/O TO ITS SYSTEM DEFINITION
F-PRIOR MENU
2.9.1 System Menu
The System Menu allows the user to select which system
parameter database to be addressed. ADDRESS - KEYPAD; this program entry 001-032) will override
the TS2 T&F Address Inputs and implement the Address based
PRESS "8" FROM MAIN MENU on this program entry. If this data field is ‘0’, the CU will read
the T&F Address Inputs for the address to make active.
EPAC SYSTEM DATA
ADDRESS - T&F INPUTS; This display only field will show the
1-COMMUNICATIONS 4-LOCAL ALARMS
2-TRAF RESPONSIVE 5-LOCAL MOE'S Address based on TS2 T&F Address Inputs.
3-DET DIAGNOSTIC 6-SPEED DATA
Having Address inputs allows the Terminal & Facilities to
control. On the surface, this sounds like the best approach but
PRESS # DESIRED F-PRIOR MENU we believe that should an T&F Address Input fail, the CU
would most likely operate with the wrong address so we
1) COMMUNICATIONS provides viewing and editing of recommend the use of a address program entry.
Communications parameters, status, and report.
2) TRAF RESPONSIVE provides viewing and editing of
Traffic Responsive parameters and report. 2.9.2.2 Communications Backup
3) DET DIAGNOSTIC provides viewing and editing of
Detector Diagnostic parameters, status, and report. The Communications Backup Display allows the user to view
4) LOCAL ALARMS provides viewing of Local Alarm and/or modify the time after which the unit shall revert to
report. local time base as a backup for system commands when not
5) LOCAL MOE'S provides viewing of Local MOE report. being polled by the Master.
6) SPEED DATA provides viewing and editing of Speed PRESS "2" FROM COMM MENU
Trap parameters and report.
EPAC SYSTEM - COMM BACKUP
2.9.2 Communications Menu ENTER THE TIME BEFORE THE UNIT IS TO

REVERT TO BACKUP OPERATION ON LOSS OF
COMMUNICATIONS
The Communications Sub-Menu allows the user to select TIME IN MINUTES: 015
which communications parameter database to be addressed.
E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
PRESS "1" FROM SYSTEM DATA MENU
EPAC SYSTEM - COMMUNICATIONS
This value establishes the time (000-255 minutes) the Eagle
1-ADDRESS EPAC300 Software will wait for a Master poll and continue
2-BACKUP
3-STATUS operating with the last Master pattern/mode prior to reverting
4-FAIL LOG to local Time Base as the Backup control source.
PRESS # DESIRED F-PRIOR MENU An entry of "000" will prevent the Eagle EPAC300 Software
from reverting to Backup.
1) ADDRESS provides viewing and editing of Local
System Address. CAUTION: A small value can cause the Eagle EPAC300
2) BACKUP provides viewing and editing of time in Software to revert to backup when it should not. The normal
minutes before reverting to local time base as a backup setting would be some multiple of the polling frequency (i.e.,
for system commands 5x to 15x). The Eagle MARC300 Master polls each local
3) STATUS provides viewing the current approximately once every minute.
communications status.
4) FAIL LOG provides viewing the list of
2.9.2.3 Communications Status
communications faults along with the date and time of
occurrence. The Communications Status Display allows the user to view
the current communications status.

Page 66 FRONT PANEL
PRESS "3" FROM COMM MENU 3) REPORT PARAMETERS provides viewing and/or
editing of the system detector report parameters.
EPAC COMM STATUS 4) SYS DET REPORT provides viewing of the system
..PORT 2.. ..PORT 3..
SETTINGS....: 1200,8N1 1200,8N1 detector reports.
STATUS......: OFF LINE OFF LINE 5) QUEUE ASSIGN provides viewing and/or editing of the
CARRIER.....: ACTIVE INACTIVE parameters required for local traffic responsive pattern
TRANSMITTING: DATA - ACK
RECEIVING...: DATA-VALID selection.
F-PRIOR MENU 6) QUEUE SELECT provides viewing and/or editing of the
parameters required for local traffic responsive pattern
selection.
Duplicate display, See 0 for additional details.
2.9.3.1 System Detector Assignment

2.9.2.4 Communications Report
The System Detector Assignment Display allows the user to
The Communications Failure Report Display allows the user to view and/or modify the system detector assignments.
view the list of communications failures along with the date
and time of occurrence. PRESS "1" FROM TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE MENU
PRESS "4" FROM COMM MENU EPAC SYSTEM - SYS DET ASSIGNMENT
PAC SYSTEM - COMM FAIL REPORT SYS DET....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8

MM/DD HH:MM --------STATUS------- ASSIGNED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
09/20 10:20 RECV ERROR TO ASSIGN: VEH 01-64 enter #01-64
09/21 22:10 ..................... SPC 01-08 enter #65-72
../.. ..:.. ..................... PED 01-08 enter #73-80
../.. ..:.. ..................... A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
../.. ..:.. .....................
-PRV B-NXT WINDOW C-CLEAR F-PRIOR MENU
The System Detector Assignment allows ANY Vehicle, Special,
MM/DD (Date): This display denotes the date (Month and or Pedestrian detector input to be assigned as a System
Month Day) of the fault. Detector.
HH:MM (Time): This display denotes the time of day (Hour
and Minute) of the fault.
2.9.3.2 Volume + Occupancy Data
STATUS (Fault): This display denotes a description in English
of the fault as follows: The V+O Data Display allows the user to view and/or modify
the system detector parameters required by the master for
See 0 for a list of possible report entries: traffic responsive pattern selection.
The Communications Failure Report has the capacity to store PRESS "2" FROM TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE MENU
up to 60 faults. Faults will appear in the order in which they
occur, with the initial display showing the oldest. The cursor EPAC SYSTEM - SYS DET V+O PARAMETERS
control keys "A" and "B" will page through the report. The SYS DET....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
control key "C" will allow the clearing of the report log. VPHRx100: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
AVGT....: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
CTFC/10.: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
2.9.3 Traffic Responsive Menu MVOL%...: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
The Traffic Responsive Sub-Menu allows the user to select

 Default Data is not provided.
which traffic responsive parameter database to be addressed.
PRESS "2" FROM SYSTEM MENU VPHRX100: This entry (00-99) establishes the lane capacity
(Vehicle per Hour) utilized in the V+O preprocessing.
EPAC SYSTEM - TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE AVGT: This entry (00-99 minutes) establishes averaging time
1-ASSIGN SYS DET 5-QUEUE ASSIGN utilized in the V+O preprocessing.
2-V+O PARAMETERS 6-QUEUE SELECT
3-REPORT PARAMETERS CTFC: This entry (00-99) establishes occupancy correction
4-SYS DET REPORT factor utilized in the V+O preprocessing. The value entered
is internally divided by 10 to provide a real factor of 0-9.9.
This allows the user to decrease or increase the importance
of the actual occupancy.
1) ASSIGN SYS DET provides viewing and/or editing of
the system detector assignments. MVOL%: This entry (00-255) establishes minimum volume
2) V+O PARAMETERS provides viewing and/or editing of required prior to using occupancy in the V+O
the system detector parameters required by the master preprocessing. An entry over 250 will in effect prevent the
for traffic responsive pattern selection. addition of Occupancy in the V+O reported to the master.

FRONT PANEL Page 67
2.9.3.3 Report Parameters The System Detector report collects volume and occupancy for
the report period then calculates the averages. See 0 for
The Report Parameters Display allows the user to view and/or additional detail.
modify the system detector report parameters.
The System Detector Report has the capacity to store up to 96
PRESS "3" FROM TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE MENU sample periods. Sample period data will appear in the order in
which they were logged, the initial display will show the
EPAC SYSTEM - REPORT PARAMETERS
oldest. The cursor control keys "A" and "B" will page through
REPORT INTERVAL: 00 (00-99 MINUTES) the report. The control key "C" will allow the clearing of the
report log.
TIME BASE AUX "D2" ENABLES REPORTING
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU 2.9.3.5 Queue Assignment
The Queue Assignment Display allows the user to view and/or
modify the parameters for the two Queue routines.
The "SAMPLE INTERVAL" entry (00-99 minutes) establishes the
PRESS "5" FROM TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE MENU
time period for the report. When the Sample Interval exceeds
the time between report requests, the report in process will
EPAC QUEUE ASSIGNMENT
complete and the second request will not be honored. ---- NO. 1 ---- ---- NO. 2 ----
DETECT...1...2...3...4 ..1...2...3...4
SYSD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WTFC 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
2.9.3.4 System Detector Report INPUT SELECT..: 0 0 (0-AV/1-HI)
FAILED LEVEL..: 0 0 (# TO FAIL)
The System Detector Report Display allows the user to view the A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
system detector reports.
PRESS "4" FROM TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE MENU  Default Data is as shown
SYSD (Detector Number): This entry (1-8) establishes the
EPAC SYSTEM - SYS DET REPORT
BEGIN: 09/21 07:15 INT: 15 MULT: 10 system detector number that inputs V+O data to this
DETECTOR...1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8 routine.
RAW VOL: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
RAW OCC: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 WTFC # (Weighting Factor): This entry (0-100) establishes the
AVOL%..: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 weighting factor to be utilized for the V+O data received
AC0%...: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
A-PRV B-NXT WINDOW C-CLEAR F-PRIOR MENU from this detector.
The weighting factor represents a percentage 0-100 to be
 Default Data is not provided applied to the detected V+O data.
BEGIN: This display denotes the date (Month and Day) and INPUT SELECT (Average or Highest): This entry establishes
time (Hour and Minute) the report began. that the input will be an average of all operational assigned
detectors.
INT: This display denotes the Sample Interval (0-99 Minutes) Code "0" entry establishes that the V+O input generated
the report data represents. will be the average output of all operational assigned
MULT: This display denotes the Multiplier (001, 0010, 0100 or detectors.
1000) for the "RAW" Values below. This value is determined Code "1" entry establishes that the V+O input generated
automatically. If any raw volume or raw occupancy is: will be the highest output of all operational assigned
 greater than 255 then the multiplier is 10 detectors.
 greater than 2550 then the multiplier is 100 FAILED LEVEL (# To Fail Channel) - Code "#": This entry (0-4)
 greater than 25500 then the multiplier is 1000 establishes the number of assigned detectors that must
 else the multiplier is 1 remain operational to consider the routine operational.
RAW VOL (Multiplier): This display denotes the Raw Volume
Count (0-255) for each System Detector during the sample 2.9.3.6 Queue Select
period.
The Queue Select Display allows the user to view and/or
RAW OCC (Multiplier): This display denotes the Raw
modify the parameters for the two Queue Select routines.
Occupancy Count (0-255) for each System Detector during
the sample period. The count is the number of full seconds PRESS "6" FROM TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE MENU
of occupancy.
EPAC QUEUE SELECT
AVOL%: This display denotes the Average Volume Percent (0- ------- NO.1 -------- ----- NO.2 -----
250) for each System Detector during the sample period. LEVEL...........1...2 LEVEL......1...2
% ENTER (UP) 00 00 % ENTER 00 00
ACO%: This display denotes the Average Occupancy Percent % LEAVE (DN) 00 00 % LEAVE 00 00
DL/SPL/OFF 000 000 D/S/O 000 000
(0-100) for each System Detector during the sample
period. A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU

Page 68 FRONT PANEL
 Default Data is as shown 1) VEH DET provides viewing and editing of the Vehicle
Detector Value 0 diagnostic parameters.
% ENTER (UP): This entry (00-255) establishes the V+O
2) PED DET provides viewing and editing of the
percentage required to enter the level when it transitions
Pedestrian Detector Value 0 diagnostic parameters.
up from a lower level.
3) SPC DET provides viewing and editing of the Special
Any number between 1 and 250 is valid. The controller Detector Value 0 diagnostic parameters.
automatically limits the V+O% to 250%. Any value over 250 4) VALUE SET 1; provides for jumping directly to the
will in effect prevent the Queue routine from ever Value 1 Diagnostic Menu. "VALUE SET 0" and "VALUE
attaining that level. SET 1" entries provide two parameter sets for detector
diagnostics on each detector. Time Base AUX event "D1"
% LEAVE (DN): This entry (00-255) establishes the V+O entry causes Value Set 1 to be in effect.
percentage required to leave the level when it transitions
down to a lower level. See paragraph 2 under ENTER PRESS "1" FROM VALUE 0 DIAGNOSTICS MENU
above.
EPAC SYSTEM - VALUE 0 DATA
The routine will use the smaller of ENTER & LEAVE as the VEH DET....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
LEAVE parameter (ENTER is assumed to be larger than MX PRES 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
NO ACTY 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
LEAVE). MAX CNT 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
- DATA = MINUTES OR COUNTS/MINUTES -
DL/SPL/OFF (Pattern): This entry establishes the pattern or - TBC AUX "D1" ENABLES VALUE 1 DATA -
partial pattern that will be operational when the V+O A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
percentage for the routine matches that required to run or
maintain the level. (### sets pattern, 0#0 sets the desired  Default Data is as shown
Split only, and #00 sets the desired Dial only).
MX PRES: This entry (000-255 minutes) establishes the
MAXIMUM PRESENCE a detector can exhibit prior to being
2.9.4 Detector Diagnostics Menu considered a fault.
NO ACTY: This entry (000-255 minutes) establishes the NO
The Detector Diagnostic Sub-Menu allows the user to select ACTIVITY limit (maximum time between detector
which detector diagnostic parameter database to be actuations) prior to being considered a fault.
addressed.
ERR CNT: This entry (000-255 counts) establishes the
PRESS "3" FROM SYSTEM MENU MAXIMUM ACTUATIONS PER MINUTE that can occur prior
to being considered a fault.
EPAC SYSTEM - DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS
1-DIAGNOSTIC VALUES
An entry of "000" into any routine (No Activity, Maximum
2-DETECTOR STATUS Presence, or Erratic Output) will omit the routine from the
3-DETECTOR REPORT diagnostic evaluation for that detector.

2.9.4.2 Detector Status
1) DIAGNOSTIC VALUES provides viewing and editing of The Detector Status Display allows the user to view the current
the detector diagnostic parameters. detector status as determined by the detector diagnostics.
2) DETECTOR STATUS provides viewing of the current
detector status as determined by the detector PRESS "2" FROM DIAGNOSTIC MENU
diagnostics.
3) DETECTOR REPORT provides viewing of the list of EPAC SYSTEM - DETECTOR STATUS
VEH DET....1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
detector faults along with the date and time of STATUS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
occurrence. VEH DET....9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
STATUS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CODES: 0-ON LINE..FAIL:.1-MP.2-NA.3-EC..
4-NS.5-BIU.6-LWD.7-LO.8-LS.9-LC
2.9.4.1 Diagnostics Values A-PRV B-NXT DISPLAY F-PRIOR MENU
The Diagnostics Values Display allows the user to view and/or

modify the detector diagnostic parameters. Duplicate display, See 2.2.6 for additional details.
PRESS "1" FROM DIAGNOSTIC MENU
2.9.4.3 Detector Report
EPAC SYSTEM - VALUE 0 DET DIAGNOSTICS
The Detector Report Display allows the user to view the list of
1-VEH 1- 8 5-VEH 33-40 9-PED 1-8
2-VEH 9-16 6-VEH 41-48 0-SPC 1-8 detector failures along with the date and time of occurrence.
3-VEH 17-24 7-VEH 49-56
4-VEH 25-32 8-VEH 57-64 A-VALUE 1

FRONT PANEL Page 69
PRESS "3" FROM DIAGNOSTIC MENU ALRM ....DESCRIPTION.. (0-NO LOG/1-LOG)

01 ON LINE 0
02 POWER ON 0
EPAC SYSTEM - DETECTOR FAIL REPORT 03 POWER OFF 0
MM/DD HH:MM -------STATUS------- 04 NO COORD - CYCLE FALT 0
09/20 10:20 VEH 1 - FAIL ERR CNTS 05 OFF LINE - CYCLE FAIL 0
09/20 12:10 SPC 2 - FAIL MAX PRES 06 NO COORD - COORD FALT 0
09/20 13:15 VEH 1 - ON LINE 07 NO COORD - COORD FAIL 0
09/20 23:55 SPC 3 - FAIL NO ACTY 08 OFF LINE - VOLT MONIT 0
../.. ..:.. .................... 09 OFF LINE - REMOTE FL 0
A-PRV B-NXT WINDOW C-CLEAR F-PRIOR MENU 10 OFF LINE - PREEMPT 1 0
11 OFF LINE - PREEMPT 2 0

MM/DD (Date): This display denotes the date (Month and 12 OFF LINE - PREEMPT 3 0
Month Day) of the fault. 13 OFF LINE - PREEMPT 4 0
14 SPECIAL STATUS 1 ON 0
HH:MM (Time): This display denotes the time of day (Hour 15 SPECIAL STATUS 2 ON 0
and Minute) of the fault. 17 SPECIAL STATUS 4 ON 0
STATUS (Fault): This display denotes description in English of 19 SPECIAL STATUS 6 ON 0
failed detector and the fault detected as follows: 20 SPECIAL STATUS 1 OFF 0
The Detector Failure Report has the capacity to store up to 60 21 SPECIAL STATUS 2 OFF 0
diagnostic faults. Fault data will appear in the order in which 22 SPECIAL STATUS 3 OFF 0
it occurs, the initial display will show the oldest. The cursor 23 SPECIAL STATUS 4 OFF 0
24 SPECIAL STATUS 5 OFF 0
control keys "A" and "B" will page through the report. The 25 SPECIAL STATUS 6 OFF 0
control key "C" will allow the clearing of the report log. 26 OFF LINE - CONFL FL 0
27 OFF LINE - LOCAL FL 0
28 ALARM 28 - RESERVED 0
2.9.5 Local Alarms Report 29
30
SIGNATURE-CHK BATTERY
WATCHDOG TIMEOUT
0
0
The Local Alarms Report Display allows the user to view the 31 EEPROM WRITE ERROR 0
list of local alarms along with the date and time of occurrence. 32 ALARM 32 - RESERVED 0
33 COORD ACTIVE 0
PRESS "4" FROM SYSTEM MENU 34 TRAFFIC TASK DELAYED 0
35 CYCLE ZERO PHASE FALT 0
36 NO SYSTEM - BACKUP 0
EPAC SYSTEM - LOCAL ALARMS 37 SYSTEM ACTIVE 0
38 CYCLE ZERO PED DELAY 0
39 NO SYSTEM - STANDBY 0
1 - ALARM SELECTION 40 NO COORD - COMND FREE 0
2 - ALARM REPORT
41 NO COORD - COORD FREE 0
PRESS # DESIRED F-PRIOR MENU 42 NO COORD - BAD P FREE 0
43 NO COORD - TRANS FREE 0
44 NO COORD - INPUT FREE 0
45 NO COORD - FAIL FREE 0
PRESS "1" FROM ABOVE MENU 46 ALARM LOG FAULT 0
47 COMM LOG FAULT 0
EPAC SYSTEM - LOCAL ALARMS SELECTION 48 TRAF RESP LOG FAULT 0
ALRM.....DESCRIPTION.. (0-NO LOG/1-LOG) 49 SPEED LOG FAULT 0
1 ON LINE 1 50 MOES LOG FAULT 0
2 POWER ON 1
3 POWER OFF 1 51 DET LOG FAULT 0
4 NO COORD - CYCLE FAULT 1 52 DIALUP FAILED 0
5 OFF LINE - CYCLE FAIL 1 53 DATA CHANGE - REMOTE 0
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU 54 DATA CHANGE - KEYPAD 0
57 OFF LINE - PRIORITY 1 0
The entry ‘0’ will disable the logging of a specific event into 58 OFF LINE - PRIORITY 2 0
the alarm log. The entry ‘1’ will enable the logging of a 59 OFF LINE - PRIORITY 3 0
specific event into the alarm log. 60 OFF LINE - PRIORITY 4 0
When the cursor is in the ALRM (Alarm) field, entry of a 61 OFF LINE - PRIORITY 5 0
number will cause the display to place that alarm’s data on the 62 OFF LINE - PRIORITY 6 0
63 DIAG: BUS FAULT 0
cursor line. This enables the user to jump to a specific data 64 DIAG: ADDRESS FAULT 0
entry area. 65 DIAG: INVALID OPCODE 0
66 DIAG: DIVIDE BY ZERO 0
See 3.11.3 for a definition of report entries: 67 DIAG: SYSTEM FAULT 0
68 DIAG: FALSE INTERRUPT 0
69 DIAG: INVALID TRAP 0
70 DIAG: UNSPECIFIED 0

Page 70 FRONT PANEL
71 DIAG: IOP INIT 0 141 FRAME 148 FAULT 0
72 DIAG: RAM TEST 0 142 FRAME 148 ON LINE 0
73 DIAG: VRTX FAULT 0 143 FRAME 149 FAULT 0
74 DIAG: IOP TIMEOUT 0 144 FRAME 149 ON LINE 0
75 DIAG: IOP RAM TEST 0 145 FRAME 150 FAULT 0
76 DIAG: IOP CLOCK TEST 0 146 FRAME 150 ON LINE 0
77 DIAG: IOP ROM TEST 0 147 FRAME 151 FAULT 0
78 INVALID PROM RESTART 0 148 FRAME 151 ON LINE 0
79 INCOMPAT MEM RESTART 0 149 FRAME 152 FAULT 0
80 EEPROM CRC INITIALIZE 0 150 FRAME 152 ON LINE 0
81 EEPROM INIT - KEYPAD 0 151 FRAME 153 FAULT 0

82 IME CHANGE - REMOTE 0 152 FRAME 153 ON LINE 0
83 TIME CHANGE - KEYPAD 0 153 FRAME 154 FAULT 0
84 COORD OFFSET FAULT 0 154 FRAME 154 ON LINE 0
85 RTC CHIP FAILURE 0 155 FRAME 155 FAULT 0
86 RTC CHIP FAULT 0 156 FRAME 155 ON LINE 0
87 RTC CHIP ADJUST 0 157 ALARM 157 RESERVED 0
88 SOFTWARE CLOCK ADJUST 0 158 ALARM 158 RESERVED 0
89 PROGRAM DAY 0 0 159 ALARM 159 RESERVED 0
90 CRIT'L ALARMS CLEAR 0 160 ALARM 160 RESERVED 0
91 DIAG: EEPROM CRC ERR 0 161 FRAME 158 FAULT 0

92 DIAG: EPROM CRC ERR 0 162 FRAME 158 ON LINE 0
93 DIAG: TRAFTASK XS DLY 0 163 ALARM 163 RESERVED 0
94 DIAG: TRAF TASK WDOG 0 164 ALARM 164 RESERVED 0
95 VOL COUNT LOG FAULT 0 165 ALARM 165 RESERVED 0
96 RAW ERR LOG FAULT 0 166 ALARM 166 RESERVED 0
97 MMU UNDETECTED CNFLCT 0 167 ALARM 167 RESERVED 0
98 MMU UTILZATION CNFLCT 0 168 ALARM 168 RESERVED 0
99 SDLC .1 SEC DLY FAULT 0 169 ALARM 169 RESERVED 0
100 SDLC .1 SEC DLY FAIL 0 170 ALARM 170 RESERVED 0
101 FRAME 128 FAULT 0 171 ALARM 171 RESERVED 0

102 FRAME 128 ON LINE 0 172 ALARM 172 RESERVED 0
105 ALARM 105 RESERVED 0 175 ALARM 175 RESERVED 0
111 ALARM 111 RESERVED 0 181 FRAME 168 FAULT 0

112 ALARM 112 RESERVED 0 182 FRAME 168 ON LINE 0
119 ALARM 119 RESERVED 0 189 RESERVED FOR FUTURE 0
120 ALARM 120 RESERVED 0 190 RESERVED FOR FUTURE 0
121 FRAME 138 FAULT 0 191 RESERVED FOR FUTURE 0

122 FRAME 138 ON LINE 0 | | | | |
123 FRAME 139 FAULT 0
124 FRAME 139 ON LINE 0
125 FRAME 140 FAULT 0 355 RESERVED FOR FUTURE 0
126 FRAME 140 ON LINE 0 356 RESERVED FOR FUTURE 0
127 FRAME 141 FAULT 0 357 DIAG: RESP FRAME FAIL 1
128 FRAME 141 ON LINE 0 358 DIAG: RNG DNLOAD FAIL 1
129 ALARM 129 RESERVED 0 359 DIAG: INV. TS2-A1 CNF 1

132 ALARM 132 RESERVED 0 362 FRAME 18 FAILURE 0
133 ALARM 133 RESERVED 0 363 CYCLE MOE LOG FAULT 0
134 ALARM 134 RESERVED 0 364 MMU LOG FAULT 0
135 ALARM 135 RESERVED 0 365 INVALID ABC I/O MODE 0
136 ALARM 136 RESERVED 0 366 PREEMPT INPUT MAX FLT 0
137 ALARM 137 RESERVED 0 367 DATA UNLOCK - REMOTE 0
138 ALARM 138 RESERVED 0 368 DATA LOCK - REMOTE 0
139 ALARM 139 RESERVED 0 369 T&F SIGNATURE FAULT 0
140 ALARM 140 RESERVED 0 370 DATA LOCK - TIMEOUT 0

FRONT PANEL Page 71
371 WD RESTART - FIELDIO 0 PRESS 5 FROM SYSTEM MENU
372 WD RESTART – 10THTSK 0
373 WDOG START - WDBCKUP 0
374 WDOG START - WDPRIME 0 EPAC SYSTEM - LOCAL MOE'S D/S/O
375 WDOG START - PLAYER 0 BEGIN: 09/21 07:15 2/2/2
376 WDOG START - PRINTER 0 PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
377 WDOG START – TRIB 1 0 VOLUME.: 050 100 050 100 050 100 050 100
378 WDOG START – TRIB 2 0 STOPS..: 040 020 040 070 040 020 040 070
379 WDOG START – F PANEL 0 DELAY..: 30 55 30 30 30 50 30 30
380 WDOG START – LV1 DIAG 0 UTILIZ.: 15 35 10 30 10 40 15 25
A-PRV B-NXT WINDOW C-CLEAR F-PRIOR MENU
381 WDOG START - TBE 0
382 WDOG START - BACKGND 0
383 WDOG START - TBC 0 BEGIN: The displayed data denotes the date (Month and Day)
384 WDOG START - LED 0 and time (Hour and Minute) the report began.
385 WDOG START - KEYBOARD 0
386 WDOG START - DISPLAY 0 D/S/O: The displayed data denotes the pattern the report is for.
387 DIAG: FIELDIO FAIL 0
388 DIAG: PWRFAIL LOADFLT 0 VOLUME: The displayed data denotes the per cycle average
389 DIAG: NO IP STACK 0
390 DIAG: FIO MAX RETRIES 0 number of actuations (0-999) received on each phase.
STOPS: The displayed data denotes the per cycle average
391 DIAG: FIO RESET 0
392 DIAG: FIO EVENT OVRN 0 number of actuations (0-999) received during the non-
393 CFGDATA CRC INITIALZE 0 green time on each phase.
394 CFGDATA/SWOP INCOMPAT 0
395 HARDWARE/SWOP PROBLEM 0 DLAY*10: The displayed data times 10 denotes the per cycle
396 CFGDATA INIT - KEYPAD 0
397 DIAG: CFGDATA CRC ERR 0 average time (0-999 Seconds) of the delay on each phase.
398 DIAG: PROGRAM CRC ERR 0 Delay accumulates based on cars waiting and elapsed time.
399 SIGNATURE INVALID 0
400 BBDATA CHG FAULT 0 UTILIZATION: The displayed data denotes the per cycle
average green time (0-999 Seconds) used on each phase.
401 CFGDATA CHG FAULT 0
402 CFGDATA INIT – DATAKEY 0 The Local MOE Report has the capacity to store up to 24
pattern sets of MOE. Pattern MOE sets will appear in the order
in which they occur, the initial display will show the oldest.
EPAC SYSTEM - LOCAL ALARMS REPORT
The cursor control keys A and B will page through the report.
MM/DD HH:MM -------STATUS------- The control key C will allow the clearing of the report log.
09/20 10:20 OFF LINE - CYCLE FALT
09/20 10:22 OFF LINE - COORD FAIL
09/20 10:24 ON LINE
09/25 06:00 POWER OFF 2.9.7 Speed Data Menu
09/25 08:02 POWER ON ...........
A-PRV B-NXT WINDOW C-CLEAR F-PRIOR MENU The Speed Sub-Menu allows the user to select which speed
parameter database to be addressed.
MM/DD (Date): This display denotes the date (Month and PRESS 6 FROM SYSTEM MENU
Month Day) of the fault.
EPAC SYSTEM - SPEED DATA
HH:MM (Time): This display denotes the time of day (Hour
and Minute) of the fault. 1-ASSIGN DETECTORS 4-RANGES-DIAL 3
2-RANGES-DIAL 1 5-RANGES-DIAL 4
STATUS (Fault): This display denotes description in English of 3-RANGES-DIAL 2 6-REPORT
the fault detected as follows:
See 3.11.3 for a definition of report entries:
The Local Alarms Report has the capacity to store up to 120 1) ASSIGN DETECTORS provides viewing and editing of
alarms. Alarms will appear in the order in which they occur, the speed trap detector assignments.
the initial display will show the oldest. The cursor control keys 2) RANGES-DIAL 1 provides viewing and editing of the
A and B will page through the report. The control key C will pattern related speed range parameters for Dial 1 Split
allow the clearing of the report log. 1 to 4.
3) RANGES-DIAL 2 provides viewing and editing of the
pattern related speed range parameters for Dial 2 Split
2.9.6 Local MOE Report 1 to 4.
The Local MOE Report Display allows the user to view the pattern related speed range parameters for Dial 3 Split
pattern related MOE reports by beginning date and time. 1 to 4.
pattern related speed range parameters for Dial 4 Split
1 to 4.
6) REPORT provides viewing of the pattern related speed
reports.

Page 72 FRONT PANEL
2.9.7.1 Speed Trap Data BEGIN (MM/DD HH:MM): This display denotes the date (Month
and Day) and time (Hour and Minute) the report began.
The Speed Trap Data Display allows the user to view and/or
modify the basic speed trap parameters (detector PATRN (D/S/O): This display denotes the pattern the report
assignments). data is for.
PRESS 1 FROM SPEED TRAP MENU PERCENT OF TOTAL

1) LOWR: the percentage of vehicles that were slower
EPAC SYSTEM - SPEED TRAP DATA (lower) than the range defined.
MEASUREMENT: 0 (0=MPH 1=KPH) 2) W/IN: the percentage of vehicles that were within the
TRAP # 1 D1..D2 TRAP # 2 D1..D2
ASSIGN 00 00 ASSIGN 00 00 range defined.
DISTANCE 0 DISTANCE 0 3) HIGH: the percentage of vehicles that were faster
ASSIGN #: VEH=1-64, SPC=65-72, PED=73-80 (higher) than the range defined.
DISTANCE CODES:..1=11 FT..2=22 FT.......
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU The Speed Report has the capacity to store up to 24 patterns of
speed data. Pattern Speed data will appear in the order in
 Default Data is not provided. which it occurs, the initial display will show the oldest. The
MEASUREMENT: This entry provides for speed to be measured cursor control keys A and B will page through the report. The
and reported based on Miles Per Hour (0 entry) or control key C will allow the clearing of the report log.
Kilometers Per Hour (1 entry).
ASSIGN: These entries provide for assigning ANY Vehicle,
Special, or Pedestrian detector input as a Speed Trap 2.10 REPORTS
Detector.
DISTANCE: These entries provide for spacing of 11 feet (1
entry) or 22 feet (2 entry) for the speed trap detector
sensors. Reports allows the user to display the following reports:
1) Communication Fault Report
2) System Detector Report
2.9.7.2 Dial 1 Speed Trap Ranges 3) Detector Fault Report
4) Local Alarm Report
The Speed Trap Ranges Display allows the user to view and/or 5) Local MOE Report
modify the pattern related speed range parameters. 6) Speed Report
PRESS 2 FROM SPEED TRAP MENU 7) Cycle MOE Report
8) MMU Fault Report
EPAC SYSTEM - SPEED RANGES
PAT OFFSET 1 OFFSET 2 OFFSET 3
D/S LOW HIGH
1/1 035 045
LOW HIGH
030 040
LOW HIGH
035 045
2.10.1 Report Menu
1/2 035 045 030 040 035 045
1/3 035 045 030 040 035 045 The Reports Menu allows the user to select which report to be
1/4 035 045 030 040 035 045 viewed.
 Default Data is not provided.
EPAC REPORTS
The LOW and HIGH entries provide a nominal speed range in
MPH or KPH for the trap for each coordination pattern (i.e., 1-COMM FAULTS 5-MOEs
2-SYS DET 6-SPEED
Dial/Split/Offset). 3-DET FAULTS 7-CYCLE MOEs
4-ALARMS 8-MMU FAULTS
9-SYS MSG
2.9.7.3 Speed Trap Report
The Speed Trap Report Display allows the user to view the 1) COMM FAULTS provides viewing of Communication
pattern related speed reports, as a percentage within, below, Fault report.
and above the specified range. The values are identified by 2) SYS DET provides viewing the System Detector report.
beginning date and time of pattern implementation. 3) DET FAULTS provides viewing the Detector Fault
report.
PRESS 6 FROM SPEED TRAP MENU
4) ALARMS provides viewing of Local Alarm report.
EPAC SYSTEM - SPEED REPORT
5) MOE provides viewing of Local MOE report.
--- BEGIN -- PATRN PERCENT OF TOTAL 6) SPEED provides viewing the Speed Trap report.
MM/DD HH:MM D/S/O LOWR W/IN HIGH 7) CYCLE MOE provides viewing the Cycle MOE Report.
09/21 07:15 2/2/2 10 80 10
../.. ..:.. ././. .. .. ..
../.. ..:.. ././. .. .. ..
../.. ..:.. ././. .. .. ..

FRONT PANEL Page 73
PRESS "4" FROM REPORT MENU

2.10.2 Communication Fault
Report EPAC SYSTEM - LOCAL ALARMS REPORT
MM/DD HH:MM -------STATUS-------
09/20 10:20 OFF LINE - CYCLE FALT
The Communication Fault Report allows the user to view the 09/20 10:22 OFF LINE - COORD FAIL
09/20 10:24 ON LINE
list of communications faults along with the date and time of 09/25 06:00 POWER OFF
occurrence. 09/25 08:02 POWER ON ...........
PAC SYSTEM - COMM FAIL REPORT Duplicate display, See 2.9.5 for additional details.
MM/DD HH:MM --------STATUS-------
09/20 10:20 RECV ERROR
09/21 22:10 .....................
../.. ..:.. ..................... 2.10.6 Local MOE Report
../.. ..:.. .....................
../.. ..:.. ..................... The Local MOE Report allows the user to view the pattern
-PRV B-NXT WINDOW C-CLEAR F-PRIOR MENU
related MOE reports by beginning date and time.
PRESS “5” FROM REPORT MENU
Duplicate display, See 2.9.2.4 for additional detail.
EPAC SYSTEM - LOCAL MOE'S D/S/O
2.10.3 System Detector Report

BEGIN: 09/21 07:15 2/2/2
PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
VOLUME.: 050 100 050 100 050 100 050 100
STOPS..: 040 020 040 070 040 020 040 070
The System Detector Report allows the user to view the system DELAY..: 30 55 30 30 30 50 30 30
detector reports. UTILIZ.: 15 35 10 30 10 40 15 25
EPAC SYSTEM - SYS DET REPORT Duplicate display, See 2.9.6 for additional details.
BEGIN: 09/21 07:15 INT: 15 MULT: 10
DETECTOR...1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
RAW VOL: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
RAW OCC: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2.10.7 Speed Trap Report
AVOL%..: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
AC0%...: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The Speed Trap Report allows the user to view the pattern
related speed reports, as a percentage within, below, and
above the specified range. The values are identified by
Duplicate display, See 2.9.3.4 for complete details. beginning date and time of pattern implementation.
2.10.4 Detector Fail Report EPAC SYSTEM - SPEED REPORT
--- BEGIN -- PATRN PERCENT OF TOTAL
The Detector Fail Report allows the user to view the list of MM/DD HH:MM D/S/O LOWR W/IN HIGH
detector faults along with the date and time of occurrence. 09/21 07:15 2/2/2 10 80 10
../.. ..:.. ././. .. .. ..
PRESS "3" FROM REPORT MENU ../.. ..:.. ././. .. .. ..
../.. ..:.. ././. .. .. ..
EPAC SYSTEM - DETECTOR FAIL REPORT
09/20 10:20 VEH 1 - FAIL ERR CNTS
09/20 12:10 SPC 2 - FAIL MAX PRES Duplicate display, See 2.9.7 for additional details.
09/20 13:15 VEH 1 - ON LINE
09/20 23:55 SPC 3 - FAIL NO ACTY
../.. ..:.. ....................
2.10.8 Cycle MOE Report
The Cycle MOE Report allows the user to view a cycle by cycle
Duplicate display, See 2.9.4.3 for additional details. listing of green utilization for each pattern.
2.10.5 Local Alarm Report EPAC SYSTEM - CYCLE MOE D/S/O
BEGIN: 15:45:00 DBASE 4/2/3
The Local Alarm Report Display allows the user to view the list PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
of local events along with the date and time of occurrence. UTILIZ.: 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16
UTILIZ.: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FORCE..: ........ ........

Page 74 FRONT PANEL
BEGIN (HH:MM:SS): This data denotes the time (Hour , MIN CLEARANCE FAULT
Minute, and Second) the cycle began.
PORT 1 TIMEOUT FAULT
DBASE: This data denotes the status of coordination for the
CVM FAULT
cycle. The following lists the possible status of the cycle:
DBASE: A data base reference for the following cycle data. A 24V-I FAULT
DBASE entry will be maintained for as long as any cycle
data follows for a specific pattern which started at the 24V-II FAULT
specified time. UNKNOWN FAULT
TRANS: The first cycle for a coordination pattern.
CORR+: A cycle in which offset correction extended the CHANNEL (Status): This denotes the status of each channel
cycle. input at the time of the fault.
CORR-: A cycle in which offset correction shortened the The MMU Fault Report has the capacity to store up to 24
cycle. events. MMU Fault Report data will appear in the order in
COORD: A cycle in which there was no offset correction. which it occurs, the initial display will show the oldest. The
FREE: An entry to denote that coordination was terminated cursor control keys A and B will page through the report. The
to operate non-coordinated. control key C will allow the clearing of the report log.
D/S/O: This data denotes the pattern the report is for.
UTILIZ: This data denotes the per cycle phase utilization. This 2.10.10 System Message
data will be a negative value when the phase uses less than
the entered pattern time and positive when the phase uses The System Message display allows the user to view a message
more than the entered pattern time. downloaded from the office for viewing at this CU.
The Cycle MOE Report has the capacity to store up to 60 cycles PRESS “9” FROM REPORT MENU
of data. Cycle MOE data will appear in the order in which it
occurs, the initial display will show the oldest. The cursor EPAC DISPLAY OF SYSTEM MESSAGE
control keys A and B will page through the report. The control
key C will allow the clearing of the report log.
2.10.9 MMU Faults Report C-CLEAR F-PRIOR MENU
The MMU Faults Report allows the user to view a history of

MMU reported faults. The status logged is reported to the CU This screen can display 6 lines of 40 characters. The definition
via TS 2 Port 1. and download is via communications with a computer.
EPAC LOGGING - MMU FAULT LOG

MM/DD HH:MM ------- STATUS --------
2.11 COPYRIGHT
08/14 13:46 RED FAILURE
CHANNEL.....123456789 0123456
RED...: 011011101 1111111
YELLOW: 000000000 0000000
GREEN.:...000100010.0000000 The Eagle EPAC300 software that operates in Eagle EPAC M50
and 2070 ATC units is copyrighted. To read that notice and
additional information about the unit:
MM/DD (Date): This display denotes the date (Month and PRESS "A" FROM MAIN MENU
Month Day) of the fault.
HH:MM (Time): This display denotes the time of day (Hour COPYRIGHT (c) 1998-2004 SIEMENS ITS
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
and Minute) of the fault. WARNING: This program is protected by
copyright law and international treaties
STATUS (Fault): This display denotes description in English of
the fault detected as follows:
CONFLICT FAULT 1-MORE INFORMATION F-PRIOR MENU
RED FAILURE
FIELD CHECK FAULT
DUAL INDICATION FAULT
BND FAULT
EXTERNAL WDOG FAULT
MMU DIAGNOSTIC FAULT

FRONT PANEL Page 75
PRESS "1" FROM THE ABOVE SCREEN
MVP TYPE: ETCS BUILD:

Sw OP: ITS v1 08/20/03
2-ENABLE /r0/Sepac.log [TYPE 0]
PORT 2: STD [Prog in F+2+8+2]
sEPAC Serial # 00278778-00001-00000
LAT 3020.1504 N
LON 09741.1301 W LOCK=V F-PRIOR MENU
1. MVP TYPE:
ETCS -
2. BUILD: 08/20/03
3. Sw OP:
4. 2-ENABLE /r0/sEPAC log [TYPE 0]:
5. PORT 2:
STD - means Port 2 goes to SP2 (2070 ATC rear / M50 25
pin primary data connections).
SPC - means Port 2 goes to the alternate location of C50S
[SP4] (2070 ATC Front Panel / M50 Secondary Data
locations [pins 14 & 16]).
When the next restart will change the current mode, the
following text will appear at the end; “ <= ENDING”
1. sEPAC Serial:
1st 8 digits: the CRC
2nd 5 digits: group number
3rd 5 digits: user number
1. LAT, LON, LOCK=: these fields are visible when GPS mode
is enabled. The data is added to the fields when data is
being received from the GPS device. LOCK will show ‘V’
when valid signal or ‘A’ when acquiring.

Page 76 FRONT PANEL
< Blank Page >

FUNCTION Page 77
3 FUNCTION
A Control Unit with EPAC300 Firmware/Software (CU) is one Zero is satisfied by any time between zero and 100
of the most advanced full feature, fully actuated, traffic CUs milliseconds.
specifically designed for the traffic controller market.
3.2.2 Phase Intervals

3.1 GENERAL 1. Green Interval - Actuated Phase
a. Without Volume Density - The Green interval is a
variable interval dependent upon vehicle actuations.
The Green interval time is limited by the Maximum
Green time function which commences timing upon
Inputs, outputs, functions, and programming controls are
registration of a serviceable conflicting call. The
separated into the following three categories:
MINIMUM GREEN time is not preempted by a
1. Per phase
MAXIMUM GREEN termination.
2. Per ring
3. Per unit All Green time after MINIMUM GREEN is considered
the extensible portion of the Green or part of the
PASSAGE TIME period. PASSAGE TIME times the time
3.1.1 Pin Connections between successive vehicle actuations. If the PASSAGE
TIME times out in the presence of a serviceable
Input/output connector pin terminations shall be in conflicting call, the phase is said to be "gapped out"
accordance with Section 1 and Section 8. which is a condition for phase termination.
Three time settings are provided for determination of
3.2 PER PHASE Green timing on an actuated phase without volume
density.
(1) Minimum Green - The first timed portion of the
Green interval which may be set in consideration of
the storage of vehicles between the zone of detection
The following inputs, outputs, functions, and programming for the approach vehicle detector(s) and the stop line.
controls are provided on a per phase basis:
(2) Passage Time (Vehicle Interval, Preset Gap) - The
extensible portion of the Green is a function of vehicle
3.2.1 Time Settings actuations that occur during the Green interval. The
phase remains in the extensible portion of the Green
The following functions, with the associated minimum timing interval as long as the passage timer is not timed out.
ranges and maximum increments, are provided:
The timing of this portion of the Green interval is reset
Range Increments with each subsequent vehicle actuation and does not
Function Seconds Seconds commence to time again until the vehicle actuation is
removed from the CU. The duration of the Green
Min Green 1 -999 1 interval is subject to the limit of the MAXIMUM GREEN.
Passage Time 0 - 99.9 0.1 (3) Maximum Green - This time setting determines the
Maximum 1 1 - 999 1 maximum length of time this phase may be held Green
in the presence of a serviceable conflicting call. In the
Maximum 2 1 - 999 1 absence of a serviceable conflicting call the MAXIMUM
GREEN timer is held reset.
Yellow Change 3 - 99.9 0.1
b. With Volume Density - In addition to MINIMUM
Red Clearance 0 - 99.9 0.1 GREEN, PASSAGE TIME, and MAXIMUM GREEN timing
functions, phases provided with Volume Density
Walk 0 - 999 1 operation includes Variable Initial timings and Gap
Pedestrian Clearance 0 - 999 1 Reduction timings.
Added Initial 0 - 99.9 per Actuation The effect on the Variable Initial timing is to increase
the timing in a manner dependent upon the number
Maximum Initial 0-999 1 of vehicle actuations stored on this phase while its
Time to Reduce 1 - 999 1 signal is displaying Yellow or Red.
Time Before Reduction 1 - 999 1 The Variable Initial time is a computed value that is at
least as large as the MINIMUM GREEN time and not
Minimum Gap 0 - 99.9 0.1 more than the MAXIMUM INITIAL time. With these

Page 78 FUNCTION
boundaries observed the computed value is the level begins. The time period in which this reduction
product of the number of non-green actuations and occurs is called TIME TO REDUCE.
the SECONDS/ACTUATION time value.
The rate of reduction is based on the setting of the
The effect on the extensible portion is to reduce the PASSAGE TIME, MINIMUM GAP, and TIME TO REDUCE
allowable gap between successive vehicle actuations controls. This method reduces the allowable gap at a
by decreasing the extension time in a manner rate equal to the difference between the PASSAGE
dependent upon the time waiting of vehicles on a TIME and MINIMUM GAP setting divided by the setting
conflicting phase. of the TIME TO REDUCE control.
(1) Variable Initial - The Variable Initial timing period The reduction of the allowable gap continues until the
is determined by an interrelationship of two time gap reaches a value equal to or less than the minimum
settings as described below: gap as set on the MINIMUM GAP control after which
the allowable gap remains fixed at the values set on
(a) Minimum Green setting determines the minimum
the MINIMUM GAP control. In the presence of a
Variable Initial time period.
continuous vehicle actuation, the phase will not gap
(b) Added Initial setting determines the time by which out even if the gap is reduced to zero (i.e., Minimum
the Variable Initial time period will be increased from Gap set at zero).
zero with each vehicle actuation received during the
If at any time the serviceable conflicting call is
associated phase Yellow and Red intervals.
withdrawn, the gap reverts to the PASSAGE TIME
(c) The maximum of the Variable Initial timing period setting value, and the TIME BEFORE REDUCTION
is capable of being (on a per-phase basis) in the range period timer is reset and remains reset until the next
of 0 - 999 seconds with increments of 1 second. The serviceable conflicting call is received.
MAXIMUM INITIAL setting is subordinate to MINIMUM
The CU has a provision that modifies the gap timing
GREEN time setting.
when a gap-out occurs. When programmed to enable
(d) Initial timing equals (ADDED INITIAL ) multiplied LAST CAR PASSAGE and a gap-out occurs, the CU times
by (number of actuations) within the constraint of a period equal to the difference between the PASSAGE
MAXIMUM INITIAL and is not less than MINIMUM TIME setting and the value of the gap-in-effect at the
GREEN. time of the gap-out before terminating the phase. The
period is referred to as the LAST CAR PASSAGE
(2) Gap Reduction - The Gap Reduction function is Interval.
accomplished by means of the following functional
settings: 2. Pedestrian Timing, Concurrent
(a) Time Before Reduction Concurrent pedestrian timing is permitted in association
with any mode of vehicle signal timing. Two time settings
(b) Cars Before Reduction are provided:
(c) Passage Time a. Walk - This controls the amount of time the Walk
(d) Minimum Gap indication will be displayed.
(e) Time To Reduce b. Pedestrian Clearance - This controls the duration of the
Pedestrian Clearance output and the flashing period of
The TIME BEFORE REDUCTION period begins when the the Don’t Walk output.
phase is Green and there is a serviceable conflicting
call. If the serviceable conflicting call is withdrawn When a pedestrian call is stored in pedestrian memory
while timing this period, the timer is reset and and pedestrian indications are concurrent with an
remains reset until the next serviceable conflicting call associated vehicle phase, the pedestrian sequence
is received. During this time, the value that the gap commences service when entering the vehicle Green of
timer must reach to cause a "gapped out" status is that phase unless the Pedestrian Omit line is activated.
equal to be the PASSAGE TIME. During the display of the Walk and Pedestrian Clearance
The CARS BEFORE REDUCTION count begins in the indications, a concurrent Green vehicle indication is
Green Extensible Portion to calculate the sum of the shown. It is possible to recycle the pedestrian indications
conflicting cars waiting. If the serviceable conflicting in response to succeeding pedestrian calls for service
calls are withdrawn, the count is held reset until the subject to absence of serviceable conflicting calls (vehicle
next serviceable conflicting call is received. During the or pedestrian) and non-activation of the Pedestrian Omit
period until the count equals the CARS BEFORE line.
REDUCTION setting, the value that the gap timer must 3. Actuated Phase Operating in the Non-Actuated Mode
reach to cause a "gapped out" status is equal to the
PASSAGE TIME. The actuated phases that are converted to Non-Actuated
operation by activation of either the CALL TO NA inputs
Upon completion of the TIME BEFORE REDUCTION have a permanent demand placed for vehicle and
period or CARS BEFORE REDUCTION, the linear pedestrian service. Each such phase is equipped with
reduction of the allowable gap from the Passage Time pedestrian timing capability.

FUNCTION Page 79
These phases are considered to have the four Green states. conflicting call exists, the CU returns to State A of this
a. State A is the minimum timing state. The duration of interval if Pedestrian Recycle is active. If PEDESTRIAN
State A is equal to the WALK time setting. Signal RECYCLE is not active and no serviceable conflicting call
indications for State A is Green and Walk. exists, the CU rests in State D. The HOLD function has no
b. State B is a state immediately following the effect on the duration of State D.
minimum timing state. The CU dwells in this state in
The duration of the Green interval is not less than the
the presence of a HOLD input or when the WALK REST
setting of the Minimum Green control. In those instances
MODIFIER is active and no serviceable conflicting call
where the sum of the Walk setting, the Hold state
exists. The signal indications remain in Green and
duration, and the Pedestrian Clearance setting is less than
Walk. The CU leaves this state when the HOLD input is
the setting on the Minimum Green control, the CU
not active; or when the HOLD input is active, a
remains in State C until the phase has displayed a Green
serviceable conflicting call exists, and the FORCE OFF
indication for a time equal to the Minimum Green time
input is activated. If the phase HOLD is active and the
setting, and displays a steady Don’t Walk.
FORCE OFF is activated when the phase is active and a
serviceable conflicting call does not exist, the CU 4. Termination of Green Timing - Green timing termination
continues to dwell in State B of the phase. occurs in response to one of the following conditions:
c. State C is the Pedestrian Clearance state. During a. INTERVAL ADVANCE when timing the last portion of
State C, the phase activates its PEDESTRIAN the Green interval.
CLEARANCE output and flash its DONT WALK output. b. INTERVAL ADVANCE with MANUAL CONTROL
The duration of the state is equal to the Pedestrian ENABLE activated.
Clearance setting. The phase times the clearance and, c. Initial including variable portion completed, the
upon completion of the timing, advance to State D. pedestrian service completed, a serviceable conflicting
call, and one of the following:
The duration of the Green interval will not be less than
the setting of the MINIMUM GREEN control. In those (1) Passage Time timed out without HOLD applied.
instances where the sum of the WALK timing (State A),
the hold state (State B), and the PEDESTRIAN (2) Reduced gap timed out without HOLD applied.
CLEARANCE timing is less than the setting on the (3) Maximum Green termination without HOLD
MINIMUM GREEN control, the CU will remain in State C applied.
until the phase has displayed a Green indication for a
time equal to the MINIMUM GREEN time setting, and (4) FORCE OFF applied.
will display a steady Don't Walk. d. Initial including the variable portion completed, the
d. State D is a Green Dwell/Select state from which the pedestrian service completed, RED Rest activated and
CU may select the next phases(s) to be serviced. PASSAGE TIME time out without HOLD applied.
During State D signal indications are Green and steady Green timing termination in multiple ring controller
Don’t Walk. When a serviceable conflicting call does configurations, unless programmed otherwise, provide
not exist and the Pedestrian Recycle input is active, or for simultaneous termination. Simultaneous Termination,
when a serviceable conflicting call does not exist and when timing phases concurrently with the next
the Walk Rest Modifier is active, the phase returns to serviceable call on a phase that conflicts with more than
State A and retime the Walk interval. If the Pedestrian one of the phases timing (about to cross a barrier),
Recycle input is not active and the Walk Rest Modifier insures that all phases which will terminate must
is not active, the pedestrian movement does not simultaneously reach a point of being committed to
recycle. terminate before green timing termination shall begin
Each GREEN interval will provide a response to the (i.e., Gap-Out, Max-Out, and/or Force-Off). See 0
phase HOLD input. In those instances where the Non- Simultaneous Gap Out.
Actuated State B (Walk Hold) has not appeared because 5. Vehicle Change and Clearance Intervals. Following the
of a transition to non-actuated during that Green, the Green interval of each phase the CU provides a Yellow
CU will hold in State D. Change interval which is timed according to the Yellow
In the presence of external signals which may be used for Change timing control for that phase.
coordination, the sequence of these states is as follows. b. Following the Yellow Change interval for each phase,
the CU provides a Red Clearance interval which is
The Green interval begins with the existence of State A. timed according to the Red Clearance timing control
Upon the completion of this state the CU exits to State B. If for that phase. During this Red Clearance interval, no
the HOLD input is active at this point, the CU remains in Green indication will be shown to any conflicting
this state. If FORCE OFF is applied and if a serviceable phase. This Red Clearance interval is subject to
conflicting call exists, the CU advances to State C; omission in response to operation of the per ring OMIT
otherwise State B exists as long as HOLD remains active. If RED CLEARANCE input.
HOLD is released while the CU is in State B, the CU
advances to State C without regard to the presence of a 6. Pedestrian Timing, Exclusive - Exclusive pedestrian
serviceable conflicting call. If the CU advances to State C, service is permitted. When servicing a pedestrian
it will advance to State D even in the presence of HOLD. movement exclusively, no other phase will be active. It is
When in State D, the CU terminates the phase if a not required in a dual ring CU to provide more than two
serviceable conflicting call exists. If no serviceable phases in the second timing ring when Exclusive

Page 80 FUNCTION
Pedestrian timing is employed in the other timing ring, pedestrian time setting, when that phase is not displaying a
neither of which can be employed on the same side of the Walk indication.
barrier with the Exclusive Pedestrian phase.
It is not required in a four-phase sequential CU to provide 3.2.5 Placement Of Vehicle
more than three phases in addition to an Exclusive
Pedestrian phase. Recall
Two time settings shall be required on the phase, Walk Minimum Vehicle Recall
and Pedestrian Clearance.
Means are provided, via program entry, to place a recurring
When a pedestrian call is stored in pedestrian memory, demand for vehicle service on the phase when that phase is
the Exclusive Pedestrian phase will be serviced with not in its Green interval.
appropriate consideration of its order in the priority of
phase sequencing. Maximum Vehicle Recall
The Exclusive Pedestrian phase rests with a steady Dont Means are provided to place a call on a phase, via program
Walk indication displayed. It is possible to recycle the entry, such that the timing of the Green interval for that
pedestrian indication in response to succeeding phase is extended to Maximum Green time.
pedestrian calls for service, subject to absence of When such a call is placed, the maximum timing commences
serviceable conflicting calls (vehicle or pedestrian) and to time as if there were always a serviceable conflicting call,
non-activation of the Pedestrian Omit line. but the phase does not terminate unless there is an actual
7. Alternate Passage & Maximum Times - The CU provides serviceable conflicting call.
three optional sets of Passage and Maximum parameters Soft Vehicle Recall
(i.e., PAS3, MAX3, PAS4, MAX4, PAS5, and MAX5.
Means are provided to place a demand for vehicle service in
The effective optional parameter set is selected via Time memory only when:
Base event or system command.  A conflicting phase is in green or red dwell and
8. Adaptive Maximum - The CU provides an optional feature  There are no serviceable conflicting calls.
which provides a phase by phase Adaptive Max operation Recall Delay
based on vehicle demand. Three optional sets of Dynamic
Step and Maximum parameters (i.e., DM3STEP, DMX3, Means are provided such that recall operation does not occur
DM4STEP, DMX4, DM5STEP, and DMX5). until after an adjustable period (0-999 seconds in increments
of 1 second) following a phase termination. The delay is
The effective optional parameter set is selected via Time applicable to Vehicle Min, Max, & Soft Recall and Pedestrian
Base event or system command. Recall. The delay begins the instant operation exits the phase.
9. Adaptive Protected / Permissive - The CU provides an The timing continues regardless of demands on other phases.
optional Adaptive Protected / Permissive operation. This
control measures the volume of turn vehicle traffic and
available gap windows in the opposing through vehicle 3.2.6 Placement Of Pedest
traffic to determine whether the turn should operate
protected or permissive.
Recall
This operation is capable of being disabled via Time Base Pedestrian Recall
event or system command. Means are provided to place a recurring pedestrian demand,
via program entry, which functions in the same manner as an
3.2.3 Phase Selection Points external pedestrian call except that it does not recycle the
pedestrian service until a conflicting phase is serviced.
The phase next to be serviced is determined at the end of the Pedestrian NA Recall
Green interval of the terminating phase; except that if the
decision cannot be made at the end of the Green interval, it Means are provided to force the phase to operate as an non-
will not be made until after the end of all vehicle change and actuated phase.
clearance intervals. Pedestrian NA+ Recall
Means are provided to force the phase to operate as an non-
3.2.4 Provision For Storing A actuated phase. On initial entry to a phase, so programmed,
the WALK time will be set equal to the longer of the WALK
Demand time parameter or the called MAXIMUM time parameter (Max
1 or Max 2). A recycle of the pedestrian within the phase will
There is a provision for storing a call for vehicle service on
result in the WALK time being set equal to the WALK time
each vehicle phase when that phase is not displaying a Green
parameter.
indication. The vehicle memory feature is capable of being
disabled via program entry. There is a provision for storing a
call for pedestrian service on phases equipped with

FUNCTION Page 81
An active Call To Non-Actuated input, for which the phase is

programmed to respond, will result in the WALK time being 3.2.11 Actuated Rest-In-Walk
set equal to the Walk time parameter.
Means are provided to provide an alternate mode of
Running Internal Coordination will result in WALK time being pedestrian dwell for an actuated phases. The actuated phase
set equal to the Walk time parameter. shall rest in Walk when so programmed and there is no
serviceable conflicting call at the end of the WALK timing.
Recall Delay
Means are provided such that recall operation does not occur
until after an adjustable period (0-999 seconds in increments
3.2.12 Walk Offset (Advance or
of 1 second) following a phase termination. The delay is
applicable to Vehicle Min, Max, & Soft Recall and Pedestrian
Delay)
Recall. The delay begins the instant operation exits the phase. Means are provided to cause the start of Walk output to be
The timing continues regardless of demands on other phases. offset from start of the Green output. The offset shall be
selectable to cause either an advanced or delayed Walk output
3.2.7 Placement Of Call At in respect to the Phase Green.
Phase Termination 3.2.13 Inputs Per Phase

When a phase is terminated with time remaining in the
The CU will provide the following input features on a per
Passage Time, a call is left on that phase. Disabling the
phase basis.
vehicle call memory defeats this feature. If a phase is
terminated with no passage time remaining, no call is left on 1. Hold (In the applicable mode) - Command that retains the
the phase. existing Green indications and has different CU responses
depending upon operation in the vehicle-actuated or non-
actuated mode. The operation is as follows:
3.2.8 Conditional Service
It is effective in the NON-ACTUATED mode:
Conditional service provides an optional method for phase  during the WALK HOLD state.
selection. When timing phases concurrently with the next  during the GREEN DON'T WALK state if the WALK
serviceable call on a phase that conflicts with more than one HOLD state did not occur in the NON-ACTUATED
of the phases timing (about to cross a barrier), if one of the mode.
phases is prepared to terminate due to gap out or max time
It is effective in the ACTUATED mode:
out, the ring containing the timed out phase reverts to a
 * during the GREEN DON'T WALK state.
preceding vehicle phase if all of the following conditions
a. For a Non-Actuated phase, activation of the HOLD
apply:
input maintains the CU in the timed-out Walk period
1. A call exists on a preceding actuated vehicle phase. (Non- (WALK HOLD) with a Green and Walk indication
Actuated Phases are not conditionally re-serviced). displayed. Activation of the HOLD input while timing
the WALK portion does not inhibit the timing of this
2. The gapped/maxed phase is enabled for conditional period.
service via program entry.
De-activation of the HOLD input and with the WALK
3. There is sufficient time remaining before max time out of interval timed out causes the CU to advance into the
the phase(s) not prepared to terminate. PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE interval (with WALK REST
4. The CU is not in coordinated mode. MODIFIER input inactive). Re-application of the HOLD
input while timing the PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE
portion of the Green interval neither inhibits the
3.2.9 Automatic Pedest timing of this period nor termination of the phase.
Clearance The CU provides for transition to and from non-

actuated mode immediately. This feature presents the
The CU design provides an alternate mode of operation to possibility that a phase may become non-actuated
enable the CU timing of the Pedestrian Clearance interval without having the opportunity to respond to the
when Manual Control Enable is active. HOLD input in a WALK HOLD state. Therefore, a non-
actuated phase will hold in the GREEN DON'T WALK
When enabled, via program entry, this feature prevents the
state if the WALK HOLD state did not occur in the Non-
Pedestrian Clearance interval from being terminated by the
Actuated mode.
Interval Advance input.
b. For an actuated phase, activation and de- activation
of the HOLD input is as follows.
3.2.10 Flashing Walk Activation of the HOLD input allows the CU to time
normally but inhibits its advance into the vehicle
Means are provided to cause the Walk output will be flashing change interval. Activation of the HOLD input inhibits
during Walk Timing. the recycle of the pedestrian service unless the

Page 82 FUNCTION
PEDESTRIAN RECYCLE input is active and a serviceable The Don’t Walk flashing provides an alternating
pedestrian call exists on the phase. The rest state True/False output at 1 pulse per second repetition rate
indications for that phase is Green for vehicle traffic with 50 + 2 percent duty cycle.
and Don’t Walk for pedestrians.
3. Check (In the applicable mode) - An output to indicate call
De- activation of Hold input allows the CU to advance status (vehicle or pedestrian, or both) of the phase,
into the GREEN DWELL/SELECT state when all Green activated when the CU is not in the Green interval of that
periods are timed out. phase, which has a demand in that phase. Neither the
PHASE OMIT nor PEDESTRIAN OMIT inputs affects the
De- activation of HOLD input with all intervals timed
Check output.
out, allows the CU to recycle the WALK interval if there
is no conflicting demand for service and a pedestrian 4. Phase On (In the applicable mode) - An output to indicate
call exists for that phase. However, if there is any phase status. The PHASE ON output of a particular phase
serviceable demand on a conflicting phase with the is activated during the Green, Yellow, Red Clearance, and
HOLD de-energized and with all intervals timed-out, Red Dwell intervals/state of that phase.
the CU advances into the Yellow Change interval and
5. Phase Next (In the applicable mode) - An output of a
will not recycle the Walk on that phase until those
particular phase activated when the phase is committed to
demands have been served.
be next in sequence and remains present until the phase
2. Phase Omit (In the applicable mode) - Input to cause becomes active. The phase next to be serviced is
omission of a phase, even in presence of demand, by determined at the end of the Green interval of the
application of an external signal. It affects phase selection. terminating phase; except that if the decision cannot be
The omission will continue in effect until the signal is made at the end of the Green interval, it will not be made
removed. The phase to be omitted will not present a until after the end of all Vehicle Change and Clearance
conflicting call to any other phase, but will accept and intervals.
store calls. Activation of this input will not affect a phase
in the process of timing.
3. Pedestrian Omit (In the applicable mode) - Input to inhibit 3.3 PER RING
the selection of a phase due to a pedestrian call on that
phase and to prohibit the servicing of a pedestrian call on
the phase. This input when active prevents the starting of
the pedestrian movement of that phase. After the
beginning of the phase Green, a pedestrian call will be The following inputs, outputs, functions, and programming
serviced or recycled only in the absence of a serviceable controls are provided on a ring basis:
conflicting call and with PEDESTRIAN OMIT on the phase
non-active. Although it does not prohibit the servicing of a
phase itself, it will not allow the pedestrian calls to be
3.3.1 Inputs Per Ring
serviced. Pedestrian calls that are omitted, therefore, are The CU will provide the following input features on a per ring
not "serviceable conflicting calls". Activation of this input basis:
will not affect a pedestrian movement in the process of
timing. The NEMA definition of an actuated CU assumes the
maximum number of rings utilized is two. The CU allows for
user programming of phases within four rings. To enable
3.2.14 Outputs Per Phase maximum flexibility in the use of two sets of ring inputs, the
controller provides user selection of which ring responds to
The CU will provide the following output features on a per each set of inputs. One or more rings may be assigned to each
phase basis. set of inputs.
1. Load Switch Drivers, Basic Vehicle (Three Per Phase) - 1. Force Off - Provision for termination of the Green timing
Provision for separate Green, Yellow, and Red outputs for in the actuated mode or Walk Hold in the Non-Actuated
each basic vehicle phase. A circuit closure to Logic Ground mode of the active phase in the timing ring by application
is maintained at one of these three outputs at all times. of this signal, such terminating subject to presence of a
The three outputs energize the appropriate vehicle signal serviceable conflicting call. The FORCE OFF function will
load switching circuit to result in a Green, Yellow, or Red not be effective during the timing of the MINIMUM
indication for the required duration of such indication. GREEN, Variable Initial, WALK, or PEDESTRIAN
2. Load Switch Drivers, Pedestrian (Three Per Phase) - CLEARANCE. The Force Off input is effective only as long
Provision of separate Walk, Pedestrian Clearance, and as the input is sustained.
Don’t Walk outputs for each pedestrian movement. A 2. Red Rest - Input to require rest in Red of all phases in the
circuit closure to Logic Ground is maintained on at least timing ring by continuous application of an external
one of these three outputs at all times. The three outputs signal. Registration of a serviceable conflicting call results
energize the appropriate pedestrian signal load switching in immediate advance from Red Rest to Green of the
circuit to result in a Walk, Pedestrian Clearance, or Don’t demanding phase. Registration of a serviceable conflicting
Walk indication. The Don’t Walk output flashes only call before entry into the Red Rest state, even with this
during the Pedestrian Clearance interval. signal applied, results in termination of the active phase

FUNCTION Page 83
and selection of the next phase in the normal manner and

with appropriate change and clearance intervals. 3.3.2 Outputs Per Ring
3. Inhibit Maximum Termination - An input to disable the The CU will provide the following output features on a per
maximum termination functions of all phases in the ring basis:
selected timing ring. The input does not inhibit the timing
The NEMA definition of an actuated CU assumes the
of MAXIMUM GREEN.
maximum number of rings utilized is two. The CU allows for
4. Omit Red Clearance - An input to cause omission of RED user programming of phases within four rings. To enable
CLEARANCE interval timing(s). maximum flexibility in the use of two sets of ring status bits,
the CU provides user selection of which ring drives each set of
5. Pedestrian Recycle - An input to control the recycling of status bit outputs. Only one ring may be assigned to each set
the pedestrian movement. The recycling operation is of status bit outputs at a time.
dependent upon whether the phase is operating in the
actuated or Non-Actuated mode: Coded Status Bits
a. When the phase is operating in the actuated mode, if
One or more of the coded status bit states shown in the
a serviceable pedestrian call exists on the phase and
following table might be omitted from a normal cycle of
the HOLD input is active, the pedestrian movement is
operation. Only one of the coded status codes is active when
recycled when the PEDESTRIAN RECYCLE input is
the following conditions are present in the CU:
active, regardless of whether a serviceable conflicting
call exists. CODED STATUS BITS (3 PER RING)
b. When the phase is operating in the Non-Actuated
mode, if the phase has reached State D (Green Rest), Code Bit States State
the PEDESTRIAN OMIT is not active on the phase and a # A B C Names
serviceable conflicting call does not exist, the
pedestrian movement is recycled when the 0 OFF OFF OFF Min Green
PEDESTRIAN RECYCLE input is active. 1 ON OFF OFF Extension
6. Stop Timing - An input which when activated causes 2 OFF ON OFF Maximum
cessation of CU ring timing for the duration of such
activation. Upon removal of activation from this input, all 3 ON ON OFF Green Rest
portions which were timing will resume timing from the 4 OFF OFF ON Yellow Change
point it was stopped.
5 ON OFF ON Red Clearance
During stop timing, vehicle actuations on non-Green
phases are recognized; vehicle actuations on Green 6 OFF ON ON Red Rest
phase(s) resets the PASSAGE TIME timer in the normal
7 ON ON ON Undefined
manner; and the CU will not terminate any interval or
interval portion or select another phase, except by Voltage Levels: OFF = +24V; ON = 0V
activation of the INTERVAL ADVANCE input.
1. The active phase is in its Green interval and operating in
Operation of the INTERVAL ADVANCE with STOP TIME the actuated mode.
activated clears any stored calls on a phase when the CU is Code 0 Minimum Timing - When timing in Initial Walk, or
advanced through the Green interval of that phase. Pedestrian Clearance portions of the Green interval.
Code 1 Extension Timing - That portion of the Green
A Ring in RED REST with STOP TIME activated will not
interval following the completion of the minimum
inhibit other Ring(s) in any manner.
timings (Initial, Walk, and Pedestrian Clearance) when
During stop timing, the special detector programming timing an extension(s).
will continue to function normally (i.e., Stretch, Delay, Code 2 Maximum Timing - That portion of the Green
and/or Switch). interval following the completion of the minimum
timings, (Initial, Walk, and Pedestrian Clearance) when
7. Maximum II Selection - Input to allow the selection of a not timing an extension and the Maximum Green is
second maximum time setting on all phases of the timing timing (e.g., when the Hold input is active).
ring. Code 3 Green Rest - That portion of the Green interval
This ring input, when active, selects the MAXIMUM II time when the minimum timings (Initial, Walk, and
value or, when inactive, the MAXIMUM I time value. The Pedestrian Clearance) are complete, Passage Timer is
time value is MAXIMUM GREEN time interval. Both timed out and the Maximum Green timer is either
maximum timers will run concurrently. A change of the timed out or has not started.
maximum timer in control during the GREEN will be to a 2. The active phase is in its Green interval and operating in
point within the new timing as though that new timing the Non-Actuated mode.
had been in effect for the entire GREEN. Code 0 Walk Timing - When timing the Walk portion of the
Green interval (Non-Actuated State A).
Code 1 Walk Hold - When the Walk output is active, Walk
timing is complete and the Hold input is active (Non-
Actuated State B).

Page 84 FUNCTION
Code 2 Pedestrian Clearance Timing - When timing the

Pedestrian Clearance interval or the remaining portion 3.4.3 Dual Entry
of Minimum Green (Non-Actuated State C).
Dual Entry is a mode of operation (in multi-ring CUs) in
Code 3 Green Rest - When the timing of Pedestrian and
which one phase in each ring must be in service, where
Minimum Green intervals are complete (Non-Actuated
possible subject to compatibility, at all times.
State D).
If a call does not exist in a ring when the CU is committed to
3. The active phase is not in its Green interval.
cross a barrier, a phase may be selected, via program entry, in
Code 4 Yellow Change - When timing Yellow Change.
that ring to be active.
Code 5 Red Clearance - When timing Red Clearance.
Code 6 Red Rest - When timing is complete and a Red
indication is displayed. 3.4.4 Overlaps
Code 7 Undefined
The CU includes eight internally generated vehicle overlaps.
Vehicle overlaps are designated alphabetically A to P. The
3.4 PER UNIT generation of control for vehicle overlap signal indications is
programmable and provides Green, Yellow, and Red load
switch drivers for each of eight vehicle overlap signals.
Change and Clearance Timing - The timing for Yellow Change
and Red Clearance vehicle overlap signals is determined by
The following inputs, outputs, functions, and programming
either:
controls are provided on a per unit basis:
a. The phase terminating the vehicle overlap, or
b. An independent adjustment for each vehicle overlap
3.4.1 Initialization signal.
Each vehicle overlap display is defined by a phase association
Initialization occurs under either of the following conditions:
entry through the keypad.
1. Restoration of power after a defined power
interruption. (See 3.7.1.1 Start-Up Flash) Each vehicle overlap is provided with timed trailing control to
2. Activation of External Start input. delay Green termination. When the vehicle overlap is no
longer locked to a phase timing due to the trailing green a
A program entry for initialization is provided to cause the CU
separate Yellow Change and Red Clearance will control the
to start at the beginning of the Green, Yellow, or Red interval
vehicle overlap Yellow and Red display. Concurrent phase(s)
of any phase or non-conflicting phase pair.
for the overlap included phases are allowed to start while the
As part of the initialization routine, vehicle and pedestrian overlap is trailing.
calls are placed on all phases and retained until serviced.
Each vehicle overlap is provided with special sequence
control that will omit the vehicle overlap so programmed
3.4.2 Simultaneous Gap Out from outputting a Green when a specific phase is Green and
outputting a Yellow when that phase is outputting a Yellow.
Multi-Ring CU configurations provide the capability of
Simultaneous Gap Out when servicing cross barrier calls.
3.4.4.1 Pedestrian Overlaps
When timing phases concurrently with the next serviceable
call on a phase that conflicts with more than one of the Pedestrian Overlap is defined herein as the ability to program
phases timing (about to cross a barrier), Simultaneous Gap phase pedestrian outputs such that the pedestrian outputs
Out, if enabled via program entry, will insure that all phases are active with more than one phase. The programming is as
which will terminate, must simultaneously reach a point of follows:
being committed to terminate before Green timing If either phase is timing Walk, then the pedestrian outputs
termination shall begin (i.e., Gap-Out, Max-Out, or Force-Off). display Walk. If the ASSIGNED phase is Walk and the
When all phases have not yet reached such a point, any SWITCHED phase is next in the ring structure based on the
gapped out phase will revert to the extensible portion and active sequence and has a pedestrian call, the Walk will
time passage intervals based on vehicle calls. remain Walk until the SWITCHED phase completes it Walk
Under the conditions as defined above, Simultaneous Gap timing.
Out, if disabled, will allow a phase to reach a point of being If neither phase is timing Walk but one of the phases is
committed to terminate independently of any other phase timing Ped Clear, then the pedestrian outputs display Ped
and will not revert to the extensible portion from a gapped Clear (FDW).
out condition.
If neither phase is timing Walk or Ped Clr, then the pedestrian
outputs display Don't Walk.
If multiple pedestrian detectors have the same ASSIGNED
PHASE entries but different non-zero SWITCHED PHASE

FUNCTION Page 85
entries, they will be used as additional pedestrian timings to The alternate sequences may be selected by the Alternate
be ORed into the control. Sequence external interface inputs (in the applicable mode)
or the coordinator as a function of the pattern (Timing
When ALL assigned active (Walk & Ped Clr times <> 0)
Plan/Offset) in effect. When the internal coordinator is
pedestrian detectors have the same SWITCHED PHASE
running, the external interface inputs for alternate sequences
entries, a concurrent / exclusive pedestrian operation is
are ignored.
assumed. When this condition exists, the absence of a PHASE
OMIT on the exclusive (SWITCHED PHASE) phase causes a Alternate Sequence inputs are interpreted as command
continuous PED OMIT to occur on the ASSIGNED PHASE. requests in accordance with the following:
When this condition exists, the exclusive (SWITCHED PHASE)
ALTERNATE SEQUENCE
phase shall receive the assigned phase pedestrian calls
regardless of pedestrian operation (concurrent/exclusive). Command AS A AS B AS C AS D
Exclusive pedestrian omits are subject to hardware inputs, Request Input Input Input Input
TBC Phase Functions, and Coordination Phase Omits.
SEQ 00 OFF OFF OFF OFF
SEQ 01 ON OFF OFF OFF
3.4.4.2 Pedestrian Concurrent / Exclusive
SEQ 02 OFF ON OFF OFF
The Pedestrian Overlap capability above makes it possible
have pedestrian outputs that are concurrent or exclusive at SEQ 03 ON ON OFF OFF
different times of day.
SEQ 04 OFF OFF ON OFF
Time-of-Day (Free): Utilize a Phase Function to activate the
SEQ 05 ON OFF ON OFF
'exclusive' PHASE OMIT at the appropriate time(s). Concurrent
when true / Exclusive when false. SEQ 06 OFF ON ON OFF
The Pedestrian Overlap capability above makes it possible SEQ 07 ON ON ON OFF
have pedestrian outputs that are concurrent or exclusive
based on pattern. SEQ 08 OFF OFF OFF ON
Due to the reliance on the servicing of an existing SEQ 09 ON OFF OFF ON

Coordination Phase Pedestrian movement in the Permissive SEQ 10 OFF ON OFF ON
and Yield modes of Coordination, those Coordination modes
do not support the Exclusive Pedestrian functionality. When SEQ 11 ON ON OFF ON
one of these Coordination modes is operational, the Exclusive SEQ 12 OFF OFF ON ON
Phase is Omitted.
SEQ 13 ON OFF ON ON
The Exclusive Pedestrian function is only compatible with
those Coordination modes that support an actuated SEQ 14 OFF ON ON ON
Pedestrian movement on the Coordination Phases SEQ 15 ON ON ON ON
(Permissive Yield, Permissive Omit, Sequential Omit and Full
Actuated). Voltage Levels: OFF = +24V; ON = 0V
Pattern (Coord): When the 'exclusive' Phase Mode = Phase Connector Pins - In the applicable mode, input pin
Omit, Concurrent Pedestrian operation will occur. When the terminations are provided in accordance with the following:
'exclusive' Phase Mode <> Phase Omit, Exclusive Pedestrian
1. Alternate Sequence A
operation will occur.
2. Alternate Sequence B
3.4.5 Alternate Sequences 3. Alternate Sequence C

4. Alternate Sequence D
The CU provides the capability of fifteen alternates to the
standard sequence. The alternates are variations to the
sequence based on four groups of two phases (Phase Pair)
being serviced in reverse order.
3.4.6 Inputs Per Unit
As a minimum, the sixteen sequences provide every The CU provides the following input features on a per unit
combination of lead-lag (phase pair reversal) for an eight basis:
phase dual ring CU configuration. The Alternate Sequences 1. AC Line - Current protected side of 120 VAC 60 Hertz
(AS) are capable of: power source within the CU.
1. AS A - Phase 1 and Phase 2 Reversed The CU has a front panel mounted over-current protection
2. AS B - Phase 3 and Phase 4 Reversed device in the 120 VAC input to the unit.
3. AS C - Phase 5 and Phase 6 Reversed 2. AC Neutral - Unfused and unswitched side of 120 VAC 60
Hertz power source taken from neutral output of ac power
4. AS D - Phase 7 and Phase 8 Reversed source.

Page 86 FUNCTION
This input is not connected to Logic Ground or Earth unless EXTERNAL MIN RECALL or MANUAL CONTROL
Ground within the CU. Enable inputs are activated.
3. Earth Ground - Terminal for connection to the chassis of The CU selects the next phase to service based on its
the unit. Earth Ground is electrically connected to the normal sequence control method. If INTERVAL ADVANCE
shell of the connector(s) where applicable. This input is is activated during the Green interval and no serviceable
not connected to Logic Ground or AC Neutral within the call exists, the CU does not advance beyond the Green
CU. Dwell/Select state, except when RED REST input is active.
4. Vehicle Detector - Provision to enter a vehicle call into the If INTERVAL ADVANCE is applied when the CU is
CU. displaying Green and Walk indications, the unit advances
to the state of displaying Green and Pedestrian Clearance.
Vehicle Detector inputs are provided as follows:
If INTERVAL ADVANCE is applied when the unit is
(a) Type A1 CU - 64
displaying Green and Pedestrian Clearance, the unit
(b) Type A2 CU - 8 (32 in the applicable mode)
displays a steady Don’t Walk indication and advance to the
Each Vehicle Detector input is enabled by assignment to Green Dwell/Select state, from which it immediately
any one phase, via program entry. Each is capable of selects a phase next and advances to the Yellow subject to
Delay, Extension, and Switching as follows: the presence of a serviceable conflicting call and the
a. Delay - The vehicle detector actuation (input constraints of concurrent timing.
recognition) is capable of being delayed, by an
If no pedestrian provisions exist, application of the
adjustable program entered time (0 - 255 seconds in
INTERVAL ADVANCE signal at any point in the Green
increments of 1 second), when the phase is not Green.
interval causes the unit to advance to the Green
Once the actuation has been present for the delay time
Dwell/Select state from which it immediately selects a
it is continued for as long as it is present. If an
phase next and advance to the Yellow subject to the
actuation is removed prior to delay timing out, no call
presence of a serviceable conflicting call and the
is placed.
constraints of concurrent timing.
b. Extension - The vehicle detector actuation (input
duration) is capable of being extended from the point INTERVAL ADVANCE may be used in conjunction with
of termination by an adjustable program entered time MANUAL CONTROL ENABLE to produce manual control of
(0 - 25.5 seconds in increments of 0.1 second), when the CU with timed vehicle change and clearance intervals.
the phase is Green.
INTERVAL ADVANCE may be used in conjunction with
c. Switch - The vehicle detector actuation is capable of
STOP TIME to advance through all serviceable intervals
being switched to another phase when the assigned
except that the CU will not advance beyond the Green
phase is Yellow or Red and the program entered phase
Dwell/Select state without a serviceable conflicting call,
is Green. Detector Switching provides a per detector
except when RED REST is active.
entry identifying the program entered phase that will
receive the switched actuations. 7. Manual Control Enable - An input to place vehicle and
pedestrian calls on all phases, stop CU timing in all
The special vehicle detector functions are capable of
intervals except vehicle change and clearance intervals,
being used in any combination.
and inhibit the operation of INTERVAL ADVANCE during
Eight Vehicle Detector inputs are capable of vehicle change and clearance intervals. When this
assignment to a System Detector function, via program function is used in conjunction with INTERVAL ADVANCE,
entry. the operation of the CU is as follows:
a. When concurrent pedestrian service is not provided,
5. Pedestrian Detector (8 per unit) - Provision to enter a
an activation of the INTERVAL ADVANCE shall advance
pedestrian demand for service into the appropriate phase
the CU to Green Dwell/Select, from which it shall
of the CU.
immediately select a phase next and advance to the
Each Pedestrian Detector Call input is enabled by Yellow, subject to the constraints of concurrent timing.
assignment to any one phase, via program entry. b. When concurrent pedestrian service is provided, an
activation of the Interval Advance input terminates the
6. Interval Advance - A complete On-Off operation of this Walk interval. When Automatic Pedestrian Clearance is
input causes immediate termination of the interval in enabled, the PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE interval is
process of timing. Where concurrent interval timing timed internally by the CU. When Automatic
exists, use of this input causes immediate termination of Pedestrian Clearance is not enabled, a second
the interval which would terminate next without such activation of the INTERVAL ADVANCE input is required
actuation. to terminate the Green interval, including the
The INITIAL and WALK timings are examples of intervals Pedestrian Clearance interval.
that can occur concurrently. Note, only a single interval c. All vehicle change and clearance intervals are timed
advance is necessary to go from PED CLEARANCE to internally by the CU. Actuations of the INTERVAL
YELLOW. ADVANCE input during vehicle change and clearance
intervals has no effect on the CU.
Phases without stored vehicle or pedestrian calls are
omitted from the resultant phase sequencing of the CU

FUNCTION Page 87
8. Call To NA (Two per Unit) - Two inputs are provided which

when activated causes any phases(s) appropriately
I/O MODE BITS (3 PER UNIT)
programmed to operate in the Non-Actuated Mode.
Mode Bit States State
The two inputs are designated CALL TO NA I and CALL TO
NA II. When both inputs are active, all phases # A B C Names
programmed for Non-Actuated Mode operate in the Non-
Actuated Mode. 0 OFF OFF OFF TS 1 Compatible
Each phase can be programmed individually to respond to 1 ON OFF OFF Hardwire Interconnect
one input, both inputs , or neither of the inputs. 2 OFF ON OFF System Interface
The CU provides for transition to and from non-actuated 3 ON ON OFF Reserved
mode immediately. When a transition from non-actuated
to actuated mode occurs during the phase green, all 4 OFF OFF ON Reserved
actuated timing will operate as though actuated mode had 5 ON OFF ON Reserved
been in effect for the entire GREEN.
6 OFF ON ON Manufacturer Specific
9. External Minimum Recall - Input to place a recurring
demand on all vehicle phases for a minimum vehicle 7 ON ON ON Manufactured Specific
service.
Voltage Levels: OFF = +24V; ON = 0V
This prevents any phase from dwelling in GREEN, by
a. Mode 0 Input / Output Functions
creating a serviceable conflicting call. Control will pass
from phase to phase with each phase receiving green time b. Mode 1 Input / Output Functions
at least equal to minimum time.
c. Mode 2 Input / Output Functions
10. Indicator Lamp Control - Input to disable CU indicators.
d. Mode 3, 4, and 5 Input / Output Functions
This input is not functional in the CU. The LCD alpha-
Mode 3, 4, and 5 are reserved for future definition and use
numeric display utilized in the CU is both a long life and
by NEMA. The CU will not recognize any mode dependent
low power display.
input as valid nor will it provide a valid output on any
11. Test Input (Two or three per Unit) - Test input, two or mode dependent output when this Input / Output Mode is
three per CU, for manufacturer's use only. active.
These inputs are for manufacturer's use. The CU provides e. Mode 6 and 7 Input / Output Functions
the capability for the user to assign one of the inputs (Test
Mode 6 and 7 are for manufacturer specific applications.
A) to be an Automatic Flash input. The other inputs are
not used. A Terminal and Facilities wired to utilize Mode 6 or Mode
7 may not be compatible with other manufacturer's CUs.
Caution: A facility wired to utilize Automatic Flash by
activating Test Input A (Pin #n) of connector A may not be
compatible with other manufacturer's CUs. Disconnect
this input from the facility terminal block, where used,
3.4.7 Outputs Per Unit
before placing any other manufacturer's CU in the facility. The CU will provide the following output features on a per
12. External Start - An input to cause the CU to revert to its unit basis.
programmed initialization phase(s) and interval(s) upon 1. Logic Ground - Voltage reference point and current return
application. Upon removal of this input the CU for CU input and output logic circuits. This output is not
commences normal timing. be connected to AC Neutral or Earth Ground within the
13. Walk Rest Modifier - This input when true modifies Non- CU.
Actuated operation only. With this input active, Non- 2. Fault Monitor - An open collector output which is
Actuated phase(s) remain in the timed-out Walk state (rest maintained True (low state) as long as the voltages within
in Walk) in the absence of a serviceable conflicting call the CU do not drop below predetermined levels required
without regard to the HOLD input status. With this input to provide normal operation.
non-active, Non-Actuated phase(s) will not remain in the
timed-out Walk state unless the HOLD input is active. The output will also be False (hi state) during CU
generated flash modes as defined elsewhere.
The CU recycles the pedestrian movement when reaching
State D in the absence of a serviceable conflicting call. 3. Voltage Monitor (Type 2 Only) - An open collector output
which is maintained True (low state) as long as the
14. System Address Bits - Five System Address inputs are voltages within the CU do not drop below predetermined
provided. The CU responds to the system address defined levels required to provide normal operation.
by the binary decoding of these five inputs.
The output will also be False (hi state) during CU
15. Input / Output Mode (Three per Unit) - The Type 2 CU generated flash modes as defined elsewhere.
selects the input/output function of specific hardware I/O
based on the current status of these three inputs.

Page 88 FUNCTION
This output operates concurrently with Fault Monitor b. External Start

output except during periods of No Fault Flash (i.e., c. Preemption
Automatic Flash, and Preempt Flash). d. Phase Omit
e. Pedestrian Omit
4. 24 VDC External (Type 2 Only) - Positive 24 + 2 volts DC is
f. Interval Advance
regulated over an AC line voltage variation from 89 to 135
g. Stop Time
volts from no-load to full-load. Current capability is 500
h. Automatic Flash
milliamperes continuous with less than 0.5 volt peak-to-
i. Manual Control Enable
peak ripple.
j. Ring Force Off
5. Flashing Logic Out (Type 2 Only) - Alternating True/False k. Phase Hold
logic output at 1 pulse per second repetition rate with 50 + l. Pedestrian Recycle
2% duty cycle. In its False state, this output is capable of
Lower priority inputs condition those of higher priority as
providing 50 milliamperes of current. In its True state,
defined elsewhere.
this output is capable of sinking 200 milliamperes. This
output will switch within 5 degrees of the zero crossover
point of the AC line.
6. Load Switch Drivers, Vehicle Overlap (Three per Overlap -
3.6 INDICATIONS
Provision of separate Green, Yellow, and Red outputs for
each overlap when determined internal to the CU, four
overlaps maximum. A circuit closure to Logic Ground is
maintained at one of these three outputs at all times. The Indications are provided on the display and appropriately
three outputs energize the appropriate overlap signal load identified to facilitate the determination of the operation of
switching circuit to result in a Green, Yellow, or Red the CU. These indications consist of the following:
indication for the duration of such required indication.
The indications provide for the simultaneous (i.e.,
concurrent) presentation, where concurrent states exists, of
3.4.8 Red Revert the following states/functions:
Phase Information:
A provision within the CU whereby an adjustable (2 - 99.9
1. Phase or phases in service
seconds in increments of 0.1 seconds)* minimum Red
2. Phase or phases next to be serviced
indication will be timed following the Yellow Change interval
3. Presence of vehicle call
and prior to the next display of Green on the same phase.
4. Presence of pedestrian call
The Red Revert function prevents a vehicle movement (phase
The above information is displayed simultaneously for all
or overlap) from recycling back to Green from Yellow Change,
phases.
Red Clearance, or Red Rest without another phase becoming
active prior to a time period equal to the Red Revert setting. Status of Active Phase in the Ring:
This prevents a vehicle movement (phase or overlap) from 1. Initial
terminating and being reactivated before a minimum period 2. Extension
of RED is shown (the RED REVERT time has passed). 3. Yellow change
4. Red clearance
A serviceable conflicting phase call will be serviced before a
5. Walk
call on the phase in the process of terminating (i.e., in Yellow
6. Pedestrian clearance
Change, Red Clearance, or Red Rest). Therefore, up to the
7. Reason for Green termination
point of reentry, a serviceable conflicting phase call will cause
a. Gap-out
phase termination in a normal manner.
b. Maximum time-out
When an overlap is inhibited from returning to Green c. Force-off
because of Red Revert, any phase that is part of the overlap 8. Rest state (dwell).
will also be inhibited from going Green.
The above information is presented simultaneously for two
The Red Revert timing is concurrent with the Red Clearance rings in a multi-ring CU.
timing, and is unaffected by the OMIT RED CLEARANCE input.
3.5 PRIORITY OF INPUT

FUNCTIONS
The priority of input functions is in the following order:

a. Power-Up

FUNCTION Page 89
TS2 Diagnostic Flash - TS2 required flash condition which can

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS exit when the casual condition corrects itself. There are
four conditions which can cause this flash.
Response to conditions:
1. TS2/Port-1 Card Fault. The TS2 card has failed to
respond to the controller in five out of the last ten
3.7.1 Flash tenths of a second interactions. Alarm is "SDLC .1 SEC
DLY FAULT"
2. MMU Response Frame Fault. Alarm is "FRAME ###
3.7.1.1 Start-Up Flash FAULT"
3. TF BIU Response Frame Fault. Alarm is "FRAME ###
The CU has provisions whereby an adjustable time FAULT"
period/state (Start-Up Flash - 0 to 999 seconds in increments 4. MMU compatibility programming is incompatible
of 1 second) occur prior to the Initialization routine. with controller phase configuration. Alarm is "MMU
During the Start-Up Flash state, the Fault Monitor and UTILZATION CNFLCT"
Voltage Monitor outputs are inactive. Flash conditions: TS2 Flash: Flash output, Fault Monitor
When power is restored following a defined power and all vehicle channels flash RED.
interruption, the Start-Up Flash state becomes operational. Exit path: Will exit to normal startup flash after the error
No input, other than the lack of AC power, prevents this state condition no longer exists. See Start Flash above for
from the completion and/or exit to the Initialization routine continued processing.
except as noted in this manual.
Active Timer Display: TS2 DIAG FLSH in the display.
If a Preempt Input is active during Start-Up Flash timing, the
CU maintains the Start-Up Flash state for the duration of the Diagnostic Flash - No Exit - This flash condition is a serious or
Preempt demand and/or Start-Up Flash time. repetitive fault and requires operator intervention for
recovery. Conditions which would normally cause a
All flashing states which occur in response to a recognized Diagnostic Flash (see Diagnostic Flash above) but occur
fault are classified for convenience as forms of Startup Flash. three times in a calendar day, will lock into Diagnostic
There are five Start Flash conditions based on severity of Flash - No Exit.
errors and the required (by TS2) flash state. These are:
Start Flash - Normal Flash timing to the start of Traffic. 1. Third time Traffic Task watchdog. Alarm is "DIAG:
Response to conditions: N/A TRAF TASK WDOG"
2. Third time H/W watchdog. Alarm is "WATCHDOG
Flash conditions: Normal Flash output and all channels TIMEOUT"
dark. 3. Synchronization between the tenth second
Exit path: Will exit after Startup Flash time to running processing and the "real time" has slipped more than
traffic (if no preempt input is active.) two seconds (2083ms) w/o the occurrence of a traffic
task watchdog. This is referred to as an "Incremental
Active Timer Display: STRT FLSH or STRT FLSH - Watch Dog." Alarm is "DIAG: TRAFTASK XS DLY"
W/PREEMPT. 4. Cycle Fail. Alarm is "OFF LINE - CYCLE FAIL"
5. EEPROM Check Sum Error. Alarm is "DIAG: EEPROM
Diagnostic Flash - There are two conditions which could cause
CRC ERR"
this state to occur and this is a basic timed Start Flash
6. EPROM Check Sum Error. Alarm is "DIAG: EPROM
which was caused by a (possibly) transient condition.
CRC ERR"
Response to conditions: 7. EEPROM Write Error. Alarm is "EEPROM WRITE
- Tenth second processing has consumed more than ERROR"
250ms w/o reaching a conclusion. This is referred to as
Flash conditions: Normal Flash output and all channels
a "Big Tenth Task Delay Watchdog." Alarm is "DIAG:
dark.
TRAF TASK WDOG "
- An unanticipated Watch Dog caused by the hardware has Exit path: Will exit to normal startup flash after an
been detected. This is referred to as a "Hardware Watch operator interaction (front panel or data download)
Dog." Alarm is "WATCHDOG TIMEOUT" occurs. See Start Flash above for continued processing.
Flash conditions: Normal Flash output and all channels Active Timer Display: DIAG FLSH - NO XIT.
dark.
TS2 Diagnostic Flash - No Exit - This TS2 Diagnostic Flash
Exit path: Will exit after startup flash time to running condition is a serious or repetitive error and will require
traffic (if no preempt input is active.) operator intervention for recovery. Conditions which
would normally cause an TS2 Diagnostic Flash (see TS2
Active Timer Display: DIAG FLSH or DIAG FLSH -
Diagnostic Flash above) but occur three times in a
W/PREEMPT.
calendar day, will lock into TS2 Diagnostic Flash - No Exit.

Page 90 FUNCTION
1. Third time TS2 Card Fault is TS2 Card Failure. Alarm - longest phase Red Clearance of phases receiving a steady
is "SDLC .1 SEC DLY FAIL" red.
2. Third time MMU Response Frame Fault. Alarm is
Upon exiting Remote Flash (Load Switch Output Flashing)
"DIAG: RESP FRAME FAIL"
when no EXIT PHASE(s) are programmed, the Red will equal
3. Third time TF BIU Response Frame Fault. Alarm is
the Start Up Time. This operation enables a longer All Red
"DIAG: RESP FRAME FAIL"
transition period to be operational prior to stop-and-go
4. MMU Undetected Conflict. Alarm is "MMU
operation after Remote Flash.
UNDETECTED CNFLCT"
5. Invalid TS2 Type A-1 Configuration. This is caused by The AUTOMATIC FLASH output will only be active when the
a TF BIU being enabled while SDLC communications is active program is flash. The AUTOMATIC FLASH output is not
disabled. Alarm is "DIAG: INV. TS2-A1 CNF" active due to Start-Up Flash or Conflict Flash.
Flash conditions: TS2 flash: Flash output, Fault Monitor The method by which flashing operation is accomplished is
and all vehicle channels flash RED. determined via program entry and shall be either:
a. Voltage Monitor Output inactive, or
Exit path: Will exit to normal startup flash after an
b. Load Switch Driver Output Flashing
operator interaction (front panel or data download)
occurs. The Invalid TS2 Type A-1 Configuration may clear Load Switch Driver Output Flashing provides an alternating
if Port-1 becomes enabled but that is not anticipated. See True/False logic output at 1 pulse per second repetition rate
Start Flash above for continued processing. with 50 + 2 percent duty cycle. The selection, via program
entry, of Yellow flashing, Red flashing, or Dark for each
Active Timer Front Panel Display: TS2 DIAG FLSH - NO XIT.
vehicle load switch driver group (G/Y/R) is provided. All
As noted in the individual Flash type entries under "Exit path", pedestrian load switch driver groups (W/PC/D) are inactive
most recovering error Flash conditions exit by starting into (DARK) in flash.
the Start Flash sequence and timing out that condition to the
subsequent normal start of traffic. Any existing preempt
input will prevent the transition from Start Flash to traffic 3.7.2 Dimming
processing as usual.
The CU may be programmed to provide output dimming
based on a Time Base Auxiliary Event and Dimming Enable
3.7.1.2 Automatic Flash input (both must be active to enable). The dimming function
will accomplished by controlling the load switch driver
The activation of the AUTOMATIC FLASH input causes the outputs with respect to the AC line voltage.
following operation to occur:
For a Type 1 CU, the dimming function is accomplished
The CU will assure the completion of the Minimum Green or within the Terminal and Facilities.
Walk plus PED Clearance time on the current phase(s).
Thereafter, if necessary, it will proceed to the vehicle For a Type 2 CU, the dimming function is integral to the CU.
clearance intervals followed by the programmed ENTRY The dimming function is accomplished by the elimination of
PHASE(s). After the ENTRY PHASE(s) Minimum Green or Walk alternate one-half wave segments from the AC sinusoid
plus PED Clearance, the CU will proceed to the vehicle applied to the field indications. When “Dimmed” by this
clearance intervals. Upon completion of the vehicle Red method, the control transition from the On (low state) to Off
Clearance interval, the CU initiates flashing operation. The (high state) and vice versa occurs within 20o of AC line zero
CU will maintain this condition as long as the AUTOMATIC crossing.
FLASH input is active.
Dimming control provides selection, via program entry
When no ENTRY PHASE(s) are programmed, requests will (individual Green, Yellow, Red, Walk, Pedestrian Clear, and
result in Free (Non-Coordinated) operation. Don’t Walk output), of which load switch driver has a
When the AUTOMATIC FLASH input becomes inactive, the CU “Dimmed” output and which half cycle (+ or -) will be
will move immediately to the beginning of the phase(s) eliminated.
programmed as the EXIT PHASE(s), with a Green/Walk When the Type 2 CU is used in a cabinet that employs
display, calls on all phase vehicle and pedestrian, and shall Absence of Red Monitoring with a NEMA TS 1 Monitor, the
cease flashing operation. user may be required to make a choice between:
Upon exiting Remote Flash wherein the method is via Load 1. Absence of Red Monitoring.
Switch Output Flashing, the CU will provide a timed exit 2. Dimming the Red Display.
transition period when any Flashing Yellow display will be For additional information about this subject, reference is
followed by a Red, Flashing Red, or Dark display. The Load made to Federal Highway Administration Report No. FHWA-
Switch Driver outputs during this period will be Yellow for TS-85-213 entitled “Traffic Signal Brightness: An Examination
those which were Flashing Yellow and Red for those which of Nighttime Dimming.”
were Flashing Red or Dark.
Some types of signals may not operate properly or may be
Upon exiting Remote Flash (Load Switch Output Flashing), damaged if dimmed.
the Exit Flash transition timing is 1) Yellow - longest phase
Yellow Change of phases receiving a steady yellow and 2) Red

FUNCTION Page 91
from another CU. Coordinator settings and activity can be

3.8 COORDINATION monitored on the CU display (i.e., Hold, Omit, and Force Off
indication will denote when these functions are used).
Coordination controls are internally applied (Hold, Omit,
Force Ring 1, etc.) while the CU inputs for these same
functions remain active and may impact coordinator
The CU includes provisions for an internal coordinator. The
operation.
coordinator accepts Timing Plan (Dial/Split) and Offset
commands from traditional (pre-timed) interconnect The user shall enter the phase times, phase modes, offsets,
systems, from a companion Time Base program, and/or an ring lags, and alternate sequence for each timing program.
Internal System Interface. All timings are in seconds so there shall be no conversion
from seconds to percent and vice versa. The cycle length,
Coordination is implemented by holding the CU in the
yield points, permissive periods, and force off points are
programmed coordinated phase(s) until a specific point in
automatically calculated internally.
the cycle, and forcing-off non-coordinated phase(s) at
predetermined points within the cycle.
Coordination controls are internally applied (i.e., Hold, Omit, 3.8.1 Programs
Force Ring 1, etc.) while the CU inputs for these same
The coordinator provides control for a minimum of 16 timing
functions remain active and may impact coordinator
plans. The Coordinator selects the timing plan to be used,
operation.
according to the current status of the Timing Plan request.
Coordination is capable of implementing alternate sequence
The coordinator is capable of providing 1 cycle length for
operations. It is possible to transfer from one sequence to
each timing plan. Each cycle is adjustable over a range of 30
another based on a change in pattern (Timing Plan plus
to 999 seconds in 1-second increments.
Offset). When the internal coordinator is running, external
selection of alternate sequences is ignored. One set of splits is provided for each timing plan. Each split
provides an adjustable time for each phase, each adjustable
The CU internal coordinator provides six unique control
from 0 to 999 seconds in 1-second increments.
strategies for coordination. Each of the strategies are capable
of being selected on a pattern (dial/split/offset) basis. The four The coordinator provides control for sixteen timing
strategies are termed: 1) Yield, 2) Permissive, 3) Permissive programs. The Coordinator selects the timing program to be
Yield, 4) Permissive Omit, Sequential Omit, and 6) Full used, according to the current status of the Dial and Split
Actuated Control. requests. The cycle time of each timing program is equal to
the sum of the phase times of the longest path between
Each strategy has strengths and limitations and normally the
barriers in all rings in the controller.
coordination pattern highlights the application. Due to the
nature of coordination, control techniques are normally Timing programs are evaluated prior to being set to control
present which allow one type of strategy to operate like coordination. Valid programs must have:
another type of strategy. These controls must also be
discussed since certain applications are not suitable to A. A Cycle Length equal to or greater than the sum of Ring 1
specific strategies, i.e., a system would not always operate Phase Times, and
actuated pedestrians and some non-actuated pedestrians B. A coordinated phase in the first ring in each cluster and
within the same pattern. the other rings in the same cluster which have a
The CU internal coordinator allows selection of an alternate compatible phase must also have a coordinated phase,
sequence (phase rotation within a ring) and an alternate and
pattern mode (control strategy) for each pattern. The C. Phase Times greater than the minimum service
alternate sequence is used to select a lead, lag reversal or requirement which is 1) on actuated (non-coordination)
selection from dual leading lefts to lead, lag left turns. phases equal to the vehicle minimum service and 2) on
Sixteen alternate sequences are provided which include all coordinated phases as follows; a) for Perm Yield and Perm
possible combinations of leading, lagging or lead/lag Omit modes equal to the vehicle minimum service and b)
sequences for an eight phase intersection. The alternate for Perm and Yield modes equal to the pedestrian and
pattern mode allows selection of any of the four control vehicle minimum service, and
strategies to operate with a selected pattern (dial/split/offset)
selection. The application of the four strategies will be D. Phase Modes set to 6 when the Phase Time equals 0 on
discussed under separate sections. active phases.
A coordination pattern consisting of the selection of a Timing

Plan (Dial/Split combination) allows the selection of time 3.8.2 Offsets
allocated for each phase and special conditioning of each
phase as may be required to effect smooth progression. Coordination includes three offsets per timing plan, each
Sixteen timing plans, each with three offsets, may be adjustable from 0 to 999 seconds in 1 second increments.
selected. The values determine the latest time that the starting point of
Coordination parameters are entered through the CU keypad, the coordinated phase Green, local time zero, lags the
downloaded through the system interface, or transferred Synchronization pulse, system time zero.

Page 92 FUNCTION
The Coordinator recognizes when the sync reference and interconnect line containing the real sync pulses for the
local offset in control indicate local zero is not correct. When purpose of smoothing the offset correction over several
establishing its offset based on the sync pulse, the cycles. The maximum time the coordinator will dwell will
coordinator references only the leading edge, regardless of be determined by the last sync separation.
the width of the sync pulse. The pulse width is a minimum of
B. MAX DWELL: When changing offset by MAX DWELL, the
3 seconds or 3 percent of the cycle.
coordinator establishes a new offset by dwelling in the
It is possible to enact Free Mode as a function of the Timing coordinated phase(s) green. The maximum time the
Plan plus Offset in effect. This is accomplished via program coordinator can dwell will be adjustable from 1 to 999
entry. seconds. A value greater than the cycle time for the
respective Dial/Split program will provide operation
The coordinator provides three offset settings for each of the
similar to Infinite Dwell.
sixteen timing programs. The coordinator selects the Offset
setting to be used according to the current status of the Offset After the dwell, the coordinator releases and begins
requests. The programmed values determine the time in timing program phase times. The dwelling operation is
seconds that the reference point (local time zero) will lag the repeated until the desired offset is reached. Only one
Synchronization pulse (system time zero). dwell interval is timed between sync pulses.
Local time zero is the point when the first coordinated phase C. SHORTWAY: When changing the offset by SHORTWAY, the
GREEN begins/ends (user selected) in the cluster (rings locked coordinator establishes a new offset by the shortest route
together based on the ring structure concurrent definition) possible. This movement will never be over 50% of the
associated with Ring 1. cycle length and is accomplished by adding or subtracting
to/from the program phase times in a manner to limit
The offset value is adjustable in length from 0 to 999 seconds.
cycle change to a maximum of 18.75%.
The only restriction as to the value is that it must be less than
the cycle time for the respective Dial/Split program to be When adding time to change the actual offset, the time is
considered valid. added to the coordinated phase(s). When subtracting time
to change the actual offset, the time is subtracted from all
It is possible to enact Free Mode as a function of the
phases (subject to the available time --i.e., program phase
Dial/Split/Offset in effect for a valid pattern. This is
time versus minimum phase time).
accomplished by setting the Offset value equal to or greater
than the cycle length for that timing program. During this When the shortest route to the correct offset requires
period of Free Mode, any coordination pattern programmed subtracting time and the program/minimum phase time
Alternate Sequence will be implemented. differential would preclude correction within five cycles,
the routine changes the offset by adding time.
When running Coordination Free and the pattern time is not
equal to zero then Maximum 1 is set equal to the pattern D. SHORTWAY+: When changing offset by SHORTWAY+, the
time. coordinator establishes a new offset by dwelling in the
coordinated phase(s) green. The maximum time the
The coordinator has four methods of changing the actual
coordinator can dwell will be 18.75% of the cycle length.
offset (i.e., Shortway, Shortway Add Only, Infinite Dwell, and
Dwell With Interrupt). After the dwell, the coordinator releases and begins
timing program phase times. The dwelling operation is
Regardless of the method selected for offset correction, the
repeated until the desired offset is reached. Only one
Coordinator recognizes when the master sync and offset in
dwell interval is timed between sync pulses.
control indicate local zero is not correct but the coordinated
phases are on and waiting for local zero to begin the next D. SHORTWAY2: This correction mode operates the same as
cycle. SHORTWAY except when going long will add to all phases
proportional to their split time.
The coordinator utilizes this extra time to change the actual
offset by restarting the local cycle. On an early return
(coordinated phases are on), the cycle is restarted if the time 3.8.3 Absolute Sync
is right to be in sync or if doing Shortway correction (short)
and time for being in sync is past. Absolute Sync Reference is a reference method in which each
cycle will be individually referenced to a single point in time
This type of correction may only take place if the controller
via keypad initiated sync command or downloaded via the
has returned to the coordinated phases early due to a phase
system interface or RS232 port. This operation will allow the
or phases not requiring any or all of the phase time
CU to keep in step with a free running cycle counter,
programmed.
particularly one which does not divide evenly into 24 hours,
A. DWELL: When changing offset by DWELL, the coordinator such as a 70 second cycle.
establishes a new offset by dwelling in the coordinated
Following a power outage, the CU will automatically update
phase(s) green until the correction is made.
it’s Absolute Sync Reference points. The CU is capable of
Dwell Transition contains provisions to operate in updating it’s reference points following a power outage up to
applications where the master contains an offset seven days without being reset.
interrupter. An Offset Interrupter is a device which
Typically this operation is required when the CU is running
imposes a number of shifting interrupter pulses onto the
under manual control. It is possible to utilize these Absolute

FUNCTION Page 93
Sync Reference points for TBC controlled or Queue controlled the completion of the first cycle under full
timing plans. coordination control.
Or:
For those periods when a valid Absolute Sync Reference does
2) When all phases are programmed as Non-Actuated,
not exist, the CU will utilize 24:00 hours as the sync reference
normal service shall continue until the first ring
point.
coordinated phase is green at which time complete
coordination control commences. The cycle will begin
3.8.4 Ring Lag timing when all coordinated phases are on. Normal
offset correction will sync the controller to the system
The coordinator provides a means to establish an offset (lag) reference after the completion of the first cycle under
for each ring in the CU when the ring structure does not lock full coordination control.
the ring to Ring 1 based on the concurrent definition (no B. Program To Program: The Program to Program smooth
barriers). and orderly transition shall be accomplished by limiting a
The coordinator controls rings which are locked together program change to occur only at local zero time.
based on the ring structure concurrent definition as a single Normal offset correction will sync the controller to the
identity (cluster). The lowest numbered ring in a cluster will system reference after beginning with the first cycle.
receive the lag time setting.
Program transitions which include a change in
The ring lag is adjustable in length from 0 to 999 seconds. coordinated phase(s) or change in alternate sequence
The only restriction as to the value is that it must be less than which include coordinated phase(s) shall drop the unit to
the cycle time for the respective Dial/Split program to be free at which time it will perform the free to coordinated
considered valid. transition noted above.
It is possible to enact Free Mode, for the cluster, as a function Program transitions which find a traffic phase on or next
of the Dial/Split/Offset in effect. This is accomplished by that is not part of the new pattern (phase omitted in the
setting the Ring Lag value equal to or greater than the cycle new pattern) shall cause the coordinator to drop free at
length for that timing program. The Ring 1 Cluster must be in which time it will perform the free to coordinated
a coordinated mode before other clusters may respond to this transition noted above.
operational setting.
The drop out of coordination on a change in coordinated
Ring Lag Applications phase(s) or alternate sequence provides for a positive release
The CU can operate as four 2 phase controllers, as two 2 ring from one set of conditions (phase holds, omits, etc.) prior to
controllers (diamonds & offset tees), or as two single ring establishing another set.
controllers in addition to the standard dual ring CU.
In the majority of installations are standard dual ring 3.8.6 Phase Times
applications and programming of Ring Lag values are not
necessary. However, if the application utilizes the controller The coordinator provides an adjustable time for each phase
as defined in the paragraph above, an offset adjustment for for each of the sixteen timing programs. The program phase
ring 2 through 4 may be required. The term “Ring 2 Lag” time is adjustable from 1 to 400 seconds. For the coordinated
refers to Ring 2 lagging (offset) the offset programmed for phase(s) this will become the minimum phase time and for
Ring 1.In operation the CU will sync the non-coordinated phases it determines the force off point
(maximum phase times). Green time for a phase is the phase
time minus the phase vehicle clearance (yellow & red) times.
3.8.5 Transition Cycles In general, the time allocated to a phase must be longer (by at
The coordinator provides a smooth and orderly transition least 1 second) than the longest sum of one of the three
from Free to Coordinated operation and Coordination conditions:
Program to Coordination Program. MIN GREEN or WALK or MAX INIT*
A. Free To Coordinated: The Free to Coordinated smooth and PED CLR
orderly transition is accomplished by enabling partial
coordinated operation only after the offset has been YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW
determined to be valid (active for 18.75% of the cycle
RED CLR RED CLR RED CLR
minus three seconds in the case of interconnect control,
otherwise immediately). Once this condition is met, the * When Added Initial is greater than zero
coordinator shall:
1) Transfer the coordinated phase(s) to non-actuated When calculating the YELLOW + RED CLR interval, if the CU is
and allow normal service to continue until a to permit termination of phases concurrently, the longest
coordinated phase is green. At the beginning of any possible sum of YELLOW + RED CLR, for the phases
coordinated phase green, complete coordination terminating must be used.
control commences. The cycle will begin timing when Example 1+6 terminate as lag left turn.
all coordinated phases are on. Normal offset correction
will sync the controller to the system reference after Timings Phase 1 Use Phase 6 Use

Page 94 FUNCTION
gapping out early being given to the next phase that will
Timings Phase 1 Use Phase 6 Use
take it based on traffic demand.
MIN GRN 3 5 6 -
The phase Yellow Change and Red Clear calculation, for
MAX INI 0 - 12 - Green time above, must accommodate the longest Yellow
and Red that may be presented on concurrent terminating
WALK 0 - 7 7 phases except when all phases are programmed as Non-
PED CLR 0 - 12 12 Actuated.
YELLOW 3.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 The phase time need not include provision to accommodate
Oversized Pedestrian Timings on phases where pedestrians
RED CLR 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 do not operate non-actuated based on coordination operation
PLUS 1 SEC 1 1 1 1 mode.
MIN TIME 8 13 19 27 To accommodate an Oversized Pedestrian Timings, the

pedestrian times are not evaluated for adequate service
The MIN GRN for Phase 1 must assume 5 seconds because the time.
coordinator will use 5 seconds in those cases where the actual
traffic green times indicate less than 5 seconds. When a phase is about to be serviced that has an
Oversized Pedestrian Timing actuation, the coordination
Phase 6 must use the longer of MIN GRN, MAX INI, or WALK + phase time (split) will be adjusted for the additional time
PED CLR to determine the green time minimum service. The required to accommodate the Oversized Pedestrian
WALK + PED CLR may be removed from this calculation as Timing.
explained later in this section.
This adjustment of the coordinated phase times may
The YELLOW + RED CLR for Phase 6 must be used for Phase 1 cause a late return to the first coordinated phase relative
since the Phase 1 and Phase 6 may go to Yellow at the same to the cycle time. The normal Offset correction will re-sync
time and Phase 1 will dwell in a red display for the additional the local cycle following an Oversized Pedestrian Timing
time necessary to terminate Phase 6. service.
Timing Plans will normally have time allocated such that the The phase time need not include provision to accommodate
time between barriers is equal ring to ring. Trailing Overlaps Timings.
When all phases are active: To accommodate a trailing overlap, the internal cycle
length calculation will assume any trailing overlap will
Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 terminate once a cycle and will add to normal cycle length
10 30 20 20 calculation any difference between the trailing overlap
requirement and the shortest phase yellow and red clear
Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7 Phase 8 time sum of the overlap included phases. Two trailing
20 20 10 30 overlaps with the same definition will not bump the cycle
twice.
When all phases are not active:
To satisfy trailing green applications where the basic
Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 assumptions in the coordination cycle length calculation
is wrong, coordination allows the calculated coordination
10 30 20 20 cycle length to be overridden and a value set by the user.
It is suggested that this capability be used with caution
Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7 Phase 8
because the automatic calculation is normally correct.
x 40 x 40
When a trailing overlap is terminating, the coordinated
The phase time for the coordinated phase(s) may not begin phase timers will stop for the additional time required to
prior to it's normal position relative to local time zero. accommodate the trailing overlap.
The force off point (user selected) may be based on when the C. Lead / Lag Considerations - The CU internal coordinator
phase begins (Plan) or based on a position in the cycle differs from most, if not all, CUs when operated in a
(Cycle). coordinated mode, lead / lag where pedestrian phases are
selected as non-actuated. The CU design, under 2-4 ring
A. Plan; The Green Time (force off point) is based on when operation, requires each ring to operate in an
the respective phase is ON. This force mode assures the independent timing mode. Some controllers delay the
time allocated to any non-coordinated phase never start of concurrent coordinated pedestrian walk intervals
exceeds that programmed, regardless of when it may until both coordinated phase walks are concurrent. The
appear in the background cycle because some other non- controller then times concurrent Walk and Pedestrian
coordinated phase gapped out earlier than the limit set in Clear intervals before releasing the lag ring to commence
the timing plan. timing the lagging left. Thus the coordinator times three
B. Cycle; The Green Time (force off point) is based on a separate sequences 1+6, 2+6, and 2+5 or 2+5, 2+6, and
position relative to local time zero. This force mode 1+6. The concurrent sequence interval 2+6 must be of
provides for unused time from a non-coordinated phase

FUNCTION Page 95
sufficient time to time concurrent Walk and Pedestrian adjustments being made that cycle (i.e, Shortway, Permissive
Clear intervals. Yield, etc.).
The CU internal coordinator totally independent ring Maximum Recall or a failed detector will disable Adaptive
timing capability does not require the 2+6 concurrent ped Split operation on a phase. When a detector fails or the phase
operation therefore can operate lead/lag sequences in the placed on maximum recall, it will smoothly correct until its
same time intervals as leading left sequences. This normal split is active then no further adjustments.
enhances selection of shorter cycle lengths.
When Interval Advance terminates a phase, the CU shall not
consider it a force or gap in the Adaptive Split operation.
3.8.6.1 Adaptive Split CAS will be enabled by Local TBC or system command.
The goal of Coordination Adaptive Split (CAS) is to achieve Implementing Coordination Adaptive Split:
operation whereby a running pattern will automatically seek
the most advantageous split possible for all non-coordinated The following entry of “1” under SPC FUNCTION 1 column
phases (coordinated phases are not adjusted). denotes that Coordination Adaptive Split will be enabled
whenever Special Function 1 is called. Special Function 1 may
CAS is achieved by monitoring the termination of each phase be called by local or master TBC or local Queue Routines.
and determining whether the phase gapped (terminated
through a lack of demand) or was forced (terminated by EPAC TIME BASE FUNCTION MAPPING
action of coordinator in controlling the maximum service). If SPC FUNC
forced, the phase is a candidate for an increase in its split. If FUNCTION NAME 12345678
COORD ADAPTIVE SPLIT 10000000
gapped, the phase is a candidate for a decrease in its split. SPEC FUNCTION 1 00000000
SPEC FUNCTION 2 00000000
CAS will monitor the time usage of each phase under CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
coordination. If, for two consecutive cycles, a phase is forced A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
by coordination while not already set to terminate or in the
process of termination (Yellow or Red), that phase is
designated as a Wanting Phase (requesting an additional
increment of split). If, in two consecutive cycles, a phase
3.8.7 Phase Modes
becomes ready to terminate with over one second left in its
coordination force timer, it will be designated as a Giving
Phase (capable of giving up an increment of split). 3.8.7.1 Coord Phase(S)
At the end of each cycle, the supply/demand situation is The coordinator provides for selecting in each of the sixteen
examined and, if a change is possible, the splits of impacted timing programs which phase(s) is/are to be the coordinated
phases are changed. phase(s). The coordinated phase(s) operate as non-actuated
when coordinated. When no phases have been selected as the
When more phase(s) are Wanting (forced) than are Giving coordinated phase(s), the controller will run Free. When
(gapped), then time will distributed based on the number of operating in multiple ring controller configurations, a phase
cycles the phase has been Wanting. in Ring 2, 3, or 4 must be selected as the coordinated phase
When more phase(s) are Giving than are Wanting, then time except when compatibility does not exist within that ring to
will be taken from the lowest number of Giving phase. the coordinated phase in Ring 1.
When a phase has been a Giving phase (has a negative

adjustment) and becomes a Wanting phase and no Giving 3.8.7.2 Dual Coord Phase(S)
phase exists, any phase with a positive adjustment will be
The coordinator provides for selecting in each of the sixteen
considered a Giving phase. This assures that a wanting phase
timing programs (dual) coordinated phase(s) in each ring.
will return to at least its split time under saturated
The dual coordinated phase operates as non-actuated when
conditions.
coordinated. The dual coordinated phase maintains a fixed
Time will never be subtracted from a phase split except to position in the pattern cycle in relationship to the
give to another phase. Time will only be added to a phase coordinated phase. It may begin early but will not terminate
split if such addition does not cause the cycle length to later than the allocated times would imply.
change.
If the phase gaps out in one cycle and is forced the next cycle 3.8.7.3 Non-Coordinated Phase(S)
or vice versa, the Adaptive Split will not change.
The coordinator provides for operation modifiers to be
When a phase has not received service for a period equal to selected for each non-coordinated phases in each of the
two times the cycle, the CU shall operate as though the phase sixteen timing programs. The non-coordinated phase(s)
had gapped out twice in a row. Subsequently and until such operate as full-actuated when coordinated. These five
time as the phase receives service, the CU shall operate as modifiers are:
though a gap out occurred every cycle. 1) Minimum Vehicle Recall
Any coordination operation which makes a negative 2) Maximum Vehicle Recall
adjustment to any split time will prevent the adaptive split 3) Pedestrian Recall
4) Maximum Vehicle Recall and Pedestrian Recall

Page 96 FUNCTION
5) Permanent Phase Omit units before implementation of intelligent CUs. Yield Mode
MAXIMIZES early return to the coordinated phase(s).
3.8.8 Alternate Sequences Yield Mode provides for a single release (Yield Period) during
which the coordinated phase(s) may terminate and service
The CU provides the capability of fifteen alternates to the calls on any of the non-coordinated phases.
standard sequence defined in the Ring Structure database.
Yield Mode provides an operator programmable extension of
These alternates are variations to the sequence based on
the yield, termed Yield Period. A zero value in the Yield
groups of two phases (Phase Pair) in a ring being serviced in
period causes the coordinator to sense demand for a period of
reverse order. The phase pair must be adjacent in the normal
3% of the cycle length (3 seconds minimum) - the ultimate in
sequence, may not be separated by barriers, and a single
early return. The coordinator calculates the minimum service
phase may appear only in one of the phase pair definitions
of all non-coordinated phases and places an internal limit as
for a single alternate. The sixteen total sequences offer every
to the maximum Yield Period so that a large value will not
combination of lead-lag on an eight phase quad application.
result in a release to non-coordinated phases when times will
The coordinator provides a means to select one of the not permit return to the coordinated phase(s) at the start of
alternates or the standard sequence as a function of the the local cycle. Therefor, the user may select a Yield Period
pattern (Dial/Split/Offset) in effect. long with respect to the cycle length to allow the controller to
wait for demand.
The alternate sequences may also be selected by the Alternate
Sequence external interface inputs. When the coordinator is The Yield Period is a variable time equal to the lesser of a
running a pattern, the external interface inputs will not calculated maximum yield period and the entered Yield
override the pattern sequence. Period.
In the absence of any non-coordinated phase calls, the
3.8.9 Operation coordinated phase(s) shall remain Walk during the Yield
Period.
Three selections are provided for coordination operation. The
When the coordinated phase(s) terminate during the Yield
first selection is to not have coordination, “FREE”. If a pattern
Period, the coordinator allows the CU to service all the
is experiencing a problem which is determined to be the
subsequent phase(s) in normal order before returning to the
coord pattern of the intersection, selection of “FREE” will
coordinated phase(s).
revert CU operation to a stand-alone, isolated intersection
controller. A limitation has been set on Yield Mode in that it shall apply
only to units running with no more than two rings in a
A coordination pattern may be tested on a CU by CU basis by
cluster. A cluster is any number of rings with barriers
selecting “MANUAL” operation. Whatever pattern
established based on non-concurrent phase definition.
(Dial/Split/Offset) set for Manual Control will become
operational after selection even if the CU is interconnected The Yield Period shall terminate after a time equal to the
via 7-wire, internal TBC, or a MARC System master. The lesser of a calculated maximum yield period and the entered
pattern operation may be monitored under the display Yield Period.
“ACTIVE STATUS - COORD TIMERS”.
The calculated maximum yield period shall be the difference
The selection of “AUTO” is the normal setting for coordinated between the non-coordinated phase time sum and the non-
applications. This setting permits the internal coordinator to coordinated phase minimum service time sum.
run under the control of 7-wire, internal TBC, or a MARC
The definition of the Yield Period remains simple as long as
System master.
the application is simple. When it is applied to dual ring
clusters with unequal times in the coordinated phases or
3.8.10 Control Strategies lead/lag operation, the definition becomes a bit more
complex. The Yield Period begins based on the beginning of
The coordinator provides six control strategies (modes of the first coordinated phase yield period and shall continue
coordinated phase termination to service calls on the non- until the end of last coordinated phase yield period, except
coordinated phases). The control strategies (modes) are: that a phase will not be serviced if adequate times does not
1) Yield Mode exist to service it at it's normal position in the cycle.
2) Permissive Mode
An example of the reason for the exception above is a lagging
3) Permissive Yield Mode
turn whose yield period began with the completion of the
4) Permissive Omit Mode
first coordinated phase time and for which adequate time
5) Sequential Omit Mode
may not continue to be available through the yield period
6) Full Actuated Mode
following the last coordinated phase, thus it will be omitted
when adequate time does not exist to service it at it's normal
3.8.10.1 Yield Mode position in the cycle.
The Yield Mode emulates the traditional operation of the A key element is that all Permissive Modes (defined later)
electro-mechanical dial controllers or external coordination provide a release from the Coordinated Phase(s) to phase(s)
in sequence of rotation and extend the coordinated phase(s)
when a lack of demand exists in the next phase(s) to be

FUNCTION Page 97
serviced. The Yield Mode does not evaluate demand by phase The Permissive Mode is the most typical of current day
sequence. This mode releases to any phase after the coordination strategies. The key element of this mode is the
Coordinated Phase(s) which has demand and thus unused scheduling of releases from the coordinated phase(s) on a
times can be allocated to subsequent phases when the force is “sliding window” basis. The “sliding window” release causes
applied as a point in the cycle. This mode is best suited for the coordinator to open a permissive window for phases 3 & 7
moderate to heavy traffic to preclude excessive amounts of only (assuming a standard 8 phase dual ring) at the point
time being allocated to an early return to the coordinated where termination of the coordinated phase(s) should occur.
phase(s). If there is no demand on phase 3 or 7, the coordinator will
extend the coordinated phase(s) and wait for demand on
phase 3 or 7 to occur. The coordinator will retain the phases 3
3.8.10.2 Permissive Mode & 7 permissive until such time that the CU can no longer
Permissive Mode provides for a controlled release service a minimum call on phase 3 or 7. At this point the
(permissive period) to each of the non-coordinated phases in coordinator will prevent Phase 3 & 7 from being serviced and
sequence. When a call is not present for the phase to be then open a permissive window for phases 4 & 8 only.
serviced next in sequence, the coordinator reallocates that During the phase 3 & 7 permissive period, the CU will
phase's time to the end of the coordinated phase. maintain the coordinated phase Green and Don’t Walk. This
Prior to the completion of the coordinated phase time and the allows a late platoon or stragglers to pass through the
beginning of the first permissive period, the coordinated intersection.
phase pedestrian will display the pedestrian clear indication When the coordinator opens a permissive window for phases
and dwell Don’t Walk. This eliminates the need to provide 4 & 8 only demand on phases 4 & 8 are considered in the
ample time in each subsequent phase time for the decision to terminate the coordinated phase(s). Since phases
coordinated phase pedestrian clear. The coordinated phase 4 & 8 are traditionally through phases discussion will include
pedestrian display will dwell in Don’t Walk until such time as coverage of pedestrian demand. If demand, vehicle or
the coordinated phase terminates and returns to Green or the pedestrian, are not present at this point, the coordinated
last permissive period in the cycle is complete without the phases are extended waiting for demand. At the point in time
coordinated phase terminating. when phase 4 & 8 pedestrian movements can no longer be
Permissive Mode provides two types of permissive periods. serviced, the coordinator will prevent pedestrian service on
The permissive period controls the time during which the phase 4 & 8 while maintaining a permissive condition for
coordinator releases the coordinated phase(s), allowing the vehicle service. If the no demand continues until the CU can
CU to begin servicing calls on the non-coordinated and/or no longer service a minimum vehicle call on phase 4 or 8, the
dual coordinated phases. coordinator will prevent Phase 4 & 8 from being serviced and
then open a permissive window for phases 1 & 5 only. Phase 1
The first type of permissive operation consists of standard & 5 will be evaluated until they can no longer be serviced. The
vehicle permissive. The length of the period is determined by coordinator will then restart the coordinated phases WALK
the phase time and the minimum time (minimum time = and be ready for the next cycle.
Minimum Green or Maximum Initial + vehicle Yellow + Red
Clear). The above example described a condition where no demand
existed at the intersection. During early morning and late
Minimum time is based on the longer of Minimum Green or evening patterns this is a relatively common occurrence at
Maximum Initial when the Seconds/Actuation setting is some sites although not frequent. The normal condition is a
greater than zero, otherwise minimum time is based on light sporadic flow which causes the coordinator to release to
Minimum Green. The minimum time is internally set to five a phase, the “sliding window” calculations are terminated and
seconds in cases where the timings are programmed for less. the CU is allowed to service any demand in the forward
rotation returning to the coordinated phase(s). The
The second type of permissive operation consists of a
coordinator maintains a limit on time to service phases so as
separate pedestrian permissive concurrent with the vehicle
to insure a proper return to the start of the coordinated
permissive. The length of this period is determined by the
phase(s) on or before the scheduled start of the next cycle.
phase time and Walk + Pedestrian Clear + phase vehicle
Time allocated to non-coordinated phases may be limited to
Yellow + Red Clear. In no case will the pedestrian permissive
the time scheduled in the pattern or allowed to utilize all
period be longer than the vehicle permissive period. When a
excess time up to the point in cycle where the phase must be
phase is selected as next during the pedestrian permissive
terminated in order to provide programmed time for phases
period, the pedestrian movement may start with the
next in the sequence.
beginning of the associated vehicle movement (phase green)
regardless of when the pedestrian call is received. The Permissive Mode provides a safeguard for the excessive
early release of the Yield Mode under light traffic by
When the coordinated phase(s) terminate during any
extending the coordinated phase(s) pending future demand.
permissive period, the coordinator allows the CU to service all
A point to remember is that if one car is in phase 3 and no
the subsequent phase(s) in normal order before returning to
other demand exists, the coordinator will release to phase 3,
the coordinated phase(s) which will not terminate on
service that vehicle then return to the coordinated phases.
subsequent permissive periods in the same cycle.
Under field conditions with moderately dispersed flow, this
Permissive Mode Application: mode will both extend the coordinated phase and provide
early return, this is a significant advantage where the design
can widen a natural band width.

Page 98 FUNCTION
This mode works well under moderate to heavy traffic flows The Permissive Yield mode incorporates the “sliding window”
where extension of the coordinated phase(s) is not the scheme of the Permissive mode then adds special operation
primary desire or the absence of demand on the next phases functions to resolve unique intersection control problems.
in sequence after the coordinated phases (causing a The term “Permissive” applies to the use of the Permissive
coordinated phase extension) will not grid lock an adjacent mode “sliding window” operation. The term “Yield” applies to
intersection. This mode will operate satisfactorily in 80% or the fact that this mode utilizes the “Yield Period” timing NOT
more of all locations operating in coordination. that this mode resembles the Yield mode.
The first special function is the fact that ALL pedestrian
3.8.10.3 Permissive Yield Mode movements are actuated by pedestrian push buttons. If
pedestrian movements are to occur every cycle they must be
Permissive Yield Mode provides for a controlled release to recalled. In all coordination modes, if the time is not allocated
each of the non-coordinated phases in sequence as defined in for phases to service the pedestrian demand, the coordinator
Permissive Mode with the following addition: upon return to the coordinated phase(s) may be required to
Immediately prior to the first permissive, when not Shortway make an offset correction to accommodate the delay caused
Offset correcting (going short), the coordinator will provide a by the pedestrian service. This may be severely detrimental to
variable period for the coordinated phase extension called the traffic flow. For that reason, not programming time for
PYP (Permissive Yield Period). pedestrian service in the pattern is best limited to OFF PEAK
and PM short cycle patterns where cycle lengths are utilized
During the PYP, the coordinated phase detectors shall be to reduce delays.
monitored as though it were an actuated phase and the
coordinated phase shall not terminate unless the coordinated The second special function is the operation of vehicle
phase gaps out (Passage timer times out or the traffic gap demand extension of the coordinated phase(s). The time
exceeds the gap reduction effective gap time). programmed in the pattern phase timings represents the
minimum time the coordinated phase(s) will be Green and
The PYP shall terminate when the coordinated phase gaps out the start of the coordinated phase(s) Green for offset control.
or after a time equal to the lesser of a calculated maximum At the point the coordinator would normally open a
permissive and the entered Yield Period (Coordinated Phase permissive window for phase 3 & 7, the CU looks at the
Extension). coordinated phase(s) detectors to determine if “gap out” has
occurred. Volume Density is active as though the phase(s)
The coordinated phase pedestrian is actuated. If called, the
were not coordinated. If gap out has not occurred, the
PYP will not terminate until the pedestrian timing is
controller will extend the coordinated phase(s) for a period of
complete. If Walk plus Pedestrian Clear is greater than the
time up to the value programmed in the “Yield Period”. The
PYP accommodates, a late return will occur.
extension of the coordinated phase(s) will deduct time from
The calculated maximum permissive shall be the difference non-coordinated phases as described later.
between the non-coordinated phase time sum and the non-
A point of reference to the use of Permissive Yield (Full
coordinated phase minimum service time sum.
Actuated Coordination) mode is the location of the
At the end of the PYP, the amount of coordinated phase intersection in the time space plot diagram. Permissive Yield
extension will be calculated and the following non- mode is most effective at intersections where the platoon
coordinated phase times will be shortened proportionally to movements are nearly coincidental, not sequential. If the
equal the coordinated phase extension. platoon flows are sequential in time, the time programmed
should be sufficient for the late platoon to be in place before
The amount of time a non-coordinated phase is shortened is going actuated. Secondly, the extension of coordinated
based on available time (timing plan phase time minus phase(s) should not allow excessive back-up at adjacent
minimum service time) as a percentage of the total available intersections. Coordination by design should increase
time for all the non-coordinated phases. platoon speeds. If adjacent intersections terminate early, the
The non-coordinated phases shortened based on extension of platoon could be forced to excessive stopping hazards thus
the coordinated phase(s) are those that appear following the defeating the coordination patterns and increasing stops and
last coordinated phase and Cycle Zero or any Dual delays. This is especially important during rain, ice and snow
Coordinated phase that may be set. periods where speeds are reduced and platoon arrivals are
customarily late.
When the entered Cycle Length is greater than the calculated
cycle length, the positive difference is used as a pattern PYP The third special function is a combination of features which
time. This time is proportionally distributed to all the non- develop the coordinator to obtain Virtual Split. The primary
coordinated phases where it may be taken back based on the function is the fact that the sum of the intervals (pattern
coordinated phase extending in the PYP. phase times) do NOT have to equal the cycle length. This
feature allows the user to program phase times which would
A limitation has been set on Permissive Yield Mode in that it normally equal 90 seconds then program a cycle length of
shall apply only to units running with no more than two rings 130 seconds. The CU internal coordinator will assign all the
in a cluster. When programmed to operate outside this unprogrammed time, 40 seconds in this example to all non-
limitation a "NO COORD - BAD P FREE" will be logged and the coordinated phases proportional to the percentage of variable
unit will run Free (Not coordinated). time (timing plan value minus phase minimum service)
Permissive Yield Mode Application: allocated to phases in the pattern.

FUNCTION Page 99
background cycle. It also allows non-coordinated phases to

Phase Pattern Min Vari % Virtual
dwell or cycle based on time constraints of the timing plan.
2&6 30 Coord Phase Not Included 30
Applications where side street demand is sporadic or
3&7 15 10 5 5/20 25 complaints are received concerning excessive delay are where
this mode excels. During AM start up coordination, patterns
4&8 30 20 10 10/20 50 are normally started 15 to 30 minutes prior to the start of
1&5 15 10 5 5/20 25 flow generation to allow sync of the whole system. At these
times traffic is also sporadic at side streets and some cycles
Total 90 20 130 non-existent. The use of recalls places excessive delay on the
If coordinated phase demand at the end of the coordinated coordinated phase(s) without warrant. But release to side
phase time caused extension of the coordinated phase, the street on demand holds the phase after the vehicle like a
limit on that extension would be 40 seconds. If said extension sloppy passage time selection or a hung detector without
were 40 seconds, the non-coordinated phases time would be recall. This allows side street traffic to get a call at the last
reduced by the same value increased above. If the possible point in cycle or maintain the Green after a
coordinated phase extension were 20 seconds, minimum service call. The coordinated phase(s) do not
experience excess delay since the demand is from an adjacent
Phase Pattern % % 20 Sec Virtual intersection or early release platoon that will be in step after
one stop.
2&6 30 50
Critical Intersections are intersections where the capacity is
3&7 15 5/20 5 20
not sufficient to clear the demand each cycle on the
4&8 30 10/20 10 40 coordinated phase(s) based on reasonable cycle lengths. If
demand is not cleared, the progression is either capsized or
1&5 15 5/20 5 20
in the process of being capsized. The time requirements to
Total 90 130 start a platoon must include start-up from stop for the
demand. The start-up time is generally 3 to 4 times greater
The key point of the operation is that each cycle allocates time than moving the same volume where the flow is already at
in the sequence based on actual demand and the coordinator speed. Therefore, flow is maximized at critical intersections
guarantees start of the coordinated phase(s) at the local cycle when the arriving platoon is not required to stop then restart;
zero and evaluation of actuated coordinated phase(s) demand but, arrive after flow is established and all but the
at the same point in each cycle. unavoidable demand is precluded from arriving early.
This mode is especially useful for OFF PEAK patterns where Most systems have intersections where side street demand is
the lowest cycle length is desired to reduce delays yet retain not at critical levels. These intersections can afford longer
coordination. Note that if non-coordinated phase demand is coordinated phase(s) Green times necessary to start up a
light and pattern is set to handle heavy non-coordinated platoon. Designs should therefore attempt to stop all early
phase demand, the excess early release of coordinated phase and stragglers of the platoon and only release at a time when
Green may cause problems. the adjacent critical intersections can have flow established.
Other designs require the use of dual coordinated phases to
accomplish this function. The use of dual coordinated phases
3.8.10.4 Permissive Omit Mode
generated complaints in the pre-rush peak by causing the
Permissive Omit Mode provides for operation as defined in intersection to terminate flow when there was no demand
Permissive Yield Mode with the following addition: and the critical intersection lacked critical demand loading.
The Permissive Omit mode resolves this problem by
In single ring configurations, the coordinated phase, once requiring at least one vehicle to call the phase necessary to
terminated to service a call, will not occur again until the last terminate the coordinated phase(s) flow. This design
permissive is over. precluded an early release thus controlling the time that the
In dual ring configurations, the coordinated phase, once platoon arrived at the critical intersection.
terminated to service a call, will not occur again until
servicing a phase in the coordinated phase sub-cluster, or
after the last permissive. Further, any actuated phases in the 3.8.10.5 Sequential Omit Mode
coordinated phase sub-cluster which precede a coordinated Sequential Omit Mode provides for operation as defined in
phase shall not be serviced prior to their normal time in the Permissive Yield Mode with the following exceptions:
background cycle.
Sequential Omit Mode provides a phase by phase sliding
The above is accomplished by omitting the coordinated phase window of service (lifted omit). One and only one phase in a
beginning with the first permissive period. This omit will be ring will have the omit lifted at any time.
lifted when the stated conditions are right for coordinated
phase re-service. Following the Permissive Yield Period, the coordinated phase,
shall be omitted until the last permissive is over.
Permissive Omit Mode Application:
Following the Permissive Yield Period, the opening of a
The purpose of this mode is to prevent the return to the permissive shall occur concurrent with the closing of the
Coordinated Phase sub-cluster prior to it's time in the

Page 100 FUNCTION
prior permissive. The closing of each permissive shall occur The “CYCLE” force mode provides a coordination force off
at its normal position in the cycle. based upon the cycle timing. Each actuated phase will be
forced at a fixed position in the cycle. This mode provides
The Virtual Split along with Sequential Omit Mode and Cycle
unused time in the cycle to the next phase that can take it.
Force; put all unused time into the phase following the Coord
Phase.
A limitation has been set on Sequential Omit coordinated 3.8.13 Sync Monitor
Mode in that it shall apply only to units running with no more
The coordinator monitors the Offset command requests for
than two rings in a cluster. When programmed to operate
validity of the imposed sync reference.
outside this limitation a "NO COORD - BAD P FREE" will be
logged and the unit will run Free (Not coordinated). The coordinator will discontinue offset correction when the
length of time between sync pulses exceed the cycle in effect
by five seconds and until the next sync pulse is received.
3.8.10.6 Full Actuated Mode
The coordinator will revert to Sync Monitor Free mode when:
Full Actuated Coordination Mode provides for operation as 1) No sync pulse for 3 consecutive cycles
defined in Permissive Yield Mode with the following 2) No offset line active for 15 seconds or the Revert To
exceptions: Backup time. When the Revert To Backup time is zero
Following the Permissive Yield Period, any phase may be then 15 seconds else the entered Revert To Backup
served in the standard sequence provided the permissive time.
period for that phase has not expired. 3) More than one offset active for 15 seconds
Following the Permissive Yield Period, any phase may be re- During Sync Monitor Free mode, the Offset command
serviced in the standard sequence provided the permissive requests will continue to be monitored and should the
period for that phase has not expired. command request return to valid operation, the coordinator
will implement the pattern commanded.
Following the Permissive Yield Period and prior to the end of
the permissive for the phase before the first coordinated The Sync Monitor "Free" mode may be replaced by a TBC
phase, the coordinated phase shall operate as a actuated event. See the "On Line" definition in the Time Base section.
phase.
A limitation has been set on Full Actuated Coordination Mode 3.8.14 Manual Control
in that it shall apply only to units running with no more than
two rings in a cluster. When programmed to operate outside The coordinator is capable of being set to manually operate in
this limitation a "NO COORD - BAD P FREE" will be logged and any pattern (Timing Plan plus Offset) via program entry. A
the unit will run Free (Not coordinated). manual selection of pattern overrides all other pattern
interface commands.
3.8.11 Maximum Mode The coordinator is capable of being set to manually operate in
any pattern (Dial/Split/Offset) by an entry through the front
Maximum Timers are programmed on a per phase basis panel. A manual selection of pattern overrides the pattern
under Phase Data. This selection defines the current interface commands.
Maximum timer, if any, to be operate concurrently with A manual sync of the pattern is controlled by an entry
coordination. If a Maximum timer is selected , the times through the front panel.
allocated within the timing plan must be cross verified to the
selected Maximum timers on a per phase basis to insure the
Timing Plan times do not exceed the Maximum timer values. 3.8.15 Free
The CU will cause phase termination based on the SHORTER
of either the Maximum timer or the programmed timing plan The coordinator is capable of Free mode of operation. During
time for the phase. this mode all coordinator control of the CU operation is
removed.
The selection of Maximum Inhibit causes the coordinator to
utilize only the Timing Plan times. This is assumed to be the The coordinator is capable of being set to the Free mode
selection for most applications. defined under Sync Monitor and via program entry.
The coordinator will recognize input requests that conflict
3.8.12 Force Mode with the internal coordination operation and either ignore
them or automatically revert to Free mode when the inputs
The force point for each phase is automatically calculated by are active. The inputs that conflict with internal coordination
the CU internal coordinator. are:
The “PLAN” force mode provides a coordination force off 1) Walk Rest Modifier Ignore
based upon the plan timing. Each phase will be forced a fixed 2) Manual Control Enable Free
time after it has become active. This mode provides all
unused time in the cycle to the coordinated phase(s). 3) Stop Time (Either Ring) Free

FUNCTION Page 101
4) Automatic Flash Free Timing Plan B (Cycle / Dial Timing Plan B (Cycle / Dial
B) B)
5) Preemption (Any) Free
Timing Plan C (Split A) Timing Plan C (Split A)
When Stop Time is NOT assigned and/or Automatic Flash has
no Entry Phases programmed, activation of those inputs will Timing Plan D (Split B) Timing Plan D (Split B)
result in Free (Non-Coordinated) operation.
Offset 1 Offset 1
3.8.16 Command Priority Offset 2 Offset 2

Offset 3 Offset 3
The coordination patterns are capable of being selected based
on program entry, Interconnect Inputs, Time Base Control Free (No Coordination) Free (No Coordination)
events, and a System Interface. The pattern select priority is 5. Input / Output Command Association: Coordination inputs
as follows: and outputs are interpreted as command requests in
1. Program Entry accordance with
2. System Interface
3. Time Base Control Event TIMING PLAN
4. Interconnect Inputs Command TP TP B TP C TP D Reference
When the TBC On Line input is active, the TBC events have no A
priority and program selection is based on manual inputs or TP 00 OFF OFF OFF OFF Dial 1 Split
interconnect inputs. 1
TP 01 OFF OFF ON OFF Dial 1 Split
3.8.17 External Coordination 2
Interface TP 02 OFF OFF OFF ON Dial 1 Split
3
The coordinator external interface for Type 1 CUs is via Port
1. The external interface for Type 2 CUs is via Connectors A, B, TP 03 OFF OFF ON ON Dial 1 Split
and C or D. 4
The availability of Coordinator input / output functions are TP 04 ON OFF OFF OFF Dial 2 Split
dependent upon the CU hardware configuration, Terminal & 1
Facilities wiring and configuration, and user programming. TP 05 ON OFF ON OFF Dial 2 Split
The coordinator operates with an external interface as 2
follows: TP 06 ON OFF OFF ON Dial 2 Split
1. Coordination Inputs: The Coordinator selects the pattern 3
to be used, according to the current status of the Timing TP 07 ON OFF ON ON Dial 2 Split
Plan and Offset requests. In the applicable mode, eight 4
inputs for a hardwire type interconnect interface are
available. TP 08 OFF ON OFF OFF Dial 3 Split
1
2. Coordination Outputs: Eight outputs for master type
interconnect interface drivers are available. The TP 09 OFF ON ON OFF Dial 3 Split
coordination outputs echo the active pattern. All outputs 2
are constantly “On” when active except offset which is TP 10 OFF ON OFF ON Dial 3 Split
“Off” for a minimum of 3 seconds or 3 percent of the cycle 3
once each cycle beginning at the “0” point of the cycle.
TP 11 OFF ON ON ON Dial 3 Split
An Output Mode is available that provides an Interrupted 4
Sync pulses on the active Offset output. The Interrupted
Sync Pulses are provided at intervals equal to 20% and TP 12 ON ON OFF OFF Dial 4 Split
25% of the cycle on alternate cycles. 1
3. Levels: All logic signals are low state (nominal 0 volts dc) TP 13 ON ON ON OFF Dial 4 Split
for the operate condition of all coordination inputs and 2
outputs.
TP 14 ON ON OFF ON Dial 4 Split
4. Connector Pins: Input / Output pin terminations are 3
provided in accordance with the following table:
TP 15 ON ON ON ON Dial 4 Split
Coordination Inputs Coordination Outputs 4
Timing Plan A (Cycle / Dial Timing Plan A (Cycle / Dial Voltage Levels: OFF = +24V; ON = 0V
A) A)

Page 102 FUNCTION
For the purpose of utilization in an existing traditional The Time Base Control program outputs Timing Plan plus
interconnect system, a Reference with Dial and Split numbers Offset commands to the coordination program. It is possible
is provided. to perform functions not necessarily traffic related within the
Time Base Control program by programming and use of three
OFFSET auxiliary outputs and eight special function outputs.
Command Off 1 Off 2 Off 3 It is possible to select the detector diagnostic value set which
Offset 1 ON OFF OFF is operational within the TBC program.
Offset 2 OFF ON OFF It is possible to control system detector reporting within the
TBC program.
Offset 3 OFF OFF ON
It is possible to control intersection dimming functions
Sync OFF OFF OFF within the TBC program.
Others See Sync Monitoring The Time Base coordination pattern sync (Cycle Zero) shall be
Voltage Levels: OFF = +24V; ON = 0V user programmable to be referenced to any hour/minute or
the event time.
3.8.18 Coordination Indications 3.9.2 Clock Calendar

Indications are provided on the display and appropriately
identified to facilitate the determination of coordination The TBC is provided with a line frequency driven clock and
operation. backed up by a battery supported crystal controlled clock.
During normal operation, the line frequency driven clock
Coordinator settings and activity are capable of being controls all timings and synchronizes the crystal controlled
monitored on the display (i.e., Hold, Omit, and Force Off clock to the line frequency clock once per minute. When
indication shall denote when these functions are used). power is removed and reapplied, the crystal controlled clock
provides the current time to the line frequency clock.
The indications provide the following:
The TBC provides a 99 year calendar for automatically
Current Status
determining the current day of week, day of month, month of
1. Running Pattern, Control Source
year, and year based on the data set as a starting point. The
2. Running Pattern, Timing Plan plus Offset
calendar provides automatic compensation for leap years.
3. Correction In Progress
4. System Zero When the Set Clock input is active, the internal clock is reset
5. Cycle Counter to 04:00:00.
3.9 TIME BASE 3.9.3 Memory & Clock Backup

A battery backup voltage source is provided with the TBC
circuitry. In the battery backup mode time is maintained to
within +/- 0.005% as compared to WWV time standard.
The CU includes provisions for internal Time Base Control. The battery is a lithium (non-rechargeable) type. Circuitry is
provided to monitor the battery voltage and provide an
3.9.1 Operation indication when insufficient voltage is available to maintain
the clock and RAM data in event of a power failure.
The internal Time Base Control is a special program
operating within the CU. A minimum of 250 different TBC 3.9.4 Daylight Savings Time
events are capable of being programmed over a 99 year time
frame. TBC settings and activity may be monitored on the CU The TBC provides for Daylight Savings Time to be
display. programmed to occur automatically at any user selected
Sunday or not to occur.
The Time Base calendar provides automatic compensation for
leap years. When programmed to occur automatically at a user selected
Sunday, time will advance one hour on the date programmed
The Time Base Control provides for Daylight Savings Time to
at 02:00:00 A.M. and decrement one hour on the date
be programmed to occur automatically as defined by law in
programmed at 02:00:00 A.M.. Daylight Savings Time is only
most states or not to occur.
capable of being implemented once per year.
The Time Base clock is maintained to within +0.005 % at 20oC
(68oF) and to within +0.02% over the specified operating
temperature range as compared to Coordinated Universal
Time (WWV) standard for a period of thirty days during
periods when AC power is not applied.

FUNCTION Page 103
Maximum 2 Timing by Phase and Phase Omit by Phase are

3.9.5 Program Day Free Mode modifiers and may not be part of an event which
selects a pattern (Dial/Split/Offset) or Flash.
A program day is the list of traffic and/or auxiliary events to
occur in a 24 hour period. The TBC program provides for 99 The event programming capability when responding to
program days to be defined. Coordination Inputs provides for partial TBC control and
partial interconnect control as well as totally one or the other
The normal day-of-week (Sunday through Saturday) event
(When Dial and/or Split is Interconnect, Offset is
listing will utilize program days 01 through 07 with Sunday
automatically interconnect).
being program day 01.
When the TBC On Line input is active, the TBC traffic program
The exceptions to the normal day-of-week event listings
events have no priority and program selection is based on
(special days) will utilize program days 01 through 99.
manual inputs or interconnect inputs.
Program days 01 through 49 will be utilized for special day
programs which occur on the same date (month and month When the On Line input is active, the coordination routine
day) every year. Program days 50 through 99 shall be utilized reverts to TBC traffic program control based on sync monitor
for special days which occur on one date (year, month, & failure.
month day) with program days 98 and 99 being utilized for
the user defined Daylight Savings Time increment and
decrement. 3.9.8 Data Entry, Display, And
It is possible to equate program days which may require the Removal
same event listing to effectively multiply the event capacity.
TBC data may be entered through the CU front panel,
It is possible to transfer (copy) an entire program day event downloaded through the system interface, or transferred
listing to another program day to permit data editing to from another CU.
create a similar but different program day event listing.
TBC data may be displayed and/or scanned (forward or
backward) from any point in time. Traffic events, auxiliary
3.9.6 Event Capacity events, or special days may be displayed and/or scanned.
A minimum of 250 traffic and/or auxiliary events are capable TBC data may be removed as individual events, all traffic
of being programmed. A minimum of 250 time-of-year events and auxiliary events, all special days, or all time base
(special days) are capable of being programmed. The capacity data.
of either of the above is inversely affected by the number of
entries in the other.
3.9.9 Auxiliary Outputs
The node count for events is one for each line entry made in
the Traffic, Auxiliary, or Time-Of-Year structure plus one There are three auxiliary outputs available. Each output is
additional node for each program day plus one additional non-cyclic, each totally independent of any other output.
node for when TOY entries are made. A total of 198 nodes are These outputs are not affected by any other input including
available for events. the On Line input. The auxiliary outputs may begin and/or
end concurrently with another program.
A. A traffic event shall consist of a Pattern (Dial #, Split #, &
Offset #) or Free Mode Phase Modifiers and the time of
occurrence (Hour, minute, & program day). 3.9.10 TBC Alternate Week
B. An auxiliary event shall consist of the condition of The TBC events are implemented from a weekly schedule of
Auxiliary outputs, System Detector controls, Dimming program days on a day-of-week (except for special days)
control and the time of occurrence (Hour, minute, & basis.
program day).
The normal weekly schedule (Day-Of-Week, Sunday through
C. A time-of-year event shall consist of a special day and/or Saturday) event listing will utilize program days 01 through
special week plus the date of occurrence (year, month, & 07 with Sunday being program day 01.
month day).
The Time-of-Year event structure provides a means of
substituting nine alternate weekly schedules for the normal
3.9.7 Traffic Programs weekly schedule. Alternate Week 1 will utilize program days
11 through 17 with Sunday being program day 11, Alternate
In addition to dial, split, and offset commands, the TBC Week 2 will utilize program days 21 through 27 with Sunday
program provides the following as traffic events: being program day 21, etc. through Alternate Week 9 which
1) Flashing (Voltage Monitor inactive) will utilize program days 91 through 97 with Sunday being
2) Free or Respond to Coordination Inputs program day 91..
3) Maximum 2 Timing by Phase
4) Phase Omit by Phase

Page 104 FUNCTION
In the applicable modes, Auxiliary #2 output performs a

3.9.11 TBC Dimming dual purpose. When there is no TBC event programming
for Auxiliary #2, this output will function as a Any
The CU may be programmed to provide output dimming
Preempt status output.
based on a Time Base Auxiliary Event and DIMMING ENABLE
input (both must be active to enable). See the previous In the applicable modes, Auxiliary #3 output performs a
section on dimming. dual purpose. When there is no TBC event programming
for Auxiliary #3, this output will function as a Detector
Diagnostic Reset output.
3.9.12 TBC Special Function
System Special Function #1 to #8 outputs may be
Mapping programmed individually as Local TBC outputs. Once so
programmed, a System Special Function output will not
The CU may be programmed to provide mapping of Special respond to system commands as to it's state.
Function control to logical functions via user programming.
3. Output Levels: All logic signals are low state (nominal 0
This function is included in the TBC section because most of volts DC) for the operate condition.
the time the changes are to be implemented on a time of day
basis. Also, the Special Function control within the Auxiliary 4. Connector Pins: Input / Output pin terminations are
event purpose in being was to implement undefined provided in accordance with the following table:
functions, Special Function control is capable of being Time Base Inputs Time Base Outputs
mapped to perform purposes other than simply control
outputs. On Line Auxiliary # 1 Output
It is possible to map more than one function to the same Dimming Enable Auxiliary # 2 Output
logical control (i.e., Special Function 1 through Special
Set Clock Auxiliary # 3 Output
Function 8 may be mapped into the logical control of the
Special Function 1 output). Special Function # 1
Alternate Passage and Maximum times are provided by Special Function # 2
mapping Vehicle, Pedestrian, or Special Detector timing
Special Function # 3
parameters (Extend & Delay) to perform Passage and
Maximum functions. Special Function # 4
Dynamic Maximum and Step times are provided by mapping Special Function # 5
Vehicle, Pedestrian, or Special Detector timing parameters
(Extend & Delay) to perform Dynamic Maximum and Step Special Function # 6
functions. Special Function # 7
Special Function # 8
3.9.13 External TBC Interface
The Time Base Control external interface for Type 1 CUs is via 3.9.14 TBC Indications
Port 1. The external interface for Type 2 CUs is via Connectors
A, B, and C or D Indications are provided on the display and appropriately
identified to facilitate the determination of time base
The availability of TBC input / output functions are dependent operation.
upon the CU hardware configuration, Terminal & Facilities
wiring and configuration, and user programming. The indications provide the following:
The Time Base Control operates with an external interface as Current Status
follows: 1. Date, Time, Day-Of-Week
2. Current Event Pattern
1. Time Base Inputs: In the applicable modes, the TBC ON 3. Current Event Auxiliary Functions
LINE input is available to disable the Time Base pattern
outputs to the internal coordination program.
In the applicable modes, the DIMMING ENABLE input is
available to enable dimming when the Auxiliary Event
3.10 PREEMPTION
calls for dimming operation.
In the applicable modes, the SET CLOCK input is available
to set the CU clock to 04:00 hours. The CU includes provisions for an internal preemptor with
2. Time Base Outputs: In the applicable modes, outputs for the capability of 6 unique preempt sequences.
Time Base Auxiliary and Special Functions are available.
The outputs are “on” when their respective
auxiliary/special function is part of the current time base
event.

FUNCTION Page 105
3.10.1 Operation 3.10.2.1 Input Priority

The Preemption program provides for setting priorities of the
Internal Preemption is a special program operating within preemption inputs with respect one to the other and to other
the CU. The preemption program accepts commands from 6 inputs. The priorities are as follows:
preempt inputs and provides the timing and signal display
programmed to occur in response to each. A. Preempt routines always have priority over and override
Low Priority routines. If a Preempt call becomes active
Preemption controls are internally applied. Internally applied while the Preemption program is in a Low Priority
preempt controls will have priority. routine, the controller shall immediately terminate the
The standard input form, for Preempt (Railroad or Emergency Low Priority routine and enter the Preempt routine at
Vehicle), is a continuous Ground True logic input. The Preempt Interval 1 (Selective Pedestrian Clear).
alternate input form, for Low Priority (Bus or Transit 1. Preempt 1 normally has priority over Preempt 2. If
Vehicles), is a pulsating (1 to 30 HZ) Ground True logic input. Preempt 1 becomes active while the Preemption program
When the Preempt Link value equals the preempt is in the Preempt 2 routine, the CU immediately
programmed (Preempt 1 linked to Preempt 1), then a terminates the Preempt 2 routine and enters the Preempt
constant input actuation will place a call for the Low Priority 1 routine at Preempt Interval 1 (Selective Pedestrian
routine. Clear). When Preempt 2 has been terminated by Preempt
1, control will not return to Preempt 2 at the end of
The preemption program recognizes the current signal Preempt 1 except when Preempt 2 demand is still present
display at the time of preempt and provides transition timing at the end of Preempt 1 or Preempt 2 Duration time has
and signal display to a programmed preempt condition. Two not expired at the end of Preempt 1.
preempt conditions with an intermediate set of clearances are
capable of being programmed (i.e., Track Clear and Dwell). The priority of Preempt 1 over Preempt 2 is capable of
Once the preempt has been satisfied, the preemption being canceled via program entry. If the priority has been
program provides an exit transition timing and signal display canceled and the Preempt 1 becomes active while the
to a programmed (one for each of the six preempt inputs) preemption program is in the Preempt 2 routine, the
return-to-normal condition. Preempt 2 routine will complete normally through
Interval 8 (Dwell). After Preempt 2 Interval 8 is complete,
The Low Priority routine causes termination of the current the CU will enter the Preempt 1 routine at Interval 1
active phase(s), if other than the Low Priority phase(s), and (Selective Pedestrian Clear) only if the Preempt 1 demand
an orderly cycling to the Low Priority phase(s). Cycling to the is still present or Preempt 1 Duration time has not
Low Priority phase(s) will provide service according to expired.
minimum timing requirements of the phase(s) serviced while
cycling. Once the Low Priority has been satisfied, the routine When Preempt 2 becomes active while the preemption
shall release control to normal operation. program is in the Preempt 1 routine, the Preempt 1
routine will complete normally through Interval 8 (Dwell)
Enabling a Low Priority routine (one or more Dwell phases regardless of the priority of Preempt 1 versus Preempt 2.
programmed) will insert a delay of 500 milliseconds into the After Preempt 1 Interval 8 is complete, the CU will enter
recognition of a standard Preempt routine. This delay is the Preempt 2 routine at Interval 1 (Selective Pedestrian
required to enable the unit to determine whether the current Clear) only if the Preempt 2 demand is still present or
actuation is a Low Priority or Preempt call. Preempt 2 Duration time has not expired. Whenever both
inputs become active at the same time, Preempt 1 will
A Low Priority call will terminate 500 milliseconds before the
occur first.
CU can determine same. This delay is required to determine
that the pulsating signal is not in an off cycle. Whenever more than one Preempt routine reaches the
point of transition (Delay and Min Green/Walk timed out)
When a Low Priority routine is enabled and the Preempt call
simultaneously, the lower numbered routine will have
for the same input is a pulse signal, the duration of the pulse
control.
signal must be a minimum of one (1) second or the CU may
interpret same as a Priority call or no call. Preempt 2 will normally have priority over Preempt 3. The
priority of Preempt 2 over Preempt 3 is capable of being
Preempt and Low Priority parameters may be entered
canceled via program entry.
through the CU keypad, downloaded through the system
interface, or transferred from another CU. Preempt and Low Preempt 3, 4, 5, and 6 will normally have equal status
Priority settings and activity are capable of being monitored (priority canceled). A priority of Preempt 3 over Preempt
on the CU display. Preempt and Low Priority controls are 4, Preempt 4 over Preempt 5, and Preempt 5 over Preempt
internally applied and shall override the standard unit input 6 is capable of being established via program entry.
modifiers (i.e., Hold, Omit, etc.).
Operation capability as described above for Preempt 1 and
2 is be provided for Preempt 2 and 3, 3 and 4, 4 and 5, and
3.10.2 Preempt Routines 5 and 6.
The Preemption program provides for six Preempt routines. 2. All Preempt routines normally have priority over
Automatic Flash. If any Preempt becomes active while the
CU is in Automatic Flash, Automatic Flash will terminate

Page 106 FUNCTION
normally and the CU will enter the Preempt routine at will become active whenever any Preempt or Priority routine
Preempt Interval 2 (Selective Yellow Clear). is in control (i.e., running).
The method by which flashing operation is accomplished Whenever an Auxiliary 2 event has been programmed and it
determines the transition between Automatic Flash and is desired to again implement the Preempt/Priority output,
Preempt as follows: the clear memory function within TBC must be used to
a. Voltage Monitor Output inactive; the signal display eliminate all TBC or all Auxiliary events (Code "0" or Code "2").
for a transition from Automatic Flash to Interval 2 is
Red for all vehicle phases, Don’t Walk for all pedestrian
phases, and Red for all vehicle overlaps that are 3.10.2.3 Timing
programmed in normal operation. The signal display The Preempt routine provides sixteen timing intervals for
for a transition from Automatic Flash in Preempt each Preempt routine and one timing interval for each ring in
Interval 3 (Selective Red Clear) is Red for all vehicle the CU.
phases, Don’t Walk for all pedestrian phases, and Red
for all vehicle overlaps that are programmed in normal The ring related timing interval provides the Minimum Green
operation. or Walk timing that must have occurred prior to a Preempt
b. Load Switch Driver Output Flashing; the CU will transition. This same timing shall apply on a Preempt to
provide a timed exit transition period when any Preempt
Flashing Yellow display will be followed by a Red,
The timing Intervals and Ranges are as follows:
Flashing Red, or Dark display. The Load Switch Driver
outputs during this period will be Yellow for those Interval Range
which were Flashing Yellow and Red for those which
were Flashing Red or Dark. I. Min Green/Walk - Ring 1 0 to 999 Sec
The Exit Flash transition timing is 1) Yellow - longest II. Min Green/Walk - Ring 2 0 to 999 Sec
phase Yellow Change of phases receiving a steady III. Min Green/Walk - Ring 3 0 to 999 Sec
yellow and 2) Red - longest phase Red Clearance of
phases receiving a steady red. IV. Min Green/Walk - Ring 4 0 to 999 Sec
The priority of Preempt over Automatic Flash is capable of

being canceled via program entry. If the priority of The sixteen timing intervals per Preempt routine are as
Preempt over Automatic Flash has been canceled and a follows:
Preempt input becomes active while the CU is in
Automatic Flash, the CU will remain in Automatic Flash Interval Range
until the demand (Both Automatic Flash and Preempt) is A. Delay 0 to 999 Sec
terminated. Preempt demand is determined by the state
of the call and Duration timing. B. Extend 0 to 999 Sec
3. Start-Up Flash always has priority over all Preempt C. Duration 0 to 999 Sec
routines. If a Preempt input becomes active or is active
D. Max Call 0 to 999 Sec
during Start-Up Flash, the CU will maintain the Start-Up
Flash condition for the duration of the both Preempt E. Lock Out 0 to 999 Sec
demand and Start-Up Flash time.
1. Selective Pedestrian Clear 0 to 999 Sec
4. External Start always has priority over all Preempt
routines. If External Start becomes active during a 2. Selective Yellow Change 0 to 99.9 Sec
Preempt routine, the CU will revert to Start-Up Flash 3. Selective Red Clear 0 to 99.9 Sec
rather than the Initialization condition. The CU will
maintain the Start-Up Flash condition for the duration of 4. Track Green 0 to 999 Sec
the External Start, Preempt demand, and Start-Up Flash 5. Track Pedestrian Clear 0 to 999 Sec
time.
6. Track Yellow Change 0 to 99.9 Sec
3.10.2.2 Output Modification 7. Track Red Clear 0 to 99.9 Sec

8. Dwell (Hold) 0 to 999 Sec
The Preempt routines provide for setting Ring and Phase
outputs to the following conditions after Delay has timed out 9. Return Pedestrian Clear 0 to 999 Sec
and Preempt transition has begun:
1) Phase On, Next, and Check : No Output except during 10. Return Yellow Change 0 to 99.9 Sec
a cycling dwell 11. Return Red Clear 0 to 99.9 Sec
2) Ring Status Bits : Code 7 ( NEMA )
** Exit Phase (Return-To-Normal Display)
A Preempt/Priority Output, when Auxiliary 2 is not
programmed for output as a TBC Auxiliary function, it will A. Interval 1 (Selective Pedestrian Clear) shall terminate
have a Preempt/Priority function. The Preempt/Priority output when all pedestrian signals that are to be Don’t Walk in
Interval 4 (Track Green) are Don’t Walk, or when it's time

FUNCTION Page 107
has expired, or when any Pedestrian Clear interval active 3.10.2.5 Greens & Return
at the beginning of Interval 1 has been active the lesser of
the normal Pedestrian Clear or the Preempt Selective The Preempt routine provides for the selection of vehicle and
Pedestrian Clear. pedestrian signal status in Interval 4 (Track Green) and
Interval 8 (Dwell) and the phase(s) to receive service first
B. Interval 2 (Selective Yellow Change) shall terminate when following the completion of Preempt.
all vehicle signals that are to be Red in Interval 4 (Track
Green) are Red, or when it's time has expired, or when any Each vehicle load switch driver group (G-Y-R) and each
Yellow Change interval active at the beginning of Interval pedestrian load switch driver group (W-PC-D) is selectable as
2 has been active the Preempt Selective Yellow timing (see to the output condition (R, G, FY, FR, or DARK) and (D, W, FW,
paragraph 'E' below). or Dark) in Intervals 4 (Track Green) and Interval 8 (Dwell)
separately.
C. Interval 3 (Selective Red Clear) shall terminate when it's
time has expired, or when any Red Clear interval active at The CU shall be capable of setting a limit on the time a
the beginning of Interval 3 has been active the Preempt Preempt call may remain active (MXCALL) and be considered
Selective Red timing (see paragraph 'F' below). valid. When the Preempt call has been active for this time
period, the CU shall return to normal operation (release from
D. Interval 8 (Dwell) terminates when it's time has expired, Dwell). This Preempt call shall be considered invalid until
the Duration timing has completed, and the preempt such time as a change in state occurs (no longer active).
demand is no longer active (see Link & Cycle).
The Preempt routine provides the capability to link itself to a
E. The Preempt Yellow timing (Sel Yel, Trk Yel, or Ret Yel) higher priority Preempt to enable multiple clearance
will be equal to the Preempt Yellow entry except when the movements prior to a Dwell state. More than one Preempt
Preempt Yellow entry is less than 3 seconds then the Routine may be linked to the same Preempt Routine.
Preempt Yellow timing will be equal to the Traffic Yellow
(Phase & Overlap) timing. Special Sequence (i.e., -GRN/-YEL and EXT PED CLR) Control
and RED REVERT timing shall be functional while in a
F. The Preempt Red timing (Sel Red, Trk Red, or Ret Red) Preempt Routine.
will be equal to the Preempt Red entry except when the
Preempt Red entry equals ZERO then the Preempt Red In that all phase and overlap load switch driver sets are not
timing will be equal to the Traffic Red (Phase & Overlap) always used for normal signal control, the EPAC310 and
timing. EPAC360 has provided control of these drivers during Track
Green and Dwell even though they may not be programmed
as active during normal operation. This control may satisfy
3.10.2.4 Delay, Extend, & Duration requirements for special signals and control during Preempt
routines.
The Preempt routine provides a timed interval (DELAY) after
the Preempt call is received before the CU operation is The phase(s) to receive service first on exit from a Preempt
interrupted and a Preempt transition begins. are capable of being selected via the keypad.
When a Preempt call is received, the Delay shall begin timing. All calls present at the beginning of the Preempt routine will
The completion of the Delay will start the Preempt routine at be present (subject to phase memory programming and
Interval 1 (Selective Pedestrian Clear) if the Minimum detector status) and will be serviced with the user entered
Green/Walk timing is complete. Exit Calls.
When the Preempt input memory has been programmed for On exit from a Preempt routine a return to coordinated
non-locking and the Preempt call terminates during the operation or a Low Priority routine may be prevented for a
Delay, the Delay and Duration timing will reset and a Preempt specified time period (LOCKOUT) or until one complete cycle
transition and display will not occur. of service to phases with serviceable calls.
Once a Preempt transition has begun, the routine will
complete regardless of the call status and/or memory 3.10.2.6 Transition
programming.
The Preemption program provides the signal display for an
The Extend timer will be reset whenever a Preempt actuation orderly and safe transition from the point of entry to the first
is received and will begin timing when the Preempt actuation preempt green state (Track Green), from the first to second
terminates. A call for the Preempt routine will be placed for green state (Track Green to Dwell), and from the second
the period between the Extend timer reset and time out green to the return-to-normal green state (Dwell to Normal).
(extends the call).
The normal interval timing in effect at the moment Preempt
The Duration timer will begin timing when the Preempt call is recognized (after Delay and Minimum Green/Walk are
is received. Duration timing will be internally set to a value satisfied) will continue operating through Preempt Intervals
equal to Delay plus Duration parameters and will time 1, 2, and 3 so as not to provide abnormally long pedestrian
concurrently with Delay. The Duration timing will be reset clear, yellow, or red timings.
with each Preempt actuation (extends Dwell for the passage
of subsequent emergency vehicles). During a Preempt to Preempt transition, the Minimum
Green/Walk operation will be satisfied prior to the Track
Green or Dwell interval termination to service the higher

Page 108 FUNCTION
priority Preempt. The shorter of Minimum Green/Walk or the

appropriate interval time (Track or Dwell) must have Vehicle Signal Transitions
occurred prior to the transition. Preempt Interval
The display during intervals [ 1, 2, & 3 ], [ 5, 6, & 7 ], and [ 9, Prior 1 2 3 Next
10, & 11 ] are the result of a comparison between the prior
display and the next display according to the following chart: Display 5 6 7 Display
9 10 11
Vehicle Signal Transitions FG FG Y R R
Preempt Interval FG FG FG FG G
Prior 1 2 3 Next FG FG Y R FR
Display 5 6 7 Display FG FG Y R FY
9 10 11 FG FG FG FG FG
R R R R R FG FG Y R Dark
R R R R G Dark Dark Dark Dark R
R R R R Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark G
R R R R FR Dark Dark Dark Dark FR
R R R R FY Dark Dark Dark Dark FY
R R R R FG Dark Dark Dark Dark FG
Y* Y/R Y/R R R Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Y* Y/R Y/R R G * Would apply to Interval 1-2-3 only.
Y* Y/R Y/R R FR
Y* Y/R Y/R R FY Pedestrian Signal Transitions
Y* Y/R Y/R R FG Preempt Interval

Y* Y/R Y/R R Dark Prior 1 2 3 Next
G G Y R R Display 5 6 7 Display
G G G G G 9 10 11
G G Y R FR D D D D D
G G Y R FY D D D D W
G G G G FG D D D D FW
G G Y R Dark D D D D Dark
FR FR R R R F* F/D D D D
FR FR FR FR G F* F/D D D W
FR FR FR FR FR F* F/D D D FW
FR FR FR FR FY F* F/D D D Dark
FR FR FR FR FG W F D D D
FR FR R R Dark W W W W W
FY FY Y R R W W W W FW
FY FY FY FY G W F D D Dark
FY FY Y R FR FW F D D D
FY FY FY FY FY FW FW FW FW W
FY FY FY FY FG FW FW FW FW FW
FY FY Y R Dark FW F D D Dark

FUNCTION Page 109
(Delay timed out) simultaneously, the lower numbered

Pedestrian Signal Transitions routine will have control.
Preempt Interval The Preemption program provides for priorities of the
Prior 1 2 3 Next Priority routines with respect to other inputs. The priorities
shall be as follows:
Display 5 6 7 Display
A. Preempt routines always have priority over and override
9 10 11 Low Priority routines.
Dark Dark D D D If a Low Priority call is active on exit from a Preempt
routine, the Lockout for that Priority routine shall not
Dark Dark D D W
terminate prior to the Low Priority call.
Dark Dark D D FW
B. Automatic Flash and Low Priority routines are equal in
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark priority.
* Would apply to Interval 1-2-3 only. On exit from Automatic Flash, the CU will Lockout all Low
Priority routines until one complete cycle of service to
When Extended Pedestrian Clear is programmed, Interval 1, phases with serviceable calls. If a Low Priority call is active
5, & 9 will time concurrently with Intervals 2+3, 6+7, and on exit from Automatic Flash, the Lockout for that Priority
10+11 respectively. routine shall not terminate prior to the Low Priority call.
Preempt will restart at any point in the preempt sequence If Automatic Flash is dropped prior to Automatic Flash
starting with Track Green and through Return Red Clear state, Lockout of priorities will occur.
when an OFF to ON transition of the Preempt Input occurs.
This is to cover the cases where a train has come and gone C. Start-Up Flash always has priority over Low Priority
before the timing has completed then another train appears. routines.
On exit from Start-Up Flash, the CU will Lockout all Low
3.10.2.7 Cycle Priority routines until one complete cycle of service to
phases with serviceable calls. If a Low Priority call is active
The Preempt routine allows cycling during the Dwell interval on exit from Start-Up Flash, the Lockout for that Priority
prior to the completion of Duration and termination of the routine shall not terminate prior to the Low Priority call.
Preempt call. The Dwell interval time establishes the
D. External Start always has priority over Low Priority
minimum cycling time.
routines.
When the Dwell state includes phase green(s) that are
On exit from the External Start Initialization State, the CU
permitted to cycle, cycling shall begin in the Dwell state.
will Lockout all Low Priority routines until one complete
Phase or Overlap outputs that are not permitted to cycle will
cycle of service to phases with serviceable calls. If a Low
maintain the output state as defined in the Dwell interval.
Priority call is active on exit from the External Start
When the Dwell state does not include phase green(s) that are Initialization State, the Lockout for that Priority routine
permitted to cycle, cycling shall begin with the cycling shall not terminate prior to the Low Priority call.
allowed phases which would normally follow the dwell phase
E. Stop Time always has priority over Low Priority routines.
green(s).
When Stop Time becomes inactive, the CU will Lockout all
Pedestrian outputs will not cycle unless their applicable
Low Priority routines until one complete cycle of service to
phase is also permitted to cycle.
phases with serviceable calls. If a Low Priority call is active
Exit cycling operation to normal will operate like entrance to when Stop Time becomes inactive, the Lockout for that
preempt. Priority routine shall not terminate prior to the Low
Priority call.
3.10.3 Low Priority Routines F. Phase Omits when active on Low Priority Dwell Phase will
prevent the phase from being serviced. Should all Dwell
The Preemption program provides for six Priority routines. Phases be omitted, the Priority Routine will not alter
normal traffic operation.
Each Preempt Input provides two modes of priority control
based on the form of the input signal.
The Low Priority Routines remain included to accommodate 3.10.3.2 Timing
older versions of the SEPAC software. The Low Priority routine provides six timing intervals for
each Low Priority routine. The timing Intervals and Ranges
are as follows:
3.10.3.1 Input Priorities
The six timing intervals per Low Priority routine are as
All Priority routines are equal in priority. Whenever more follows:
than one Priority routine reaches the point of transition
Interval Range

Page 110 FUNCTION
3.10.3.5 Dwell & Return

Interval Range
A. Delay 0 to 999 Sec The Low Priority routine provides for the selection of the
phase(s) to receive service during the Dwell period and the
B. Extend 0 to 999 Sec phase(s) to receive pedestrian calls upon termination of the
Low Priority routine.
C. Duration 0 to 999 Sec
The presence or absence of a concurrent Walk during the
D. Dwell 0 to 999 Sec
Dwell period will be subject to programming and/or
E. Max Call 0 to 999 Sec pedestrian calls (Pedestrian movements shall not recycle).
F. Lock Out 0 to 999 Sec The Dwell period shall not terminate while:
1) The Low Priority Call is active
2) Duration is timing
3.10.3.3 Delay, Extend, & Duration 3) Dwell is timing
The Low Priority routine provides a timed interval (DELAY) The CU shall be capable of setting a limit on the time a Low
after the Low Priority call is received before the CU operation Priority call may remain active (MXCALL) and be considered
is interrupted and the Low Priority transition occurs. valid. When the Low Priority call has been active for this time
period, the CU shall return to normal operation (release from
When a Low Priority call is received, the Delay shall begin
Dwell). This Low Priority call shall be considered invalid until
timing. The completion of the Delay will start the Low Priority
such time as a change in state occurs (no longer active).
transition to the Dwell Phase(s).
All calls present at the beginning of the Low Priority routine
When the Low Priority input memory has been programmed
as well as those received during the Low Priority routine will
for non-locking and the Low Priority call terminates during
be present (subject to phase memory programming and
the Delay, the Delay and Duration timing will reset and a Low
detector status) and will be serviced with the entered Exit
Priority transition or dwell will not occur.
Calls.
Once a Low Priority transition has begun, the routine will
Following the exit from a LP routine, lock out of coordination
complete regardless of the input status and/or memory
or entry into another LP routine is controlled :
programming.
Lock Out = 0: unit will exit and cycle until all calls are
The Extend timer will be reset whenever a Low Priority
serviced or a phase is reserviced.
actuation is received and will begin timing when the Low
Priority actuation terminates. A call for the Low Priority Lock Out = 1 - 3: No lock out will occur.
routine will be placed for the period between the Extend
timer reset and time out (extends the call). Lock Out > 3: Lock out will last for the time entered.
The Duration timer will begin timing when the Low Priority Coordination continues to run during a Low Priority routine
call is received. Duration timing will be internally set to a and will determine the phase(s) to follow the Low Priority
value equal to Delay plus Duration parameters and will time routine and any LOCKOUT timing based on the current
concurrently with Delay. The Duration timing will be reset allowed phase(s) in the background cycle.
with each Low Priority actuation (extends Dwell for the
passage of subsequent vehicles). 3.10.4 Memory
The preemption program provides input memory which is
3.10.3.4 Transition
capable of being set to locking or non-locking via program
The Low Priority routine provides for an orderly and safe entry.
transition from the point the transition begins to the
When input memory is set for non-locking, termination of the
programmed Dwell Phase(s).
input prior to implementation of the routine will not initiate
The CU will place a call for the Dwell Phase in each ring and preempt operation.
cycle as if Force were active on said ring until the Dwell Phase
is On. This will preclude early termination of a Green interval
prior to the completion of Minimum Green, Maximum Initial, 3.10.5 External Preempt
Walk, or Pedestrian Clear time. Interface
The ability to Skip phase(s) with serviceable calls, during the
transition cycle, is provided as a user option. If a DWELL The preemptor external interface for Type 1 CUs is via Port 1.
phase is green then other rings in the same cluster may The external interface for Type 2 CUs is via Connectors A, B,
backup (skip) to service concurrent DWELL phases in their and C.
rings. The preemptor operates with an external interface as follows:
1. Preempt Inputs: The Preemptor selects the preempt
routine to be active, according to the current status of the

FUNCTION Page 111
inputs and the preempt priority entries. In the applicable

mode, six inputs for preempt actuation are available. 3.11 SYSTEM INTERFACE
Each Preempt/Priority Input provides two modes of
control based on the form of the input signal. The
standard input form, for Preempt (Railroad or Emergency
Vehicle), is a continuous Ground True logic input. The Although defined as "systems" interface, all of these
alternate input form, for Low Priority (Bus or Transit capabilities are available and may be of value in the stand
Vehicles), is a pulsating (1 to 30 HZ) Ground True logic alone controller (i.e., Alarms, MOE, Speed, etc.).
input.
2. Preempt Outputs: Six outputs, one for each preempt 3.11.1 System Control
routine is available. The outputs are “on” when their
respective preempt is in control. The local controller receives command data from the on-
street master. This data includes:
The PRIORITY ACTIVE output provides Ground True logic
1) Plan Selection (a minimum of sixteen independently
output when a Priority routine is in control.
called dial/split combinations, each with an
Each PREEMPT # output provides Ground True logic independent cycle length and three offsets.
output when either the corresponding Priority or Preempt 2) Coordinated, Free, Standby, or Flash Mode Selection
# routine is in control. 3) A System-Wide Clock Synchronization Command
4) Request for Local Data Response.
An output mode is available that provides a 1 pulsating (1 5) Timing Parameter Downloading and Verification.
HZ) Ground True output on the inactive PREEMPT # 6) Special Functions
outputs plus a steady Ground True output on the active
PREEMPT # output.
3. Input Levels: All logic signals are low state (nominal 0
3.11.2 Backup (Communications)
volts DC) for the operate condition of all preempt inputs. Local TBC & Coordination capabilities exist for backup
4. Connector Pins: Input/output pin terminations are operation on the loss of communications with the master.
In the absence of being polled by a Master, within a user
Preemption Inputs Preemption Outputs defined period (see 0), the local will revert to backup TBC &
Coordination mode. When again polled by the Master, the
Preempt 1 Input Preempt 1 Output local will return to the System mode and transition to the
Preempt 2 Input Preempt 2 Output Master called program.
Preempt 3 Input Preempt 3 Output

Preempt 4 Input Preempt 4 Output
3.11.3 Local Alarms Report
Preempt 5 Input Preempt 5 Output The following functions are monitored and the status of each
is logged in the Local Alarms Report for later uploading to the
Preempt 6 Input Preempt 6 Output Central Office Master.
Preempt / Priority Items "A" through "K", as follows, are transmitted to the On-
Priority Active Street Master once each minute:
A. Cycle Fault: See Cycling Diagnostics
3.10.6 Preempt Indications B. Coordination Fault: See Cycling Diagnostics
Indications are provided on the display and appropriately C. Coordination Failure: See Cycling Diagnostics
identified to facilitate the determination of preempt D. Cycle Failure: See Cycling Diagnostics
operation.
E. Voltage Monitor: If the local controller Voltage Monitor
The indications provide the following: function is not normal, the Status will be logged as OFF-
Current Status LINE VOLTAGE MONITOR. If subsequent to a Voltage
1. Preempt Call Monitor logging the Voltage Monitor function is corrected,
2. Preempt In Control the Status will be logged as ON-LINE if no other failure or
3. Preempt Interval Off Line condition is present.
4. Preempt Interval Counter F. Conflict Flash: Should the CU MMU/CONFLICT FLASH
input remain active for a period of time exceeding the
Start-Up Flash time, the Status is logged as OFF-LINE
CONFLICT FLASH. If subsequent to a Conflict Flash
logging the MMU/CONFLICT FLASH input is removed, the
Status will be logged as ON-LINE if no other failure or
OFF-LINE condition is present.

Page 112 FUNCTION
G. Local Flash: Should the CU LOCAL FLASH input become COORD OFFSET FAULT: the local controller is making an
active, MMU/CONFLICT FLASH input is not active, and offset correction. An offset correction during the first ten
Flash is not commanded by the Master, the Status will be cycles of a pattern or during the ten cycles following the
logged as OFF-LINE LOCAL FLASH. If subsequent to a logging of a COORD OFFSET FAULT.
Local Flash logging the LOCAL FLASH input is removed,
CRIT'L ALARMS CLEAR: all defined Critical Alarms are no
the Status will be logged as ON-LINE if no other failure or
longer active/present (see SOLO Modem - External in this
OFF-LINE condition is present.
section).
H. Automatic Flash: Should Automatic Flash be commanded,
CYCLE MOE LOG FAULT: Cycle MOE logging routine contains
MMU/CONFLICT FLASH input is not active, and LOCAL
invalid record reference data.
FLASH input is not active, the Status will be logged as
OFF-LINE REMOTE FLASH. If subsequent to a Automatic CYCLE ZERO PED DELAY: service to an oversized pedestrian
Flash logging the Command is removed, the Status will be occurred. An oversized pedestrian is a pedestrian whose
logged as ON-LINE if no other failure or OFF-LINE timing is not satisfied by the coordination pattern split
condition is present. time.
I. Preempt: Should any of the CU Preempt inputs become CYCLE ZERO PHASE FALT: the coordination cycle reached
active, the Status will be logged as OFF LINE PREEMPT #. If zero prior to the coordination phase timers reaching a
subsequent to a Preempt logging the Preempt input is corresponding position. This fact is not logged 1) the first
removed, the Status will be logged as ON-LINE if no other cycle of a pattern, 2) when offset correcting by going
failure or OFF-LINE condition is present. short, 3) the first cycle following a COORD OFFSET FAULT
and 4) when logging a CYCLE ZERO PED DELAY.
J. Local Free: Should any of the CU inputs and/or
programming cause it to not respond to coordination This may occur the first cycle without correction after going
control, the Status will be logged as NO COORD - LOCAL long during some pattern changes when an actuated
FREE. If subsequent to a Local Free logging the CU phase is timing at T Zero (i.e., leading turns with unequal
becomes able to respond to coordination control, the times).
Status will be logged as COORD ACTIVE if no other failure
or NO COORD condition is present. DATA CHANGE - KEYPAD: new data has been entered via the
keypad.
K. Special Status: Should any of the six Special Status inputs
become active, the Status will be logged as SPECIAL DATA CHANGE - REMOTE: new data has been downloaded.
STATUS # ON. If subsequent to a Special Status On logging DATA LOCK - REMOTE: Illinois District 1 (Special Firmware)
the input is removed, the Status will be logged as SPECIAL received a Data Lock command via communications.
STATUS # OFF.
DATA LOCK - TIMEOUT: Illinois District 1 (Special Firmware)
L. Power On/Off: Should a power interruption exceeding 50 performed an automatic Data Lock approximately ten
milliseconds occur, the Status will be logged as POWER minutes after either 1) ‘UNLOCK’ was gained or 2) the last
OFF. When power returns following an interruption of keystroke.
longer than 550 milliseconds, the Status will be logged as
POWER ON. DATA UNLOCK - REMOTE: Illinois District 1 (Special
Firmware) received a Data Unlock command via
The Local Alarms Report has the capacity to store up to 120 communications.
alarms. The alarms once logged will remain until the report
capacity is exceeded at which time the oldest alarm will be DET LOG FAULT: Detector Fault logging routine contains
deleted and the new one will be added. invalid record reference data.
The Local Alarms Report Format shall be as follows: DIAG: ADDRESS FAULT: the processor attempts to access a
word or an instruction at an odd address.
EPAC SYSTEM - LOCAL ALARMS REPORT
MM/DD HH:MM -------STATUS------- DIAG: BUS FAULT: the processor attempts to access memory
09/20 10:20 NO COORD - CYCLE F'LT that does not exist.
09/20 10:22 NO COORD - COORD F'LT
09/20 10:24 COORD ACTIVE DIAG: DIVIDE BY ZERO: the processor encounters an
09/25 06:00 POWER OFF instruction to divide by zero.
09/25 08:02 POWER ON
DIAG: EEPROM CRC ERR: the results of the running EEPROM
diagnostic denotes a fault.
ALARM ### - RESERVED: this alarm ### has been reserved for
future use. DIAG: EPROM CRC ERR: the results of the running EPROM
diagnostic denotes a fault.
ALARM LOG FAULT: Local Alarm logging routine contains
invalid record reference data. DIAG: FALSE INTERRUPT: the processor receives a Bus Fault
during interrupt processing.
COMM LOG FAULT: Communications Fault logging routine
contains invalid record reference data. DIAG: INV. TS2-A1 CNF: If either the T&F BIU 1 or T&F BIU 2 is
programmed as present AND any of the following is true:
COORD ACTIVE: the CU entered Coordinated operation based
on local conditions and/or programming.

FUNCTION Page 113
1. Port 1 is NOT enabled [ no TS2 Card plugged in OR MMU UNDETECTED CNFLCT: conflicting channels were not
TS2 Card reports that the Port 1 connector disable (8- Red and the MMU did not report a conflict for 10 Response
10) is active]. Frame transfers. We went to Flash.
2. The MMU is NOT programmed as present.
MMU UTILZATION CNFLCT: the MMU Program Card channel
3. T&F BIU 2 is programmed as present and T&F BUI1 is
compatibility and the CU channel utilization did not agree
NOT programmed as present.
(MMU = not compatible / CU = compatible).
DIAG: INVALID OPCODE: the processor encounters an invalid
MOES LOG FAULT: Measure Of Effectiveness logging routine
instruction.
contains invalid record reference data.
DIAG: INVALID TRAP: the processor encounters a invalid
NO COORD - BAD P FREE: the CU entered Free operation
software interrupt instruction.
based on the pattern requested not passing the valid plan
DIAG: RAM TEST: the power up RAM read/write test failed. checks.
DIAG: RESP FRAME FAIL: a third time occurrence of MMU NO COORD - COMND FREE: the CU entered Free operation
Response Frame Fault or an individual T&F BIU has a third based on Master and/or Local command.
time Response Frame Fault. We went to locking Flash.
NO COORD - COORD FAIL: the CU had a cycle fault running
DIAG: RNG DNLOAD FAIL: a communications download of coordinated on an attempt to pickup after a Coordination
unit data tried to change the Ring Structure and an error Fault.
was found in the downloaded ring structure data. The new
NO COORD - COORD FALT: the CU had a cycle fault running
data was not implemented. We went to Flash.
coordinated but was cleared when running free.
DIAG: SYSTEM FAULT: miscellaneous processor faults.
NO COORD - COORD FREE: the CU entered Free operation
DIAG: TRAF TASK WDOG: Tenth second processing has based on the pattern offset being set equal to or larger
consumed more then 250ms w/o reaching a conclusion. than the cycle length.
DIAG: TRAF TASK XS DLY: Synchronization between the tenth NO COORD - CYCLE FALT: the CU did not service a call while
second processing and the "real time" has slipped more running coordinated.
than two seconds (2083ms) w/o the occurrence of a traffic
NO COORD - FAIL FREE: the CU entered Free operation based
task watchdog.
on the cycling diagnostics.
DIAG: UNSPECIFIED: processor faults not defined elsewhere.
NO COORD - INPUT FREE: the CU entered Free operation
DIAG: VRTX FAULT: a VRTX operating system error. based on some input having a higher priority than
coordination.
DIALUP FAILED: a SOLO Critical Alarm Dial Up failed to
connect and report the alarms. NO COORD - TRANS FREE: the CU entered Free operation in
order to transition to the requested pattern.
EEPROM CRC INITIALIZE: default parameters were loaded
into EEPROM following a EEPROM CRC diagnostic error. NO SYSTEM - BACKUP: the unit reverted to Backup Mode from
System control.
EEPROM INIT - KEYPAD: default parameters were loaded into
EEPROM based on "LOAD DEFAULT" keypad command. NO SYSTEM - STANDBY: the unit reverted to Standby Mode
based on a master command.
EEPROM WRITE ERROR: attempts to write a value to the
EEPROM failed to produce data match within the required OFF LINE - CONFL FL: the CU conflict monitor became active.
time frame, or an attempt to refresh the RAM data in the
OFF LINE - CYCLE FAIL: the CU did not service a call while
EEPROM image has failed to produce a match.
running free.
FRAME ### FAULT: more than 5 out of the most recent 10
OFF LINE - LOCAL FL: the CU manual flash became active.
Response Frame ### transfers are not received properly.
OFF LINE - PREEMPT #: the CU entered the "#" preemption
FRAME ### ON LINE: Response Frame ### transfers are being
sequence.
received properly.
OFF LINE - PRIORITY #: the CU entered the "#" low priority
INCOMPAT MEM RESTART: default parameters were loaded
sequence.
based on keypad command from the INCOMPATIBLE
PROM & EEPROM display. OFF LINE - REMOTE FL: the CU entered programmed flash.
INVALID ABC I/O MODE: Boston (Special Firmware) is OFF LINE - VOLT MONIT: the CU Voltage Monitor output was
operating with an invalid ABC I/O mode programmed. "OFF" because of an internal voltage failure.
INVALID PROM RESTART: default parameters were loaded ON LINE: the CU has no "OFF LINE" alarm conditions.
based on keypad command from the INVALID PROM
display. POWER OFF: the CU experienced a loss of AC power for longer
than 50 milliseconds.
MMU LOG FAULT: MMU logging routine contains invalid
record reference data. POWER ON: the CU AC power was reapplied following a loss
of AC power for longer than 550 milliseconds.

Page 114 FUNCTION
PREEMPT INPUT MAX FLT: the Preempt Input has been active VOL COUNT LOG FAULT: Volume Count logging routine
longer than the MXCALL time. contains invalid record reference data.
PROGRAM DAY 0: The Software Clock has been cleared to WATCHDOG TIMEOUT: the CU Watchdog function was not
01/01/80 00:00:00 PDAY 0 because both the Software Clock serviced in the allocated time and the unit went through
and RTC Chip time are invalid. an initialization startup.
RAW ERR LOG FAULT: an attempt to place an entry into the
temporary Raw Error log found that the log pointers were out 3.11.3.1 Eagle M50 & 2070 ATC Alarms
of the prescribed range and a full initialization of that log has
been done. The following Alarm events are specific to Eagle M50 units
and 2070 ATC units with Eagle EPAC300 software:
RTC CHIP ADJUST: RTC Chip time has been adjusted to match
the Software Clock because the RTC Chip time invalid or BBDATA CHG FAULT: Background task diagnostics indicate
did not match the valid Software Clock time . that a ‘data change in progress’ for disk files bbdata1 and
bbdata2 has not changed state for at least 30 seconds
RTC CHIP FAILURE: RTC Chip Read/Write time-out occurred or which indicates an abnormality. Corrective action to
a Read provided out of range values. provide closure has been taken.
RTC CHIP FAULT: RTC Chip Time has drifted outside the + 1/2 CFGDATA CHG FAULT: Background task diagnostics indicate
second tolerance. that a ‘data change in progress’ for disk files /r0/cfgdata
SDLC .1 SEC DLY FAIL: a third time occurrence in a day of the and /f0/eagle/cfgdata has not changed state for at least 30
alarm "SDLC .1 SEC DLY FAULT". We went to Locking Flash. seconds which indicates an abnormality. Corrective action
to provide closure has been taken.
SDLC .1 SEC DLY FAULT: the TS2 SDLC card failed to respond
in 5 out of the last 10 tenth second interactions. We went CFGDATA/SWOP INCOMPAT: The current startup sepac.ini
to Flash. settings differ from the cfgdata sepac.ini settings for
either the machine type (e.g., Safetran versus Eagle) or
SIGNATURE-CHK BATTERY: the RAM signature was lost by the the operation modifier items.
battery failing to hold data or a new firmware set was
installed in which the signature was in a different RAM A valid sepac.ini has not been processed and the starting
location. program determines by Heuristic means that the host
bootcode is not an Eagle product.
If the battery were truly the cause, you would also expect
to find the RTCIC Clock Cleared and requires Clock When cfgdata analysis related to Software Option, database
Programming messages "PROGRAM DAY 0". type existing (FIO-170, FIO-NEMA, TS2, NYS, ITS, CBD) and
the FIO /SIU hardware currently detected finds
SOFTWARE CLOCK ADJUST: Software Clock time has been incompatibilities.
adjusted to match the RTC Chip because the Software
Clock time was invalid. CFGDATA INITIALZE: The CFGDATA (permanent) file content
requires default initialization. The conditions include:
SPECIAL STATUS # OFF: the CU special status input "#"
became inactive. a) Inability to load a valid cfgdata file from either the SRAM or
Flash storage locations. This may result from missing files
SPECIAL STATUS # ON: the CU special status input "#" became or damage to the files resulting in a bad CRC.
active.
b) The data structure size within the cfgdata file does not
SPEED LOG FAULT: Speed Trap logging routine contains match the structure size required by the current program
invalid record reference data. version.
SYSTEM ACTIVE: the unit is picked up by the MARC360 c) The data structure ID within the cfgdata file does not match
Master. the structure ID required by the current program version.
T&F SIGNATURE FAULT: Illinois District 1 (Special Firmware) d) The cfgdata file states that the Current Software Option
is operating with an invalid Terminal & Facilities value is 0 (not defined).
Signature.
e) The cfgdata validation finds incompatibility requiring
TIME CHANGE - KEYPAD: the TBC Date/Time has been default data initialization.
changed via the keypad.
f) The attempt to create a replacement cfgdata module in
TIME CHANGE - REMOTE: the TBC Date/Time has been running memory has encountered an error.
changed by the Master or a Personal Computer via the
Master or direct. g) The Software Special Option identifier of the current
program does not match the identifier in the cfgdata. For
TRAF RESP LOG FAULT: Traffic Responsive logging routine example, cfgdata is 332g and the program is 332SEg.
contains invalid record reference data.
CFGDATA INIT – DATAKEY: Configuration data resident in a
TRAFFIC TASK DELAYED: the task did not start within 0.1 DATAKEY has replaced the currently operating CFGDATA.
seconds from the last time it started.
CFGDATA INIT - KEYPAD: Default parameters were loaded into
the CFGDATA (permanent) file based on the “LOAD

FUNCTION Page 115
DEFAULT” keypad command. This may be either ‘Load Software Option and the hardware in the unit does not
Default in the current Software Option’ or when switching support the selection.
the Software Option setting.
Examples are:
DIAG: CFGDATA CRC ERR: cfgdata is invalid and recovery
a) Software Option TS2 with FIO -2A [does not comply with
attempts failed.
TS2 Type 1 or Type 2].
DIAG: FIELDIO FAIL: During Software Options FIO, TS2 or
b) Software Option NYS with FIO NEMA type [does not comply
NYS; If MAXTRIES (currently defined as 10.) successive
with NYS IO definitions].
attempts fail, FIELDIO FAIL is declared in the following
circumstances: c) Software Options ITS and CBD evaluate hardware required
by programming versus hardware found by interrogation
a) When the FIO Initialize function encounters a problem
of connected devices [does not provide full operation as
with IO Module ID, Request Module Status either to obtain
requested].
status or reset error bits, Set FIO Watchdog Timeout, set
Millisecond Counter or Configure Inputs. SIGNATURE INVALID: The Signature data held in the Semi-
permanent (SRAM) data files is not valid due to missing or
b) The write outputs routine checks the FIO status once per
corrupt files.
second. If an error condition exists, an attempt to reset the
error is made. WD RESTART – 10THTSK: The Watchdog mechanism
encountered a problem with the Tenth Second processing
During ALL Software Options, if the Field IO process does a
and took corrective action.
graceful exit. Typically when the first attempt to open the
SDLC communication port returns an error. This instance WD RESTART - FIELDIO: The Watchdog mechanism
is usually unrecoverable and not subject to retry actions. encountered a problem with the FIO / SIU processing and
E.g., when there is some hardware failure or a mismatch took corrective action.
to bootcode such as selecting ITS or CBD Software Options
and bootcode is for TEES 96 FIO message handling. WDOG START - BACKGND: The Watchdog mechanism
encountered a problem with the Background process and
DIAG: FIO EVENT OVRN: The FIO / SIU processing has took corrective action.
experienced a delay and has not remained synchronized
to the tenth second processing The Alarm is entered upon WDOG START - DISPLAY: The Watchdog mechanism
incident detection and no further log entries occur until at encountered a problem with the Display data production
least one pass of normal operation occurs. Additionally, process and took corrective action.
the Alarm is suppressed if the program detects a situation, WDOG START – F PANEL: The Watchdog mechanism
such as an SDLC message timeout, that will precipitate the encountered a problem with the Display Output process
delay. and took corrective action.
DIAG: FIO MAX RETRIES: During Software Option FIO, TS2 or WDOG START - KEYBOARD: The Watchdog mechanism
NYS, if the Set Outputs response has Error bit 0 set in the encountered a problem with the Keypad Input processing
status, the Set Outputs command has not been and took corrective action.
implemented. Typically, this error occurs following an FIO
Comm Loss incident which has not been reset prior to WDOG START - LED: The Watchdog mechanism encountered a
issuing the next Set Outputs command. problem with the Front Panel Activity LED and ancillary
timing functions and took corrective action.
DIAG: FIO RESET: When two successive FIO message timeouts
occur and fewer than three reset attempts have executed, WDOG START – LV1 DIAG: The Watchdog mechanism
the FIO is issued a reset command. encountered a problem with the Level 1 Diagnostics and
Semi-permanent data validation (SRAM) and took
DIAG: NO IP STACK: When attempting to set IP Address data, corrective action.
the response was an error reported by the operating
system. WDOG START - PLAYER: The Watchdog mechanism
encountered a problem with the Tributary 1 Presentation
DIAG: PROGRAM CRC ERR: The DRAM operating module for Layer (Port 3) and took corrective action.
the program has failed the CRC check.
WDOG START - PRINTER: The Watchdog mechanism
DIAG: PWRFAIL LOADFLT: The attempt to start operation of encountered a problem with the Tributary 2 Presentation
the pwrfail module caused an error or the background Layer (Port 2) and Print functions and took corrective
validation task finds the pwrfail module CRC invalid. action.
The pwrfail module informs sEPAC of transitions in the AC WDOG START - TBC: The Watchdog mechanism encountered a
Power when the OS does not provide the system ACFAIL problem with the Timebase process and took corrective
event. action.
HARDWARE/SWOP PROBLEM: A Hardware / Software Option WDOG START - TBE: The Watchdog mechanism encountered a
Problem exists when the IO Type (FIO / SIU) in the cfgdata problem with the Validation of OS-9 system time to RTCIC
matches the type expected by the Software Option time and took corrective action.
selected but the physically present device identifier is not
this type. This condition may occur when selecting a new

Page 116 FUNCTION
WDOG START – TRIB 1: The Watchdog mechanism MOE data is a pattern Cycle Zero to Cycle Zero calculation. At
encountered a problem with the Tributary 1 Protocol the pattern Cycle Zero the values are processed then reset to
Layer -ECOM (Port 3) and took corrective action. Zero. Under light traffic conditions (i.e., a phase has
infrequent calls and/or service), the values will be low.
WDOG START – TRIB 2: The Watchdog mechanism
encountered a problem with the Tributary 2 Protocol
Layer -ECOM (Port 2) and took corrective action. 3.11.5 Cycle MOE Report
WDOG START - WDBCKUP: The Watchdog mechanism
Coordination green utilization on a cycle by cycle basis is
encountered a problem with the Process watching most
collected and available in the CUs Cycle MOE Report.
processes and took corrective action.
The Cycle MOE Report includes a DATA event which lists the
WDOG START - WDPRIME: The Watchdog mechanism
pattern number along with the coordination pattern times for
encountered a problem with the Process watching Tenth
each phase.
Second and WDBCKUP and took corrective action.
The Cycle MOE Report includes a COORD event for each cycle
providing history on the under (-) or over (+) utilization of
3.11.4 MOE Report the pattern time programmed for the cycle. Also included is
data on which phases were forced in that cycle.
Measurements Of Effectiveness (MOE) are accumulated and
reported to enable the evaluation of coordination pattern The Cycle MOE Report entries will denote when Offset
parameters based on actual data collected during the periods Correction was in progress during the cycle. A CORR+ event
the pattern is in control. MOE calculations are made once denotes that Offset Correction added time to the cycle to
each sequence cycle for volume, stops, delays, and utilization enable correction. A CORR- event denotes that Offset
for each phase in the CU and then averaged over the duration Correction subtracted time from the cycle to enable
of the pattern. correction.
A. Volume: The average number of actuations during the The Cycle MOE Report has the capacity to store up to 60
sequence cycle for the duration of the pattern. events. An event once logged will remain until the report
Accumulates the vehicle actuations sum for each phase capacity is exceeded at which time the oldest event will
per sequence cycle and averages for the duration of the disappear and the new will be added.
pattern.
B. Stops: The average number of vehicles which must stop at 3.11.6 Communications
an intersection during the cycle for the duration of the
pattern. Accumulates the vehicle actuations sum for each Each local intersection controller may be provided with a
phase per sequence cycle during non-green time and system interface which allows the reception of Central-Office
averages for the duration of the pattern. Master or On-Street Master commands and the transmission
of local intersection data to the respective site.
C. Delays: The average time in seconds that vehicles are
stopped during the sequence cycle for the duration of the
pattern. Accumulates the waiting time (number of cars 3.11.6.1 Modem (Internal)
waiting multiplied by time) for each phase per sequence
cycle and averages for the duration of the pattern. The modem shall provide 2-wire half duplex
communications.
D. Utilization: The average seconds of Green time used by
each phase during the sequence cycle for the duration of The modem complies with the following requirements:
the pattern. Accumulates the green time used for each 1) Data Rate: 300 to 1200 baud.
phase per sequence cycle and averages for the duration of 2) Modulation: Phase coherent frequency shift keying
the pattern. (FSK).
3) Data Format: Asynchronous, serial by bit.
Only Normal Vehicle Detectors (detector Mode 0) accumulate 4) Line & Signal Requirement: Type 3002 voice-grade,
MOE data. Failed detectors will still accumulate MOE data. unconditioned.
The MOE Report has the capacity to store up to 24 patterns of 5) Tone Carrier Frequencies (Transmit & Receive): 1200
MOE data. The pattern MOE once logged will remain until the Hz (Mark) and 2200 Hz (Space) with plus or minus
report capacity is exceeded at which time the oldest pattern 0.03% tolerance. The operating band shall be (1/2
MOE will be deleted and the new one will be added. power, -3db) between 1000 Hz and 2400 Hz.
6) Transmitting Output Signal Level: 0 to 3 db
The Local MOE Report format shall be as follows: continuous.
7) Receiver Input Sensitivity: 3 to -40 db.
EPAC SYSTEM - LOCAL MOE'S D/S/O 8) Receiver Lowpass Filter: Shall provide 10 db/Octave,
BEGIN: 09/21 07:15 2/2/2
PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8 minimum active attenuation for all frequencies above
VOLUME.: 50 100 50 100 50 100 50 100 the operating band.
STOPS..: 40 20 40 70 40 20 40 70
DLAY*10: 85 65 90 70 85 65 90 70 9) Clear-To-Send (CTS) Delay: 27 Milliseconds (+/- 2
UTILIZ.: 15 35 10 30 15 35 10 30 MilliSec).

FUNCTION Page 117
10) Receive Line Signal Detect Time: 8 Milliseconds (+/- 2 and Alarm Telephone Numbers for automatic reporting on
MilliSec) Mark Frequency. occurrence.
11) Modem Recovery Time: Capable of receiving data
The Critical Alarm definition data WILL NOT be capable of
within 15 milliseconds after completion of
being entered through the CU Front Panel. It must be
transmission.
downloaded from a PC.
12) Error Rate: Shall not exceed 1 bit in 100,000 bits,
with a signal-to-noise ratio of 16 db measured with The following events are capable of being defined as Critical
flat-weight over a 300 to 3000 Hz band. Alarms:
13) Transmit Noise: Less than 50 db across 600 ohm  Automatic Flash
resistive load within the frequency spectrum of 300 to  Conflict Flash
3000 Hz at maximum output.  Coordination Fail
 Coordination Fault
Indication is provided to indicate Carrier Detect, Transmit
 Cycle Fail
Data, and Receive Data.
 Cycle Fault
The Modem operates within the local CU.  Local Flash
 Local Free
 Preemption
3.11.6.2 SOLO Modem (External)  Special Status 1 - 6
For SOLO Intersection (Address=00) applications, an auto  Voltage Monitor
dial/auto answer modem may be provided to automatically Any Special Status (1 to 6) defined as Critical will become an
answer calls from the Central-Office Master and to transmit alarm function and will lose it's non-system functionality (i.e.,
stored data to the Central-Office Master via standard voice- ASA, ASB, ASC, ASD, Clock Set, & Dimming).
grade, telephone lines.
When System Data is downloaded to an EPAC, Special
The modem shall conform to the following requirements: Identification is established as part of the download based on
A. US Robotics Courier V.Everything 56Kbps Fax Modem the Master Menu Letter choice of the downloading PC (i.e., If
1) Configuration switch settings: the Master Menu Letter is "A" in the PC which downloaded the
EPAC System database, the Local will report as "Group A").
Switch 1: ON / DOWN DTR Always ON
On occurrence of an Alarm defined as Critical in a SOLO
Switch 2: ON / DOWN Numeric Result Codes EPAC, it's Critical Alarm dial up routine will begin.
Switch 3: ON / DOWN Display Result Codes The Critical Alarm dial up routine will dial Telephone #1 five
times (one time equals 30 seconds of ringing then a minute
Switch 4: ON / DOWN No Echo, Offline Commands
wait). If #1 does not answer during the five tries, #2 is dialed
Switch 5: OFF / UP Auto Answer On Ring five times. If #2 does not answer during it's five tries, the
routines returns to #1 and repeats the above cycle two more
Switch 6: ON / DOWN Carrier Detect Override times (#1 then #2) before a "DIALUP FAILED" is logged. When
Switch 7: OFF / UP Display All Result Codes there is no #2 telephone number, the routine inserts a five
minute wait in place of each #2 dialing noted above. In total
Switch 8: ON / DOWN Enable AT Command Set the routine attempts to connect (dials) for 30 plus minutes
Switch 9: ON / DOWN Disconnect With +++ prior to giving up and logging a "DIALUP FAILED" message.
Switch 10: OFF / UP Load NVRAM defaults If telephone #1 and #2 do not exist, no dial up attempt is
2) Within the Terminal program (Baud Rate set equal to made or dial up failure logged. When a dial up routine is
that to be used by CU): entered, if it is determined a modem is not attached or is not
* Type AT &F0 <Enter> responding correctly (i.e., no power), no dial up attempt is
* Type AT M1 X0 S0=1 S7=30 <Enter> made or dial up failure logged.
* Type AT &A0 <Enter> Should the initial rounds of dialing fail to connect and report
* Type AT &K0 <Enter> a Critical Alarm, the EPAC310 will make another attempt each
* Type AT &N2 <Enter> Lock Speed: &N2=1200 bps hour thereafter to report same by repeating the above
* Type AT &W <Enter> routine. On these hourly attempts, a "DIALUP FAILED"
Most modems support the above features but may use message will not be logged on failure to connect in order not
different commands in their setup. fill up the log with that message.
The telephone number routine allows the unit to instruct a

modem to dial an internally stored number. When the first 3.11.6.3 Messages
field of the telephone number is zero, the unit will substitute
The local system interface receives a command message
‘S=’ into the dialing string. ‘S=’ instructs the modem to dial
composed of a serial bit stream. The receipt of a valid
an internally stored number ‘0’ to ‘3’.
command message initiates a reply message of a serial bit
A SOLO Intersection (Address=00) equipped with an external stream. When a command is not received correctly within a
modem has the capability of User definition of Critical Alarms user set period, the local system interface causes a transfer of
intersection operation to local TBC.

Page 118 FUNCTION
Each local system controller is given a unique address from Operational indication is available on the front panel of the
001 to 032 through an entry via the front panel. Devices that local intersection CU to denote when a carrier signal is being
may be resident at the local intersection (the CU, local received, valid data is being received, and the unit is
detectors, eight system detectors, and two speed traps) are transmitting.
capable of being remotely monitored and/or controlled. A
The Communications Failure Report has the capacity to store
sequence of command and/or monitor messages are
up to 60 faults. A fault once logged will remain until the
transmitted from the Central-Office Master or On-Street
report capacity is exceeded at which time the oldest fault will
Master to local intersection controllers. The local intersection
disappear and the new will be added.
to which the message is directed responds to the Master. A
command address of zero (0) is received by all locals. The The Communications Failure Report format shall be as
zero command is used to communicate traffic patterns and follows:
other system messages to all locals simultaneously.
EPAC SYSTEM - COMM FAIL REPORT
The message length is variable, depending on the nature of MM/DD HH:MM --------STATUS-------
the message. The message content includes one or more of 09/20 10:20 MARC HAS RECEIVE PROB
the following types of information: 09/21 22:10 MID XMIT STOPPED
09/22 06:00 MODEM TIMEOUT
09/23 11:11 MODEM TIMEOUT
Set 09/24 18:01 MODEM TIMEOUT
Date (Month, Day, Year) A-PRV B-NXT WINDOW C-CLEAR F-PRIOR MENU
Time (Day, Hour, Min, Sec)
Traffic Pattern (Dial, Split, Offset)
Sync (Pattern to Master Cycle) CNTL RESP DIE IN XMIT is logged when the sending station
Intersection Mode ceases to send characters during the control mode for 2
CU Mode seconds.
Monitor COMM DATA ERROR is logged when handshake response

Date / Time returns a NAK after the local Select.
Traffic Pattern COMM CRASH is logged on the following:
Sync
CU Mode After a Select, the request to get a new memory block to be
System Detectors passed for processing produces a non zero error that was
Intersection Alarms NOT the error indicating that a block was not available.
Intersection Status After a Poll request has gotten a new memory block,
CU Display Status passed it for processing, and there is a non zero error that
CU I/O Status was NOT the error indicating a time-out waiting to finish
Intersection Mode processing the block.
Download Parameters = When the transmit queue identification is neither Port 2
Basic Traffic = Phase ACIA or Port 3 ACIA.
Basic Traffic = Unit
Coordination = All The queue posting returns a non-zero error that is not
Time Base Control = All Queue Full.
Preemption = All
COMM MEMORY ALOCATION is logged when a Poll request
System = All
tries to get a new memory block and there is an error
Upload Parameters = indicating that a block was not available.
Basic Traffic = Phase
COMM REQUEST is logged when a Reverse Interrupt
Basic Traffic = Unit
handshake response is received after transmitting data.
Coordination = All
Time Base Control = All DATA RESP DIE IN XMIT is logged when receiving data a time-
Preemption = All out occurred waiting for another character (first DLE to
System = All last CRC character)
Upload Reports = EPAC COMM ERROR is logged when an unexpected
Local Alarms Report handshake response (not NAK, '0', NULL) after the local
Communication Fault Report Select or unexpected character following a DLE (not SOH,
System Detector Report STX, ETX, ETB, DLE, ENQ) when receiving data.
Detector Fault Report
EARLY DATA EOT is logged when looking for control
Local MOE
characters in non-transparent mode and the EOT
Speed Report
character comes when NO previously defined control state
EDI Monitor Report & Data
(SOH, STX, ETX, ETB) has been found.
Message security provides a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
MSTR DOES NOT RESPOND is logged on the following:
Invalid messages are rejected to prevent false commands at
the local. Initial message is neither a select or a poll (assumed to be
a Broadcast).

FUNCTION Page 119
Handshake response time-out after the local select. The detector processing is as follows: (Refer to Figure 1 at the
end of this section for conversions to percent and sensor
Waiting for a data block and the first character was ENQ
averaging when reading the following)
Not selected and there is a time-out waiting for the
A. Average Volume Percent (AVOL%): The detector volume
repeated poll request.
percentage (VOL%) is computed by taking the raw one
MSTR HAS RECEIVE PROB is logged on the following: minute volume counts, multiplying by sixty to obtain the
projected counts in an hour, multiplying by one hundred
An EOT comes in a SOH, STX, or ETB control state and to convert the final result to a percentage, and then
there is no existing ERROR condition. dividing by the vehicle per hour reference (VPHR). The
Exceed max retries (3) transmitting data because of time- vehicle per hour reference (VPHR) is a user assigned value
out, garbled, NAK, or WACK handshake response. depicting an estimate of the lane capacity in terms of the
number of vehicles per hour.
Exceed max retries (3) transmitting data during the
handshake under the following conditions: VOL% =((1 Min Volume Count)x60x100) / VPHR
 The Handshake response was '0' or '1' and that The average volume percent (AVOL%) is computed by
response was the correct handshake. summing a portion of the old average percent (OAV%) and
 The block just sent was not the last block in a the new volume percent. To simplify the ratio calculation,
multiple block ETB process. the portion of the old average volume percent and the
 There was an error (time-out?) while waiting to be new volume percent are based on the detectors averaging
provided the next block. Time-out sends ENQ until time (AVGT) in minutes and may be varied between one
the number of retries has been exceeded. (1) and ninety-nine (99) minutes (user selectable).
MID XMIT STOPPED denotes that the receiving station has AVOL% =(((AVGT-1) x OAV%) + VOL%) / AVGT
sent the character sequence (EOT) which stops the
sending station wherever it is in it's transmission. B. Average Corrected Occupancy Percent (ACO%): The
percent occupancy (OCCP%) is computed by taking the
MODEM TIMEOUT denotes that the EPAC has control of the raw one minute occupancy count, multiplying by the
communications line but has not transmitted a character correction factor (CTFC; initially set to one), multiplying
for 0.1 seconds. Additionally, the Port 3 ACIA has its RTS by one hundred to convert the final result to a percentage,
turned off and the Transmitter Interrupts disabled. and dividing by the maximum number of counts that can
RECEIVE CRC ERROR denotes that the CRC for the message be received in one minute (MXOCC).
just received was incorrect. OCCP% = ((1 Min Occp Cnt)xCTFCx100)/MXOCC
UNDEFINED COMM ERROR denotes the CU can not find a valid Note that the maximum occupancy counts for a one
error number to report in the Communications Log. minute period (100% occupancy) is 3600 counts where
each count equals 1/60th of a second.
3.11.6.4 Auxiliary Devices The average percent occupancy (AOCCP%) is computed by
summing a portion of the old average percent occupancy
Means are provided to communicate to auxiliary devices
and the new percent occupancy. As with the average
which are connected to a CU RS-232 interface.
volume percent, the portion of the old average percent
A generic download to a communications port exists that occupancy (OAC%) and the new percent occupancy are
enables the CU to receive data from a remote location and based on the detectors averaging time (AVGT) in minutes.
direct same to a specific port.
AOCCP% = ((AVGT-1) x OAC%) + OCCP%) / AVGT
A generic upload from a communications port exists that
The ratio of the old average percent volume or occupancy
enables the CU to trap data from a specific port and direct
to the new percent volume or occupancy determines the
same to a remote location.
system's speed of response to the current traffic
Devices that have successfully used this capability at the time conditions. Please note that setting the AVGT to one (1)
of this publication are EDI SSM Monitors and 3M # 562 minute results in the immediate minute to minute
Priority Control Units. Also, these devices were concurrently response based on new volume or occupancy data. The
connected to the same RS-232 interface. average percent occupancy may require adjustments due
to detector operation. These adjustments are made by
changing the correction factor (CTFC) resulting in an
3.11.7 System Detectors average corrected percent occupancy (ACO%).
The user may assign any Vehicle, Special, or Pedestrian C. Volume + Occupancy Percent (V+O%): Each detector V+O
Detector input as system detector inputs. The CU processes value is computed every minute by summing the average
the assigned system detectors data (volume + occupancy by volume percent and the average corrected percent
scanning each input at a rate of sixty times a second) for a occupancy. The volume value must exceed an operator set
period of one minute and then transmits the results of this threshold, for each detector, before the occupancy is
processing to the On-Street Master. added in. This protects the system from vehicles that are
parked over a detector for long periods of time.

Page 120 FUNCTION
The System Detector Report has the capacity to store up to 96 Count Report. The Volume Count Report includes provision
sample periods. A sample period data set once logged will for logging volume history for up to 24 Count detector
remain until the report capacity is exceeded at which time the inputs.
oldest sample period data set will disappear and the new will
The Detector Volume Count Report parameters and output
be added.
WILL NOT be capable of being entered / viewed via the front
The System Detector Report format shall be as follows: panel. It must be downloaded and viewed via a PC.
EPAC SYSTEM - SYS DET REPORT The Detector Volume Count Report has the capacity to store
BEGIN: 09/21 07:15 INT: 15 MULT: 10 up to 72 count periods. A count period data event once logged
DETECTOR...1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8 will remain until the report capacity is exceeded at which
RAW VOL: 9 13 9 9 13 18 9 13
RAW OCC: 12 23 12 11 23 4 11 23 time the oldest count period data event will disappear and the
AVOL%..: 54 31 54 21 79 42 54 31 new will be added.
AC0%...: 20 38 20 19 38 7 19 39
3.11.9 Speed Traps
The Speed Trap function provides speed monitoring
3.11.7.1 Queue Selection capability. Two speed trap detector spacing can be used, 11
The local controller shall be capable of selecting patterns feet or 22 feet, depending on the application. Provision is
based upon computed V+O of two queue selection routines made in the local controller to monitor the speed, in MPH or
(Queue 1, and Queue 2). KPH. Also, a nominal speed range may be set for each pattern
(combination of cycle / split / offset. The percent of vehicles
The priority of routines are in the following order: higher, within, or lower than the nominal speed range may
1) Queue 2 Level 2 be logged.
2) Queue 2 Level 1
3) Queue 1 Level 2 The Speed Report has the capacity to store up to 24 patterns
4) Queue 1 Level 1 of Speed data. The pattern Speed data once logged will
remain until the report capacity is exceeded at which time the
Each routine shall have programmable threshold settings. If oldest pattern Speed data will be deleted and the new one will
the threshold (Level 1 and/or 2) is reached on a routine, the be added.
local controller shall call for a pre-programmed pattern,
overriding the pattern called for by the normal control source The Speed Report format shall be as follows:
(System, TBC, Interconnect, etc.
EPAC SYSTEM - SPEED REPORT
It shall be possible to select different patterns with each of --- BEGIN -- PATRN PERCENT OF TOTAL
MM/DD HH:MM D/S/O LOWR W/IN HIGH
the routines. 09/21 07:00 2/2/2 10 80 10
09/21 08:00 3/1/1 15 85 5
It shall be possible to define all or part of the pattern these 09/21 10:00 3/1/2 5 85 10
queue routines shall override. When only part of a pattern is 09/21 12:00 2/2/2 20 70 10
overridden, the remaining shall be selected in the normal
manner.
When a Queue routine defines a partial pattern, the source of
the normal pattern provides sync, otherwise TBC provides 3.11.10 External System
sync reference. If no TBC event exists prior to occurrence of
Queue override then sync to 24:00 hours when event sync is Interface
programmed else sync to last event time.
The availability of System input / output functions are
The outputs of each Queue Routine may be mapped to Special dependent upon the CU hardware configuration, Terminal &
Function 1 to 8 controls. This allows the Queue Routines to be Facilities wiring and configuration, and user programming.
used to select features or functions other than patterns or
The System Functions shall operate with an external interface
partial patterns.
as follows:
As example, Queue 1 Level 1 output and TX Diamond Four
1. System Inputs:
Phase input could be mapped to Special Function 1 When
Queue Routine 1 system detectors exceed Level 1entry Special Status inputs may be used for logging specific
parameter, the TX Diamond Four Phase would run. When events in the controller assembly. For example, if one of
Queue Routine 1 system detectors activity dropped below these inputs were wired to a cabinet door switch, it would
Level 1, the default TX Diamond Three Phase Sequence would log each occurrence of when the cabinet door was opened.
run.
MMU/Conflict Flash Status input may be used for logging
an occurrence of monitor initiated flash operation.
3.11.8 Volume Count Report Local Flash input may be used for logging an occurrence
of local (manual) initiated flash operation
Means are provided to use any Vehicle, Special, or Pedestrian
Detector input as Count Detector inputs for the CUs Volume

FUNCTION Page 121
Special Detector inputs may be used as system, phase

System Inputs System Outputs
vehicle, or phase pedestrian detector inputs.
Special Function #7
MMU/Conflict Status
2. System Outputs:
Special Function #8
Local Flash Status
Special Function outputs may be programmed
individually as Local TBC outputs. Once so programmed, a Special Detector #1
Special Function output will not respond to system
commands as to it's state until the clear memory function Special Detector #2
within TBC is used to eliminate all TBC or all Auxiliary Special Detector #3
events (Code "0" or Code "2").
Special Detector #4
Special Function outputs may be via a PC (Personal
Computer) command. This control supplements the Special Detector #5
master (MARC360, etc.) and local TBC control of these Special Detector #6
functions. That is to say, either may set an inactive
function to ON but all must call for an inactive output Special Detector #7
before the output is OFF. Once set active via a PC, the
Special Detector #8
output will remain ON until set inactive by the PC or
power is cycled at the local.
3. Input Levels: All logic signals are low state (nominal 0 3.11.11 System Indications
volts DC) for the operate condition of all preempt inputs.
Indications are provided on the display and appropriately
4. Connector Pins: Input/output pin terminations are identified to facilitate the determination of system operation.
The indications provide the following:
System Inputs System Outputs
Current Status
Special Function #1
Special Status #1 1. Communications Port Settings
Special Function #2 2. Communications Port Status
Special Status #2 3. Carrier Activity
Special Function #3 4. Transmitting Data
Special Status #3
Special Function #4 5. Receiving Data
Special Status #4
Special Function #5
Special Status #5
Special Function #6
Special Status #6

Page 122 FUNCTION
Figure 2
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
*
──────┐ ┌─────────┐ ┌──────┐ ┌─────────────────┐
│ │ Raw │ 60x100 │ VOL% │ + │ (AVGT-1) x OAV% │
│───│ 1 Min │ x ────── = └──────┘ └─────────────────┘ ─────┐
│ │Vol Count│ VPHR ────────────────────────────── │
│ └─────────┘ AGVT │ ┌─────
│ │ │
│ ┌──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘ │
D │ │ * │ A T
S e │ │ ┌────────┐ ┌──────┐ │ v o
y t D │ └ = │ AVOL% │───────────────────────────────────│ │ │ a
s e a │ └────────┘ \________________________ │ │ │ i M
t c t │ \ │ V+O% │──────│ l a
e t a │ ┌────────┐ ┌───────┐ │ │ │ a s
m o │ ┌ = │ ACO% │───────────────────────│ MVOL% │───│ │ │ b t
r │ │ └────────┘ └───────┘ └──────┘ │ l e
│ │ * │ e r
│ └──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐ │
│ │ │
│ ┌─────────┐ ┌───────┐ ┌─────────────────┐ │ └─────
│ │ Raw │ 100 │ OCCP% │ + │ (AVGT-1) x OAC% │ │
│───│ 1 Min │ x CTFC x ─── = └───────┘ └─────────────────┘ ┘
│ │Occ Count│ 60 ───────────────────────────────
──────┘ └─────────┘ AGVT
*
═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
Notes: The AVOL% and ACO% are stored in memory for one minute and become OAV% and OAC% values.
(*) These values are stored and transmitted to the central office to be logged for report purposes.
MVOL% equals the minimum AVOL% needed before ACO% can be added. "Volume Only" can be achieved by setting MVOL to a
high percentage.

DIAGNOSTICS Page 123
4 DIAGNOSTICS
A Control Unit with EPAC300 Firmware/Software (CU) This message indicates that the IC is not responding properly.
provides resident diagnostic capabilities; some automatic and A Local Alarm log entry “RTC CHIP FAILURE” denoting date
some user initiated describing its own internal state. It does and time will occur.
not require internal access or changes to the CU to initiate the
“RTC IC .....: Clock REQUIRES PROGRAMMING”
diagnostic routines.
This message is will appear on subsequent power up reports
as a reminder that the clock has been cleared based on earlier
4.1 AUTOMATIC DIAGNOSTICS power up diagnostic actions.
When a fault is detected, the software clock is set to Jan
1,1980 00:00 AM and the Program Day set to 0. Time Base
Control will not run any events from Program Day 0. The user
must set the Date / Time / Program Day to enable Time Base
The CU performs diagnostics automatically (i.e., without
Control to run events.
operator request) to verify essential elements are operating
properly and take the action defined herein based on those
diagnostics. 4.1.1.2 Memory
The CU automatically and continually performs self-checking The CU contains provisions to verify all memory elements on
diagnostics of memory and processor operation. power up. For a unit to exit the power up diagnostics and
The "automatic" diagnostics perform an orderly search and begin running traffic all tests must be passed.
testing of internal logic. The diagnostics evaluation is The following memory diagnostics are performed:
displayed in "messages" on the CU front panel display as an
operator interface. 1. RAM Diagnostic: This diagnostic verifies that all RAM is
operating correctly. Patterns are automatically written to
The "automatic" diagnostics capabilities provided include: RAM. Each Write is followed by a read and compare to
verify that it contains the pattern.
4.1.1 On Power Up The following Ram power up diagnostic messages will be
displayed to indicate the results of the test.
The CU contains provisions to verify whether essential
elements are operational on power up. When a fault is “RAM .........: TESTING”
detected, an appropriate Message is displayed and the CU This message indicates the RAM test is in progress.
maintains the Start-Up Flash state.
“RAM .........: Passed”
4.1.1.1 Real Time Clock IC This message indicates that no faults were found.
The CU contains provisions to verify that the Real Time Clock A RAM diagnostic fault will cause an immediate restart.
IC is proper on power up. This diagnostic verifies that the RTC The third occurrence of this fault in a calendar day will
IC is operating correctly and the date / time is within the cause the following display to appear:
proper ranges. *** ERROR: RAM TEST FAILED
PRESS A KEY OR CYCLE POWER TO CONTINUE.
The following Real Time Clock IC power up diagnostic
messages will be displayed to indicate the results of the test. 2. EEPROM Diagnostic: This diagnostic performs a check on
EEPROM and makes a comparison with the stored value.
“RTC IC .....: TESTING CLOCK”
The following EEPROM power up diagnostic messages will
The test is takes very little time, so this message may never be be displayed to indicate the results of the test.
seen. If it is visible, it indicates the diagnostic is having
trouble verifying something. “EEPROM ......: Passed”
“RTC IC .....: Passed” This message indicates that no faults were found.
This message indicates that no faults were found. “EEPROM ......: Checksum is invalid -> WAIT”
“RTC IC .....: Failed - Clock Cleared” This message indicates a fault. The CU will initialize the
EEPROM then cause the following display to appear:
This message indicates that the Date / Time read from the IC
is invalid based on range checks. EEPROM Initialization Complete!!!
PRESS A KEY OR CYCLE POWER TO CONTINUE.
“RTC IC .....: RTC Chip Failed - CLK CLR”
A Local Alarm log entry “EEPROM CRC INITIALIZE”
denoting date and time will occur when default

Page 124 DIAGNOSTICS
parameters are loaded into EEPROM following a EEPROM 4.1.1.3 Invalid Configuration Data
CRC diagnostic error.
Eagle EPAC300 software operating in Eagle EPAC M50 and
A Local Alarm log entry “EEPROM INIT - KEYPAD” 2070 ATC units evaluate the configuration data to the
denoting date and time will occur when default software option running. When a mismatch occurs, the
parameters were loaded into EEPROM based on "LOAD following screen will appear:
DEFAULT" keypad command.
....WARNING....
3. PROM Diagnostic: This diagnostic verifies that the CONFIGURATION DATA IN MODULE CFGDATA
Operating System PROM contains the proper program. IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE CURRENT
The routine performs a check on PROM and makes a SOFTWARE VERSION THAT IS STARTING UP.
THE USER MUST MAKE A SOFTWARE OPTION
comparison with the stored value. CHOICE. DEFAULT DATA WILL BE PROVIDED.
The following EPROM power up diagnostic messages will - PRESS "E" TO CONTINUE
be displayed to indicate the results of the test.
“EPROM .......: TESTING” Pressing ‘E’ when the above is displayed will result in the
This message indicates the EPROM test is in progress. following screen:
“EPROM .......: Passed” EPAC LOAD DEFAULT PARAMETERS

ACTIVE CURRENT SOFTWARE OPTION: NOT SET
This message indicates that no faults were found. SELECT THE NEXT CURRENT SOFTWARE OPTION:
1-FIO (STD -2A OR -8) 4-ITS v1
When the Power Up PROM diagnostics detects the PROM 2-TS2 (TYPE 1 OR 2) 5-RESERVED
3-NYS (w/ -2A FIO) 6-CBD
CRC is not that which was running but is the same PRESS # DESIRED
revision number, the message below appear.
WARNING...PROM CRC IS INVALID!

Once a selection has been made from the above display,
UNIT OPERATION WITH THIS PROM SET IS the following will appear:
NOT RECOMMENDED. CONTINUE OPERATION IN
A TEST ENVIRONMENT ONLY.
Initializing Cfgdata
- PRESS "E" TO LOAD DEFAULT & CONTINUE ** PLEASE WAIT **
Cfgdata Initialization Complete !!!
Press a key or cycle power to continue
After the user presses the “E” in the above display, the
message “Initializing EEPROM. PLEASE WAIT” will display.
When the initializing task is complete, the message
‘EEPROM Initialization Complete! Press a key or cycle
power to continue” will display. Pressing a key when the above is displayed will result in a
restart followed by the main menu.
When the Power Up PROM diagnostics detects the PROM
CRC is not that which was running but is an older revision
number that may or may not be compatible or when the 4.1.2 During Normal Operation
PROM CRC is not that which was running but is an new
revision number that is not compatible, the message These diagnostic routines verify whether essential elements
above will appear. are operational while the CU is running. When a fault is
found a fault is logged in the Local Alarm log and the CU will
CAUTION...INCOMPATIBLE PROM & EEPROM! initiate and/or maintain flashing operation.
PROM: 2.10 EEPROM: 1.80
UNIT OPERATION REQUIRES THAT EEPROM

INITIALIZATION OCCUR. THIS WILL DELETE 4.1.2.1 Memory
ALL CURRENT OPERATING DATA.
The CU continues to verify ROM and EEPROM during normal
- PRESS "E" TO LOAD DEFAULT & CONTINUE operation at a minimum rate of 1024 bytes per second. When
a fault is detected, the CU initiates and maintain the Start-Up
Flash state.
A Local Alarm log entry “INVALID PROM RESTART”
denoting date and time will occur when default 1. EEPROM Diagnostic:
parameters are loaded based on keypad command from a. A diagnostic to verify that the EEPROM contains data
the INVALID PROM display. and that data has not changed since the last write. The
routine performs a check on EEPROM and makes a
A Local Alarm log entry “INCOMPAT MEM RESTART”
comparison with a preprogrammed value.
denoting date and time will occur when default
parameters are loaded based on keypad command from When the diagnostic fails, a Local Alarm log entry
the INCOMPATIBLE PROM & EEPROM display. "DIAG: EEPROM CRC ERROR" denoting date and time
will occur and the CU initiates flashing operation

(Fault Monitor and Voltage Monitor Output inactive 4.1.2.3 SDLC Processor
and Load Switch Driver Red Output Flashing).
b. A diagnostic to determine when EEPROM writes have The CU contains provisions to verify that the SDLC Processor
been unsuccessful. is present and working on power up.
When the diagnostic fails, a Local Alarm log entry During normal operation SDLC 0.1 Sec Fail if 5 out of the last
"EEPROM WRITE FAILURE" denoting date and time will 10 ???
occur and the CU will initiates flashing operation When a fault is detected, ???
(Fault Monitor and Voltage Monitor Output inactive
and Load Switch Driver Red Output Flashing). The
EEPROM must be replaced. 4.1.2.4 Processor Monitor
2. PROM Diagnostic: This test verifies that the Operating The CU contains provisions to monitor the operation of the
System PROM contains the proper program. The routine microprocessor. The monitor receives signals, at least, once
performs a check on PROM and makes a comparison with every 100 milliseconds from the microprocessor. When the
the stored value. signal is not received for 600 milliseconds, the processor
monitor initiates flashing operation (Fault Monitor and
When the diagnostic fails, a Local Alarm log entry "DIAG:
Voltage Monitor output inactive).
EPROM CRC ERROR" denoting date and time will occur and
the CU initiates flashing operation (See 0 Start-Up Flash). When a Processor Monitor (Watchdog) time out occurs, after a
restart the front panel display will be the Main Menu with the
3. RAM (EEPROM Image) UPDATE: This routine compares
bottom line denoting "** WATCHDOG TIMEOUT **". This
EEPROM Image RAM with EEPROM and copies the EEPROM
display will remain until a key has been pressed.
data into this RAM when the comparison is not equal.
A Local Alarm log entry "WATCHDOG TIMEOUT" denoting date
and time will made concurrent with the above display.
4.1.2.2 Main Processor
The Watchdog Restart is a special feature of the CU that
System Faults which are trapped by the running diagnostics recognizes failures in the unit, and puts the controller in
are logged in the Local Alarm report denoting date and time startup sequence automatically, eliminating the need to
Following a System Fault, an automatic restart to the Startup manually reset the controller. Startup Flash allows the user to
Flash timing/state will occur until more than two System set a transitional flash time that occurs before the
Faults have occurred in a single calendar day at which time a Initialization condition following a power interruption and
"PRESS ANY KEY" message will appear on the front panel. Watchdog Restart. CAUTION: If the Start-Up time is set at 00
System Faults are defined in following paragraph (all begin seconds and the Watchdog puts the unit in the Startup
with "**** ERROR:"). sequence due to a failure in the unit, the intersection will go
"*** ERROR: BUS FAULT"; the processor attempts to access directly to the Initialization condition with no transitional
memory that does not exist. flash time prior to the change.
"*** ERROR: ADDRESS FAULT"; the processor attempts to When more than two Watchdog Restarts have occurred in a
access a word or an inappropriate instruction at an odd single calendar day, See 0 Start-Up Flash.
address.
"*** ERROR: INVALID OPCODE"; the processor encounters an 4.1.2.5 Port 1
invalid instruction.
When AC power is present and the Port 1 Disable Input is not
"*** ERROR: DIVIDE BY ZERO"; the processor encounters an True, the CU will transmit Command Frames and expect
instruction to divide by zero Response Frames in accordance with NEMA TS 2.
"*** ERROR: SYSTEM FAULT"; miscellaneous processor faults. The CU will log Response Frame Faults in the Local Alarm log.
Each logged event denotes the date, time, and Response
"*** ERROR: FALSE INTERRUPT"; the processor receives a Bus
Frame Number.
Fault during interrupt processing.
MMU Compatibility Programming
"*** ERROR: INVALID TRAP"; the processor encounters a
invalid software interrupt instruction. When Port 1 Address 16 MMU is programmed as present, The
CU will transmit Command Frame 3 and expect Response
"*** ERROR: UNSPECIFIED"; processor faults not defined
Frame 131 as a reply.
elsewhere.
A “FRAME 131 FAULT” is logged in the Local Alarm log when
"*** ERROR: RAM TEST FAILED"; the power up RAM read/write
more than 5 out of the most recent 10 Response Frame 131
test failed
transfers are not received properly.
"*** ERROR: VRTX FAULT"; a VRTX operating system error.
The CU provides a MMU utilization diagnostic that verifies
the MMU Program Card channel compatibility to the CU
Signal Driver Group utilization (phase sequence). A “MMU
UTILIZATION CNFLCT” is logged in the Local Alarm log when
this verification is not satisfactory.

In the MMU utilization diagnostic (MMU Program Card to CU The CU evaluates the Response Frame with the MMU Channel
channel compatibility evaluation) relies on MMU to Signal Driver Group Utilization and determine if
compatibility being based on physical traffic movement incompatible channels are active.
limitations while the CU compatibility is based logical traffic
When the above conditions have been true for 10 consecutive
movement limitations.
Response Frame 129 transfers and the Response Frame
In the MMU utilization diagnostic, the CU sequence may be indicates the MMU has not transferred to the Fail State or a
more restrictive than MMU programming would imply. The Response Frame 129 Fault occurs, the CU initiates flashing
reason for this is that the CU may prohibit physically operation (Fault Monitor and Voltage Monitor Output inactive
compatible phases from receiving simultaneous service and Load Switch Driver Red Output Flashing) and a “MMU
(based on desired operation) with no impact on safe UNDETECTED CNFLCT” is logged in the Local Alarm log when
operation. The MMU can permit phase interactions that the this verification is not satisfactory.
CU cannot provide but the CU is not allowed to provide phase
Signal Control Output Status
interactions that the MMU will not permit.
When Port 1 Address 16 MMU is programmed as present, The
The MMU utilization diagnostic (comparison of the MMU
CU will transmit Command Frame 0 and expect Response
Program Card channel compatibility and the CU calculated
Frame 128 as a reply.
channel compatibility) is processed in the following manner:
(1) CU and MMU agree on Compatibility /
more than 5 out of the most recent 10 Response Frame 128
Incompatibility of two channels = No Error.
transfers are not received properly.
(2) CU and MMU disagree on Compatibility /
When this Frame Fault occurs, the CU initiates flashing
Incompatibility of two channels where MMU
operation (Fault Monitor and Voltage Monitor Output inactive
indicates Compatibility = No Error.
and Load Switch Driver Red Output Flashing).
(3) CU and MMU disagree on Compatibility /
Terminal & Facilities (Type 1 CU)
Incompatibility of two channels but channel is
unused = No Error. When Port 1 Address 0 T&F BIU #1 is programmed as present,
The CU will transmit Command Frame 10 and expect
‘Channel is unused’ is True when:
Response Frame 138 as a reply.
(a) No control is assigned to the channel. Terminal & Facilities BIU # 1 being programmed as present is
the flag to inform the CU that it is being used in a Type 1
(b) Phase initialization = 0 for the phase control
Terminal & Facilities. The use of any other T&F BIU without
(vehicle or pedestrian) assigned to the
T&F BIU # 1 is considered a fault and “DIAG: INV. TS2-A1 CNF”
channel.
is logged plus flashing as defined below is initiated.
(c) Walk & Ped Clear = 0 for phase ped assigned
When Port 1 Address 1 T&F BIU #2 is programmed as present,
to the channel.
The CU will transmit Command Frame 11 and expect
(d) All the overlap phases = 0 for the overlap Response Frame 139 as a reply.
assigned to the channel
(e) Phase initialization = 0 for all overlap phases The CU will transmit Command Frame 12 and expect
of the overlap assigned to the channel Response Frame 140 as a reply.
(1) CU and MMU disagree on Compatibility / When Port 1 Address 3 T&F BIU #4 is programmed as present,
Incompatibility of two channels where the MMU The CU will transmit Command Frame 13 and expect
indicates Incompatibility = Error. Response Frame 141 as a reply.
The CU will not exit Start-Up Flash if the MMU utilization A “FRAME 138 FAULT”, “FRAME 139 FAULT”, “FRAME 140
diagnostic indicates an error or a Response Frame Fault FAULT”, or “FRAME 141 FAULT” is logged in the Local Alarm
occurs. log when more than 5 out of the most recent 10 Response
Frame 138 -141 transfers are not received properly. This is an
Otherwise, when the MMU utilization diagnostic indicates an performed separately for each frame type.
error status or a Response Frame Fault occurs, the CU
initiates flashing operation (Fault Monitor and Voltage When one of these Frame Fault occurs, the CU initiates
Monitor Output inactive and Load Switch Driver Red Output flashing operation (Fault Monitor and Voltage Monitor
Flashing). Output inactive and Load Switch Driver Red Output Flashing).
MMU Field Status Detector Rack Inputs
When Port 1 Address 16 MMU is programmed as present, The When Port 1 Address 8 Detector BIU #1 is programmed as
CU will transmit Command Frame 1 and expect Response present, The CU will transmit Command Frame 20 and
Frame 129 as a reply. expect Response Frame 148 as a reply.
A “FRAME 129 FAULT” is be logged in the Local Alarm log When Port 1 Address 9 Detector BIU #2 is programmed as
when more than 5 out of the most recent 10 Response Frame present, The CU will transmit Command Frame 21 and
129 transfers are not received properly. expect Response Frame 149 as a reply.

When Port 1 Address 10 Detector BIU #3 is programmed as The cycling diagnostic is a phase by phase test. For the
present, The CU will transmit Command Frame 22 and purpose of this test, the following definitions are included:
expect Response Frame 150 as a reply.
Not Serviced - A phase does not go green.
When Port 1 Address 11 Detector BIU #4 is programmed as
Serviceable Call - A phase has a call and can be serviced
present, The CU will transmit Command Frame 23 and
normally.
Serviced Normally - The following conditions are true:
A “FRAME 148 FAULT”, “FRAME 149 FAULT”, “FRAME 150
a. The Phase Is Active
FAULT”, or “FRAME 151 FAULT” is logged in the Local Alarm
b. The Phase Omit Is Not Active
log when more than 5 out of the most recent 10 Response
c. No Phase Hold Is Active
Frame 148 -151 transfers are not received properly. This is an
d. External Start Is Not Active
performed separately for each frame type.
e. No Stop Time Is Active
When one of these Frame Fault occurs, the CU operates as f. Manual Control Enable Is Not Active
though a continuous call is present on all enabled respective g. Programmed Flash Is Not Active
detectors.
Two Cycles - When running coordinated, two times the
Detector Rack Resets pattern cycle length. When running non-coordinated, twice
the Ring 1 phases maximum service (Maximum Green,
Yellow, and Red time sum).
expect Response Frame 152 as a reply. When the CU is operating in the coordinated mode and
cycling diagnostics indicate that a serviceable call exists that
has not been serviced for two cycles, the Status is logged as a
NO COORD - CYCLE FAULT. The CU shall automatically revert
to Free.
When a CYCLE FAULT is in effect and the serviceable call has
been serviced within two cycles after the CYCLE FAULT, the
CU Status is logged as a NO COORD - COORD FAULT. A
When Port 1 Address 11 Detector BIU #4 is programmed as coordination retry is attempted. If a CYCLE FAULT does not
present, The CU will transmit Command Frame 27 and occur again within two cycles, the Status is logged as COORD
expect Response Frame 155 as a reply. ACTIVE, if no other failure or COORD FAULT condition exists.
A “FRAME 152 FAULT”, “FRAME 153 FAULT”, “FRAME 154 When a COORD FAULT is in effect and a CYCLE FAULT occurs
FAULT”, or “FRAME 155 FAULT” is logged in the Local Alarm again within two cycles of the coordination retry, the Status is
log when more than 5 out of the most recent 10 Response logged as a NO COORD - COORD FAILURE and the CU will not
Frame 152 -155 transfers are not received properly. This is an attempt another coordination retry prior to entry/download of
performed separately for each frame type. phase, unit, or coordination data or the AC power being
recycled to the CU.
Auxiliary Input / Output (Type 1 CU)
CYCLE FAILURE: When a CU is operating in the non-
When Port 1 Address 17 Diagnostic is programmed as coordinated mode, whether the result of a CYCLE FAULT or
present, The CU will transmit Command Frame 30 and Free being the current mode, and cycling diagnostics indicate
expect Response Frame 158 as a reply. that a serviceable call exists that has not been serviced for two
A “FRAME 158 FAULT” is logged in the Local Alarm log when cycles, the Status is logged as a OFF-LINE - CYCLE FAILURE.
more than 5 out of the most recent 10 Response Frame The CU automatically and immediately reverts to Flash (Fault
transfers are not received. Monitor and Voltage Monitor Inactive). The CU will not exit
this state prior to the entry/download of phase or unit data or
Transfer Outputs Frame (Type A1 and P1 CU) AC power being removed and reapplied.
The CU will transmit Command Frame 18.
4.1.2.7 Detector Diagnostics
Each active detector (Vehicle, Pedestrian, and Special enabled
the Transfer Outputs Frame has not been transmitted for 500
by assignment) is capable of being tested by diagnostics for
milliseconds.
conformance to specified parameters. The detector
When this Frame Fault occurs, the CU initiates flashing diagnostics monitor activity on each active detector for
operation (Fault Monitor Output inactive and Load Switch constant calls, absence of calls, or erratic output.
Driver Red Output Flashing).
Each actuated phase is tested to verify that a vehicle detector
is assigned. If the Maximum 1 Green is greater than zero and
4.1.2.6 Cycling Diagnostics no vehicle detector is assigned to the phase, a continuous
vehicle call is placed.
The CU provides a Cycling Diagnostic to verify that phases
with serviceable calls are receiving service in a timely Vehicle and Special Detector inputs will be tested for
manner. conformance to the specified parameters only when

operating in an appropriate Input Mode (inputs are Detectors 5. Fault Status: When a Fault status defined in the respective
inputs). Response Frame 152 to 155 is True for an active detector,
it is considered a fault by the diagnostics and the detector
Any Detector input not assigned a vehicle, pedestrian, or
is classified as:
system detector function will not be tested for conformance
to the specified parameters. (a) a. “Failed - Watchdog,” or
Any Detector input assigned a vehicle or pedestrian detector (b) b. “Failed - Open Loop,” or
function on a phase that does not exist (Ring Assigned = 0 or
(c) c. “Failed - Shorted Loop,” or
Initialization Code = 0) will not be tested for conformance to
the specified parameters. Should the same detector input also (d) d. “Failed - Excess Change,”
be assigned a System Detector function, it would be tested.
Indications are provided to facilitate the determination of
Any Detector input assigned to a phase programmed as Non- current diagnostic status of each detector.
Actuated (Pedestrian Recall Code = 3) will not be tested for
conformance to the specified parameters. As in the case The selection of the active parameter set (Value 0 or Value 1)
above, if also assigned a System Detector function, it would is controller by an TBC Auxiliary event.
be tested. The CU includes a program entry for No Activity, Maximum
Any Detector input assigned a pedestrian detector function Presence, and Erratic Output for each detector. The respective
on a phase with zero WALK time or on a phase pedestrian has diagnostic is disabled when the program entry is “00.”
no means of controlling Load Switches will not be tested for When a detector is classified as “FAILED” by these diagnostics,
conformance to the specified parameters. As in the case the CU operates as though a continuous call is present until
above, if also assigned a System Detector function, it would such time as the detector is classified as “ON-LINE.”
be tested.
The CU logs detector diagnostic status (i.e., ON-LINE or
An active detector is classified as “ON-LINE” when the results Failed) in non-volatile memory. Each logged event denotes
of the Diagnostic procedures indicate that data from the the date and time of occurrence. See Detector Fail Report
detector is within the allowable range of values. below.
An active detector is classified as “Failed” when the results Diagnostic Output
the Diagnostic procedures indicate that data from the
detector is not within the allowable range of values. The DETECTOR RESET output will become active for one half
to one second whenever the No Activity, Maximum Presence,
System Detector Status (ON-LINE or Failed) is transmitted to or Erratic Output detector diagnostics detect a new fault.
the Master when polled.
For Models with a “D” Connector; when Auxiliary 3 is not
Each detector is monitored for constant calls, absence of calls, programmed for output as a TBC Auxiliary function, it will
or erratic counts. become a DETECTOR RESET function.
1. No Activity: If an active detector does not exhibit an For Models using ABC I/O modes providing a DETECTOR
actuation during a program entered period (00 - 255 RESET output, this output will be operational.
minutes in one minute increments), it is considered a
fault by the diagnostics and the detector is classified as For Models using Port 1 & Detector BIUs, Frame 24 to 27 will
“Failed.” The diagnostics provides two user- have the respective reset bits set active.
programmable "No Activity" periods. Whenever an Auxiliary 3 event has been programmed and it
2. Maximum Presence: If an active detector exhibits is desired to again implement the detector reset output, the
continuous detection for a program entered period (00 - clear memory function within TBC must be used to eliminate
255 minutes in one minute increments), it is considered a all TBC or all Auxiliary events (Code "0" or Code "2").
fault by the diagnostics and the detector is classified as Detector Fail Report
“Failed.” The diagnostics provides two user
programmable "Maximum Presence" periods. The Detector Fail Report has the capacity to store a minimum
of 60 events. The events once logged remain until the report
3. Erratic Output: If an active detector exhibits excessive capacity is exceeded at which time the oldest event is deleted
actuations (program entered maximum counts per and the new one is added.
minute 00 - 255 in increments of one), it is considered a
fault by the diagnostics and the detector is classified as The Detector Fail Report format shall be as follows:
“Failed.” The diagnostics provides two user
programmable "Excessive Counts". EPAC SYSTEM - DETECTOR FAIL REPORT
4. Not Supported: Any assigned detector will be classified as 09/20 10:20 VEH 1 - FAIL ERR CNTS
09/20 10:45 VEH 1 - ON LINE
“Failed” if: 09/20 12:10 SPC 2 - FAIL MAX PRES
a) BIU is enabled & Port 1 Hardware is not installed 09/20 12:55 SPC 2 - ON LINE
b) BIU is enabled, Port 1 Hardware is installed, & Port 1 is 09/21 03:15 SPC 3 - FAIL NO ACTY
Disabled
c) BIU is not enabled & a Hardware Input is not available VEH # - ON LINE denotes that the detector is operating within
the parameters established for diagnostic faults.

VEH # - FAIL MAX PRES denotes that the detector failed the redundancy check) on each ROM and makes a comparison
MAXIMUM PRESENCE diagnostic. with a pre-programmed value.
VEH # - FAIL NO ACTY denotes that the detector failed the NO B. RAM Diagnostic - This test verifies that all RAM elements
ACTIVITY diagnostic. are operating correctly. A value is automatically written to
a RAM location and this location is read to verify that it
VEH # - FAIL ERR CNTS denotes that the detector failed the
contains the value.
ERRATIC COUNTS diagnostic.
Diagnostic error messages:
VEH # - FAIL SUPPORT denotes that Port 1 is disabled or Port
1a. ROM TEST - TESTING
1 hardware does not exist and the Detector BIU is enabled.
1b. ROM TEST - PASSED
VEH # - FAIL BIU FAULT denotes that a Response Frame Fault 1c. ROM TEST - FAILED
occurred for the Detector BIU. 2a. EEPROM TEST - TESTING
2b. EEPROM TEST - PASSED
VEH # - FAIL DET WDOG denotes that the Detector BIU 2c. EEPROM TEST - FAILED
Channel Status input for the detector is “OFF”. This may 3a. RAM TEST - TESTING
indicate 1) the detector is NOT as TS 2 detector, 2) the 3b. RAM TEST - PASSED
detector failure occurred, or 3) a detector watchdog time 3c. RAM TEST - FAILED
out occurred.
VEH # - FAIL OPEN LOOP denotes that the Detector reported
an Open Loop Fault to the Detector BIU.
4.2.2 Inputs
VEH # - FAIL SHRT LOOP denotes that the Detector reported The CU provides test routines to enable operator verification
an Shorted Loop Fault to the Detector BIU. that input functions are proper. This test determines whether
the input buffers are operating correctly. The user must
VEH # - FAIL XS CHANGE denotes that the Detector reported activate each input. The routine identifies each input by an
an Excessive Inductance Change Fault to the Detector BIU. indication on the front panel. The user must observe the front
The "#" in the report entry will be the detector number as panel display and determine correct operation.
applicable. The "VEH" in the report entry will be "SPC" when
the entry applies to a Special Detector input or "PED" when the
entry applies to a Pedestrian Detector input.
4.2.3 Outputs
The CU provides test routines to enable operator verification
that output functions are proper. This test determines
4.2 OPERATOR INITIATED whether the output drivers are operating correctly. Each
output is actuated in a fixed sequence. The user must observe
DIAGNOSTICS the output sequence and determine correct operation.
4.2.4 Integral Display

The CU performs diagnostics enabling operator verification of The CU provides test routines to enable operator verification
properly operating inputs, outputs, keypad, and display. that display functions are proper. This test determines
whether front panel drivers and decoders are operating
The “operator initiated” diagnostics are performed only after properly. All the characters in the available character set are
an operator request through the CU keypad. The CU displayed. The user must observe the front panel display and
automatically and immediately reverts to Flash (Fault determine correct operation.
Monitor and Voltage Monitor Inactive) during this diagnostic.
The diagnostics evaluation is displayed on the CU front panel
display or indications on a Controller Test Set as an operator 4.2.5 Integral Keypad
interface.
The CU provides test routines to enable operator verification
This diagnostic is not intended for use while the CU is in that keypad functions are proper. This test determines
control of intersection operation. whether the keypad is operating correctly. The operator must
The "operator initiated" diagnostics capabilities provided press each of the keypad keys. The display indicates the key
include: pressed. The user must observe the front panel display and
determine correct operation.
4.2.1 Memory
4.2.6 User Initiated Diagnostics
These test routines verifies that essential elements are
functioning normally. If a fault is found an appropriate Error Procedure
Message is displayed.
A. Connect the CU to a NEMA Test Set
A. ROM Diagnostic - This test verifies that the ROM's contain
B. Turn ON power to the CU
the proper program. The routine performs a CRC (cyclic

C. Make sure all logic inputs are inactive RINGS INCONSISTENT

PHASES IN THE SAME RING CONCURRENT
D. Gain Access
NINE CONFLICTS - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
E. Verify Output sequence OUTPUTS ALREADY ASSIGNED
INVALID PHASE PAIR- PRESS "E" TO RETURN
F. Activate any logic input PHASE NONEXISTANT - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
G. Verify inputs as you activate each NOT IN SAME RING - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
ALTS INCOMPATIBLE - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
H. Verify Keypad as you press the key PHASE NOT IN RING - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
PHASE INCOMPATIBLE PRESS "E" TO RETURN
INVALID EXIT PHASE- PRESS "E" TO RETURN
4.3 OTHER DIAGNOSTICS INVALID DATA FIELD- PRESS "E" TO RETURN
ACCESS REQUIRED - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
PRINTER UNAVAILABLE PRESS "E" TO RETURN
CABLE DISCONNECTED- PRESS "E" TO RETURN
CABLE LOSS- DEFAULT LOADED "E" TO RETURN
The CU performs additional diagnostics to verify and display EPAC NOT AVAILABLE- PRESS "E" TO RETURN
events and/or status. The "other diagnostics" capabilities EPAC ERROR DEFAULT LOADED "E" TO RETURN
provided include: DATA LOSS- DEFAULT LOADED "E" TO RETURN
UNIT TRANSFER ERROR PRESS "E" TO RETURN
BEG MON MUST BE < END MON "E" TO RETURN
4.3.1 Power Failure Beg MON MUST BE < END MON "E" TO RETURN
NO "FROM" PROGRAM DAY "E" TO RETURN
When the AC Power is lost for 100ms, the processor goes into
CAN'T EQUATE "FROM" DAY "E" TO RETURN
a "wait" mode. If AC Power is restored within approximately
CAN'T TRANSFER "FROM" DAY "E" TO RETURN
500ms, the user program commences running as though
NO EQUATE-TRANSFER CODE "E" TO RETURN
there were no interruption. If AC Power does not return,
MAXIMUM EQUATES EXIST "E" TO RETURN
however, both processors are RESET by the hardware time-
NO CONCURRENT 1ST RING PHASE - PRESS "E"
out.
I/O MODE OVERRIDES- PRESS “E” TO RETURN
When the AC Power is lost for 50ms,an Alarm Entry "POWER PORT 1 DISABLED - PRESS “E” TO RETURN
OFF" denoting date and time will occur.
When the AC Power returns, after a power down of longer
than 550 milliseconds, an Alarm Entry "POWER ON" denoting
date and time will occur.
4.4 DATA ENTRY ERROR

MESSAGES
Error Messages from the DATA ENTRY evaluation diagnostic

routines will be presented on the front panel. The message
will remain until specific user action has been completed.
Diagnostic error messages:
OUT OF RANGE - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
PHASE CONCURRENT - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
PHASE INACTIVE - PRESS "E" TO RETURN
TOO MANY CONCURRENT PHASES
RING DOES NOT TERMINATE PROPERLY
PHASE ORDER JUMPS RINGS
PHASE 9 NOT IN RING ONE - "E" TO RETURN
PHASE 9 NOT IN RING ONE
RING ONE MISSING
RING TWO MISSING
RING THREE MISSING
CONFLICT TABLE INCONSISTENT
A PHASE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH RING ONE
NO PHASE COMPATIBLE WITH RING ONE

NCHRP 3-54 PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE Page 131
5 NCHRP 3-54 PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE

The National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) research project NCHRP 3-54 on protected/permissive signal
displays identified a flashing yellow arrow (FYA) display as a permissive indication that demonstrated good motorist
understanding.
The FYA display consists of four arrow lenses in a signal head that is used exclusively for turning traffic and is separate from
any heads containing ball indications for through traffic. The FYA display is being used in the US on an experimental basis but
has been used for some time in Europe. A typical vertical left turn signal would look like the following:
Red
Yellow
Flashing Yellow
Green
5.1 NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive Overview
The NCHRP 3-54 Protected / Permissive operation uses signal four lenses:
 RED Steady Arrow: Associated Overlap Red provides RED for NCHRP operation.
 YELLOW Steady Arrow: Associated Overlap Yellow provides Yellow Clearance prior to Red for NCHRP operation.
 YELLOW Flashing Arrow: Associated Overlap Green which is flashing provides Permissive Right of Way indication for NCHRP operation. Internal logic
in the traffic software suppresses the Associated Overlap flashing Green output when the NCHRP sequence services the protected portion (Green
Arrow) of the display sequence.
 GREEN Steady Arrow: Protected Phase Green provides Protected Right of Way indication for NCHRP operation.
A consistent set of Preempt programming entries must be provided for the Protected Phase and Permissive Phase and the
Associated Overlap. The Overlap Yellow and Red are an integral part of the NCHRP Protected and Permissive display and its
transitions.

Page 132 NCHRP 3-54 PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE
5.2 NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive Sequence:
In Eagle EPAC300 Actuated Signal Control Firmware/Software, the Overlap operation provides the in-cycle Flashing Green
output (to drive the FYA section) for the NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive Signals.
The following represents the sequence when Phase 1 is the ‘Protected’ Phase and Phase 2 is the ‘Permissive’ Phase:
Signal Phs Clear To Phs Clear To

Driver 1 2
Output R/W Phs 2 Not Phs 2 R/W Not Phs 1 Phs 1
Used
Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red Yel Red
OLA Red - - R - R - - R - -
OLA Yel - Y - Y - - Y - - -
OLA Grn - - - - - FG - - FG FG
Phs 1 Grn G - - - - - - - - -
 The phase numbers in the above are for example only. The Protected and Permissive phases for each overlap are user
programmable.
 Note: Phase 1 Yellow and Phase 1 Red signal driver outputs are available but NOT used for this sequence.
5.3 Enable NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive Sequence
To enable the NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive sequence:

PRESS "3" FROM UNIT DATA MENU
EPAC OVERLAP - A (0-NO/1-YES)
OVL PHASES: 000000000 0000000

+GRN PHSES: 010000000 0000000
PHS/CHN: 123456789 0123456789 01234
OVL CHN(S): 000000000 0000000000 00000
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-EXIT F-PRIOR MENU
 Note: To provide the PPLT operation on an overlap DO NOT enter any OVL PHASES!
 In this example, Overlap A is utilized to generate the Protected / Permissive sequence. All overlaps have this
capability.
 For PPLT operation, ‘+GRN’ entry defines the Permissive Phase (in this example it is phase 2).
When more than one Permissive Phases is programmed, the permissive interval (defined in the above sequence chart as Phs 2
R/W) ) shall NOT begin until ALL permissive phases are green. A likely alternate for the above example would be to program
both phase 2 and phase 6 as the permissive phases. Permissive Phases should be enabled to operate concurrently.
5.4 Define Protected & Permissive Phases
To define the NCHRP 3-54 Protected Phase and Permissive Phase:

NCHRP 3-54 PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE Page 133
PRESS "4"FROM UNIT DATA MENU
EPAC OVLP.A...B...C...D...E...F...G...H.
TR GRN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
YEL/10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
RED/10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
-G/Y 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(-) #-PH G/Y KILLS OVLP= (+) #-PH G STRT
 For PPLT operation, ‘-G/Y’ entry defines the Protected Phase (in this example it is phase 1).
When only one Permissive Phase is programmed, the Protected and Permissive Phases MUST be in the same Ring to be
considered valid.
5.5 Preemption
Since the NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive sequence has defined a new ‘Green’ state for signal drivers (Permissive = Flashing
Green output to drive the FYA), preempt dwell intervals require the ability to utilize this state. The following denote the Eagle
EPAC300 Actuated Signal Control Firmware/Software screens for this capability:
EPAC PREEMPT 1 VEHICLE STATUS

PHASE....1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.0.1.2.3.4.5.6
TRK GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DWELL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0-RED.1-GRN 2-FLR 3-FLY 4-DARK 5-FLG)
CYCLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0-NO..1-ACT..2-MN REC..3-MX REC)
EPAC PREEMPT 1 OVERLAP STATUS

OVERLAP..A.B.C.D.E.F.G.H.I.J.K.L.M.N.O.P
TRK GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DWELL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0-RED.1-GRN 2-FLR 3-FLY 4-DARK 5-FLG)
CYCLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(0-NO..1-ACT)
 The default flashing rate is 60 flashes / minute (1 pulse per second repetition rate with a 50 percent duty).
The preempt transitions for the Permissive Green state are the same as the normal Green state.
Flashing Green in Preempt has no direct connection with the NCHRP 3-54 Protected/Permissive operation, i.e., they are
independently implemented but, for those that require the Protected / Permissive operation, mutually supportive.
Note: An alternate flash rate (150 fpm) for the Flashing Green is controlled by the data entry under the Special Function
Mapping controls titled “AS8-15=OLI-P FL G PHS”. If no data entry is made on that line, the default flash rate is provided (60
fpm). If data is entered on that line, the alternate flash rate is provided (150 fpm). This flashing green rate is universally
applied to all flashing greens in the controller, both for phases and for overlaps.
5.6 Track Intervals
TRACK INTERVALS:
If the Protected Phase Green is provided, the Associated Overlap must be set to FLASHING GREEN (5) in order to have proper
clearances.

Page 134 NCHRP 3-54 PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE
If the Permissive Phase is provided and the Associated Overlap is to display the Flashing Yellow Arrow at that time, set the
Associated Overlap to FLASHING GREEN (5). If the Associated Overlap is to display RED Arrow at that time, set the Associated
Overlap to RED (0).
HOLD INTERVALS WITHOUT CYCLING OPERATION:
Use the same rules as provided for TRACK INTERVALS.
HOLD INTERVALS WITH CYCLING OPERATION:
Set the Associated Overlap to RED (0).
If the Protected Green Phase is available during Cycling, the Associated Overlap must be set to 1-ACT in order to have proper
clearances. If the Permissive Phase is also available during Cycling, the Flashing Yellow Arrow display will appear and cannot be
blocked out.
If the Permissive Phase is available during Cycling and the Protected Phase is not available during Cycling, to provide the
NCHRP Flashing Yellow Arrow display at that time, set the Associated Overlap to 1-ACT. If the NCHRP signal is to display RED
Arrow at that time, set the Associated Overlap to 0-NO.

IN CYCLE FLASHING SIGNALS Page 135
6 IN CYCLE FLASHING SIGNALS

6.1 FLASHING RED 6.2 FAST FLASHING GREEN
Overlap Red control to cause same to flash at a rate of 60 fpm Overlap Green control to cause same to flash at a rate of 100
during the green, yellow, and red timing of user entered or 150 fpm during user entered phase green(s). Up to 16
phase(s). Up to 16 phases may be set as the flashing control. phases may be set as the flashing control. No more than 8
No more than 8 flashing overlaps. flashing overlaps.
The first step to implementing Flashing Red operation is to The first step to implementing Fast Flashing Green operation
enable this function. is to enable this function.
EPAC TIME BASE FUNCTION MAPPING EPAC TIME BASE FUNCTION MAPPING
SPC FUNC SPC FUNC
FUNCTION NAME 12345678 FUNCTION NAME 12345678
SPEC FUNCTION 1 00000000 SPEC FUNCTION 1 00000000
CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............ CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
Scan up until the following is displayed: Scan up until the following is displayed for 100 fpm
configurations:
EPAC TIME BASE FUNCTION MAPPING
SPC FUNC EPAC TIME BASE FUNCTION MAPPING
FUNCTION NAME 12345678 SPC FUNC
AS8-15=OLI-P FL G PHS 00000000 FUNCTION NAME 12345678
AS8-15=OLI=P FL R Phs 10000000 AS8-15=OLI-P FL G 100f 10000000
CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............ SPEC FUNCTION 2 00000000
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
The above entry of “1” in any SPC FUNCTION column denotes

that Alternate Sequence 8 through 15 Parameters will be used Or scan up until the following is displayed for 150 fpm
to generate Flashing Red Operation on Overlap I through P. configurations:
That is to say AS8 controls Overlap I, AS9 controls Overlap J,
etc. When so programmed, Alternate Sequence 8 to 15 are EPAC TIME BASE FUNCTION MAPPING
considered invalid for traffic sequence (phase pair reversal). SPC FUNC
FUNCTION NAME 12345678
The Ring Timer and Coordination Status screen will continue AS8-15=OLI-P FL G 150f 10000000
to show them as the called sequence but they will not be AS8-15=OLI=P FL R Phs 00000000
RESERVED 00000000
implemented. CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
The next step is to enter the Red Phase(s) desired. The
Alternate Sequence 8 through 15 parameter will establish the
phases during which the overlap red will flash red. The above entry of “1” in any SPC FUNCTION column denotes
that Alternate Sequence 8 through 15 Parameters will be used
EPAC ALT SEQ (PHASE PAIR TO REVERSE) to generate Fast Flashing Green Operation on Overlap I
06 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 through P. That is to say AS8 controls Overlap I, AS9 controls
07 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 Overlap J, etc. When so programmed, Alternate Sequence 8 to
08 02-03 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 15 are considered invalid for traffic sequence (phase pair
09 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
10 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 reversal). The Ring Timer and Coordination Status screen will
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-EDIT F-PRIOR MENU continue to show them as the called sequence but they will
not be implemented.
The above entries denote that Overlap I (controlled by ALT Note:
SEQ 8) shall flash red during the timing of Phase 2 & 3 green,
This flashing green speed/rate programming determines the
yellow, & red clear. The operation shall provide flashing red
rate for any and all “flashing green.” The default rate is 60
only on overlaps that are currently red. For this reason
fpm.
Overlap I should NOT have Phase 2 & 3 as included phases.

Page 136 IN CYCLE FLASHING SIGNALS
Should programming exist here calling for both 100 fpm and
150 fpm, the rate shall be 150 fpm.
The next step is to enter the Flashing Green Phases desired.

The Alternate Sequence 8 through 15 parameter will establish
the phases during which the overlap green will flash green.
EPAC ALT SEQ (PHASE PAIR TO REVERSE)

06 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
07 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
08 02-03 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
09 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
10 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00 00-00
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-EDIT F-PRIOR MENU
The above entries denote that Overlap I (controlled by ALT

SEQ 8) shall fast flash green during phase 2 & 3 green. The
operation shall provide fast flashing green only on overlaps
that are currently green. For this reason Overlap I should
have Phase 2 & 3 as included phases.

ALTERNATE PASSAGE & MAXIMUM Page 137
7 ALTERNATE PASSAGE & MAXIMUM

7.2 IMPLEMENTATION:
7.1 OPERATION
The first step to implementing alternate Passage & Maximum
timings is to establish mapping of timing values from
detector functions to these functions.
The CU provides an optional feature which provides three Detector To Phase Association
Alternate Passage & Maximum times.
Vehicle Detector # 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
The CU provides a user entry for three alternate passage
values (0-99.9 Seconds) and three alternate maximum values Vehicle Detector # 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
(0-999 Seconds).
Special Detector # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Alternate Passage & Maximum times are provided by
Pedest Detector # - - - - - - - -
mapping the Vehicle, Pedestrian and Special Detector timing
parameters (Extend & Delay) to perform the Passage & Phase 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Maximum functions.
This mapping will transfer all phase's Passage and Maximum
to those entered into the respective Extend & Delay parameter Detector To Phase Association
fields simultaneously, so use caution in this process.
When the detector timings have been mapped as alternate
Passage & Maximum times, the respective data entry screens Vehicle Detector # 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
will denote PAS# or MAX# alongside the entry fields instead
Special Detector # - - - - - - - -
of EXTEND or DELAY.
Pedest Detector # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
All that is left is to enter a Master or Local TBC Auxiliary event
to call for the mapped Special Function. The Special Function Phase 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
which controls mapping may also be called based on an input
at the Master or via command from the PC software. This step will also control what logical function will be used
to call these parameters.
When more than one Detector timing parameter set has been
mapped as Passage/Maximum timers and simultaneously EPAC TIME BASE SPC FUNC MAPPING
called, the set which is operational shall be determined by the SPC FUNC
order: 1) VEH 33-48, 2) VEH 49-64, then 3) SPC & PED. S-FUNCTION NAME ......... 12345678
In an effort to preclude mapping parameters with default SPEC FUNCTION 2 00000000
(Zero) values as the Passage & Maximum, an evaluation is CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
made prior to loading the mapped values as the running A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
parameters on a phase by phase basis. If the mapped value
for MAX# is Zero, no mapping of Passage or Maximum shall
occur (Passage & Maximum 1 or Maximum 2 will continue to SPEC FUNCTION 4 00000000
be used). If the mapping parameter for MAX# is non-zero, SPEC FUNCTION 5 00000000
then PAS# mapping may occur if the mapping parameter is SPEC FUNCTION 6 00000000
non-zero or if zero and the normal passage is also zero SPEC FUNCTION 8 00000000
(mapping a zero value for a zero value is like not mapping) PAS3+MAX3=VEH 33-48 TIME 00000000
but the real time displays will show the mapped values as in PAS4+MAX4=VEH 49-64 TIME 00000000
PAS5+MAX5=SPC +PED TIME 100000000
control.
The above entry denotes that Special and Pedestrian Detector
Timing will be used as Passage and Maximum values rather
than detector Extend and Delay values. It also denotes that
alternate Passage and Maximum timing will be active any
time Special Function 1 is enabled by Time Base or System
Interface events.

Page 138 ALTERNATE PASSAGE & MAXIMUM
The next step to alternate Passage and Maximum timings is to

enter the Passage and Maximum values for the desired
phases.
SPC DET TIMING (TBC FUNCTION MAPPED)

DETECTOR...1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
*PAS5 000 050 000 050 000 050 000 050
MAX4 000 080 000 080 000 080 000 080
The above entries denote that Phases 2, 4, 6, & 8 will have

Passage values of 5 seconds and Maximum values of 80
seconds.
Phases 1, 3, 5, & 7 will use their normal Passage and
Maximum timings.
CAUTION should be exercised when removing unwanted
mapping. First set the Vehicle, Pedestrian, or Special times
(PAS3, MAX3, PAS4, MAX4, PAS5, or MAX5) to Zero. Then
eliminate the mapping by setting same to Zero (Clearing ALL
Time Base Events will reset the mapping to it's default
values). Following this sequence will prevent the possibility
of eliminating the mapping without resetting the timing
parameters to Zero which will have an adverse effect on the
operation of any vehicle detectors.

ADAPTIVE MAXIMUM Page 139
8 ADAPTIVE MAXIMUM
The Dynamic Max Values are enabled by Time Base or System
Interface events.
8.1 OPERATION:
The CU provides an optional feature which provides a phase

8.2 IMPLEMENTATION:
by phase Adaptive Max operation based on vehicle demand.
The CU provides a user entry of Dynamic Max (0-999 Seconds)
and Dynamic Step (0-99.9 Seconds).
The first step to implementing adaptive maximum operation
When Adaptive Max operation is enabled (Dynamic Max is to establish mapping of timing values from detector
greater than 0), the CU sets the phase Adaptive Max value functions to adaptive maximum functions.
equal to the Normal Max (Max 1, Max 2, etc.) for each phase.
Detector To Phase Association
After a phase maxs out twice in a row and on each successive
max out thereafter, one Step value will be added to the Vehicle Detector # 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Adaptive Max until such addition would mean the Adaptive
Max was greater than the larger of the Normal Max or the
Dynamic Max. Special Detector # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
After a phase gaps out twice in a row and on each successive Pedest Detector # - - - - - - - -
gap out thereafter, one Max Step value will be subtracted
from the Adaptive Max until such subtraction would mean Phase 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the Adaptive Max was less than the smaller of the Normal Max
or the Dynamic Max..
If the phase gaps out in one cycle and maxs out the next cycle Detector To Phase Association
or vice versa, the Adaptive Max will not change.
When a phase has not received service for a period equal to
two times the Ring 1 sum of the larger of the Normal Max or
Dynamic Max for each phase, the CU shall operate as though Special Detector # - - - - - - - -
the phase had gapped out twice in a row. Subsequently and
until such time as the phase receives service, the CU shall Pedest Detector # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
operate as though a gap out occurred every 60 seconds.
Phase 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Maximum Recall will disable Adaptive Maximum Green
operation on a phase. This step also control what logical function will be used to call
adaptive maximum.
A failed detector will disable Adaptive Maximum Green
operation on a phase. EPAC TIME BASE SPC FUNC MAPPING
SPC FUNC
For the Cycle Fail diagnostic, when running non-coordinated, S-FUNCTION NAME ......... 12345678
two cycles equals two times the sum of the larger of the SPEC FUNCTION 2 00000000
Normal Max (Max 1, Max 2, etc.) or the Dynamic Max for Ring SPEC FUNCTION 3 00000000
1 phases. CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
When Force Off terminates a phase, the CU shall not consider
it a max out or gap out in the Adaptive Max operation.
When Interval Advance terminates a phase, the CU shall not SPEC FUNCTION 4 00000000
consider it a max out or gap out in the Adaptive Max SPEC FUNCTION 6 00000000
operation. SPEC FUNCTION 7 00000000
When a phase is Conditional Serviced, the CU shall not PAS3+MAX3=VEH 33-48 TIME 00000000
consider it a max out or gap out in the Adaptive Max PAS4+MAX4=VEH 49-64 TIME 00000000
PAS5+MAX5=SPC + PED TIME 00000000
operation. DYNA MAX3=VEH 33-48 TIME 00000000
DYNA MAX4=VEH 49-64 TIME 00000000
The Dynamic Max Values are functional with Max 3, 4, & 5 or DYNA MAX5=SPC + PED TIME 10000000
pattern Max parameters.
The above entry denotes that Special and Pedestrian Detector
Timing will be used as Step and Dynamic Maximum values

Page 140 ADAPTIVE MAXIMUM
rather than detector Extend and Delay values. It also denotes

that Adaptive Maximum operation will be active any time
Special Function 1 is enabled by Time Base or System
Interface events.
The next step to implementing adaptive maximum operation
is to enter the Step and Dynamic Maximum values for the
desired phases. Remember, phases with a Dynamic Maximum
of “0” do not have Adaptive Maximum enabled and will run
normal maximum operation.
SPC DET TIMING (TBC FUNCTION MAPPED)

DETECTOR...1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
*DM5STEP 000 050 000 050 000 050 000 050
DMX5 000 080 000 080 000 080 000 080
The above entries denote that Phases 2, 4, 6, & 8 will have

Adaptive Maximum enabled with Step values of 5 seconds
and Dynamic Maximum values of 80 seconds.
Phases 1, 3, 5, & 7 will not have Adaptive Maximum enabled.
If the detector times are used for DMX5, they will not be used
as MAX 5 if the TBC Mapping calls for both (even if different
special functions are assigned).
DMX# supersedes MAX# use.
8.3 APPLICATION REFERENCE
Some manufacturers provide a variable max operation that

forces the user to enter a variable max parameter which must
be larger than either Max 1 or Max 2. Some provide a variable
max operation that will reset the variable max on a single gap
out.
We thought a more useful multiple maximum tool would be
provided in a variable max parameter which could be set to
any value greater than zero. When smaller than either Max 1
or Max 2, it could become a min variable max per phase. This
would leave the normal max values as the max setting. Also,
the transition down on gap out should be as smooth as the
transition up on max out.

ADAPTIVE PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE Page 141
9 ADAPTIVE PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE

Detectors are assigned in pairs to this routine. One detector is
for the turn phase and one detector is for the turn’s opposing
9.1 OPERATION through phase. If either of these detectors failed any
diagnostic, this routine will call for Protected operation (NOT
omit the turn phase).
When more than one detector has a mode 5 or mode 6 code
The CU provides an optional Adaptive Protected / Permissive for the same Adaptive Protected / Permissive routine (i.e.,
operation. This control measures the volume of turn vehicle Switch Phases are equal), the lowest numbered detector will
traffic and available gap windows in the opposing through be utilized and the other(s) will be ignored.
vehicle traffic to determine whether the turn should operate
When this routine is calling for Permissive operation, the
protected or permissive.
turn detector will be switched to the through phase.
The user set variables are:
 Minimum Turn Volume. This variable (0-999 VPH)
represents the minimum volume on the turn
detector necessary to consider running protected
9.2 PROGRAMMING
operation.
 Minimum Vehicle Gap. This variable (0-999
seconds) represents the minimum gap between
opposing through detector calls during the PRESS "1" FROM DETECTOR CONTROL DATA MENU
opposing through green needed to accommodate
a permissive turn vehicle. When this variable is ‘0’, VEH DET CONTROL .1..2..3..4..5..6..7..8
the routine will utilize a value of 10 seconds to ASSIGNED PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPERATION MODE 5 6 0 0 0 0 0 0
prevent operation without parameters. SWITCHED PHASE 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
 Gap Percentage: This variable (0-999 percent) MODE: 0-VEH 1-PED 2-ONE 3-SBA
represents the percentage of through gap 4-SBB 5-PPL 6-PPT
SWITCHED: TO PH # (AP=Y/R & SP=GRN)
windows that will be utilized by turning vehicles. A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
 Maximum Constant Call. This variable (0-999
minutes) represents the maximum time a constant ASSIGNED PHASE: This entry is the phase number to
call on the turn detector can exist before this receive calls from the detector.
routine will discontinue calling for permissive OPERATION MODE: Mode 5 for the turn detector and Mode
operation. 6 for the opposing through detector. The through
The fixed variables are: detector must sense all lanes for through vehicles. The
 Smooth Averaging Time. This variable (5 minutes) Mode 5 Assigned Phase will receive the phase omit.
represents the period over which measured SWITCHED PHASE: This entry is the phase number of the
variables are smoothed. turn phase. Both Mode 5 and Mode 6 detectors must
point to the same phase. This is how we group the
The measured variables are: detector pairs.
 Smoothed Turn Volume. This variable represents
the calculated volume of turn detector calls based PRESS "1" FROM DETECTOR TIMING DATA MENU
on a rolling average for the Smooth Averaging
VEH DET TIMING
Time. DETECTOR...1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8
 Smoothed Gap Windows. This variable represents *EXTEND 3 50 000 000 000 000 000 000
the calculated number of through detector gap DELAY 120 05 000 000 000 000 000 000
windows during the through green sufficient to * VALUE IS TENTHS OF SECONDS
allow permissive turn vehicles on a rolling average
for the Smooth Averaging Time. A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU
If the Smoothed Turn Volume is less than Minimum Turn EXTEND: For Mode 5 detectors, this value becomes the
Volume, this routine will call for Permissive operation (omit Maximum Constant Call for the detector pair. For
the turn phase). Mode 6 detectors, this value becomes the Gap
If the Smoothed Gap Windows multiplied by the Gap Percentage for the detector pair.
Percentage exceeds the Smoothed Turn Volume, this routine DELAY: For Mode 5 detectors, this value becomes the
will call for Permissive operation (omit the turn phase). Minimum Turn Volume for the detector pair. For Mode
6 detectors, this value becomes the Minimum Vehicle
If there has been a constant turn detector call longer than Gap for the detector pair.
Maximum Constant Call, this routine will call for Protected
operation (NOT omit the turn phase). PRESS "0" FROM TIME BASE MENU

Page 142 ADAPTIVE PROTECTED / PERMISSIVE
EPAC TIME BASE FUNCTION MAPPING

SPC FUNC
FUNCTION NAME 12345678
DYNA MX4=VEH 49-64 TIME 00000000
DYNA MX5=SPC + PED TIME 00000000
DISABLE PROT/PERM OMITS 10000000
CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
The above entry denotes that the Adaptive Protected / Permissive routines
will be disabled any time Special Function 1 is enabled by Time Base or
System Interface events.

LANE USAGE SIGN CONTROL Page 143
10 LANE USAGE SIGN CONTROL

The CU Time Base Special Function Mapping provides for mapping Special Functions 1-8 as Lane Usage Sign control. An ‘ABC
I/O Mode’ is also available to utilize Phase On, Phase Check, and Phase Next outputs as Sign Control outputs. When these two
areas are programmed, the CU will control four pairs of lane usage signs. The sign pairs are associated with phases 2, 4, 6, and
8.
Each lane usage sign pair has four active states as follows:
State 1 (Display 1) is the default mode during all periods which the CU is operating in a non-flashing state (stop-and-go).
State 2 (To Display 2) is provided as a transition mode when a command for Display 2 is received while Display 1 is active.
State 3 (Display 2) is the alternate mode as requested by a Time Base Auxiliary Event or System command.
State 4 (To display 1) is provided as a transition mode when the command for Display 2 is terminated while Display 2 is
active.
A change of state will occur only one second after the beginning of the respective phase red.
Each state will be maintained for a minimum of two cycles. Two cycles is defined as follows:
 When running coordinated, two times the pattern cycle length.
 When running non-coordinated, two times the longest path between barriers (Maximum Green, Yellow, and Red times sum).
If the command for Display 2 is terminated during State 2 (To Display 2), State 1 (Display 1) shall follow.
If the command for Display 2 becomes active during State 4 (To Display 1), State 3 (Display 2) shall follow.
After a power interruption which causes a CU startup, the Lane Usage Sign control shall initialize in State 1.
The outputs for control elements of the lane usage sign pairs and their status in each state is as follows:
SIGN 1A (Phase 2) SIGN 1B (Phase 2)
THRU & LEFT ONLY THRU LEFT & OK ONLY
OK
SIGN PHS 1 ON PHS 1 PHS 1 STATE PHS 2 PHS 2 NXT PHS 2 CHK
1 NXT CHK ON
2 NXT CHK ON
3 NXT CHK ON
4 NXT CHK ON
State ON ON OFF 1 ON OFF ON
1
State OFF ON OFF 2 ON OFF ON
2
State OFF ON ON 3 ON ON OFF

Page 144 LANE USAGE SIGN CONTROL
3
State OFF ON ON 4 ON OFF OFF
4

LANE USAGE SIGN CONTROL Page 145
EPAC TIME BASE SPC FUNC MAPPING
10.1 IMPLEMENTATION:
SPC FUNC
S-FUNCTION NAME ......... 12345678
CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
The first step to implementing Lane Usage Sign operation is
to establish a means to output same. ‘ABC’ CONN OUTPUT
Mode 18 modifiers the Phase ON, NEXT, and CHECK hardware DISABLE PROT/PERM OMITS 00000000
output drivers to operate as Lane Usage Sign Control outputs. PHASE 2 SIGN CONTROL 10000000
PHASE 4 SIGN CONTROL 01000000
PRESS "8" FROM UNIT MENU PHASE 6 SIGN CONTROL 00100000
PHASE 8 SIGN CONTROL 00010000
EPAC I/O MISC The above entries denotes that Display 2 for the Phase 2 Sign
RING I/O RING....1...2...3...4
INPUT RESPONSE 1 2 0 0 will be called when Special Function 1 is set active by Time
OUTPUT SELECT 1 2 0 0 Base or System Interface events. Display 2 for the Phase 4
I/O MODES....INPUT..OUTPUT..BIT Sign will be called when Special Function 2 is active. Display 2
‘ABC’ CONN : 0 18 0
‘D’ CONN : 0 0 - for the Phase 6 Sign will be called when Special Function 3 is
A-UP B-DN C-LT D-RT E-ENTER F-PRIOR MENU active. Display 2 for the Phase 8 Sign will be called when
Special Function 4 is active.
Default Data is as shown.
The next step to implementing Lane Usage Sign operation is
to establish the means to call for Display 2.
A possible cabinet configuration might utilize load switches to drive ac powered signs and could be wired as follows:

TX DIAMOND INTERSECTION CONTROL Page 147
THE TX DIAMOND INTERSECTION
11 TEXAS DIAMOND INTERSECTION

CONTROL
When TX Diamond Load Default is requested (Utilities, Load Default, TX Diamond), configuration data compatible with the
following modes is loaded and Diamond Mode shall be active.
11.1 FOUR PHASE DIAMOND MODE
When ALT SEQUENCE 16 is programmed (Unit Data, Startup & Misc), the CU operate in 4 Phase Diamond Mode.
When operating in 4 Phase Diamond Mode, the CU shall perform the following sequence:
11.1.1 Sequence Change:

Operation may be switched from 4 Phase Diamond Mode to:
 Separate Intersections Mode any Phase
 3 Phase Diamond Mode Phase 1+5
 NEMA Mode Phase 1+5

Page 148 TX DIAMOND INTERSECTION CONTROL
11.1.2 Detector Logic:

Detectors with a (*) must only be assigned to some phase to provide the operation defined for this mode. Any specific data entry
is generally ignored, in this mode, except the Extend time for Detectors 12, 16, 17, & 18 which provide the defined user set ‘gap’.
Detectors without an (*) must be programmed in accordance with the ‘Default Program Data’ at the end of this appendix to
provide the operation noted.
* Detector 1 shall:
 Call Phase 6 when Overlap A (1+2) is not green and a Phase 7 or Phase 8 call does not exist.
 Extend Phase 9 when Phase 9 is green.
Detector 2 shall call and extend Phase 2.
Detector 3 shall:
 Call Phase 3 when Phase 3 and Phase 11 are not green.
Detector 4 shall:
* Detector 5 shall:
 Call Phase 2 when Overlap B (5+6) is not green and a Phase 3 or Phase 4 call does not exist.
 Extend Phase 13 ()when Phase 13 is green.
Detector 7 shall:
Detector 8 shall:
* Detectors 9 and 10 shall:
 Call Phase 6 when Overlap A (1+2) is not green and a Phase 7 & Phase 8 call does not exist.
 Extend Phase 2 when Phase 2 is green and a Phase 3 or Phase 4 call exists.
Detector 11 shall:
 Call Phase 2 when Phase 2 is not green.
 Extend Phase 2 when Phase 2 is green until a user set gap (0-9.9 seconds) in Detector 11 activity occurs at which time
Detector 11 shall become inactive. This state (Detector 11 inactive) shall be maintained until Phase 2 yellow.
* Detector 12 shall:
 Extend Phase 4 when Phase 4 is green until a Phase 6 call exists and a user set gap (0-9.9 seconds) in Detector 12
activity occurs at which time Detector 12 shall become inactive. This state (Detector 12 inactive) shall be maintained
until Phase 4 yellow or the Phase 6 call disappears prior to Phase 4 yellow.
 Call Phase 2 when Overlap B (5+6) is not green and a Phase 3 & Phase 4 call does not exist.
Detector 15 shall:
* Detector 16 shall

* Detectors 17 shall:
* Detector 18 shall
11.1.3 Ring Structure:

Texas Std I.D. 1725 1825 25 35 45 L-R NA 3516 4516 16 17 18 R-L NA
Ring 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 1
Traffic Std I.D.
Ring 2 15 16 5 6 7 8 13 14
Phase Ring Next Concurrent Phase Ring Next Concurrent

1 1 2 6-7-8-13-14 9 1 10 5
2 1 3 5-15-16 10 1 11 5
3 1 4 5 11 1 12 6
4 1 9 5 12 1 1 6
5 2 6 2-3-4-9-10 13 2 14 1
6 2 7 1-11-12 14 2 15 1
7 2 8 1 15 2 16 2
8 2 13 1 16 2 5 2
11.1.4 Sequence Control Logic:

• DUAL ENTRY PHS 2 & 6
• OMIT PHS 10 & 14
•
• IF PHS 5 NOT GREEN THEN OMIT PHS 9
• IF (PHS 3 ON OR PHS 4 ON) AND (PHS 6 ACTUATION OR PHS 6 CHECK) THEN OMIT PHS 9
•
• IF (PHS 7 ON OR PHS 8 ON) AND (PHS 2 ACTUATION OR PHS 2 CHECK) THEN OMIT PHS 13


•
• IF (NOT PHS 1 ON) AND
• (PHS 9 ON) OR
• (PHS 11 ON) OR
• (PHS 12 ON) OR
• (PHS 6 ACTUATION OR PHS 6 CHECK) OR
• (PHS 8 ACTUATION OR PHS 8 CHECK) THEN
PLACE PHS 1 ACTUATION
• IF ( (PHS 13 ON) AND
(NOT PHS 2 CHECK) AND
(NOT PHS 4 CHECK) THEN
• IF (NOT PHS 5 ON) AND

(PHS 13 ON) OR
(PHS 15 ON) OR
(PHS 16 ON) OR
(PHS 2 ACTUATION OR PHS 2 CHECK) OR
(PHS 4 ACTUATION OR PHS 4 CHECK) THEN
• IF ( (PHS 9 ON) AND

(NOT PHS 8 CHECK) THEN
• IF (PHS 5 ON AND NOT PHSASE 9 ON) AND

• IF (NOT PHS 6 ON) AND (PHS 6 ACTUATION OR PHS 6) CHECK THEN

PLACE PHS 11 & PHS 12 ACTUATION
• IF (PHS 1 ON AND NOT PHS 13 ON) AND


• IF (NOT PHS 2 ON) AND (PHS 2 ACTUATION OR PHS 2 CHECK) THEN

PLACE PHS 15 & PHS 16 ACTUATION
11.2 THREE PHASE DIAMOND MODE
When ALT SEQUENCE 17 is programmed (Unit Data, Startup & Misc.), the CU operate in 3 Phase Diamond Mode.
When operating in 3 Phase Diamond Mode, the CU shall perform the following sequence:

Operation may be switched from 3 Phase Diamond Mode to:

Detectors with a (*) must only be assigned to some phase to provide the operation defined for this mode. Any specific data entry
is generally ignored, in this mode.
Detectors without an (*) must be programmed in accordance with the ‘Default Program Data’ at the end of this appendix to
provide the operation noted.
* Detector 1 shall:
 Call Phase 1 when Phase 2 is green.
 Extend Phase 1 when Phase 1 is green and a Phase 2, Phase 3, or Phase 4 call exists.


* Detector 5 shall:
Detector 11 shall:
Detector 12 shall:
Detector 15 shall:
Detector 16 shall:
Detector 17 shall:
Detector 18 shall:

Texas Std ID NA NA 15 48 15 37 26 15
Ring 1 12 11 10 4 9 3 2 1
Traffic Std ID
Ring 2 16 15 14 8 13 7 6 5


1 1 12 5-6 9 1 3 7-13
2 1 1 5-6 10 1 4 8-14
3 1 2 7-13 11 1 10 15-16
4 1 9 8-14 12 1 11 15-16
5 2 1-2 13 2 3-9
6 2 1-2 14 2 4-10
7 2 3-9 15 2 11-12
8 2 4-10 16 2 11-12

• DUAL ENTRY PHS 1, 5, 9, 10, 13 & 14
• OMIT PHS 11, 12, 15, & 16
• IF PHS 3 IS DARK (NOT PRESENT) THEN OMIT PHS 13
•
• IF (PHS 1 GRN) AND (PHS 7 ACTUATION OR PHS 7 CHECK) THEN OMIT PHS 13
•
• IF (PHS 2 ON) AND
• PLACE PHS 10 ACTUATION
• IF (PHS 4 ON) AND (PHS 7 ACTUATION OR PHS 7 CHECK) THEN PLACE PHS 9 ACTUATION
• PLACE PHS 5 ACTUATION

11.3 SEPARATE INTERSECTIONS MODE
When ALT SEQUENCE 18 is programmed (Unit Data, Startup & Misc), the CU operate in Separate Intersections Diamond Mode.
When operating in Separate Intersections Mode, the CU shall perform the following sequence:

Operation may be switched from Separate Intersections Mode to:

Detectors must be programmed in accordance with the ‘Default Program Data’ at the end of this appendix to provide the
operation noted.
Detectors 9 and 10 shall:
 Call Phase 1 when Phase 1 and Phase 2 are not green
 Extend Phase 1 when Phase 1 is green
Detector 11 shall:
Detector 12 shall:
Detectors 13 and 14 shall:
 Call Phase 5 when Phase 5 and Phase 6 are not green


Detector 15 shall:
Detector 16 shall:
Detector 17 shall:
Detector 18 shall:

Ring 1 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12
NO BARRIERS
Ring 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16

1 1 2 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 9 1 10 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16
2 1 3 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 10 1 11 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16
3 1 4 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 11 1 12 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16
4 1 9 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16 12 1 1 5-6-7-8-13-14-15-16
5 2 6 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 13 2 14 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12
6 2 7 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 14 2 15 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12
7 2 8 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 15 2 16 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12
8 2 13 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12 16 2 5 1-2-3-4-9-10-11-12

 OMIT PHS 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, & 16
11.4 NEMA MODE
When ALT SEQUENCE 00-15 is programmed (Unit Data, Startup & Misc.), the CU operate in NEMA Diamond Mode.
When operating in NEMA Mode, the CU shall perform the following sequence:


Operation may be switched from NEMA Mode to:

 See Separate Intersections Mode

Ring 1 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12
Ring 2 5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16

1 1 2 5-6 9 1 10 13-14
2 1 3 5-6 10 1 11 13-14
3 1 4 7-8 11 1 12 15-16
4 1 9 7-8 12 1 1 15-16
5 2 6 1-2 13 2 14 9-10
6 2 7 1-2 14 2 15 9-10
7 2 8 3-4 15 2 16 11-12
8 2 13 3-4 16 2 5 11-12

 OMIT PHS 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, & 16

11.5 SPECIAL OUTPUT OPERATION
The Controller Interlock output shall be active (True - low state) as long as the voltages in the CU do not drop below
predetermined levels required to provide normal operation.
The Confirm Select A and Confirm Select B outputs shall not be operational.
11.6 SPECIAL INPUT OPERATION
The Master Select Input, when active, shall have no effect on the CU operation.
Computer Select 1 input, when active, shall function as Vehicle Detector 17 input.
Computer Select 2 input, when active, shall function as Vehicle Detector 18 input.
Computer Select 3 input, when active, shall have no effect on the CU operation.
The Free (No Coordination) input, when active, shall disable the Coordination timing control of the CU.
The TBC On Line input, when active, shall disable the Time Base pattern outputs to the internal coordination program.
Internal Coordination control shall be determined by the state of the above inputs as defined in the following table:
Computer On Line Interconnect Free TX Input Name
Free (No Coordination) TBC On Line Operation
TRUE DONT CARE Free (No Coordination)
FALSE FALSE Local TBC Operation
FALSE TRUE Interconnect Operation
When Internal Coordination is in control, the mode (Separate Intersections, 4 Phase Diamond, 3 Phase Diamond, & NEMA) shall
be controlled by same. Each coordination pattern (Dial/Split, Offset shall provide an entry to automatically select the desired
mode. During these periods when Internal Coordination is in control, the mode inputs below will have no effect.
When Internal Coordination is in control and a change in mode (Separate Intersections, 4 Phase Diamond, 3 Phase Diamond, &
NEMA) is requested, the CU shall momentarily drop free in order to transition to the new mode.
When the Diamond Mode is True and the Separate Intersections input is active, the CU shall operate in the Separate
Intersections Mode noted above. When the Diamond Mode is False, this input shall have no effect on the CU operation.
When the Diamond Mode is True and the Force 4 Phase input is active, the CU shall operate in the Four Phase Diamond Mode
noted above. When the Diamond Mode is False, this input shall have no effect on the CU operation.
When the Diamond Mode is True and the Force 3 Phase input is active, the CU shall operate in the 3 Phase Diamond Mode noted
above. When the Diamond Mode is False, this input shall have no effect on the CU operation.
When the Diamond Mode is True, the operation of the CU as Separate Intersections Mode, 4 Phase Diamond Mode, 3 Phase
Diamond Mode, or NEMA Mode shall be determined by the state of the above inputs as defined in the following table:
Separate Force 4 Force 3 Diamond Mode
Intersection Phase Phase Sequence
TRUE X X Separate Intersections
FALSE FALSE FALSE Normal (Keypad /TBC)
FALSE FALSE TRUE 3 Phase Diamond
FALSE TRUE FALSE 4 Phase Diamond
FALSE TRUE TRUE Normal (Kypad / TBC)
X = DONT CARE

The operation of the CU as Separate Intersections Mode, 4 Phase Diamond Mode, 3 Phase Diamond Mode, or NEMA Mode shall
be selected via the keypad, Internal Coordination, Time Base Control, and the Inputs defined above. The hierarchy shall be in
the order (highest to lowest) Internal Coordination, Inputs, Time Base, and Keypad.
11.7 PROGRAMMING
11.7.1 Diamond Operation Rules
11.7.1.1 Basic Traffic

Under Diamond Mode, the "existence" of phases is not user controlled nor is the sequence via front panel Unit Data/Ring
Configuration data entry section (F45). The only control available to the user under Diamond Mode is to remove the phase(s)
from the sequence via an Initialization data entry of "DARK" under the Phase Data/Initialization & Non-Actuated data entry
section of the front panel (F34).
If a particular Diamond Mode Sequence requires a non-standard operation from a particular detector, the only data entry which
will effect that detector under that configuration is the entry of Assigned Phase, Extend, and Delay times. The Extend and Delay
have an effect if such times are required under the non-standard operation as stated elsewhere in this manual.
Data entries for detectors which operate in a manner standard to CUs or will operate in a standard manner when in a Diamond
Mode Sequence which permits such operation, will be effected by any relevant data entered. Detectors not assigned by the
Diamond Mode are free from any arbitrary constraints on usage and may be assigned and used subject only to the logical
constraints imposed by input availability and phase assignment.
Overlap programming is integral to the traffic signal display for Diamond Mode and is subject to operator modification. Care
should be taken when such modifications are contemplated!
11.7.1.2 Coordination
Diamond Mode is compatible with Coordination Modes Permissive and Yield. All other Coordination Modes will cause a ‘Bad
Plan Free’.
It is assumed that each Coordination Timing Plan is tailored for a particular Diamond Mode Sequence (Separate Intersections
Mode, 4 Phase Diamond Mode, 3 Phase Diamond Mode, or NEMA Mode ). The Diamond Mode Sequence is either that entered in
the Offset Alternate Sequence or the Default Alternate Sequence when the Offset Alternate Sequence is less than ‘16’. This
means that the order in which front panel entries are made is significant as the Offset Alternate Sequence must be entered first
if the plan is expected to run on other then the Default Alternate Sequence.
Under coordination, only Primary phases are controlled. Primary phases are those needing timing control by coordination.
DARK phases and unused phases in a particular Diamond Mode Sequence are never primary. The primary phases for each
Diamond Mode Sequence are as follows:
4 Phase Diamond Mode: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 12, and 16.
3 Phase Diamond Mode: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 13.
If either 4 or 3 is DARK, 13 is not primary. Likewise, if either 8 or 7 is DARK, 9 is not primary.
Separate Intersections Mode & NEMA Mode: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.
Front panel entry of Diamond Mode Sequence Coordination Phase Times is designed to verify the entered time against the
sequence selected for that Timing Plan (see paragraph above).
Coordination Phase times for non Primary phases will serve as the Maximum time for that phase when that Timing Plan is
active.
Coordination Phase times for DARK phases can be any value (but these times will have no effect on the cycle.)
In 3 Phase Diamond Mode, Coordination permissive operation might preclude service of 1 and 5 when transitioning from 2+6 to
4 or 8 if the calls arrive after the vehicle permissive has closed on 1 and 5.
The CU does not calculate the Cycle Length for any Diamond Mode Sequences. The user must enter the proper cycle length to
run for each Diamond Mode Sequence under coordination. The CU will verify the Cycle against the calculated "bad plan cycle"

(phase times for ring 1 phases less than 9 e.g. phases 1, 2, 3 and 4). Care must be taken that a cycle length is entered or a "bad
plan" is noted.
11.7.1.2.1 Four Phase Diamond Mode
The coordination primary phases (Split times MUST be entered for these phases, if active) and timing association for the four
phase diamond mode are as follows:
Texas Std ID 1825 25 35 45 4516 16 17 18
Ring 1 2 3 4 12 1
Coord Std ID 2+16 2+5 3+5 4+5 6+12 1+6 1+7 1+8
Ring 2 16 5 6 7 8
The Cycle Length should equal the sum of the pattern times for Phases 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, & 8.
PRIMARY PHASES:
The pattern time for Phase 1 should be based on whether it is one of the pattern Coordinated Phase(s).
Coordinated Phases = 1 & 7: Phase 1 time = Phase 6 + 7 time - Phase 12 time + Phase 8 Min Green
Coordinated Phases = 1 & 8: Phase 6 + 7 + 8 time - Phase 12 time
All Others: Phase 1 time = Phase 6 time - Phase 12 time + Phase 8 Min Green
The pattern time for Phase 5 should be based on whether it is one of the pattern Coordinated Phase(s).
Coordinated Phases = 3 & 5: Phase 5 time = Phase 2 + 3 time - Phase 16 time + Phase 4 Min Green
Coordinated Phases = 4 & 5: Phase 2 + 3 + 4 time - Phase 16 time
All Others: Phase 5 time = Phase 2 time - Phase 16 time + Phase 4 Min Green
The pattern time for Phase 12 is assumed to be less than the pattern time for Phase 6.
The pattern time for Phase 16 is assumed to be less than the pattern time for Phase 2.
NON-PRIMARY PHASES:
The pattern time for Phase 9 (Left to Right clearances) is assumed to be less than the pattern time for Phase 3, 4, or 12.
The pattern time for Phase 11 (3+5 to 1+6 clearance) is assumed to be less than the pattern time for Phase 6.
The pattern time for Phase 13 (Right to Left clearances) is assumed to be less than the pattern time for 7, 8, or 16.
The pattern time for Phase 15 (1+7 to 2+5 clearance) is assumed to be less than the pattern time for Phase 2.
11.7.1.2.2 Three Phase Diamond Mode
The coordination primary phases (Split times MUST be entered for these phases, if active) and timing association for the three
phase diamond mode are as follows:
Texas Std ID 48 15 37 26 15
Ring 1 4 9 3 2 1
Coord Std ID 4+8 9+13 3+7 2+6 1+5
Ring 2 8 13 7 6 5
The Cycle Length should equal the sum of the pattern times for Phases 4,9,3,2,& 1 or 8,13,7,6, & 5.
PRIMARY PHASES:
The pattern time for Phase 9 & 13 should be set to limit the Phase 4 + 8 to Phase 3+7 clearance.
NON-PRIMARY PHASES:

The pattern time for Phase10 is assumed to be less than or equal to the pattern time for Phase 1.
The pattern time for Phase14 is assumed to be less than or equal to the pattern time for Phase 5.
11.8 TIME BASE
The first step to implementing Time Base or System control of Diamond Mode Sequences is to map Special Function Control to
the Diamond Mode Sequences. (From the Main menu: 6-Time Base Data & 0-Spc Func Mapping)
EPAC TIME BASE SPC FUNC MAPPING

SPC FUNC
S-FUNCTION NAME ......... 12345678
TX DIAMOND - FOUR PHASE 10000000
TX DIAMOND - THREE PHASE 01000000
TX DIAMOND - SEPARATE 00100000
CODES.......0-OFF....1-ON............
The above denotes that:

- TX DIAMOND FOUR PHASE (ALT SEQ 16) will be called any time Special Function 1 is called.
- TX DIAMOND THREE PHASE (ALT SEQ 17) will be called any time Special Function 2 is called.
- TX DIAMOND SEPARATE INTERSECTIONS (ALT SEQ 18) will be called any time Special Function 3 is called.
Nothing else is required for System selection of the Diamond Mode Sequences. To Program local time base to call for these
sequences, all the user needs to do is to enter Auxiliary Events calling for Special Function 1, 2, or 3 as follows:
EPAC TIME BASE - AUXILIARY EVENTS

DD HH MM A123 D123 DIM S12345678
01 06:00 000 000 0 10000000
> 01 08:00 000 000 0 01000000
01 10:00 000 000 0 00100000
CODES........0-OFF....1-ON..............
OVERWRITE ">" W/ 1-ADD 2-DELETE 3-EDIT
The above denotes that:

- Special Function 1 (TX DIAMOND FOUR PHASE -ALT SEQ 16) will be called at 6:00 AM on day 1.
- Special Function 2 (TX DIAMOND THREE PHASE (ALT SEQ 17) will be called at 8:00 AM on day 1.
- Special Function 3 (TX DIAMOND SEPARATE INTERSECTIONS (ALT SEQ 18) will be called at 10:00 AM on day 1.

11.9 DEFAULT PROGRAM DATA
When TX Diamond Load Default is requested (Utilities, Load Default, TX Diamond), the following configuration data compatible
with the Diamond Modes above will be loaded into EEPROM and Diamond Mode shall be active. This is the FIRST thing that
should be done when it is desired to operate in Diamond Mode.
When Diamond Mode is active, all phases are active and INITIAL Code ‘0’ NONE has no effect. Set the phase to ‘5’ DARK when it is
desired to be NOT present.
When Diamond Mode is active, Ring Structure data for RING, NEXT, and CONCUR have no impact on CU operation.
UTILITIES - ACCESS
Access Code : 0000 Codes: Four Digits (0000 - 9999)
PHASE DATA - VEHICLE TIMINGS

Basic Times Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MIN GRN : 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 2 5 5 2 2
PASS/10 : 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
MAX # 1 : 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 2 2 25 25 2 2
MAX # 2 : 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 4 4 50 50 4 4
YEL/10 : 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
RED/10 : 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Density Times Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AINI/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MAX INI : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TIM BEF : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CAR BEF : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TIME TO : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MGAP/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PHASE DATA - PEDESTRIAN TIMINGS & CONTROL

Pedestrian Times Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
WALK : 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PED CLR : 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Pedestrian Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
* FL WK : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
* EXT PCL : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
* ACT RIW : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
* Codes: “1” = Yes & “0” = No
PHASE DATA - VEHICLE CONTROL

Vehicle Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

NL MEM : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 ENTRY : 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LC PASS : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CON SER : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NO SGAP : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Codes: “1” = Yes & “0” = No

PHASE DATA - GENERAL CONTROL

General Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
INITIAL : 1 4 5 1 4 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NA RESP : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V.RECALL : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P.RECALL : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DELAY : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Codes : 0 1 2 3 4
INITIAL : NONE INACTIVE RED YELLOW GREEN
NA RESP : NONE TO NA I TO NA II TO BOTH -----
V.RECALL : NONE 1 CALL MINIMUM MAXIMUM SOFT
P.RECALL : NONE 1 CALL PED NA NA+
PHASE DATA - SEQUENCE CONTROL

Sequence Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OMIT : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-YEL : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OCAL : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OMIT ## PHS ON OMITS THIS PHASE
-YEL ## PHS YEL OMITS THIS PHS YEL
OCAL WHEN OMIT, DETS CALL ## PHS
PHASE DATA - VEH DETECTOR CONTROL

Control Detector: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ASSIGNED PHASE : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 2 4 5 5 6 8
OPERATION MODE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 0 0 4 4
SWITCHED PHASE : 0 0 11 12 0 0 15 16 2 2 0 0 6 6 0 0
EXTEND/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 2 2
DELAY : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ASSIGNED PHASE : 3 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OPERATION MODE : 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SWITCHED PHASE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
EXTEND/10 : 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DELAY : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Codes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OPERATIONAL MODE : VEH PED ONE SBA SBB PPL PPT AND
ASSIGNED PHASE : NONE Detector Is Assigned To # - Phase
SWITCHED PHASE : NONE Detector Is Switched To # - Phase When The Assigned Phase Is Yel / Red & # -
Phase Is Green



ASSIGNED PHASE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OPERATION MODE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SWITCHED PHASE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
EXTEND/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DELAY : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ASSIGNED PHASE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OPERATION MODE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SWITCHED PHASE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
EXTEND/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DELAY : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Codes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OPERATIONAL MODE VEH PED ONE SBA SBB PPL PPT AND
ASSIGNED PHASE NONE Detector Is Assigned To # - Phase
SWITCHED PHASE NONE Detector Is Switched To # - Phase When The Assigned Phase Is Yel / Red & # -
Phase Is Green
PHASE DATA - PED DETECTOR CONTROL

Control Detector: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ASSIGNED PHASE : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPERATION MODE : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SWITCHED PHASE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
EXTEND/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DELAY : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PHASE DATA - SPC DETECTOR CONTROL

ASSIGNED PHASE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OPERATION MODE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SWITCHED PHASE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
EXTEND/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DELAY : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Codes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OPERATIONAL MODE : VEH PED ONE SBA SBB PPL PPT AND
ASSIGNED PHASE : NONE Detector Is Assigned To # - Phase
SWITCHED PHASE : NONE Detector Is Switched To # - Phase When The Assigned Phase Is Yel / Red & # -
Phase Is Green

PHASE DATA – MISC PED OPTIONS

Option : Phase 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
WOFF/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MODE : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
WOFF MODE 0-ADVANCE WALK 1-DELAY WALK
GDLY/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
YDLY/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BGRN/10 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

UNIT DATA - STARTUP & MISC

STARTUP TIME : 5 Time In Seconds
STARTUP STATE : 0 0-Flash 1-Red
RED REV/10 : 20 Time In Tenth Second
AUTO PED CLR : 1 0-No 1-Yes
STOP T RESET : 0 0-No 1-Yes
ALT SEQUENCE : 16 00-18 Alt Sequence ##
I’NAT’L SEQ : 0 0-No 1-Yes
UNIT DATA - AUTOMATIC FLASH

TST A = Flash : ____ 0 - NO / 1 - YES For TEST A Input For An Automatic Flash Input
Control Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
FLSH(2=YEL) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ALT FLASH : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ENTRY PHASE : 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
EXIT PHASE : 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Codes : 0 1 2
FLSH(2=YEL) NO RED YEL All = 0 Then Voltage Monitor Flash
ALT FLASH : NO YES -- Used To Provide Wig-Wag Flashing
ENTRY PHASE : NO YES -- Phase(s) To Precede Automatic Flash
EXIT PHASE : NO YES -- Phase(s) To Follow Automatic Flash
UNIT DATA – OVERLAP (Overlap Phases)

Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OL A Phase(s) : 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL B Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
OL C Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL D Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL E Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL F Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL G Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL H Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL I Phase(s) : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL J Phase(s) : 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
OL K Phase(s) : 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
OL L Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
OL M Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
OL N Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

OL O Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL P Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Codes: 0 - NO 1 - YES Phase Is Included In Overlap

UNIT DATA – OVERLAP (+Green Phases)

Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OL A Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL B Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL C Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL D Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL E Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL F Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL G Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL H Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL I Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL J Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL K Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL L Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL M Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL N Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL O Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL P Phase(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Codes: 0 - NO 1 - YES Phase Is Plus Green Phase
UNIT DATA - OVERLAP

Control Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OL A Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL B Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL C Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL D Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL E Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL F Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL G Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL H Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL I Channel(s) : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL J Channel(s) : 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL K Channel(s) : 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL L Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL M Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL N Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL O Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OL P Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Codes: 0 - NO 1 - YES Overlap Outputs To Channel

Overlap Controls MUST First Be Assigned To Channels. Once Assigned, They Must Also Be Assigned To Hardware
Output Pins.

UNIT DATA - OVERLAP

Control : TR GRN YEL/10 RED/10 -GRN/YEL
Overlap A : 0 35 15 0
Overlap B : 0 35 15 0
Overlap C : 0 35 15 0
Overlap D : 0 35 15 0
Overlap E : 0 35 15 0
Overlap F : 0 35 15 0
Overlap G : 0 35 15 0
Overlap H : 0 35 15 0
Overlap I : 0 35 15 0
Overlap J : 0 35 15 0
Overlap K : 0 35 15 0
Overlap L : 0 35 15 0
Overlap M : 0 35 15 0
Overlap N : 0 35 15 0
Overlap O : 0 35 15 0
Overlap P : 0 35 15 0
Codes :
TR GRN : Trailing Green Time In Seconds
YEL/10 Trailing Yellow Time In Tenth Seconds
RED/10 Trailing Red Time In Tenth Seconds
-GRN / YEL :
+GRN :
UNIT DATA - RING STRUCTURE

Control Channel:: RING PH NXT CONCUR PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Phase 1 : 1 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Phase 2 : 1 3 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Phase 3 : 1 4 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Phase 4 : 1 9 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Phase 5 : 2 6 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Phase 6 : 2 7 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Phase 7 : 2 8 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Phase 8 : 2 13 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Control Channel:: RING PH NXT CONCUR PH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Phase 9 : 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
Phase 10 : 1 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

Phase 11 : 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
Phase 12 : 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
Phase 13 : 2 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
Phase 14 : 2 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
Phase 15 : 2 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
Phase 16 : 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
Codes :
RING Ring Number For Phase (1-4)
PH NXT Phase Next In Ring (1-16)
CONCUR PH Phase(s) To Run Concurrent (0-NO / 1-YES)

b
Control Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PH 01 Vehicle Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PH 01 Pedest Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Control Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Ph 11 Vehicle Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ph 11 Pedest Channel(s) : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Codes: 0 - NO 1 - YES Phase Vehicle / Pedest Outputs To Channel
Phase Controls MUST First Be Assigned To Channels. Once Assigned, They Must Also Be Assigned To Hardware Output
Pins.
UNIT DATA - ALTERNATE SEQUENCE

Control REVERSE PHASES
Alternate Sequence 00 : NONE
Alternate Sequence 01 : 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
Reverse Phases Must Be In The Same Ring And Next To Each Other
UNIT DATA - PORT 1

ADDRESS DESCRIPTION PRES M40
00 T&F BIU # 1 TS2 : 0 0 PRES: 0-NO / 1-YES; this Port 1 device
01 T&F BIU # 2 TS2 : 0 0 is present.
02 T&F BIU # 3 TS2 : 0 0 M40: 0-NO / 1-YES; this Port 1 device
03 T&F BIU # 4 TS2 : 0 0 is to receive Message 40 to query
04 T&F BIU # 5 RESERVED : 0 0 same for peer to peer messages.
05 T&F BIU # 6 RESERVED : 0 0
06 T&F BIU # 7 MFG USE : 0 0
07 T&F BIU # 8 MFG USE : 0 0
08 DET BIU # 1 TS2 : 0 0
09 DET BIU # 2 TS2 : 0 0
10 DET BIU # 3 TS2 : 0 0

11 DET BIU # 4 TS2 : 0 0

12 DET BIU # 5 RESERVED : 0 0
13 DET BIU # 6 RESERVED : 0 0
14 DET BIU # 7 MFG USE : 0 0
15 DET BIU # 8 MFG USE : 0 0
16 MALFUNCTION UNIT : 0 0
17 DIAGNOSTIC (MSG 30) : 0 0
18 CONTROLLER UNIT : 0 0
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___

UNIT DATA - I/O MISC

Ring I/O Ring: 1 2 3 4
Input Response : 1 2 0 0 Ring # (1-4)
Output Select : 1 2 0 0 Ring # (1-4)
I/O Modes: INPUT OUTPUT
“ABC” Connector : 18 18
“D” Connector : 8 0
UNIT DATA - SIGNAL DRIVER OUTPUTS

SIGNAL DRIVER GROUP CHN HARDWARE OUTPUT PIN SET Reference SET ## Function
OLP I Vehicle 01 Phase 1 Red/Yellow/Green 01 01 - PHS 1 Red/ Yellow/Green
PHS 2 Vehicle 02 Phase 2 Red/ Yellow/Green 02 02 - PHS 2 Red/ Yellow/Green
OLP J Vehicle 03 Phase 3 Red/ Yellow/Green 03 03 - PHS 3 Red/ Yellow/Green
OLP K Vehicle 04 Phase 4 Red/ Yellow/Green 04 04 - PHS 4 Red/ Yellow/Green
OLP L Vehicle 05 Phase 5 Red/ Yellow/Green 05 05 - PHS 5 Red/ Yellow/Green
PHS 6 Vehicle 06 Phase 6 Red/ Yellow/Green 06 06 - PHS 6 Red/ Yellow/Green
OLP M Vehicle 07 Phase 7 Red/ Yellow/Green 07 07 - PHS 7 Red/ Yellow/Green
OLP N Vehicle 08 Phase 8 Red/ Yellow/Green 08 08 - PHS 8 Red/ Yellow/Green
OLP A Vehicle 09 OL A Red/ Yellow/Green 17 13 - PHS 5 DW/PC/WK
OLP B Vehicle 10 OL B Red/ Yellow/Green 18 14 - PHS 6 DW/PC/WK
OLP C Vehicle 11 OL C Red/ Yellow/Green 19 15 - PHS 7 DW/PC/WK
OLP D Vehicle 12 OL D Red/ Yellow/Green 20 16 - PHS 8 DW/PC/WK
PHS 2 Pedestrian 13 Phase 2 DW/PC/WK 10 09 - PHS 1 DW/PC/WK
PHS 1 Pedestrian 17 Phase 1 DW/PC/WK 09 17 - OLP A Red/ Yellow/Green
PHS 3 Pedestrian 18 Phase 3 DW/PC/WK 11 18 - OLP B Red/ Yellow/Green
PHS 5 Pedestrian 19 Phase 5 DW/PC/WK 13 19 - OLP C Red/ Yellow/Green
PHS 7 Pedestrian 20 Phase 7 DW/PC/WK 15 20 - OLP D Red/ Yellow/Green
__________________ 21 __________________ ____ 21 - PHS 1 On/Next/Check
__________________ 22 __________________ ____ 22 - PHS 2 On/ Next/Check
__________________ 23 __________________ ____ 23 - PHS 3 On/ Next/Check
__________________ 24 __________________ ____ 24 - PHS 4 On/ Next/Check
X 25 - PHS 5 On/ Next/Check
SIGNAL DRIVER GROUP column is automatic & indicates the assigned Channels in Ring Structure & Overlap database.
CHN column is a list of the available channels 01-24 in numerical order.

HARDWARE OUTPUT PIN column is automatic & indicates the assigned SET entered here.
SET column is for user entry of the hardware outputs to receive a channels outputs.

SCOOT INTERFACE Page 179
12 SCOOT INTERFACE
 Set TYPE 1 MSG to 1 (STD) or 2 (ACA). Most
A Controller Unit with EPAC300 Firmware/Software (CU)
likely this will be ACA since it allows for more
provides the following SCOOT Interface:
detectors.
 Select 8 from the main SEPAC menu.
 Select 1 Communications.
12.1 GENERAL:  Select 1 Address to match what the SCOOT
Comm server is expecting.
 Cycle the power.
 SEPAC will now be listening on port 8117 for
SCOOT messages to be passed to the SCOOT
The EPAC shall utilize resident Scoot Configuration data process for parsing.
(Stage ? Phase Masks) to determine the phase(s) that are
associated with a specific stage.
The EPAC shall utilize resident Scoot Configuration data
(Scoot Detector Mask) to determine the local detectors that
12.4 PROTOCOL:
are to be utilized as Scoot Detectors.
The EPAC shall utilize resident Scoot Configuration data
(Scoot Phase Mode Mask) to determine the Phase The system communication shall operate in a mode where
Operational Mode, Phase Dwell State, & Green Signals for the secondary station shall initiate transmission only as the
Reply status bits. result of receiving a command from the primary station
Scoot Configuration data is downloaded from central. It is addressed to the secondary station.
NOT transferred via Unit to Unit transfer NOR will a local All commands and responses shall start with the Opening
printout show this data. Flag 7E. All stations shall continuously hunt for this
Dual Ring configurations should operate in Dual Entry Opening Flag. Thus the Opening Flag is used for message
mode (a phase On in each ring at all times) when NOT synchronization.
under Scoot control else Scoot Central will NOT attempt to The transmitter shall examine the message content
bring the EPAC on line. following the Opening Flag (including the Checksum) and
upon the occurrence of the Opening Flag or Control Escape
Byte 7D and:
12.2 DEFINITIONS:  Complement the 6th bit of the byte (7E becomes
5E and 7D becomes 5D), and
 Insert a Control Escape Byte 7D immediately
prior the byte
Stage: Phase or Combination of Phases as defined in the The EPAC provides two message types for the Scoot
Stage ? Phase Mask Interface. The first (STD-standard) limits the local address
to seven with minimal response data while the second
Permitted Stage: Any stage which has it’s Stage Force bit set (ACA-extended) provides for 15 local addresses with
in Control Byte 1. Control Byte 1 may include multiple extended response data
Stage Force bits at the same time.
Permitted Phase: Any phase defined by the Stage ? Phase
Mask of a Permitted Stage.
12.4.1 SCOOT STD (Standard)
Excluded Phase: Any phase that is not a Permitted Phase.
Message Types
The Scoot Standard Command and Response Messages are
as follows:
12.3 SCOOT over IP
12.4.1.1 SCOOT STD Command Message
The SCOOT STD Command message will include the
To configure SEPAC for SCOOT over IP do the following: following bytes:
 Select 2 from the main SEPAC menu. 1. Opening Flag (7E)
 Select 8 Configure Ports
 Select 6 SCOOT Comm 2. Address/Control Byte
 Set BAUD RATE to 7 (ENET). Bit 7 = 1 (Prevents this byte from being a 7E or 7D)

Page 180 SCOOT INTERFACE
Bit 6-4 = Local Address (0-7 same as EPAC System B. NOT service a Permitted Stage unless it has
Address) demand. Without Stage Demand, the phase(s)
defined in the Permitted Stage(s) are prevented
Bit 3-0 = Bytes to Follow (Include Control Escape from receiving service (Phase Omit active).
Bytes & Checksum but exclude any Control Escape
C. Terminate Excluded Phase(s) if Stage Demand
Byte for Checksum)
exists on Permitted Stage(s) via the Force Off
command. The Force Off can not terminate a phase
1. Control Byte 1 while timing Minimum Green, Walk, or Pedestrian
Bit 7-0 = Stage Force H-A (Bit 7=Stage H / Bit Clearance.
0=Stage A) D. Insure (when a Force Off is issued) the next
Permitted Stage with Stage Demand appears even
1. Control Byte 2 though the actuation(s) disappear prior to start of
Bit 7-1 = Stage Demand H-B (Bit 7=Stage H / Bit Stage Green (e.g., right turn on red).
1=Stage B) E. Allow any Permitted Phase to time normally but
shall NOT be allowed to terminate (go to Yellow -
Bit 0 = Common Demand (All Stages) see Gap Out bit below). Pedestrians shall only
occur at the beginning of the phase green (Ped
1. Control Byte 3 Omit is active when the phase is Green).
Bit 7-4 = Special Function (Bit 7=SF4 / Bit 4=SF1 F. On initial recognition of a Stage-A Force command
bit (with no other Force command bits active), the
Bit 3-1 = Spare Bits (Set to Zero) EPAC shall exert a Ped Recycle control on each ring
which a Stage-A phase Green is active.
Bit 0 = Stage Gap Out The SCOOT Central shall initiate such a Stage-A
Force command once each cycle while exercising
1. Checksum Byte (8-bit 1’s complement) control.
A. Utilize Phase Hold, for the duration of the Stage

12.4.1.2.1 STD Control Byte 1 Force command, to operate phase(s) in accordance
with the Scoot Phase Mode (Scoot Configuration
data) as follows:
Receipt of non-zero Control Byte 1 (Stage Force) in Scoot
Scoot Phase Mode = 0
Commands for three seconds shall cause the EPAC to
implement Scoot Coord Control. During periods of Scoot Stage A Dwell: Walk Hold (Green/Walk)
Coord Control, the EPAC shall:
NA Phase Dwell: Walk Hold (Green/Walk)
A. Remove Internal Coord control but shall run Coord
in the background (as we do in Low Priority
routines) thereby enabling a transfer from Scoot to Act Phase Dwell: Green Hold (Green/Dont Walk)
Internal Coord (ACTRA or Time Base called) in sync
with the running pattern. Pattern Alternate Scoot Phase Mode 1
Sequence shall continue to operate. Stage A Dwell: Green Hold (Green/Dont Walk)
B. NOT operate Cycling Diagnostics while under Scoot
Coord Control. NA Phase Dwell: Walk Hold (Green/Walk)
C. Operate Phase(s) defined in the Stage A Phase
Act Phase Dwell: Green Hold (Green/Dont Walk)
Mask in accordance with the Scoot Phase Mode
defined in the Scoot Configuration data as follows:
A. Report in ECOM message 04, 0E, 25 & 56 an
 Mode 0 - Non-Actuated (Vehicle & Pedestrian)
extended Local Mode 4 for Scoot Control.
regardless of their individual phase
programming, or B. Shall recognize inputs / operations that conflict
 Mode 1 - Pedestrian Recalled phases unless with the Scoot Coord Control and revert to Free
individual phase programming is Non-Actuated mode when the inputs / operations are active. The
inputs that conflict are:
All other phases shall operate in accordance with
their individual phase programming (actuated or 1) Stop Time (Any Ring)
non-actuated).
2) Manual Control Enable
A. Prevent Excluded Phases from receiving service 3) Automatic Flash
(Phase Omit active).
4) Preemption (Any)

B. When the Control Byte 3 ‘Gap Out’ bit is set, the

5) Low Priority (Any)
EPAC shall allow the current stage to Gap Out and
6) Startup Flash service another Permitted Stage (no Hold active on
actuated phases). The 'Gap Out' bit shall have NO
7) Diagnostic Flash effect on non-actuated phases.
8) Low Voltage Use of this feature in dual ring configurations
9) Idle Restart (Data Change caused Restart) requires that all Stages utilizing the active phases
and all Stages utilizing the phases which may time
When Stop Time is NOT assigned and/or Automatic Flash concurrently with the active phases must be
has no Entry Phases programmed, activation of those ‘permitted’. In those case where this
inputs will result in Free mode. recommendation is not followed, the central may
Receipt of ZERO Control Byte 1 in Scoot Commands for fail the EPAC.
three seconds shall cause the EPAC to discontinue Scoot The absence of SCOOT Commands for three seconds shall
Coord Control and revert to the next level of Coord control cause the EPAC to discontinue the control called for by
(System, Time Base, Interconnect, etc.). Control Byte 3.
The absence of Scoot Commands for three seconds shall
cause the EPAC to discontinue Scoot Coord Control and
12.4.1.2 SCOOT STD Reply Message:
revert to the next level of Coord control (System, Time
Base, Interconnect, etc.). The SCOOT STD Reply message will include:
1. Opening Flag (7E)
12.4.1.1.2 STD Control Byte 2 2. Address/Control Byte
Bit 7 = 1 (Prevents this byte from being a 7E or 7D)
Receipt of SCOOT Commands for three seconds shall cause Bit 6-4 = Local Address (0-7 same as EPAC System
the EPAC to implement the control called for by Control Address)
Byte 2 as follows:
A. When the Control Byte 2 ‘Common Demand’ bit is Bit 3-0 = Bytes to Follow minus 5 (Include Control
set, the EPAC shall operate as though Vehicle Escape Bytes & Checksum but exclude any Control
Minimum Recall were enabled on all Vehicle Escape Byte for Checksum)
Phases and Pedestrian Recall were enabled on all
Pedestrian Phases (Walk > zero). 1. Status Byte 1
B. When the Control Byte 2 ‘Stage ? Demand’ is set, Bit 7-0=Stage Green Status (Bit 7=Stage H / Bit
the EPAC shall operate as though Vehicle 0=Stage A)
Minimum Recall were enabled on the Stage’s
Vehicle Phases and Pedestrian Recall were enabled 1. Status Byte 2
on the Stage’s Pedestrian Phases (Walk > zero).
Bit 7-1 = Stage Demand Status (Bit 7=Stage H / Bit
Stage A will operate as though Vehicle Minimum 1=Stage B)
Recall & Pedestrian Recall were enabled when any
Stage ? Demand bit is set. Bit 0 = Detector Fault
The absence of SCOOT Commands for three seconds shall
cause the EPAC to discontinue the control called for by 1. Status Byte 3
Control Byte 2. Bit 7-4 = Bus Demand 4-1 (Bit 7=BD4 / Bit 4=BD1)
Bit 3 = Controller Fault

12.4.1.1.3 STD Control Byte 3
Bit 2 = Manual Control
Receipt of SCOOT Commands for three seconds shall cause Bit 1 = Hurry Call
the EPAC to implement the control called for by Control
Byte 3 as follows: Bit 0 = Emergency Vehicle
A. When the Control Byte 3 ‘Special Function ?’ bit is
set, the EPAC shall set it’s Special Function ? to 1. Status Byte 4
active. This Special Function control is logically
Bit 7-4 = Special Function Confirm (Bit 7=SF4 / Bit
‘ORed’ with the EPAC TBC, ACTRA broadcast,
4=SF1)
special ECOM set command, or EPAC front panel
control.
Bit 3-2 = Spare (set to zero)

Bit 1-0 = Remote Request Status Input (Bit 1=RQ2 / Status Byte 2 ‘Stage ? Demand’ bits are set when the EPAC
Bit 0=RQ1) stages have demand as defined herein.
The EPAC shall consider a Phase has Demand if 1) the Phase
1. SCOOT Detector 01 & 02 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 2 / Bit 3-
is Green or 2) the phase has a call (vehicle or pedestrian, or
0=Det 1)
both - Phase Check active) when it is not Green.
The EPAC shall report Stage Demand as follows:
0=Det 3)
A. Where only one phase is defined in a stage,
demand is reported when the phase has a demand
0=Det 5)
as defined above.
B. Where more than one phase is defined in a stage,
0=Det 7)
demand is reported when all the phases defined in
5. SCOOT Detector 09 & 10 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 10 / Bit the stage have a demand as defined above.
3-0=Det 9)
C. Where a phase is defined in more than one stage
6. SCOOT Detector 11 & 12 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 12 / Bit and a stage demand can not be reported because
3-0=Det 11) no concurrent phase demand exists on any of the
other phases to enable a stage demand in (b)
7. Checksum Byte (8-bit 1’s complement) above, a stage demand will be reported on the last
stage including the phase with demand.
12.4.1.2.1 STD Status Byte 1 Stage Green Bits Dual ring configurations must provide individual
Stages for each combination of active phases that
may time concurrently.
Status Byte 1 ‘Stage ? Green’ bits are set when the EPAC The Stage Demand reply bits shall be a logical ANDing of:
stages are Green as defined herein.
(1) The valid image of EPAC Stage Demand status
The EPAC shall report Stage Green as follows: defined above
A. Where only one phase is defined in a stage, green (2) A logical NOTing of Stage Green reply bits
is reported when the phase is outputting the (prevents reporting stage demand for the
required signal. green stage)
B. Where more than one phase is defined in a stage, Status Byte 2 ‘Detector Fault’ bit is set when the EPAC
green is reported when all the phases defined in Detector Diagnostic indicates ANY detector has failed the
the stage are outputting the required signal. diagnostic.
The required signal shall be in accordance with the
following table:
12.4.1.2.3 STD Status Byte 3
Stage-A Phase Walk
Status Byte 3 ‘Bus Demand 4’ bit is set when the EPAC
NA Phase Walk Special Status 6 Input is active. Ditto the previous for Bus
Actuated Phase Green Demand 3 / Special Status 5, Bus Demand 2 / Special Status
4, and Bus Demand 1 / Special Status 3.
Status Byte 3 ‘Controller Fault’ bit is set when the EPAC
Stage-A Phase Green Stop Time Input is Active.
NA Phase Green Status Byte 3 ‘Manual Control’ bit is set when the EPAC
Manual Control Enable Input is Active.
Actuated Phase Walk
Status Byte 3 ‘Hurry Call’ is set when the EPAC Low Priority
During periods of Scoot Coord Control, the Stage Green
1-6 is active.
reply bits shall be a logical ANDing of:
Status Byte 3 ‘Emergency Vehicle’ bit is active when the
(1) Stage Force command bits
EPAC Preempt 1-6 is active.
(2) The true image of EPAC Stage Green status
defined above.
At all other times the Stage Green reply bits shall be the
true image of the EPAC Stage Green status defined above.
Status Byte 4 ‘SF4 Confirm’ bit is set when the EPAC Special
Function 4 Control is active from any source. Ditto the

previous for SF3 Confirm / Special Function 3, SF2 Confirm/ 1. Opening Flag (7E)
Special Function 2, and SF1 Confirm / Special Function 1.
2. Message/Address Control Byte
Status Byte 4 ‘Remote Request 2’ bit is set when the EPAC
Special Status 2 Input is active. Ditto the previous for
Remote Request 1 / Special Status 1.
Bit 6-4 = Message Type
0=Standard Scoot
STD Scoot Detector 01-02
1=Anaheim Scoot
Scoot Detector 01-02 Actuation Activity during the last
Bit 3-0 = Local Address (1-15 = EPAC System
second. A bit is set (1) when an actuation was present in the
Address)
time slice.
Bit 7 = Scoot Detector 2 (1 = detection in 4th 250ms 1. Remaining Bytes Control Byte
approx)
Bit 6 = Scoot Detector 2 (1 = detection in 3rd 250ms
approx) Bit 6-0 = Bytes to Follow (Include ALL Control
Escape Bytes)
Bit 5 = Scoot Detector 2 (1 = detection in 2nd
250ms approx) 1. Control Byte 1
Bit 7-0 = Stage Force H-A (Bit 7=Stage H / Bit
Bit 4 = Scoot Detector 2 (1 = detection in 1st 0=Stage A)
(oldest) 250ms approx)
1. Control Byte 2
Bit 3 = Scoot Detector 1 (1 = detection in 4th 250ms
approx) Bit 7-1 = Stage Demand H-B (Bit 7=Stage H / Bit
1=Stage B)
Bit 2 = Scoot Detector 1 (1 = detection in 3rd 250ms
approx) Bit 0 = Common Demand (All Stages)
Bit 1 = Scoot Detector 1 (1 = detection in 2nd 1. Control Byte 3

250ms approx) Bit 7-4 = Special Function (Bit 7=SF4 / Bit 4=SF1
Bit 0 = Scoot Detector 1 (1 = detection in 1st Bit 3-2 = Spare Bits (Set to Zero)
(oldest) 250ms approx)
Bit 1 = Flash
12.4.1.2.6 STD Scoot Detector 03-n Bit 0 = Stage Gap Out
1. Checksum Byte (8-bit 1’s complement)

Only as many detector bytes will be returned as are
necessary to include the detectors in use. Physical detectors
at an EPAC will be mapped into the Reply Message in 12.4.2.1.1 ACA Control Byte 1
numerical order (lowest numbered configured EPAC
detector becomes Scoot Detector #1, etc.).
This byte is the same as 12.4.1.2.1 STD Control Byte 1.
12.4.2 SCOOT ACA (Extended)

Message Type 12.3.2.1.2 ACA Control Byte 2
The Scoot ACA (Extended) Command and Response

Messages are as follows: This byte is the same as 12.4.1.1.2 STD Control Byte 2.
12.4.2.1 SCOOT ACA Command Message

12.4.2.1.3 ACA Control Byte 3
The SCOOT ACA Command message will include the
following bytes:

This byte is the same as 12.4.1.1.3 STD Control Byte 3 A. Status Byte 5
except as follows:
Bit 7-0=Phase Green Status (Bit 7=Phase 08 /
When the Control Byte 3 'Flash' bit is set, the EPAC shall Bit 0=Phase 01)
immediately enter a Scoot Flash mode. In Scoot Flash
A. Status Byte 6
mode, ALL vehicle channels shall flash RED. Alternate
flashing shall be as defined in the EPAC Flash display (F-4- Bit 7-0=Phase Yellow Status (Bit 7=Phase 08 /
2). Bit 0=Phase 01)
The EPAC shall exit Scoot Flash mode with the Startup A. Status Byte 7
Sequence defined.
Bit 7-0=Phase Detector Call Status (Bit 7=Phase
08 / Bit 0=Phase 01)
12.4.2.2 SCOOT ACA Reply Message
A. Status Byte 8
The SCOOT ACA Reply message will include: Bit 7-0=Phase Walk Status (Bit 7=Phase 08 / Bit
A. Opening Flag (7E) 0=Phase 01)
B. Message/Address Control Byte A. Status Byte 9
Bit 7 = 1 (Prevents this byte from being a 7E or Bit 7-0=Phase Ped Clear Status (Bit 7=Phase 08
7D) / Bit 0=Phase 01)
Bit 6-4 = Message Type A. Status Byte 10
0=Standard Scoot Bit 7-0=Pedestrain Call Status (Bit 7=Phase 08 /

Bit 0=Phase 01)
1=Anaheim Scoot
A. Status Byte 11
Bit 3-0 = Local Address (1-15 = EPAC System
Address) Bit 7-0=Overlap Green Status (Bit 7=Ovlp H /
Bit 0=Ovlp A)
A. Remaining Bytes Control Byte
A. Status Byte 12
Bit 7 = 1 (Prevents this byte from being a 7E or
7D) Bit 7-0=Overlap Yellow Status (Bit 7=Ovlp H /
Bit 0=Ovlp A)
Bit 6-0 = Bytes to Follow (Include ALL Control
Escape Bytes) A. SCOOT Detector 01 & 02 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 2 /
Bit 3-0=Det 1)
A. Status Byte 1
B. SCOOT Detector 03 & 04 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 4 /
Bit 7-0=Stage Green Status (Bit 7=Stage H / Bit Bit 3-0=Det 3)
0=Stage A)
C. SCOOT Detector 05 & 06 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 6 /
A. Status Byte 2 Bit 3-0=Det 5)
Bit 7-1 = Stage Demand Status (Bit 7=Stage H / D. SCOOT Detector 07 & 08 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 8 /
Bit 1=Stage B) Bit 3-0=Det 7)
Bit 0 = Detector Fault E. SCOOT Detector 09 & 10 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 10 /
A. Status Byte 3 Bit 3-0=Det 9)
Bit 7-4 = Special Function Confirm (Bit 7=SF4 / F. SCOOT Detector 11 & 12 Bit Masks (Bit 7-4=Det 12 /
Bit 4=SF1) Bit 3-0=Det 11)
Bit 3 = Controller Fault G. Checksum Byte (8-bit 1’s complement)
Bit 2 = Manual Control

Bit 1 = Hurry Call 12.4.2.2.1 ACA Status Byte 1
Bit 0 = Emergency Vehicle

A. Status Byte 4 This byte is the same as 12.4.1.2.1 STD Status Byte 1 (See
0).
Bit 7 = Remote Request Status Input
Bit 6 = Police Flash
12.4.2.2.2 ACA Status Byte 2
Bit 5 = Railroad Preempt
Bit 4-0 = Spare (set to zero)

This byte is the same as 12.4.1.2.2 STD Status Byte 2 (See 12.4.2.2.9 ACA Status Byte 9
0).
 Status Byte 9 ‘Phase Ped Clr Status’ bit is set

when the EPAC phase output is Ped Clr
(Bit 7=Phase 08 / Bit 0=Phase 01).
 Status Byte 3 ‘SF4 Confirm’ bit is set when the

EPAC Special Function 4 Control is active from 12.4.2.2.10 ACA Status Byte 10
any source. Ditto the previous for SF3 Confirm /
Special Function 3, SF2 Confirm/ Special
Function 2, and SF1 Confirm / Special Function  Status Byte 10 ‘Pedestrian Call Status’ bit is set
1. when an actuation occurs on any respective
 Status Byte 3 ‘Controller Fault’ bit is set when Phase Pedestrain Detector input (Bit 7=Phase 08
the EPAC Stop Time Input is Active. / Bit 0=Phase 01). EPAC shall reset the bit
 Status Byte 3 ‘Manual Control’ bit is set when following the transmission of a Scoot Reply
the EPAC Manual Control Enable Input is Active. Message.
 Status Byte 3 ‘Hurry Call’ is set when the EPAC
Low Priority 1-6 is active.
 Status Byte 3 ‘Emergency Vehicle’ bit is active 12.4.2.2.11 ACA Status Byte 11
when the EPAC Preempt 3-6 is active.
 Status Byte 11 ‘Overlap Green Status’ bit is set
when the EPAC overlap output is Green (Bit
12.4.2.2.4 ACA Status Byte 4 7=Overlap H / Bit 0=Overlap A).
 Status Byte 4 ‘Remote Request 1’ bit is set when

the EPAC Special Status 1 Input is active. 12.4.2.2.12 ACA Status Byte 12
 Status Byte 4 ‘Police Flash bit is set when the
EPAC Local Flash Status Input is active.
 Status Byte 12 ‘Overlap Yellow Status’ bit is set
 Status Byte 4 ‘Railroad Preempt’ bit is set when
when the EPAC overlap output is Yellow (Bit
the EPAC Preempt 1-2 is active.
7=Overlap H / Bit 0=Overlap A).

12.4.2.2.13 ACA Scoot Detector 01-02
 Status Byte 5 ‘Phase Green Status’ bit is set when

 This byte is the same as STD Scoot Detector 01-
the EPAC phase output is Green
02 (See 0).
12.4.2.2.14 ACA Scoot Detector 03-n

 This byte is the same as 12.4.1.2.6 STD Scoot

 Status Byte 6 ‘Phase Yellow Status’ bit is set
Detector 03-n (See 0).
when the EPAC phase output is Yellow
 Status Byte 7 ‘Phase Detector Call Status’ bit is

set when a call exists for the respective phase
vehicle service (Bit 7=Phase 08 / Bit 0=Phase 01).
 Status Byte 8 ‘Phase Walk Status’ bit is set when

the EPAC phase output is Walk

12.5 SCOOT STATUS SCREEN

CU Active Status Menu when SCOOT processor is present.
EPAC ACTIVE STATUS PRESS # DESIRED
1-RING TIMERS 6-DETECTORS

2-COORD TIMERS 7-INTERSECTION
3-PREEMPT TIMERS 8-PORT 1 FRAMES
4-TIME BASE 9-INPUT / OUTPUT
5-COMMUNICATIONS 0-MMU MONITORING
A-SCOOT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU
Press "A" from Active Status Menu

Msg Type = STD (Standard)
EPAC SCOOT STATUS: COORD VIA SCOOT

MSG IN .: 7E xx xx xx xx xx
MSG OUT : 7E xx xx xx xx xx
DET : xx xx xx xx xx xx CKS : xx
HOLD: xxxx OMIT: xxxx CALL: xxxx

SEC:xxx IN:xxx OUT:xxx TTL:xxx
B-SCOOT DATA F-PRIOR MENU
Msg Type = ACA (Extended)
EPAC SCOOT STATUS: COORD VIA SCOOT

MSG IN .: 7E xx xx xx xx xx xx
MSG OUT : 7E xx xx xx xx xx xx
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
DET : xx xx xx xx xx xx CKS : xx
HOLD: xxxx OMIT: xxxx CALL: xxxx
SEC:xxx IN:xxx OUT:xxx TTL:xxx
B-SCOOT DATA F-PRIOR MENU
EPAC SCOOT STATUS: (Line 1)

SCOOT NOT ACTIVE; There is no Scoot Commands for this address.
SCOOT W/NO COORD; Scoot Commands for this address with Zero Stage Force Byte.
SCOOT STARTING UP; Scoot Commands for this address with Non-Zero Stage Force Byte for less than 3 seconds.
COORD VIA SCOOT; Scoot Commands for this address with Non-Zero Stage Force Byte for more than 3 seconds.
MSG IN: (Line 2) - This is the Scoot Command message for this address with all Control Escape Bytes replaced with the actual
data byte.
MSG OUT: (Line 3 or Line 3 & 4) - This is the Scoot Reply message (less Detector Data & Checksum) with all Control Escape Bytes
replaced with the actual data byte.
DET: (Line 4 or Line 5) - This is the Scoot Detector data bytes (0-6) of Scoot Reply message with all Control Escape Bytes replaced
with the actual data byte.
CKS: (Line 4 or Line 5) - This is the Checksum Data byte of Scoot Reply message with all Control Escape Bytes replaced with the
actual data byte.
HOLD: (Line 6) - This is the Hold Phase Mask (Hex) generated from the Scoot Command message.
OMIT: (Line 6) - This is the Omit Phase Mask (Hex) generated from the Scoot Command message.
CALL: (Line 6) - This is the Demand (calls) Phase Mask (Hex) generated from the Scoot Command message.
SEC: (Line 7) - Number of seconds elapsed while this display was active.

IN: (Line 7) - Number of messages received for this address while this display was active (in SEC time).
OUT: (Line 7) - Number of messages this address transmitted while this display was active.
TTL: (Line 7) - Number of messages seen on the interface (all addresses) while this display was active.
Press "B" from EPAC SCOOT Status Display
EPAC SCOOT DATA

STAGE / PHASE HEX MASKS
...A ...B ...C ...D ...E ...F ...G ...H
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
SYSTEM DETECTOR HEX MASKS
xxxx xxxx
A-SCOOT MESSAGE F-PRIOR MENU
LINE 4 DATA
These are Phase Masks (Hex) for each Scoot Stage (Left = High Order / Right = Low Order bits).
LINE 7 DATA
This is the Detector Mask (Hex) for Scoot Detectors (Vehicle Detector 01-32) assigned (Left = High Order / Right = Low
Order bits).
12.6 SCOOT CONFIGURATION MESSAGE:
&H68 UPLOAD EPAC (3.30a+) SCOOT CONFIGURATION DATA COMMAND PC -> MARC -> EPAC
BYTE CONTENTS
01 &H19 - GENERAL UPLOAD COMMAND - MARC360
02 INTERSECTION NUMBER (001-032) - Header
01 &H68 - Message ##
02 Dummy Byte
&H68 UPLOAD EPAC (3.30a+) SCOOT CONFIGURATION DATA REPLY EPAC -> MARC -> PC
BYTE CONTENTS
02 &H00 - Block # (Set To 0)
03 Local Address (00-32)
04 Equip / Rev ## Hundreds
05 Equip / Rev ## Tens
06 Equip / Rev ## Ones
Byte 4/5/6: Bit 7-6 = Equip Type #
000 - EPAC300 / 001 - MARC300 / 010 - RMC300 / 100 - EPIC140
Byte 4/5/6: Bit 5-0 = Rev ## As Above
07-08 Stage A Phase Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)

BYTE CONTENTS
09-10 Stage B Phase Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)
11-12 Stage C Phase Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)
13-14 Stage D Phase Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)
15-16 Stage E Phase Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)
17-18 Stage F Phase Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)
19-20 Stage G Phase Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)
21-22 Stage H Phase Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)
23-26 Scoot Detector Mask (Bit 31=Det 32 & Bit 0=Det 1)
27-28 Scoot Phase Mode Mask (Bit 15=Phase 16 & Bit 0=Phase 1)
&H69 DOWNLOAD EPAC (3.30a+) SCOOT CONFIGURATION DATA COMMAND PC -> MARC -> EPAC
BYTE CONTENTS
01 &H1A - GENERAL DNLOAD COMMAND - MARC360
02 INTERSECTION NUMBER (001-032) - Header
02-06 Not Used
07-26 See Scoot Configuration Upload (Message 68)
The default configuration data (prior to any download from central) shall be:
Stage A = Phase 2 & 6
Stage B = Phase 3 & 7
Stage C = Phase 3 & 8
Stage D = Phase 4 & 7
Stage E = Phase 4 & 8
Stage F = Phase 1 & 5
Stage G = Phase 1 & 6
Stage H = Phase 2 & 5
Scoot Detector 1 = Vehicle Detector 7
Scoot Detector 2 = Vehicle Detector 8
Scoot Phase Mode Mask = 0x00

EAGLEVISION SETUP Page 189
13 EagleVision Camera Setup for SEPAC

These are notes and suggestions for setting up EagleVision cameras to work directly with SEPAC. This applies to SEPAC OS-9
3.34a, Linux 3.35, and SEPACn 4.04 or higher. There are no special SEPAC screens related to setting up the cameras. It is all
done in the cameras themselves. The EagleVision Camera Configuration program provides this ability in its Reporting
Configuration dialog. Results are viewed with the cameras utility on the controller.
There are three goals to meet when configuring a set of cameras:
 Two or more cameras must not attempt to control the same detector.
 A camera should not attempt to control a detector that is controlled by other hardware.
 Cameras should be configured in a consistent, sensible way for easy testing and troubleshooting.
This document provides information to help meet these goals and to assist agencies in creating consistent standards.
13.1 Reporting Configuration
The Reporting Configuration dialog (Camera Options => Reporting Configuration) has several items that are important for
proper camera setup. These items are detailed below, with reference to how they interact with SEPAC. The settings are divided
between global and per-destination. Global settings are in effect for all reporting destinations. Note that versions of camera
firmware older than 1.0.4.7 only support a single reporting destination.
13.1.1 Reporting Method

The Network reporting method must be selected in order to have the camera report its detection information to a SEPAC
controller. The Hardware reporting method does not matter when reporting to SEPAC, but may be required for other reasons.
Reporting Method is a global setting.
13.1.2 Reporting Type

The Reporting Type should be set for Immediate mode. Packet mode is reserved for future low-bandwidth situations. This is a
global setting.
13.1.3 Reporting Interval

In Immediate mode, the Reporting Interval determines how often redundant detection reports are sent to the controller when
there has been no change in detections. This satisfies the watchdog timer on the controller end. If the controller does not see at
least three reports in five seconds, it will consider the camera to be off line and force calls for all the detectors controlled by that

Page 190 EAGLEVISION SETUP
camera. In Packet mode, the Reporting Interval determines how often packets are sent. Reporting Interval is a global setting
that applies to all destinations
 Recommended Practice: this value should be set to 100 or left at 0 or, both of which cause reports to be sent at least
once per second.
13.1.4 Total Output Channels

This information only item reports to the user how many output channels the camera will be controlling for network reporting
purposes. In the camera's default configuration, this number is the same as the number of detector zones. But if zone logic has
been applied, such as OR-ing two zones together, this number may be different.
13.1.5 IP Address
The IP Address is that of the SEPAC controller which needs the detection information. Only numeric IP addresses are accepted.
Up to three different destination addresses are supported.
13.1.6 Camera ID
Each camera must have a unique ID number in addition to its own IP address. In SEPAC, the camera ID is only used to select
which detector group the camera will work with. Cameras 1-8 work only with detectors 1-32, and cameras 9-16 work only with
detectors 33-64. All other camera IDs are ignored.
 Recommended Practice: for cameras working detectors 1-32, set the camera ID to the number of the main phase that
it will be controlling, normally 2, 4, 6, or 8. If the approach is so wide that two cameras are required, use the phase
number of the turn lane for the camera which covers it, i.e. 2&5, 4&7, 6&1, or 8&3. For advance approach cameras,
use the main phase number minus one. For cameras working detectors 33-64, add 8 to the ID it would otherwise
have.
13.1.7 Output Channel Offset

The Output Channel Offset is used to map the camera's outputs into the set of 32 detectors in a detector group. The offset is
added to the camera's output number to give the detector number within the detector group. Here are two examples: if camera
2 has an Output Channel Offset of 8, then outputs 1-4 will show up as 9-12 in the first detector group (8+1=9) and as detectors
9-12 in the controller. If camera 10 has an Output Channel Offset of 4, then outputs 1-4 will show up as 5-8 in the second
detector group (4+1=5), and as detectors 37-40 in the controller (32+4+1=37). Note that Output Channel Offset plus Total
Output Channels must not be larger than 32.
13.2 Coordinating Multiple Cameras
Within a detector group (1-32 or 33-64), each camera may control a section of up to eight consecutive detectors. Cameras must
be configured so that the sections to not overlap. The sections controlled by the cameras need not be adjacent. Also, within a
camera's section, it is ok, though not recommended, to have "holes" where a camera output is skipped¹. Because all of a cameras
outputs are in a single section, default detector-to-phase mappings are normally not useful².
13.2.1 Stop Bar Cameras

Camera ID 2 4 x 6 8 x x
Out Chan 16 20 x 24 28 x x
Offset
Camera Output 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 x 1 2 – 4 1 2 x x
Detector 1 18 19 2 2 2 2 2 2 26 2 28 29 3 3 3
7 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 0 1 2
Phase Map 2 2 2 5 4 4 7 0 6 6 0 1 8 3 0 0

13.2.2 Advance Cameras

Camera ID 10 x 14 x
Out Chan 0 x 4 x
Offset
Camera Output 1 2 3 x 1 2 3 x
Detector 3 3 3 36 3 38 39 4
3 4 5 7 0
Phase Map 2 2 2 0 6 6 6 0
Figure 1.
In the Figure 1 example, camera six will not show any detection on output 3, which maps to Detector 27. Also note that Detector
24 is not controlled by any camera, but that camera 4 could be expanded to include that detector in the future.
Recommended practice: allocate four detectors for each camera when no camera needs more than four outputs (smaller
intersections), even if not all detectors are used. Allocate eight detectors per camera if any camera needs five or more outputs
(larger intersections). For convenience, make Output Channel Offset an even multiple of 4 or 8. This keeps all the detectors
from the same camera on the same 3.8.x screen.
Note:
¹Skipped outputs can never ordinarily show detection, since there is no zone or
logic driving them. However they will turn on if the camera fails. This is not the
preferred method for reserving outputs for future use. It is generally less confusing
to leave a gap at the end.
²For example, detections for phases 2 and 5 would normally come from the same
camera.
13.3 Recommendations Based On Cabinet Type
There is not a single way to set up cameras that works in all cabinets and situations. The following are general
recommendations designed to keep the camera detectors outside the normal detector hardware range for each cabinet type.
This is to prevent a situation where a camera detector and a loop detector are attempting to manage the same detector input.
Individual traffic agencies may choose to establish more specific recommendations or standards.
13.3.1 NEMA TS-1

The number of detector inputs on the A, B, and C connectors varies with the input mode. Thus 8, 16, 24, or 32 hard wired
detectors are available. All detectors are in fact available for camera use, but mapping to a detector supported by the Field I/O
may result in the Detector Fault Report not correctly showing On Line, Fail Det Wdog, and Fail Support messages for the
cameras.
 Recommended practice: Set camera outputs to a range that is not available to the hardwired inputs in the current
input mode.
 Alternate practice: Always set camera outputs to start at detector 33 regardless of the ABC input mode. Use 33-48 for
smaller intersections and 33-64 for larger.
13.3.2 NEMA TS-2

The number and location of the detector inputs varies with the number and addresses of the detector BIUs installed. Cameras
must not be mapped into the range of an active detector BIU.

 Recommended practice: set camera output to a range that is not accessible to an installed detector BIU. Remember to
add 8 to the normal camera ID to use detectors 33-64. Examples: if a detector rack is not installed, start camera
outputs with detector 1, using 1-16 for smaller intersections, or 1-32 for larger ones. If the first detector rack is
installed (BIU address 8), use 17-32 for smaller intersections, or 33-64 for larger ones. Or the cameras could use 1-
16, and the BIU 17-32.
 Alternate practice: Always set camera outputs to start at detector 33, provided that no more that 2 detector BIUs are
in use. Use 33-48 for smaller intersections and 33-64 for larger.
13.3.3 Caltrans 2070

The 2070 Field I/O supports detector from 1-38 with skips. Thus the cameras could start as low as detector 39 without
overlapping. Though all detectors are actually available for camera use, mapping to a detector supported by the Field I/O may
result in the Detector Fault Report not correctly showing On Line, Fail Det Wdog, and Fail Support messages for the cameras.
 Recommended practice: set camera outputs beginning with detector 41, using 41-56 for smaller intersections.
Larger intersections may use six per camera (41-64), or irregular mappings down to 39.
13.3.4 Nassau County 2070

The Nassau County variant of the 2070 brings in detectors 1-28 from the Field I/O. Thus cameras could start at 29 without
overlapping the FIO. Though all detectors are available for camera use, mapping to a detector supported by the Field I/O may
result in the Detector Fault Report not correctly showing On Line, Fail Det Wdog, and Fail Support messages for the cameras.
 Recommended practice: bring the cameras in beginning with detector 33, using 33-48 for smaller intersections, 33-
64 for larger.
13.3.5 ITS
The number of the detector inputs available for cameras depends on the number of active input files. Mapping cameras into the
range of an active input file may result in the Detector Fault Report not correctly showing On Line, Fail Det Wdog, and Fail
Support messages for the cameras. With only input file 1 active, cameras may be mapped beginning with detector 23. With
input files 1 & 2 active, cameras may begin with detector 43. Cameras should not be used if more than two input files are active.
 Recommended practice, input file 1 alone: set camera outputs beginning with detector 25, using 25 - 40 for smaller
intersections, 25-56 for larger.
 Recommended practice, input files 1 & 2: set camera outputs beginning with detector 45, using 45-60 for smaller
intersections. Larger intersections may use 43-64 with irregular mapping. Only the largest should encroach on
detectors available to an input file. Place labeled block outs on the vulnerable slots to prevent the insertion of a
detector card, or deactivate an input file if possible.
13.3.6 ITS/CBD (v1)

The CBD variant reads only detectors 1-12 from the input file. Thus the camera mapping could start as early as detector 13.
 Recommended practice: set camera outputs to use detectors 17-32 for smaller intersections, or 17-48 for larger.
 Alternate practice: set camera outputs to use 33-48 for smaller intersections and 33-64 for larger.
13.3.7 ITS/CBD v2
The CBD v2 variant reads only detectors 1-24 from the input file. Thus the camera mapping could start as early as detector 25.
 Recommended practice: set camera outputs to use detectors 33-48 for smaller intersections and 33-64 for larger.
13.4 The Cameras Utility
The cameras utility is available to help the user see how cameras are configured and how they are interacting with the
controller. This utility may only be run from a terminal connected to the controller's console port or from a telnet session to the
controller. The utility shows six main things:
1. the version of the video detection system,

2. the IP address associated with each camera ID,

3. which detectors are controlled by a camera,
4. the state of the detectors when the snapshot was taken,
5. any warning or error status information about the camera,
6. and a timestamp to confirm that new messages are arriving.
This aids the user in making sure that:
 no two cameras have the same camera ID (spoof warning),
 each camera is controlling the intended detectors,
 no detector is controlled by more than one camera,
 and all cameras are alive and reporting.
The utility also allows the entire camera data area to be reset without resetting the controller. A reset is useful when a camera is
taken off line permanently, when it is given a new camera number, or whenever the configuring of cameras has confused the
controller
The example in Figure 2 shows how the setup from Figure 1 might look just after being set up. It also highlights two errors to
be corrected.
Note the problem with camera 8. The Watchdog status flag is showing, and forced calls are being placed on detectors 29 and 30.
This means the camera has stopped reporting. The network and power connections should be checked.
Camera 10.227.3.194, the advance approach camera for phase 2, was incorrectly programmed to be camera 9, but was then
corrected to 10. However the "ghost" of camera 9 is putting out unwanted forced calls on detectors 33-35. Resetting the data
will correct this problem.
Camera 14 is reporting a low visibility error (the only kind it can report) and has put in calls for all its outputs.
Cameras utility, version 1.1 (OS-9).
Viewing Camera Data ...
Cam# IP Address 12345678 90123456 78901234 56789012 Status Timestamp

1 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
2 10.227.3.190 ........|........|CC--....|........ - - - 2753341378ms
3 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
4 10.227.3.191 ........|........|....--C.|........ - - - 2753342038ms
5 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
6 10.227.3.192 ........|........|........|-C-C.... - - - 2753341394ms
7 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
8 10.227.3.193 ........|........|........|....FF.. - - W 2753310886ms
Cam# IP Address 34567890 12345678 90123456 78901234 Status Timestamp

9 10.227.3.194 FFF.....|........|........|........ - - W 2753260855ms
10 10.227.3.194 -C-.....|........|........|........ - - - 2753341268ms
11 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
12 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
13 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
14 10.227.3.195 ....CCC.|........|........|........ - E - 2753341405ms
15 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
16 0.0.0.0 ........|........|........|........ - - - 0ms
Detector: . = not controlled, - = no call, C = call, F = forced call
Status: S = Cam ID Spoof, E = Camera-reported error, W = WatchDog timeout
Grp: Det=0x00000077 3A430000 Used=0x00000077 3F7F0000 OffLn=0x00000007 30000000

Hit Enter for new snapshot, r to reset data, anything else to quit:
Figure 2
13.4.1 Testing the System

Once the cameras have been configured, the entire system may be tested to assure that a particular camera output is activating
the expected detector in the controller. Set the SEPAC controller to screen 1-9-5 to view the final detector outputs. In
EagleVision Camera Configuration, open the Camera Config => Output Test window. Select the output or outputs to be tested,
select Blink Cnt and type in the number of times the output should be turned on and off. Then click Send and look for the
blinking detector in 1-9-5 screen. It should blink on and off about every 1.3 seconds.

3/7/2008 -- Original - jsg.

4/14/2009 -- Reflects V1.1 changes to the cameras utility and to itsvtd's addition of multiple reporting destinations. Adds screen
shots from EagleVision Config. Clarifies and revises the recommended practices for different cabinet types. Reformats Figure 1
table. - jsg

PROGRAM LOG Page 195
14 PROGRAM LOG
Prepared By : _________________________________________________ Date: ____ / ____ / ____
Approved By : _________________________________________________ Date: ____ / ____ / ____
Intersection Name : _____________________________________________________________________________
UTILITIES - ACCESS
Access Code : ___________ Codes: Four Digits (0000 - 9999)
PHASE DATA - VEHICLE TIMINGS

Basic Times Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Minimum Green : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Passage Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Maximum No 1 : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Maximum No 2 : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Yellow Change : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Red Clearance : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Density Times: Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Seconds/Actuation: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Maximum Initial : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Time B4 Reduction: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cars B4 Reduction: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Time To Reduce : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Minimum Gap : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHASE DATA - PEDESTRIAN TIMINGS & CONTROL

Pedestrian Times Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Walk: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Pedestrian Clearance: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Pedestrian Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Flashing Walk: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Extended Ped Clear: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Act Rest In Walk: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Pedestrian Control Entry: “1” = Yes & “0” = No
PHASE DATA - VEHICLE CONTROL

Veh Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Non-Lock Memory: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Page 196 PROGRAM LOG
Dual Entry : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Last Car Passage : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Conditional Service: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Simultaneous Gap: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Vehicle Control Entry: “1” = Yes & “0” = No
PHASE DATA - GENERAL CONTROL

General Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Initialization: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Non-Act Response: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Vehicle Recall: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Pedestrian Recall: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Recall Delay: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes: 0 1 2 3 4
Initialization: NONE INACTIVE RED YELLOW GREEN
Non-Act Response: NONE TO NA I TO NA II TO BOTH -----
Vehicle Recall: NONE 1 CALL MINIMUM MAXIMUM SOFT
Pedestrian Recall: NONE 1 CALL PED NA NA+
PHASE DATA - SEQUENCE CONTROL

Sequence Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Phase Omit : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Phase - Yellow : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 01 TO 16 (# - PHASE)
Phase Omit : NONE Phase Is Omitted By # - Phase On
Phase - Yellow NONE Phase Yellow Is Omitted By # - Phase Yellow

Assigned Phase : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Operation Mode : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Switch : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Extend Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Delay Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Assigned Phase : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Operation Mode : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Switch : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Extend Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Delay Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Phase Is Green


Assigned Phase : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Operation Mode : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Switch : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Extend Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Delay Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Assigned Phase : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Operation Mode : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Switch : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Extend Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Delay Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHASE DATA - PED DETECTOR CONTROL

Assigned Phase : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Operation Mode : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Switch : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Extend Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Delay Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHASE DATA - SPC DETECTOR CONTROL

Assigned Phase : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Operation Mode : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Switch : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Extend Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Delay Time : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Phase Is Green
PHASE DATA – MISC PED OPTIONS

Option Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
WOFF/10 : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
MODE : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

WOFF MODE 0-ADVANCE WALK 1-DELAY WALK
UNIT DATA - STARTUP & MISC

Startup Time : ____ Time In Seconds
Startup State : ____ 0-Flash 1-Red
Red Revert : ____ Time In Tenth Second
Auto Pedestrian Clear : ____ 0-No 1-Yes
Stop Time Reset : ____ 0-No 1-Yes
Alternate Sequence : ____ 00-15 Alt Sequence ##

UNIT DATA - AUTOMATIC FLASH

TST A = Flash : ____ 0 - NO / 1 - YES For TEST A Input For An Automatic Flash Input
Control Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Flash : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Alt Flash : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Flash Entry Phase : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Flash Exit Phase : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1 2
Flash : NO RED YEL All = 0 Then Voltage Monitor Flash
Alt Flash : NO YES -- Used To Provide Wig-Wag Flashing
Flash Entry Phase: NO YES -- Phase(s) To Precede Automatic Flash
Flash Exit Phase : NO YES -- Phase(s) To Follow Automatic Flash
UNIT DATA - OVERLAP

Control Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OL A Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL B Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL C Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL D Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL E Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL F Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL G Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL H Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL I Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL J Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL K Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL L Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL M Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL N Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL O Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OL P Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes: 0 - NO 1 - YES Phase Is Included In Overlap

UNIT DATA - OVERLAP

Control Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OL A Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL B Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL C Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL D Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL E Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL F Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL G Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL H Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL I Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL J Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL K Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL L Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL M Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL N Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL O Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
OL P Channel(s) : __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Codes: 0 - NO 1 - YES Overlap Outputs To Channel
Overlap Controls MUST First Be Assigned To Channels. Once Assigned, They Must Also Be Assigned To Hardware
Output Pins.
UNIT DATA - OVERLAP

Control : TRL GRN TRL YEL TRL RED -GRN/YEL +GRN
Overlap A : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap B : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap C : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap D : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap E : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap F : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap G : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap H : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap I : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Overlap J : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap K : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap L : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap M : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Overlap N : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Overlap O : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Overlap P : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Codes :
TRL GRN : Time In Seconds
TRL YEL : Time In Tenth Seconds
TRL RED : Time In Tenth Seconds
-GRN / YEL :
+GRN :


Control Channel:: RING NXT CONCUR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Phase 1 : ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 2 : ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 3 : ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 4 : ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 5 : ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

Phase 6 : ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 7 : ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 8 : ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 11: ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

Phase 12: ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 13: ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

Phase 14: ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 15: ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Phase 16: ___ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Codes :
RING Ring Number For Phase (1-4)
PH NXT Phase Next In Ring (1-16)
CONCUR PH Phase(s) To Run Concurrent (0-NO / 1-YES)

Control Channel:: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Ph 01 Veh Channel(s) :
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Ph 01 Ped Channel(s) :
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __


Control Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Codes: 0 - NO 1 - YES Phase Vehicle / Pedest Outputs To Channel
Phase Controls MUST First Be Assigned To Channels. Once Assigned, They Must Also Be Assigned To Hardware Output
Pins.
UNIT DATA - ALTERNATE SEQUENCE

Control REVERSE PHASES
Alternate Sequence 00:
NONE
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__

__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
__ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__ __ / __ __ /__ __ /__ __ /__
Reverse Phases Must Be In The Same Ring And Next To Each Other

UNIT DATA - PORT 1

ADDRESS DESCRIPTION PRES M40
00 T&F BIU # 1 TS2 : ___ ___ PRES: 0-NO / 1-YES; this Port 1 device
01 T&F BIU # 2 TS2 : ___ ___ is present.
02 T&F BIU # 3 TS2 : ___ ___ M40: 0-NO / 1-YES; this Port 1 device
03 T&F BIU # 4 TS2 : ___ ___ is to receive Message 40 to query
04 T&F BIU # 5 RESERVED : ___ ___ same for peer to peer messages.
05 T&F BIU # 6 RESERVED : ___ ___
06 T&F BIU # 7 MFG USE : ___ ___
07 T&F BIU # 8 MFG USE : ___ ___
08 DET BIU # 1 TS2 : ___ ___
09 DET BIU # 2 TS2 : ___ ___
10 DET BIU # 3 TS2 : ___ ___
11 DET BIU # 4 TS2 : ___ ___
12 DET BIU # 5 RESERVED : ___ ___
13 DET BIU # 6 RESERVED : ___ ___
14 DET BIU # 7 MFG USE : ___ ___
15 DET BIU # 8 MFG USE : ___ ___
16 MALFUNCTION UNIT : ___ ___
17 DIAGNOSTIC (MSG 30) : ___ ___
18 CONTROLLER UNIT : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___
___ __________________________ : ___ ___

UNIT DATA - I/O MISC

Ring I/O Ring: 1 2 3 4
Input Response:
____ ____ ____ ____ Ring # (1-4)
Output Select :
____ ____ ____ ____ Ring # (1-4)
I/O Modes : INPUT OUTPUT

“ABC” Connector :
____ ____
“D” Connector :
____ ____
UNIT DATA - SIGNAL DRIVER OUTPUTS

SIGNAL DRIVER GROUP CHN HARDWARE OUTPUT PIN SET Reference SET ## Function
01 - Ph 1 Red/Yel/Grn
__________________ 01 __________________ ____
__________________ 02 __________________ ____
__________________ 03 __________________ ____
__________________ 04 __________________ ____
__________________ 05 __________________ ____
__________________ 06 __________________ ____
__________________ 07 __________________ ____
__________________ 08 __________________ ____
09 - Ph 1 DW/PC/WK
__________________ 09 __________________ ____
10 - Ph 2 DW/PC/WK
__________________ 10 __________________ ____
11 - Ph 3 DW/PC/WK
__________________ 11 __________________ ____
12 - Ph 4 DW/PC/WK
__________________ 12 __________________ ____
13 - Ph 5 DW/PC/WK
__________________ 13 __________________ ____
14 - Ph 6 DW/PC/WK
__________________ 14 __________________ ____
15 - Ph 7 DW/PC/WK
__________________ 15 __________________ ____
16 - Ph 8 DW/PC/WK
__________________ 16 __________________ ____
17 - OL A Red/Yel/Grn
__________________ 17 __________________ ____
18 - OL B Red/Yel/Grn
__________________ 18 __________________ ____
19 - OL C Red/Yel/Grn
__________________ 19 __________________ ____
20 - OL D Red/Yel/Grn
__________________ 20 __________________ ____
21 - Ph 1 On/Nxt/Chk
__________________ 21 __________________ ____
__________________ 22 __________________ ____
__________________ 23 __________________ ____
__________________ 24 __________________ ____
X
X
X
X
SIGNAL DRIVER GROUP column is automatic & indicates the assigned Channels in Ring Structure & Overlap database.

CHN column is a list of the available channels 01-24 in numerical order.

HARDWARE OUTPUT PIN column is automatic & indicates the assigned SET entered here.
SET column is for user entry of the hardware outputs to receive a channels outputs.
COORD DATA - MODE

Control Codes: 0 1 2 3 4 5
Operation :
____ FRE AUT MAN --- --- ---
Mode :
____ PRM YLD PYL POM SOM FAC
Maximum :
____ INH MX1 MX2 --- --- ---
Correction :
____ DW MDW SWY SW+ --- ---
Offset (?? Of Green) :
____ BEGIN END OF GREEN
Force :
____ PLAN CYCLE TIME
Max Dwell Time :
____ Time In Seconds
Yield Period :
____ Time In Seconds
Manual Pattern
__/__/__
(Dial/Split/Offset)

COORD DATA - TIMING PLANS

Control Timing Plan: D1/S1 D1/S2 D1/S3 D1/S4 D2/S1 D2/S2 D2/S3 D2/S4
Cycle Length :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Phase 01 Time/Mode :
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
Offset 1 :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Offset 1 Alt Sequence :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Offset 1 Pattern Mode :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Offset 1 Ring 2 Lag :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Offset 2 :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Offset 3 :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

COORD DATA - TIMING PLANS

Control Timing Plan: D3/S1 D3/S2 D3/S3 D3/S4 D4/S1 D4/S2 D4/S3 D4/S4
Cycle Length :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __ ___ / __
Offset 1 Time :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Offset 2 :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Offset 3 :
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
Codes :
Phase Mode :
0-Actuated 1-Coord Phase 2-Min Rec 3-Max Rec

4-Ped Rec 5-Max+Ped Recall 6-Phase Omitted 7-Dual Coord Phase

Pattern Mode :
00-15 (Unit Data Has Definition)
Alternate Sequence :
0-Normal / 1-Perm / 2-Yield / 3-Perm Yield / 4-Perm Omit / 5-Seq Omit / 6-Full Act
R# LAG :
Time In Seconds Of The Ring Offset To Lcl Cycle 0 When Not Barrier Locked To Ring 1

TIME BASE DATA - MISCELLANEOUS

DST: BEGIN: MONTH ____ WEEK ____ DST: Daylight Savings Time
Month = 01 to 12 (Begin < End)
DST: END: MONTH ____ WEEK ____
Week = 1 to 5 (5 = Last Week)
COORD CYCLE ZERO ___ : ___ CYCLE ZERO: Time (HH:MM) Sets Reference For Coord Sync
00:00 = Event Time / Other = That HH:MM
EQUATED DAY: (DEFINED DAY = DAY) DAY EQUATES: Care Must Be Used To Insure Days Are Not
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Equated To Undefined Days Or Days That Are Equated To
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Other Days. Result Will Be A Day Without Events To Run.
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
____ = ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
TIME BASE DATA - TRAFFIC EVENTS

DAY TIME TRAFFIC EVENT FUNCTIONS REFERENCE DATA:
PDAY HH : MM PATTERN MAX II PHASE(S) OMIT PHASE(S) PDAY - 01-99 Program Day
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ HH:MM - 24 Hour Clock
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ PATTERN: ( D / S / O )
Flash - 5 / 5 / 0
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Free - 0 / 0 / 4
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ MAX 2 & OMITS: Call Free, Set
Pattern To 0 / 0 / 0
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ / __ / __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

TIME BASE DATA - AUXILIARY EVENTS

DAY TIME AUXILIARY EVENT FUNCTIONS REFERENCE DATA:
PDAY HH : MM A: 1 2 3 D: 1 2 3 DIM S. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PDAY - 01-99 Program Day
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ HH:MM - 24 Hour Clock
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ A.123 - Auxiliary Output
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ D.123 - Detector
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ 1 - Det Diag Vaule
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ 2 - Enables Report
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ 3 - Rep Multiplier
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ DIM - Dimming Enable
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ S.1>8 - Special Function Output
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ ALL - 0-OFF / 1-ON
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
___ ___ : ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ ___ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
TIME BASE DATA - TIME OF YEAR EVENTS

DATE SPECIAL DATE SPECIAL Reference Data:
MM / DD / YY DAY WEEK MM / DD / YY DAY WEEK Special Day - Any Program Day 00-99
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ Special Week -

Week 0 = Program Day 01-07

___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ | | |
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___
___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___ ___ / ___ / ___ ___ ___
TIME BASE DATA - DIMMING

DIM OUTPUTS Channel: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Channel Red :
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Channel Yellow :
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Channel Green :
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Dim Alternate :
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
CODES: 0-NO DIMMING / 1-DIMMING
TIME BASE DATA - PHASE FUNCTION MAPPING

FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PHS 01 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 02 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 03 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 04 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 05 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 06 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 07 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 08 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 09 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 10 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 11 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 12 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 13 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 14 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 15 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 16 MAX # 2 :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 01 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 02 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PHS 03 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 04 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 05 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 06 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 07 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 08 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 09 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 10 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 11 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 12 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 13 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 14 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 15 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 16 PHS OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON


FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PHS 01 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 02 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 03 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 04 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 05 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 06 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 07 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 08 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 09 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 10 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 11 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 12 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 13 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 14 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 15 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 16 PED OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 01 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 02 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 03 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 04 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 05 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 06 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 07 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 08 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 09 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 10 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 11 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 12 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 13 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 14 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 15 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 16 MAX RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 01 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 02 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PHS 03 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 04 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 05 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 06 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 07 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 08 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 09 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 10 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 11 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 12 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 13 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 14 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 15 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 16 MIN RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 01 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 02 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 03 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 04 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 05 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 06 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 07 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 08 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 09 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 10 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 11 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 12 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 13 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 14 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 15 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 16 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 01 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 02 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 03 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 04 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PHS 05 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 06 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 07 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 08 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
PHS 09 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 10 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 11 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 12 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 13 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 14 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 15 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHS 16 PED RECALL :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
DET-01 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-02 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-03 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-04 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-05 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-06 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-07 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-08 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
DET-09 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-10 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-11 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-12 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-13 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-14 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-15 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-16 SW OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
DET-01 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-02 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-03 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-04 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-05 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-06 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DET-07 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-08 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
DET-09 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-10 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-11 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-12 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-13 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-14 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-15 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-16 SW NOW
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
DET-01 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-02 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-03 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-04 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-05 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-06 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-07 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-08 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
DET-09 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-10 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-11 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-12 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-13 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-14 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-15 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DET-16 SW ALSO :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
OVERLAP A OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP B OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP C OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP D OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP E OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP F OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP G OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP H OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
OVERLAP I OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP J OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP K OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP L OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP M OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP N OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP O OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
OVERLAP P OMIT :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
CODES: 0-OFF / 1-ON
TIME BASE DATA - SPECIAL FUNCTION MAPPING

FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CODES:
Special Function 1 : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ 0-OFF
Special Function 2 : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ 1-ON
Special Function 3 : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PAS3+MAX3=VEH 33-48 TIME: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PAS4+MAX4=VEH 49-64 TIME: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PAS5+MAX5=SPC+PED TIME: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DYNA MAX3=VEH 33-48 TIME: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DYNA MAX4=VEH 49-64 TIME: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DYNA MAX5=SPC+PED TIME: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
DISABLE PROT/PERM OMITS: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PHASE 2 SIGN CONTROL : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
TX DIAMOND - 4 PHASE : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
TX DIAMOND - 3 PHASE : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
TX DIAMOND -SEPARATE : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
QUE1/LVL1 CONTROLS : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
QUE1/LVL2 CONTROLS : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
QUE2/LVL1 CONTROLS : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

TIME BASE DATA - SPECIAL FUNCTION MAPPING

FUNCTION NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CODES:
QUE2/LVL2 CONTROLS : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
AS8-15=OLI-P FL G PHS : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
AS8-15=OLI-P FL R PHS : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
RESERVED ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
COORD ADAPTIVE SPLIT ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
SPC 1-8 AS PHS FUNC 1-8 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
SPC 1-8 AS PHS FUNC 9-16 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
PREEMPTION DATA - MISCELLANEOUS

Ring: 1 2 3 4
Minimum Green / Walk Time ____ ____ ____ ____ Time In Seconds
PRIORITIES PRIORITY: 0-NO (Equal Priority)

Preemption > Automatic Flash: ____ 1-1st Has Priority
Preempt 1 > Preempt 2 : ____ When A Function Has Priority Over Another,
Preempt 2 > Preempt 3 : ____ The Function Of Lower Priority Will
Terminate
Preempt 3 > Preempt 4 : ____ And The Higher Priority Will Assume Control.
Preempt 4 > Preempt 5 : ____
Preempt 5 > Preempt 6 : ____

PREEMPT DATA - PREEMPT 1

CONTROL INTERVAL TIMES
Non-Lock :
____ 0-NO / 1-YES Selective Ped Clear: ____ 0-999 Seconds
Selective Yel Chg : ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Link PE # :
____ 0-6 Preempt # Selective Red Clear: ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Track Green : ____ 0-999 Seconds
Delay :
____ 0-999 Seconds Track Ped Clear : ____ 0-999 Seconds
Extend :
____ 0-999 Seconds Track Yel Chg : ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Duration :
____ 0-999 Seconds Track Red Clear : ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Dwell Green : ____ 0-999 Seconds
Max Call :
____ 0-999 Seconds Return Ped Clear ____ 0-999 Seconds
Lock Out :
____ 0-999 Seconds Return Yel Chg : ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Return Red Clear : ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Exit Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1
Non-Lock :
NO YES Preempt Memory To Be Non-Locking
Exit Phase(s) :
NO YES Phase(s) To Be Serviced First Following Preempt
Exit Call(s) :
NO YES Phase(s) To Receive Calls On Preempt Exit
Notes:
If Track Green Time = 0, Then All Track Intervals Are Omitted. Set Max Call = 0 To Disable.
Lock Out Duration Will Be Dependent On Calls If = 0
PREEMPT 1 - OUTPUT STATUS
Phase Vehicle Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Phase Pedest Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Overlap Vehicle Overlap: A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1 2 3 4
Vehicle :
RED GRN FL R FL Y DARK
Pedest :
DT WK WALK FL WK DARK ----
Cycle Vehicle :
NO ACT’D MIN REC MAX REC ----

Cycle Pedest :
NO ACT’D REC ---- ----
Cycle Overlap :
NO ACT’D ---- ---- ----
PREEMPT 1 - LOW PRIORITY ROUTINE
Non-Lock :
____ 0-NO / 1-YES - When No Dwell Phases Are Set, This Routine Is Disabled.
Skip :
____ 0-NO / 1-YES - Skip (Yes) Will Allow Phases To Be Skipped To Service The
Delay :
____ 0-999 Seconds Dwell Phases
Extend :
____ 0-999 Seconds - Set Max Call = 0 To Disable
Duration :
____ 0-999 Seconds - Lock Out Duration Will Be Dependent On Calls If = 0
Dwell :
____ 0-999 Seconds - Calls (Yes) Will Place A Ped Call On Exit From Routine
Max Call :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Lock Out :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Dwell Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Phase(s) & Exit Call(s) Control Entry: “1” = Yes & “0” = No


Non-Lock :
Link PE # :
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Max Call :
Lock Out :
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Exit Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1
Non-Lock :
Exit Phase(s) :
Exit Call(s) :
Notes:
If Track Green Time = 0, Then All Track Intervals Are Omitted. Set Max Call = 0 To Disable
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1 2 3 4
Vehicle :
Pedest :
Cycle Vehicle :

Cycle Pedest :
Cycle Overlap :
NO ACT’D ---- ---- ----
Non-Lock :
Skip :
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Dwell :
Max Call :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Lock Out :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Dwell Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


Non-Lock :
____ 0-NO / 1-YES Selective Ped Clear ____ 0-999 Seconds
:
Link PE # :
____ 0-6 Preempt # Selective Red Clear ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
:
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Max Call :
Lock Out :
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Exit Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1
Non-Lock :
Exit Phase(s) :
Exit Call(s) :
Notes:
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1 2 3 4
Vehicle :
Pedest :

Cycle Vehicle :
Cycle Pedest :
Cycle Overlap :
NO ACT’D ---- ---- ----
Non-Lock :
Skip :
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Dwell :
Max Call :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Lock Out :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Dwell Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


Non-Lock :
____ 0-NO / 1-YES Selective Ped Clear ____ 0-999 Seconds
:
Link PE # :
____ 0-6 Preempt # Selective Red Clear ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
:
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Max Call :
Lock Out :
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Exit Phase(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1
Non-Lock : NO YES Preempt Memory To Be Non-Locking
Exit Phase(s) : NO YES Phase(s) To Be Serviced First Following Preempt
Exit Call(s) : NO YES Phase(s) To Receive Calls On Preempt Exit
Notes:
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1 2 3 4
Vehicle :
Pedest :

Cycle Vehicle :
Cycle Pedest :
Cycle Overlap :
NO ACT’D ---- ---- ----
Non-Lock :
Skip :
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Dwell :
Max Call :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Lock Out :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Dwell Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


Non-Lock : Selective Ped Clear:
____ 0-NO / 1-YES ____ 0-999 Seconds
Selective Yel Chg:
____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Link PE # : Selective Red Clear:
____ 0-6 Preempt # ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Track Green :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Delay : Track Ped Clear:
____ 0-999 Seconds ____ 0-999 Seconds
Extend : Track Yel Chg:
____ 0-999 Seconds ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Duration : Track Red Clear:
____ 0-999 Seconds ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Dwell Green :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Max Call : Return Ped Clear
____ 0-999 Seconds ____ 0-999 Seconds
Lock Out : Return Yel Chg:
____ 0-999 Seconds ____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Return Red Clear:
____ 0-99.9 Seconds
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Exit Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1
Non-Lock :
Exit Phase(s) :
Exit Call(s) :
Notes:
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1 2 3 4
Vehicle :
Pedest :
Cycle Vehicle :

Cycle Pedest :
Cycle Overlap :
NO ACT’D ---- ---- ----
Non-Lock :
Skip :
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Dwell :
Max Call :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Lock Out :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Dwell Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___


Non-Lock :
Link PE # :
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Max Call :
Lock Out :
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Exit Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1
Non-Lock :
Exit Phase(s) :
Exit Call(s) :
Notes:
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle : ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Track Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Dwell Status :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Cycle :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Codes : 0 1 2 3 4
Vehicle :
Pedest :
Cycle Vehicle :

Cycle Pedest :
Cycle Overlap :
NO ACT’D ---- ---- ----
Non-Lock :
Skip :
Delay :
Extend :
Duration :
Dwell :
Max Call :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Lock Out :
____ 0-999 Seconds
Phase: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Dwell Phase(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exit Call(s) :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

SYSTEM DATA - GENERAL

Local Address : ___________ Three Digits ( 000 - 032 )
Revert To Backup : ___________ Time In Minutes ( 000- 255 )
1) An Address Other Than “000” Transfers Local “D” Connector I/O To It’s System Definition
2) On Loss Of Communications, The Local Will Revert To It’s Time Base Events After The Revert To Backup Time
SYSTEM DATA - SYSTEM DETECTORS

ASSIGN System Detector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Assigned Detector : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
To Assign : VEH 01-64 Enter 01-64 / SPC 01-08 Enter 65-72 / PED 01-08 Enter 73-80
V+O System Detector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 V+O PARAMETERS:
VPHR X 100 : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ VPHR - Lane Capacity
AVGT (Minutes) : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ AVGT - Averaging Time
CTFC / 10 : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ CTFC - Correct Factor
MVOL : ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ MVOL - Min Vol b4 Occ Add
Report Interval : ____ Time In Minutes ( 00- 99 ) / Time Base Aux D2 Starts A Report
SYSTEM DATA - QUEUE ROUTINES

QUEUE 1 QUEUE 2
ASSIGN Detector: 1 2 3 4 ASSIGN Detector: 1 2 3 4
System Detector :
___ ___ ___ ___ System Detector : ___ ___ ___ ___ Det # 1 To 8
WTFC Factor :
___ ___ ___ ___ WTFC Factor : ___ ___ ___ ___ Factor 1 To 100
Input Select :
___ Input Select : ___ 0-AVG / 1-HIGH
Failed Level :
___ Failed Level : ___ # To Fail Channel
SELECT: Level A B SELECT Level: A B

Enter (UP) :
Enter (UP) : ____ ____ ____ ____
Leave (DN) :
Leave (DN) : ____ ____ ____ ____
PATTERN D/S/O D/S/O PATTERN D/S/O D/S/O
Called : Pattern Called :
_/_/_ _/_/_ _/_/_ _/_/_
Queue Pattern or Partial Pattern Selection Is Made When The V+O Of Assigned System Detectors Exceeds The Level To
Enter.

SYSTEM DATA - VEH DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS

VALUE 0 Detector: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
VALUE 1 Detector: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
VALUE 0 Detector: 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
VALUE 1 Detector: 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
VALUE 0 Detector: 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
VALUE 1 Detector: 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
VALUE 0 Detector: 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
VALUE 1 Detector: 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Time Base Auxiliary “D1” Enables Value 1 diagnostic Parameters
SYSTEM DATA - PED DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS

VALUE 0 Detector: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

VALUE 1 Detector: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

SYSTEM DATA - SPC DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS

VALUE 0 Detector: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts:
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
VALUE 1 Detector: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Max Presence :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
No Activity :
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Erratic Counts:
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
SYSTEM DATA - SPEED

Measurement : ____ 0-Miles Per Hour / 1-Kilometers Per Hour
SPEED TRAP 1 SPEED TRAP 2
Detector: 1 2 Detector: 1 2
Assigned Detector : ____ ____ Assigned Detector : ____ ____
Distance: ____ Distance: ____
1) Each Speed Trap Needs Two Detectors Assigned, Any Vehicle, Special, or Pedestrian Detector May Be Assigned.
To Assign : VEH 01-64 Enter 01-64 / SPC 01-08 Enter 65-72 / PED 01-08 Enter 73-80
2) The Distance Between Det 1 and Det 2 May Be Either 11 Feet or 22 Feet. Enter '1' For 11 Ft or '2' for 22 Ft.
RANGES / PATTERN
PATTERN OFFSET 1 OFFSET 2 OFFSET 3 RANGES:
Dial Split Low High Low High Low High Enter The Low & High Speed
1 1 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ In MPH or KPH For Each Pattern
1 2 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ To Enable A Report Of % Lower,
1 3 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Within, & Above It
1 4 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
2 1 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

2 2 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
2 3 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
2 4 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
3 1 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

3 2 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
3 3 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
3 4 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
4 1 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

4 2 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____
4 3 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

4 4 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Page 240 NEMA HARDWARE
15 NEMA HARDWARE
The part numbers for Eagle NEMA hardware manuals are:
PIM-177B for EPACM3x hardware
PIM-177C for EPACM4x hardware
PIM-177D for EPAC M50 hardware
15.1 SPECIFICATIONS
15.1.1 Power Input

 Voltage: 89 to 135 VAC
 Frequency : 57 to 63 Hz
 Power : 25 watts @ 120 VAC
15.1.1.1 Power Interruption

A power interruption is defined as 0 volts AC.
Two or more power interruptions which are separated by power restorations of 1500 or more milliseconds are considered as
separate interruptions.
Three interruptions of 300 milliseconds or less which are separated by power restorations of 300 milliseconds or more will not
cause the CU to revert to its start-up state.
The CU will react to a power interruption, upon restoring power, as follows:
1. Interruption of 500 Milliseconds or Less: Will continue to operate as though the power interruption had not occurred.
2. Interruption of More Than 500 Milliseconds and Less than 1000 Milliseconds: Will either continue to operate (3.12(1)) or
will revert to its start-up state (3.12(3)).
3. Interruption of 1000 Milliseconds or More: Will revert to its start-up state.
15.1.2 Environment
 Temperature: -30oF (-34oC) to +165oF (+74oC). Rate of change is not to exceed 30oF (17oC) per hour at the maximum
relative humidity of 95%.
 Humidity : Not to exceed 95% relative over the temperature range of +40oF (4oC) to 110oF (43oC) declining to 18% at
165oF (74oC).
15.1.3 Physical
The CU conforms to these physical requirements:
15.1.3.1 Dimensions
Dimensions : 16" wide x 9.5" high x 8.0" deep; does not include mating connectors.
Weight : Approximately 14 LBS
15.1.3.2 Design
The CU is of modular design. Circuit boards are readily accessible for maintenance. All fuses, connectors, and controls are
accessible from the front of the CU.

NEMA HARDWARE Page 241
15.1.3.3 Rigid Printed Circuit Assemblies
15.1.3.3.1 Materials
All printed circuit boards are made from NEMA FR-4 glass epoxy or equivalent (see NEMA LI 1-1989, Industrial Laminated
Thermosetting Products).
15.1.3.3.2 Mating Surfaces
All electrical mating surfaces are made of non-corrosive material.
15.1.3.3.3 Component Identification
The Printed Circuit Assembly are so designed that each component is identified with a circuit reference symbol. The
identification is etched or silk screened on circuit boards.
15.1.4 Timing
 Accuracy : Timing is accomplished by digital methods. Any interval timed shall not deviate more than +/- 100
milliseconds based on its set value at a power line frequency of 60 Hertz.
15.1.5 Programming
 16-position Keypad
15.1.6 Memory
 EEPROM Memory. No battery is required to maintain operating parameters while power is off.
15.1.7 Display
 Liquid Crystal 8 line by 40 characters per line alpha-numeric display for parameter entry and viewing.
15.2 INTERFACE STANDARDS
Type 1 CU utilize an Input / Output Interface conforming to the requirements of NEMA TS 2 Section 3.3.1 for all Input / Output
functions with the Terminals and Facilities, Malfunction Management Unit, Detector Rack(s), and Auxiliary Devices.
Type 2 CU utilize an Input / Output Interface conforming to the requirements of NEMA TS 2 Section 3.3.1 for Input / Output
functions with the MMU and Detector Rack(s) and Section 3.3.5 for Input / Output functions with the Terminal and Facilities,
Detector(s), and Auxiliary Devices.
The CU provides an input/output interface meeting the following requirements.
15.2.1 Port 1 Physical and Protocol

Port 1 is utilized to facilitate communications between the CU, the Terminal and Facilities, the Malfunction Management Unit,
and the Detector Rack(s), as defined in NEMA TS 2-2003 Port 1 may also be used for manufacturer's use.
The Port 1 uses a 15 pin metal shell D sub-miniature type connector. When it is desirable to disable all Port 1 communications
activity, all Port 1 addresses must be defined as “Not Present” via program entry or Pin 10 may be connected to pin 8 on the Port
1 connector.

It is necessary to disable all Port 1 communications activity when a CU meeting the requirements of this standard is installed in
a Controller Assembly that has no accommodation for Port 1, such as a Controller Assembly meeting the requirements of NEMA
Standard TS 1-1989.
Input / Output connector pin terminations of the Port 1 SDLC interface is in accordance with the following:
15 Pin (receptacle)
AMP # 205205-1 or equivalent
Pin Function I/O
1 Tx Data + O
2 Logic Ground O
3 Tx Clock + O
4 Logic Ground O
5 Rx Data + I
6 Logic Ground O
7 Rx Clock + I
8 Logic Ground O
9 Tx Data - O
10 Port 1 Disable I
11 Tx Clock - O
12 Earth Ground O
13 Rx Data - I
14 Reserved -
15 Rx Clock - I
15.2.1.1 Port 1 Protocol

The transfer of data takes place by means of the SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control) Protocol. The data transfer rate shall be
153,600 bits per second, plus or minus 1 percent.
See Section 17 for more detail on Port 1 Protocol.
15.2.2 Port 2 RS-232 Interface

A Port 2 RS-232 Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) interface and connector is provided for interconnecting the CU to a printer
another CU, a local personal computer, or a remote personal computer through an external modem.
The Port 2 connector is mounted on the front of the CU and uses a 25 pin “D” sub-miniature type female connector. The
connector is equipped with latching blocks.
Input / Output connector pin terminations of the Port 2 RS-232 interface is in accordance with the following:
25 Pin (receptacle)
Pin Function I/O
1 Earth Ground (FG) n/a
2 Transmit Data (TD) To DCE
3 Receive Data (RD) From DCE
4 Request To Send (RTS) To DCE

25 Pin (receptacle)
Pin Function I/O
5 Clear To Send (CTS) From DCE
7 Logic Ground (SG) n/a
8 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) From DCE
20 Data Terminal Ready To DCE
(DTR)
22 Ring Indicator(RI) From DCE
6, 9-19, 21, & 23-25 Not Used
RS-232 Pin 1 reference is Frame Ground
RS-232 Pin 7 reference is Signal Ground
15.2.3 Port 3 System Interface

A Port 3 interface and connector are provided for interconnecting the CU to the system interconnect lines.
15.2.3.1 FSK System Interface

The FSK System Interface provides two-wire half duplex or four-wire full duplex communications over an unconditioned Type
3002 voice grade private line channel or equivalent customer owned cable.
Connector
The Port 3 FSK connector is mounted on the front of the CU and is a 9 pin metal shell “D” sub-miniature type connector. The
connector is equipped with latching blocks.
Input / Output connector pin terminations of the optional Port 3 FSK interface is in accordance with the following:
For Models with a separate 9 Pin Connector:
9 Pin (plug)
Pin Function I/O
1 Transmit 1 O
2 Transmit 2 O
3 Reserved
4 Receive 1 I
5 Receive 2 I
6 Earth Ground -
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Earth Ground -
When a half duplex modem is utilized, the two wire interconnect will utilize only Pin 1 and Pin 2.
Transmission Method
Communications over the system interface utilizes time division multiplex techniques. Transmissions use phase coherent
frequency shift keying (FSK) modulation at a data rate of 1200 BPS. Data format shall be asynchronous, bit serial.
Transmitter Characteristics

The transmitter portion of the system interface is a digital to FSK modulator. Output level is 0 dBm +15% into a 600 ohm load.
Frequency stability of the transmitted signal is +5% over the CU operating temperature range. Transmit frequencies are 1200
Hz for MARK (logic 1) and 2200 Hz for Space (logic 0).
Receiver Characteristics
The receiver portion of the system interface is a FSK to digital demodulator. Receiver sensitivity is a minimum of -34dBm. In
band signal-to-noise ratio is 10dB or greater.
15.2.2 Port 3 "RS-232"

Input / Output connector pin terminations of the Port 3 RS-232 DTE interface is in accordance with the following:
For Models with a 25 Pin Connector:
25 Pin (receptacle)
Pin Function I/O
1 Earth Ground (FG) n/a
7 Logic Ground (SG) n/a
(DTR)
22 Ring Indicator(RI) From DCE
6, 9-19, 21, & 23-25 Not Used
RS-232 Pin 1 reference is Frame Ground
For Models with a UTCS Comm Processor:
Pin Function I/O
12 UTCS DCD From DCE
13 UTCS CTS From DCE
14 UTCS TD To DCE
16 UTCS RD From DCE
19 UTCS RTS To DCE
For Models with a 9 Pin Connector:
9 Pin (receptacle)
Pin Function I/O
(DTR)
5 Logic Ground (SG) N/A

9 Pin (receptacle)
Pin Function I/O
6-9 Not Used
15.2.3.3 Port 3 Fiber Optic

The optional Fiber Optic Interface provides a Port 3 Dual Fiber Optic converter.
The Fiber Optic Interface card is provided with a 4-position switch that must set to configure the card.
Configuration Switch
Position Function Default
1 TTL - ON Enables TTL port. ON
Must be ON for the CU to
communicate via the fiber
link.
2 Port B - ON Enables Fiber-optic ON
Port B. Disable if this CU is at
the end of the fiber link.
3 Port A - ON Enables Fiber- ON
optic port A.
4 Test - ON Enables Test Mode. OFF
Test mode allows visual
testing of LED activity
15.2.4 Type 1 - Interface Standards

A Type 1 CU provides an input/output interface to meet the following requirements.
The connector has a metallic shell, is connected to the Earth Ground internally, is mounted on the front of the unit, and inter-
mates with a MS3106( )-18-1S.
Input / Output connector pin terminations of Connector “A” interface is in accordance with the following:
For NEMA TS 2 Type 1 Models:
10 Pin (receptacle)
Type # -18-1S
Pin Function I/O
A AC Neutral I
B Not Used -
C AC Line I
D Not Used -
E Not Used -
F Fault Monitor O
G Logic Ground O

10 Pin (receptacle)
Type # -18-1S
Pin Function I/O
H Earth Ground I
I Not Used -
J Not Used -
15.2.5 Type 2 - Interface Standards

A Type 2 CU provides an input/output interface to meet the following requirements.
15.2.5.1 Electrical Limits Of Input / Output Terminations
15.2.5.1.1 Logic Levels
All logic signals (except as explicitly defined elsewhere) is low state (nominal 0 volts) for the True (operate) state of all input and
output terminations. Input / Output terminations, when not activated, are internally biased to the False (high) non-operate state
(+24 volts DC).
15.2.5.1.2 Transient Immunity
The operation of the CU is not be affected during operation by the application to any input or output terminal of pulses of 10
microseconds duration, 300-volt positive or negative amplitude, and with a maximum repetition rate of 1 pulse per second. For
the purposes of this requirement, a pulse source having an output impedance of not less than 1K ohms, nor greater than 10K
ohms should be used.
15.2.5.1.3 Inputs
Inputs have the following characteristics:

1. A voltage between 0 and 8 volts is considered the Low state.
2. A voltage greater than 16 volts is considered the High state.
3. The transition from the Low state to High state (and vice versa) occurs between 8 and 16 volts.
4. External transition from the Low state to High state (and vice versa) is accomplished within 0.1 millisecond.
5. Over the voltage range 0 to 26 volts DC, the maximum current In or Out of any input control terminal should be less than 10
milliamperes. Input impedance does not exceed 11K ohms to 24 volts DC, nor will the surge impedance be less than 100
ohms resistive.
6. Any input signal dwelling in a defined logic state for less than 8 milliseconds will not be recognized. Any input signal
dwelling in a defined logic state for more than 17 milliseconds will be recognized. Successive similar logic state transitions
will not be recognized when occurring less than 8 milliseconds apart, and will be recognized when occurring more than 34
milliseconds apart.
15.2.5.1.4 Outputs
Electrical outputs have the following characteristics:

1. Output Circuits

a. The Low (operate) voltage is between 0 and 4 volts.

b. Current sinking capability in the Low state (True) is at least 200 milliamperes from an inductive load.
c. With an external impedance of 100K ohms or greater, the transition from 4 to 16 volts (and vice versa) is accomplished
within 0.1 millisecond.
d. The High state impedance does not exceed 11K ohms to 24 volts DC.
e. Any external steady-state voltage applied to an output terminal should not exceed +30 volts DC, nor should it cause
flow of more than 3 milliamperes into the terminal, when the output is in the High state.
f. Any valid True output signal, except Load Switch Driver outputs when Dimming is enabled, will dwell in this state for at
least 50 milliseconds.
2. Regulated 24 Volts DC for External Use
a. Positive 24 + 2 volts DC is regulated over an AC line voltage variation from 89 to 135 volts and from no load to full load.
b. Current capability is 500 milliamperes continuous with less than 0.5 volt peak-to-peak ripple.
15.2.5.2 NEMA ABC Connectors

The connectors on the CU have a metallic shell. The connector is connected to the chassis internally. The connectors are
mounted on the front of the unit in accordance with the following:
1. Connector A shall intermate with a MS3116( )-22-55S
2. Connector B shall intermate with a MS3116( )-22-55P
3. Connector C shall intermate with a MS3116( )-24-61P
15.2.5.2.1 Connector Pin Functions
ABC Input Mode “0” and Output Mode “0” provide input and output pin functions which are NEMA TS 1 compatible.
ABC INPUT MODE ‘0’ / OUTPUT MODE “0” PIN / FUNCTIONS
Connector A Connector B Connector C
55 Pin (plug) Type # -22-55P 55 Pin (socket) Type # -22-55S 61 Pin (socket) Type # -24-61S
Pin Function I/O Pin Function I/O Pin Function I/O
A Fault Monitor O A Phase 1 Phase Next O A Status Bit A (2) O
B +24 VDC (External) O B Preempt 2 Detector I B Status Bit B (2) O
C Voltage Monitor O C Phase 2 Phase Next O C Phase 8 Don’t Walk O
D Phase 1 Red O D Phase 3 Green O D Phase 8 Red O
E Phase 1 Don’t Walk O E Phase 3 Yellow O E Phase 7 Yellow O
F Phase 2 Red O F Phase 3 Red O F Phase 7 Red O
G Phase 2 Don’t Walk O G Phase 4 Red O G Phase 6 Red O
H Phase 2 Pedestrian Clear O H Phase 4 Pedestrian Clear O H Phase 5 Red O
J Phase 2 Walk O J Phase 4 Don’t Walk O J Phase 5 Yellow O
K Vehicle Detector 2 I K Phase 4 Check O K Phase 5 Pedestrian Clear O
L Pedestrian Detector 2 I L Vehicle Detector 4 I L Phase 5 Don’t Walk O
M Phase 2 Hold I M Pedestrian Detector 4 I M Phase 5 Phase Next O
N Stop Time (1) I N Vehicle Detector 3 I N Phase 5 Phase On O
P Inhibit Max Term (1) I P Pedestrian Detector 3 I P Vehicle Detector 5 I
R External Start I R Phase 3 Phase Omit I R Pedestrian Detector 5 I
S Interval Advance I S Phase 2 Phase Omit I S Vehicle Detector 6 I
T Ind. Lamp Control I T Phase 5 Pedestrian Omit I T Pedestrian Detector 6 I
U AC Neutral I U Phase 1 Phase Omit I U Pedestrian Detector 7 I
V Earth Ground I V Pedestrian Recycle (2) I V Vehicle Detector 7 I


W Logic Ground O W Preempt 4 Detector I W Pedestrian Detector 8 I
X Flashing Logic Out O X Preempt 5 Detector I X Phase 8 Hold I
Y Status Bit C (1) O Y Phase 3 Walk O Y Force Off (2) I

Z Phase 1 Yellow O Z Phase 3 Pedestrian Clear O Z Stop Time (2) I
a Phase 1 Pedestrian Clear O a Phase 3 Don’t Walk O a Inhibit Max Term (2) I
b Phase 2 Yellow O b Phase 4 Green O b Test C I
c Phase 2 Green O c Phase 4 Yellow O c Status Bit C (2) O
d Phase 2 Check O d Phase 4 Walk O d Phase 8 Walk O
e Phase 2 Phase On O e Phase 4 Phase On O e Phase 8 Yellow O
f Vehicle Detector 1 I f Phase 4 Phase Next O f Phase 7 Green O
g Pedestrian Detector 1 I g Phase 4 Phase Omit I g Phase 6 Green O
h Phase 1 Hold I h Phase 4 Hold I h Phase 6 Yellow O
i Force Off (1) I I Phase 3 Hold I I Phase 5 Green O
j External Min Recall I j Phase 3 Pedestrian Omit I j Phase 5 Walk O
k Manual Control Enable I k Phase 6 Pedestrian Omit I k Phase 5 Check O
m Call To NA I I m Phase 7 Pedestrian Omit I m Phase 5 Hold I
n Test A (Remote Fl) ** I n Phase 8 Pedestrian Omit I n Phase 5 Phase Omit I
p AC Line I p OL A Yellow O p Phase 6 Hold I
q I/O Mode Bit A I q OL A Red O q Phase 6 Phase Omit I
r Status Bit B (1) O r Phase 3 Check O r Phase 7 Phase Omit I
s Phase 1 Green O s Phase 3 Phase On O s Phase 8 Phase Omit I
t Phase 1 Walk O t Phase 3 Phase Next O t Vehicle Detector 8 I
u Phase 1 Check O u OL D Red O u Red Rest Mode (2) I
v Phase 2 Pedestrian Omit I v Preempt 6 Detector I v Omit Red Clear (2) I
w Omit Red Clear (1) I w OL D Green O w Phase 8 Pedestrian Clear O
x Red Rest (1) I x Phase 4 Pedestrian Omit I x Phase 8 Green O
y I/O Mode Bit B I y Free (No Coordination) I y Phase 7 Don’t Walk O
z Call To NA II I z Max II Selection (2) I z Phase 6 Don’t Walk O
AA Test B I AA OL A Green O AA Phase 6 Pedestrian Clear O
BB Walk Rest Modifier I BB OL B Yellow O BB Phase 6 Check O
CC Status Bit A (1) O CC OL B Red O CC Phase 6 Phase On O
DD Phase 1 Phase On O DD OL C Red O DD Phase 6 Phase Next O
EE Phase 1 Pedestrian Omit I EE OL D Yellow O EE Phase 7 Hold I

FF Pedestrian Recycle (1) I FF OL C Green O FF Phase 8 Check O
GG Max II Selection (1) I GG OL B Green O GG Phase 8 Phase On O


HH I/O Mode Bit C I HH OL C Yellow O HH Phase 8 Phase Next O
JJ Phase 7 Walk O
KK Phase 7 Pedestrian Clear O
LL Phase 6 Walk O
M Phase 7 Check O
M
NN Phase 7 Phase On O
PP Phase 7 Phase Next O
Shaded Areas Above Denote Pin Terminations Whose Function Varies Based On The ABC Input / Output Mode
(**) A facility wired to utilize Automatic Flash by activating Test Input A (Pin # n) of Connector A may not be compatible with
other manufacturer's CUs. Disconnect this input from the facility before placing any other manufacturer's CU in the facility.
Please note that NEMA TS 1 pins marked as “Reserved” and “Spare” are neither Reserved nor Spares in NEMA TS 2. The pins
which are now functional in accordance with NEMA TS 2 are: Connector A pins - A, q, y, HH / Connector B pins - B, W, X, v, y /
Connector C pin - b.
15.2.5.3 ABC I/O Modes

The status of the Connector "ABC" I/O Mode Bits (inputs) or ‘ABC’ Input and Output Mode data entry will establish the function of
the mode defined inputs and outputs.
The ‘ABC’ Input or Output Mode data entry will override the TS2 I/O Mode bits and implement the Input and Output Mode based
on the program entry. If these data fields are ‘0’, the CU will respond to the I/O Mode inputs as to the I/O Mode to make active.
Having I/O Mode hardware inputs allows the Terminal & Facilities to control the function of inputs and outputs. On the surface,
this sounds like the best approach but should an I/O Mode Input fail, the CU would most likely operate in the wrong mode so we
recommend the use of an I/O Mode program entry.
The use of separate Input and Output Mode data entry provides more flexibility as to exactly what functions are available.
Input Modes other than “0” will not be compatible with a NEMA TS1-1989CU.
Input Modes other than “0“ thru “5“ may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
Output Modes other than “0” will not be compatible with a NEMA TS1-1989 CU.
Output Modes other than “0“ thru “5“ may not be compatible with other manufacturer’s CUs.
15.2.5.3.1 ABC Input Mode 0-7 Functions
Pin Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode ? Mode 7

A-h Phase 1 Hold Preempt 1 Detector Preempt 1 Detector Vehicle Detector 23
A-M Phase 2 Hold Preempt 3 Detector Preempt 3 Detector Vehicle Detector 24
B-i Phase 3 Hold Vehicle Detector 9 Vehicle Detector 9 Vehicle Detector 9
B-h Phase 4 Hold Vehicle Detector 10 Vehicle Detector 10 Vehicle Detector 10
C-m Phase 5 Hold Vehicle Detector 13 Vehicle Detector 13 Vehicle Detector 13
C-p Phase 6 Hold Vehicle Detector 14 Vehicle Detector 14 Vehicle Detector 14


C-EE Phase 7 Hold Vehicle Detector 15 Vehicle Detector 15 Vehicle Detector 15
C-X Phase 8 Hold Vehicle Detector 16 Vehicle Detector 16 Vehicle Detector 16
B-U Phase 1 Phase Omit Vehicle Detector 11 Vehicle Detector 11 Vehicle Detector 11
B-S Phase 2 Phase Omit Vehicle Detector 12 Vehicle Detector 12 Vehicle Detector 12
B-R Phase 3 Phase Omit Timing Plan C Vehicle Detector 17 Vehicle Detector 17
B-g Phase 4 Phase Omit Timing Plan D Vehicle Detector 18 Vehicle Detector 18
C-n Phase 5 Phase Omit Alternate Sequence A Vehicle Detector 19 Vehicle Detector 19
C-q Phase 6 Phase Omit Alternate Sequence B Vehicle Detector 20 Vehicle Detector 20
C-r Phase 7 Phase Omit Alternate Sequence C Special Status 1 (Alarm Vehicle Detector 21
1)
C-s Phase 8 Phase Omit Alternate Sequence D Special Status 2 (Alarm Vehicle Detector 22
2)
A-EE Phase 1 Pedestrian Dimming Enable Dimming Enable Vehicle Detector 25

Omit
A-v Phase 2 Pedestrian Automatic Flash Local Flash Status Vehicle Detector 26
Omit
B-j Phase 3 Pedestrian Timing Plan A Address Bit 0 Vehicle Detector 27
Omit
B-x Phase 4 Pedestrian Timing Plan B Address Bit 1 Vehicle Detector 28
Omit
B-T Phase 5 Pedestrian Offset 1 Address Bit 2 Vehicle Detector 29
Omit
B-k Phase 6 Pedestrian Offset 2 Address Bit 3 Vehicle Detector 30
Omit
B-m Phase 7 Pedestrian Offset 3 Address Bit 4 Vehicle Detector 31
Omit
B-n Phase 8 Pedestrian TBC On Line MMU Flash Status Vehicle Detector 32
Omit
15.2.5.3.2 ABC Input Mode 10-19 Functions
Pin Mode 10 Mode 11 Mode 18 Mode 19

A-h Preempt 1 Detector Preempt 1 Detector Preempt 1 Detector Preempt 1 Detector
A-M Preempt 3 Detector Preempt 3 Detector Preempt 3 Detector Preempt 3 Detector
B-I Preempt 2 Detector Preempt 2 Detector Vehicle Detector 9 Preempt 2 Detector
B-h Preempt 4 Detector Preempt 4 Detector Vehicle Detector 10 Preempt 4 Detector
C-m Free (No Coordination) Free (No Vehicle Detector 13 Free (No
Coordination) Coordination)
C-p Set Clock Special Status 5 Vehicle Detector 14 Special Status 5
C-EE Conflict Flash Status Conflict Flash Status Vehicle Detector 15 Conflict Flash Status

Pin Mode 10 Mode 11 Mode 18 Mode 19

C-X Manual Flash Status Manual Flash Status Vehicle Detector 16 Manual Flash Status
B-U Preempt 5 Detector Preempt 5 Detector Vehicle Detector 11 Preempt 5 Detector

B-S Preempt 6 Detector Preempt 6 Detector Vehicle Detector 12 Preempt 6 Detector
B-R Timing Plan C Special Detector 5 Vehicle Detector 17 Timing Plan C
B-g Timing Plan D Special Detector 6 Vehicle Detector 18 Timing Plan D
C-n Alternate Sequence A Special Status 1 Vehicle Detector 19 Special Status 1
C-q Alternate Sequence B Special Status 2 Vehicle Detector 20 Special Status 2
C-r Alternate Sequence C Special Status 3 Special Status 1 (Alarm Special Status 3
1)
C-s Alternate Sequence D Special Status 4 Special Status 2 (Alarm Special Status 4
2)
A-EE Dimming Enable Special Status 6 Dimming Enable Special Status 6

A-v Automatic Flash Automatic Flash Local Flash Status Automatic Flash
B-j Timing Plan A Special Detector 7 Spare Input Timing Plan A
B-x Timing Plan B Special Detector 8 Separate Intersections Timing Plan B
B-T Offset 1 Special Detector 2 Force 3 Phase Offset 1
B-k Offset 2 Special Detector 3 Force Four Phase Offset 2
B-m Offset 3 Special Detector 4 Spare Input Offset 3
B-n TBC On Line Special Detector 1 MMU Flash Status Computer Control
15.2.5.3.3 ABC Output Mode 0-7 Functions

A-DD Phase 1 Phase On Preempt 1 Status Preempt 1 Status Channel 21 Red
A-e Phase 2 Phase On Preempt 3 Status Preempt 3 Status Channel 22 Red
B-s Phase 3 Phase On TBC Auxiliary 1 TBC Auxiliary 1 Channel 23 Red
B-e Phase 4 Phase On TBC Auxiliary 2 TBC Auxiliary 2 Channel 24 Red
C-N Phase 5 Phase On Timing Plan A Timing Plan A Channel 25 Red
C-CC Phase 6 Phase On Timing Plan B Timing Plan B Channel 26 Red
C-NN Phase 7 Phase On Offset 1 Offset 1 Channel 27 Red
C-GG Phase 8 Phase On Offset 2 Offset 2 Channel 28 Red
B-A Phase 1 Phase Next Preempt 2 Status Preempt 2 Status Channel 21 Yellow
B-C Phase 2 Phase Next Preempt 4 Status Preempt 4 Status Channel 22 Yellow
B-t Phase 3 Phase Next Preempt 5 Status Preempt 5 Status Channel 23 Yellow
B-f Phase 4 Phase Next Preempt 6 Status Preempt 6 Status Channel 24 Yellow
C-M Phase 5 Phase Next Offset 3 Offset 3 Channel 25 Yellow

C-DD Phase 6 Phase Next Timing Plan C Timing Plan C Channel 26 Yellow
C-PP Phase 7 Phase Next Timing Plan D Timing Plan D Channel 27 Yellow
C-HH Phase 8 Phase Next Reserved Reserved Channel 28 Yellow
A-u Phase 1 Check Free Status Free Status Channel 21 Green

A-d Phase 2 Check Automatic Flash Status Automatic Flash Channel 22 Green
Status
B-r Phase 3 Check TBC Auxiliary 3 TBC Auxiliary 3 Channel 23 Green
B-K Phase 4 Check Reserved Reserved Channel 24 Green
C-k Phase 5 Check Reserved Special Function 1 Channel 25 Green
C-BB Phase 6 Check Reserved Special Function 2 Channel 26 Green
C-MM Phase 7 Check Reserved Special Function 3 Channel 27 Green
C-FF Phase 8 Check Reserved Special Function 4 Channel 28 Green
Pin Mode 10 Mode 11 Mode 12 Mode 13 Mode 14

A-DD Preempt 1 Status Preempt 1 Status Preempt 1 Status Preempt 1 Status Preempt 1 Status
A-e Preempt 3 Status Preempt 3 Status Preempt 3 Status Preempt 3 Status Preempt 3 Status
B-s TBC Auxiliary 1 TBC Auxiliary 1 TBC Auxiliary 1 TBC Auxiliary 1 TBC Auxiliary 1
B-e TBC Auxiliary 2 TBC Auxiliary 2 TBC Auxiliary 2 TBC Auxiliary 2 TBC Auxiliary 2
C-N Timing Plan A Special Function 7 Timing Plan A Timing Plan A Special Function 7
C-CC Timing Plan B Special Function 8 Timing Plan B Timing Plan B Special Function 8
C-NN Offset 1 Reserved Offset 1 Offset 1 Reserved
C-GG Offset 2 Reserved Offset 2 Offset 2 Reserved
B-A Preempt 2 Status Preempt 2 Status Preempt 2 Status Preempt 2 Status Preempt 2 Status
B-C Preempt 4 Status Preempt 4 Status Preempt 4 Status Preempt 4 Status Preempt 4 Status
B-t Preempt 5 Status Preempt 5 Status Preempt 5 Status Preempt 5 Status Preempt 5 Status
B-f Preempt 6 Status Preempt 6 Status Preempt 6 Status Preempt 6 Status Preempt 6 Status
C-M Offset 3 Reserved Offset 3 Offset 3 Reserved
C-DD Timing Plan C Special Function 5 Timing Plan C Timing Plan C Special Function 5
C-PP Timing Plan D Special Function 6 Timing Plan D Timing Plan D Special Function 6
C-HH Any Priority Any Priority Any Priority Any Priority Any Priority
A-u Free Status Free Status Free Status Free Status Free Status
A-d Automatic Flash Automatic Flash Automatic Flash Automatic Flash Automatic Flash
Status Status Status Status Status
B-r TBC Auxiliary 3 TBC Auxiliary 3 TBC Auxiliary 3 TBC Auxiliary 3 TBC Auxiliary 3
B-K Detector Reset Detector Reset Detector Reset Detector Reset Detector Reset

C-k Special Function 1 Special Function 1 Special Function 1 Special Function 1 Special Function 1
C-BB Special Function 2 Special Function 2 Special Function 2 Special Function 2 Special Function 2
C- Special Function 3 Special Function 3 Special Function 3 Special Function 3 Special Function 3
MM
C-FF Special Function 4 Special Function 4 Special Function 4 Special Function 4 Special Function 4
Output Mode 12 provides Interrupted Sync Pulses on the active Offset output. Interrupted Sync Pulses are provided at intervals
equal to 20% and 25% of the cycle on alternate cycles.
Output Mode 13 & 14 provides a flashing output on the inactive preempt status outputs.
Pin Mode 15 Mode 16 Mode 17 Mode 18 Mode 19

A-DD Sign 1A - THRU & OK Preempt 1 Status
A-e Sign 1B - THRU Preempt 3 Status
B-s Sign 2A - THRU & OK TBC Auxiliary 1
B-e Sign 2B - THRU TBC Auxiliary 2
C-N Sign 3A - THRU & OK Ring 3 Dwell
C-CC Sign 3B - THRU Ring 4 Dwell
C-NN Sign 4A - THRU & OK Reserved
C-GG Sign 4B - THRU Reserved
B-A Sign 1A - LEFT Preempt 2 Status

B-C Sign 1B - LEFT & OK Preempt 4 Status
B-t Sign 2A - LEFT Preempt 5 Status
B-f Sign 2B - LEFT & OK Preempt 6 Status
C-M Sign 3A - LEFT Cycle 0
C-DD Sign 3B - LEFT & OK Ring 1 Dwell
C-PP Sign 4A - LEFT Ring 2 Dwell
C-HH Sign 4B - LEFT & OK Any Priority
A-u Sign 1A - ONLY Free Status

A-d Sign 1B - ONLY Automatic Flash Status
B-r Sign 2A - ONLY TBC Auxiliary 3
B-K Sign 2B - ONLY Detector Reset
C-k Sign 3A - ONLY Special Function 1
C-BB Sign 3B - ONLY Special Function 2
C-MM Sign 4A - ONLY Special Function 3
C-FF Sign 4B - ONLY Special Function 4

15.2.5.4 D Connector Pin / Functions

Input / Output connector pin terminations of the optional Connector “D” interface is in accordance with the following:
37 Pin (socket) AMP # 747315-2
Pin Function I/O Pin Function I/O
1 Mode * Input 1 (I) 22 Mode * Output 1 (O)
9 Automatic Flash (I) 30 Auxiliary 1 (O)
10 Preempt 1 Detector (I) 31 Auxiliary 2 or Any Preempt (O)
11 Preempt 2 Detector (I) 32 Auxiliary 3 or Detector Reset (O)
12 Preempt 3 Detector (I) 33 Logic Common (O)
13 Preempt 4 Detector (I) 34 Optional Serial Comm. 1 (O)
14 MMU/Conflict Flash Status (I) 35 Optional Serial Comm. 1 (O)
15 Local Flash Status (I) 36 Reserved Output (O)
16 Mode * Input 9 (I) 37 Reserved Output (O)
17 Mode * Input 10 (I)
(*) Denotes multi purpose inputs or outputs. The function of the input or output is dependent on CU "D" Connector Mode
programming and whether the unit has an address other than "000".
15.2.5.4.1 D Input Mode Functions
A Mode Input # function is dependent on CU "D" Connector Mode programming and whether the unit has an address other than
"000".
Address = "000"
Pin Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 8 Mode 9
1 TBC On Line Special Detector On Line Special Detector 1 On Line Computer
1 Control
2 T Plan A (Dial Special Detector T Plan A (Dial Special Detector 7 T Plan A (Dial A) T Plan A (Dial A)
A) 7 A)
3 T Plan B (Dial Special Detector T Plan B (Dial Special Detector 8 T Plan B (Dial B) T Plan B (Dial B)
B) 8 B)
4 T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split Special Detector 5 T Plan C (Split A) T Plan C (Split A)
A) 5 A)

Address = "000"
5 T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split Special Detector 6 T Plan D (Split B) T Plan D (Split B)
B) 6 B)
6 Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1 Special Detector 2 Offset 1 Offset 1
2
3
4
16 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Special Status 1 Special Status 1
17 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Special Status 2 Special Status 2
18 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Special Status 3 Special Status 3
19 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Special Status 4 Special Status 4
20 Set Clock Special Status 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5
Detector Detector Detector Detector
21 Dimming Special Status 6 Preempt 6 Preempt 6 Free Preempt 6
Enable Detector Detector Detector
Address <> "000"

1 Special Detector 1 TBC On Line Special Detector On Line Special Detector Computer
1 1 Control
2 Special Detector 7 T Plan A (Dial A) Special Detector T Plan A (Dial Special Detector T Plan A (Dial
7 A) 7 A)
3 Special Detector 8 T Plan B (Dial B) Special Detector T Plan B (Dial Special Detector T Plan B (Dial
8 B) 8 B)
4 Special Detector 5 T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split
A) 5 A) 5 A)
5 Special Detector 6 T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split
B) 6 B) 6 B)
6 Special Detector 2 Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
16 Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Special Status
1
17 Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Special Status
2
18 Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Special Status
3
19 Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Special Status
4
20 Special Status 5 Set Clock Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5

Address <> "000"

21 Special Status 6 Dimming Preempt 6 Preempt 6 Free Preempt 6
Input Mode 0 provides Coordination & Alt Sequence inputs when no system address is programmed and Special Detectors &
Special Status inputs when a system address is programmed.
Input Mode 1 provides input functions just opposite of Input Mode “0”. Coordination & Alt Sequence inputs when a system
address is programmed and Special Detectors & Special Status inputs when no system address is programmed).
Input Mode 2 provides input functions similar to Mode "0" except Preempt 5 and Preempt 6 inputs replace functions on pin
20 and pin 21.
20 and pin 21.
Input Mode 4 is not used at this time.
Input Mode 8 provides input functions similar to Mode "2" except Pin 16, 17, 18, 19, and 21 do not change function based on
Address. This input mode automatically modifies the output functions as follows:
Address = "000" Address <> "000"
Pin Function Function
32 Free (No Free (No Coordination)
Coordination)
The modifications to Pin 21 & 32 functions as defined above eliminates the Preempt 6 and TBC Auxiliary 3 capability.
Input Mode 9 provides input functions which may be utilized with a central computer system.
D Output Mode Functions
A Mode Output # function is dependent on CU "D" Connector Mode programming and whether the unit has an address other
than "000".
Address = "000"
Pin Mode 0 Mode 1 2-3 Mode 4 Mode 5 6-8 Mode 9
22 T Plan A (Dial A) Special Function Preempt 6 T Plan A (Dial R3 Dwell
7 Status A)
23 T Plan B (Dial B) Special Function Any Priority T Plan B (Dial R4 Dwell
8 B)
24 T Plan C (Split A) Special Function Preempt 4 T Plan C (Split R1 Dwell
5 Status A)
25 T Plan D (Split B) Special Function Preempt 5 T Plan D (Split R2 Dwell
6 Status B)
26 Offset 1 Special Function Preempt 1 Offset 1 Special Function
2 Status 2
27 Offset 2 Special Function Preempt 2 Offset 2 Special Function
3 Status 3
28 Offset 3 Special Function Preempt 3 Offset 3 Cycle 0
4 Status

Address = "000"
29 Automatic Flash Special Function Special Function Automatic Special Function
1 1 Flash 1
Address <> "000"

22 Special Function 7 T Plan A (Dial A) Preempt 6 Status T Plan A (Dial A) R3 Dwell
23 Special Function 8 T Plan B (Dial B) Any Priority T Plan B (Dial B) R4 Dwell
24 Special Function 5 T Plan C (Split A) Preempt 4 Status T Plan C (Split A) R1 Dwell
25 Special Function 6 T Plan D (Split B) Preempt 5 Status T Plan D (Split B) R2 Dwell
26 Special Function 2 Offset 1 Preempt 1 Status Offset 1 Special Function 2
27 Special Function 3 Offset 2 Preempt 2 Status Offset 2 Special Function 3
28 Special Function 4 Offset 3 Preempt 3 Status Offset 3 Cycle 0
29 Special Function 1 Automatic Flash Special Function 1 Automatic Flash Special Function 1
Output Mode 0 provides Coordination outputs when no system address is programmed and System Special Function
outputs when a system address is programmed.
Output Mode 1 provides output functions just opposite of Output Mode “0”. Coordination outputs when a system address is
programmed and System Special Function outputs when no system address is programmed.
Output Mode 2 provides output functions similar to Mode "0" except when any Preempt routine has control then it is like
Mode 4 below.
When Auxiliary #2 is not programmed for output as a TBC Auxiliary function, it will become an Any Preempt active function.
The Any Preempt output will become active when any Low Priority routine or any Preempt routine is in control. This output may
provide the control signal to correctly utilize these dual function outputs.
Mode 4 below.
Output Mode 4 provides preempt status outputs that are active whenever a preempt routine (Preempt or Low Priority) is in
control. The presence of the Any Priority output indicates a Low Priority routine is in control. Each routine (Preempt or Low
Priority) is mutually exclusive.
Output Mode 5 provides output functions similar to Mode "0" (Address = "000") except provides Interrupted Sync Pulses on
the active Offset output. Interrupted Sync Pulses are provided at intervals equal to 20% and 25% of the cycle on alternate
cycles.
Output Mode 6 provides output functions similar to Mode "4" except when a Preempt is active provides a flashing output on
the inactive preempt status outputs.
Output Mode 7 is not used at this time.
Output Mode 9 provides output functions which are provided as status feedback for the central computer system control
established with Input Mode 9. It is established automatically when Input Mode 9 is programmed.

Page 258 2070 HARDWARE
16 2070 ATC HARDWARE

The part number for Eagle 2070 ATC hardware manual is PIM-200.
If installed on hardware from another vendor listed on the CALTRANS Qualified Products List, refer to that vendor’s manual.
The Eagle EPAC300 Software is an adaptation / port of the Eagle EPAC300 Firmware that has been operating in Eagle NEMA CUs
since mid 1980s.
The Eagle EPAC300 Software recognizes it is operating with 2070-2 or 2070-8 Field I/O and whether that I/O uses old (TEES 96)
or new (TEES 97 & later) messages.
The Eagle EPAC300 Software recognizes it is operating with Front Panel with four or eight lines of display.
16.1 2070 ATC SERIAL PORTS
CALTRANS 1996 Transportation Electrical Equipment Specification (TEES) physically located Serial Ports 1 and 2 in the leftmost
slot labeled H1.
Later releases of CALTRANS TEES physically swapped the leftmost two slots, meaning Serial Ports 1 and 2 were physically moved
to the right one slot, labeled A2.
Pictorially:
SP1 2070 Controller
TEES 1996 and
SP2 Earlier
H1 H2 H3 H4
Rear View
Physical Locations Swapped
SP1 2070 Controller
Later than TEES
SP2 1996
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
Rear View
16.2 2070 ATC FRONT PANEL
16.2.1 Four Line Display

When a four line display is being used, the Eagle EPAC300 Software will display either the top or bottom four lines. The user
may switch between top & bottom by pressing the NEXT key.
16.2.2 Extended Keypad

The Eagle EPAC300 Software will utilize the extended keypad keys as follows:
Up Arrow key as a 'A' key
Down Arrow key as a 'B' key
Left Arrow key as a 'C' key
Right Arrow key as a 'D' key
ENT key as a 'E' key

ESC key as a 'F' key

NEXT key as a display toggle when operating with a four line display.
16.3 2070-8 FIELD I/O
The Eagle EPAC300 Software recognizes it is operating with a 2070-8 Field I/O and initializes the default parameters in
accordance with the relative sections of this Product Manual.
16.3.1 ABC Connector Pin / Functions

The Eagle EPAC300 Software and 2070-8 Field I/O provides Input / Output functions on the ABC connectors in accordance with
Section 0.
16.3.1.1 ABC Input Mode Functions

The Eagle EPAC300 Software and 2070-8 Field I/O provides Input Modes on the ABC connectors in accordance with Section 0.
16.3.1.2 ABC Output Mode Functions

The Eagle EPAC300 Software and 2070-8 Field I/O provides Output Modes on the ABC connectors in accordance with Section 0.
16.3.2 D Connector Pin / Functions

The EPAC300 Software and 2070-8 Field I/O provides Input / Output functions on the D connector as follows:
61 Pin (Plug) Type # -24-61P

Pin Function I/O Port Pin Function I/O Port
A Vehicle Detector 09 I 10-1 j Mode * Input 01 I 14-1

B Vehicle Detector 10 I 10-2 k Mode * Input 02 I 14-2
C Vehicle Detector 11 I 10-3 m Mode * Input 03 I 14-3
D Vehicle Detector 12 I 10-4 n Mode * Input 04 I 14-4
E Vehicle Detector 13 I 10-5 p Mode * Input 05 I 14-5
F Vehicle Detector 14 I 10-6 q Mode * Input 06 I 14-6
G Vehicle Detector 15 I 10-7 r Mode * Input 07 I 14-7
H Vehicle Detector 16 I 10-8 s Mode * Input 08 I 14-8
J Vehicle Detector 17 I 11-1 t Preempt 1 Detector I 15-1
K Vehicle Detector 18 I 11-2 u Preempt 2 Detector I 15-2
L Vehicle Detector 19 I 11-3 v Preempt 3 Detector I 15-3
M Vehicle Detector 20 I 11-4 w Preempt 4 Detector I 15-4
N Vehicle Detector 21 I 11-5 x Preempt 5 Detector I 15-5
P Vehicle Detector 22 I 11-6 y Preempt 6 Detector I 15-6
R Vehicle Detector 23 I 11-7 z Auxiliary 1 O 12-7
S Vehicle Detector 24 I 11-8 AA Aux 2 or Any Preempt O 12-8
T Spare 01 I 12-1 BB Mode * Output 8 O 13-1

61 Pin (Plug) Type # -24-61P

Pin Function I/O Port Pin Function I/O Port
U Spare 02 I 12-2 CC Mode * Output 5 O 13-2

V Spare 03 I 12-3 DD Mode * Output 6 O 13-3
W Spare 04 I 12-4 EE Mode * Output 7 O 13-4
X Spare 05 I 12-5 FF Mode * Output 3 O 13-5
Y Free (No Coord) I 12-6 GG Mode * Output 4 O 13-6
Z Spare 06 I 12-7 HH Mode * Output 1 O 13-7
a Local Flash Status I 12-8 JJ Mode * Output 2 O 13-8
b Mode * Input 09 I 13-1 KK Not Assigned - ---
c Mode * Input 10 I 13-2 LL Aux 3 or Det Reset O 11-8
d Mode * Input 11 I 13-3 MM Not Assigned - ---
e Mode * Input 12 I 13-4 NN +24 VDC - ---
f Mode * Input 13 I 13-5 PP 2070N DC Ground - ---
g Automatic Flash I 13-6
h Conflict Flash Status I 13-7
i Mode * Input 14 I 13-8
(*) Denotes multi purpose inputs or outputs. The function of the input or output is dependent on CU "D" Connector Mode
programming and whether the unit has an address other than "000".
16.3.2.1 D Input Mode Functions

IA Mode Input # function is dependent on CU "D" Connector Mode programming and whether the unit has an address other than
"000".
Address = "000"
b Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Special Status 1 Special Status 1
c Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Special Status 2 Special Status 2
d Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Special Status 3 Special Status 3
e Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Special Status 4 Special Status 4
f Set Clock Special Status 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5
I Dimming Special Status 6 Preempt 6 Preempt 6 Free (No Coord) Preempt 6
j On Line Special Detector On Line Special Detector 1 On Line Computer
1 Control
k T Plan A (Dial Special Detector T Plan A (Dial A) Special Detector 7 T Plan A (Dial A) T Plan A (Dial A)
A) 7
m T Plan B (Dial Special Detector T Plan B (Dial B) Special Detector 8 T Plan B (Dial B) T Plan B (Dial B)
B) 8
n T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split A) Special Detector 5 T Plan C (Split A) T Plan C (Split A)
A) 5
p T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split B) Special Detector 6 T Plan D (Split B) T Plan D (Split B)
B) 6

Address = "000"
q Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1 Special Detector 2 Offset 1 Offset 1
2
r Offset 2 Special Detector Offset 2 Special Detector 3 Offset 2 Offset 2
3
s Offset 3 Special Detector Offset 3 Special Detector 4 Offset 3 Offset 3
4
Address <> "000"

b Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Special Status 1
c Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Special Status 2
d Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Special Status 3
e Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Special Status 4
f Special Status 5 Set Clock Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Detector Preempt 5
Detector Detector Detector
I Special Status 6 Dimming Preempt 6 Preempt 6 Free (No Coord) Preempt 6
j Special Detector On Line Special Detector On Line Special Detector 1 Computer
1 1 Control
k Special Detector T Plan A (Dial Special Detector T Plan A (Dial A) Special Detector 7 T Plan A (Dial A)
7 A) 7
m Special Detector T Plan B (Dial Special Detector T Plan B (Dial B) Special Detector 8 T Plan B (Dial B)
8 B) 8
n Special Detector T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split Special Detector 5 T Plan C (Split
5 A) 5 A) A)
p Special Detector T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split Special Detector 6 T Plan D (Split
6 B) 6 B) B)
q Special Detector Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1 Special Detector 2 Offset 1
2 2
r Special Detector Offset 2 Special Detector Offset 2 Special Detector 3 Offset 2
3 3
s Special Detector Offset 3 Special Detector Offset 3 Special Detector 4 Offset 3
4 4
20 and pin 21.
20 and pin 21.


Input Mode 8 provides input functions similar to Mode "2" except Pin b, c, d, e, and i do not change function based on
Address. This input mode automatically modifies the output functions as follows:
Address = "000" Address <> "000"
Pin Function Function
LL Free (No Coordination) Free (No Coordination)
The modifications to Pin i & LL functions as defined above eliminates the Preempt 6 and TBC Auxiliary 3 capability.
D Output Mode Functions

than "000".
Address = "000"
BB Automatic Flash Spc Function 1 Spc Function 1 Automatic Flash Spc Function 1
CC Offset 1 Spc Function 2 Preempt 1 Status Offset 1 Spc Function 2
DD Offset 2 Spc Function 3 Preempt 2 Status Offset 2 Spc Function 3
EE Offset 3 Spc Function 4 Preempt 3 Status Offset 3 Cycle 0
FF T Plan C (Split A) Spc Function 5 Preempt 4 Status T Plan C (Split A) Ring 1 Dwell
GG T Plan D (Split B) Spc Function 6 Preempt 5 Status T Plan D (Split B) Ring 2 Dwell
HH T Plan A (Dial A) Spc Function 7 Preempt 6 Status T Plan A (Dial A) Ring 3 Dwell
JJ T Plan B (Dial B) Spc Function 8 Any Priority T Plan B (Dial B) Ring 4 Dwell
Address <> "000"

BB Spc Function 1 Automatic Flash Spc Function 1 Automatic Flash Spc Function 1
CC Spc Function 2 Offset 1 Preempt 1 Status Offset 1 Spc Function 2
DD Spc Function 3 Offset 2 Preempt 2 Status Offset 2 Spc Function 3
EE Spc Function 4 Offset 3 Preempt 3 Status Offset 3 Cycle 0
FF Spc Function 5 T Plan C (Split A) Preempt 4 Status T Plan C (Split A) Ring 1 Dwell
GG Spc Function 6 T Plan D (Split B) Preempt 5 Status T Plan D (Split B) Ring 2 Dwell
HH Spc Function 7 T Plan A (Dial A) Preempt 6 Status T Plan A (Dial A) Ring 3 Dwell
JJ Spc Function 8 T Plan B (Dial B) Any Priority T Plan B (Dial B) Ring 4 Dwell
Mode 4 below.
When Auxiliary #2 is not programmed for output as a TBC Auxiliary function, it will become an Any Preempt active function.
The Any Preempt output will become active when any Low Priority routine or any Preempt routine is in control. This output may
provide the control signal to correctly utilize these dual function outputs.

Mode 4 below.
cycles.
16.4.3 Loop Back Diagnostic

To run the LOOP BACK I/O TEST (option 5 from the EPAC DIAGNOSTICS display) requires ABW12232 Loop Back Cable.
16.4.4 2070-2 FIELD I/O

The EPAC300 Software recognizes it is operating with a 2070-2 Field I/O and initializes the default parameters such as to be
compatible with the typical 332 Cabinet operation as follows:
EPAC 104 Default EPAC 104 Default

Veh Det Pin # Function Veh Det Pin # Function
1 56 Phase 01 Vehicle Detector 20 -- Not Available
2 -- Mimic of Detector 31 21 40 Phase 06 Vehicle Detector
3 39 Phase 02 Vehicle Detector 22 44 Phase 06 Vehicle Detector
8 -- Mimic of Detector 32 27 -- Not Available
When operating with a 2070-2 Field I/O, the EPAC300 Software will modify operation as follows:

When all FLSH entries (F-4-2) are "0", Remote Flash will not occur.
When the Local Flash Status input (Pin 81) is ON (true/active), all signal driver outputs shall be dark. When this input transitions
from ON to OFF, the software will operate as though an External Start had occurred.

16.4.5 A Connector Pin / Functions

The EPAC300 Software and 2070-2 Field I/O provides Input / Output functions on the C1S ("A") connector in accordance with this
section of this manual.
2070-2 Field I/O C1S ("A") Connector
Pin Function I/O Name Port Pin Function I/O Name Port
1 Logic Ground - --- --- 55 Vehicle Detector 19 I I16 I3-1

2 Phase 4 Don’t Walk O O0 O1-1 56 Vehicle Detector 01 I I17 I3-2
3 Phase 4 Walk O O1 O1-2 57 Vehicle Detector 29 I I18 I3-3
4 Phase 4 Red O O2 O1-3 58 Vehicle Detector 09 I I19 I3-4
5 Phase 4 Yellow O O3 O1-4 59 Vehicle Detector 37 I I20 I3-5
6 Phase 4 Green O O4 O1-5 60 Vehicle Detector 17 I I21 I3-6
10 Phase 2 Don’t Walk O O8 O2-1 64 Vehicle Detector 23 I I29 I4-6
11 Phase 2 Walk O O9 O2-2 65 Vehicle Detector 13 I I30 I4-7
13 Phase 2 Yellow O O11 O2-4 67 Ped Detector 2 I I32 I5-1
14 Logic Ground - --- --- 68 Ped Detector 6 I I33 I5-2
15 Phase 2 Green O O12 O2-5 69 Ped Detector 4 I I34 I5-3
16 Phase 1 Red O O13 O2-6 70 Ped Detector 8 I I35 I5-4
17 Phase 1 Yellow O O14 O2-7 71 Preempt 3 Detector I I36 I5-5
18 Phase 1 Green O O15 O2-8 72 Preempt 4 Detector I I37 I5-6
19 Phase 8 Don’t Walk O O16 O3-1 73 Preempt 5 Detector I I38 I5-7
20 Phase 8 Walk O O17 O3-2 74 Preempt 6 Detector I I39 I5-8
21 Phase 8 Red O O18 O3-3 75 Spare 2 I I40 I6-1
26 Phase 7 Green O O23 O3-8 80 Interval Advance I I45 I6-6
27 Phase 6 Don’t Walk O O24 O4-1 81 Local Flash Status I I46 I6-7
28 Phase 6 Walk O O25 O4-2 82 Stop Time (1) & (2) I I47 I6-8
29 Phase 6 Red O O26 O4-3 83 Phase 3 Don’t Walk O O40 O6-1
30 Phase 6 Yellow O O27 O4-4 84 Phase 3 Walk O O41 O6-2
31 Phase 6 Green O O28 O4-5 85 Overlap D Red O O42 O6-3
32 Phase 5 Red O O29 O4-6 86 Overlap D Yellow O O43 O6-4
33 Phase 5 Yellow O O30 O4-7 87 Overlap D Green O O44 O6-5
34 Phase 5 Green O O31 O4-8 88 Overlap C Red O O45 O6-6
35 Phase 2 Ped Clear O O32 O5-1 89 Overlap C Yellow O O46 O6-7

2070-2 Field I/O C1S ("A") Connector

36 Phase 6 Ped Clear O O33 O5-2 90 Overlap C Green O O47 O6-8

37 Phase 4 Ped Clear O O34 O5-3 91 Phase 1 Don’t Walk O O48 O7-1
38 Phase 8 Ped Clear O O35 O5-4 92 Logic Ground - --- ---
39 Vehicle Detector 03 I I0 I1-1 93 Phase 1 Walk O O49 O7-2
40 Vehicle Detector 21 I I1 I1-2 94 Overlap B Red O O50 O7-3
41 Vehicle Detector 11 I I2 I1-3 95 Overlap B Yellow O O51 O7-4
42 Vehicle Detector 31 I I3 I1-4 96 Overlap B Green O O52 O7-5
43 Vehicle Detector 04 I I4 I1-5 97 Overlap A Red O O53 O7-6
44 Vehicle Detector 22 I I5 I1-6 98 Overlap A Yellow O O54 O7-7
45 Vehicle Detector 12 I I6 I1-7 99 Overlap A Green O O55 O7-8
46 Vehicle Detector 32 I I7 I1-8 100 Phase 3 Ped Clear O O36 O5-5
47 Vehicle Detector 07 I I8 I2-1 101 Phase 1 Ped Clear O O37 O5-6
48 Vehicle Detector 25 I I9 I2-2 102 Aux 3 or Det Reset O O38 O5-7
49 Vehicle Detector 15 I I10 I2-3 103 Watchdog O O39 O5-8
50 Vehicle Detector 35 I I11 I2-4 104 Logic Ground - --- ---
51 Preempt 1 Detector I I12 I2-5
52 Preempt 2 Detector I I13 I2-6
53 Manual Control Enable I I14 I2-7
54 Spare 1 I I15 I2-8

16.4.5.1 ABC Input Mode Functions

Input Modes is not used at this time.
16.4.5.2 ABC Output Mode Functions
Pin Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2-3-5-7-8-9 Mode 4 - 6

35 Phase 2 Ped Clear Not Used (OFF) Preempt 1 Status
38 Phase 8 Ped Clear Not Used (OFF) Reserved Preempt 4 Status
83 Phase 3 Don’t Walk Auxiliary 1 Auxiliary 1
84 Phase 3 Walk Aux 2 or Any Preempt Aux 2 or Any Preempt
91 Phase 1 Don’t Walk Not Used (OFF) Any Priority
93 Phase 1 Walk Not Used (OFF) Special Function 1
Output Mode 0 provides Pedestrian Signal Driver outputs.
Output Mode 1 is reserved at this time.
Output Mode 2 is reserved at this time. See Output Mode 1.
16.4.6 D Connector Pin / Functions

The EPAC300 Software and 2070-2 Field I/O provides Input / Output functions on the C11S ("D") connector in accordance with
this section of the manual.
2070-2 Field I/O C11S ("D") Connector

1 Mode * Output 1 O O56 O8-1 21 Mode * Input 07 I I54 I7-7


2070-2 Field I/O C11S ("D") Connector


9 Logic Ground - --- --- 29 Automatic Flash I I62 I8-7
10 CM Flash Status I I24 I4-1 30 Free (No Coord) I I63 I8-8
11 Spare 1 I I25 I4-2 31 Logic Ground - --- ---
12 Spare 2 I I26 I4-3 32 Not Used - --- ---
13 Spare 3 I I27 I4-4 33 Not Used - --- ---
14 Logic Ground - --- --- 34 Not Used - --- ---
15 Mode * Input 01 I I48 I7-1 35 Not Used - --- ---
16 Mode * Input 02 I I49 I7-2 36 Not Used - --- ---
17 Mode * Input 03 I I50 I7-3 37 Logic Ground - --- ---
18 Mode * Input 04 I I51 I7-4
16.4.6.1 D Input Mode Functions

than "000".
Address = "000"
15 On Line Special Detector On Line Special Detector On Line Computer
1 1 Control
16 T Plan A (Dial Special Detector T Plan A (Dial Special Detector T Plan A (Dial T Plan A (Dial
A) 7 A) 7 A) A)
17 T Plan B (Dial Special Detector T Plan B (Dial Special Detector T Plan B (Dial T Plan B (Dial
B) 8 B) 8 B) B)
18 T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split T Plan C (Split
A) 5 A) 5 A) A)
19 T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split T Plan D (Split
B) 6 B) 6 B) B)
20 Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1 Offset 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
23 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Special Status Special Status
1 1
24 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Special Status Special Status
2 2

Address = "000"
25 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Special Status Special Status
3 3
26 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Special Status Special Status
4 4
27 Set Clock Special Status 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5
28 Dimming Special Status 6 Preempt 6 Preempt 6 Free (No Preempt 6
Enable Detector Detector Coord) Detector
Address <> "000"

15 Special Detector On Line Special Detector On Line Special Detector Computer
1 1 1 Control
16 Special Detector T Plan A (Dial Special Detector T Plan A (Dial Special Detector T Plan A (Dial A)
7 A) 7 A) 7
17 Special Detector T Plan B (Dial Special Detector T Plan B (Dial Special Detector T Plan B (Dial B)
8 B) 8 B) 8
18 Special Detector T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split Special Detector T Plan C (Split
5 A) 5 A) 5 A)
19 Special Detector T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split Special Detector T Plan D (Split
6 B) 6 B) 6 B)
20 Special Detector Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1 Special Detector Offset 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
23 Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Alt Sequence A Special Status 1 Special Status 1
24 Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Alt Sequence B Special Status 2 Special Status 2
25 Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Alt Sequence C Special Status 3 Special Status 3
26 Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Alt Sequence D Special Status 4 Special Status 4
27 Special Status 5 Set Clock Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5 Preempt 5
28 Special Status 6 Dimming Preempt 6 Preempt 6 Free (No Coord) Preempt 6
27 and pin 28.
27 and pin 28.


Input Mode 8 provides input functions similar to Mode "2" except Pin 23, 24, 25, 26, and 28 do not change function based on
Address. The modifications to Pin 28 function as defined above eliminates the Preempt 6 capability.
16.4.6.2 D Output Mode Functions

than "000".
Address = "000"
1 T Plan A (Dial A) Special Function 7 Preempt 6 Status T Plan A (Dial A) R3 Dwell
2 T Plan B (Dial B) Special Function 8 Any Priority T Plan B (Dial B) R4 Dwell
3 T Plan C (Split Special Function 5 Preempt 4 Status T Plan C (Split R1 Dwell
A) A)
4 T Plan D (Split Special Function 6 Preempt 5 Status T Plan D (Split R2 Dwell
B) B)
5 Offset 1 Special Function 2 Preempt 1 Status Offset 1 Special Function 2
6 Offset 2 Special Function 3 Preempt 2 Status Offset 2 Special Function 3
7 Offset 3 Special Function 4 Preempt 3 Status Offset 3 Cycle 0
8 Automatic Flash Special Function 1 Special Function 1 Automatic Flash Special Function 1
Address <> "000"

1 Special Function 7 T Plan A (Dial A) Preempt 6 Status T Plan A (Dial A) R3 Dwell
2 Special Function 8 T Plan B (Dial B) Any Priority T Plan B (Dial B) R4 Dwell
3 Special Function 5 T Plan C (Split Preempt 4 Status T Plan C (Split R1 Dwell
A) A)
4 Special Function 6 T Plan D (Split Preempt 5 Status T Plan D (Split R2 Dwell
B) B)
5 Special Function 2 Offset 1 Preempt 1 Status Offset 1 Special Function
2
6 Special Function 3 Offset 2 Preempt 2 Status Offset 2 Special Function
3
7 Special Function 4 Offset 3 Preempt 3 Status Offset 3 Cycle 0
8 Special Function 1 Automatic Flash Special Function 1 Automatic Flash Special Function
1
Mode 4 below. When Auxiliary #2 is not programmed for output as a TBC Auxiliary function, it will become an Any Preempt
active function. The Any Preempt output will become active when any Low Priority routine or any Preempt routine is in
control. This output may provide the control signal to correctly utilize these dual function outputs.

Mode 4 below.
cycles.
16.4.7 Loop Back Diagnostic

To run the LOOP BACK I/O TEST (option 5 from the EPAC DIAGNOSTICS display) requires ABW12150 Loop Back Cable.
16.4.8 EPAC300 Displays / Screens

The EPAC300 Software and 2070-2 Field I/O provides front panel displays/screens in accordance with this and other sections of
the manual.
The Active Status Menu allows the user to select which real time function will be displayed.
16.4.8.1 Active Status Screens

16.4.8.1.1 Input / Output Status
The Input / Output display allows the user to view the state of each input and output pin present on connector A, B, C, & D. These
displays show the status of the input and output pin regardless of the function caused by alternate I/O modes.
EPAC I/O MENU PRESS # DESIRED

1-ABC INPUT STATUS
2- D INPUT STATUS
3-ABC OUTPUT STATUS
4- D OUTPUT STATUS
F-PRIOR MENU
PRESS "1" FROM I/O MENU
EPAC ABC INPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU

INPUT NUMBER ... 1234567890........
VEH DET (01-10) .X .. .X X ST - .
VEH DET (11-20) .. ..X.. X IA - .
VEH DET (21-30) .. ..XXX X LF - .
VEH DET (31-38) .. ..X.. MCE- .
PED DET (01-08) X.X.X.X. SP2- .
PREEMPT (01-06) .. .. SP3- .
ABC INPUT STATUS WILL BE AS FOLLOWS:

Inputs will display a "1" next to the name when active.

VEH DET: Vehicle ## Detector
PED DET: Pedestrian ## Detector
PREEMPT: Preempt # Detector
ST : Stop Time 1 & 2 Input
IA: Interval Advance Input
LF: Local Flash Status Input
MCE: Manual Control Enable Input
SP2: Spare 2 Input
SP3: Spare 3 Input
EPAC D INPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU

CF -. DB/SD8-. O1/SD2-. SC/SS5-.
SP1-. DA/SD7-. OL/SD1-. DM/SS6-.
SP2-. SB/SD6-. AA/SS1-. AF -..
SP3-. SA/SD5-. AB/SS2-. FR -.
O3/SD4-. AC/SS3-.
O2/SD3-. AD/SS4-.
This display will show the status of all Connector D inputs. Inputs will display a "1" next to the name when active.
CF: Conflict Flash Status
SP1: Spare 1
SP2: Spare 2
SP3: Spare 3
DB/SD8: Dial B - System Detector 8
DA/SD7: Dial A - System Detector 7
SA/SD5: Split A - System Detector 5
OL/SD1: On Line - System Detector 1
AA/SS1: Alt Sequence A - Special Status 1
AB/SS2: Alt Sequence B - Special Status 2
AC/SS3: Alt Sequence C - Special Status 3
AD/SS4: Alt Sequence D - Special Status 4
SC/SS5: Set Clock - Special Status 5
DM/SS6: Dimming - Special Status 6
AF : Automatic Flash
FR: Free (No Coord)
EPAC ABC OUTPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU

PHSE 12345678 OVLP ABCD
GRN- . . . . GRN-. .
YEL- . . . . YEL-. .
RED- . . . . RED-. .
DWK- . . . .
PCL- . . . . WD -.
WLK- . . . . DR -.
This display will show the status of all Connector A, B, & C outputs. Outputs will display a "*" next to the name when active.
Under PHSE 12345678
GRN: Phase Green
YEL: Phase Yellow
RED: Phase Red
DWK: Phase Don’t Walk
PCL: Phase Pedestrian Clear
WLK: Phase Walk
Under OVLP ABCD
GRN: Overlap Green

YEL: Overlap Yellow

RED: Overlap Red
WD: Watchdog
DR: Detector Reset
EPAC D OUTPUT STATUS F-PRIOR MENU
DA/SF7-. O1/SF2-.
DB/SF8-. O2/SF3-.
SA/SF5-. O3/SF4-.
SB/SF6-. FL/SF1-.
This display will show the status of all Connector D outputs. Outputs will display a "1" next to the name when active.
DA/SF7: Dial A / Special Function 7
DB/SF8: Dial B / Special Function 8
SA/SF5: Split A / Special Function 5
SB/SF6: Split A / Special Function 6
01/SF2: Offset 1 / Special Function 2
FL/SF1: Flash / Special Function 1
16.4.8.2 Diagnostic Screens

16.4.8.2.1 Input Diagnostics
EPAC DIAGNOSTICS PRESS # DESIRED

1-KEYPAD TEST
2-STANDARD INPUT
3-SPECIAL INPUT
4-OUTPUT TEST
5-LOOP BACK I/O TEST
F-EXIT DIAGNOSTICS TO RESTART
INPUT DIAGNOSTIC STANDARD

VEH DET (01-10) .X .. .X X ST - .
VEH DET (11-20) .. ..X.. X IA - .
VEH DET (21-30) .. ..XXX X LF - .
VEH DET (31-38) .. ..X.. MCE- .
PED DET (01-08) X.X.X.X. SP2- .
PREEMPT (01-06) .. .. SP3- .
ANY SPECIAL -. F-PRIOR MENU
The standard input diagnostic will begin with the above display assuming no inputs to the controller unit are active.
INPUT DIAGNOSTIC SPECIAL

CF -. DB/SD8-. O1/SD2-. SC/SS5-.
SP1-. DA/SD7-. OL/SD1-. DM/SS6-.
SP2-. SB/SD6-. AA/SS1-. AF -..
SP3-. SA/SD5-. AB/SS2-. FR -.
O3/SD4-. AC/SS3-.
O2/SD3-. AD/SS4-.
ANY STANDARD-. F-PRIOR MENU

The special input diagnostic will begin with the above display assuming no inputs to the controller unit are active.

CUSTOM I/O MAPPING Page 275
17 EAGLE EPAC300 SOFTWARE

INSTALLATION
The following instructions are necessary to install or update the Eagle EPAC300 software in your 2070 ATC or Eagle M50
Controller Unit (CU):
C50S <-2070 & PC-> PC

9 Pin Connectors 9 Pin
1
2 3
3 2
5 5
Port 2 <-M50 & PC-> PC

25 Pin Connectors 9 Pin
7 5
14 3
16 2
NOTE: No 'opexec' (User) program can be running while doing this installation.
1. Open HyperTerminal with a direct connect to the port which will be connected to the CU. The required cable is denoted
above.
2. HyperTerminal 'Connect To' properties for the port should be configured as follows:
 Bits Per Second: 9600
 Data Bits: 8
 Parity: None
 Stop Bits: 1
 Flow Control: None
1. HyperTerminal 'Settings' properties for the port should be configured as follows:
 Function, arrow, and ctrl keys as: Terminal Keys
 Emulation: VT100
1. Once HyperTerminal is configured as above, 'Disconnect' then 'Connect'
... this will close then reopen the terminal connection.
2. Type: <Enter>
 the CU should respond with a '$' prompt
1. This step is slightly different based on the CU.

Page 276 CUSTOM I/O MAPPING
CU = Eagle 2070 ATC or Eagle M50: If there is an opexec (User) program running, or if not sure, Use the Backspace Key to bypass
starting an opexec:
 Power OFF the CU. (This must be for at least 2 seconds to guarantee a complete restart.)
 Press and Hold: <Backspace> on your TERMINAL keyboard.
 Power ON the CU (while holding the Backspace Key)
 If you are successful, a message like the following should appear within HyperTerminal:
OS-9/68K System Bootstrap

Now searching memory ...
An OS-9 kernel module was found at ...
A valid OS-9 bootfile was found.
Starting SYSGO
User Key aborted access to /f0/opexec
Starting ffpled at Priority 5
Forking FP valsuite monitor at Priority 5
Forking Shell #1
$
CU = Naztec 2070 ATC: If there is an opexec (User) program running, or if not sure, Use the Backspace Key to bypass starting an
opexec:
 Press and Hold: <Backspace> on your TERMINAL keyboard.
 Power ON the CU (while holding the Backspace Key)
 If you are successful, a message like the following should appear within HyperTerminal:

Starting Sysgo Processing
Forking 'sdump'
$
CU = Safetran 2070 ATC: If a shell $ prompt is available, perform a procs to see if there is an opexec (User) program
running. If so:
Use the CTRL and E Keys simultaneously to bypass starting an opexec:
 Press and Hold: Ctrl and E keys on your TERMINAL keyboard.
 Power ON the CU (while holding the Ctrl and E Keys)
 If opexec was an Eagle EPAC300 MVP type, and you are successful, a message like the following should appear within
HyperTerminal:
OS-9/68K System Bootstrap

Now searching memory ...
An OS-9 kernel module was found at ...
Starting EAGLE TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS opexec
^E bypassed Traffic Program. Starting an
opexec shell
use logout to end opexec shell & goto
Safetran shell
$ Read I/O error - Error #000:002
$
---->>> Now type logout to end the Opexec
shell:
$ logout
$

*** Steps 7 thru 11 and 17 thru 21 below will speed up the process but are not mandatory for this effort. ***
1. Type: tmode baud=38400<Enter>
2. 'Disconnect' the HyperTerminal connection
 This will close the terminal connection
1. Change HyperTerminal 'Connect To' properties for 38400 bps
2. 'Connect' the HyperTerminal connection
 This will reopen the terminal connection with the new parameters.
1. Type: <Enter>
 The CU should respond with a '$' prompt; this will verify baud rate changes
1. Type: chd /r0<Enter>
 The CU should respond with a '$' prompt
1. Type: kermit r<Enter>
2. Eagle: Send file 'xmvpe' using 'kermit Protocol
Naztec: Send file 'xmvpn' using 'kermit Protocol
Safetran: Send file 'xmvps' using 'kermit Protocol
 The 'Send file' assumes the neccesary installation files are located in an accessible location (unzipped) and which you
have located using Browse in the HyperTerminal SEND command.
 The CU should respond with a '$' prompt
1. Type: profile /r0/xm*<Enter>
2. Information will appear which includes:
Eagle:
SEND 'me*' NOW
Naztec:
SEND 'etcsload.vps' NOW
SEND 'mn*' NOW
Safetran:
SEND 'etcsload.vps' NOW
SEND 'ms*' NOW
 The 'SEND file(s)' above assumes the neccesary installation files are located in an accessible location (unzipped) and
which you have located using Browse in the HyperTerminal SEND command.
 When the procedure file completes & states:
"Restart CU to run the Eagle EPAC300

Software":
1. Type: tmode baud=9600<Enter>

2. 'Disconnect' the HyperTerminal connection
 This will close the terminal connection
1. Change HyperTerminal 'Connect To' properties for 9600 bps
2. 'Connect' the HyperTerminal connection
 This will reopen the terminal connection with the new parameters.
1. Type: <Enter>
 The CU should respond with a '$' prompt; this will verify baud rate changes
1. Power OFF the CU for at least 2 seconds to guarantee a complete restart.
 The CU will RESTART running the new Eagle EPAC Software.
 Follow the Eagle EPAC database initialization instructions on the CU screen.

18 CUSTOM I/O MAPPING

The Eagle EPAC300 Actuated Signal Control Firmware/Software provides limited/general I/O Mapping via Front Panel entries.
These are defined in Sections 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, and 0. This level of I/O Mapping provides for inputs or outputs in logical groups to
be assigned to predefined groups of hardware pins.
The Eagle EPAC300 Actuated Signal Control Firmware/Software while operating in Eagle EPAC M50 & 2070 ATC hardware
provides low level I/O Mapping to be Customized pin-by-pin for hardware interfaces (NEMA & Type 170) or bit-by-bit for serial
interfaces (NEMA TS2, ITS, & CBD Cabinets).
18.1 I/O Mapping Flow
From the following figure depicts the flow for inputs and outputs.
Note A: Custom output mapping is limited by the standard / default serial interface definitions.

Note B: Custom output mapping is limited by the standard / default hardware interface definitions.
Note C: Custom input mapping is limited by the standard / default serial interface definitions.
Note D: Custom input mapping is limited by the standard / default hardware interface definitions.
18.2 Software EPAC Logic Builder
The sEPAC_Logic_Builder is a Windows based PC program that enables the user to generate the file used by the Eagle EPAC300
Firmware/Software for Custom I/O.
Custom I/O mapping need only address that which needs to be custom. Any function that works as needed or appears on the
needed hardware pin or serial bit need not be addressed in the custom logic.
Each line of custom logic includes an instruction and register designation representing any single output or input. The custom
logic must end with an END instruction.
The first four lines of the logic shown in the above figure shows the custom logic for a four section left-turn protected
permissive signal head for a hardware interface to provide the following sequence:
Green Thru Arrow to be the Thru Phase Green
Green Left Arrow to be the Lagging Phase Green
Yellow Ball to be the Thru Phase Yellow ORed with the Lagging Phase Yellow
Red Ball to be ON at all times except during this Yellow
The signal driver (load switch) logic to produce the desired result is as follows:
Green Thru Arrow : Phase 6 Green > Phase 6 Green (no custom logic required)
Green Left Arrow : Phase 1 Green > Phase 1 Green (no custom logic required)
Yellow Ball : Phase 1 Yellow OR Phase 6 Yellow > Phase 1 Yellow
Red Ball : NOT Phase 1 Yellow OR Phase 6 Yellow > Phase 1 Red

The result of the above is the normal Phase 1 Yellow and Phase 1 Red hardware pin outputs are customized for this application.
Dimming for any capable output can be mapped to any other output capable of dimming. Rising and falling edges are also
mapped among inputs. The current version maps inputs to outputs WITHOUT dimming. Outputs mapped to inputs do not
provide rising or falling edges but activations only. Inputs mapped to detector are not capable of collecting volume &
occupancy.
When the custom logic is saved, two files are created. One file will have a SLB extension and the other a BIN extension after the
user provides the name. A copy of the BIN file must be copied into the /f0/eagle directory of the Eagle EPAC M50 or 2070 ATC
unit and renamed IOMAP.
The structure for the I/O mapping data file is as follows.
Description : 40 bytes (39+nul) e.g. “6th and Congress”
Comment : 40 bytes (39+nul) e.g. “Checked by John Doe on
6/5/2005”
Version Num : 4 byte version number (1 long word)
Number of Instructions : 4 byte instruction count (nn, 1 long word)
Padding : 40 bytes for future expansion
Instruction / Operand : nn long words.
End instruction : nn+1 contains 0x7e7e
Checksum : 4 byte byte-wise checksum over filesize - 4 (1 long
word)
When the unit boots up, if the file /f0/eagle/iomap (with no extension) exists and contains the structure above and the version is
compatible along with a correct checksum then the Custom IO logic routine will be executed.
There are 40 temporary storage locations which make operations such as swapping two outputs or inputs easier.
18.2.1 Instructions
The sEPAC_Logic_Builder provides the following instructions for the creating custom I/O logic:
NOPO - No operation
LDA - LOAD I/O Register into Accumulator
LDC - LOAD Compliment of I/O Register into Accumulator
ANDA - AND I/O Register with Accumulator
ANDC - AND Compliment of I/O Register into Accumulator
ORA - OR I/O Register with Accumulator
ORC - OR Compliment of I/O Register into Accumulator
XNOR - Exclusive NOR I/O Register with Accumulator
STA - STORE Accumulator to I/O Register
STC - STORE Compliment of Accumulator to I/O Register
IEN - STORE a 1 in Accumulator
OEN - STORE a 0 in Accumulator
NEG - Compliment the Accumulator
END - STOP the custom logic
NOT / COMPLIMENT Instruction:
The following figure shows how the instruction works.

AND Instruction:
OR Instruction:
XNOR Instruction:
Following each instruction there is a word sized register designation representing any single output or input.
18.2.2 Registers
Registers are defined by names associated with the default function of the serial bit or hardware pin.
The sEPAC_Logic_Builder provides the following registers (representing any single output or input) for the creating custom I/O
logic:
Signal Driver Group Output Registers:
Phase 1 Red Phase 1 Phase 1 Green Phase 1 D Phase 1 P Phase 1 Walk
Yellow Walk Clear
Yellow Walk Clear
Yellow Walk Clear
Yellow Walk Clear
Yellow Walk Clear


Yellow Walk Clear
Yellow Walk Clear
Yellow Walk Clear
Overlap A Red Overlap A Overlap A Overlap B Red Overlap B Overlap B
Yellow Green Yellow Green
Overlap C Red Overlap C Overlap C Overlap D Red Overlap D Overlap D
Yellow Green Yellow Green
Note: These output register names are normally associated with hardware interfaces of NEMA TS2 & Type 170
Cabinets. SDG to Channel, Channel to Pin, and ABC IO Map programming may place functions on the pins not
representative of the name.
Phase Output Registers:
Phase 1 Check Phase 2 Check Phase 3 Check Phase 4 Check Phase 5 Check Phase 6 Check
Phase 7 Check Phase 8 Check Phase 1 Next Phase 2 Next Phase 3 Next Phase 4 Next
Phase 5 Next Phase 6 Next Phase 7 Next Phase 8 Next Phase 1 On Phase 2 On
Phase 3 On Phase 4 On Phase 5 On Phase 6 On Phase 7 On Phase 8 On
Note: When mapping hardware interfaces of NEMA TS2 & Type 170 Cabinets, it should be noted that ABC IO Map
programming may place functions on the pins not representative of the name.
Ring Output Registers:
Ring 1 CSB A Ring 1 CSB B Ring 1 CSB C Ring 2 CSB A Ring 2 CSB B Ring 2 CSB C
Unit Output Registers:
Fault Monitor Flash Logic Auxiliary 1 Auxiliary 2 Auxiliary 3 Spc Function 1
Spc Function 2 Spc Function 3 Spc Function 4 Spc Function 5 Spc Function 6 Spc Function 7
Spc Function 8 Reserved TX D 9 Reserved TX D 10 Reserved TX D 22 Reserved TX D 23 Reserved TX D 21
NYS Mutual Coord
Channel Output Registers:
Chn 1 Red Chn 2 Red Chn 3 Red Chn 4 Red Chn 5 Red Chn 6 Red
Chn 31 Red Chn 32 Red
Chn 1 Yel Chn 2 Yel Chn 3 Yel Chn 4 Yel Chn 5 Yel Chn 6 Yel
Chn 31 Yel Chn 32 Yel
Chn 1 Grn Chn 2 Grn Chn 3 Grn Chn 4 Grn Chn 5 Grn Chn 6 Grn

Chn 31 Grn Chn 32 Grn
Note: These output register names are normally associated with serial bit interfaces of NEMA TS2, ITS, & CBD
Cabinets.
Temporary Registers:
Temp Location 0 Temp Location 1 Temp Location 2 Temp Location 3 Temp Location 4 Temp Location 5
Temp Location 29 Temp Location 30 Temp Location31 Temp Location 32 Temp Location 33 Temp Location 34
Temp Location 35 Temp Location 36 Temp Location 37 Temp Location 38 Temp Location 39
Vehicle Detector Input Registers:

Veh Detector 1 Veh Detector 2 Veh Detector 3 Veh Detector 4 Veh Detector 5 Veh Detector 6
Veh Detector 61 Veh Detector 62 Veh Detector 63 Veh Detector 64
Special Detector Input Registers:
Spc Detector 1 (65) Spc Detector 2 (66) Spc Detector 3 (67) Spc Detector 4 (68) Spc Detector 5 (69) Spc Detector 6 (70)
Spc Detector 7 (71) Spc Detector 8 (72)
Pedestrian Detector Input Registers:
Ped Detector 1 Ped Detector 2 Ped Detector 3 Ped Detector 4 Ped Detector 5 Ped Detector 6
Ped Detector 7 Ped Detector 8
Phase Input Registers:

Phase 1 Hold Phase 2 Hold Phase 3 Hold Phase 4 Hold Phase 5 Hold Phase 6 Hold
Phase 7 Hold Phase 8 Hold Phase 9 Hold Phase 10 Hold Phase 11 Hold Phase 12 Hold
Phase 13 Hold Phase 14 Hold Phase 15 Hold Phase 16 Hold
Phase 1 Omit Phase 2 Omit Phase 3 Omit Phase 4 Omit Phase 5 Omit Phase 6 Omit
Phase 7 Omit Phase 8 Omit Phase 9 Omit Phase 10 Omit Phase 11 Omit Phase 12 Omit
Phase 13 Omit Phase 14 Omit Phase 15 Omit Phase 16 Omit
Phase 1 Ped Omit Phase 2 Ped Omit Phase 3 Ped Omit Phase 4 Ped Omit Phase 5 Ped Omit Phase 6 Ped Omit

Phase 7 Ped Omit Phase 8 Ped Omit Phase 9 Ped Omit Phase 10 Ped Omit Phase 11 Ped Omit Phase 12 Ped Omit
Phase 13 Ped Omit Phase 14 Ped Omit Phase 15 Ped Omit Phase 16 Ped Omit
Ring Input Registers:
Ring 1 Inh Max Term Ring 2 Inh Max Term Ring 3 Inh Max Term Ring 4 Inh Max Term
Ring 1 Ped Recycle Ring 2 Ped Recycle Ring 3 Ped Recycle Ring 4 Ped Recycle
Ring 1 Force Off Ring 2 Force Off Ring 3 Force Off Ring 4 Force Off
Ring 1 Max II Ring 2 Max II Ring 3 Max II Ring 4 Max II
Ring 1 Red Rest Ring 2 Red Rest Ring 3 Red Rest Ring 4 Red Rest
Ring 1 Omit Red Clear Ring 2 Omit Red Clear Ring 3 Omit Red Clear Ring 4 Omit Red Clear
Ring 1 Stop Time Ring 2 Stop Time Ring 3 Stop Time Ring 4 Stop Time
Unit Input Registers:
Indicator Lamp Test Input B Reserved - VM Reserved - NA
Control
Call To Non-Act I Call To Non_Act II External Min Manual Control
Recall Enable
External Start Low Voltage Walk Rest Interval Advance
Modifier
Remote Flash Test Input A Reserved - HC Reserved - FM
(mutcd)
Reserved - TP Offset 1 Offset 2 Offset 3 Offset 1 Falling
Offset 2 Falling Offset 3 Falling Offset 1 Rising Offset 2 Rising Offset 3 Rising
Online Local Flash Conflict Flash Alt Sequence Set Clock Dimming
Free (No Coord) Computer Control Spc Status 1 Spc Status 2 Spc Status 3 Spc Status 4
Spc Status 5 Spc Status 6 Spc Status 7 Spc Status 8 Spc Status 1 Spc Status 2
Falling Falling
Spc Status 3 Falling Spc Status 4 Spc Status 5 Spc Status 6 Falling Spc Status 7 Spc Status 8
Falling Falling Falling Falling
Preempt 1 Preempt 2 Preempt 3 Preempt 4 Preempt 5 Preempt 6

Reserved - PE 7 Reserved - PE 8 Preempt 1 Rising Preempt 2 Rising Preempt 3 Rising Preempt 4 Rising
Preempt 5 Rising Preempt 6 Rising Reserved - PE 7 Reserved - PE 8 Rise Preempt 1 Preempt 2 Falling
Rise Falling
Preempt 3 Falling Preempt 4 Falling Preempt 5 Falling Preempt 6 Falling Reserved - PE 7 Reserved - PE 8
Fall Fall
Reserved - PE Reserved - PR
Address Bit 0 Address Bit 1 Address Bit 2 Address Bit 3 Address Bit 4 Reserved - Addr
Bit 5
Reserved - Addr Bit 6 Reserved - Addr IO Mode Bit A-0 IO Mode Bit B-1 IO Mode Bit C-2 Reserved - IO Bit 3
Bit 7
Reserved - IO Bit 4 Reserved - IO Bit 5 Reserved - IO Bit Reserved - IO Bit 7 Reserved - D Reserved - TX D
6 Conn Sel
TX Diam Sep Int TX Diam Force 4 TX Diam Force 3 Boston Sync Reserved - IPlus
Ph Ph

Note: 'Rising' of 'Falling' registers represent the same input as the one of the same name without these words but are only
TRUE on the appropriate edge of the input transition.

NEMA TS 2 CABINET Page 287
19 NEMA TS 2 PORT 1 PROTOCOL

Each device attached to Port 1 is responsible for transmitting Command Frames
frames. Frames transmitted by the CU are referred to as
Command Frames and frames transmitted by secondary Type Dest. Address Function
stations or other auxiliary equipment are referred to as .
Response Frames. 43 ALL 0-254 Sec Exchange Status (2)
(1) Frame Type 30 is for Diagnostic Purposes.
19.1 COMMAND FRAMES (2) Secondary To Secondary Messaging
19.1.1 Command Frame Timing

The transmission of Port 1 Command Frames is controlled by Each frame type has a defined frequency of transmission. If
the CU. The CU transmits all frame types within a one second the command frames are required to be transmitted, as
window, with the window repeating itself in a cyclical manner determined by CU programming, then the frequency of
every second that the CU is operating. transmission is as shown below.
Command Frames Command Frames and Frequency of

Transmission
Type Dest. Address Function
. Type Frequency Description
0 MMU 16 Load Switch Drivers 0 10x Sec Load Switch Drivers
1 MMU 16 MMU Status 1 10x Sec MMU Status
3 MMU 16 MMU Programming 3 1x Sec MMU Programming
9 ALL 255 Date And Time Broadcast 9 1x Sec Date And Time
Broadcast
10 T#1 0 TF BIU #1 Outputs
10 10x Sec TF BIU #1 Outputs
18 ALL 255 TF BIUs Output Transfer
18 10x Sec TF BIUs Output
20 D#1 8 DET BIU #1 Inputs Transfer
21 D#2 9 DET BIU #2 Inputs 20 10x Sec DET BIU #1 Inputs
24 D#1 8 DET BIU #1 Detector 23 10x Sec DET BIU #4 Inputs
Resets
24 1x Sec DET BIU #1 Detector
25 D#2 9 DET BIU #2 Detector Resets
Resets
Resets
Resets
30 (1) 17 Diagnostic Information Resets
Input
30 1x Sec Diagnostic Information
40 ALL 0-254 Poll for Service (2) Input
41 Reserved 40* 10x Sec Poll for Service (2)
42 ALL 0-254 Sec Destination Message
(2)

* The Type 40 Frame may be replaced by a Type 42 or 43, as

required, during secondary to secondary messaging. Command Frame Scheduling
Win Type Dest Function
19.1.2 Command Frame Input
40* ? Poll for Service
Scheduling
8 Repeat Type 0 to 23 from window 1
The one second window, during which time all frame types is
transmitted, is divided into ten 100 millisecond windows.
The scheduling of the transmission of frames is such that
they are transmitted in the following order in each of the one 40* ? Poll for Service
second windows:
Command Frame Scheduling
* The Type 40 Frame may be replaced by a Type 42 or 43, as
1 9 ALL Date And Time Broadcast required, during secondary to secondary messaging.
0 MMU Load Switch Drivers
1 MMU MMU Status Input 19.2 RESPONSE FRAMES
10 T#1 TF BIU #1 Outputs
11 T#2 TF BIU #2 Outputs
12 T#3 TF BIU #3 Outputs Response frames are only transmitted as a result of receiving
13 T#4 TF BIU #4 Outputs a command frame.
18 ALL TF BIUs Output Transfer Response Frames
20 D#1 DET BIU #1 Inputs Type Source Address Function

.
21 D#2 DET BIU #2 Inputs
128 MMU 16 ACK 0
129 MMU 16 ACK 1 + Data
131 MMU 16 ACK 3 + Data
138 T#1 0 ACK 10 + TF BIU 1 Input
3 MMU MMU Programming
148 D#1 8 ACK 20 + DET BIU 1
24 D#1 DET BIU #1 Detector Resets Input
40* ? Poll for Service 149 D#2 9 ACK 21 + DET BIU 2
4 Repeat Type 0 to 23 from window 1 Input
25 D#2 DET BIU #2 Detector Resets 150 D#3 10 ACK 22 + DET BIU 3
Input
151 D#4 11 ACK 23 + DET BIU 4
5 Repeat Type 0 to 23 from window 1 Input
26 D#3 DET BIU #3 Detector Resets 152 D#1 8 ACK 24 + DET BIU 1 DIAG
40* ? Poll for Service 153 D#2 9 ACK 25 + DET BIU 2 DIAG
6 Repeat Type 0 to 23 from window 1 154 D#3 10 ACK 26 + DET BIU 3 DIAG
27 D#4 DET BIU #4 Detector Resets 155 D#4 11 ACK 27 + DET BIU 4 DIAG
40* ? Poll for Service 158 17 ACK 30 + Data
7 Repeat Type 0 to 23 from window 1 168 ALL 0-254 No Service Required (2)
30 Diagnostic Information 169 ALL 0-254 Sec Source Message (2)

Response Frames Type 0 Command Frame

Type Source Address Function Bit Function
.
22 Channel 7 Green Driver - (Walk)
170 ALL 0-254 Secondary NAK (2)
23 Channel 8 Green Driver +(Walk)
171 ALL 0-254 Secondary ACK (2)
19.3 FRAME FORMATS 25 Channel 9 Green Driver +(Walk)

The detailed formats for the information fields of the frame 28 Channel 10 Green Driver - (Walk)
types summarized above follows:
19.3.1 Type 0 - Load Switch
Drivers 32 Channel 12 Green Driver - (Walk)
Type 0 is the channel driver and load switch flash status
being sent to the MMU.
Type 0 Command Frame
Bit Function
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0 Type 0 Command Frame
5 0
6 0
7 0
41 Channel 1 Yellow Driver +(Pedestrian
8 0 Clear)
42 Channel 1 Yellow Driver -(Pedestrian
9 Channel 1 Green Driver + (walk) Clear)
10 Channel 1 Green Driver - (Walk) 43 Channel 2 Yellow Driver +(Pedestrian

Clear)
12 Channel 2 Green Driver - (Walk) Clear)
13 Channel 3 Green Driver +(Walk) 45 Channel 3 Yellow Driver +(Pedestrian
15 Channel 4 Green Driver +(Walk) 46 Channel 3 Yellow Driver -(Pedestrian

Clear)
Clear)
17 Channel 5 Green Driver +(Walk) 48 Channel 4 Yellow Driver -(Pedestrian

20 Channel 6 Green Driver - (Walk) 49 Channel 5 Yellow Driver +(Pedestrian
Clear)

Type 0 Command Frame Type 0 Command Frame

Bit Function Bit Function
50 Channel 5 Yellow Driver -(Pedestrian 72 Channel 16 Yellow Driver -(Pedestrian
Clear) Clear)
Clear)
73 Channel 1 Red Driver + (Don’t Walk)
74 Channel 1 Red Driver - (Don’t Walk)
Clear)
Clear) 76 Channel 2 Red Driver - (Don’t Walk)
54 Channel 7 Yellow Driver -(Pedestrian 77 Channel 3 Red Driver + (Don’t Walk)
Clear)
Clear) 79 Channel 4 Red Driver + (Don’t Walk)
56 Channel 8 Yellow Driver -(Pedestrian 80 Channel 4 Red Driver - (Don’t Walk)

Clear)

57 Channel 9 Yellow Driver +(Pedestrian 82 Channel 5 Red Driver - (Don’t Walk)
Clear)
59 Channel 10 Yellow Driver +(Pedestrian 85 Channel 7 Red Driver + (Don’t Walk)

Clear)
Clear)
Clear)
Clear)
65 Channel 13 Yellow Driver +(Pedestrian 95 Channel 12 Red Driver + (Don’t Walk)
Clear)
Clear)
Clear)
70 Channel 15 Yellow Driver -(Pedestrian 102 Channel 15 Red Driver - (Don’t Walk)
71 Channel 16 Yellow Driver +(Pedestrian 104 Channel 16 Red Driver - (Don’t Walk)
Clear)

Type 0 Command Frame 19.3.4 Type 9 - Date And Time

Bit Function Broadcast
105 Reserved
Type 9 is a broadcast of the current date / time plus the
106 Reserved defined T&F BIUs and Detector BIUs within it’s programming.
107 Reserved Type 9 Command Frame
108 Reserved Bit Function
109 Reserved 1 1
110 Reserved 2 0
111 Reserved 3 0
112 Load Switch Flash 4 1 Type 9 Command Frame
5 0
19.3.2 Type 1 - MMU Status Input 6 0
Type 1 is a request for load switch output and MMU fault 7 0
status to be returned by the MMU.
8 0
Bit Function
9 Month
1 1
10 Month
2 0
11 Month
3 0
12 Month
13 Reserved
5 0
14 Reserved
6 0
15 Reserved
7 0
16 Reserved
8 0
19.3.3 Type 3 - MMU 17 Day

18 Day
Programming Input
19 Day
Type 3 is a request for MMU programming to be returned by
20 Day
the MMU.
21 Day
22 Reserved
Bit Function
23 Reserved
1 1
24 Reserved
2 1
3 0
25 Year
26 Year
5 0
27 Year
6 0
28 Year
7 0
29 Year
8 0
30 Year
31 Year


32 Reserved 65 TF BIU #1 Present
66 TF BIU #2 Present
33 Hour 67 TF BIU #3 Present
38 Reserved 72 TF BIU #8 Present
39 Reserved
40 Reserved 73 DET BIU #1 Present
74 DET BIU #2 Present
41 Minutes 75 DET BIU #3 Present
47 Reserved
48 Reserved 19.3.5 Type 10 - TF BIU #1 Outputs
Type 10 is control the state of the outputs in T&F BIU #1.
49 Seconds Type 10 Command Frame
50 Seconds Bit Function
51 Seconds 1 0
52 Seconds 2 1
53 Seconds 3 0
54 Seconds 4 1 Type 10 Command Frame
55 Reserved 5 0
56 Reserved 6 0
7 0
57 Tenths of Seconds 8 0
58 Tenths of Seconds
59 Tenths of Seconds 9 Output 1 Load Switch 01 Red +
60 Tenths of Seconds 10 Output 1 Load Switch 01 Red -
61 Reserved 11 Output 2 Load Switch 01 Yellow +
62 Reserved 12 Output 2 Load Switch 01 Yellow -
63 Reserved 13 Output 3 Load Switch 01 Green +
64 Reserved 14 Output 3 Load Switch 01 Green -
15 Output 4 Load Switch 02 Red +


16 Output 4 Load Switch 02 Red - 49 Input / Output 6 Load Switch 07 Green +
50 Input / Output 6 Load Switch 07 Green -
17 Output 5 Load Switch 02 Yellow + 51 Input / Output 7 Load Switch 08 Red +
18 Output 5 Load Switch 02 Yellow - 52 Input / Output 7 Load Switch 08 Red -
19 Output 6 Load Switch 02 Green + 53 Input / Output 8 Load Switch 08 Yellow +
20 Output 6 Load Switch 02 Green - 54 Input / Output 8 Load Switch 08 Yellow -
21 Output 7 Load Switch 03 Red + 55 Input / Output 9 Load Switch 08 Green +
22 Output 7 Load Switch 03 Red - 56 Input / Output 9 Load Switch 08 Green -
23 Output 8 Load Switch 03 Yellow +
24 Output 8 Load Switch 03 Yellow - 57 Input / Output 10 TBC Auxiliary 1
58 Input / Output 11 TBC Auxiliary 2
25 Output 9 Load Switch 03 Green + 59 Input / Output 12 Preempt 1 Status
(*)
26 Output 9 Load Switch 03 Green -
60 Input / Output 13 Preempt 2 Status
(*)
28 Output 10 Load Switch 04 Red -
61 Input / Output 14 Used As Input
30 Output 11 Load Switch 04 Yellow -
31 Output 12 Load Switch 04 Green +

39 Input / Output 1 Load Switch 06 Red +
72 Reserved Reserved
40 Input / Output 1 Load Switch 06 Red -
(*) Preempt Status Outputs may be modified by
Connector Output Mode. ABC Output Mode 13 or
Mode 14 will provide a flashing output on the
41 Input / Output 2 Load Switch 06 Yellow + inactive preempt status output. Ditto the above
42 Input / Output 2 Load Switch 06 Yellow - for D Connector Output Mode 6.
43 Input / Output 3 Load Switch 06 Green +

19.3.6 Type 11 - TF BIU #2 Outputs
45 Input / Output 4 Load Switch 07 Red + Type 11 is control the state of the outputs in T&F BIU #2.
46 Input / Output 4 Load Switch 07 Red - Type 11 Command Frame
47 Input / Output 5 Load Switch 07 Yellow + Bit Function
48 Input / Output 5 Load Switch 07 Yellow - 1 1

2 1


3 0 37 Output 15 Load Switch 13 Green +
4 1 Type 11 Command Frame 38 Output 15 Load Switch 13 Green -
5 0 39 Input / Output 1 Load Switch 14 Red +
6 0 40 Input / Output 1 Load Switch 14 Red -
7 0
8 0 41 Input / Output 2 Load Switch 14 Yellow +
42 Input / Output 2 Load Switch 14 Yellow -
16 Output 4 Load Switch 10 Red - 49 Input / Output 6 Load Switch 15 Green +
24 Output 8 Load Switch 11 Yellow - 57 Input / Output 10 TBC Auxiliary 3
58 Input / Output 11 Free Status
25 Output 9 Load Switch 11 Green + 59 Input / Output 12 Preempt 3 Status
(*)
(*)
29 Output 11 Load Switch 12 Yellow + (*)
30 Output 11 Load Switch 12 Yellow - 62 Input / Output 15 Preempt 6 Status
(*)

68 Input / Output 21 Spare 1


70 Input / Output 23 Spare 3 25 Input / Output 1 Ring 1 Status Bit A
71 Input / Output 24 Spare 4 26 Input / Output 2 Ring 1 Status Bit B
72 Reserved Spare 27 Input / Output 3 Ring 1 Status Bit C
(*) Preempt Status Outputs may be modified by Connector 28 Input / Output 4 Ring 2 Status Bit A
Output Mode. ABC Output Mode 13 or Mode 14 will provide a
29 Input / Output 5 Ring 2 Status Bit B
flashing output on the inactive preempt status output. Ditto
the above for D Connector Output Mode 6. 30 Input / Output 6 Ring 2 Status Bit C
19.3.7 Type 12 - TF BIU #3 Outputs 32 Input / Output 8 Used As Input
Type 12 Command Frame 33 Input / Output 9 Used As Input
Bit Function 34 Input / Output 10 Used As Input
1 0 35 Input / Output 11 Used As Input
4 1 Type 12 Command Frame 38 Input / Output 14 Used As Input
7 0
9 Output 1 Timing Plan A 43 Input / Output 19 Used As Input
10 Output 2 Timing Plan B 44 Input / Output 20 Used As Input
11 Output 3 Timing Plan C 45 Input / Output 21 Used As Input
12 Output 4 Timing Plan D 46 Input / Output 22 Used As Input
13 Output 5 Offset 1 (*) 47 Input / Output 23 Used As Input
14 Output 6 Offset 2 (*) 48 Input / Output 24 Used As Input
15 Output 7 Offset 3 (*) (*) Offset Outputs may be modified by Connector Output
16 Output 8 Automatic Flash Status Mode. ABC Output Mode 12 provides Interrupted Sync Pulses
on the active Offset output. Interrupted Sync Pulses are
provided at intervals equal to 20% and 25% of the cycle on
alternate cycles. Ditto the above for D Connector Output Mode
17 Output 9 System Spec Function 1
5.
19 Output 11 System Spec Function 3 19.3.8 Type 13 - TF BIU #4 Outputs
21 Output 13 Reserved
Bit Function
1 1
2 0


4 1 Type 13 Command Frame 38 Input / Output 14 Used As Input
5 0 39 Input / Output 15 Spare 5
7 0
9 Output 1 Phase 1 Phase On (*) 43 Input / Output 19 Spare 9
10 Output 2 Phase 2 Phase On (*) 44 Input / Output 20 Reserved
15 Output 7 Phase 7 Phase On (*) Outputs may NOT be modified by Connector
Output Mode.
16 Output 8 Phase 8 Phase On (*)
19.3.9 Type 18 - TF BIUs Output

17 Output 9 Phase 1 Phase Next (*)
Transfer
19 Output 11 Phase 3 Phase Next (*) Type 18 is broadcast to indicate to the T&F BIUs it is time to
update their outputs.
Bit Function
1 0
2 1
3 0
25 Input / Output 1 Phase 8 Phase Next (*)
5 1
26 Input / Output 2 Phase 1 Check (*)
6 0
7 0
8 0
30 Input / Output 6 Phase 5 Check (*) 19.3.10 Type 20 - DET BIU #1
Inputs
Type 20 is a request for Vehicle Detector 01-16 activity from
Detector BIU # 1.
33 Input / Output 9 Phase 8 Check (*) Type 20 Command Frame
34 Input / Output 10 Used As Input Bit Function
35 Input / Output 11 Used As Input 1 0
36 Input / Output 12 Used As Input 2 0


Bit Function
3 1
5 1
6 0
7 0
8 0


19.3.11 Types 21 - DET BIU #2 Bit Function
Inputs 5 1
Type 21 is a request for Vehicle Detector 17-32 activity from 6 0

Detector BIU #21. 7 0
Type 21 Command Frame 8 0
Bit Function
1 1 19.3.14 Type 24 - DET BIU #1
2 0 Detector Resets
3 1
Type 24 is Detector 01-16 Resets and a request for Diagnostic
4 0 Type 21 Command Frame Information on Detector 01-16 from Detector BIU #1.
6 0 Bit Function
7 0 1 0
8 0 2 0
3 0
19.3.12 Types 22 - DET BIU #3 4 1 Type 24 Command Frame
Inputs 5 1
Type 22 is a request for Vehicle Detector 33-48 activity from 6 0

Detector BIU # 3. 7 0
Bit Function
1 0 9 Detector Card Slots 1
4 0 Type 22 Command Frame 12 Detector Card Slots 7
5 1 13 Reserved
6 0 14 Reserved
7 0 15 Reserved
8 0 16 Reserved
19.3.13 Types 23 - DET BIU #4 19.3.15 Type 25 - DET BIU #2

Inputs Detector Resets
Type 23 is a request for Vehicle Detector 49-64 activity from Type 25 is Detector 17-32 Resets and a request for Diagnostic
Detector BIU #41. Information on Detector 17-32 from Detector BIU #2.
1 1 1 1
2 1 2 0
3 1 3 0
4 0 Type 23 Command Frame 4 1 Type 25 Command Frame

Type 25 Command Frame 19.3.17 Type 27 - DET BIU #4

Bit Function Detector Resets
5 1
Type 27 is Detector 49-64 Resets and a request for Diagnostic
6 0 Information on Detector 49-64 from Detector BIU #4.
8 0 Bit Function
1 1
9 Detector Card Slots 1 2 1
11 Detector Card Slots 5 4 1 Type 27 Command Frame
13 Reserved 6 0
14 Reserved 7 0
15 Reserved 8 0
16 Reserved
9 Detector Card Slots 1
19.3.16 Type 26 - DET BIU #3 10 Detector Card Slots 3
Detector Resets 11 Detector Card Slots 5
Type 26 is Detector 33-48 Resets and a request for Diagnostic 12 Detector Card Slots 7
Information on Detector 33-48 from Detector BIU #3.
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
Bit Function
15 Reserved
1 0
16 Reserved
2 1
3 0 19.3.18 Type 30 - Diagnostic
4 1 Type 26 Command Frame Information Input
5 1
Type 30 is a request for Diagnostic Information.
6 0
7 0
Bit Function
8 0
1 0
2 1
3 1
5 1
6 0
13 Reserved
7 0
14 Reserved
8 0
15 Reserved
16 Reserved

19.3.19 Type 40 - Poll For Service 19.3.20 Type 42 - Secondary

Type 40 is used to poll the secondary stations for a secondary Destination Message.
to secondary message exchange
Type 42 carries the secondary source message from the
Type 40 Command Frame primary station to the destination address
Bit Function Type 42 Command Frame
1 0 Bit Function
2 0 1 0
3 0 2 1
4 1 Type 40 Command Frame 3 0
5 0 4 1 Type 42 Command Frame
6 1 5 0
7 0 6 1
8 0 7 0
8 0
9 Manufacturer ID - Bit 0
25 Source Address - Bit 0


Type 42 Command Frame Type 128 Response Frame

32 Source Address - Bit 7 3 0
4 0 Type 128 Response Frame
33 Message Data - Bit 1 5 0
~ ~ 6 0
~ ~ 7 0
~ ~ 8 1
288 Message Data - Bit 255
19.2.23 Type 129 - ACK 1 + Data
19.3.21 Type 43 - Secondary Type 129 is the MMU positive acknowledge, with response
Exchange Status. data, for Type 1 frame.
Type 129 Response Frame
Type 43 reports the resulting status of the message exchange
to the original source station Bit Function
Bit Function 2 0
1 1 3 0
2 1 4 0 Type 129 Response Frame
3 0 5 0
4 1 Type 43 Command Frame 6 0
5 0 7 0
6 1 8 1
7 0
8 0 9 Channel 1 Green
10 Channel 2 Green
9 Status Complete 11 Channel 3 Green
10 Destination Address Error 12 Channel 4 Green
11 Manufacturer Id Error 13 Channel 5 Green
12 Destination Timeout 14 Channel 6 Green
13 Reserved 15 Channel 7 Green
15 Reserved
18 Channel 10 Green
19.3.22 Type 128 - ACK 0 19 Channel 11 Green
Type 128 is the MMU positive acknowledge for Type 0 frame. 20 Channel 12 Green
Type 128 Response Frame 21 Channel 13 Green
Bit Function 22 Channel 14 Green

Type 129 Response Frame Type 129 Response Frame

25 Channel 1 Yellow 59 +24 Volt Monitor II (1=fail)
26 Channel 2 Yellow 60 +24 Volt Monitor Inhibit (1=inhibit)
27 Channel 3 Yellow 61 Reset (1=reset)
28 Channel 4 Yellow 62 Red Enable (1=enable)
29 Channel 5 Yellow 63 Reserved
30 Channel 6 Yellow 64 Reserved
31 Channel 7 Yellow
32 Channel 8 Yellow 65 Conflict
66 Red Failure
33 Channel 9 Yellow 67 Spare Bit 1
39 Channel 15 Yellow
40 Channel 16 Yellow 73 MMU Diagnostic Failure
74 Minimum Clearance Failure
41 Channel 1 Red 75 Port 1 Timeout Failure
42 Channel 2 Red 76 Fail (1=failed, Output Relay Transferred)
43 Channel 3 Red 77 Fail (1=failed, Immediate Response To
Failure)
44 Channel 4 Red
78 Reserved
45 Channel 5 Red
79 Reserved
46 Channel 6 Red
80 Reserved
47 Channel 7 Red
48 Channel 8 Red
81 Reserved
82 Reserved
49 Channel 9 Red
83 Reserved
50 Channel 10 Red
84 Reserved
51 Channel 11 Red
85 Reserved
52 Channel 12 Red
86 Reserved
53 Channel 13 Red
87 Reserved
54 Channel 14 Red
88 Reserved
55 Channel 15 Red
56 Channel 16 Red
57 Controller Voltage Monitor (1=fail)

58 +24 Volt Monitor I (1=fail)

19.2.24 Type 131 - ACK 3 + Data Type 131 Response Frame
Type 131 is the MMU positive acknowledge, with response Bit Function
data, for Type 3 frame.
Type 131 Response Frame 33 Channels 2 - 12 Compatibility Status
Bit Function 34 Channels 2 - 13 Compatibility Status
1 1 35 Channels 2 - 14 Compatibility Status
4 0 Type 131 Response Frame 38 Channels 3 - 4 Compatibility Status
7 0
42 Channels 3 - 8 Compatibility Status
9 Channels 1 - 2 Compatibility Status 43 Channels 3 - 9 Compatibility Status


96 Channels 8 - 12 Compatibility Status 129 Channel 1 Min Yellow Change Disable
130 Channel 2 Min Yellow Change Disable


134 Channel 6 Min Yellow Change Disable 168 Reserved
135 Channel 7 Min Yellow Change Disable
136 Channel 8 Min Yellow Change Disable 19.2.25 Type 138 - ACK 10 + TF BIU
1 Input
137 Channel 9 Min Yellow Change Disable Type 138 is the input activity response from T&F BIU #1.
138 Channel 10 Min Yellow Change Disable Type 138 Response Frame
139 Channel 11 Min Yellow Change Disable Bit Function
140 Channel 12 Min Yellow Change Disable 1 0
143 Channel 15 Min Yellow Change Disable 4 1 Type 138 Response Frame
6 0
145 Min. Flash Time 7 0
146 Min. Flash Time 8 1
147 Min. Flash Time
148 Min. Flash Time 9 Input / Output 1 Used As Output
149 24 Volt Latch 10 Input / Output 2 Used As Output
150 CVM/Fault Monitor Latch 11 Input / Output 3 Used As Output
151 Reserved 12 Input / Output 4 Used As Output
14 Input / Output 6 Used As Output
155 Reserved
22 Input / Output 14 Preempt 1
161 Reserved Detector
162 Reserved 23 Input / Output 15 Preempt 2

Detector
163 Reserved
24 Input / Output 16 Test A
164 Reserved
165 Reserved
25 Input / Output 17 Test B
166 Reserved
26 Input / Output 18 Automatic Flash
167 Reserved
27 Input / Output 19 Dimming Enable


28 Input / Output 20 Manual Control
Enable
29 Input / Output 21 Interval Advance
30 Input / Output 22 External Min
Recall
31 Input / Output 23 External Start
32 Input / Output 24 TBC On Line
33 Input 1 Ring 1 Stop Time
34 Input 2 Ring 2 Stop Time
35 Input 3 Ring 1 Max 2 Selection
36 Input 4 Ring 2 Max 2 Selection
37 Input 5 Ring 1 Force Off
38 Input 6 Ring 2 Force Off
39 Input 7 Call To NA I
40 Input 8 Walk Rest Modifier
41 Opto-Input 1 Pedestrian Detector 1
Detector
45 Reserved Detector
46 Reserved 26 Input / Output 18 Preempt 5
Detector
47 Reserved
48 Reserved
Detector
28 Input / Output 20 Call To NA II
19.2.26 Types 139 - ACK 11 + TF BIU
29 Input / Output 21 Spare 1 (R1 Red
2 Input Rest)
Type 139 is the input activity response from T&F BIU #2. 30 Input / Output 22 Spare 2 (R2 Red
Rest)
Bit Function
1 1
2 1
33 Input 1 Ring 1 Inhibit Max Term
3 0
34 Input 2 Ring 2 Inhibit Max Term
35 Input 3 Local Flash Status
5 0
36 Input 4 MMU Flash Status
6 0
37 Input 5 Alarm 1 (Spec Status 1)
7 0
38 Input 6 Alarm 2 (Spec Status 2)
8 1


39 Input 7 Free / No Coordination 19 Input / Output 11 Ring 1
Pedestrian Recycle
40 Input 8 Test C
20 Input / Output 12 Ring 2
Pedestrian Recycle
41 Opto-input 1 Pedestrian Detector 5
21 Input / Output 13 Alternate
42 Opto-input 2 Pedestrian Detector 6 Sequence A
43 Opto-input 3 Pedestrian Detector 7 22 Input / Output 14 Alternate
Sequence B
44 Opto-input 4 Pedestrian Detector 8
23 Input / Output 15 Alternate
45 Reserved Sequence C
46 Reserved 24 Input / Output 16 Alternate
47 Reserved Sequence D
48 Reserved
25 Input / Output 17 Phase 1 Phase
19.2.27 Types 140 - ACK 12 + TF BIU Omit (*)
3 Input Omit (*)
Type 140 is the input activity response from T&F BIU #3. 27 Input / Output 19 Phase 3 Phase
Omit (*)
Bit Function
Omit (*)
1 0
2 0 Omit (*)
3 1 30 Input / Output 22 Phase 6 Phase
Omit (*)
5 0 Omit (*)
6 0 32 Input / Output 24 Phase 8 Phase
7 0 Omit (*)
8 1
33 Input 1 Phase 1 Hold (*)
9 Input / Output 1 Used As Output 34 Input 2 Phase 2 Hold (*)
15 Input / Output 7 Ring 1 Red Rest 40 Input 8 Phase 8 Hold (*)
16 Input / Output 8 Ring 2 Red Rest

41 Opto-input 1 Timing Plan A
17 Input / Output 9 Ring 1 Omit Red Clear 42 Opto-input 2 Timing Plan B
18 Input / Output 10 Ring 2 Omit Red 43 Opto-input 3 Timing Plan C

Clear 44 Opto-input 4 Timing Plan D


45 Reserved
46 Reserved 25 Input / Output 17 Spare 7
Inputs may NOT be modified by Connector Input 28 Input / Output 20 Reserved
Mode.
29 Input / Output 21 Reserved
19.2.28 Types 141 - ACK 13 + TF BIU
4 Input 32 Input / Output 24 Reserved
Type 141 is the input activity response from T&F BIU #4.
Type 141 Response Frame 33 Input 1 Phase 1 Pedestrian Omit (*)
Bit Function 34 Input 2 Phase 2 Pedestrian Omit (*)
1 1 35 Input 3 Phase 3 Pedestrian Omit (*)
4 1 Type 141 Response Frame 38 Input 6 Phase 6 Pedestrian Omit (*)
7 0
8 1 41 Opto-Input 1 Offset 1
42 Opto-Input 2 Offset 2
9 Input / Output 1 Used As Output 43 Opto-Input 3 Offset 3
10 Input / Output 2 Used As Output 44 Opto-Input 4 Spare
11 Input / Output 3 Used As Output 45 Reserved
15 Input / Output 7 Used As Output Inputs may NOT be modified by Connector Input
16 Input / Output 8 Used As Output Mode.

19.2.29 Type 148 - ACK 20 + DET
18 Input / Output 10 Address Bit 0 BIU 1 Input
19 Input / Output 11 Address Bit 1 Type 148 is the detector activity response from Detector BIU
#1 for detectors 01 - 16.
20 Input / Output 12 Address Bit 2
Bit Function
1 0
2 0
3 1


4 0 Type 148 Response Frame 38 Detector 2 Time Stamp Bit 13
5 1 39 Detector 2 Time Stamp Bit 14
7 0
42 Detector 3 Time Stamp Bit 1
9 Detector 1 Time Stamp Bit 0 43 Detector 3 Time Stamp Bit 2






232 Detector 14 Time Stamp Bit 15 265 Detector 1 Call Status Bit 0
266 Detector 2 Call Status Bit 0

Type 148 Response Frame 19.2.32 Type 151 - ACK 23 + DET

Bit Function BIU 4 Input
Type 151 is the detector activity response from Detector BIU
275 Detector 11 Call Status Bit 0 #4 for detectors 49 - 64. This frame type is identical to Type
148 except that the frame type number and address.
19.2.33 Type 152 - ACK 24 + DET
BIU 1 Diagnostic
280 Detector 16 Call Status Bit 0 Type 152 is the diagnostic response from Detector BIU #1 for
detectors 01 - 16.
Bit Function
1 0
2 0
3 0
5 1
6 0
7 0
8 1
9 Detector 1 - Watchdog Failure
10 Detector 1 - Open Loop
11 Detector 1 - Shorted Loop
12 Detector 1 - Excessive Change In
294 Detector 14 Call Status Bit 1 Inductance
295 Detector 15 Call Status Bit 1 13 Detector 1 - Bit 4 (Reserved)
296 Detector 16 Call Status Bit 1 14 Detector 1 - Bit 5 (Reserved)
15 Detector 1 - Bit 6 (Reserved)
19.2.30 Type 149 - ACK 21 + DET 16 Detector 1 - Bit 7 (Reserved)
BIU 2 Input
Type 149 is the detector activity response from Detector BIU 17 Detector 2 - Watchdog Failure
#2 for detectors 17 - 32. This frame type is identical to Type
18 Detector 2 - Open Loop
148 except that the frame type number and address.
19 Detector 2 - Shorted Loop
19.2.31 Type 150 - ACK 22 + DET 20 Detector 2 - Excessive Change In

Inductance
BIU 3 Input 21 Detector 2 - Bit 4 (Reserved)
Type 150 is the detector activity response from Detector BIU 22 Detector 2 - Bit 5 (Reserved)
#3 for detectors 33 - 48. This frame type is identical to Type
148 except that the frame type number and address. 23 Detector 2 - Bit 6 (Reserved)


25 Detector 3 - Watchdog Failure 57 Detector 7 - Watchdog Failure
26 Detector 3 - Open Loop 58 Detector 7 - Open Loop
27 Detector 3 - Shorted Loop 59 Detector 7 - Shorted Loop
28 Detector 3 - Excessive Change In 60 Detector 7 - Excessive Change In
Inductance Inductance
29 Detector 3 - Bit 4 (Reserved) 61 Detector 7 - Bit 4 (Reserved)






101 Detector 12 - Bit 4 (Reserved)2 133 Detector 16 - Bit 4 (Reserved)
105 Detector 13 - Watchdog Failure 19.3.34 Types 153 - ACK 25 + DET

106 Detector 13 - Open Loop BIU 2 Diagnostic
107 Detector 13 - Shorted Loop Type 153 is the diagnostic response from Detector BIU #2 for
108 Detector 13 - Excessive Change In detectors 17 - 32. This frame type is identical to Type 152
Inductance except that the frame type number and address.

19.3.35 Types 154 - ACK 26 + DET
BIU 3 Diagnostic
112 Detector 13 - Bit 7 (Reserved) Type 154 is the diagnostic response from Detector BIU #3 for
detectors 33 - 48. This frame type is identical to Type 152
except that the frame type number and address.
113 Detector 14 - Watchdog Failure
114 Detector 14 - Open Loop 19.3.36 Types 155 - ACK 27 + DET
115 Detector 14 - Shorted Loop BIU 4 Diagnostic
116 Detector 14 - Excessive Change In
Type 154 is the diagnostic response from Detector BIU #4 for
Inductance
detectors 49 - 64. This frame type is identical to Type 152
117 Detector 14 - Bit 4 (Reserved) except that the frame type number and address.


19.3.37 Type 158 - ACK 30 + Data Type 158 Response Frame
Bits 09-48 of this frame function identically to bits 09-48 of Bit Function
Type 138 Frame from TF BIU #1 and the CU acts on them in 182 Detector Call #14
an identical manner.
183 Detector Call #15
Bits 49-88 of this frame function identically to bits 09-48 of
Bits 89-128 of this frame function identically to bits 09-48 of 185 Detector Call #17
Type 140 Frame from TF BIU #3 and the CU acts on them in
an identical manner. 186 Detector Call #18
Bits 129-168 of this frame function identically to bits 09-48 of 187 Detector Call #19
The CU logically Ors all bits received in this frame with those
received in other frames prior to acting on them. 190 Detector Call #22
Type 158 is the diagnostic response to Frame 30. 191 Detector Call #23
Type 158 Response Frame 192 Detector Call #24
Bit Function
1 0 193 Detector Call #25
4 1 Type 158 Response Frame 196 Detector Call #28
9-168 See Text Above




19.3.38 Type 168 - No Service Bit Function
Required 18 Manufacturer Id - Bit 9
Type 168 is the response to a Type 40 frame when the 19 Manufacturer Id - Bit 10
secondary station does not have a message to exchange. 20 Manufacturer Id - Bit 11
Type 168 Response Frame 21 Manufacturer Id - Bit 12
Bit Function 22 Manufacturer Id - Bit 13
1 0 23 Manufacturer Id - Bit 14
2 0 24 Manufacturer Id - Bit 15
3 0
4 1 Type 168 Response Frame 25 Destination Address - Bit 0
5 0 26 Destination Address - Bit 1
30 Destination Address - Bit 5
19.3.39 Type 169 - Sec Source
31 Destination Address - Bit 6
Message 32 Destination Address - Bit 7
Type 169 is the response to a Type 40 frame when the
secondary station has a message to exchange.
~~~
Bit Function
~~~
1 1
~~~
2 0
3 0
4 1 Type 169 Response Frame 19.3.40 Type 170 - Secondary NAK
5 0
Type 170 is the Negative acknowledge for a Type 42 frame if
6 1 the frame has been correctly received and the destination
7 0 station determines the manufacturer specific ID number is
not valid.
8 1
Bit Function
9 Manufacturer Id - Bit 0
1 0
2 1
3 0
5 0
6 1
7 0
8 1

19.3.41 Type 171 - Secondary ACK

Type 171 is the Positive acknowledge for a Type 42 or 43
frame if the frame has been correctly received from the
primary station.
Bit Function
1 1
2 1
3 0
5 0
6 1
7 0
8 1

2070 ATC in ITS v1 CABINET Page 319
20 ITS v1 CABINET
An ITS v1 Cabinet is a serially interconnected cabinet for use Chn # LS # FUNCTION
with the 2070 ATC.
7 7 Phase 5 Vehicle
8 8 Phase 6 Vehicle
20.1 ITS v1 CABINET 9 9 Phase 6 Pedestrian
COMPONENTS 10 10 Phase 7 Vehicle
11 11 Phase 8 Vehicle
12 12 Phase 8 Pedestrian
The ITS Cabinet Serial Bus # 1 provides the cabinet control 13-28 13-28 Not Assigned in Default
and communication path between the 2070 ATC, CMU Data
Monitor Unit and SIU (Serial Interface) Units in the Input &
Output Assemblies. The Eagle EPAC300 Software obtains the following input
functions from the first (smallest position number) OA in an
ITS Cabinet:
20.1.1 Monitoring System OPTO FUNCTION
The ITS Cabinet Monitor Unit utilizes a serial memory device 1 Manual Control Enable
to store all the configuration parameters for the monitor
system and is completely removable and interchangeable. 2 Interval Advance
The EDI MonitorKey CMU Data Key Programming Tool 3 Stop Timing
provides the hardware programming interface between a
4 Local Flash Status
Personal Computer (PC) and the serial memory device. This
tool connects to a serial port of the PC and uses software to When the ITS Cabinet does NOT include an OA, these
read, write, and verify the contents of the serial memory functions are provided by the first Input Assembly.
device. Software Wizards provide simplified initial setup of
the parameter database as well as check for data consistency The Eagle EPAC300 Software provides for combinations of
errors. Output Assemblies ONLY as follows:
20.1.2 Output Assemblies 20.1.2.1 Output Form 1 (14-0-0-0)

This output form consists of:
An ITS Cabinet Output Assembly (OA) handles the switching
(1) 14-pack output assembly ( pos #1 – addr 01).
of 120 VAC power to the signal heads. The OA comes in two
versions, one accommodates 6 switch packs and one
accommodates 14 switch packs. The OA also has an SIU and
AMU (Auxiliary Monitor Unit). The OA includes provisions for
managing cabinet flash with Flash Transfer Relays and flash
configuration jumpers. The ITS Cabinet may include one or
the other or a combination of one or more of each
configuration.
The default ITSv1 data for assignment is noted above in the
‘Default’ column. ‘NA’ in the ‘Default’ column denotes that
the detector input is NOT ASSIGNED by the default data.
Chn # LS # FUNCTION
Channel ## = Load Switch ##
1 1 Phase 1 Vehicle
Note: The 14-Pack Output Assembly does not provide a Flash
2 2 Phase 2 Vehicle
Relay for Load Switch positions 13 & 14. Also, ‘position
3 3 Phase 2 Pedestrian number’ is logical rather than physical.
4 4 Phase 3 Vehicle
5 5 Phase 4 Vehicle
6 6 Phase 4 Pedestrian

Page 320 2070 ATC in ITS v1 CABINET
20.1.2.2 Output Form 2 (14-0-14-0) Note: The 14-Pack Output Assembly does not provide a Flash
Relay for Load Switch positions 13 & 14.
(1) 14-pack output assembly ( pos #1 – addr 01)
(1) 14-pack output assembly ( pos #3 – addr 03) 20.1.2.4 Output Form 4 (14-0-6-6)

Note: The 14-Pack Output Assemblies do not provide a Flash
Relay for Load Switch positions 13, 14, 27 & 28.
20.1.2.3 Output Form 3 (14-0-6-0)

(1) 14-pack output assembly ( pos #1 – addr 01) Note: The 14-Pack Output Assembly does not provide a Flash
(1) 6-pack output assembly ( pos #3 – addr 07) Relay for Load Switch positions 13 & 14.
20.1.2.5 Output Form 5 (6-0-0-0)

20.1.2.6 Output Form 6 (6-6-0-0)


20.1.2.8 Output Form 8 (6-6-6-6)

20.1.2.7 Output Form 7 (6-6-6-0)

20.1.2.9 Output Form 9 (6-0-14-0)


Relay for Load Switch positions 19 & 20.
20.1.2.10 Output Form 10 (6-6-14-0)


Input Slot Description Default

10 5W Vehicle Detector 10 Phs 4v
11 6F Vehicle Detector 11 Phs 4v
15 8F Vehicle Detector 15 NA
16 8W Vehicle Detector 16 NA
Relay for Load Switch positions 25 & 26. 22 11W Vehicle Detector 22 NA
23 12F Pedestrian Detector 2 Phs 2p
20.1.3 Input Assemblies 24 12W Pedestrian Detector 4 Phs 4p
An ITS Cabinet Input Assembly provides 12 slots for input The Eagle EPAC300 Software includes the capability to assign
cards (detectors or isolators). Each input card provides two detector inputs as vehicle or pedestrian, and to any of the 16
inputs. The ITS Cabinet may include one to five of these phases, allows the flexibility for all Input Assemblies to
assemblies. provide detection as needed. The default ITSv1 data for
assignment is noted above in the ‘Default’ column. ‘NA’ in the
The Eagle EPAC300 Software provides functionality for each
‘Default’ column denotes that the detector input is NOT
Input Assemblies as follows:
ASSIGNED by the default data.
When the ITS Cabinet does NOT include an Output Assembly
20.1.3.1 Input Assembly 1 and this is the first (lowest address) Input Assembly used, the
This input assembly utilizes address 9. Eagle EPAC300 Software obtains the following input
functions via the Opto Inputs of the SIU:
OPTO FUNCTION
1 Manual Control Enable
2 Interval Advance
3 Stop Timing
The Eagle EPAC300 Software provides functionality for this 4 Local Flash Status
Input Assembly as follows:
When the ITS Cabinet does include an Output Assembly, the
Input Slot Description Default status of these Optos is not currently used by the Eagle
EPAC300 Software.
20.1.3.2 Input Assembly 2
This Input Assembly utilizes address A.

The Eagle EPAC300 Software provides functionality for this 20.1.3.3 Input Assembly 3
This input assembly utilizes address B.
5 3F Vehicle Detector 27 Phs 6v The Eagle EPAC300 Software provides functionality for this
21 11F Preempt 1 ---
22 11W Alarm 1 ---
23 12F Pedestrian Detector Phs 6p
6 17 9F Vehicle Detector 59 NA
24 12W Pedestrian Detector Phs 6p 18 9W Vehicle Detector 60 NA
8
and this is the first (lowest address) Input Assembly used, the
Eagle EPAC300 Software obtains the following input 21 11F Vehicle Detector 63 NA
OPTO FUNCTION
23 12F Preempt 2 ---
24 12W Alarm 2 ---
2 Interval Advance
3 Stop Timing and this is the first (lowest address) Input Assembly used, the
Eagle The The EPAC300 Software obtains the following input
OPTO FUNCTION
status of these Optos is not currently used by the Eagle
EPAC300 Software. 1 Manual Control Enable
2 Interval Advance

OPTO FUNCTION Input Slot Description Default

3 Stop Timing 20 10W Not Used ---
4 Local Flash Status 21 11F Preempt 3 ---
When the ITS Cabinet does include an Output Assembly, the 22 11W Preempt 4 ---
EPAC300 Software. 23 12F Alarm 3 ---
24 12W Alarm 4 ---
20.1.3.4 Input Assembly 4 When the ITS Cabinet does NOT include an Output Assembly
This input assembly utilizes address C. Eagle EPAC300 Software obtains the following input
OPTO FUNCTION
2 Interval Advance
3 Stop Timing
The Eagle EPAC300 Software provides functionality for this
1 1F Special Detector 1 NA EPAC300 Software.
2 1W Special Detector 2 NA
3 2F Special Detector 3 NA
9 5F Pedestrian Detector NA
1
10 5W Pedestrian Detector Phs 2p
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
17 9F Not Used ---
18 9W Not Used ---
19 10F Not Used ---

20.1.3.5 Input Assembly 5

OPTO FUNCTION
This input assembly utilizes address D.
3 Stop Timing
EPAC300 Software.
Eagle EPAC300 Software provides functionality for this Input

Assembly as follows:
20.2 ITS v1 CABINET PROTOCOL
1 1F Not Used NA
In an ITS v1 Cabinet, the Controller Unit (CU) utilizes Serial
2 1W Not Used NA Bus 1 (SB1) to communicate to devices within the cabinet.
3 2F Not Used NA These devices include Serial Interface Units (SIU), Conflict
Monitor Units (CMU), etc.
4 2W Not Used NA
5 3F Not Used NA
6 3W Not Used NA
7 4F Not Used NA
8 4W Not Used NA
9 5F Not Used NA
10 5W Not Used NA
11 6F Not Used NA
12 6W Not Used NA
13 7F Not Used NA
14 7W Not Used NA
15 8F Not Used NA
16 8W Not Used NA
17 9F Not Used NA
18 9W Not Used NA
19 10F Not Used NA
20 10W Not Used NA
21 11F Not Used NA
22 11W Not Used NA
23 12F Not Used NA
24 12W Not Used NA
Eagle EPAC300 Software obtains the following input
OPTO FUNCTION
2 Interval Advance

Command Frames
The following Address Frame numbers are assigned to the
assemblies and monitor as: Type Dest. Address Function
.
Address
System Assy / Unit 49 Module Status
- A7 A0
50 MC Management
Reserved 00 0000 0000
51 Configure Inputs
14-Pack Output Assy Pos 01 0000 0001
52 Raw Input Data
#1
53 Filtered Input Data
Reserved 02 0000 0010
54 Input Transition Buffer
14-Pack Output Assy Pos 03 0000 0011
#3 55 Set Outputs
06-Pack Output Assy Pos 04 0000 0100 56 Configure Input
#4 Tracking
06-Pack Output Assy Pos 05 0000 0101 57 Configure Complex

#1 Output
06-Pack Output Assy Pos 06 0000 0110 58 Reserved

#2 59 Reserved
06-Pack Output Assy Pos 07 0000 0111 60 Module ID
#3
61 Switch Pack Drivers
Reserved 08 0000 1000
62 Set FSA
Input Assy #1 09 0000 1001
63 -- -- Poll Vari Length Raw
Input Assy #2 10 0000 1010 Input
Input Assy #3 11 0000 1011 64 -- -- Command Vari Length
Outputs
Input Assy #4 12 0000 1100
65 Get CMU Configuration
Input Assy #5 13 0000 1101
66 All 255 Time And Date
Reserved 14 0000 1110
67 Switch Pack Drivers
Cabinet Monitor Unit 15 0000 1111
Reserved 16 0001 0000
20.2.1.1 Command Frame Timing
Reserved 17 0001 0001
Each frame type has a defined frequency of transmission. If
Reserved 18 0001 0010 the command frames are required to be transmitted, as
determined by CU programming, then the frequency of
2070 CPU 19 0001 0011
transmission is as shown below.
2070 FI/O 20 0001 0100
Command Frames and Frequency of
Addresses 21-254 are Reserved Transmission
Broadcast To ALL 255 1111 1111 Type Frequency Description
Each device attached to SB1 is responsible for transmitting 49 Module Status

50 MC Management
Command Frames and frames transmitted by devices within
the cabinet are referred to as Response Frames. 51 Configure Inputs
52 Poll Raw Input Data
20.2.1 COMMAND FRAMES 53 Poll Filtered Input Data
The transmission of SB1 Command Frames is controlled by 54 Poll Input Transition
the CU. The CU transmits all frame types within a one second Buffer
window, with the window repeating itself in a cyclical manner
every second that the CU is operating. 55 Set Outputs
56 Configure Input

Command Frames and Frequency of Command Frame Scheduling

Transmission
Type Frequency Description
6 Repeat xx to yy from window 1
Tracking Func
57 Configure Complex
Output Func 8 Repeat xx to yy from window 1
58 --- Reserved 9 Repeat xx to yy from window 1
59 --- Reserved 10 Repeat xx to yy from window 1
60 Module ID
61 Switch Pack Drivers 20.2.2 RESPONSE FRAMES
62 Set FSA Response frames are only transmitted as a result of receiving
a command frame.
63 Poll Vari Length Raw
Inputs Response Frames
64 Command Vari Length Type Source Address Function
Outputs .
65 Get CMU Configuration 177 Ack 49 –Module Status
66 1x Sec Time And Date 178 Ack 50 - MC Management
67 Switch Pack Drivers 179 Ack 51 - Configure Inputs
180 Ack 52 - Raw Input Data
20.2.1.2 Command Frame Scheduling
181 Ack 53 - Filtered Input Data
182 Ack 54 - Input Transition
Buffer
183 Ack 55 - Set Outputs
they are transmitted in the following order in each of the one
second windows: 184 Ack 56 - Config Input
Tracking
185 Ack 57 - Config Complex
Win Type Dest Function Outputs
1 66 ALL Date And Time 186 Ack 58 - Reserved
Broadcast
187 Ack 59 - Reserved
188 Ack 60 - Module ID
189 Ack 61 - CMU Status
190 Ack 62 - Set FSA
191 Ack 63 -Reserved
192 Ack 64 -Reserved
193 Ack 65 - CMU Configuration
194 --- --- Not Used
195 Ack 67 - CMU Short Status

20.2.3 Serial Bus #1 Frames
The detailed formats for the information fields of the frame
5 Repeat xx to yy from window 1 types summarized above follows:

20.2.3.1 Type 49 – Module Status Each of the System Status bits shall be individually reset by a
'1' in the corresponding bit of any subsequent Request
This command frame is sent when Module Status is needed. Module Status frame, and the response frame shall report the
Byt Contents Description current status bits. The SCC error count bytes shall not be
e reset. When a count rolls over (255 - 0), its corresponding
roll-over flag shall be set.
1 49 Frame Type
2 Reset Reset System Status Bits: 20.2.3.3 Type 50 – MC Management
Status
Bit 7 – SIU Hardware Reset This frame is used to set the value of the Millisecond Counter.
Bit 6 –Communications Loss > 2 Byt Contents Description
sec e
Bit 5 – Not Used 1 50 Frame Type
Bit 4 –SCC RX Error Count roll over
2 New MSB New MC Timestamp MSB
Bit 3 –SCC TX Error Count roll over
3 New NMSB New MC Timestamp NMSB
Bit 2 –MC Interrupt Error
4 New NLSB New MC Timestamp NLSB
Bit 1 –Linesync Error
5 New LSB New MC Timestamp LSB
Bit 0 –SIU Watchdog Reset
A '1' in a Reset System Status bit will reset the respective 20.2.3.4 Type 178 – MC Management
status, and the response frame will report the current status.
The SCC error count bytes do not reset. When a count rolls This frame is the ACK for a Type 50 Command Frame.
over (255 - 0), the corresponding roll-over bit is set.
Byt Contents Description
e
20.2.3.2 Type 177 – Module Status 1 178 Frame Type
This frame is the ACK for a Type 49 Command Frame. 2 Status Status Bits
Byte Contents Description Bit 7-1 = Not Used
1 177 Frame Type Bit 0 = Status
2 System Status System Status Bits: The Status bit returns a '0' on completion or '1' on error. The
Bit 7 = SIU Hardware Reset 32-bit value is loaded into the Millisecond Counter at the next
0-1 transition of the LINESYNC signal.
Bit 6 = Communications Loss > 2
sec
20.2.3.5 Type 51 – Configure Inputs
Bit 5 = Not Used
This frame is used to change input configurations.
Bit 4 = SCC RX Error Count roll over
Bit 3 = SCC TX Error Count roll over e
Bit 2 = MC Interrupt Error
1 51 Frame Type
Bit 1 = Linesync Error
2 Number of Number of Items following
Bit 0 = SIU Watchdog Reset Items
3 Receive Errors SCC Receive Error Count 3 Input # Input Number
4 Transmit Errors SCC Transmit Error Count Bit 7 = Ignore Input Flag.
1 = do not report
5 Timestamp MC Timestamp MSB 0 = report transitions for input
MSB
Bit 6-0 = Input # (I0-I59)
6 Timestamp MC Timestamp NMSB
NMSB 4 Leading Filter Leading Edge Filter
7 Timestamp MC Timestamp NLSB Specifies the number of

NLSB consecutive input samples which
must be "0" before the input is
8 Timestamp LSB MC Timestamp LSB considered to have entered to "0"
state from "1" state (range 1 to

255, 0 = disabled)
13 MC Time LSB MC Timestamp LSB
5 Trailing Filter Trailing Edge Filter
The Input bit returns a '0' for not active or '1' for active.
Specifies the number of
consecutive input samples which
must be "1" before the input is 20.2.3.9 Type 53 –Filtered Input Data
considered to have entered to "1" This frame is used to poll SIUs for the current filtered status
state from "0" state (range 1 to of all inputs.
255, 0 = disabled)
Repeat Bytes 3-4-5 for each Item e
1 53 Frame Type
20.2.3.6 Type 179 – Configure Inputs

20.2.3.10 Type 181 –Filtered Input Data
This frame is the ACK for a Type 51 Command Frame.
e
e
1 179 Frame Type
1 181 Frame Type
2 Status Status Bits
2 Inputs I7-I0 Inputs I7(msb)-I0(lsb)
Bit 7-1 = Not Used
Bit 0 = Status
4 Inputs I23- Inputs I23(msb)-I16(lsb)
The Status bit returns a '0' on completion or '1' on error. I16
20.2.3.7 Type 52 –Raw Input Data I24
This frame is used to poll SIUs for the current unfiltered 6 Inputs I39- Inputs I39(msb)-I32(lsb)
status of all inputs. I32
Byt Contents Description 7 Inputs I47- Inputs I47(msb)-I40(lsb)

e I40
1 52 Frame Type 8 Inputs I55- Inputs I55(msb)-I48(lsb)

I48
20.2.3.8 Type 180 –Raw Input Data
I56
10 MC Time MSB MC Timestamp MSB
11 MC Time MC Timestamp NMSB
e
NMSB
1 180 Frame Type
12 MC Time MC Timestamp NLSB
2 Inputs I7-I0 Inputs I7(msb)-I0(lsb) NLSB
3 Inputs I15-I8 Inputs I15(msb)-I8(lsb) 13 MC Time LSB MC Timestamp LSB
4 Inputs I23-I16 Inputs I23(msb)-I16(lsb) The Input bit returns a '0' for not active or '1' for active. Raw
input data is provided for inputs that are not configured for
5 Inputs I31-I24 Inputs I31(msb)-I24(lsb) filtering.
7 Inputs I47-I40 Inputs I47(msb)-I40(lsb) 20.2.3.11 Type 54 –Input Transition Buffer
8 Inputs I55-I48 Inputs I55(msb)-I48(lsb) This frame is used to poll SIUs for the contents of the input
transition buffer.
10 MC Time MSB MC Timestamp MSB e
11 MC Time NMSB MC Timestamp NMSB 1 54 Frame Type
12 MC Time NLSB MC Timestamp NLSB

20.2.3.13 Type 55 – Set Outputs

2 Block Block Number
Number This frame is used to command SIUs to set the Outputs
according to the data in the frame.
The Block Number is a monotonically increasing number
incremented after each command issued by the Controller Byt Contents Description
Unit. e
1 55 Frame Type
20.2.3.12 Type 182 –Input Transition Buffer
2 Output O7-O0 Output O7(msb)-O0(lsb) Data
3 Output O15-O8 Output O15(msb)-O8(lsb) Data
4 Output O23- Output O23(msb)-O16(lsb) Data
e
O16
1 182 Frame Type
2 Block Block Number O24
Number
3 Number of Number of Items to follow O32
Items
4 Item # Item # plus state: O40
Bit 7 = State of the Input after 8 Output O55- Output O55(msb)-O48(lsb) Data
the transition: O48
1 = active
0 = Not Active
O56
Bit 6-0 = Input # (I0-I59)
10 Output O7-O0 Output O7(msb)-O0(lsb) Control
5 MC Time MC Time NLSB
NLSB 11 Output O15-O8 Output O15(msb)-O8(lsb)
Control
6 MC Time MC Time LSB
LSB 12 Output O23- Output O23(msb)-O16(lsb)
O16 Control
7 Status Status
13 Output O31- Output O31(msb)-O24(lsb)
Bit 7-4 = Not Used (=0) O24 Control
Bit 3 = 255 entry buffer limit 14 Output O39- Output O39(msb)-O32(lsb)
exceeded O32 Control
Bit 2 = 1024 buffer limit 15 Output O47- Output O47(msb)-O40(lsb)
exceeded O40 Control
Bit 1 = Same block # 16 Output O55- Output O55(msb)-O48(lsb)
requested O48 Control
Bit 0 = Block # is out of 17 Output O59- Output O59(msb)-O56(lsb)
sequence O56 Control
8 MC Time MC Timestamp MSB
MSB
20.2.3.14 Type 183 – Set Outputs
9 MC Time MC Timestamp NMSB
NMSB
e
NLSB
1 183 Frame Type
11 MC Time MC Timestamp LSB
LSB 2 Status Status Bits
Repeat Bytes 4-11 for each Item Bit 7-2 = Not Used
Each detected state transition for each active input is placed Bit 1 = Linesync Lost
in the queue as it occurs.
Bit 0 = Error In Setting
Output

Each Status bit returns a '0' for no error or '1' for error. 20.2.3.17 Type 57 – Configure Complex
Output
20.2.3.15 Type 56 – Configure Input This frame is used to configure the definition for an output
Tracking that provides a complex operation. The maximum number of
active definitions is 8.
This frame is used to configure the definition for an output
that responds to transitions on a particular input. The Byt Contents Description
maximum number of active definitions is 8. e
Byte Contents Description 1 56 Frame Type
1 56 Frame Type 2 Number Of Number of Items: 0-16

Items
2 Number Of Number of Items: 0-16 Complex Output Definitions in
Items message
Tracking Definitions in this
message. 3 Output # Output #
3 Output # Output # Bit 7 = Not Used (=0)
Bit 7 = Enable Input Tracking: Bit 6-0 = Output # (O0-O54)

1 = Enable
4 Pri Duration Primary Duration MSB
0 = Remove
MSB
Bit 6-0 = Output # (O0-O54)
5 Pri Duration Primary Duration LSB
4 Input # Input # LSB
Bit 7 = Tracking: 6 Sec Duration Secondary Duration MSB
1 = Output OFF = Input ON MSB
0 = Output ON = Input ON
7 Sec Duration Secondary Duration LSB
Bit 6-0 = Input # (I0-I59) LSB
Repeat bytes 3 & 4 for each item 8 Input # Input #
Bit 7 = Not Used (=0)
20.2.3.16 Type 184 - Configure Input Bit 6-0 = Input # (I0-I59)
Tracking
9 Field Definition Field Definition:
Bit 7=
Byt Contents Description 1 – Output configured for
e single-pulse operation.
1 184 Frame Type 0 – Output configured for
continuous oscillation
Bit 6=
Bit 7-1 = Not Used (=0) 1 – Triggered by the specific
input.
Bit 0 = Status
0 –Begins within 2 mSec of
3 MC Time MC Timestamp MSB command.
MSB
Bit 5=
4 MC Time MC Timestamp NMSB 1 – Gated active by the
NMSB specific input.
0 – Gating is inactive.
NLSB Bit 4=
1 – Enable complex output
6 MC Time MC Timestamp LSB function for this output.
LSB 0 – Remove complex output
The Status bit returns a '0' for NO error or '1' when the function for this output
maximum number of configurable outputs will be exceeded. Bit 3=
1 – During Primary = logic 1
during Secondary = 0.
0 – During Primary = logic 0
during Secondary = 1.

Bit 2= 1 60 Frame Type

1 – Trigger or gate derived
from filtered input.
0 – Trigger or gate derived 20.2.3.20 Type 188 – Module ID
from raw input.
Bit 1 =
1 - Triggered outputs shall be
e
triggered by an On-to-Off
transition of the specified 1 188 Frame Type
input and shall be
triggered immediately 2 SB1 Address Serial Bus #1 Address
upon command receipt if
the input is Off. Gated
20.2.3.21 Type 61 – Switch Pack Drivers
outputs shall be active
while the input is Off. The destination of this frame is the CMU. The Channel
0 – Triggered outputs shall numbers in the Contents column below refer to the channel
be triggered by an Off-to- numbers of the CMU. The Eagle EPAC includes program
On transition of the entries, of the CMU Channel to CU signal driver group
specified input and shall utilization. The Dark Channel Map Select Bits shall select a
be triggered immediately preprogrammed mask in the CMU DATAKEY that disables
upon command receipt if Lack of Signal Input monitoring for the selected channels.
the input is On. Gated
outputs shall be active Byte Contents Description
while the input is On. 1 61 Frame Type
Bit 0 = 2 Chn 8:1 Red Load Switch Status
1 – Linesync based clock used A bit set to 1 indicates
for time ticks. the Load Switch output is set On.
0 – MC used for time ticks.
3 Chn 16:9 Red
Repeat bytes 3-9 for each item.
4 Chn 24:17
Red
20.2.3.18 Type 185 - Configure Complex
Output 5 Chn 28:25
Red
6 Chn 8:1 Yel
e 7 Chn 16:9 Yel
1 185 Frame Type 8 Chn 24:17

Yel
Bit 7-1 = Not Used (=0) 9 Chn 28:25
Bit 0 = Status Yel
3 MC Time MSB MC Timestamp MSB 10 Chn 8:1 Grn
4 MC Time MC Timestamp NMSB 11 Chn 16:9 Grn

NMSB 12 Chn 24:17
5 MC Time MC Timestamp NLSB Grn
NLSB 13 Chn 28:25
6 MC Time LSB MC Timestamp LSB Grn
The Status bit returns a '0' for NO error or '1' when the 14 Map Select Dark Channel Map Select
maximum number of configurable outputs will be exceeded. Bits 7-2 Reserved
Bits1-0 Select Dark Chn Map
00 = Mask #1
20.2.3.19 Type 60 – Module ID 01 = Mask #2
10 = Mask #3
The destination of this frame is the CMU. 11 = Mask #4
e

Dark Channel Maps are programmed in the serial memory

key which disables Lack of Signal Input monitoring for a Byte Contents Description
selected channel. 3 Chn Fault 8:1 Channel Fault Status
4 Chn Fault 16:9 Channel Fault Status bits
20.2.3.22 Type 189 – CMU Status shall be set to 1 for channels
5 Chn Fault 24:17 that were detected in fault for
If the CMU is in Failed State Action (byte #2, Fault Type not fault types 03, 09, 10, 11, 12,
equal to 0), then all bytes of the information field of this 6 Chn Fault 32:25
13, and 14.
frame except Control Status 1, Control Status 2, and Output
Assembly Flasher Status shall contain an exact image of the For fault type 01, 05, and 20 a
signals that were applied to the CMU at the point in time of bit shall be set in Channel
the detection of the failure. Control Status 1, Control Status 2, Fault Status 8:1 for each
and Output Assembly Flasher Status shall always reflect enabled AMU that failed. Bit 0
current status. If a channel block is not used (AMU not shall be set if the CMU
present) the Channel Fault Status bits, Channel Input Status detected a failure:
bits, and Channel Input Voltage values bits for that block
b0 = CMU
shall be set to 0.
b1 = AMU #1
Byte Contents Description
b2 = AMU #2
1 189 Frame Type
b3 = AMU #3
2 Fault type Enumerated Fault Code
b4 = AMU #4
00 = No Fault
For all other fault types the
01 = CMU/AMU +24VDC Channel Fault Status bits
02 = CMU +12VDC shall be set to 0.
03 = Conflict 7 Chn Red 8:1 Channel Color Status
04 = Serial Bus #1 8 Chn Red 16:9 Channel Color Status bits

shall be set to 1 for channels
05 = Serial Bus #3 9 Chn Red 24:17 that are sensed active. For
06 = ATC LFSA Flash (Type 62) 10 Chn Red 32:25 channel inputs that have been
remapped to a virtual channel
07 = ATC NFSA Flash (Type 11 Chn Yellow 8:1 (29-32), the Channel Fault
62) Status bits shall be set to 0.
12 Chn Yellow 16:9
08 = Diagnostic For virtual channel (29- 32)
13 Chn Yellow 24:17 inputs that have not been
09 = Multiple assigned to a physical output,
14 Chn Yellow 32:25 the Channel Fault Status bits
10 = Lack of Signal Input
15 Chn Green 8:1 shall be set to 0.
11 = Short Yellow Clearance
16 Chn Green 16:9
12 = Skipped Yellow
Clearance 17 Chn Green 24:17
13 = Yellow + Red Clearance 18 Chn Green 32:25
14 = Field Output Check 19 Chn Red 8:1 Channel Field Check Status
15 = Serial Mem Key Absent 20 Chn Red 16:9 Field Check Status bits shall
be set to 1 for channels that
16 = Serial Mem Key FCS Error 21 Chn Red 24:17 are sensed with field check
17 = Serial Mem Key Data 22 Chn Red 32:25 status. For channel inputs
Error that have been remapped to a
23 Chn Yellow 8:1 virtual channel (29-32), the
18 = Local Flash Field Check Status bits shall
24 Chn Yellow 16:9
19 = CB Trip be set to 0. For virtual
25 Chn Yellow 24:17 channel (29-32) inputs that
20 = CMU/AMU AC+ Raw Fail have not been assigned to a
26 Chn Yellow 32:25 physical output, the Field
21 = NRESET Active
27 Chn Green 8:1 Check Status bits shall be set
22:127 = Reserved to 0.
28 Chn Green 16:9
128:255 = Spare

Byte Contents Description Byte Contents Description

been remapped to a virtual
29 Chn Green 24:17 43 Chn 6 Red Voltage
channel (29-32), the Channel
30 Chn Green 32:25 44 Chn 7 Red Voltage Voltage value shall be set to 0.
31 Control Status #1 Control Status #1 45 Chn 8 Red Voltage For virtual channel (29-32)
inputs that have not been
b7 = Start-up Call (1=Exit 46 Chn 9 Red Voltage assigned to a physical output,
from Flash) the Channel Voltage value
47 Chn 10 Red
b6 = Flasher Output Fail (1 = Voltage shall be set to 0.
Fail)
48 Chn 11 Red
b5 = Rear Door (1=Open) Voltage
b4 = Front Door (1=Open) 49 Chn 12 Red
b3 = Main Contactor Coil Voltage
(1=Active) 50 Chn 13 Red
b2 = Main Contactor Voltage
Secondary (1=Active) 51 Chn 14 Red
b1 = FTR Coil Drive (1= Active) Voltage
b0 = Output Relay Transfer 52 Chn 15 Red

(1=Fault) Voltage
32 Control Status #2 Control Status #2 53 Chn 16 Red

Voltage
b7 = Reserved
54 Chn 17 Red
b6 = Reserved Voltage
b5 = Reserved 55 Chn 18 Red
b3 = Reserved 56 Chn 19 Red

Voltage
b2 = Reserved
57 Chn 20 Red
b0 = Configuration change 58 Chn 21 Red
This bit set to 1 indicates the Voltage
configuration programming 59 Chn 22 Red
has changed since the last Voltage
poll of message 65. It shall
also be set to 1 when the CMU 60 Chn 23 Red
is exiting flash (Start-up Call Voltage
bit changes from 0 to 1) and
61 Chn 24 Red
at CMU power-up.
Voltage
33 AC+ RAW Voltage CMU AC+ RAW Voltage
62 Chn 25 Red
34 Assy #1 AC+ Raw Assembly AC+ RAW Voltage Voltage
35 Assy #2 AC+ Raw 63 Chn 26 Red
Voltage
36 Assy #3 AC+ Raw
64 Chn 27 Red
37 Assy #4 AC+ Raw Voltage
38 Chn 1 Red Voltage Channel Input Voltages 65 Chn 28 Red
39 Chn 2 Red Voltage The Channel input voltages Voltage
shall be the most recent 66 Chn 29 Red
40 Chn 3 Red Voltage values reported from the Voltage
41 Chn 4 Red Voltage AMUs.
67 Chn 30 Red
42 Chn 5 Red Voltage For channel inputs that have
Voltage


68 Chn 31 Red 95 Chn 26 Yel
Voltage Voltage
69 Chn 32 Red 96 Chn 27 Yel
Voltage Voltage
70 Chn 1 Yel Voltage Channel Input Voltages (cont) 97 Chn 28 Yel
Voltage
71 Chn 2 Yel Voltage
98 Chn 29 Yel
72 Chn 3 Yel Voltage Voltage
73 Chn 4 Yel Voltage 99 Chn 30 Yel
75 Chn 6 Yel Voltage 100 Chn 31 Yel

Voltage
76 Chn 7 Yel Voltage
101 Chn 32 Yel
78 Chn 9 Yel Voltage 102 Chn 1 Grn Voltage Channel Input Voltages (cont)
79 Chn 10 Yel 103 Chn 2 Grn Voltage
Voltage
104 Chn 3 Grn Voltage
80 Chn 11 Yel
Voltage 105 Chn 4 Grn Voltage

Voltage
109 Chn 8 Grn Voltage
83 Chn 14 Yel
84 Chn 15 Yel 111 Chn 10 Grn
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage
Voltage Voltage


122 Chn 21 Grn 153 Channel 20
Voltage
154 Channel 21
123 Chn 22 Grn
Voltage 155 Channel 22

Voltage
159 Channel 26
126 Chn 25 Grn

Voltage 162 Binary Seconds CMU Time and Date
128 Chn 27 Grn 163 Binary Minutes
Voltage
164 Binary Hours
129 Chn 28 Grn (0:23)
Voltage
165 Binary Date
130 Chn 29 Grn
Voltage 166 Binary Month
131 Chn 30 Grn 167 Binary Year
Voltage
168 Voltage * 4 24VDC Supply Voltage
132 Chn 31 Grn
Voltage 169 Voltage * 8 12VDC Supply Voltage
133 Chn 32 Grn 170 Degrees F + 40 CMU Temperature

Voltage (Fahrenheit)
134 Channel 1 Scaled Channel Load Current 171 Channel 8:1 Channel Current Sense Status
The value reported shall be 172 Channel 16:9 Status bits shall be set to 1 for
135 Channel 2
the measured current in channels that are sensed
136 Channel 3 173 Channel 24:17 active. Status bits shall be set
Amps times 256 divided by
the Full Scale (FS) parameter. 174 Channel 28:25 to 0 for channels that have
137 Channel 4 the Current Sense monitor
138 Channel 5 For 1 primary turn, FS=10 function disabled.
(range is 0 to 10 Arms)
139 Channel 6 175 Assembly 2:1 Output Assy Flasher Status
For 2 primary turns, FS=5 (1=Fail)
140 Channel 7 (range is 0 to 5 Arms) 176 Assembly 4:3
b0 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL1-1
141 Channel 8 For 3 primary turns, FS= 3.3
(range is 0 to 3.3 Arms) b1 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL1-2
142 Channel 9
For 4 primary turns, FS=2.5 b2 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL2-1
143 Channel 10 (range is 0 to 2.5 Arms) b3 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL2-2
144 Channel 11
145 Channel 12
146 Channel 13
147 Channel 14 b7 = Assembly #2 (#4) FL2-2
148 Channel 15 177 Reserved
149 Channel 16 178 Reserved
150 Channel 17
151 Channel 18 20.2.3.23 Type 62 – Set FSA
152 Channel 19 The destination of this frame is the CMU.

Byt Contents Description Byt Contents Description

e e
1 62 Frame Message 1 192 Frame Message
2 FSA mode Set Failed State Action No Definition Exists As Of The Date Of This Writing
b0 = Set LFSA (L)
b1 = Set NFSA (N) 20.2.3.29 Type 65 – Get CMU Configuration
b2:7 = reserved The 2070 ATC shall request the serial memory key
programming using this message and validate that the CMU
LFSA – CMU Latched Failed State Action Permissive Program settings are equal or less permissive
NFSA – CMU Non-latched Fail State Action than the 2070 ATC programming, and that the AMU
Configuration programming is consistent with Output
Assembly SIU assignment. If the programming of the CMU is
20.2.3.24 Type 190 - Set FSA not proper, the 2070 ATC shall issue a Type 62 frame with the
L bit set causing a LFSA in the CMU. This check shall be
This frame is the ACK for a Type 62 Command Frame. performed at 2070 ATC initialization and when the Type 189
Byt Contents Description or Type 195 Control Status 2, Configuration Change bit is set
e to 1.
1 190 Frame Message Byt Contents Description

e
1 65 Frame Message
20.2.3.25 Type 63 – Poll Vari Length Raw
Inputs
20.2.3.30 Type 193 - CMU Configuration
Byt Contents Description This frame is the ACK for a Type 65 Command Frame.
e Byte Contents Description
1 63 Frame Message 1 193 Frame Message
No Definition Exists As Of The Date Of This Writing 2:513 Bytes 1 thru Serial Memory Key Contents
512
20.2.3.26Type 191 – Serial Memory Key Content
This frame is the ACK for a Type 63 Command Frame. Byt Contents Description
e
e 1 0x01 Serial Memory Key Version
1 191 Frame Message 2 Ch 1-9 1-2 Permissive Program for Ch 1-
32
No Definition Exists As Of The Date Of This Writing 3 Ch 1-17 1-10
A bit set to “1” programs a
4 Ch 1-25 1-18 channel pair to the
20.2.3.27 Type 64 – Command Vari Length 5 Ch 2-3 1-26 permissive state. In the event
Outputs the CMU has fewer than 32
6 Ch 2-11 2-4 channels, the bit positions
corresponding to the
7 Ch 2-19 2-12
Byt Contents Description nonexistent channels shall be
e 8 Ch 2-27 2-20 0.
1 64 Frame Message 9 Ch 3-6 2-28 Default programming shall be

0.
No Definition Exists As Of The Date Of This Writing 10 Ch 3-14 3-7
The Contents parameter
11 Ch 3-22 3-15 contains on channel pair per
20.2.3.28 Type 192 - 12 Ch 3-30 3-23 bit position. For example, the
contents of byte #5, “Ch 2-3,
This frame is the ACK for a Type 64 Command Frame. 13 Ch 4-10 3-31 …, 1-26”, is as follows:
Byt Contents Description 14 Ch 4-18 4-11 b0 = channel pair 1-26
e
15 Ch 4-26 4-19 b1 = channel pair 1-27


e e
16 Ch 5-7 4-27 b2 = channel pair 1-28 45 Ch 15-24
15-17
17 Ch 5-15 5-8 b3 = channel pair 1-29
46 Ch 15-32
18 Ch 5-23 5-16 b4 = channel pair 1-30
15-25
19 Ch 5-31 5-24 b5 = channel pair 1-31
47 Ch 16-24
20 Ch 6-13 5-32 b6 = channel pair 1-32 16-17
21 Ch 6-21 6-14 b7 = channel pair 2-3 48 Ch 16-32

16-25
22 Ch 6-29 6-22 If b1 is set, then channel 1 is
permissive with channel 27. 49 Ch 17-25
23 Ch 7-12 6-30 17-18
24 Ch 7-20 7-13 50 Ch 18-19
25 Ch 7-28 7-21 17-26
26 Ch 8-12 7-29 51 Ch 18-27

18-20
27 Ch 8-20 8-13
52 Ch 19-22
28 Ch 8-28 8-21 18-28
29 Ch 9-13 8-29 53 Ch 19-30
19-23
30 Ch 9-21 9-14
54 Ch 20-26
31 Ch 9-29 9-22 19-31
32 Ch 10-15 55 Ch 21-23
9-30 20-27
33 Ch 10-23 56 Ch 21-31
10-16 21-24
34 Ch 10-31 57 Ch 22-29
10-24 21-32
35 Ch 11-18 58 Ch 23-28
10-32 22-30
36 Ch 11-26 59 Ch 24-28
11-19 23-29
37 Ch 12-14 60 Ch 25-29
11-27 24-29
38 Ch 12-22 61 Ch 26-31
12-15 25-30
39 Ch 12-30 62 Ch 28-30
12-23 26-32
40 Ch 13-19 63 Ch 31-32
12-31 28-31
41 Ch 13-27 64 Ch 8:1 Lack of Signal Input Enable:
13-20
65 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the
42 Ch 14-17 Lack of Signal Input
13-28 66 Ch 24:17 monitoring function for that
43 Ch 14-25 67 Ch 32:25 channel. This bit shall be set
14-18 to “0” for any channel that
has an input mapped to a
44 Ch 15-16 virtual channel. In the event
14-26 the CMU has fewer than 32
channels, the bit positions


e e
corresponding to the remapped to a virtual
nonexistent channels shall be channel. In the event the CMU
0. Default programming shall has fewer than 32 channels,
be 1. the bit positions
68 Ch 8:1 Dark Channel Map #1 nonexistent channels shall be
69 Ch 16:9 Bit = 1; disables the Lack of 0. Default programming shall
Signal Input (LOSI) be 1.
70 Ch 24:17 monitoring function for the
92 Ch 8:1 GR Multiple Channel Enable:
71 Ch 32:25 channel.
Bit = 0; LOSI Enable
Green / Red Multiple Channel
programming determines 94 Ch 24:17 monitoring function for that
LOSI operation.
95 Ch 32:25 channel. This bit shall be set
Default programming shall be to “0” for any channel that
0. has had a Green or Red input
remapped to a virtual
72 Ch 8:1 Dark Channel Map #2 channel. In the event the CMU
73 Ch 16:9 See Dark Channel Map #1. has fewer than 32 channels,
the bit positions
74 Ch 24:17 corresponding to the
nonexistent channels shall be
75 Ch 32:25
0. Default programming shall
76 Ch 8:1 Dark Channel Map #3 be 1.
77 Ch 16:9 See Dark Channel Map #1. 96 Ch 8:1 Minimum Yellow Change
Enable:
78 Ch 24:17 97 Ch 16:9
A bit set to “1” enables the
79 Ch 32:25 98 Ch 24:17 Minimum Yellow Change
80 Ch 8:1 Dark Channel Map #4 99 Ch 32:25 monitoring function for that
channel. In the event the CMU
81 Ch 16:9 See Dark Channel Map #1. has fewer than 32 channels,
the bit positions
82 Ch 24:17
83 Ch 32:25 nonexistent channels shall be
0. Default programming shall
84 Ch 8:1 GY Multiple Channel Enable: be 1.
Green / Yellow Multiple
86 Ch 24:17 Channel monitoring function 100 Ch 8:1 Min Yellow Chg + Red Clr
87 Ch 32:25 for that channel. This bit shall Enable:
101 Ch 16:9
be set to “0” for any channel A bit set to “1” enables the
that has had a Green or 102 Ch 24:17 Minimum Yellow Change Plus
Yellow input remapped to a Red monitoring function for
virtual channel. In the event 103 Ch 32:25
that channel. In the event the
the CMU has fewer than 32 CMU has fewer than 32
channels, the bit positions channels, the bit positions
corresponding to the corresponding to the
nonexistent channels shall be nonexistent channels shall be
0. Default programming shall 0. Default programming shall
be 1. be 1.
88 Ch 8:1 YR Multiple Channel Enable:
89 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the 104 Ch 8:1 Yellow Input Disable:
Yellow / Red Multiple Channel
90 Ch 24:17 monitoring function for that 105 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” forces the
91 Ch 32:25 channel. This bit shall be set Yellow input to the Off state
to “0” for any channel that 106 Ch 24:17 for that channel. In the event
has had a Yellow or Red input 107 Ch 32:25 the CMU has fewer than 28


e e
physical channels, the bit
132 Channel 14
positions corresponding to
the nonexistent channels 133 Channel 15
shall be 0. Default
programming shall be 0. 134 Channel 16
108 Ch 8:1 Current Sense Enable: 135 Channel 17
109 Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the 136 Channel 18

Lack of Indication current 137 Channel 19
110 Ch 24:17 monitoring function for that
111 Ch 28:25 channel. This bit shall be set 138 Channel 20
to “0” for any channel that
has an input mapped to a 139 Channel 21
virtual channel. In the event 140 Channel 22
the CMU has fewer than 28
physical channels, the bit 141 Channel 23
positions corresponding to 142 Channel 24
the nonexistent channels
shall be 0. Default 143 Channel 25
programming shall be 1.
144 Channel 26
112 Ch 4:1 Current Sense Full Scale Parm
145 Channel 27
113 Ch 8:5 These bits shall define the
Full Scale (FS) parameter for 146 Channel 28
114 Ch12:9 the Current Sense circuit for 147 Red Ch 8:1 Field Output Check Enable:
115 Ch16:13 each channel. Default
programming shall be 00. 148 Red Ch 16:9 A bit set to “1” enables the
116 Ch20:17 Field Output Check
b1,b0 = channel n 149 Red Ch 24:17 monitoring function for that
117 Ch24:21 input. This bit shall be set to
b3,b2 = channel n+1 150 Red Ch 32:25
118 Ch28:25 “0” for any input that has
b5,b4 = channel n+2 151 Yel Ch 8:1 been remapped to a virtual
channel. In the event the CMU
b7,b6 = channel n+3 152 Yel Ch 16:9
has fewer than 32 channels,
00 = .25 Amps 153 Yel Ch 24:17 the bit positions
01 = .33 Amps 154 Yel Ch 32:25 nonexistent inputs shall be 0.
10 = .50 Amps 155 Grn 8:1 Default programming shall be
1.
11 = 1.0 Amps 156 Grn Ch 16:9
119 Channel 1 Channel Current Sense 157 Grn Ch 24:17
Threshold
120 Channel 2 158 Grn Ch 32:25
The threshold value for
121 Channel 3 channel current sense shall 159 6-15 seconds Minimum Flash Time
122 Channel 4 be programmed in percent (0 Values of 0 thru 5 shall result
to 95) of full scale (FS). in 6 seconds of minimum
123 Channel 5 Default programming shall be flash. Default programming
25 (25% of 1.0 Amp full scale shall be 6.
124 Channel 6
= 250 milliamperes).
125 Channel 7 160 +12 VDC +12VDC Power Supply
Enable Monitor Enable
126 Channel 8
Bit 0 set to 1 shall enable the
127 Channel 9 +12VDC Power Supply
128 Channel 10 monitor. Default
programming shall be 0x01.
129 Channel 11
161 Ch 29 Red Virtual Channel Assignment
130 Channel 12
162 Ch 29 Yellow Channels that have not been
131 Channel 13


e e
assigned shall be set to 0.
163 Ch 29 Green |
Default programming shall be
164 Ch 30 Red 0. 510
165 Ch 30 Yellow Bits 4:0 specify the physical 511 FCS lsb 16 bit Check Value
channel number (1 to 28)
166 Ch 30 Green 512 FCS msb FCS Polynomial calculation of
Bits 6:5 specify the physical bytes #1 through #510.
167 Ch 31 Red input
168 Ch 31 Yellow 01 = Red
Type 66 – Time And Date
169 Ch 31 Green 10 = Yellow
This frame shall be transmitted from the 2070 ATC once
170 Ch 32 Red 11 = Green every second. The destination address shall be the All Station
Address of 255 (0xFF). No response from secondary devices is
171 Ch 32 Yellow Bit 7 = reserved
allowed to the All Station Address. The transmission of this
172 Ch 32 Green frame shall begin within + 100 milliseconds of the CU real
time contained within the frame.
173 AMU Position AMU Configuration
1 This will ensure that time clocks in all devices in the cabinet
The number of load switch
174 AMU Position positions in each output have the same time and date. It could also provide basic time
2 Assembly position shall be keeping capability to devices without the need for hardware
programmed in each byte. RTC and super-cap if appropriate.
175 AMU Position CMU channel numbers shall
3 Byte Contents Description
be assigned sequentially
176 AMU Position starting with AMU position 66 Frame Type
4 #1. Default programming
Binary Time and Date
shall be 14,0,0,0.
Month
0: Position Not Used
Binary Day
6: Six Pack Output Assembly
Binary Year
14: Fourteen Pack Output
Assembly Binary Hour
The 14 Pack is valid only for Binary

position #1 (#1=14, #2=0) and Minute
#3 (#3=14, #4=0). All other Binary
values are reserved. Second
177 ASCII String Monitor ID Binary
| A packed 40 character ID shall Tenth Sec
be stored in ASCII format.
216 Allowable characters are 020h
20.2.3.32 Type 67 - Switch Pack Drivers
through 07Eh. If less than 40
characters are used, the The format of this command frame is identical to Message 61
unused locations shall be set but requests a short status response from the CMU. This
to 00h. Default programming frame may be used as an alternate to Message 61. The
shall be 00h. destination of this frame is the CMU. The Channel numbers
217 ASCII String User ID in the Contents column below refer to the channel numbers
of the CMU. The ATC shall include a definition, via program
| A packed 40 character ID shall entry, of the CMU Channel to ATC signal driver group
be stored in ASCII format. utilization.
256 Allowable characters are 020h
through 07Eh. If less than 40 The Dark Channel Map Select bits shall select a
characters are used, the preprogrammed mask in the CMU serial memory key that
unused locations shall be set disables Lack of Signal Input monitoring for the selected
to 00h. Default programming channels.
shall be 00h. Byt Contents Description
257 0x00 Reserved for Future Use. e
1 67 Frame Type

Byt Contents Description Byte Contents Description

e
02 = CMU +12VDC
2 Chn 8:1 Red Load Switch Status
03 = Conflict
3 Chn 16:9 Red A bit set to 1 indicates the Load
04 = Serial Bus #1
Switch output is set On.
4 Chn 24:17 Red
05 = Serial Bus #3
5 Chn 28:25 Red
06 = ATC LFSA Flash (Type 62)
6 Chn 8:1 Yellow 07 = ATC NFSA Flash (Type 62)
7 Chn 16:9 08 = Diagnostic
Yellow
09 = Multiple
8 Chn 24:17
Yellow 10 = Lack of Signal Input
9 Chn 28:25 11 = Short Yellow Clearance

Yellow 12 = Skipped Yellow Clearance
10 Chn 8:1 Green 13 = Yellow + Red Clearance
11 Chn 16:9 Green 14 = Field Output Check
12 Chn 24:17 15 = Serial Memory Key absent
Green
16 = Serial Memory Key FCS
13 Chn 28:25 error
Green
17 = Serial Memory Key Data
14 Map Select Dark Channel Map Select error
Bit 1 and bit 0 shall select one of 18 = Local Flash
four Dark Channel Maps
programmed in the serial 19 = CB Trip
memory key that disables Lack 20 = CMU/AMU AC+ RAW Fail
of Signal Input monitoring for a
selected channel. Bits 2 thru 7 21 = NRESET Active
are reserved. 22:127 = Reserved
00 = Mask #1 128:255 = Spare
01 = Mask #2 Chn Fault 8:1 Channel Fault Status
10 = Mask #3 Channel Fault Status bits shall
Chn Fault 16:9
11 = Mask #4 be set to 1 for channels that
Chn Fault were detected in fault for fault
24:17 types 03, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, and
20.2.3.33 Type 195 – CMU Short Status Chn Fault 14.
If the CMU is in FSA (byte #2, Fault Type not equal to 0), then 32:25 For fault type 01, 05, and 20 a
the Channel Color Status bytes shall contain an exact image bit shall be set in Channel Fault
of the signals that were applied to the CMU at the point in Status 8:1 for each enabled AMU
time of the detection of the failure. Control Status 1, Control that failed. Bit 0 shall be set if
Status 2, and Output Assembly Flasher Status shall always the CMU detected a failure:
reflect current status.
b0 = CMU
If a channel block is not used (AMU not present) the Channel
b1 = AMU #1
Fault Status bits and Channel Color Status bits for that block
shall be set to 0. b2 = AMU #2
Byte Contents Description b3 = AMU #3
195 Frame Type b4 = AMU #4
Fault Type Enumerated fault code For all other fault types the
Channel Fault Status bits shall
00 = No Fault be set to 0.
01 = CMU/AMU +24VDC


(Start-up Call bit changes from 0
Chn Red 8:1 Channel Color Status
to 1) and at CMU power-up.
Chn Red 16:9 Channel Color Status bits shall
Assembly 2:1 Output Assembly Flasher Status
be set to 1 for channels that are
Chn Red 24:17 (1=Fail)
sensed active. For channel Assembly 4:3
Chn Red 32:25 inputs that have been remapped b0 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL1-1
to a virtual channel (29-32), the
Chn Yellow 8:1 Channel Fault Status bits shall b1 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL1-2
be set to 0. For virtual channel b2 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL2-1
Chn Yellow
(29-32) inputs that have not
16:9 b3 = Assembly #1 (#3) FL2-2
been assigned to a physical
Chn Yellow output, the Channel Fault Status b4 = Assembly #2 (#4) FL1-1
24:17 bits shall be set to 0.
Chn Yellow
32:25 b6 = Assembly #2 (#4) FL2-1
Chn Green 8:1 b7 = Assembly #2 (#4) FL2-2
Chn Green 16:9 Reserved
Chn Green Reserved

24:17
Chn Green
32:25
Control Status Control Status #1
#1
b7 = Start-up Call (1=Exit from
Flash)
b6 = Flasher Output Fail (1 =
Fail)
b5 = Rear Door (1=Open)
b4 = Front Door (1=Open)
b3 = MC Coil (1=Active)
b2 = MC Secondary (1=Active)
b1 = FTR Coil Drive (1= Active)
b0 = Output Relay Transfer
(1=Fault)
Control Status Control Status #2
#2
b7 = Reserved
b6 = Reserved
b5 = Reserved
b4 = Reserved
b3 = Reserved
b2 = Reserved
b1 = Reserved
b0 = Configuration Change
This bit set to 1 indicates the
configuration programming has
changed since the last poll of
message 65. It shall be set to 1
when the CMU is exiting flash

2070 ATC in CBD v1 CABINET Page 345
21 CBD v1 CABINET
An CBD v1 Cabinet is a serially interconnected cabinet for use
with the 2070 ATC. 21.1.3 Inputs
A CBD v1 Cabinet Input Assembly provides six positions for
21.1 CBD v1 CABINET standard dual channel detector modules or isolator modules
plus one Eagle 4 circuit Opto Isolator module.
COMPONENTS Input Slot Description
1 1F Vehicle Detector 1
2 1W Vehicle Detector 2
The CBD v1 Cabinet Serial Bus # 1 provides the cabinet 3 2F Vehicle Detector 3
control and communication path between the 2070 ATC, CMU
Monitor Unit and SIU (Serial Interface) Units in the Input & 4 2W Vehicle Detector 4
Output Assembly.
12 6W Vehicle Detector12
13 7 Manual Control Enable
14 7 Interval Advance
15 7 Stop Time
16 7 Local Flash Status
The opto isolators in the CBD Input Assembly SIU provides
the following inputs:
21.1.1 Monitoring OPTO FUNCTION
The CBD Cabinet Monitor Unit utilizes a serial memory device 1 Pedestrian Detector 2
to store all the configuration parameters for the monitor
system and is completely removable and interchangeable. 2 Pedestrian Detector 4
The EDI MonitorKey CMU Data Key Programming Tool 3 Pedestrian Detector 6
provides the hardware programming interface between a
4 Pedestrian Detector 8
Personal Computer (PC) and the serial memory device. This
tool connects to a serial port of the PC and uses software to
read, write, and verify the contents of the serial memory
device. Software Wizards provide simplified initial setup of 21.2 CBD v1 CABINET PROTOCOL
the parameter database as well as check for data consistency
errors.
21.1.2 Outputs In an CBD v1 Cabinet, the Controller Unit (CU) utilizes Serial
Bus 1 (SB1) to communicate to devices within the cabinet.
A CBD v1 Cabinet Output Assembly provides the equivalent to These devices include a Serial Interface Unit (SIU) and a
12 Load Switch positions using six Eagle 6-circuit load Conflict Monitor Unit (CMU).
modules. The equivalent Load Switch ## and matching
Channel ## is as noted above. Each device attached to SB1 is responsible for transmitting

Page 346 2070 ATC in CBD v1 CABINET
Command Frames and frames transmitted by devices within

the cabinet are referred to as Response Frames. Command Frames and Frequency of
Transmission
21.2.1 COMMAND FRAMES Type Frequency Description
The transmission of SB1 Command Frames is controlled by

the CU. The CU transmits all frame types within a one second
window, with the window repeating itself in a cyclical manner
every second that the CU is operating.
Command Frames
Type Dest. Address. Function
21.2.1.2 Command Frame Scheduling
they are transmitted in the following order in each of the one
second windows:
1 ALL Date And Time
Broadcast
21.2.1.1 Command Frame Timing

Each frame type has a defined frequency of transmission. If
the command frames are required to be transmitted, as
determined by CU programming, then the frequency of 2 Repeat xx to yy from window 1
transmission is as shown below. 3 Repeat xx to yy from window 1
Command Frames and Frequency of 4 Repeat xx to yy from window 1
Transmission
Type Frequency Description

2070 ATC in CBD v1 CABINET Page 347
21.2.2 RESPONSE FRAMES

Response frames are only transmitted as a result of receiving
a command frame.
Response Frames
Type Source Address Function
.

WARRANTY Page 349
22 INSTALLATION
and edge connectors which lead to static sensitive
The following paragraphs contain information for unpacking,
components!!)
inspecting, installing, re-packing, and testing a Controller
Unit (CU). The complete controller assembly is packed for To insure that your Siemens ITS equipment remains as static
shipment in heavy-duty containers. free as the day you received it, follow these simple
procedures:
A. MINIMIZE HANDLING OF ALL MODULES AND
22.1 UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS SEMICONDUCTORS. WHEN THEY ARE HANDLED, MAKE
SURE IT IS ONLY AT A STATIC-FREE WORK STATION AND
PERSONNEL ARE PROPERLY GROUNDED.
B. KEEP PARTS AND MODULES IN THEIR ORIGINAL
The controller assembly should be unpacked in accordance CONTAINERS UNTIL YOU ARE READY TO USE THEM.
with the following instructions:
C. WEAR A WRIST GROUNDING DEVICE AND MAKE SURE IT IS
A. Carefully inspect the container for damage before IN CONTACT WITH THE SKIN; IT IS USELESS IF NOT IN
opening. If the container appears damaged, it should be CONTACT WITH THE SKIN AND GROUND. WEAR A WRIST
opened in the presence of the carrier. STRAP AT YOUR WORK STATION AS WELL AS WHEN IN A
CABINET.
B. Observe the markings on the containers and place each
container on a flat surface with the top up, preparatory to D. KEEP ALL COMMON PLASTICS OUT OF YOUR STATIC-FREE
unpacking. WORK AREAS, I.E., STYROFOAM CUPS, POTATO CHIP
BAGS, CLEAR, WHITE OR NON ANTI-STATIC CUSHIONING
C. Cut strapping and remove container. AND WRAPS, ETC. THESE ITEMS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
D. Remove the contents of each box and check against the STATIC- SENSITIVE DEVICES.
packing list attached to the shipment. E. IF YOU ARE RETURNING FAULTY MODULES FOR REPAIR,
E. Inspect all items for shipping damage when it is MAKE SURE THEY ARE INSIDE ANTI-STATIC BAGS. THIS
unpacked. Check for dents, scratches, and bent parts. If WILL PREVENT ANY ADDITIONAL DAMAGE.
the items are damaged, notify the carrier immediately.
F. After unpacking, retain the shipping container and
packing material for possible use if reshipment of the 22.3 PHYSICAL INSPECTION
items becomes necessary. The containers and packing
material have been specifically designed for protection of
the items during normal shipment.
Directly following unpacking and before installation, inspect
each controller assembly item to detect any damage which
22.2 HANDLING might have occurred during transit. A check of the following
items is suggested:
A. Tighten any loose screws or locknuts on mechanical
assemblies which might have worked loose.
Normal precautions for lifting and transporting electronic B. Examine all controls, indicators, and enclosure panels for
signaling equipment should be observed when handling the evidence of jamming and/or mechanical damage.
system units.
C. Remove cover and inspect the circuit board assemblies for
ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE damage.
MOS devices are NOT THE ONLY electronic components that In event of equipment damage, contact the agent of the
can be damaged by static electricity! company performing shipment. Inform the Siemens ITS
Technology trends toward greater complexity, increased Technical Service of the situation and obtain instructions
density, and thinner dielectrics result in parts becoming before proceeding further with system installation.
more sensitive to Electro-Static Discharge damage. Some
components can be destroyed or damaged by as little as 20
volts of static electricity. (It requires more than 3500 volts
before you can feel it.) Electro-Static Discharge damage can
happen anywhere, while trading modules in the field or
working on equipment in the shop. (Be aware: You can inflict
Electro-Static Discharge damage by simply touching runners

Page 350 WARRANTY
B. Use a qualified carrier to ship the item to its destination.

22.4 INSTALLATION
The CU has been standardized with the requirements of the

traffic control industry. The controls permit considerable
latitude for timing and feature application. During the setup
of an intersection, it is imperative that adequate precautions
be taken to prevent settings and procedures which can affect
the safety of the intersection.
The CU should be installed in a location that allows easy
access to the front of the CU. The CU should have sufficient
room so that it can be easily removed if required. Care should
be taken to prevent blocking the cooling vents on the back of
the CU.
Placing the CU in control of the intersection is dependent
upon the actual terminal facilities configuration and local
law. The procedure which follows generally applies.
A. Obtain the services of the police for aid in intersection
safety. Check that MAIN POWER circuit breaker is Off, the
FLASH/NORMAL switch is in the Flash position.
B. Place the MAIN POWER circuit breaker in the On position
when traffic is clear of the intersection. Observe that the
CU initialization program is correct. Check that the flash
program is correct.
C. Observe vehicle detector unit indicator lamps for
indications that vehicle calls are received as vehicles cross
the sensors. Observe that vehicle and pedestrian calls are
placed in all phases.
D. Permit the CU to operate for several minutes while
checking that all controller times and function controls
are properly set up and that the CU is responding to calls
for service and timing correctly.
E. When satisfied that the CU is functioning properly, check
traffic for a safe point to place the intersection under
automatic control and place the FLASH/NORMAL switch in
the Normal position.
22.4.1 Battery
Removing the battery (when utilized) when the unit or board
is not being used will extend the useful life of the battery.
Neglecting to install the battery (when utilized) will cause a
low battery condition to be displayed.
22.5 RESHIPMENT
The controller assembly items should be prepared for

reshipment by performing the following instructions:
A. Pack the item in the original Siemens ITS shipping
container.

WARRANTY Page 351
complete fulfillment of all the liabilities of SIEMENS ITS for
23 WARRANTY defective equipment, materials, or services, whether the

claims by Buyer are based in contract, in tort (including
negligence or strict liability), or otherwise.
23.1 WARRANTIES: 23.3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
EQUIPMENT: SIEMENS ITS warrants that this equipment Neither SIEMENS ITS not its sub-contractors or suppliers of
manufactured by SIEMENS ITS will be free of defects in any tier will be liable to Buyer for any special, indirect,
material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from liquidated, incidental or consequential damage or loss or for
date of receipt by buyer. Should any failure to conform to this damage or loss of property or equipment not furnished under
warranty appear within the warranty period SIEMENS ITS, a purchase order resulting therefrom on which the liability is
upon prompt written notification thereof, will, at its option, based, or claims of Buyer's customers. The remedies set forth
repair or replace any part(s) which, upon examination, by herein are exclusive and for each item of equipment,
SIEMENS ITS is found to be defective, warranty inspections material, or services, the total cumulative liability of SIEMENS
and repairs will be performed at the SIEMENS ITS ITS under any purchase order accepted by SIEMENS ITS or
manufacturing facilities after receipt of the item from Buyer. anything done in connection therewith, will be limited to the
No equipment shall be returned during the warranty period price of the item of equipment, material or services. In all
without our prior written consent, which consent will not be cases where Buyer's claim, whether based in contract, in tort
unreasonably withheld. (including negligence and strict liability), under any
SERVICES: SIEMENS ITS warrants that the recommendations, warranty, or otherwise, arises out of or in connection with the
guidance, and performance of its personnel will reflect sale, delivery, or use of defective equipment, material, or
competent, professional knowledge and judgment. In the services supplied hereunder or damage resulting therefrom,
event any portion of the services furnished fails to comply Buyer's exclusive remedies and SIEMENS ITS sole liability
with this warranty obligation and SIEMENS ITS is so notified shall be limited to those specifically outlined in the warranty
in writing prior to warranty expiration, SIEMENS ITS will provision.
promptly re-perform such portion of the service without The provisions of this section, Limitation of Liability, shall
additional compensation from Buyer. also protect SIEMENS ITS suppliers and sub-contractors and
WARRANTY CONDITIONS: These warranties are conditioned shall apply, to the full extent permitted by law and regardless
upon the proper receipt, handling, storage, maintenance, and of fault and shall survive either termination, cancellation or
installation of Equipment furnished or serviced hereunder in expiration of the order.
a safe and prudent manner and in accordance with any The provisions of this section, Limitation of Liability, shall
SIEMENS ITS recommendation, and upon such Equipment or apply notwithstanding any other provision of the purchase
material having been operated and maintained in a normal order.
and proper manner under competent supervision and not
having been subjected to accident, alteration, abuse, or The equipment and material are intended for use only for the
misuse. All transportation charges associated with repairing purpose for which they were expressly provided. With respect
or replacing Equipment at an SIEMENS ITS designated repair to any other use, SIEMENS ITS makes no representation or
facility shall be Buyer's responsibility. warranty and assumes no liability of any kind, whether in
contract or tort (including negligence and strict liability).
23.2 LIMITATIONS OF
23.4 WARRANTY QUESTIONS AND
WARRANTIES
ANSWERS
AND REMEDIES:
1. QUESTION -- What is not covered in the SIEMENS ITS

WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER warranty?
WARRANTIES, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS, OR IMPLIED,
ANSWER -- Equipment failures due to acts of God
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL WARRANTIES
including damage by flood, vehicles, lightning strikes,
ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OR TRADE.
etc., or errors or damage in installation, or improperly
Remedies provided above are Buyer's sole remedies for any
maintained equipment. Damage during transportation is
failure by SIEMENS ITS to comply with its warranty
not a failure within warranty; the purchaser recourse is
obligations. Correction of non-conformities in the manner
against the carrier.
and for the period of time provided herein shall constitute

Page 352 WARRANTY
2. QUESTION -- Must equipment always be returned to ANSWER -- Call or write SIEMENS ITS -- Supervisor,
Austin? Technical Service Department.
ANSWER -- At SIEMENS ITS option, such repairs may be
made by SIEMENS ITS personnel in the field.
3. QUESTION -- What do I do in an emergency?
ANSWER -- Call SIEMENS ITS Technical Service
Department before making any expenditure of funds. At
SIEMENS ITS option and with OUR prior approval, a third
party may be authorized to make such repairs. At the time
of your call, the details of the work to be done, charges
and billing will be determined.
4. QUESTION -- May I rent or supply equipment for use while
SIEMENS ITS equipment is under repair and bill SIEMENS
ITS?
ANSWER -- No. Backup equipment is the purchaser's
responsibility.
5. QUESTION -- May I make some repairs without prior
authorization and bill later?
ANSWER -- No, good business practice, just as you apply in
your own business, dictates that NO UNAUTHORIZED
REPAIRS WILL BE PAID by SIEMENS ITS.
6. QUESTION -- What if it is found that the cause of a failure
for which SIEMENS ITS has made a Field Service trip was
due to equipment not supplied by SIEMENS ITS?
ANSWER -- Those service calls will be billed to you.
7. QUESTION -- When I have equipment under warranty
repaired, or replaced, what is my remaining warranty?
ANSWER -- Equipment will retain its warranted status,
until the end of the original warranty period given when
the equipment was purchased. (See Question 2)
8. QUESTION -- If I return equipment and it is found not to
be defective, what will happen?
ANSWER -- The cost of testing will be billed to you in such
cases.
9. QUESTION -- How is the repair of equipment out of
warranty handled?
ANSWER -- After the equipment is received from you,
prepaid, it will be restored to the original design
specifications and returned. You will be billed for this
service and granted a ninety day warranty from the date
of shipment of the repaired equipment.
10. QUESTION -- Will my returned equipment be the most up-
to-date modification?
ANSWER -- Advances in the state of the art from time to
time in worthwhile improvements in performance and
reliability. When such is possible, you will be contacted by
SIEMENS ITS Technical Service Department and given the
option to approve such a modification. Charges for the
modification and the effect on the balance of your
equipment will be discussed in full.
11. QUESTION -- Whom do I contact for more information?

WARRANTY Page 353

8004 Cameron Road
Austin TX 78754
Ph 512.837.8310
Fax 512.837.0196
www.itssiemens.com

SIEMENS M60 SEPAC Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIEMENS M60 SEPAC Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SEPAC

Local Controller Software

PIM177 – SEPAC User Manual v3.35

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

Copyright 2009 by Siemens

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

2.2.8.2.3 CMU Long Status Msg 189 In.................................................................................................................... 15

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

2.4.2 Vehicle Times...................................................................................................................................................... 28

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

2.6.4.2 Phase Time + Mode Data ................................................................................................................................. 53

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

2.9.4 Detector Diagnostics Menu ................................................................................................................................. 68

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

3.3.1 Inputs Per Ring ................................................................................................................................................... 82

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

3.8.11 Maximum Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 100

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

3.10.6 Preempt Indications.......................................................................................................................................... 111

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

4.3.1 Power Failure ...................................................................................................................................................... 130

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

11.4.1 Sequence Change:............................................................................................................................................. 156

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

12.4.2.2.5 ACA Status Byte 5 ................................................................................................................................... 185

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

15.1.3.1 Dimensions ................................................................................................................................................... 240

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

16.3 2070-8 FIELD I/O............................................................................................................................................................ 259

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

19.3.9 Type 18 - TF BIUs Output Transfer .................................................................................................................... 296

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

20.1.2.5 Output Form 5 (6-0-0-0) ............................................................................................................................... 320

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

20.2.3.24 Type 190 - Set FSA....................................................................................................................................... 337

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

n) Basic Traffic nn) Lock / Non-Lock Memory

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

printout is in a format easily understood by a trained traffic

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

The CU prevents the alteration of keypad set unit variables

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

2.1.1 Front Panel Summary

2.1.2 Front Panel Entry

2.1.3 Front Panel Timeout

2.1.4 Main Menu

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

Figure 1 EPAC300 MENU STRUCTURE

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

PRESS "1" FROM RING TIMERS MENU

2.2 ACTIVE STATUS EPAC

OA G **: Overlap A Trailing Green |

GAP OUT: Gapped Out Termination

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

CYC (Cycle Length): LINE 6 - CURRENT / LAST CYCLE STATUS

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual

1. Day of Week - The current day of the week is displayed in

SEPAC Actuated Signal Controller User Manual